This is a modern-English version of The Wonder Book of Knowledge: The Marvels of Modern Industry and Invention, the Interesting Stories of Common Things, the Mysterious Processes of Nature Simply Explained, originally written by unknown author(s). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Please see Transcriber’s Notes at the end of this document.

Please see Transcriber’s Notes at the end of this document.


Book cover

Colour layers

HOW COLOR PRINTING IS DONE

HOW COLOR PRINTING WORKS

A plate is made for each of the three printing colors, yellow, red and blue, as explained on page 382. First, yellow is printed, then red on the yellow, and last, blue on the yellow and red combination. Combinations of these three colors in various proportions produce all the other tints which appear in the original subject. Above are shown the separate plates and also the combined result of all three. Extreme care is necessary to make all the plates register exactly together.

A plate is created for each of the three printing colors: yellow, red, and blue, as explained on page 382. First, yellow is printed, then red is added on top of the yellow, and finally, blue is printed over the combination of yellow and red. Mixing these three colors in different amounts produces all the other shades that appear in the original image. Above, you can see the individual plates as well as the combined outcome of all three. It’s crucial to ensure that all the plates line up perfectly.


THE WONDER BOOK
OF KNOWLEDGE

THE MARVELS OF MODERN INDUSTRY AND INVENTION
THE INTERESTING STORIES OF COMMON THINGS
THE MYSTERIOUS PROCESSES OF NATURE
SIMPLY EXPLAINED

THE WONDERS OF MODERN INDUSTRY AND INVENTION
THE FASCINATING STORIES BEHIND COMMON OBJECTS
THE ENIGMATIC PROCESSES OF NATURE
EASILY EXPLAINED

COMPILED AND EDITED
BY
HENRY CHASE HILL
WITH THE CO-OPERATION OF EXPERTS
REPRESENTING EACH INDUSTRY

COMPILED AND EDITED
BY
HENRY CHASE HILL
WITH THE SUPPORT OF EXPERTS
FROM EACH INDUSTRY


Illustrated with
780 Photographs and Drawings

Illustrated with
780 Photos and Drawings


PHILADELPHIA
THE JOHN C. WINSTON COMPANY
PUBLISHERS

PHILADELPHIA
THE JOHN C. WINSTON COMPANY
PUBLISHERS

Copyright, 1921
By L. T. MYERS
Copyright, 1917-19

Copyright, 1921
By L.T. Myers
Copyright, 1917-19


Preface

This book is presented to those, both young and old, who wish to have a non-technical account of the history, evolution and production of some of the every-day wonders of the modern industrial age; coupled with occasional glimpses of the wonderful object-lessons afforded by nature in her constructive activities in the animal, vegetable and mineral kingdoms; and simple, understandable answers to the myriad puzzling questions arising daily in the minds of those for whom the fascination of the “Why” and “How” is always engrossing.

This book is for everyone, young and old, who wants an easy-to-understand overview of the history, development, and manufacturing of some everyday wonders of the modern industrial age. It also includes occasional insights into the amazing lessons nature teaches us through her creations in the animal, plant, and mineral worlds, along with clear and simple answers to the countless puzzling questions that arise every day for those who are captivated by the “Why” and “How.”

Although not intended primarily as a child’s book, the interest-compelling pictures and clear, illuminating answers to the constant avalanche of questions suggested by the growing mind, unite in making far happier children in the home and brighter children at school. Parents and teachers will also recognize the opportunity to watch for subjects by which the child’s interest appears to be more than ordinarily attracted, and, in so doing, will be enabled to guide the newly-formed tendencies into the proper channels. With the greatest thinkers of the age advocating vocational training, and leading educators everywhere pointing out that the foundation of a practical education for life must be laid in the home, thoughtful parents will not overlook the fact that a book which both entertains and instructs is of supreme importance in the equipment of their children.

Although it wasn't originally meant to be a children's book, the engaging pictures and clear, informative answers to the endless questions from curious minds help create happier kids at home and smarter kids at school. Parents and teachers will notice opportunities to observe topics that particularly capture a child's interest, allowing them to guide these new interests in productive directions. With the leading thinkers of our time promoting vocational training and educators everywhere emphasizing that a solid foundation for a practical education must begin at home, considerate parents won’t miss the importance of a book that entertains and educates as essential for equipping their children.

In the preparation of this book its function has been considered as that of gathering up some of the multitudinous bits of information of interest, both to the inquiring child and the older reader, and putting them in shape to be digested by the ordinary searcher after knowledge. The book is intended, not for a few technical specialists, but for the larger number of men, women and children who are not interested in exhaustive treatises, but who are seeking to gain some fair idea about the numberless every-day subjects that arise in ordinary conversation, or that they meet with in reading and about which they desire some definite and satisfactory information.

In preparing this book, the goal has been to collect various interesting bits of information for both curious kids and older readers, and present them in a way that's easy for the average knowledge seeker to understand. This book is aimed not at a few technical experts, but at the larger audience of men, women, and children who aren’t looking for in-depth studies. Instead, they want to get a good grasp of the countless everyday topics that come up in regular conversation or that they encounter while reading, and they are looking for clear and satisfying answers about those topics.

Most of us realize that we live in a world of wonders and we recognize progress in industries with which we come in personal contact, but the daily routine of our lives is ordinarily so restricted by circumstances that many of us fail to follow works which do not come within our own experience or see beyond the horizon of our own specific paths.

Most of us understand that we live in a world full of wonders, and we see progress in the industries we interact with, but our daily routines are usually so limited by circumstances that many of us don’t keep up with developments outside our own experiences or look beyond the narrow paths we follow.

The workman who tends the vulcanizer in the rubber factory has come to take his work as a matter of course; the man who assembles a watch, or a camera, is not apt to appreciate the fact that there have been marvelous developments in his line of manufacturing; the operator of a shoe machine, or of an elevator, does not see anything startling or absorbing in the work—and so we find it almost throughout the entire list of industries.

The worker who operates the vulcanizer in the rubber factory has come to see his job as routine; the person who puts together a watch or a camera probably doesn't realize how amazing the advancements in his field have been; the operator of a shoe machine or an elevator doesn't find anything surprising or captivating in his work—and this attitude is common in almost every industry.

The tendency of the seemingly almost imperceptible movement marking onward development in the work that is familiar is to dull the mind toward opportunities for[2] improvement in the accustomed task. With the exception of the man who is at times impressed with the remarkable advances made in some strikingly spectacular industry, because such knowledge comes to him suddenly, the average workman is often too much inclined to regard himself as a machine, and performs his duties more or less automatically, without attempting to exercise imagination or those powers of adaptation upon which all progress has been builded.

The tendency of the almost unnoticeable progress in familiar work can make people less aware of opportunities for [2] improvement in routine tasks. Except for the person who occasionally notices the significant advancements in some eye-catching industry—since that knowledge hits him unexpectedly—the average worker often views himself as a machine, doing his job mostly on autopilot, without trying to use his imagination or the skills of adaptation that drive all progress.

A single volume is of necessity too limited a space for anything approximating a complete record of the vast progress which has been made in American Industry. Consequently it has only been possible to select the more characteristic features of the twentieth century and point out the strides by which some of the prominent industries have advanced to their present proportions. If the hitherto undisputed maxim that “the more the individual knows the more he is worth to himself and his associates” still prevails, the chronicling of the developments in some fields should stimulate thought and experiment toward the adaptation of similar methods in others. It is to that end that authorities in each of the industries presented have co-operated in the compilation of this interesting and instructive volume.

A single volume is inevitably too limited to provide a complete account of the significant progress made in American Industry. Therefore, it's only possible to highlight the most characteristic aspects of the twentieth century and showcase how some major industries have developed into their current size. If the long-held belief that “the more a person knows, the more valuable they are to themselves and their peers” still holds true, the documentation of advancements in certain areas should encourage new ideas and experimentation for applying similar methods in others. It is with this goal in mind that experts from each featured industry have collaborated to create this engaging and informative volume.

The Editor.

The Editor.


Table of Contents

PAGE
THE STORY OF THE SUBMARINE 9
Origin of Submarine Navigation, 9. The American Types, 10. Twentieth Century Submarines, 11. Engine Power, 12. The Periscope, 13. Voyage of the “Deutschland,” 14. Submarine Dredging, 15.
 
THE STORY OF THE PANAMA CANAL 17
The United States to the Rescue, 17. The Canal and the Navy, 20. The Great Canal, 20. The Hydroelectric Station, 20. Gigantic Obstacles, 30. Gatun Dam, 33. Meeting all Emergencies, 33. A Battle Won, 36.
What is a Geyser? 40. What Kind of Dogs are Prairie-Dogs? 42. What is Spontaneous Combustion? 42.
 
THE STORY IN THE TALKING MACHINE 43
The Early Machines, 43. Invention of the Spring Motor, 47. Change from Cylinder to Disc, 47. Making the Record, 49.
What are Petrified Forests? 49. What Animals are the Best Architects? 51.
 
THE STORY OF THE MOTORCYCLE 52
Austin’s Steam Velocipede, 52. Motor-paced Racing, 55. First Practical Machine, 54. Modern Refinements, 57. Side Cars and Commercial Bodies, 58.
How is the Weather Man Able to Predict Tomorrow’s Weather? 58. How does a Siren Fog Horn Blow? 60.
 
THE STORY IN A WATCH 61
The Standard of Time, 61. Candles as Time-Keepers, 63. Galileo’s Pendulum, 63. Balance Wheel as a Pendulum, 65. The Time Train, 65. How a Watch Works, 67. What Causes Variation in Watches, 71.
How does a Monorail Gyroscope Railway Operate? 72. Why are Finger-prints used for Identification? 74.
 
THE STORY IN A RIFLE 75
The Earliest Hunters, 75. The Use of Slings, 77. A Fortunate Accident; 77. As to Arrows, 81. A Shooting Machine, 81. And Now for Chemistry, 81. Playing with Fire, 83. The Coming of the Matchlock, 83. Caps and Breech-Loaders, 85. From Henry VIII to Cartridges, 85. The Beginning of Precision in Mechanics, 87. Making Barrels, 92. Taking off 21000 of an Inch, 92. The Making of Ammunition Today, 94. Handling Deadly Explosives, 96. Extreme Precautions, 96.
How does an Artesian Well Keep up its Supply of Water? 96. Where do Dates come from? 97.
 
THE STORY OF RUBBER 98
How was Rubber First Used? 98. What is a Rubber Camp Like? 100. How is Rubber Gathered by the Natives? 103. How is Rubber Smoked? 104. How was Vulcanizing Discovered? 105. How did Rubber Growing Spread to Other Places? 108. How is Rubber Cured on Modern Plantations? 110. How is Crude Rubber Received Here? 112. How is Rubber Prepared for Use? 112. How are Rubber Shoes Made? 116. How are Automobile Tires Made? 119.
How did the Expression “Before you can say Jack Robinson” Originate? 119. What is an AerialRailway Like? 119. Why are they called Newspapers? 121. How did the Cooking of Food Originate? 121. How Far away is the Sky-Line? 121.
 
THE STORY OF ROPE[4] 122
Civilized Rope Makers, 122. Hand Spinning, 124. Machine-made Ropes, 128. American Hemp, 128. Manila and Sisal Fibers, 130. Wire Ropes, 132. Pine Tar for Ropes, 134. Why does Rope Cling Together? 136. What is Rope Used for? 136.
How did the Expression “A-1” Originate? 136. How has Man Helped Nature give us Apples? 136. What kind of a Crab Climbs Trees? 138. How are Files Made? 138.
 
THE STORY OF SELF-LOADING PISTOLS 139
Colt Pistols, 139. Machine Guns, 145.
How does the Poisonous Tarantula Live? 146. How do the Indians Live Now? 146. How does the Beach get its Sand? 149. How did Nodding the Head Up and Down Come to Mean “Yes”? 149. Why do We Call a Man “a Benedict” When He Marries? 149.
 
THE STORY IN FIRECRACKERS AND SKY-ROCKETS 150
The Need for Noisemakers, 150. Chinese Firecrackers, 150. Popular ever since the Invention of Gunpowder, 154. Beautiful Displays, 158.
What makes a Chimney Smoke? 158. What are Dry Docks Like? 161. Why does a Lightning Bug Light Her Light? 161.
 
THE STORY IN THE MAKING OF A PICTURE 162
The Image is Upsidedown, 162. Effect of Light on the Film, 163. Early Photographic Efforts, 164. Modern Photography, 168.
How Deep is the Deepest Part of the Ocean? 169. Why do We say “Get the Sack”? 169. Why do We call them X-Rays? 169. How did the Term “Yankee” Originate? 171. Why do We say “Kick the Bucket”? 171. When does a Tortoise move Quickly? 171.
 
THE STORY IN A NEWSPAPER 172
Gutenberg’s Press in 1450, 172. Cylinder Presses, 173. Curved Plates, 175. Printing, Folding and Counting 216,000 Papers an Hour, 175. Color Printing, 180.
What do We Mean by the “Flying Dutchman”? 180. Why does a Duck’s Back Shed Water? 180. Why doesn’t the Sky ever Fall Down? 180. How are Sand-Dunes Formed? 180. What do We Mean by an Eclipse? 181. What are Dreams? 182. What makes Our Teeth Chatter? 182.
 
THE STORY IN A HONEY COMB 183
Sixty Thousand Bees in a Hive, 183. Modern Bee-Keeping, 187. Profitable Anywhere, 193.
Where do Figs Come from? 199. What are Fighting Fish? 199. How is the Exact Color of the Sky Determined? 199. What is a Divining Rod? 199.
 
THE STORY OF ELECTRICITY IN THE HOME 200
A Modern Aladdin’s Lamp, 200. Electric Hot Irons the First Appliances, 201. How They are Made, 202. Electric Cooking Appliances, 205. Electric Toaster, 206. Electric Coffee Percolator, 206. Baking and Roasting, 210. Vacuum Cleaners, 212.
Why is there Always a Soft Spot in a Cocoanut Shell? 214. How does a Gasoline Motor Run an Electric Street Car? 214. How do Carrier Pigeons Carry Messages? 216. What Family has Over 9,000,000 Members? 216.
 
THE STORY IN THE TELEPHONE 217
Invention, 217. Essential Factor in American Life, 218. America Leads in Telephone Growth, 220. American Telephone Practice Superior, 222. The First Transcontinental Line, 225. Wireless Speech Transmission, 226. The Mobilization of Communication, 228.
Why do they Call Them “Fiddler-Crabs”? 229. How Far can a Powerful Searchlight Send its Rays? 229. What Started the Habit of Touching Glasses Before Drinking? 231. Why are Windows Broken by Explosions? 231. What does the Expression “Showing the White Feather” come from? 231.
 
THE STORY IN ELEVATORS AND ESCALATORS[5] 232
From Novelty to Necessity, 232. The Escalator, 235. The Cleat Escalator, 239. The MovingPlatform, 239.
What Happens when Animals Hibernate? 241. How do Peanuts get in the Ground? 241. How did Your State get its Name? 243.
 
THE STORY OF COAL MINING 244
The World Depends on Coal, 244. Dangers of Mining, 244. How Coal Grew, 247. The Vast Quantities Produced, 253.
How can We Hear through the Walls of a Room? 251. What is a Diesel Engine Like? 252. What does the Sheep-grower get for the Wool in a Suit of Clothes? 252.
 
THE STORY IN A SILVER TEASPOON 253
The Spoon is Older than History, 253. Development of Various Shapes, 254. Plating Re-Discovered, 256. Electro-plating, 257. Stages in Manufacture, 258. Evolution of a Knife, 259.
How do Chimes Strike the Hour? 260. How is Electricity Brought into a House? 262. What was the Origin of Masonic Signs? 262. What is a Dictograph? 262.
 
STORY OF THE WIRELESS TELEGRAPH 263
Stretching a Dog, 263. Marconi’s Method, 263. Tuning the Instruments, 264. Interferences, 265.
What is Forestry Work? 267. How did the Fashion of Wearing Cravats Commence? 270. How does the Gas Meter Measure Your Gas? 270. What is a Game Preserve? 270.
 
THE STORY OF THE BUILDING OF A SILO 271
What is a Silo? 271. The First Silo, 271. What is put in a Silo? 271. Elements of Success or Failure, 271.
 
THE STORY OF THE ADVANCE OF ELECTRICITY 273
The First Commercial Central Station, 273. Edison and the Electric Light, 273. Electricity a Living Factor, 279. In the Printing Trade, 279. Construction, 279. Loft Manufacturing, 281. Electric Heating, 281. Electricity and Safety, 281. Electricity in Medicine, 281. Electric Vehicles, 282. Electricity and the Home, 282. Decreased Cost of Electricity, 285.
How is Die-Sinking Done? 285.
 
THE STORY IN THE MAKING OF A MAGAZINE 286
Printing in Millions, 286. Color Printing, 289.
How Did the Ringing of Curfew Originate? 289.
 
THE STORY OF AMERICA’S FIRST HORSELESS CARRIAGE 290
The Problems of Weight and Vibration, 290. The First Demonstration, 290.
 
THE STORY IN A SAUSAGE 292
The First “Roast Pig,” 292. Smoking Ham, 292. Salt Pork, 293. The Era of Refrigeration, 295. An Up-to-date Packing Plant, 295. Dressing Meat, 298. By-Products, 298.
Why do We call them “Dog Days?” 301. How is a Five Dollar Gold Piece Made? 303. How does a Bird Fly? 303.
 
THE STORY OF THE BIG REDWOOD TREES 304
Long Life of the Great Trees, 304. Valuable Qualities of the Redwood, 304. Fire Retardance, 306.Magnificent Tones for Decoration, 306.
How did the Expression “Forlorn Hope” Originate? 306. Why is “Wall Street” known Around the World? 308. What makes a Stick Seem To Bend in Water? 308. What causes a Lump in a Person’s Throat? 308. How are We Able to Hear through Speaking Tubes? 308. Why do We Always Shake Hands with our Right Hand? 308.
 
THE STORY IN A BILLIARD TABLE[6] 309
An Ancient Game, 309. Modern Manufacture, 311. The Cue is a work of Art, 314. The FinestIvory for Balls, 314.
What is the Hottest Place in the United States? 315. What are White Blackberries Like? 317. Why do They Have a Dog-Watch on Shipboard? 317. How Much Gold has a 14-Carat Ring? 317. What is an Electro Magnet? 317.
 
THE STORY IN A PIN 318
Once a Luxury of the Wealthy, 318. Formerly made in Parts, 319. Making 25,000,000 Pins a Year, 321.
How are Glaciers Formed? 324. How Large are Molecules? 324.
 
PICTORIAL STORY OF THE FISHING INDUSTRY 325
Episodes in the Game, 325. Modern Fishing Vessels, 326. The Trawl, 327. Drawing the Net, 328. Fish Curing, 329. Preparing for Market, 330.
 
THE STORY IN A BOX OF CALIFORNIA ORANGES 331
Picked with Gloves, 331. Grading, 331. Shipped in Refrigerators, 333.
What Kind of Steel Knives do not Stain or Rust? 333. Why is it Necessary to Keep Quiet when Fishing? 333. First Apartment Houses in this Country, 336. Why do we Call 32° above Zero Freezing? 336. How is Fresco Painting Done? 336.
 
THE STORY OF A PIECE OF CHEWING GUM 337
Juice of the Chicle Tree, 337. Treatment in the Factory, 342.
Where did the Ferris Wheel get its Name? 342. What is Done to Keep Railroad Rails from Breaking? 342. How does a “Master Clock” Control others by Electricity? 342.
 
THE STORY OF THE CALCULATING MACHINE 345
How did Men Learn to Count? 345. The First Adding Machine, 345. The Slide Rule Principle, 348. The “Difference Engine,” 348. Present-Day Models, 349. The Largest Adding Machine, 354. How are Adding Machines Used? 355.
Where does Ermine Come from? 356. What is the Principle of “Foreign Exchange?” 356. What do We Mean by “The Old Moon in the New Moon’s Arms”? 356.
 
THE STORY IN A BOWLING ALLEY 357
Bowling Green, New York City, 357. How the Alley is Built, 358. Composition Balls, 361.
How are Artificial Precious Stones Made? 361. What is a Mexican Bull-Fight Like? 363. What is the Difference between “Alternating” and “Direct” Current? 363. What was the “Court of Love”? 363.
 
THE STORY OF THE ADDRESSOGRAPH 364
Birth of Mechanical Addressing, 364. The First Addressograph, 364. Greater Speed, 366. A Card Index that Addresses Itself, 367.
What is Dry Farming? 372. What is a Drying Machine Like? 372. How does the New York Stock Exchange Operate? 374. How did the term “Cowboys” Originate? 374.
 
THE STORY IN A CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER 375
Smothering Fire with a Gas Blanket, 375. The Soda and Acid Extinguisher, 376.
How is Gold Leaf Made? 377. What is the Natural Color of Goldfish? 377. When was “Liquid Fire” first used in Warfare? 377. How did the Greyhound get his Name? 377. Why is It Called “Battery Park”? 379. How do we Know that the Earth is Round? 379. What were “Ducking Stools?” 379.
 
THE STORY IN PHOTO-ENGRAVING[7] 380
Pictures are the Universal Language, 380. What a Halftone is, 380. Line Engravings, 381. Color Engraving, 382.
Where are Milk-Pails Filled from Trees? 383. How did the Wearing of a Crown Originate? 384. Why do Lobsters change Color? 384. How do Fishes Swim? 384. Where do Pearls Come from? 385. What is Cork? 385.
 
THE STORY IN A GIANT CANNON 386
Origin of the Cannon, 386. Modern Cannon, 392. How Cannon are Now Made, 393. Built-Up and Wire-Wound Guns, 394. Feats of Modern Guns, 406.
What is a Deep-Sea Diver’s Dress Like? 411. Why do We Smile when We are Pleased? 412. Why do Some of Us have Freckles? 412.
 
PICTORIAL STORY OF THE STEEL INDUSTRY 413
Mining Ore, 413. Open-Hearth Furnaces, 416. Blast Furnaces, 417. A 15,000 Ton Forge, 418. Oil-Tempering, 420. Bending Armor Plate, 422. Largest Steel Casting in the World, 424. Casting Steel, 431. Rolling Rails, 432.
What do We Mean by “Deviation of the Compass?” 435.
 
THE STORY IN THE MAKING OF A PAIR OF SHOES 436
Shoemaking by Machine, 436. Cross-Section of a Shoe, 437. Lasting Machine, 440. Details of the Process, 442. Evolution of a Shoe, 447.
What is Standard Gold? 448. What are Cyclones? 450. What Metals can be Drawn into Wire Best? 450. How are Cocoanuts Used to Help our Warships? 450. How did the Dollar Sign Originate? 450.
 
PICTORIAL STORY OF FIRE APPARATUS 451
Aerial Truck, 451. Motor Fire Engine, 451. Old-time Apparatus, 452. Chemical Engine, 455.
 
STORY OF THE TAKING OF FOOD FROM THE AIR 458
Nitrogen and Oxygen in the Air, 458. Fixation of Nitrogen, 459. Liquid Air, 460. Fertilizer, 461. Ammonia, 466.
What is a Drawbridge Like Today? 466.
 
THE STORY OF A DEEP-SEA MONSTER 468
A Thirty-nine Hour Battle, 468. Five Harpoons and 151 Bullets needed, 468. An Unknown Leviathan, 470.
What is an Armored Railway Car Like? 470. What is an Electric Eel? 472.
 
THE STORY OF SALT 473
Natural Salt, 473. The Polish Mines, 474. Refining, 476.
Why do We Call it “Denatured Alcohol”? 478. What is the Difference between a Cruiser and a Battleship? 478.
 
THE STORY OF THE GROWTH OF THE MOTOR TRUCK 481
Practically Developed since 1905, 481. Cheaper Transportation, 489.
What is a Diving Bell? 489. How are Harbors Dredged Out? 491. How is a Razor Blade Made? 491.
 
THE STORY OF THE TUNNELS UNDER THE HUDSON RIVER 492
Bold Engineering, 492. 40,000 Men, 492. How the Tunneling Shield Works, 494. Air Pressure, 496. Extraordinary Adventures under the River, 501.
What Causes Floating Islands? 504.
 
PICTORIAL STORY OF THE AIRSHIP[8] 505
Well-known Aviators, 505. Military Monoplane, 506. NC-4, First Plane to Cross the Atlantic, 507. Vickers-Vimy, First Flier to make Non-Stop Atlantic Flight, 508. Chart of Transatlantic Fliers, 509. The Wright Brothers, 510. British Transatlantic Dirigible, R-34, 511. Examples of Military Uses, 512.
 
THE STORY OF AN AUTOMOBILE FACTORY 518
A half-million Cars a year, 518. Overhead Cranes Cut Costs, 520. Safety First, 521. One thingat a Time, 524. Quick Assembling, 526. The Body Chute, 530. Motion Picture Advertising, 537.
How do Big Buildings get their Granite? 539.
 
RAILROAD SCENES FROM SHOP AND ROAD 541
All Steel Train, 541. Electric Train, 542. Train of 120 Cars, 543. An Observation Car, 544. Electric Baggage Truck, 545. Terminal Stations, 546. Paint Drying Oven, 547. Locomotive Building, 548. Types of Locomotives, 550.
 
THE STORY OF AN UP-TO-DATE FARM 556
Luxuries of Farm Life, 556. Plenty of Food, 557. Reaping Hook, 558. The Cradle, 559. Early Attempts to Harvest with Machines, 561. The First Successful Reaper, 563. Development of the Reaper, 564. The Self-Binder, 568. The Twine Binder, 570. Other Machines Follow, 574.
What Causes an Echo? 574.
 
THE STORY OF THE MOTION-PICTURE PROJECTING MACHINE 575
Spectacular Rise of Motion Pictures, 575. How the Projector Operates, 578. Varied Uses of the Pictures, 579.
 
THE STORY OF LEATHER 580
Tanning, 580. Oiling, 582. Finishing Coats, 583. Currying, 583.
What is a “Glass Snake?” 583.
 
THE STORY IN DIAMOND-CUTTING 584
Where Diamonds Come from, 584. Famous Diamonds, 585. Methods of Cutting, 585. Defects in Diamonds, 586. Brilliancy, 587.
Why do We get Hungry? 588.
 
THE STORY IN THE MODERN LIFTING MAGNET 589
What a Magnet is, 589. How an Electric Magnet Works, 590. Will Lift 30 Tons, 592.
Why is the Thistle the Emblem of Scotland? 593. How are Animals Identified on Cattle Ranges? 594. How is Glue Made? 594. Why does a Hot Dish Crack if we put Ice Cream in It? 594.
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX OF TITLES AND SUBJECTS 595
 
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 607

The Story of the Submarine[1]

Origin of Submarine Navigation.

The history of invention has no chapter more interesting than that of sailing under the ocean’s waves. The navigation of the air approaches it in character, but does not present the vital problems of undersea travel. Both these new fields of navigation have been notably developed within recent years, largely as a result of the great European war. It is the story of sailing in the depths beneath the ocean’s surface with which we here propose to deal. The problem was settled easily enough for his purpose by Jules Verne, in his “Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea.” But that was pure fiction without scientific value. It is with fact, not fiction, that we are here concerned.

The history of invention has no chapter more captivating than that of sailing beneath the ocean’s waves. The navigation of the air comes close in comparison, but it doesn’t tackle the crucial challenges of undersea travel. Both of these new navigation fields have been significantly advanced in recent years, largely due to the great European war. We aim to explore the journey of navigating the depths below the ocean’s surface. Jules Verne addressed this issue effectively in his “Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea.” However, that was pure fiction without scientific merit. Our focus here is on fact, not fiction.

Submarine submerging

A Submarine About to Submerge

A Submarine Getting Ready to Dive

The story takes us back three hundred years, to the reign of James I, of England, when a crude submarine boat was built, to be moved by oars, but one of no value other than as a curiosity. At a later date a man named Day built a similar boat, wagering that he would go down one hundred yards and remain there twenty-four hours. So far as is known, he still remains there, winning the wager which he has not come up to claim.

The story takes us back three hundred years, to the reign of James I of England, when a basic submarine boat was built to be powered by oars, but it was only a curiosity. Later, a man named Day built a similar boat, betting that he could descend one hundred yards and stay underwater for twenty-four hours. As far as anyone knows, he’s still down there, winning the bet he never came up to claim.

Other such boats were constructed at intervals, but the first undersea boat of any historical importance was the “American Turtle,” built by a Yankee named David Bushnell during the time that the British held New York in the Revolutionary War. He sought to blow up the British frigate “Eagle” with the aid of a torpedo[10] and nearly succeeded in doing so, seriously scaring the British shippers by the explosion of his torpedo.

Other boats like this were built from time to time, but the first undersea vessel of any real significance was the “American Turtle,” created by a guy named David Bushnell while the British occupied New York during the Revolutionary War. He tried to destroy the British frigate “Eagle” using a torpedo[10] and almost pulled it off, really frightening the British sailors with the explosion of his torpedo.

The next to become active in this line of discovery was Robert Fulton, the inventor of the first practical steamboat. He, like Bushnell, was an American, but his early experiments were in France, where Napoleon patronized him. With his boat, the “Nautilus,” he made numerous descents, going down twenty-five feet in the harbor of Brest and remaining there an hour. He said that he could build a submarine that could swim under the water and destroy any war vessel afloat. But the French Admiralty refused to sustain him, one old admiral saying, “Thank God, France still fights her battles on the surface, not beneath it.”

The next person to get involved in this line of discovery was Robert Fulton, the inventor of the first practical steamboat. He was also an American like Bushnell, but he did his early experiments in France, where Napoleon supported him. With his boat, the “Nautilus,” he made several dives, going down twenty-five feet in the harbor of Brest and staying there for an hour. He claimed he could build a submarine that could travel underwater and take out any warship. However, the French Admiralty refused to back him, with one old admiral saying, “Thank God, France still fights her battles on the surface, not beneath it.”

Fulton finally went to England and there built a boat with which he attached a torpedo to a condemned brig, set aside for that purpose. The brig was blown up in the presence of an immense throng, and Fulton finally sold his invention to the British government for $75,000. Nothing further came of it.

Fulton eventually went to England and built a boat that he connected to a torpedo on a condemned brig specifically for that purpose. The brig was blown up in front of a huge crowd, and Fulton ended up selling his invention to the British government for $75,000. Nothing else came of it.

The submarine next came into practical view during the American Civil War, when the Confederate government built several such vessels, known usually as “Davids” from their inventor. Now, for the first time, did such a craft demonstrate its powers. On the night of February 17, 1864, one of the “Davids,” the “Hunley,” blew up the steamship “Housatonic” in Charleston harbor. The wave caused by the explosion swamped the submarine and it and its crew found a watery grave.

The submarine was first seen in action during the American Civil War, when the Confederate government built several of them, usually called "Davids" after their inventor. For the first time, this type of craft showcased its capabilities. On the night of February 17, 1864, one of the "Davids," the "Hunley," sank the steamship "Housatonic" in Charleston harbor. The explosion created a wave that swamped the submarine, and it and its crew met a watery end.

Other submarines were built and experimented with, not only in the United States but in European countries. One of the later inventors was an Irish-American named John P. Holland, who, in 1876, built a submarine called the “Fenian Ram.” The “Ram” collapsed with the collapse of the Fenian movement. Other boats were built and tried, but the successful period of the submarine was deferred until after 1893, when the United States Congress appropriated $200,000 to encourage such an enterprise and invited inventors to submit designs. This, and a similar movement in France, formed the first official recognition of the value of vessels of this class.

Other submarines were created and tested, not just in the United States but also in European countries. One later inventor was an Irish-American named John P. Holland, who in 1876 built a submarine called the “Fenian Ram.” The “Ram” fell apart along with the Fenian movement. Other boats were constructed and experimented with, but the successful era of submarines didn’t begin until after 1893, when the U.S. Congress allocated $200,000 to support such projects and invited inventors to submit their designs. This, along with a similar initiative in France, marked the first official acknowledgment of the importance of these types of vessels.

The prize offered by Congress brought out three designs, one by Mr. Holland, the “Ram” inventor, one by George C. Barker, and a third by Simon Lake. The names of Holland and Lake have since been closely associated with the history of the submarine. Mr. Holland’s device secured approval and in 1894 he received a contract to build a submarine vessel. This, named the “Plunger,” was begun in 1895, but was finally abandoned and a vessel of different type, the “Holland,” was built in its place. It was accepted by the government in 1900. A number of others similar to the “Holland” were subsequently built.

The prize offered by Congress led to three designs: one from Mr. Holland, the inventor of the "Ram," one from George C. Barker, and a third by Simon Lake. The names of Holland and Lake have since become closely linked with the history of submarines. Mr. Holland’s design got approval, and in 1894, he received a contract to build a submarine vessel. This vessel, named the "Plunger," was started in 1895 but was ultimately abandoned, and a different type of vessel, the "Holland," was constructed instead. It was accepted by the government in 1900. Several other vessels similar to the "Holland" were built afterward.

The American Types.

The type of these vessels was what became known as the “diving.” They were controlled by a rudder placed at the stern of the vessel and acting in both a horizontal and a vertical direction, the force of the screw propeller driving the boat forward in the direction desired. In 1904 the navy of the United States possessed eight Holland boats and there were also a number of them in the British navy.

The kind of these vessels was what came to be known as the “diving.” They were steered by a rudder located at the back of the vessel, functioning in both a horizontal and vertical direction, with the screw propeller pushing the boat forward in the intended direction. By 1904, the United States Navy had eight Holland boats, and there were also several in the British Navy.

Mr. Lake’s design, offered in 1893 but not accepted, had as its novel feature a plan by which a door could be opened in the bottom of the ship and the crew leave and enter it in diving suits, the water being kept out by the force of compressed air. To maintain the vessel on an even keel he introduced four vanes, called “hydroplanes,” for regulating the depth of descent. By aid of these and the horizontal rudder it was found that the vessel would run for hours at a constant depth and on a level keel. There were other devices for diving or rising to the surface.

Mr. Lake's design, proposed in 1893 but not accepted, featured a new idea: a door at the bottom of the ship that would allow the crew to enter and exit in diving suits, with compressed air keeping the water out. To keep the vessel balanced, he included four fins, called "hydroplanes," to control the depth of descent. With these and the horizontal rudder, the vessel could operate for hours at a steady depth and stay level. There were also other mechanisms for diving or returning to the surface.

In 1901 Mr. Lake built a large vessel of this type which was sold to the Russian government and was in commission at Vladivostock during the Russian-Japanese[11] War. He afterwards received orders from this and other governments for a number of vessels of the even-keel type, and his principles of control have since been generally adopted as the safest and most reliable controlling agency for under-water craft.

In 1901, Mr. Lake constructed a large ship of this type that was sold to the Russian government and was in service at Vladivostok during the Russian-Japanese[11] War. He later received orders from this and other governments for several vessels of the even-keel type, and his control methods have since been widely accepted as the safest and most reliable means for operating underwater vehicles.

We have not in the above brief statement described all the efforts to invent a satisfactory under-water boat. In several of the nations of Europe experiments, more or less available, had been tried, but the most practical results were achieved by the American inventors, Bushnell, Fulton, Davy, Holland and Lake. It will suffice here to say that the most successful of submarines were those constructed by Holland and Lake. An important addition was made in 1901 in a French boat, the “Morse,” built at Cherbourg. The difficulty of navigators telling where they were when under water, and of changing their course safely without coming to the surface to reconnoitre, was in a large measure overcome by the addition of a “periscope.” This, rising above the water, and provided with reflecting lenses, enabled the steersman to discover the surface conditions and see any near vessel or other object. The “Morse” was able to sink in seventy seconds and her crew could remain under water for sixteen hours without strain.

We haven't covered all the efforts made to create a reliable underwater boat in the brief statement above. Various European nations tried different experiments, but the most practical results came from American inventors like Bushnell, Fulton, Davy, Holland, and Lake. It's worth noting that the most effective submarines were built by Holland and Lake. In 1901, an important improvement was made with a French submarine, the “Morse,” constructed in Cherbourg. The challenge navigators faced in determining their location underwater and changing course safely without surfacing was significantly addressed by the introduction of a “periscope.” This device, which extended above the water and featured reflective lenses, allowed the operator to assess the surface conditions and spot nearby vessels or objects. The “Morse” could submerge in seventy seconds, and its crew could stay underwater for up to sixteen hours without strain.

German submarine

A Mine-planting Submarine Designed in Berlin by Simon Lake in 1895 for the Russian Government

A mine-laying submarine designed in Berlin by Simon Lake in 1895 for the Russian government.

Twentieth Century Submarines.

We have given an epitome of the development of the submarine vessel up to the opening of the twentieth century. It had now reached a successful status of achievement and during the early years of that century was to display a remarkable progress. Holland and Lake may be looked upon as the parents of the modern development of the submersible boat, their designs being at the base of the great European progress.

We’ve summarized the development of submarines up to the beginning of the twentieth century. By then, submarines had achieved significant success and were poised to show remarkable advancements in the early years of the century. Holland and Lake can be considered the pioneers of modern submarines, as their designs formed the foundation for major advancements in Europe.

France took up the work actively, its most successful early vessel being the “Narval,” built in 1899. This was 118 feet long by 8 feet 3 inches beam, 106 tons surface and 168 submerged displacement. She was a double-deck vessel controlled by Lake hydroplanes, and had installed steam power for surface travel and electric power for undersea work. The French at this time kept their methods secret, and no useful type had been developed in England, the result being that a plant was[12] provided for the building of Holland boats in that country. Germany used the Lake devices, which had not been patented in that country and were made use of by the Krupps. Thus it appears that the modern submarines, as now built and used in the navies of the world, owe their success to principles of construction and devices for control originated and developed by American inventors.

France actively engaged in the development, with its most successful early submarine being the “Narval,” launched in 1899. It measured 118 feet in length and 8 feet 3 inches in beam, with a surface displacement of 106 tons and a submerged displacement of 168 tons. This was a double-deck submarine controlled by Lake hydroplanes, featuring steam power for surface travel and electric power for underwater operations. At that time, the French kept their methods under wraps, and no effective type had been created in England, leading to the establishment of a facility for the construction of Holland submarines in that country. Germany utilized the Lake designs, which had not been patented there and were implemented by the Krupps. Thus, it seems that the modern submarines, as currently built and operated by the world's navies, owe their success to construction principles and control devices developed by American inventors.

Engine Power.

The internal-combustion engine is the heart of the submarine. Steam, with its heavy engine, has been long set aside, and electricity, derived from the storage battery, yet awaits sufficient development. Gasoline succeeded them. The internal-combustion engine became essential from its light weight and the fact that it could be started and shut down instantly. This is of prime importance, as permitting quick submergence or emergence, either to escape from a high-speed destroyer or to capture a merchantman. It weighs less per horse power, takes up less room and requires less fuel per hour than any other reliable motor. It was early used in both the Holland and Lake boats and is still the chief prime motor.

The internal combustion engine is the core of the submarine. Steam, with its heavy engine, has long been abandoned, and electricity from storage batteries still needs further development. Gasoline took its place. The internal combustion engine became crucial because of its lightweight design and the ability to start and stop instantly. This is extremely important for allowing quick diving or surfacing, whether to escape from a fast destroyer or to capture a merchant ship. It weighs less per horsepower, takes up less space, and consumes less fuel per hour than any other reliable motor. It was used early on in both the Holland and Lake boats and remains the primary engine.

Protector on submarine

A Protector Fitted for Experimental Work Under Ice

A Suit Made for Testing Under Ice

The difficulty with the early boats was that they were slow in speed, making only from eight to nine knots per hour. Increased speed was demanded by governments and more powerful engines, within a fixed limit of weight, were demanded. In doing this engines were built of such flimsy construction that they soon went to pieces. The gasoline used also gave off a gas of highly explosive character and one very likely to escape from leaky tanks or joints. Several explosions took place in consequence, in one of which twenty-three men were killed. As a result all the nations demanded that a non-explosive fuel should be used, and builders turned to the Diesel engine as offering a solution to the difficulty.

The problem with the early boats was that they were slow, only reaching about eight to nine knots an hour. Governments wanted faster boats, and more powerful engines were needed, but they had to stay within a certain weight limit. In trying to achieve this, engines were made with such weak construction that they quickly fell apart. The gasoline used also released a highly explosive gas, which was likely to leak from faulty tanks or joints. Several explosions occurred as a result, with one incident claiming the lives of twenty-three men. Consequently, all nations called for a non-explosive fuel, and manufacturers turned to the Diesel engine as a potential solution.

This heavy oil engine, weighing about five hundred pounds per horse-power, was not adapted to the submarine, and efforts have been made to decrease the weight. These have not as yet had a satisfactory result and experiments are still going on.

This heavy oil engine, weighing around five hundred pounds per horsepower, was not suitable for the submarine, and attempts have been made to reduce its weight. So far, these efforts have not produced satisfactory results, and experiments are still ongoing.

The Periscope.

As the engine is the heart of the submarine, the periscope is its eye. This is, in its simpler forms, a stiff, detachable tube from fifteen to twenty feet long and about four inches in diameter. On its top is an object glass which takes in all objects within its range and transmits an image of them through a right-angled prism and down the tube. By means of other lenses and prisms an image of the external object is thus made visible to those within the submarine. In this process of transmission there is a certain loss of light, and to allow for that the image is magnified to about one-quarter above natural size.

As the engine is the heart of the submarine, the periscope is its eye. In simpler terms, it's a stiff, detachable tube that's about fifteen to twenty feet long and roughly four inches in diameter. At the top, there's an object lens that captures all visible objects within its range and sends an image through a right-angled prism and down the tube. Using additional lenses and prisms, an image of the outside object becomes visible to those inside the submarine. During this transmission process, some light is lost, so the image is magnified to about a quarter larger than its actual size.

Submarine under ice

A Submarine Under Ice

A Submarine Beneath Ice

To obtain in this manner a correct idea of the distance of the object seen proved difficult, but by continued experiment this difficulty has been overcome. Mr. Lake developed an instrument suited to this purpose and one which gave a simultaneous view of the entire horizon. There is one fault in the periscope not easy to obviate. It is an instrument for day use only. When dark comes on it becomes useless, and this does away with the possibility of a successful submarine attack by night.

To get an accurate sense of the distance to the observed object proved challenging, but through ongoing experimentation, this challenge has been addressed. Mr. Lake created a device designed for this purpose that offered a simultaneous view of the entire horizon. However, there is one flaw in the periscope that is hard to eliminate. It can only be used during the day. Once night falls, it becomes ineffective, which eliminates the option for a successful nighttime submarine attack.

The periscope is the one part of the submarine scout equipment that is open to vision from the surface. But while the outlook of the undersea captain, aided by his telescopic sights, has a radius of several miles, the periscope tube, of only four or five-inch diameter and painted of a neutral tint, is not easily seen. If the sea is a little choppy it is difficult to discover it with the naked eye at about 300 or 400 yards away, or in a smooth sea at over 500 yards.

The periscope is the only part of the submarine's scout equipment that's visible from the surface. However, while the view for the underwater captain, enhanced by his telescopic sights, extends for several miles, the periscope tube, which is only four or five inches in diameter and painted in a neutral color, is hard to spot. If the sea is slightly rough, it’s tough to see it with the naked eye from about 300 or 400 yards away, or over 500 yards in calm water.

The idea that a submarine may be located by an aeroplane is looked upon by Mr. Lake as a fallacy, except in water of crystal-like clearness, like that of the Mediterranean or the Caribbean, and periscopes are now being made to scour the heavens as well as the horizon, so that the presence of an enemy aeroplane can easily be seen. An attack by an aeroplane bomb, therefore, can readily be avoided, in view of the difficulty of hitting such an object from the upper air.

The idea that an airplane can find a submarine is seen by Mr. Lake as a misconception, unless the water is super clear, like in the Mediterranean or the Caribbean. Now, periscopes are being designed to look up at the sky as well as out at the horizon, making it easy to spot an enemy plane. Because of this, a bomb attack from an airplane can easily be dodged, considering how hard it is to hit such a target from the air.

The submarine is the guerrilla of the sea. Its tactics are like those of the Indian who fights under cover or lies in ambush for his enemy. It is the weaker party and can hope for success only through strategy. The old adage that “all is fair in love and war” applies to this new weapon of destruction as to every warlike instrument. It is its invisibility that makes the submarine the terror of the seas. This has been well proved during the European war. The North Sea and the English Channel have been invaded by German submarines which have made great havoc among merchant ships. And it is well to draw attention to the fact that submarines are safe from each other. In no case has a battle taken place between two of these armed sharks except in the one instance reported of an Austrian sinking an Italian submarine. But in this case the Italian boat was on the surface and was at the time practically a surface ship.

The submarine is the guerrilla of the sea. Its tactics are similar to those of an Indian who fights from cover or lies in wait to ambush the enemy. It’s the weaker party and can only hope for success through strategy. The old saying that “all is fair in love and war” applies to this new weapon of destruction just like any other war instrument. Its invisibility is what makes the submarine a terror of the seas. This was clearly demonstrated during the European war. The North Sea and the English Channel have been invaded by German submarines that have wreaked havoc on merchant ships. It's also important to point out that submarines are safe from each other. There has never been a battle between two of these armed predators, except for one instance where an Austrian sank an Italian submarine. But in that case, the Italian sub was on the surface and was effectively acting as a surface ship at the time.

During the war the Germans were especially active in the use of the submarine, and did much in making them an effective terror of the seas. With no mercantile marine of their own to guard, they had a free field for attack in the abundant shipping of their foes. The loss of ships was so numerous and became such a common occurrence that little attention was finally paid to them except when great loss of life took place, as in the signal instance of the “Lusitania.”

During the war, the Germans were particularly involved in using submarines and played a big role in making them a real threat on the seas. Without their own commercial fleet to protect, they had plenty of opportunities to strike at the vast shipping of their enemies. The number of lost ships became so high that people hardly paid attention to them, except when there was a significant loss of life, like in the famous case of the “Lusitania.”

Sectional view of submarine

Type of High Speed Ocean-going Submarine

Type of Fast Ocean Submarine

The Voyage of the “Deutschland.”

The great mission of the submarine during the European war was as a commerce destroyer. Many ships were sunk and many lives, with cargoes of great value, were lost, and it was not until the summer of 1916 that the submarine appeared in a new rôle, that of a commerce carrier. On July 9th of that year the people of Baltimore were astounded by the appearance in their port of a submarine vessel of unusual size and novel errand. Instead of being a destroyer of merchandise, this new craft was an unarmed carrier of merchandise. It had crossed the Atlantic on a voyage of 4,000 miles in extent, laden with dyestuffs to supply the needs of American weavers.

The primary mission of the submarine during the European war was to destroy commerce. Many ships were sunk, and numerous lives and valuable cargoes were lost. It wasn’t until the summer of 1916 that submarines took on a new role as commerce carriers. On July 9th of that year, the people of Baltimore were shocked by the arrival of a submarine of unusual size and purpose in their port. Instead of being a destroyer of goods, this new vessel was an unarmed carrier of goods. It had crossed the Atlantic on a 4,000-mile journey, loaded with dyes to meet the needs of American weavers.

This new type of vessel, the “Deutschland,” was an undersea craft of 315 feet length and a gross tonnage of 701 tons, its cargo capacity being more than 1,000 tons. It had crossed the ocean in defiance of the wide cordon of enemy warships which swarmed over part of its route, and reached port in safety after a memorable voyage, to the surprise and interest of the world. Leaving the port of Bremenhaven on June 18th, and halting at Heligoland for four days to train its crew, it made its way across the Atlantic in sixteen days. During this voyage it lay for two hours on the ocean bottom in the English Channel and was submerged in all not over ninety hours, the remainder of the voyage being made on the surface.

This new kind of vessel, the “Deutschland,” was an underwater craft measuring 315 feet long and weighing 701 tons, with a cargo capacity of over 1,000 tons. It crossed the ocean despite a heavy presence of enemy warships along part of its route and arrived safely at port after a remarkable journey, surprising and captivating the world. Leaving the port of Bremenhaven on June 18th and stopping at Heligoland for four days to train its crew, it navigated across the Atlantic in sixteen days. During this journey, it spent two hours on the ocean floor in the English Channel and was submerged for a total of no more than ninety hours, with the rest of the trip conducted on the surface.

Its crew, composed of twenty-six men and three officers, found their novel voyage rather agreeable than otherwise. Supplied with plenty of good food, a well-selected library, a graphophone with an abundance of music records, and other means of convenience and enjoyment, their voyage was more of a holiday then a hardship, and they reached their transatlantic port none the worse for their hazardous trip. It was not the longest that had been made. Other submarines had voyaged from German ports to the eastern limit of the Mediterranean, but it was the most notable and attracted the widest attention.

Its crew, made up of twenty-six men and three officers, found their unique journey more enjoyable than not. With plenty of good food, a well-chosen library, a graphophone loaded with music records, and other comforts and sources of entertainment, their trip felt more like a vacation than a struggle, and they arrived at their transatlantic port in good shape after their risky journey. It wasn't the longest trip ever made; other submarines had traveled from German ports to the eastern edge of the Mediterranean, but it was the most significant and drew the most attention.

Submarine Deutschland

The German Merchant Submarine “Deutschland” which Crossed the Atlantic in 1916, after Eluding the British Blockade

The German merchant submarine "Deutschland" that sailed across the Atlantic in 1916 after evading the British blockade.

Courtesy of Baltimore American and C. & P. Telephone Co.

Thanks to Baltimore American and C. & P. Telephone Co.

The return voyage promised to be more perilous then the outgoing one. A fleet of British and French ships gathered around the outlet of Chesapeake Bay, alert to capture the daring mariners and their ship, if possible. Ready to leave Baltimore on July 20th, with a return cargo of gold, nickel and rubber, the captain of the “Deutschland” shrewdly awaited a favorable opportunity and on August 1st began his voyage, plunging under sea as he left the American coast-line and easily evading the line of floating foemen. The return to its home port a success, a second round-trip voyage was made and completed on December 11th, in the course of which a convoying tug-boat was rammed and sunk with the loss of several lives, shortly after leaving New London, Conn. The “Deutschland” was sent out by private parties, for purely commercial purposes, not as a military enterprise.

The return trip was set to be more dangerous than the first. A fleet of British and French ships gathered at the entrance of Chesapeake Bay, ready to catch the bold sailors and their vessel if they could. Prepared to leave Baltimore on July 20th with a cargo of gold, nickel, and rubber, the captain of the “Deutschland” wisely waited for the right moment, and on August 1st, he began his journey, diving underwater as he left the American coastline and easily dodging the enemy ships. The return to its home port was a success, and a second round-trip was completed on December 11th, during which a tugboat escort was rammed and sunk, resulting in several casualties, shortly after departing from New London, Conn. The “Deutschland” was sent out by private individuals for purely commercial reasons, not as a military mission.

Such is the story of a pioneer enterprise, that of the use of submarine vessels as commerce carriers. It is one not likely to be supplemented in times of peace, since surface boats would be cheaper and more available. But in future wars—if such there are to be—it may point to a future of advantageous trade.

Such is the story of a groundbreaking venture, using submarines as carriers for commerce. It's not likely to be expanded in peacetime, since surface ships would be cheaper and more accessible. However, in future wars—if there are any—it might indicate a future of beneficial trade.

Submarine Dredging.

Commerce is not the only peaceful mission of the submarine. In 1895 was organized an association known as the Lake Submarine Company, its purpose being to use the Lake type of submarine boat for the recovery of lost treasures from the sea bottom and for other possibilities of undersea work. This company is still in[16] existence, its various purposes being to recover sunken ships and their cargoes, to build breakwaters and other submerged constructions, to aid in submarine tunnel building, to dredge for gold, to fish for pearls and sponges, and for similar operations.

Commerce isn't the only peaceful mission of the submarine. In 1895, an association called the Lake Submarine Company was formed, aimed at using the Lake-type submarine to recover lost treasures from the ocean floor and explore other possibilities for underwater work. This company is still in[16] operation, with various goals like recovering sunken ships and their cargoes, building breakwaters and other underwater structures, assisting in submarine tunnel construction, dredging for gold, fishing for pearls and sponges, and conducting similar activities.

The first vessel adapted to these purposes was the “Argonaut,” built by Simon Lake in 1894. The important feature of this boat was a diver’s compartment, enabling divers to leave the vessel when submerged, for the purpose of operating on wrecks or performing other undersea duties. This vessel and its successors have bottom doors for the use of divers, as previously stated. They are now used for numerous purposes for which they are much better adapted then the old system of surface diving, the sea bottom being under direct observation and within immediate reach.

The first ship designed for these purposes was the “Argonaut,” built by Simon Lake in 1894. A key feature of this boat was a diver’s compartment, allowing divers to exit the vessel when underwater to work on shipwrecks or perform other underwater tasks. This vessel and its successors have bottom doors for divers, as mentioned earlier. They are now used for many purposes for which they are much better suited than the old method of surface diving, with the seafloor directly observable and accessible.

This sea bottom, in localities near land, is abundantly sown with wrecks, old and new, and in many cases bearing permanently valuable cargoes, such as gold and coal. The Lake system greatly simplifies the work of search for sunken ships, the vessels being able in a few hours’ time to search over regions which would have taken months in the old method. Many wrecks have been found by these bottom-prowling scouts and valuable material recovered. Thus vessels laden with coal have been traced that had been many years under the water and deeply covered with sand and silt, and their cargoes brought to the surface.

This sea floor, in areas close to shore, is filled with wrecks, both old and new, many of which hold valuable cargoes like gold and coal. The Lake system makes searching for sunken ships much easier, allowing vessels to cover areas in just a few hours that would have taken months using the old methods. Many wrecks have been discovered by these bottom-searching scouts, leading to the recovery of valuable materials. For instance, ships loaded with coal have been located that had been underwater for many years and were heavily buried in sand and silt, with their cargoes brought back to the surface.

Submarine dredging

A Semi-submersible Wrecking Apparatus

A Semi-submersible Demolition Tool

The gold-dredging spoken of refers to the working of gold-bearing sands found at the mouth of certain rivers in Alaska and South America. Places on the Alaskan coast, laid bare at high tide, are said to have yielded as much as $12,000 per cubic yard. With the Lake system it is possible to gather material from such localities to a depth of 150 or more feet, the material being drawn up by suction pumps into the vessel and its gold recovered.

The gold-dredging mentioned involves extracting gold from sand found at the mouths of specific rivers in Alaska and South America. Locations along the Alaskan coast, exposed at high tide, are reported to have produced up to $12,000 per cubic yard. With the Lake system, it’s possible to collect material from these areas to a depth of 150 feet or more, using suction pumps to draw the material into the vessel and recover the gold.

Another important application is that of fishing for pearl shells, sponges and coral. This is blind work when done by divers from the surface, the returns being largely matters of chance. By aid of submerged boats, with their powerful electric lights, the work becomes one of certainty rather than of chance. The recovery of the oyster, clam and other edible shell-fish is also a feature of the work which the Lake Company has in view. The present method of dredging is of the “hit or miss” character, while the submarine method is capable of thorough work. Vessels have been designed for this purpose with a capacity of gathering oysters from good ground at the rate of 5,000 bushels per hour. In regard to submarine engineering, of its many varieties, the Lake system is likely to be a highly useful aid and assistance.

Another important application is fishing for pearl shells, sponges, and coral. When divers work from the surface, it’s mostly luck, but with submerged boats equipped with powerful electric lights, the process becomes more certain. Recovering oysters, clams, and other edible shellfish is also part of what the Lake Company aims to accomplish. The current dredging method is mostly hit or miss, while the submarine method allows for thorough work. Vessels have been designed for this purpose that can gather oysters from prime areas at a rate of 5,000 bushels per hour. In terms of submarine engineering, among its many types, the Lake system is expected to be a very useful aid and support.

These particulars are given to show that the submarine vessel is not wholly an instrument of “frightfulness,” as indicated by its use in war, but is capable of being made useful for many purposes in peace. Some of these have here been very briefly stated. With continued practice its utility will grow, and by its aid the sea bottom up to a certain depth may become as open to varied operations as is the land surface.

These details are provided to demonstrate that the submarine is not just a tool of "terror," as suggested by its use in warfare, but can also be useful for many peaceful purposes. Some of these have been briefly mentioned here. With ongoing practice, its usefulness will increase, and thanks to it, the seabed up to a certain depth could become as accessible for various activities as the land surface.


The Story of the Panama Canal

America has captured the forces of Nature, harnessed the floods and made the desert bloom, builded gigantic bridges and arrogant skyscrapers and bored roadways through solid rock and beneath water, but the most spectacular of all spectacular accomplishments is the Panama Canal.

America has tamed the forces of nature, controlled floods, and turned deserts into thriving lands, built massive bridges and towering skyscrapers, and created roadways through solid rock and under water. But the most impressive achievement of all is the Panama Canal.

Some four centuries ago, Balboa, the intrepid, the persevering, led his little band of adventurers across the Isthmus of Darien, as it was then called, and, leaving their protection, gave rein to his impatience by going on ahead and climbing alone, slowly and painfully, the continental divide, from which vantage point he discovered the world’s largest ocean.

Some four hundred years ago, Balboa, brave and determined, led his small group of adventurers across what was then called the Isthmus of Darien. Leaving the safety of his group, he couldn't hold back his impatience and set off alone, slowly and laboriously climbing the continental divide, from which he spotted the world's largest ocean.

We are told that, later, gathering his followers, he walked out into the surf and with his sword in his right hand and the banner of Castile in his left gave the vast expanse of water its present name and claimed all the land washed by its waves the lawful property of the proud country to which he owed allegiance.

We are told that later, gathering his followers, he walked into the surf with his sword in his right hand and the banner of Castile in his left, giving the vast expanse of water its current name and claiming all the land washed by its waves as the rightful property of the proud country to which he belonged.

The narrowness of the Isthmus naturally suggested the cutting of a waterway through it. It interposed between Atlantic and Pacific a barrier in places less than fifty miles wide. To sail from Colon to Panama—forty-five miles as the bird flies—required a voyage around Cape Horn—some ten thousand miles. Yet it was nearly four centuries before any actual effort was made to construct such a canal.

The narrowness of the Isthmus clearly pointed to the possibility of creating a waterway through it. It stood as a barrier between the Atlantic and Pacific, in some spots less than fifty miles wide. To travel by sea from Colon to Panama—only forty-five miles as the crow flies—meant making a trek around Cape Horn—about ten thousand miles. Still, it took nearly four hundred years before anyone seriously started working on building such a canal.

In 1876 an organization was perfected in France for making surveys and collecting data on which to base the construction of a canal across the Isthmus of Panama, and in 1878, a concession for prosecuting the work was secured from the Colombian Government. In May, 1879, an international congress was convened, under the auspices of Ferdinand de Lesseps, to consider the question of the best location and plan of the canal.

In 1876, an organization was established in France to conduct surveys and gather data for building a canal across the Isthmus of Panama. In 1878, a concession was obtained from the Colombian government to proceed with the work. In May 1879, an international congress was held, led by Ferdinand de Lesseps, to discuss the best location and design for the canal.

The Panama Canal Company was organized, with Ferdinand de Lesseps as its president, and the stock of this company was successfully floated in December, 1880. The two years following were devoted largely to surveys, examinations and preliminary work. In 1889 the company went into bankruptcy and operations were suspended until the new Panama Canal Company was organized in 1894.

The Panama Canal Company was set up, with Ferdinand de Lesseps as its president, and its stock was successfully launched in December 1880. The following two years were mostly spent on surveys, inspections, and initial work. In 1889, the company went bankrupt and operations were halted until the new Panama Canal Company was formed in 1894.

The United States to the Rescue.

The United States, not unmindful of the advantages of an Isthmian Canal, had from time to time, made surveys of the various routes. With a view to government ownership and control, Congress directed an investigation, with the result that the Commission reported, on November 16, 1901, in favor of Panama and recommended the lock type of canal, appraising the value of the rights, franchises, concessions, lands, unfinished work, plans and other property, including the railroad of the new Panama Canal Company, at $40,000,000. An act of Congress, approved June 28, 1902, authorized the President of the United States to acquire this property at this figure, and also to secure from the Republic of Colombia perpetual control of a strip of land not less than six miles wide across the Isthmus and the right to excavate, construct and operate and protect thereon a canal of such depth and capacity as would afford convenient passage to the largest ships now in use or which might be reasonably anticipated.

The United States, aware of the benefits of an Isthmian Canal, had conducted surveys of various routes from time to time. Aiming for government ownership and control, Congress initiated an investigation, and on November 16, 1901, the Commission reported in favor of Panama and suggested a lock-type canal. They estimated the value of rights, franchises, concessions, lands, unfinished work, plans, and other property, including the railroad of the new Panama Canal Company, to be $40,000,000. An act of Congress, approved on June 28, 1902, allowed the President of the United States to acquire this property at that price and to negotiate with the Republic of Colombia for perpetual control of a strip of land at least six miles wide across the Isthmus. This would include the right to excavate, construct, operate, and protect a canal deep and wide enough for the largest ships currently in use or those that could be reasonably expected in the future.

Later on a treaty was made with the Republic of Panama whereby the United States was granted control of a ten-mile strip constituting the Canal Zone. This was ratified by the Republic of Panama on December 2, 1903, and by the United States on February 23, 1904. On May 4, 1904, work was begun under United States control.

Later, a treaty was signed with the Republic of Panama, giving the United States control over a ten-mile area known as the Canal Zone. This was approved by the Republic of Panama on December 2, 1903, and by the United States on February 23, 1904. On May 4, 1904, work started under U.S. control.

Bird's eye view of Panama Canal

Uncle Sam’s Big Work at Panama

Uncle Sam's Key Initiative in Panama

A bird’s-eye view of the great canal, showing how the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans are here joined.

A bird's-eye view of the huge canal, showing how the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans are connected here.

Rock drilling

Courtesy of The Ingersoll Rand Company.

Courtesy of The Ingersoll Rand Company.

Drilling Rock, Panama Canal

Drilling Rock, Panama Canal

These powerful steam drills are capable of sinking holes in the solid rock at the rate of seven feet per hour.

These powerful steam drills can dig holes in solid rock at a speed of seven feet per hour.

The Canal and the Navy.

The opening of the canal has greatly increased the effectiveness of the Navy of the United States. It has reduced the distance between the central points of the Atlantic and Pacific coasts from 13,000 to 5,000 miles and greatly reduced the problem of coaling on a cruise from coast to coast. It has made possible the concentration of a fleet at either entrance of the canal which, with a cruising speed of fifteen knots, could reach the center of the Pacific coast in nine days and the center of the Atlantic coast in five days.

The opening of the canal has significantly improved the effectiveness of the United States Navy. It has cut the distance between the main points on the Atlantic and Pacific coasts from 13,000 miles to 5,000 miles and has greatly eased the issue of refueling during a trip from coast to coast. It now allows for the gathering of a fleet at either end of the canal, which, at a cruising speed of fifteen knots, could arrive at the center of the Pacific coast in nine days and the center of the Atlantic coast in five days.

Where, formerly, the fleets stationed opposite the middle of each coast were, from a cruising point of view, as far apart as opposite sides of the world, they are now as near as if one were off New York and the other off Buenos Aires.

Where, in the past, the fleets stationed in the middle of each coast were, from a cruising perspective, as far apart as the opposite sides of the world, they are now as close as if one were off New York and the other off Buenos Aires.

With regard to the monetary saving to the United States resulting from the availability of the canal for naval use, it is apparent that the distance and time between the coasts have been reduced to less than two-fifths of the former figures. The cost of coast-to-coast movements is reduced accordingly, for though vessels of the Navy pay tolls, such payment is in effect a transfer of money from one branch of the government to another.

Regarding the financial savings for the United States due to the canal's availability for naval use, it's clear that the distance and travel time between the coasts have been cut down to less than two-fifths of what they were before. The cost of moving between the coasts has decreased accordingly, because even though Navy vessels pay tolls, that payment is essentially just transferring money from one part of the government to another.

The strategic importance of the canal is inestimable from a monetary standpoint.

The strategic importance of the canal is priceless when it comes to its financial value.

The Great Canal.

The Isthmus of Panama runs east and west and the canal traverses it from Colon on the north to Panama on the south in a general direction from northwest to southeast, the Pacific terminus being twenty-two miles east of the Atlantic entrance. The principal features of the canal are a sea-level entrance channel from the east through Limon Bay to Gatun, about seven miles long, five-hundred-foot bottom width and forty-one-foot depth at mean tide. At Gatun the eighty-five-foot lake level is obtained by a dam across the valley. The lake is confined on the Pacific side by a dam between the hills at Pedro Miguel, thirty-two miles away. The lake thus formed has an area of 164 square miles and a channel depth of not less than forty-five feet at normal stage.

The Isthmus of Panama runs east to west, and the canal cuts through it from Colon in the north to Panama in the south, generally from northwest to southeast, with the Pacific entrance being twenty-two miles east of the Atlantic entry. The main features of the canal include a sea-level entrance channel from the east, through Limon Bay to Gatun, which is about seven miles long, has a bottom width of five hundred feet, and a depth of forty-one feet at mean tide. At Gatun, the lake level of eighty-five feet is achieved by a dam built across the valley. On the Pacific side, the lake is bounded by a dam located between the hills at Pedro Miguel, thirty-two miles away. The resulting lake covers an area of 164 square miles and has a channel depth of no less than forty-five feet at normal levels.

At Gatun ships pass from the sea to the lake level, and vice versa, by three locks in flight. On the Pacific side there is one lowering of thirty feet at Pedro Miguel to a small lake fifty-five feet above sea level, held by dam at Miraflores, where two lowerings overcome the difference of level to the sea. The channel between the locks on the Pacific side is five hundred feet wide at the bottom and forty-five feet deep, and below the Miraflores locks the sea-level section, about eight miles in length, is five hundred feet wide at the bottom and forty-five feet deep at mean tide. Through the lake the bottom widths are not less than one thousand feet for about sixteen miles, eight hundred feet for about four miles, five hundred feet for about three miles and through the continental divide from Bas Obispo to Pedro Miguel, a distance of about nine miles, the bottom width is three hundred feet. The total length of the canal from deep water in the Caribbean, forty-one-foot depth at mean tide to deep water in the Pacific, forty-five-foot depth at mean tide, is practically fifty miles, fifteen miles of which are at sea level.

At Gatun, ships go from the sea to the lake level and vice versa through three locks. On the Pacific side, there’s a single drop of thirty feet at Pedro Miguel to a small lake that sits fifty-five feet above sea level, which is held back by a dam at Miraflores. There, two drops make up the difference in height down to sea level. The channel between the locks on the Pacific side is five hundred feet wide and forty-five feet deep, and below the Miraflores locks, the sea-level section is about eight miles long, also five hundred feet wide and forty-five feet deep at mean tide. In the lake, the widths are no less than one thousand feet for about sixteen miles, eight hundred feet for about four miles, and five hundred feet for about three miles. Through the continental divide from Bas Obispo to Pedro Miguel, a distance of about nine miles, the bottom width is three hundred feet. The total length of the canal from deep water in the Caribbean, which is forty-one feet deep at mean tide, to deep water in the Pacific, which is forty-five feet deep at mean tide, is nearly fifty miles, with fifteen miles of that at sea level.

The Hydroelectric Station.

The hydroelectric station uses water from Gatun Lake for driving three turbo-generators of 2,000-kilowatt capacity each, which supply electricity for the operation of the lock and spillway machinery, the terminal shops and adjacent facilities, and for the lighting of the locks and the canal villages and fortifications. Transmission over the Zone is effected through four substations and a connecting high voltage transmission line which follows the main line of the Panama Railroad.

The hydroelectric station uses water from Gatun Lake to power three turbo-generators, each with a capacity of 2,000 kilowatts. These generators provide electricity for operating the lock and spillway machinery, the terminal shops and nearby facilities, as well as for lighting the locks and the canal villages and fortifications. Electricity is transmitted across the Zone via four substations and a high voltage transmission line that runs alongside the main line of the Panama Railroad.

Submarines at Panama Canal

Submarines Used in Defending the Panama Canal

Submarines Used to Protect the Panama Canal

The vessels here shown are used in defense of the Pacific side of the canal. They appear as anchored in the new concrete docks at Colon, preparatory to their passage through the canal, after having made the longest sea voyage then on record for submarines.

The ships shown here are used to defend the Pacific side of the canal. They seem to be anchored in the new concrete docks at Colon, getting ready to pass through the canal after completing the longest sea voyage on record for submarines.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N.Y.

Battleship in Panama Canal

Copyright by the International News Service.

Copyright by the International News Service.

Through the Panama Canal

Via the Panama Canal

The U. S. battleship “Ohio” in the east chamber of the Pedro Miguel Locks. On the left is seen the electric locomotive used in drawing vessels through.

The U.S. battleship "Ohio" in the east chamber of the Pedro Miguel Locks. On the left is the electric locomotive used to pull boats through.

Dredging the Panama Canal

Ladder Dredge, Panama Canal

Ladder Dredge, Panama Canal

Dredging the Panama Canal

Suction Dredge, Panama Canal

Suction Dredge, Panama Canal

The upper view shows a ladder dredge, which operates by means of buckets on a continuous chain, dipping the contents of the buckets into the scow which lies alongside. The lower view shows a suction dredge, which operates on soft mud or sands, pumping the discharge through the pipe seen at the left of the illustration. The pipe may be carried to any desired point and used for filling.

The upper view shows a ladder dredge, which works by using buckets on a continuous chain that dip the contents into the scow next to it. The lower view shows a suction dredge, which works on soft mud or sand, pumping the discharge through the pipe seen on the left of the illustration. The pipe can be taken to any location and used for filling.

Gatun Locks, Panama Canal

Copyright, C. H. Graves Co.

Copyright, C. H. Graves Co.

Gatun Locks

Gatun Locks

A. Sea-level section of canal, seven miles long, from Atlantic Ocean to Gatun Locks, where by a series of three locks vessels are raised to Gatun Lake, eighty-five feet above sea level. B. Small area of land dredged away as soon as Gatun Locks were completed. C. Electric towing motor, four of which tow each vessel entirely through the locks. They run on cog rail along the lock walls. D. Lock gate under construction. E. Floor of first lock from Atlantic side. Note holes in floor for admitting the water. F. Lock for vessels coming from Pacific side. G. Base on which concrete posts were erected for electric lights. A row of lights on all sides of the locks making operation at night as safe as day. H. Incline from locks of different levels up and down which the towing motors run on cog rails.

A. Sea-level section of the canal, seven miles long, from the Atlantic Ocean to Gatun Locks, where a series of three locks raises vessels to Gatun Lake, which is eighty-five feet above sea level. B. A small area of land was dredged away as soon as Gatun Locks were completed. C. Electric towing motors, four of which pull each vessel completely through the locks. They operate on cog rails along the lock walls. D. Lock gate under construction. E. Floor of the first lock from the Atlantic side. Note the holes in the floor for letting in water. F. Lock for vessels coming from the Pacific side. G. Base on which concrete posts were built for electric lights. A row of lights on all sides of the locks makes operation at night as safe as during the day. H. Incline from locks of different levels on which the towing motors run on cog rails.

Digging the Panama Canal

Gaillard Cut Looking South from Bend in East Bank near Gamboa

Gaillard Cut Looking South from the Bend on the East Bank near Gamboa

The train and shovel are standing on the bottom of the cut. The water in the drainage canal is about ten feet below the bottom of the canal, or at elevation +30.

The train and shovel are positioned at the bottom of the cut. The water in the drainage canal is roughly ten feet below the canal's bottom, or at elevation +30.

Electrical operator

A Cylindrical Valve Machine, Motor and Limit Switch

A Cylindrical Valve Machine, Motor, and Limit Switch

This machine is one of many which are used to regulate the flow of water to the locks. All valves are controlled from a central operating station on each of the three sets of locks. The limit switch automatically shuts off the power and stops the motor when the valve is entirely open or shut.

This machine is one of many used to control the flow of water to the locks. All valves are managed from a central control station for each of the three sets of locks. The limit switch automatically cuts off the power and stops the motor when the valve is fully open or closed.

Dredging gorge

Cucaracha Slide Attacked by a Fleet of Dredges

Cucaracha Slide Struck by a Group of Dredges

This great slide was the source of much trouble to the engineers. At one time it entirely blocked the canal at the narrow point shown in this photograph, but the seven dredges of the ladder, suction and dipper type, made short work of cutting the 150-foot channel shown here, and then proceeded with the work of entirely clearing the cut. The view looks north from the slide past Gold and Contractor’s Hills.

This large slide caused a lot of problems for the engineers. At one point, it completely blocked the canal at the narrow point shown in this photograph, but the seven dredges, both ladder and suction types, quickly managed to cut the 150-foot channel shown here and then continued with the task of fully clearing the area. The view looks north from the slide, past Gold and Contractor’s Hills.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Rockslide

Steam Shovel Buried Under Fall of Rock

Steam Shovel Trapped Under Rockslide

Gaillard Cut

The Great Gaillard Cut

The Great Gaillard Cut

At this point the canal is cut through what is practically a mountain range. The material excavated consisted largely of rock and formed one of the hugest engineering problems in the world’s history. The cut is nine miles long, 300 feet wide, 272 feet greatest depth and required the excavation of 100,000,000 cubic yards of material.

At this point, the canal has been dug through what is basically a mountain range. The material that was removed mainly consisted of rock, creating one of the biggest engineering challenges in history. The cut measures nine miles long, 300 feet wide, and has a maximum depth of 272 feet, requiring the excavation of 100,000,000 cubic yards of material.

Gatun Lake, impounded by Gatun Dam, has an area of 164 square miles when its surface is at the normal elevation of eighty-five feet above sea level, and is the largest artificially-formed lake in the world. The area of the water-shed tributary to the lake is 1,320 square miles. During the rainy season, from April to the latter part of December, the run-off from this basin exceeds considerably the consumption of water, and the surplus is discharged through the spillway of Gatun Dam. Toward the end of the rainy season the surface of the lake is raised to about eighty-seven feet above sea level, in order to afford a surplus or reserve supply to keep the channel full to operating depth during the dry season, in part of which the consumption and evaporation are in excess of the supply. It is calculated that when this level has been attained at the beginning of the dry season the reserve is sufficient to assure a surface elevation of at least seventy-nine feet at the end of the dry season in spite of the consumption at the hydroelectric station, and allowing forty-one passages of vessels through the locks each day with the use of the full length of the chambers, or fifty-eight lockages a day when the shorter sections of the chambers are used and cross filling is employed, which would usually be the case. This is a greater number of lockages than can be made in one day.

Gatun Lake, created by Gatun Dam, covers an area of 164 square miles when its surface is at the normal level of eighty-five feet above sea level, making it the largest artificial lake in the world. The watershed that feeds into the lake spans 1,320 square miles. During the rainy season, which lasts from April to late December, the runoff from this basin significantly exceeds water usage, and the excess is released through the spillway of Gatun Dam. By the end of the rainy season, the lake's surface is raised to about eighty-seven feet above sea level to provide a surplus supply that keeps the channel at its operating depth during the dry season, when water consumption and evaporation outpace the supply. It's estimated that once this level is reached at the beginning of the dry season, the reserve is enough to maintain a surface elevation of at least seventy-nine feet by the end of the dry season, despite the water used by the hydroelectric station and allowing for forty-one vessel passages through the locks each day with the full length of the chambers, or fifty-eight lockages a day when the shorter sections are used along with cross filling, which is typically the case. This is a greater number of lockages than can be achieved in one day.

Steam shovel

Steam Shovel Loading Rock

Excavator Loading Rock

These great machines, which are able to dig out and load several tons of material at each operation, made the rapid progress in digging the canal possible.

These powerful machines, capable of excavating and loading several tons of material with each operation, enabled the quick progress in digging the canal.

Gigantic Obstacles.

The greatest difficulty encountered in the excavation of the canal was due to slides and breaks which caused large masses of material to slide or move into the excavated area, closing off the drainage, upsetting steam shovels and tearing up the tracks. The greatest slide was at Cucaracha, and gave trouble when the French first began cutting in 1884. Though at first confined to a length of 800 feet, the slide extended to include the entire basin south of Gold Hill, or a length of about 3,000 feet. Some idea of the magnitude of these slides can be obtained from the fact that during the fiscal year 1910 of 14,921,750 cubic yards that were removed, 2,649,000 yards, or eighteen per cent, were from slides or breaks that had previously existed or that had developed during the year.

The biggest challenge faced during the canal excavation was caused by slides and breaks that caused large amounts of material to shift into the dug-out area, blocking drainage, tipping over steam shovels, and damaging the tracks. The largest slide occurred at Cucaracha and created issues when the French started digging in 1884. Initially limited to a length of 800 feet, the slide eventually grew to cover the entire basin south of Gold Hill, stretching about 3,000 feet. To understand the scale of these slides, it's worth noting that in the fiscal year 1910, out of 14,921,750 cubic yards removed, 2,649,000 yards, or eighteen percent, came from slides or breaks that either existed before or developed during that year.

Gatun Lock gate

One of the Guard Gates, Gatun Locks, Panama Canal

One of the Guard Gates, Gatun Locks, Panama Canal

Each lock is provided with four gates. This shows the method of construction, the gate being only partially finished.

Each lock has four gates. This illustrates the construction method, with the gate being only partially completed.

Gatun Lock gate

Gatun Upper Locks, East Chamber

Gatun Upper Locks, East Chamber

The view is looking north from the forebay showing the upper guard gates and emergency dam.

The view is looking north from the forebay, showing the upper guard gates and emergency dam.

The one greatest undertaking of the whole excavation was the Gaillard Cut. Work had been in progress on this since 1880, and during the French control over 20,000,000 cubic yards were removed. On May 4, 1904, when the United States took charge, it was estimated that there was left to excavate 150,000,000 cubic yards. Some idea of the size of this big cut may be formed from the fact that this division has within its jurisdiction over 200 miles of five-foot-gage track laid, about fifty-five miles of which is within the side slopes of the Gaillard Cut alone.

The biggest project of the entire excavation was the Gaillard Cut. Work had been ongoing since 1880, and during the French control, over 20 million cubic yards were removed. On May 4, 1904, when the United States took over, it was estimated that there were still 150 million cubic yards left to dig. To give you an idea of the size of this massive cut, this division oversees over 200 miles of five-foot-gauge track, about fifty-five miles of which is within the slopes of the Gaillard Cut alone.

Gatun Dam.

The great dam at Gatun is a veritable hill—7,500 feet over all, 2,100 feet wide at the base, 398 feet through at the water surface, and 100 feet wide at the top, which is 115 feet above sea level. The dimensions of the dam are such as to assure that ample provision is made against every force which may affect its safety, and while it is made of dirt, a thing before unheard of, it is of such vast proportions that it is as strong and firm as the everlasting hills themselves.

The huge dam at Gatun is like a massive hill—7,500 feet long, 2,100 feet wide at the base, 398 feet wide at the water surface, and 100 feet wide at the top, which sits 115 feet above sea level. The size of the dam ensures that it's designed to withstand any forces that could threaten its safety. Although it's made of dirt, which is something that sounds unusual, its enormous scale makes it as strong and stable as the eternal hills themselves.

Fluctuations in the lake due to floods are controlled by an immense spillway dam built of concrete. The front of the dam is the arc of a circle 740 feet long with fourteen openings which, when the gates are raised to the full height, permit a discharge of 140,000 cubic feet per second. The water thus discharged passes through a diversion channel in the old bed of the Chagres River, generating, by an enormous electric plant, the power necessary for operating the locks.

Fluctuations in the lake from floods are managed by a huge concrete spillway dam. The front of the dam is shaped like a 740-foot-long arc and has fourteen openings that allow a flow of 140,000 cubic feet per second when the gates are fully lifted. The released water flows through a diversion channel in the old Chagres River bed, generating the necessary power for the locks through a large electric plant.

The locks of the canal are in pairs, so that if any lock is out of service navigation will not be interrupted, also, when all the locks are in use the passage of shipping is expedited by using one set of locks for the ascent and the other for descent. These locks are 110 feet wide and have usable lengths of 1,000 feet. The system of filling adopted consists of a culvert in each side wall feeding laterals from which are openings upward into the lock chamber. The entire lock can be filled or emptied in fifteen minutes and forty-two seconds when one culvert is used and seven minutes and fifty-one seconds, using both culverts. It requires about ten hours for a large ship to make the entire trip through the canal.

The canal locks are arranged in pairs, so if one lock is out of service, navigation won’t be disrupted. Also, when all the locks are in use, shipping is sped up by using one set of locks for going up and the other for going down. These locks are 110 feet wide and have usable lengths of 1,000 feet. The filling system uses a culvert in each side wall that feeds laterals with openings leading up into the lock chamber. The entire lock can be filled or emptied in fifteen minutes and forty-two seconds when using one culvert and seven minutes and fifty-one seconds when using both culverts. It takes about ten hours for a large ship to travel the entire length of the canal.

Meeting all Emergencies.

Many extraordinary feats of engineering were accomplished to overcome the difficulties presented. Special contrivances, wonderful in their operation, were invented to meet exigencies and emergencies.

Many amazing engineering achievements were made to tackle the challenges presented. Unique devices, remarkable in their function, were created to address urgent needs and situations.

The first and greatest problem attempted by the United States was to make the Canal Zone healthful. This strip of land from ocean to ocean abounded in disease-breeding swamps and filthy habitations unfit for human beings. The death-rate was appalling and the labor conditions terrible. During the first two and a half years, therefore, all energies were devoted to ridding the Isthmus of disease by sanitation, to recruiting and organizing a working force and providing for it suitable houses, hotels, messes, kitchens and an adequate food supply. This work included clearing lands, draining and filling pools and swamps for the extermination of the mosquito, the establishment of hospitals for the care of the sick and injured and the building of suitable quarantine quarters. Municipal improvements were undertaken in Panama and Colon and the various settlements in the Canal Zone, such as the construction of reservoirs, pavements and a system of modern roads. Over 2,000 buildings were constructed besides the remodeling of 1,500 buildings turned over by the French company.

The first and biggest challenge the United States faced was making the Canal Zone healthy. This stretch of land from ocean to ocean was filled with disease-ridden swamps and unfit living conditions. The mortality rate was shocking, and working conditions were dire. Therefore, during the first two and a half years, all efforts were focused on eliminating disease through sanitation, recruiting and organizing a workforce, and providing suitable housing, hotels, dining facilities, kitchens, and enough food. This effort involved clearing land, draining and filling swamps to eradicate mosquitoes, setting up hospitals for the sick and injured, and building proper quarantine quarters. Improvements were made in Panama and Colon, as well as in various settlements within the Canal Zone, including constructing reservoirs, paving roads, and developing a modern road system. Over 2,000 buildings were built, along with the renovation of 1,500 buildings left by the French company.

Lock gate control machinery

Photograph, Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Photograph, Underwood & Underwood, New York.

Lock Gate Operating Machinery

Lock Gate Control Equipment

The great gear wheel, known as a “bull wheel,” is connected with one leaf of the gate on the right by means of a strut so that revolving the bull wheel by means of an electric motor through a train of gears results in opening or closing the gate.

The large gear wheel, called a “bull wheel,” is linked to one side of the gate on the right with a strut, so turning the bull wheel using an electric motor through a gear system opens or closes the gate.

Street paving

Panama, Past and Present

Panama: Then and Now

Scene showing the repaving of one of Panama’s old muddy streets with vitrified brick. Sewers and water pipes were laid throughout the city, resulting in a great reduction of disease.

Scene showing the resurfacing of one of Panama’s old, muddy streets with vitrified brick. Sewers and water pipes were installed throughout the city, leading to a significant decrease in disease.

It was only after all this preliminary sanitation was accomplished that the real work of digging the canal could go forward with any hope of success. These hygienic conditions had the result of making the Canal Zone one of the most healthful spots in the world, and work on the canal became so popular that it was no longer necessary to enlist recruits from the West Indies, the good pay, fair treatment and excellent living conditions bringing thousands of laborers from Spain and Italy. The greatest number employed at any one time was 45,000, of which 5,000 were American.

It was only after all this initial cleanup was done that the actual work of digging the canal could really begin with any chance of success. These sanitary conditions transformed the Canal Zone into one of the healthiest places in the world, and the work on the canal became so appealing that it was no longer necessary to recruit workers from the West Indies; the good pay, fair treatment, and excellent living conditions attracted thousands of laborers from Spain and Italy. At one point, the highest number of workers employed at the same time reached 45,000, including 5,000 Americans.

A Battle Won.

The completion of this herculean task marked an epoch in the history of the world. A gigantic battle against floods and torrents, pestilence and swamps, tropical rivers, jungles and rock-ribbed mountains had been fought—and won! Well worthy a place in the halls of immortal fame are the names of the thousands of sturdy sons who, with ingenuity, pluck and perseverance never before equaled, succeeded in making a pathway for the nations of the world from ocean to ocean.

The completion of this massive task marked a turning point in world history. A huge battle against floods and torrents, disease and swamps, tropical rivers, jungles, and rugged mountains had been fought—and won! The names of the thousands of strong individuals who, with unmatched creativity, courage, and determination, succeeded in creating a pathway for nations from ocean to ocean deserve a place in the halls of everlasting fame.

This great and daring undertaking, which had for its object the opening up of new trade routes and lines of commerce, annihilating distance and wiping out the width of two continents between New York and Yokohama and making the Atlantic seaboard and the Pacific coast close neighbors, is the climax of man’s achievement and the greatest gift to civilization. It will help in the consummation of man’s loftiest dreams of world friendship and world peace.[2] So far, in the use of the canal, over forty per cent of the vessels which have passed through it have been engaged in the coastwise trade of the United States—each of them saving about 7,800 miles on each trip. If their average speed be taken at ten knots, they have averaged a saving of over a month at sea on each voyage from coast to coast. Where formerly the round trip of a ten-knot vessel required about fifty-five days’ actual steaming, the time at sea for the same trip for the same vessel is now reduced to about twenty-two days.

This bold and ambitious project aimed to create new trade routes and connect commerce, reducing the distance between New York and Yokohama and making the Atlantic and Pacific coasts close neighbors. It represents the peak of human achievement and a significant contribution to civilization. This will help fulfill humanity's greatest aspirations for global friendship and world peace.[2] So far, over forty percent of the vessels that have used the canal have been part of the coastwise trade in the United States, each saving around 7,800 miles on their trips. If we consider an average speed of ten knots, they've saved more than a month at sea on every journey from coast to coast. Previously, the round trip for a ten-knot vessel took about fifty-five days of actual traveling; now, that same trip takes only about twenty-two days.

The canal makes San Francisco nearer to Liverpool by 5,666 miles, a saving of two-fifths of the old journey by Magellan. The distance between San Francisco and Gibraltar has been reduced from 12,571 miles to 7,621 miles, a saving of 4,950 miles, or thirty-nine per cent of the former distance.

The canal brings San Francisco 5,666 miles closer to Liverpool, cutting two-fifths off the old journey by Magellan. The distance from San Francisco to Gibraltar has been shortened from 12,571 miles to 7,621 miles, saving 4,950 miles, which is a reduction of thirty-nine percent of the previous distance.

From San Francisco to Buenos Aires, via Valparaiso and Magellan, is approximately 7,610 miles, which is shorter than the route through the canal, by which the distance is 8,941 miles. To Rio de Janeiro, the distance via Magellan is 8,609 miles; by the canal 7,885 miles. To Pernambuco, on the eastern promontory of South America, the distance via Magellan is 9,748 miles; via the canal 6,746 miles. To Para the distances via Magellan and via the canal are 10,852 and 5,642 miles, respectively.

From San Francisco to Buenos Aires, passing through Valparaiso and Magellan, is about 7,610 miles, which is shorter than the canal route, which is 8,941 miles. To Rio de Janeiro, the distance via Magellan is 8,609 miles; through the canal, it's 7,885 miles. To Pernambuco, on the eastern tip of South America, the distance via Magellan is 9,748 miles; via the canal, it's 6,746 miles. To Para, the distances via Magellan and the canal are 10,852 miles and 5,642 miles, respectively.

From San Francisco to Freetown, on the west coast of middle Africa, the distance by the most practicable route, using the Strait of Magellan, is 11,380 miles. Through the canal and by way of the island of Barbados, the distance is 7,277 miles. The new route is less than two-thirds of the former.

From San Francisco to Freetown, on the west coast of central Africa, the distance by the most practical route, via the Strait of Magellan, is 11,380 miles. Using the canal and going through the island of Barbados, the distance is 7,277 miles. The new route is less than two-thirds of the previous one.

With reference to the trade between the Atlantic coast of the United States and the west coast of South America, New York is nearer to Valparaiso by 3,717 miles by virtue of the canal; to Iquique, one of the great nitrate ports, by 4,139 miles; and to Guayaquil by 7,405 miles. From New York to Guayaquil the present distance of 2,765 miles is approximately twenty-seven per cent of the former distance—10,270 miles.

With respect to the trade between the Atlantic coast of the United States and the west coast of South America, New York is 3,717 miles closer to Valparaiso thanks to the canal; 4,139 miles closer to Iquique, one of the major nitrate ports; and 7,405 miles closer to Guayaquil. The current distance from New York to Guayaquil is 2,765 miles, which is about twenty-seven percent of the old distance—10,270 miles.

Blowing up the last barrier

Forty Tons of Dynamite Destroy the Last Barrier Between the Oceans

Forty Tons of Dynamite Removes the Last Barrier Between the Oceans

The blowing up of Gamboa Dike, the last of the dikes in the Panama Canal. This dike separated the water in the Gatun locks from Gaillard Cut. The removal of the dike by a discharge of forty tons of dynamite, set off by President Wilson, from Washington, was the last stage in the completion of the great waterway. Dredges were put to work immediately widening the channel at Cucaracha slide in Gaillard Cut, so that within a short time the canal was ready for use throughout its entire length.

The explosion of Gamboa Dike, the final dike in the Panama Canal. This dike separated the water in the Gatun locks from Gaillard Cut. The dike was removed using forty tons of dynamite, detonated by President Wilson from Washington, marking the final step in finishing the great waterway. Dredges were immediately deployed to widen the channel at Cucaracha slide in Gaillard Cut, so that soon after, the canal was ready for use along its entire length.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood.

Steam shovel at work

Steam Shovel at Work in Gaillard Cut, with Large Rock in Mouth of Shovel

Excavator Working in Gaillard Cut, Holding a Large Rock in Its Bucket

The great progress made in digging the Panama Canal was largely due to the steam shovels.

The significant progress in digging the Panama Canal was mainly because of the steam shovels.

As to the Far East, New York is nearer to Yokohama by 3,768 miles than formerly by way of the Suez Canal, but the latter route is eighteen miles shorter than the Panama route for vessels plying between New York and Hongkong. New York is forty-one miles nearer Manila by Panama than by Suez, and 3,932 miles nearer Sydney by Panama. New York is now, by virtue of the Panama Canal, nearer than Liverpool to Yokohama by 1,880 miles, and nearer than Liverpool to Sydney by 2,424 miles.

As for the Far East, New York is now 3,768 miles closer to Yokohama than it used to be through the Suez Canal, but that route is eighteen miles shorter than the Panama route for ships traveling between New York and Hong Kong. New York is forty-one miles closer to Manila via Panama than via Suez, and 3,932 miles closer to Sydney via Panama. Thanks to the Panama Canal, New York is now 1,880 miles closer to Yokohama than Liverpool and 2,424 miles closer to Sydney than Liverpool.

When the ship enters the harbor of either of the terminal ports it is boarded by officers of the canal who examine its bill of health and clearance, see that its certificate of canal measurement is properly made out, and ascertain any of the vessel’s needs in the matters of fuel, supplies, extra men to handle the lines during the passage of the locks, etc. These matters are immediately reported to the Captain of the Port, who gives the necessary orders to insure proper attendance on the vessel’s needs and directs its start through the canal whenever it is ready.

When the ship arrives at the harbor of either terminal port, canal officers board the vessel to check its health certificate and clearance, ensure its canal measurement certificate is properly filled out, and identify any needs the ship may have, such as fuel, supplies, or extra crew to handle the lines during the lock passages, etc. These details are promptly reported to the Port Captain, who issues the necessary orders to ensure the vessel's needs are met and directs its journey through the canal as soon as it's ready.

In all stages of its transit of the canal the vessel must have on board a government pilot. There is no charge for pilotage on vessels going directly through the canal without stopping to discharge cargo or passengers at the terminal ports. The pilot is on board in an advisory capacity and is required to confer with the master of the vessel, giving him the benefit of his knowledge and advice as to the handling of the vessel in the various reaches, but the master, who is best acquainted with the peculiarities of his vessel and her ways of answering the helm, is responsible for the navigation of the vessel, except when she is passing through the locks.

In all stages of its passage through the canal, the vessel must have a government pilot on board. There is no fee for pilotage for vessels going straight through the canal without stopping to unload cargo or passengers at the terminal ports. The pilot is on board to provide advice and is expected to consult with the master of the vessel, sharing his expertise and insights on maneuvering the vessel in different sections. However, the master, who knows the unique characteristics of his vessel and how it responds to the helm, is responsible for navigating the vessel, except when it is going through the locks.

The handling of a vessel during its transit of the canal is like the handling of a railway train on its “run.” The course is equipped with all requisite signals, facilities for mooring, like sidings, and a system of communication between points along the line, which includes a special telephone system connecting all the important points of control in series.

The way a ship is managed while passing through the canal is similar to how a train is handled during its journey. The route is outfitted with all necessary signals, places to dock, like sidings, and a communication system that connects various locations along the route, including a unique telephone system linking all the key control points in order.

As soon as the vessel starts on its transit of the canal, the Captain of the Port at the point of entrance telephones its starting to the other stations along the course. As the vessel arrives and departs from each of these points, the fact is telephoned along the line, so that there is exact knowledge at each station all the time of the status of traffic, and complete co-operation from the several points of control.

As soon as the ship starts its journey through the canal, the Port Captain at the entrance calls to inform the other stations along the route. When the ship arrives and departs from each of these points, the information is relayed by phone so that each station always knows the current status of traffic, ensuring full cooperation from all the control points.

The transit of the canal requires about ten hours, of which approximately three hours are spent in the locks. In the sea-level channels and Gaillard (formerly “Culebra”) Cut the speed of vessels is limited to six knots; through Gatun Lake they may make ten, twelve and fifteen knots, according to the width of the channel. A vessel may clear from the canal port at which it enters and, after passing through the last of the locks, put direct to sea without further stop.

The transit of the canal takes about ten hours, with roughly three hours spent in the locks. In the sea-level channels and Gaillard (formerly “Culebra”) Cut, vessels are limited to a speed of six knots; in Gatun Lake, they can travel at ten, twelve, or fifteen knots, depending on how wide the channel is. A vessel can leave from the canal port where it enters and, after passing through the last lock, head directly to sea without any further stops.

The handling of a vessel all through the canal, except in the locks, is essentially the same as its handling through any charted channel where observance of signals, ranges and turns is necessary. The canal channel throughout is very accurately charted, fully equipped with aids to navigation, and governed by explicit rules with which the pilots, of course, are thoroughly familiar.

The way you navigate a boat through the canal, except in the locks, is pretty much the same as navigating through any marked channel where you need to pay attention to signals, ranges, and turns. The canal channel is very precisely marked, well-equipped with navigation aids, and follows clear rules that the pilots are, of course, completely familiar with.

In the locks, the vessel is under the control of the lock-operating force. As the vessel approaches the locks, the operator in charge at the control house indicates by an electrically operated signal at the outer end of the approach wall if the vessel shall enter the locks and, if so, on which side; or if it shall keep back or moor alongside the approach wall. If everything is ready for the transit of the locks, the vessel approaches the center approach wall, which is a pier extending about a thousand feet from the locks proper, lines are thrown out, and connections are made with the electric towing locomotives on the approach wall.

In the locks, the vessel is managed by the lock-operating team. As the vessel gets closer to the locks, the operator at the control house uses an electric signal at the outer end of the approach wall to indicate whether the vessel can enter the locks, and if so, which side it should take; or if it should hold back or tie up alongside the approach wall. Once everything is ready for passing through the locks, the vessel moves towards the center approach wall, which is a pier extending about a thousand feet from the actual locks, lines are thrown out, and connections are made with the electric towing locomotives on the approach wall.

The vessel then moves forward slowly until it is in the entrance chamber, when lines are thrown out on the other side and connections are made with towing locomotives on the side wall. Six locomotives are used for the larger vessels, three on each wall of the lock chamber. Two keep forward of the vessel, pulling and holding her head to the center of the chamber; two aft, holding the vessel in check; and two slightly forward of amidships, which do most of the towing of the vessel through the chamber. The locomotives are powerful affairs, secured against slipping by the engagement of cogs with a rack running along the center of the track, and equipped with a slip drum and towing windlass, which allow the prompt paying out and taking in of hawser as required. No trouble has been experienced in maintaining absolute control over the vessels.

The vessel then moves forward slowly until it reaches the entrance chamber, at which point lines are thrown out on the other side, and connections are made with towing locomotives on the side wall. Six locomotives are used for the larger vessels, three on each wall of the lock chamber. Two are positioned in front of the vessel, pulling and keeping its head centered in the chamber; two are at the back, holding the vessel steady; and two are slightly forward of the middle, which handle most of the towing of the vessel through the chamber. The locomotives are powerful machines, secured against slipping by engaging cogs with a rack running down the center of the track, and they are equipped with a slip drum and towing windlass, allowing for quick paying out and taking in of the hawser as needed. There have been no issues maintaining complete control over the vessels.

The water within the lock chamber proper, beyond the entrance chamber, is brought to the level of that in the approach, the gates toward the vessel are opened, the fender chain is lowered, and the locomotives maneuver the vessel into the chamber and bring it to rest. The gates are then closed, the water raised or lowered, as the case may be, to the level of that in the next chamber, the gates at the other end are opened, and the vessel moved forward. Three such steps are made at Gatun, two at Miraflores, and one at Pedro Miguel.

The water in the lock chamber, past the entrance chamber, is adjusted to match the level of the approach. The gates toward the vessel are opened, the fender chain is lowered, and the locomotives guide the vessel into the chamber and bring it to a stop. The gates are then closed, the water is either raised or lowered to match the level of the next chamber, the gates on the other end are opened, and the vessel is moved forward. Three such steps are taken at Gatun, two at Miraflores, and one at Pedro Miguel.

When the vessel has passed into the approach chamber at the end of the locks, the lines from the towing locomotives on the side wall are first cast off, then those from the locomotives on the approach wall, and the vessel clears under its own power.

When the boat has entered the approach chamber at the end of the locks, the ropes from the towing locomotives on the side wall are released first, then those from the locomotives on the approach wall, and the boat moves away under its own power.

Towing is not ordinarily required in any part of the canal, except in the locks, for steam or motor vessels. Tug service for sailing ships or vessels without motive power is at the rate of $15 per hour. If the channel in the cut has been disturbed by a slide, tugs may be used to handle vessels past the narrow places, but in such cases there is no charge for the service to vessels of less than 15,000 gross tonnage.

Towing is usually not necessary in any part of the canal, except in the locks, for steam or motor vessels. Tug service for sailing ships or vessels without their own power costs $15 per hour. If the channel in the cut has been affected by a slide, tugs may be used to assist vessels through the narrow areas, but in these cases, there is no charge for the service for vessels under 15,000 gross tonnage.


What is a Geyser?

The famous geyser shown in the illustration is called “Old Faithful” because of the clock-like regularity of its eruptions. For over twenty years it has been spouting at average intervals of sixty-five minutes.

The famous geyser shown in the illustration is called “Old Faithful” because of the predictable timing of its eruptions. For more than twenty years, it has been erupting at average intervals of sixty-five minutes.

Geysers were first observed in Iceland and the name, therefore, comes from that language, being derived from the word “geysa,” meaning “to gush” or “rush forth.” That is just what they do.

Geysers were first observed in Iceland, so the name comes from that language, derived from the word “geysa,” which means “to gush” or “rush forth.” That’s exactly what they do.

There are really three different kinds of geysers; one which throws up hot water, either continually or, like “Old Faithful,” at intervals; one which simply emits steam and no water and one which is a sort of a hot-water cistern.

There are actually three different types of geysers: one that shoots up hot water, either continuously or, like “Old Faithful,” at specific intervals; one that just releases steam without any water; and one that acts like a hot-water reservoir.

The “Grand Geyser” at Firehole Basin in Yellowstone Park is the most magnificent natural fountain in the whole world. The “Great Geyser” and the “New Geyser” are the most remarkable ones in Iceland, where there are about a hundred altogether. The basin of the former is about seventy feet in diameter, and at times it throws up a column of hot water to the height of from eighty to two hundred feet in the air.

The “Grand Geyser” at Firehole Basin in Yellowstone Park is the most impressive natural fountain in the world. The “Great Geyser” and the “New Geyser” are the most notable ones in Iceland, where there are around a hundred in total. The basin of the former is about seventy feet across, and at times it shoots a column of hot water up to heights of eighty to two hundred feet in the air.

The hot-lake district of Auckland, New Zealand, is also famous in possessing some of the most remarkable geyser scenery in the world. It was formerly noted for the number of natural terraces containing hot water pools, and its lakes all filled at intervals by boiling geysers and hot springs, but the formation of the country was considerably altered by a disastrous volcanic outbreak in 1886, its beautiful pink and white terraces being destroyed. It still has, however, a circular rocky basin, forty feet in diameter, in which a violent geyser is constantly boiling up to the height of ten to twelve feet, emitting dense clouds of steam. This is one of the natural wonders of the southern hemisphere and is much visited by tourists traveling through New Zealand.

The hot-lake district of Auckland, New Zealand, is also known for having some of the most impressive geyser scenery in the world. It used to be famous for its many natural terraces with hot water pools, and its lakes were regularly filled by boiling geysers and hot springs. However, a devastating volcanic eruption in 1886 significantly changed the landscape, destroying its beautiful pink and white terraces. Still, it features a circular rocky basin, forty feet wide, where a powerful geyser constantly erupts to a height of ten to twelve feet, releasing thick clouds of steam. This is one of the natural wonders of the southern hemisphere and attracts many tourists traveling through New Zealand.

Erupting geyser

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

“Old Faithful” in Eruption

“Old Faithful” Erupting

What Kind of Dogs are Prairie-Dogs?

Prairie-dogs are not really dogs at all, but a kind of a squirrel called a marmot. As the visitors to city Zoological Parks already know, these animals make little mounds of earth, and a great many of these are found in one locality, which is known as a “dog-town.” It is possible to travel for days at a time through country which is dotted over with mounds, every one of which is the home of a pair or more of prairie-dogs. These mounds are usually about eighteen feet apart, and consist of about as much earth as would fill a very large wheelbarrow. This is thrown up by the prairie-dog when he digs out his subterranean home. His dwelling sometimes has one entrance and sometimes two, and there are many much-traveled paths between the different hillocks, showing that they are very neighborly and sociable with one another.

Prairie dogs aren’t really dogs at all; they’re a type of squirrel known as a marmot. As visitors to city zoos already know, these animals create little mounds of earth, and you can find a lot of them in one area, which is referred to as a “dog-town.” You can travel for days through land scattered with mounds, each of which is the home to a pair or more of prairie dogs. These mounds are usually about eighteen feet apart and contain as much earth as would fill a large wheelbarrow. This earth is pushed up by the prairie dog when it digs out its underground home. Its dwelling can have one or sometimes two entrances, and there are many well-worn paths connecting the different mounds, showing that they are very friendly and sociable with each other.

In choosing a town site, they select one which is covered with short, coarse grass, such as is found especially in fields on high ground and mountain sides, for it is on this grass and certain roots that the prairie-dogs feed. On the plains of New Mexico, where for miles you will not find a drop of water unless you dig down into the earth for a hundred feet or so, with no rain for several months at a time, there are many very large “dog-towns,” and it is, therefore, clear that they are able to live without drinking, obtaining enough moisture for their needs from a heavy fall of dew.

In choosing a town site, they pick one that has short, coarse grass, particularly found in fields on high ground and mountainsides, because this grass and certain roots are what the prairie-dogs eat. On the plains of New Mexico, where you can go miles without finding any water unless you dig down into the ground for about a hundred feet, and with no rain for several months, there are many large “dog-towns.” This shows that they can survive without drinking, getting enough moisture for their needs from a heavy dew.

At about the end of October, when the grass dries up and the ground becomes frozen hard, so that digging is out of the question, the prairie-dog creeps into his burrow, blocking up the opening in order to keep out the cold and make everything snug, and goes to sleep until the following spring, without having had to lay up a store of food, as some animals do, to last him through the long, hard winter months. If he opens up his house again before the end of cold weather, the Indians say it is a sure sign that warmer days are near at hand.

At the end of October, when the grass dries up and the ground hardens from the frost, making digging impossible, the prairie dog crawls into its burrow, sealing off the entrance to keep out the cold and create a cozy environment. It then goes to sleep until the next spring, not having stored any food like some animals do to survive the long, harsh winter months. If it comes out of its burrow before winter is over, the Indians say it's a definite sign that warmer days are on the way.

If one approaches very cautiously so as not to be observed, a large “dog-town” presents a very curious sight. A happy, animated scene stretches away as far as the eye can see. Little prairie-dogs are found everywhere, on the top of their mounds, sitting up like squirrels, waving their tails from side to side and yelping to each other, until a most cheerful-sounding concert is produced. If you listen carefully, as you draw nearer, however, you will notice a different tone in the calls of the older and more experienced animals, and that is the warning signal for the whole population to disappear from view into their burrows. Then, if one hides quietly in the background and waits patiently for some time, sentinels will mount up to their posts of observation on top of the mounds and announce that it is safe to come out of their burrows and play about again, as the danger is past.

If you approach very carefully so you won’t be seen, a large “dog-town” is quite a sight. A lively, happy scene stretches out as far as you can see. Little prairie dogs are everywhere, perched on top of their mounds, sitting up like squirrels, wagging their tails back and forth and yipping to each other, creating a cheerful-sounding concert. But if you listen closely as you get closer, you’ll notice a different tone in the calls of the older, more experienced animals; that’s the warning signal for everyone to quickly disappear into their burrows. Then, if you hide quietly in the background and wait patiently for a while, sentinels will climb to their lookout spots on top of the mounds and let everyone know it’s safe to come out and play again since the danger has passed.

What is Spontaneous Combustion?

Spontaneous combustion is the burning of a substance or body by the internal development of heat without the application of fire.

Spontaneous combustion is the burning of a substance or material caused by the internal buildup of heat without any external fire.

It not infrequently takes place among heaps of rags, wool and cotton when sodden with oil; hay and straw when damp or moistened with water; and coal in the bunkers of vessels.

It often happens among piles of rags, wool, and cotton when soaked with oil; hay and straw when wet or damp; and coal in the storage areas of ships.

In the first case, the oil rapidly combines with the oxygen of the air, this being accompanied by great heat. In the second case, the heat is produced by a kind of fermentation; and in the third, by the pyrites of the coal rapidly absorbing and combining with the oxygen of the air.

In the first case, the oil quickly mixes with the oxygen in the air, which generates a lot of heat. In the second case, the heat is generated through a type of fermentation; and in the third, it's produced by the pyrites in the coal quickly absorbing and combining with the oxygen in the air.

The term is also applied to the extraordinary phenomenon of the human body, which has been told of some people, whereby it is reduced to ashes without the application of fire. It is said to have occurred in the aged and persons that were fat and hard drinkers, but most chemists reject the theory and altogether discredit it.

The term is also used to describe the remarkable phenomenon of the human body, where some individuals reportedly turn to ash without any fire involved. It is said to happen among the elderly, as well as those who are overweight and heavy drinkers, but most chemists dismiss this theory and completely discredit it.


The Story in the Talking Machine[3]

As far back as 1855 inventors were experimenting with talking machines; but nothing practical was accomplished till 1877, when Thomas A. Edison constructed a primitive machine capable of recording and reproducing sounds. In the early Edison phonograph the sound vibrations were registered on a tinfoil-covered cylinder. Busy with other inventions, he postponed developing the idea of a talking machine; and meantime other brains were at work on the problem.

As early as 1855, inventors were experimenting with talking machines, but nothing practical was achieved until 1877, when Thomas A. Edison built a basic machine that could record and play back sounds. In the first Edison phonograph, sound vibrations were captured on a cylinder covered in tinfoil. While he focused on other inventions, he put off further development of the talking machine idea, and during that time, others were also working on the challenge.

Talking machine Old graphophone
First Practical Voice Recording Device One of the First Types of Spring Motor Graphophones

In 1885 Chichester A. Bell (cousin of Alexander Graham Bell, of telephone fame) and Charles Sumner Tainter invented the “graphophone.” This was the first practical and commercially usable talking machine. The experiments and discoveries resulting in the production of the Bell and Tainter graphophone were made in the laboratories of Alexander Graham Bell, near Washington, D. C., and the latter assisted and advised with the inventors, and on his own behalf conducted experiments which were productive of highly important results in the art of recording and reproducing sound.

In 1885, Chichester A. Bell (cousin of Alexander Graham Bell, famous for inventing the telephone) and Charles Sumner Tainter created the “graphophone.” This was the first practical and commercially viable talking machine. The experiments and discoveries that led to the development of the Bell and Tainter graphophone took place in Alexander Graham Bell's labs near Washington, D.C. He helped and advised the inventors, and also conducted his own experiments that yielded significant breakthroughs in the field of recording and reproducing sound.

The Bell and Tainter patent was granted in 1886, and although the subject of much controversy, it has been repeatedly sustained by the United States courts, and in one case (87 F. R. 873) Judge Shipman had to consider all that other inventors had done or attempted to do, and he there decided that Bell and Tainter were the first to make “an actual living invention which the public was able to use.”

The Bell and Tainter patent was granted in 1886, and despite being the center of a lot of debate, it has consistently been upheld by U.S. courts. In one case (87 F. R. 873), Judge Shipman had to evaluate everything that other inventors had done or tried to do, and he concluded that Bell and Tainter were the first to create “an actual living invention that the public could use.”

Oscar Seagle singing

Oscar Seagle, the Well-Known Soloist, Recording

Oscar Seagle, the Renowned Soloist, Recording

The artist stands before the horn and his every note is recorded with a fidelity startling in the extreme.

The artist stands in front of the horn, and every note he plays is captured with an astonishing level of clarity.

This method covered “a method of engraving records of sound, producing records of sound by engraving in a wax-like material which would permit of the handling, using and transporting of the record.” Another United States patent, covering a method of duplicating or copying sound records, was granted to Charles Sumner Tainter in 1886.

This method described “a way to engrave sound recordings, creating sound records by etching into a wax-like material that allows for handling, use, and transport of the record.” Another U.S. patent, related to a method for duplicating or copying sound records, was issued to Charles Sumner Tainter in 1886.

Macdonald graphophone

The Macdonald Graphophone Grand

The Macdonald Graphophone Grand

Of course the talking machine of to-day is a long way removed from the early Edison and the early Bell and Tainter machines, because many master minds have been working on the problem of developing and maturing the art of sound recording and reproducing, and in perfecting machines to be used in reproducing the sound records after they have been made.

Of course, today’s talking machine is a far cry from the early Edison and the early Bell and Tainter machines, as many brilliant minds have been focused on solving the challenges of developing and improving the art of sound recording and reproduction, as well as perfecting the machines used to play back sound records after they've been created.

Disk records have taken the place of the old-style cylinder records, the latter being confined for the most part to dictating machines for office use, as the Dictaphone, which has largely displaced the shorthand writer in many business houses.

Disk records have replaced the old-style cylinder records, which are mostly limited to dictation machines for office use, like the Dictaphone, that has largely taken over the role of the shorthand writer in many businesses.

Recording a band

In Band and Orchestra Recording each Instrument is at a Different Elevation

In Band and Orchestra Recording, each instrument is at a different height.

Leopold Godowsky recording

Leopold Godowsky, One of the World’s Greatest Pianists, Making a Record

Leopold Godowsky, One of the World's Greatest Pianists, Recording an Album

The bell at the left is rung to advise the artist that the recorder is ready and the flashing of the light at the right is the signal to begin playing.

The bell on the left rings to let the artist know that the recorder is ready, and the flashing light on the right signals the start of the performance.

Since the original Thomas A. Edison patents and the Bell and Tainter patent there have been many thousands granted, but only a few need be referred to as constituting the milestones in the evolution and development of the art and industry.

Since the original Thomas A. Edison patents and the Bell and Tainter patent, many thousands have been granted, but only a few are important enough to be highlighted as milestones in the evolution and development of the art and industry.

First in point of time and importance is the Macdonald Spring Motor, the invention of Thomas Hood Macdonald, a prolific inventor and contributor of many valuable improvements to the talking machine art and industry. The Bell and Tainter machine was operated by a storage battery and this was an inconvenient and expensive form of power. To meet this condition the Macdonald Spring Motor was invented and from the start proved a tremendous success. Today most of the clockwork motor talking machines are built upon the principles disclosed in the Macdonald Spring Motor patent.

First in terms of timing and significance is the Macdonald Spring Motor, created by Thomas Hood Macdonald, a talented inventor who contributed many valuable improvements to the talking machine field. The Bell and Tainter machine was powered by a storage battery, which was both inconvenient and costly. To address this issue, the Macdonald Spring Motor was invented and from the outset, it was a huge success. Today, most clockwork motor talking machines are based on the principles outlined in the Macdonald Spring Motor patent.

Modern talking machine

An Up-to-Date Talking Machine Model

A Modern Talking Machine Model

The next important step was the discovery by Macdonald that a critical speed for the surface of the record must be obtained in order to secure best results, and this wonderful principle in the art of sound recording was protected by United States patent issued to Macdonald covering what is known as the Macdonald Graphophone Grand. This discovery and invention has been largely instrumental in the rapid development of sound recording.

The next important step was Macdonald's discovery that a specific speed for the surface of the record had to be achieved to get the best results. This incredible principle in sound recording was secured by a United States patent issued to Macdonald for what is known as the Macdonald Graphophone Grand. This discovery and invention have played a significant role in the rapid advancement of sound recording.

Although Bell and Tainter disclosed a method of recording sound on a flat surface, all of the earlier forms of talking-machine records were what are known as cylindrical, records in a cylindrical form. Later the disc record came into use and is now the most popular form. Relatively very few cylinder records are manufactured at the present time. The process of sound recording, as applied to disc records, is covered by United States patent to J. W. Jones, and marks a further important stage in the development of the art and industry.

Although Bell and Tainter revealed a way to record sound on a flat surface, all earlier versions of talking-machine records were cylindrical, meaning they were made in a cylindrical shape. Later, the disc record became popular and is now the most common format. Nowadays, very few cylinder records are produced. The method of sound recording for disc records is protected by a United States patent granted to J. W. Jones, marking a significant advancement in the evolution of this technology and industry.

In present-day sound recording the operation is briefly as follows: A recording machine is employed on which is mounted a rotating turntable carrying a wax-like disc blank. Suspended above, but in contact with the surface of the blank, is a recording needle or stylus, attached to a diaphragm which, in turn, is connected to an amplifying horn. The horn extends beyond the machine and the singer, band or orchestra is stationed in front of the mouth of this horn. As the singer interprets the song the vibrations set up by the singer’s voice are communicated to the diaphragm by the passage of the sound through the horn. These vibrations, striking upon the diaphragm, set in motion the recording needle or stylus, causing it to move rapidly, and its motion is traced upon the surface of the rotating disc in a line which is known as the sound line. Looked at with the naked eye this line has the appearance of a spiral traced upon the surface of the wax-like blank, but examined under a magnifying glass it shows myriad little indentations or grooves in the wall of the sound line. These indentations correspond to the vibrations imparted to the needle through the diaphragm, and are the recorded sounds made by the singer or band. When the song or selection is finished the surface of the wax-like blank has been covered over with this spiral sound line. The blank has become the “master record,” and the first stage of producing a talking-machine record has been passed. The next step is to secure from this master record a metallic counterpart or shell. This is done by the electro-plating process. When the shell is secured the next step is to provide a matrix which serves as a die or stamp from which to press copies or duplicates of the master record. These copies or duplicates are the talking-machine records which the public ultimately purchases. The matrix or die is placed in a power press and the records pressed from the material used in making the sound records. This material is prepared in a plastic form so that it can be forced under pressure into every line and indentation on the face of the matrix.

In today's sound recording, the process is essentially as follows: A recording machine is used that has a rotating turntable holding a wax-like disc blank. Above it, in contact with the surface of the blank, is a recording needle or stylus connected to a diaphragm, which is linked to an amplifying horn. The horn extends outward from the machine, and the singer, band, or orchestra stands in front of it. As the singer performs, the vibrations created by their voice travel through the horn to the diaphragm. These vibrations cause the recording needle or stylus to move quickly, tracing a line known as the sound line on the rotating disc. To the naked eye, this line looks like a spiral etched on the wax-like blank, but under a magnifying glass, it reveals countless tiny indentations or grooves along the sound line. These indentations reflect the vibrations transferred to the needle via the diaphragm, capturing the sounds made by the singer or band. Once the song is finished, the surface of the wax-like blank is covered by this spiral sound line, turning it into the “master record,” completing the first stage of producing a talking-machine record. The next step is to create a metallic counterpart or shell from this master record using an electro-plating process. After securing the shell, the following step is to create a matrix, which acts as a die or stamp for producing copies or duplicates of the master record. These copies or duplicates are the talking-machine records that the public ultimately buys. The matrix or die is placed in a power press, and records are pressed from the material used to make the sound records. This material is made in a plastic form so that it can be forced under pressure into every line and indentation on the matrix's surface.

Barrere recoding flute music

Instrumental Music is Recorded as Faithfully as Vocal

Instrumental music is recorded just as accurately as vocal music.

Barrere, the great flute player and orchestra leader, is shown making a popular record.

Barrere, the amazing flute player and orchestra leader, is seen making a popular record.

The discovery of the art of recording and reproducing sound; the development of that art into a giant industry, and the present-day universal sovereignty of the talking machine are tributes to American inventive genius and American industrial enterprise. The contributions to the art and the improvements in the manufacture of talking machines and talking-machine records from sources outside of the United States have been very unimportant. The industry employs many thousands of people in the manufacture of these instruments and records which afford entertainment, instruction and amusement to the entire world.

The discovery of how to record and reproduce sound, the growth of that discovery into a huge industry, and the current dominance of the talking machine are testaments to American creativity and industrial innovation. Contributions to the art and advancements in making talking machines and records from outside the United States have been relatively minor. This industry employs thousands of people in producing these devices and records, which provide entertainment, education, and enjoyment to people all over the world.


What are Petrified Forests?

In the first place, petrification is the name we give to the animal and vegetable bodies which have, by slow process, been converted into stone. We mean very much the same thing when we refer to “Fossil Forests.”

In the first place, petrification is the term we use for animal and plant bodies that have slowly turned into stone. We mean pretty much the same thing when we talk about “Fossil Forests.”

Although in most instances there are comparatively few traces of its vegetable origin left, coal owes its existence primarily to the vast masses of vegetable matter deposited through the luxuriant growth of plants in former epochs of the earth’s history, and since slowly converted into a petrified state.

Although in most cases there are relatively few signs of its plant origin left, coal exists mainly due to the large amounts of plant material that accumulated from the abundant growth of vegetation in earlier periods of the earth's history, and has since been gradually transformed into a solid state.

Coal fields today present abundant indications of the existence of huge ancient forests, usually in the form of coal formed from the roots of the trees. Several such forests have been uncovered, of which one in Nova Scotia is a good example, remains of trees having been found there, six to eight feet high, one tree even measuring twenty-five feet in height and four feet in diameter.

Coal fields today show plenty of evidence of large ancient forests, typically found in the form of coal created from the trees' roots. Many of these forests have been discovered, with one notable example in Nova Scotia, where remains of trees have been found standing six to eight feet tall, and one tree even measuring twenty-five feet in height and four feet in diameter.

The remains of a fossil forest have been found in an upright position in France, and in a colliery in England, in a space of about one-quarter of an acre, there have been found the fossilized stumps of seventy-three trees, with roots attached, and broken-off trunks lying about, one of them thirty feet long and all of them turned into coal.

The remains of a fossil forest have been discovered standing upright in France, and at a mine in England, fossilized stumps from seventy-three trees have been found within an area of about a quarter of an acre. These stumps still have their roots attached, and there are broken trunks scattered around, one of which is thirty feet long, and all of them have turned into coal.

A remarkable group of petrified trees, some of them twelve feet in diameter, exists in California, and another in Yellowstone Park, in which the trees are still erect, though converted into stone. An extraordinary forest of such trees has been found in Arizona, lying over a wide space of ground, some of them six feet in diameter and perfectly preserved.

A remarkable group of fossilized trees, some as wide as twelve feet, can be found in California, and another group in Yellowstone Park, where the trees are still standing but have turned to stone. An amazing forest of these trees has also been discovered in Arizona, spread across a large area, with some measuring six feet in diameter and perfectly preserved.

These trees are rather mineralized than fossilized. They are found in volcanic regions and are supposed to be due to the action of hot water, which carried off the organic material and deposited dissolved silica in its place. In some instances the wood has been converted into solid jasper or has been changed into opal or agate, or filled with chalcedony or crystallized quartz, with beautifully variegated colors.

These trees are more mineralized than fossilized. They’re found in volcanic areas and are believed to be the result of hot water action, which washed away the organic material and replaced it with dissolved silica. In some cases, the wood has turned into solid jasper or has transformed into opal or agate, or been filled with chalcedony or crystallized quartz, showcasing beautifully varied colors.

Petrified trees in Arizona

Trees that have Turned to Stone

Trees That Have Turned to Stone

A scene in one of the Petrified Forests of Arizona. Broken trunks of trees are lying all about.

A scene in one of the Petrified Forests in Arizona. Broken tree trunks are scattered everywhere.

What Animals are the Best Architects?

Animals of a great many different kinds have helped show man the way, in taking advantage of the opportunities which nature affords him to feed, clothe and protect himself, but one of the smallest of the animal kingdom is probably the cleverest of all—the spider. Spiders have many different kinds of enemies, ranging from man down to the very smallest, but dangerous, insects, and most of their enemies possess enormous advantages over them in either strength or agility, or both combined; enemies with wings, swift in movement and able to retreat where the spider cannot follow them; enemies clad in an impenetrable coat of armor, against which the spider’s weapons are powerless, while the spider’s own body is soft and vulnerable. These handicaps have been met by the spider with a multitude of clever contrivances, and if invention and skill are to be regarded as an index to intellectual development, it should be very significant to realize how far spiders are ahead of our near relatives, the almost human members of the monkey family.

Animals of all kinds have helped guide humans in using the opportunities nature offers to feed, clothe, and protect themselves, but one of the smallest creatures in the animal kingdom is likely the smartest of them all—the spider. Spiders face many different enemies, from humans to tiny yet dangerous insects, and most of these foes have huge advantages in strength, agility, or both. There are enemies with wings, quick to move and able to escape where the spider can’t follow, and enemies with impenetrable armor that render the spider’s defenses useless, while the spider itself is soft and vulnerable. To overcome these challenges, spiders have developed numerous clever strategies, and if creativity and skill are seen as signs of intelligence, it’s notable just how much further spiders have advanced compared to our closest relatives, the nearly human members of the monkey family.

One of the most interesting of the spider race is the “trap-door” spider which inhabits warm countries all over the earth. The “trap-door” spider not only builds a home for herself by digging a deep hole in the ground and lining it with silk to prevent the sides from falling in, but she also adds a neat little door to keep out the rain and other troublesome things. She usually chooses sloping ground for her homestead so that the door, which she fastens at the edge of its highest point by a strong silk-elastic hinge, swings shut of its own weight after being opened. She disguises the entrance to her home in a manner superior to the famous art of concealment practiced by the Indians, by planting moss on the outside of the door—living moss taken from the immediate neighborhood—so that the entrance to her house harmonizes perfectly with its surroundings, its discovery being made more difficult by the fact that in her careful selection of a site for her dwelling she also appears to be influenced by the presence of patches of white lichen which distract the eye.

One of the most fascinating types of spiders is the “trap-door” spider, which lives in warm regions all over the world. The “trap-door” spider not only creates a home by digging a deep hole in the ground and lining it with silk to keep the walls from collapsing, but she also adds a tidy little door to shield her home from rain and other nuisances. She typically selects sloping ground for her home so that the door, which she secures at the top with a sturdy silk hinge, closes by itself after being opened. She camouflages the entrance to her home in a way that surpasses the well-known concealment skills of Native Americans by placing living moss from the nearby area on the outside of the door, making the entrance blend perfectly with its surroundings. The difficulty in finding her home is further enhanced by the fact that she seems to consider patches of white lichen in her choice of location, which distract the eye.

The male spider does not seem to take any part in designing, constructing or decorating the home and does not even share its occupancy, leaving it to the mother and her family—often forty or more children at a time—and living a vagrant life, camping out in holes and ditches when he is not tramping around over the whole countryside. The mother spider, however, like many other animals, takes excellent charge of her children, and guards them carefully from all harm. At the first sign of a commotion going on outside her front door she is known to invariably assemble her family behind her, out of harm’s way, and then place her back against the swinging door, holding it shut with some of her feet and clinging tightly to the inner walls of her home with the others.

The male spider doesn’t seem to be involved in building, designing, or decorating the home and doesn’t even share the space, leaving it to the mother and her brood—often forty or more kids at a time—while he leads a wandering life, camping in holes and ditches when he’s not roaming around the countryside. The mother spider, however, like many other animals, takes great care of her young and protects them from all dangers. At the first sign of trouble outside her door, she’s known to quickly gather her family behind her, keeping them safe, and then positions herself against the swinging door, holding it shut with some of her legs while gripping the inner walls of her home with the others.

There is one kind of spider which has developed an even more elaborate style of architecture, digging another room and adding an upper side gallery to her main residence, and placing a second door at the junction of the two tunnels. The doors are made to swing back and forth in both directions, and she constructs a handle on the outer one, by which she fastens it open with a few threads attached to any convenient grass stems or little stones, when she expects to come home from a hunting expedition with her arms full. If a dangerous enemy threatens her home she usually retreats to the second room, in the hope that he will decide she is out and depart in search of another victim elsewhere, but if he discovers her secret, she slams the second swinging door in his face. Should she be beaten in the pushing match at that point, she slips into the upper side gallery opening above the door, and her enemy’s presence within the inner room automatically blocks the entrance to her hiding place by holding up the swinging door across its only opening.

There’s a type of spider that has created a more complex home, digging an extra room and adding an upper gallery to her main living space, along with a second door at the point where the two tunnels meet. The doors can swing both ways, and she makes a handle on the outer one, which she ties open with a few threads attached to nearby grass stems or small stones when she comes back from a hunt with her legs full. If a dangerous enemy threatens her home, she usually retreats to the second room, hoping they’ll think she’s gone and leave to find another target. But if they find her out, she quickly slams the second swinging door in their face. If she loses that struggle, she can slip into the upper gallery above the door, and her enemy's presence inside the inner room automatically blocks the entrance to her hiding spot by keeping the swinging door closed.


The Story of the Motorcycle[4]

Interest in the development of mechanically propelled two-wheel vehicles began soon after the introduction of the bicycle in its first practicable form. Man’s natural dislike for manual labor quickly found objection to the physical effort of bicycle travel, and accordingly sought to devise mechanical means of overcoming it.

Interest in the development of motorized two-wheel vehicles started shortly after the bicycle was first made practical. People’s natural dislike for manual labor quickly led to resistance against the physical effort required for biking, prompting a quest to create mechanical solutions to ease that effort.

Copeland motorcycle

Copeland Model, 1884

Copeland Model, 1884

The earliest known attempt to construct a two-wheel vehicle which would proceed under its own power was made by W. W. Austin, of Winthrop, Mass., in the year 1868. This crude affair consisted of a small velocipede upon which was mounted a crude coal-burning steam engine. The piston rods of the engine were connected directly with cranks on the rear wheel. The boiler was hung between the two wheels and directly back of the saddle, while the engine cylinders were placed slightly above horizontal just behind the boiler. Despite the crudity of this outfit, Austin claimed that he had traveled some 2,200 miles on this, the “granddaddy” of all motorcycles.

The earliest known attempt to build a two-wheel vehicle that could move by itself was made by W. W. Austin, from Winthrop, Mass., in 1868. This rudimentary design featured a small velocipede with a basic coal-burning steam engine mounted on it. The engine's piston rods were directly connected to cranks on the rear wheel. The boiler was positioned between the two wheels and just behind the seat, while the engine cylinders were placed slightly above horizontal, just behind the boiler. Despite its rough construction, Austin claimed he had traveled about 2,200 miles on what he called the "granddaddy" of all motorcycles.

Austin steam motorcycle Roper motorcycle
Austin Steam Bicycle, 1868 Roper's Machine, 1886

L. D. and W. E. Copeland, two Californian experimenters, are credited with the next known effort to produce a two-wheeler which would travel by its own power. Their first model appeared in 1884. The bicycle to which this miniature steam-power plant of the Copeland brothers’ invention was attached was one of the old high-wheel models with the small steering wheel forward. The steam engine of this truly ingenious contrivance, together with the boiler and the driving pulley, weighed[53] only sixteen ounces. The Copeland model was probably the first motorcycle to use belt drive. It should be understood that propulsion of this first Copeland model was not intended to depend solely upon mechanical power, but to be operated in connection with the foot pedals.

L. D. and W. E. Copeland, two experimenters from California, are credited with the next known attempt to create a two-wheeler that could move under its own power. Their first model came out in 1884. The bicycle that featured this small steam power system created by the Copeland brothers was one of the old high-wheel designs with a small steering wheel in front. The steam engine, along with the boiler and the driving pulley, weighed[53] only sixteen ounces. The Copeland model was likely the first motorcycle to use belt drive. It's important to note that the propulsion of this initial Copeland model wasn't meant to rely solely on mechanical power; it was designed to work with foot pedals too.

The Copeland brothers are to be credited with the first attempt to produce the motorcycle upon a commercial basis, but their efforts were unsuccessful. Their invention seemed to be far ahead of the times, and their project passed by unappreciated.

The Copeland brothers should be recognized for their initial effort to create motorcycles for commercial sale, but their attempts failed. Their invention appeared to be well ahead of its time, and their project went unappreciated.

In 1886, S. H. Roper, of Roxbury, Mass., appeared with a steam-propelled bicycle which consisted of a specially designed engine placed in a bicycle frame of the type with which we are familiar today. This invention was awkward, and its weight of 150 pounds made it difficult to handle, but in spite of that its inventor is said to have obtained considerable use from it.

In 1886, S. H. Roper from Roxbury, Mass., showcased a steam-powered bicycle that included a specially designed engine fitted into a bicycle frame similar to what we know today. This invention was clumsy, and its weight of 150 pounds made it hard to manage, but despite that, its inventor reportedly got quite a bit of use out of it.

Pennington motorcycle

The Pennington Motorcycle, 1895

The Pennington Motorcycle, 1895

The year 1895 saw the first public exhibition of mechanically operated two-wheel vehicles held at Madison Square Garden, New York City. The sensation of the show was a motorcycle which was presented by E. J. Pennington of Cleveland. This was the first public appearance of a cycle propelled by a combustion engine, and in that regard it may be called the first appearance of the motorcycle in the form that it is known today. The Pennington machine was the first-known vehicle to attempt the use of gasoline. History fails to relate a great deal about the mechanical detail of the Pennington model, but it is said to have made a very creditable performance in exhibition. It appeared at the Madison Square Garden in two forms, as a single motorcycle and as a motor tandem.

The year 1895 marked the first public exhibition of mechanically operated two-wheeled vehicles at Madison Square Garden in New York City. The highlight of the show was a motorcycle introduced by E. J. Pennington from Cleveland. This was the first public display of a bike powered by a combustion engine, making it the first appearance of the motorcycle as we know it today. The Pennington machine was the first-known vehicle to use gasoline. There's not much detailed information about the mechanics of the Pennington model, but it reportedly performed quite well during the exhibition. It was showcased at Madison Square Garden in two versions: as a single motorcycle and as a motor tandem.

Hedstrom motorcycle tandem

Hedstrom Motor Tandem, 1898

Hedstrom Motor Tandem, 1898

There was little or no interest in motor vehicles of any description in that period of the early nineties, consequently the Pennington efforts were fruitless. Shortly after the public exhibition of his models, financial difficulties are said to have overtaken Pennington and he is reported to have departed suddenly for foreign climes, bringing his experiments to an abrupt end.

There was almost no interest in cars of any kind in the early nineties, so Pennington's efforts didn’t pay off. Shortly after his models were displayed to the public, it is said that financial troubles hit Pennington, and he is reported to have left unexpectedly for another country, abruptly ending his experiments.

Indian big twin motorcycle

A Big Twin Model

A Big Twin Model

Indian Featherweight motorcycle

An Up-to-date “Featherweight” Model

An Updated “Featherweight” Model

Along in the late nineties a keen interest in bicycle racing led to the introduction of what is known as the motor-paced tandem. This consisted of a regulation tandem bicycle on which was mounted a gasoline motor geared up to the rear wheel with a chain drive. The tandem rider on the forward seat did the steering and the foot pedaling, and the rear rider operated the motor. It is believed that the first of these tandems came over here from France.

In the late nineties, a strong interest in bicycle racing led to the creation of what’s known as the motor-paced tandem. This was a standard tandem bicycle equipped with a gasoline motor that was connected to the rear wheel via a chain drive. The rider in the front seat steered and pedaled, while the rider in the back controlled the motor. It’s thought that the first of these tandems came over from France.

By 1898 the popularity of the motor-paced racing bicycle became so great that attention was soon directed toward their manufacture. Chief among the bicycle manufacturers who took up the making of the motor-paced tandem was Oscar Hedstrom, a racer with many notable victories to his credit. He believed that he could make a motor tandem which would prove far superior to any other American machine made, if not better even than any foreign machine.

By 1898, the popularity of motor-paced racing bicycles had grown so much that people quickly started focusing on their production. Leading the way among the bicycle manufacturers who began producing motor-paced tandems was Oscar Hedstrom, a racer with numerous impressive victories. He believed he could create a motor tandem that would be far superior to any other American model, and maybe even better than any imported ones.

Cradle spring frame

Cradle Spring Frame Construction

Cradle Spring Frame Build

The machine which he produced with a motor of his own design was entered in some big races at the Pan-American Exposition in Buffalo in 1901 where nearly every record was broken. Mr. Hedstrom’s partner on this tandem outfit was Henshaw, a bicycle racer of some repute. Following their début on the motor tandem at Buffalo, this pair proceeded to make records throughout the country, several of which still stand today.

The machine he created with a motor he designed himself was entered in major races at the Pan-American Exposition in Buffalo in 1901, where nearly every record was broken. Mr. Hedstrom's partner in this tandem setup was Henshaw, a well-known bicycle racer. After their debut on the motor tandem at Buffalo, this duo went on to set records across the country, several of which still stand today.

In 1901 a bicycle manufacturer of Springfield, Mass., foresaw a future for a motorcycle designed for pleasure purposes instead of exclusively for racing. Hitherto, all motor-propelled cycles had used the power of the engine of whatever form it was merely as an aid to locomotion. None had been successful in producing a machine that could proceed anywhere solely under its own power. Convinced that such a machine could be produced, and certain that it would find a ready market, this manufacturer set about to put his ideas into execution.

In 1901, a bicycle maker from Springfield, Mass., imagined a future for a motorcycle meant for leisure instead of just racing. Until then, all motor-driven bikes had only used engine power as a way to help with movement. None had succeeded in creating a machine that could run entirely on its own power. Believing that such a machine was possible and confident that there would be a market for it, this manufacturer started working to bring his ideas to life.

Hedstrom tri-car motorcycle

First Hedstrom Motorcycle With Tri-car, 1902

First Hedstrom Motorcycle with Tri-Car, 1902

He recognized in Oscar Hedstrom, as the leader of the motor tandem racing field, the man who knew more about combustion engines than any other man in America, and accordingly enlisted his services. Oscar Hedstrom retired to a little mechanical laboratory in Middletown, Conn., and in a short four months emerged with a completed motorcycle which he had not only designed himself, but had constructed entirely by his own labor. Its performance on its first trial trip was absolutely astounding to every observer. In road tests under every conceivable condition, this first motorcycle of Oscar Hedstrom’s displayed a perfection of mechanical operation which had to that time never been approached. It moved[56] entirely under its own power, could climb hills and could travel on the level road at speeds which had never before been exhibited by vehicles of that type.

He recognized that Oscar Hedstrom, the leader in motor tandem racing, was the person who understood combustion engines better than anyone else in America, so he brought him on board. Oscar Hedstrom went to a small mechanical lab in Middletown, Conn., and in just four months, he came out with a completed motorcycle that he had designed and built entirely on his own. Its performance during the first test ride amazed every observer. In road tests under every kind of condition, this first motorcycle from Oscar Hedstrom showed a level of mechanical operation that had never been seen before. It operated completely under its own power, could climb hills, and could travel on flat roads at speeds that had never been reached by vehicles of that type.

By reason of the successful performance of his first motorcycle, Oscar Hedstrom is given the credit, in many quarters, for producing the first motorcycle of practicable construction. All successful machines of this type since then are said to have been modeled more or less on the fundamental principles of that first Hedstrom machine. Part of Hedstrom’s success was due to his mastery of the important problem of carburetion, and a carburetor expressly designed for that first machine constituted a marked step in motorcycle development. The leading carburetors of today are said to be based upon the principles of the first Hedstrom carburetor. The date of the appearance of the first Hedstrom motorcycle was 1901.

Due to the successful performance of his first motorcycle, Oscar Hedstrom is credited in many circles with creating the first practical motorcycle. All successful machines of this type since then are said to have been designed based on the fundamental principles of that first Hedstrom machine. Part of Hedstrom's success came from his expertise in the crucial issue of carburetion, and a carburetor specifically designed for that first machine represented a significant advancement in motorcycle development. The leading carburetors today are said to be based on the principles of the original Hedstrom carburetor. The first Hedstrom motorcycle appeared in 1901.

Manufacture of the motorcycle upon a commercial scale forthwith commenced in the bicycle manufactory at Springfield, Mass. Such is said to have been the humble beginning of the motorcycle.

Manufacturing of the motorcycle on a commercial scale immediately started at the bicycle factory in Springfield, Mass. This is considered to be the modest beginning of the motorcycle.

Indian side-car motorcycle

Modern “Side-car” Model

Modern “Sidecar” Model

Their first motorcycle was offered to the public in 1902. Its mechanical detail is worthy of note for the sake of comparison with the models of the current year. Its motor was the Hedstrom single-cylinder motor of 134 horse-power; frame, 22 inches; tires, 134 inches, single tube; chain drive; weight, 93 pounds. From the year 1902 to 1909, the style of their motorcycle remained substantially the same in appearance. The models of that period are referred to as “camel backs” by reason of the location and shape of the gasoline tank on the rear mud guard. In 1909, the loop frame was introduced to provide additional strength to the machine, being required by the increased weight of the motor; 1906 saw the introduction of twin cylinders for racing models, and the following year they appeared in the regular models.

Their first motorcycle was released to the public in 1902. Its mechanical details are worth noting for comparison with the models of this year. It had a Hedstrom single-cylinder motor with 134 horsepower; a 22-inch frame; 134 inch single tube tires; chain drive; and weighed 93 pounds. From 1902 to 1909, the look of their motorcycle stayed mostly the same. The models from that time are called “camel backs” because of the position and shape of the gas tank on the rear mudguard. In 1909, the loop frame was introduced for extra strength, necessary due to the heavier motor; 1906 marked the introduction of twin cylinders for racing models, and the following year, they were included in the regular models.

Motorcycle design has made wonderful progress. The powerful, easy-riding machines of today with their many refinements are truly marvelous pieces of mechanism. Mechanical perfection is as nearly approached as it is possible for the best brains and the most approved methods of manufacture to attain. There are numerous modern refinements which have contributed materially to the present-day[57] popularity of the motorcycle that are worthy of special note. Chief of these is the kick-starter, which enables the rider to start the engine of his machine without mounting it upon a stand or pedaling on the road. Improved clutches, gear ratios which permit varying speeds, double-braking systems and electric lights are present-day refinements which add zest to the sport of motorcycling.

Motorcycle design has made incredible progress. The powerful, easy-to-ride machines of today, with all their upgrades, are truly amazing pieces of engineering. Mechanical perfection is almost reached, thanks to the best minds and the most reliable manufacturing methods. There are many modern innovations that have significantly boosted the current popularity of motorcycles and deserve special mention. The most important of these is the kick-starter, which allows the rider to start the engine without needing to mount it on a stand or pedal on the road. Improved clutches, gear ratios that allow for different speeds, dual braking systems, and electric lights are all modern enhancements that add excitement to the sport of motorcycling.

One of the greatest of all motorcycling comfort creations is a device known as the cradle spring frame which consists of pairs of cushion-leaf springs of the semi-elliptical type, which are located at the rear of the frame just beneath the saddle. This affords the maximum of riding comfort by the elimination of all jar and jolt occasioned by an uneven roadway.

One of the best innovations for motorcycle comfort is a device called the cradle spring frame. It features pairs of cushion-leaf springs in a semi-elliptical shape, positioned at the back of the frame just under the seat. This design provides maximum riding comfort by eliminating all bumps and jolts caused by uneven roads.

Magneto ignition first appeared in 1908; previous to that date all ignition had been dependent upon batteries of the ordinary dry-cell variety.

Magneto ignition first showed up in 1908; before that, all ignition relied on regular dry-cell batteries.

The last two years has seen the introduction of what is known as the light-weight model. This style of motorcycle has a smaller motor, which is usually of the two-stroke type, single cylinder. The frame is of lighter construction, the mechanism is simpler, and of course the speed is reduced. This type of two-wheeler, however, finds favor among those who like power and speed but in modified form. Lower initial cost and lower operation expense are factors which especially recommend the light-weight models.

The last two years have introduced what’s called the lightweight model. This type of motorcycle has a smaller engine, usually a single-cylinder two-stroke. The frame is lighter, the mechanism is simpler, and, of course, the speed is lower. However, this kind of two-wheeler is popular among those who enjoy power and speed but in a modified way. Lower initial costs and reduced operating expenses are factors that particularly make lightweight models appealing.

Motorcycle delivery side-car

Modern Delivery Van for Grocers, Druggists, Etc.

Modern Delivery Van for Grocery Stores, Pharmacies, and More.

There has been considerable difference of opinion as regards the comparative efficiency of chain drive and belt drive. The consensus of opinion, however, seems to favor the chain drive, as evidenced by its use on most of the leading makes of present-day machines. Some of the light-weight models are using belt drive, but chain drive is generally conceded to be superior. In the early days of motorcycling, belt drive was rather generally used, but the heavy duty required soon brought about the change to present usage.

There has been a lot of debate about the effectiveness of chain drive versus belt drive. However, most people seem to agree that chain drive is better, as shown by its widespread use in many top brands of today's machines. Some lightweight models still use belt drive, but chain drive is generally seen as the superior option. In the early days of motorcycling, belt drive was commonly used, but the heavy demands quickly led to the switch to what we use now.

Motorcycle manufacture is today carried on in some of the largest and most up-to-date manufactories that can be found in the United States. The oldest and the largest factory devoted to motorcycle manufacture is said to be that which has been built up under the direction of the Springfield manufacturer, the man who first saw the great commercial possibilities in the development of the motorcycle for pleasure and business purposes. His company had a capitalization of $12,500,000[58] in 1916. Some 2,400 skilled workmen were employed in its two big Springfield plants. Its output, said to be the largest in the industry, is over 25,000 machines per year. Numerous models meeting varying requirements are produced.

Motorcycle manufacturing today takes place in some of the largest and most advanced factories in the United States. The oldest and biggest factory dedicated to motorcycle production is reportedly the one established by the Springfield manufacturer, the person who first recognized the significant commercial potential in developing motorcycles for both leisure and business use. His company had a capital of $12,500,000[58] in 1916. About 2,400 skilled workers were employed in its two large Springfield factories. Its output, claimed to be the highest in the industry, exceeds 25,000 bikes each year. Various models catering to different needs are manufactured.

Soon after the first practicable motorcycle appeared in 1902 there arose a demand for a contrivance that would accommodate an additional passenger. Consequently, there was produced an attachment called a tri-car. This was mounted on two pneumatic-tired wheels which were fitted to the front fork together with necessary steering devices. Later it was found that the passenger conveyance could better be carried at the side mounted upon a springed chassis which was supported by a third wheel. That form was thereupon generally adopted, and remains today the general practice in the manufacture of motorcycle side-cars, as they are called.

Soon after the first practical motorcycle came out in 1902, there was a demand for a device that could carry an extra passenger. As a result, an attachment called a tri-car was created. This was mounted on two pneumatic-tired wheels attached to the front fork, along with the necessary steering components. Later on, it was discovered that it was more effective to carry the passenger to the side on a spring-supported chassis with a third wheel. That design was widely adopted and is still the standard in the production of motorcycle sidecars today.

Naturally enough, interest in motorcycles was quickly directed toward their application to commercial uses, and to that end there were produced numerous styles of side vans and parcel carriers intended for parcel delivery.

Naturally, interest in motorcycles quickly shifted to their commercial uses. As a result, various styles of side cars and parcel carriers were produced for package delivery.

The use of the motorcycle for commercial purposes was for a time overshadowed by the abnormally rapid development of the automobile, but the factor of upkeep and operation costs of an automobile is bringing the motorcycle into prominence now. In this respect the motorcycle is said to have the advantage overwhelmingly. The tendency, however, among business houses is to investigate their individual requirements for delivery service and determine to what purposes either form of motor vehicle is best adapted. For light parcel system there is said to be no form of delivery that excels the motorcycle in speed and efficiency and nothing with operation costs so low. The commercial motorcycle is said to be gaining widespread favor, and therein lies its greatest future.

The use of motorcycles for business purposes was once overshadowed by the rapid growth of cars, but now the costs of maintenance and operation for cars are making motorcycles stand out. In this regard, motorcycles are thought to have a significant advantage. However, businesses are looking into their specific delivery needs to figure out which type of vehicle suits them best. For light parcel deliveries, nothing matches the motorcycle in terms of speed, efficiency, and low operational costs. The commercial motorcycle is becoming increasingly popular, which is where its greatest potential lies.

Foreign countries have contributed little or nothing to the development of the motorcycle. To be sure, efforts were made to produce two-wheel motor vehicles, but little success is recorded. Record of the earliest known effort was found in an English newspaper of 1876. This report, however, was very meager and lacking in any profusion of mechanical detail. Moreover, beyond the newspaper reports there is little verification that any steps were really taken at that time. The French contribute the only known features that are credited to foreign inventors. The DeDion motor was used in some of the racing motor tandems which appeared in this country in the late nineties. Other French racing bicycles were no doubt in existence, but there is no history which can ascribe any truly constructive innovations in motorcycle making to any foreign country. The motorcycle in its form of today was designed and built by America.

Foreign countries have contributed very little, if anything, to the development of the motorcycle. While there were attempts to create two-wheeled motor vehicles, they saw minimal success. The earliest known effort was reported in an English newspaper in 1876. However, this report was quite sparse and lacked detailed mechanical information. Additionally, aside from the newspaper articles, there's little evidence that any significant steps were taken at that time. The only notable contributions from foreign inventors come from France. The DeDion motor was used in some racing motor tandems that appeared in this country in the late 1890s. Other French racing bicycles likely existed, but there's no history that attributes any genuinely innovative advancements in motorcycle manufacturing to any foreign country. The motorcycle as we know it today was designed and built by Americans.


How is the Weather Man Able to Predict Tomorrow’s Weather?

The Weather Bureau was founded in 1870 by the United States Government, its purpose being to make daily observations of the state of the weather in all parts of the country, and to calculate from the results a forecast for each section of the country, based on the information thus obtained, these predictions being published so that the people of each district may know in advance the kind of weather likely to occur.

The Weather Bureau was established in 1870 by the United States Government. Its goal was to make daily observations of the weather conditions across the country and to use that information to create forecasts for each region. These predictions were published to inform people in each area about the weather they could expect.

While these forecasts are of great convenience to practically everyone, and of importance to the agriculturist, they are frequently of still more importance to ship masters, storm warnings being given that may keep them in port when storms are expected and thus save their ships from the danger of injury or shipwreck. This system has made great progress since its institution, and reports are now received daily from more than 3,500 land stations and about fifty foreign stations, while by means of wireless telegraphy, under normal conditions, some 2,000 ships send reports of the weather conditions at sea.

While these forecasts are really useful for just about everyone and especially important for farmers, they hold even greater significance for ship captains. Storm warnings help keep them in port when bad weather is expected, potentially preventing damage or wrecks. This system has advanced significantly since it began, and now, reports come in daily from over 3,500 land stations and around fifty foreign stations. Additionally, thanks to wireless telegraphy, under normal conditions, about 2,000 ships send updates on the weather at sea.

Weather kite

Weather Bureau Box Kite

Weather Bureau Kite

The Government Weather Bureau uses large box kites carrying recording barometers, thermometers and other apparatus to ascertain weather conditions high in the air. This view shows a kite about to be sent up from an observatory.

The Government Weather Bureau uses large box kites equipped with recording barometers, thermometers, and other equipment to check weather conditions high in the sky. This view shows a kite about to be launched from an observatory.

Study of results has led to the belief that more than eighty per cent of winds and storms follow beaten paths, their movements being governed by physical conditions, a knowledge of which enables the Weather Bureau officials to estimate very closely their probable speed and direction and send warning of their coming in advance. Within two hours after the regular morning observation at eight o’clock, the forecasts are telegraphed to more than 2,300 principal distributing points, from which they are further sent out by mail, telegraph and telephone, being mailed daily to 135,000 addresses and received by nearly 4,000,000 telephone subscribers.

The study of results has led to the belief that over eighty percent of winds and storms follow established paths, with their movements influenced by physical conditions. Understanding these conditions allows Weather Bureau officials to accurately estimate their likely speed and direction and issue advance warnings. Within two hours after the regular morning observation at eight o’clock, forecasts are sent via telegram to more than 2,300 main distribution points. From there, they’re further disseminated by mail, telegraph, and telephone, being mailed daily to 135,000 addresses and reaching nearly 4,000,000 telephone subscribers.

One of the most valuable services rendered is that of the warnings of cyclonic storms for the benefit of marine interests. These are displayed at nearly three hundred points on the ocean and lake coasts, including all important ports and harbors, warnings of coming storms being received from twelve to twenty-four hours in advance. The result has been the saving of vast amounts of maritime property, estimated at many millions of dollars yearly.

One of the most important services provided is issuing warnings about cyclonic storms for the benefit of marine interests. These alerts are posted at almost three hundred locations along ocean and lake coasts, including all major ports and harbors. Warnings about impending storms are received from twelve to twenty-four hours in advance. As a result, this has saved a huge amount of maritime property, estimated to be worth millions of dollars each year.

Agriculturists also derive great advantage from these warnings, especially those engaged in the production of fruits, vegetables and other market garden products. Warnings of frosts and of freezing weather have enabled the growers of such products to protect and save large quantities of valuable plants. It is said that on a single night in a small district in Florida, fruits and vegetables were thus saved to the amount of more than $100,000. In addition, live stock of great value has been saved by warnings a week in advance of the coming of a flood in the Mississippi; railroad companies take advantage of the forecast for the preservation, in their shipping business, of products likely to be injured by extremes of heat or cold, and in various other ways the forecasts are of commercial or other value.

Farmers also get a big benefit from these warnings, especially those who grow fruits, vegetables, and other market garden products. Warnings about frosts and freezing weather have helped growers protect and save large amounts of valuable plants. It's reported that in just one night in a small area of Florida, fruits and vegetables worth over $100,000 were saved. Additionally, livestock of significant value has been saved thanks to warnings given a week ahead of floods in the Mississippi. Railroad companies use these forecasts to protect their shipping business from products that could be damaged by extreme heat or cold, and in many other ways, the forecasts prove to be commercially or otherwise valuable.

One of the chief stations for observations is that at Mount Weather, in the Blue Ridge Mountains of Virginia. This is equipped with delicate instruments in considerable variety for the study of varying conditions of the upper air. Kites and captive balloons are sent up every favorable day, ascending to heights of two or three miles, and equipped with self-registering instruments to record the temperature and other conditions of the atmosphere. At other times, free balloons are liberated, carrying sets of automatic registering instruments. Some of these travel hundreds of miles, but nearly all are eventually found and returned.

One of the main stations for observations is at Mount Weather, in the Blue Ridge Mountains of Virginia. This site is equipped with a range of sensitive instruments to study the changing conditions of the upper atmosphere. Kites and tethered balloons are launched on favorable days, reaching altitudes of two or three miles, and are fitted with self-recording instruments to track temperature and other atmospheric conditions. At other times, free balloons are released, carrying sets of automatic recording instruments. Some of these travel hundreds of miles, but nearly all are eventually located and returned.

How does a Siren Fog Horn Blow?

There are a great many different kinds of signals for the guidance of vessels during fogs, when lights or other visible signals cannot be perceived.

There are many different types of signals to guide ships during fog when lights or other visible signals can't be seen.

One of the most powerful signals is the siren fog horn, the sound of which is produced by means of a disk perforated by radial slits made to rotate in front of a fixed disk exactly similar, a long iron trumpet forming part of the apparatus. The disks may each contain say twelve slits, and the moving disk may revolve 2,800 times a minute; in each revolution there are of course twelve coincidences between the slits in the two disks; through the openings thus made steam or air at a high pressure is caused to pass, so that there are actually 33,600 puffs of steam or compressed air every minute. This causes a sound of very great power, which the trumpet collects and compresses, and the blast goes out as a sort of sound beam in the direction required. Under favorable circumstances this instrument can be heard from twenty to thirty miles out at sea.

One of the most powerful signals is the siren fog horn, which produces sound through a disk with radial slits that rotates in front of a similar fixed disk, along with a long iron trumpet as part of the system. Each disk can have about twelve slits, and the moving disk can rotate at 2,800 times per minute; during each rotation, there are twelve alignments between the slits in the two disks. High-pressure steam or air is forced through these openings, resulting in a total of 33,600 puffs of steam or compressed air every minute. This creates a very powerful sound, which the trumpet gathers and directs, forming a kind of sound beam in the intended direction. In ideal conditions, this instrument can be heard from twenty to thirty miles out at sea.

Fog signals are also used on railways during foggy weather; they consist of cases filled with detonating powder, which are laid on the rails and exploded by the engine when it runs over them.

Fog signals are also used on railways during foggy weather; they consist of containers filled with explosive powder, which are placed on the tracks and detonated by the train when it passes over them.


The Story in a Watch[5]

Clocks and watches are often called “timekeepers,” but they do not keep time. Nothing can keep it. It is constantly flying along, and carrying us with it, and we cannot stop it. What we call “time keepers” are really time measures, and are made to tell us how rapidly time moves, so that we may regulate our movements and occupations to conform to its flight.

Clocks and watches are often referred to as “timekeepers,” but they don’t actually keep time. Nothing can do that. Time is always moving forward, taking us along with it, and we can’t stop it. What we call “timekeepers” are actually time measures, designed to show us how quickly time passes, so we can adjust our activities and tasks to match its pace.

Of course, you understand that measurement of anything is the comparing of it with some established standard. So that if you want to measure the length of anything you use a rule or a yard stick, or some other scale which is graduated into fractions of the whole standard measure. Do you know that the United States government has in a secure, fireproof vault, in one of the government buildings in Washington, a metal bar which is the authorized standard “yard” of this nation? It is a very carefully made copy of the standard yard of Great Britain. I believe that each one of the United States has also a standard which must agree in length with the government, or national standard. The same thing is true concerning standards of capacity, and standards of weight. But no vault can contain the authorized standard of time. Yet there is such a standard. And it is as accessible to one country as to another, and it is a standard which does not change. But, because all other time measures are more or less imperfect, our government tries to compare its standard clock with the ultimate standard every day.

Of course, you understand that measuring anything means comparing it to an established standard. So, if you want to measure the length of something, you use a ruler or a yardstick, or some other scale that is marked in fractions of the main standard measure. Did you know that the U.S. government keeps a metal bar in a secure, fireproof vault in one of the government buildings in Washington? This bar is the official standard "yard" for the nation. It’s a very carefully made copy of the standard yard from Great Britain. I believe that each state in the United States also has a standard that must match the national standard in length. The same goes for standards of capacity and weight. However, no vault can hold the official standard of time. But there is such a standard, and it is just as accessible to one country as it is to another, and it’s a standard that doesn’t change. Because all other time measurements are somewhat flawed, our government tries to compare its standard clock with the ultimate standard every day.

The first mention of time which we have is found in the Book of Genesis, where it is written “and the evening and the morning were the first day.” That statement gives a “measure” which was sufficient for the purpose intended, but there is nothing very accurate in it. If it had said “the darkness and the light” were the first day, it would have been just as accurate. The people who lived in those far-off days had no special occasion to know or to care what time it was. We may suppose that they were hungry when they waked at sunrise, and if they had no food “left over” from the previous day’s supply they would have to hustle and find some, and if possible secure a little surplus beyond that day’s needs, and so they would work, or hunt, until the “evening” came and the sun disappeared. When a man was tired, and the sun was hot, he sat down under a tree for shelter and rest. As he sat under the tree and looked about him he could not fail to notice that upon the ground was a shadow of the tree under which he sat. And as he was tired and warm he lay down and fell asleep, and when he woke, he again saw the shadow, but in another place. He noticed that the same thing occurred every day. He saw also that in the morning the shadow was stretched out in one direction, and that in the evening it lay in exactly the opposite direction, and that every day it moved very nearly the same, so he put a mark on the ground about where the shadow first appeared, and another mark at the place where it disappeared. Then one day he stuck his staff in the ground about half-way between the places of the morning and the evening shadows, which served as a noon mark. As the staff cast a shadow as readily as did the tree, the man found that it was really a better index of time than was the tree shadow, for it was much smaller and more clearly defined, and so he put up a straight stick in the ground near the hut in which he lived, and as the ground was level and smooth he drove a lot of little stakes along the daily path of the shadow, and in that way divided the day into a number of small parts. That was a crude “sun dial.” (The Bible tells of the sun dial in the thirty-eighth chapter of Isaiah.) But there was nothing very accurate in the sun dial. Several hundred years later the days were divided into sections which were called “hours,” such as the “sixth hour” (noon), the “ninth hour” (three o’clock), the “eleventh hour” (five o’clock), etc. There was, however, nothing very accurate in those expressions, which simply indicate that there were recognized divisions of time, but with no suggestions as to the means used to determine their limits or boundaries. It is recorded of Alfred the Great, who lived in the ninth century, A. D., that he was very methodical in his employment of time, and in order to insure a careful attention to his religious duties as well as his kingly duties, he divided the day into three parts, giving one part to religious duties, one to the affairs of his kingdom, and the remainder to bodily rest. To secure an equal division of the day he procured a definite quantity of wax which he had made into six candles, of twelve inches in length, and all of uniform weight, for he found that each inch in length of candle would burn for twenty minutes—one candle for each four hours. This was an approach toward accuracy and it was effective for night use as well as for the daytime.

The first mention of time appears in the Book of Genesis, where it says, "And the evening and the morning were the first day." That phrase provides a "measure" that was good enough for the intended purpose, but it's not very precise. If it had stated "the darkness and the light" were the first day, that would have been just as accurate. The people living back then had no special need to know or care what time it was. We can assume they were hungry when they woke at sunrise, and if they didn’t have any food left from the previous day, they would have to hustle to find some. If possible, they would try to gather a bit extra for the day ahead, and they would work or hunt until the evening came and the sun went down. When a man got tired and the sun was hot, he would sit under a tree for shade and rest. While sitting there and looking around, he would naturally notice the shadow of the tree on the ground. As he relaxed and fell asleep, he would wake up to see that the shadow had moved. He noticed this happened every day. He saw that in the morning the shadow pointed in one direction, and in the evening it pointed in the exact opposite direction, moving almost the same way every day. So, he marked the ground where the shadow first appeared and where it disappeared. Then one day, he stuck his staff in the ground about halfway between the morning and evening shadow marks, which served as a noon marker. Since the staff cast a shadow just like the tree, he discovered it was actually a better indication of time than the tree's shadow, as it was smaller and clearer. So, he put a straight stick in the ground near his hut, and because the ground was level and smooth, he drove in a bunch of small stakes along the daily path of the shadow, dividing the day into several smaller parts. That was a basic "sundial." (The Bible mentions a sundial in the thirty-eighth chapter of Isaiah.) However, there was nothing very precise about the sundial. Several hundred years later, days were divided into sections called “hours,” like the “sixth hour” (noon), the “ninth hour” (three o’clock), the “eleventh hour” (five o’clock), and so on. But these terms weren't very precise either; they simply indicated recognized divisions of time without explaining how those limits or boundaries were determined. It is said that Alfred the Great, who lived in the ninth century A.D., was very systematic in managing his time. To make sure he attended to his religious duties as well as his responsibilities as king, he divided the day into three parts: one for religious duties, one for governing his kingdom, and the last for rest. To create equal day divisions, he obtained a specific amount of wax, which he made into six candles, each twelve inches long and all of equal weight. He found that each inch of candle would burn for twenty minutes—one candle for every four hours. This was an attempt at accuracy and worked well for both day and night use.

Women assembling watches

Assembling Department in a Famous American Watch Factory

Assembly Department in a Famous American Watch Factory

Perhaps the earliest mechanical time measure was the clepsydra, or water clock. It is quite probable that, in its earliest form it consisted of a vessel containing water, which was allowed to escape through a small orifice. Suitable marks, or graduations, on the sides of the vessel served to indicate the lapse of time as the water gradually receded. This device was constructed in a variety of forms, some of which employed some simple mechanism also; but from their nature they could not give very accurate indications concerning the passage of time. The “hour glass” was another form of time indicator, which was capable of uniform, though extremely limited, action. It is said that its original use was to limit the length of sermons.

Perhaps the earliest mechanical timekeeper was the clepsydra, or water clock. It’s likely that in its simplest form, it was just a container with water that flowed out through a small opening. Markings or graduations on the side of the container helped indicate the passage of time as the water level slowly dropped. This device was made in various designs, some incorporating simple mechanisms as well, but they weren’t very accurate in measuring time. The “hourglass” was another type of time indicator that could measure a steady, though very limited, duration. It’s said that its original purpose was to limit the length of sermons.

It is interesting to note that discoveries and inventions, which may seem slight in themselves, sometimes form the basis of, or contribute to, other important inventions. In the year 1584 a bright young Italian was sitting in the gallery of the cathedral, in the City of Pisa, and as the lofty doors of the building opened to admit the incoming worshipers, a strong draft of air caused the heavy chandelier, which was suspended from the lofty ceiling, to swing quite a distance from its position of rest. This unusual movement attracted the attention of the young man, and as he continued to watch its deliberate movements, he did more than watch. He thought—for he noticed that the time occupied by the movement of the chandelier from one extreme position to the opposite point, seemed to be exactly uniform. He wondered why. It is the careful observation of things, and the trying to learn why they are as they are, and why they act as they do, that enables studious people to discover the laws which govern their actions. This young man, Galileo, was a thinker, and while some of his conclusions and theories have since been found erroneous, his thinking has formed the basis of much of the scientific thought and theory of later years. Galileo’s swinging chandelier was really a sort of a pendulum, and we have made mention of it because it has been found that no mechanical means for obtaining and maintaining a constant and accurate movement will equal the free movement of a vibrating pendulum. This fact has led to its adoption as a means of regulating the mechanism of clocks. For, when operated under the most favorable conditions, such a clock constitutes the most accurate “time measure” yet made.

It’s interesting to note that discoveries and inventions that may seem minor on their own often form the foundation for or contribute to other significant inventions. In 1584, a bright young Italian was sitting in the gallery of the cathedral in Pisa. As the grand doors opened to let in the worshipers, a strong breeze made the heavy chandelier hanging from the high ceiling swing quite a bit from its resting position. This unusual movement caught the young man's attention, and as he kept watching it swing, he didn’t just observe; he thought—he realized that the time it took for the chandelier to move from one extreme to the other seemed perfectly uniform. He wondered why that was. It’s careful observation and the pursuit of understanding why things are the way they are that allows thoughtful people to uncover the laws governing their behavior. This young man, Galileo, was a thinker, and although some of his conclusions and theories have since been proven incorrect, his thinking laid the groundwork for much of the scientific thought and theory that followed. Galileo’s swinging chandelier was essentially a pendulum, and we mention it because it has been established that no mechanical method for achieving and sustaining a constant and accurate movement can match the free motion of a swinging pendulum. This realization has led to its use in regulating clock mechanisms. Under the best conditions, such a clock is the most accurate “timekeeper” ever created.

Escapement making

View of Escapement Making Department

Escapement Making Department Overview

Watches are made to measure time. If anything is to be measured there must be some standard with which to compare it, for we have seen that measuring is a process of comparing a thing with an appropriate or acknowledged and fixed standard. The only known standard for the measurement of time is the movement of the earth in relation to the stars. It has taken thousands of years for mankind to learn what is now known concerning time. It has also taken hundreds of years to secure the wonderful accuracy in the measuring of time which has now been attained. We have said that nothing has been devised which will equal the accuracy of a “pendulum clock.” A story was told of a professor of a theological seminary who was one day on his way to a jeweler’s store, carrying in his arms the family clock, which was in need of repairs. He was accosted by one of his students with the question, “Look here, Professor, don’t you think it would be much more convenient to carry a watch?” A pendulum clock must of necessity be stationary, but it is now needful that people should be able to have a timepiece whenever and wherever wanted. This need is supplied by the pocket watch.

Watches are designed to tell time. To measure something, there has to be a standard to compare it against because measuring is all about comparing something to a recognized and fixed standard. The only known standard for measuring time is the earth’s movement in relation to the stars. It has taken thousands of years for humans to understand what we now know about time. It has also taken hundreds of years to achieve the amazing accuracy in timekeeping that we have today. We’ve noted that nothing can match the accuracy of a “pendulum clock.” There’s a story about a professor at a theological seminary who, one day, was on his way to a jeweler's shop, carrying the family clock that needed repairs. He was stopped by one of his students who asked, “Professor, wouldn’t it be a lot easier to carry a watch?” A pendulum clock has to stay in one place, but now it’s essential for people to have a way to tell time whenever and wherever they need it. This need is met by the pocket watch.

Watch's time train

Time Train of a Watch

Time Train of a Watch

If Galileo watched the swinging of the big chandelier long enough he found that the distance through which it swung was gradually diminishing, till, at last, it ceased to move; what stopped it? It was one of the great forces of nature, which we call gravitation, and the force which kept it in motion we call momentum. But gravitation overcame momentum.

If Galileo watched the swinging of the big chandelier long enough, he noticed that the distance it swung was gradually getting smaller until, finally, it stopped moving. What caused it to stop? It was one of the great forces of nature, which we call gravity, and the force that kept it moving is known as momentum. But gravity won over momentum.

In order to maintain the constant vibration of a pendulum it is needful to impart to it a slight force, in a manner similar to that given by a boy who gives another boy a slight “push,” to maintain his movement in a swing. A suspended pendulum being impossible of application to a pocket watch, a splendid substitute has been devised—in the form of the balance wheel of the watch, commonly called the “balance.” The balance is, in its action and adaption, the equivalent of the vibrating, or oscillating, pendulum; and the balance spring (commonly called the hairspring), which accompanies it, is in its action equivalent to the force of gravity in its effect upon a pendulum. For the tendency and (if not neutralized by some other force) the effects of the hairspring upon the watch balance, and of gravitation on the pendulum, are to hold each at a position of rest, and consequent inaction.

To keep a pendulum swinging steadily, you need to give it a small push, much like a boy gives another boy a little nudge to keep him moving in a swing. Since a suspended pendulum can't be used in a pocket watch, a great alternative has been created—the balance wheel of the watch, often called the “balance.” The balance works similarly to the swinging pendulum, and the balance spring (commonly known as the hairspring) functions like gravity in its effect on a pendulum. Both the hairspring's pull on the watch balance and gravity's pull on the pendulum tend to bring each to a stop, leading to stillness unless countered by another force.

Interior of pocket watch

But we have in a pocket watch a “mainspring” to actuate the train of gear wheels which by their ultimate action give the delicate “push” to the balance wheel at distinct intervals, and so keep the balance in continued motion. In the same manner, the “weight” of a clock, acting through the force of gravity, carries the various wheels of the clock train, and gives the slight impulse to the swinging clock pendulum.

But in a pocket watch, we have a “mainspring” that drives the gear train, which ultimately gives a gentle “push” to the balance wheel at regular intervals, keeping it in continuous motion. Similarly, the “weight” of a clock, working with the force of gravity, moves the various gears of the clock train and provides a slight impulse to the swinging pendulum.

Both clocks and watches are “machines” for the measurement of time, and, therefore, it is absolutely imperative that their action must be constant, and, if accurate time is to be indicated, the action must be uniform.

Both clocks and watches are "machines" for measuring time, so it's essential that they operate consistently, and if accurate time is to be displayed, their operation must be uniform.

Astronomical telescope

Interior of Astronomical Observatory, showing Transit Instrument. Used to Obtain Correct Local Time, by Observing the Passage of Stars Across the Meridian

Interior of the Astronomical Observatory, featuring the Transit Instrument. This is used to establish the accurate local time by observing the movement of stars along the meridian.

Watch balance cock and regulator

Balance Cock and Patent Micrometric Regulator; also Balance Wheel and Hair Spring, Showing Patent Hair Spring Stud

Balance Cock and Patent Micrometric Regulator; also Balance Wheel and Hair Spring, Displaying Patent Hair Spring Stud

The illustration shows the “time train” of an ordinary pocket watch. The various wheels are here shown in a straight line, so that their successive order may be seen, but for economy and convenience they are arranged in such way as is most convenient when constructing a pocket watch. The large wheel at the left is the “main wheel,” called by watchmakers the “barrel.” In it is coiled the mainspring—a strip of steel about twenty-three inches long, which is carefully tempered to insure elasticity and “pull.” The outer end of the mainspring is attached to the rim of the barrel, and the inner end to the barrel arbor. Bear in mind the fact that the power which is sufficient to run the watch for thirty-six hours or more, is not in the watch itself. It is in yourself, and by the exertion of your thumb and finger, in the act of winding, you transfer that power to the spring, and thereby store the power in the barrel, to be given out at the rate which the governing mechanism of the watch will permit. The group of wheels here shown are known as the “time train,” and the second wheel is called the “center,” because that, in ordinarily constructed watches, is located in the center of the group, and upon its axis are put the “hour hand” and the “minute hand.” On the circumference of the barrel are gear teeth, and those teeth engage corresponding teeth on the arbor of the center. These arbor teeth are in all cases called, not “wheels” but “pinions,” and in watch trains the wheels always drive the pinions. Next to the center comes the third pinion and wheel, and then the fourth, which is the last wheel in the train which has regular gear teeth. Now let us look back a little and see that the wheel teeth of the barrel drive the center pinion, and the center wheel drives the third pinion and the third wheel drives the fourth pinion, etc. The speed of revolution of the successive wheels increases rapidly. The center wheel must revolve once in each hour, which is 612 times faster than the barrel. The third wheel turns eight times faster than the center, and the fourth wheel turns 712 times faster than the third, or 60 times faster than the center, so that the fourth pinion, which carries the “second hand,” will revolve 60 times while the “center,” which carries the minute hand, revolves once. If we should put all the wheels and pinions in place, and wind up the main spring, the wheels would begin to turn, each at its relative rate of speed, and we should find that, instead of running thirty-six hours, it would have run less than two minutes. What was needed was some device to serve as an accurate speed governor—and the attainment of this essential device is the one thing on which accurate time measuring depends. Without any mention of the various attempts to produce such a device, let us, as briefly as possible, describe the means used in most watches of American manufacture. While there are several distinct parts of this device, each having its individual function, they may be considered as a whole under the general term of “the escapement.” Returning now to the fourth pinion, we see that it also carries a wheel, which engages another little pinion, called the escape pinion. This escape pinion also carries a wheel, but it is radically different in appearance, as well as in action, from any of the previously mentioned wheels. An examination of the “escape wheel” would show that it has a peculiarly shaped piece, which is called the “pallet,” the extended arm of which is called the “fork.” The fork encloses a sort of half-round stud or pin. This stud projects from the fact and near the edge of a small steel disc. The stud is formed from some hard precious stone and is called the “jewel pin,” or “roller pin,” and the little steel disc which carries it is called the “roller.” In the center or axial hole of the roller fits the “balance staff,” which staff also carries the “balance wheel,” and the balance spring, commonly called the “hair spring.” The ends of the balance staff are made very small so as to form very delicate pivots which turn in jewel bearings. The balance wheel moves very rapidly, and, therefore, its movement must be as free as possible from retarding friction, so its bearing pivots are made very small.

The illustration shows the “time train” of a typical pocket watch. The different wheels are laid out in a straight line to show their sequential order, but for efficiency and practicality, they are arranged in the most convenient way for building a pocket watch. The large wheel on the left is the “main wheel,” which watchmakers refer to as the “barrel.” Inside it is coiled the mainspring—a strip of steel about twenty-three inches long, carefully tempered to ensure elasticity and “pull.” The outer end of the mainspring is attached to the rim of the barrel, and the inner end connects to the barrel arbor. Keep in mind that the power needed to run the watch for thirty-six hours or more isn’t actually in the watch. It’s in you, and by using your thumb and finger to wind it, you transfer that power to the spring, storing it in the barrel to be released at the rate permitted by the watch's governing mechanism. The group of wheels shown here is called the “time train,” and the second wheel is known as the “center,” because it’s usually located at the center of the group, with the “hour hand” and the “minute hand” mounted on its axis. Along the edge of the barrel are gear teeth that mesh with corresponding teeth on the arbor of the center. These arbor teeth are always referred to as “pinions,” not “wheels,” and in watch trains, the wheels always drive the pinions. Next to the center is the third pinion and wheel, followed by the fourth, which is the last wheel in the train with regular gear teeth. Let’s look back and see that the teeth of the barrel drive the center pinion, the center wheel drives the third pinion, and the third wheel drives the fourth pinion, and so on. The speed of rotation of the successive wheels increases quickly. The center wheel must complete one rotation each hour, which is 612 times faster than the barrel. The third wheel turns eight times faster than the center, and the fourth wheel turns 712 times faster than the third, or 60 times faster than the center, meaning that the fourth pinion, which holds the “second hand,” will revolve 60 times while the “center,” carrying the minute hand, revolves once. If we were to set all the wheels and pinions in place and wind up the mainspring, the wheels would start turning, each at its relative speed, and we’d find that instead of running for thirty-six hours, it would run for less than two minutes. What was needed was a mechanism to act as an accurate speed governor—and achieving this crucial device is essential for precise timekeeping. Without discussing the various attempts to create such a device, let’s briefly describe the means used in most American-made watches. While there are several distinct parts of this mechanism, each with its own function, they are collectively referred to as “the escapement.” Going back to the fourth pinion, we see it also has a wheel that engages another small pinion called the escape pinion. This escape pinion also carries a wheel, which looks and functions very differently from the previously mentioned wheels. Looking at the “escape wheel,” you'll notice it has a uniquely shaped piece called the “pallet,” whose extended arm is known as the “fork.” The fork surrounds a kind of half-round stud or pin. This stud sticks out from the back and near the edge of a small steel disc. The stud is made from a hard precious stone and is known as the “jewel pin” or “roller pin,” and the little steel disc that carries it is called the “roller.” The center hole of the roller fits the “balance staff,” which also carries the “balance wheel” and the balance spring, commonly called the “hair spring.” The ends of the balance staff are made very small to form delicate pivots that turn in jewel bearings. The balance wheel moves very quickly, so its movement must be as free as possible from friction, which is why its bearing pivots are made very small.

Waltham Lever Escapement

A Device for the Governing of Speed is the One Thing on Which Accurate Time Measuring Depends

A speed control tool is essential for accurate timekeeping.

Waltham taper shoulder detachable balance staff

Now that we have given the names of each of the different parts which compose the escapement, let us see how they perform their important work of governing the speed of the little machine for measuring time. In the escape wheel, the left arm of the pallet rests on the inclined top of one of the wheel teeth. This is the position of rest. If we wind up the mainspring of the watch it will immediately cause the main wheel to turn, and, of course, that will turn the next wheel, and so on to the escape wheel. When that wheel turns to the right, as it must, it will force back the arm of the pallet which swings on its arbor. In swinging out in this way it must also swing in the other pallet arm, and that movement will bring it directly in front of another wheel tooth, so that the wheel can turn no further. It is locked and will remain so until something withdraws it. When the pallet was swung so as to cause this locking, the fork was also moved, and as it enclosed the roller pin, that too was moved and carried with it the roller and the balance wheel, and in so doing it deflected the hair spring from its condition of rest. And as the spring tried to get back to its place of rest it carried back the balance also. In going back, the balance acquired a little momentum, and so could not stop when it reached its former position, but went a little further, and, of course, the roller and its pin also went along in company, the pin carrying the fork and the pallet swinging in the other direction,[70] which unlocked the escape wheel tooth. Its inclined top gave the pallet a little “push” so that the first pallet was locked, forcing the fork and roller, and the balance and hair spring, to move in the opposite direction. And so the alternate actions proceed, and the balance wheel travels further each time, until it reaches the greatest amount which the force of the mainspring can give. But before this extreme is reached, the momentum of the revolving balance carries the roller pin entirely out of the fork. As the fork is allowed to move only just far enough to allow the pin to pass out, it simply waits until the fork returns and enters its place, only to escape again on the other side. And so the motions continue to the number of 18,000 times per hour. If that number can be exactly maintained, the watch will measure time perfectly. But if it should fall short of that exact number only once each hour, it would result in a loss of 4.8 seconds each day, or 2.4 minutes in one month. A watch as bad as that would not be allowed on a railroad.

Now that we've labeled each part of the escapement, let’s look at how they do their crucial job of controlling the speed of this little time-measuring machine. In the escape wheel, the left arm of the pallet rests on the slanted top of one of the wheel's teeth. This is the resting position. When we wind up the mainspring of the watch, it quickly makes the main wheel turn, which in turn rotates the next wheel, and so on, until it reaches the escape wheel. When that wheel turns to the right, as it must, it pushes back the arm of the pallet that swings on its pivot. As it swings out, it also makes the other pallet arm swing, positioning it in front of another wheel tooth to stop further movement. It is locked and will stay that way until something releases it. When the pallet swung to create this lock, the fork also moved, encircling the roller pin, which then moved along with the roller and the balance wheel, pulling the hairspring out of its resting position. As the spring tried to return to rest, it pulled the balance back with it. In this backward motion, the balance gained a bit of momentum and couldn’t just stop when it reached its original position; it continued a bit further, dragging the roller and its pin along, which moved the fork and the pallet in the opposite direction, [70] unlocking the escape wheel tooth. The slanted top gave the pallet a slight “push,” locking the first pallet, which then forced the fork and roller, along with the balance and hairspring, to move backward. This alternating action continues, with the balance wheel moving further each time until it hits the maximum force that the mainspring can provide. But before it reaches this limit, the momentum of the spinning balance causes the roller pin to move entirely out of the fork. Since the fork can only move just enough for the pin to pass, it simply waits until the fork returns to its position, then escapes again on the other side. These motions repeat up to 18,000 times each hour. If that number is maintained precisely, the watch will track time perfectly. However, if it falls short of that exact number just once an hour, it would lose 4.8 seconds each day, or 2.4 minutes in a month. A watch that inaccurate wouldn’t be permitted on a railroad.

Precision weighing balance

Accurate Measurements are Essential to Correct Time Keeping

Accurate measurements are crucial for maintaining the correct time.

Isn’t it wonderful that such a delicate piece of mechanism can be made to run so accurately? And the wonder is increased by the fact that the little machine is, to a great extent, continually moved about, and liable to extreme changes in position and in temperature. Watches of the highest grades are adjusted to five positions as well as to temperature. Some are adjusted to temperature and three positions, and still others to temperature only. The way in which a watch is made to automatically compensate for temperature changes is interesting. Varying[71] degrees of heat and cold always affect a watch. It is a law of nature that all simple metals expand under the influence of heat and therefore contract when affected by cold. Alloys, or mixtures of different metals, act in a similar manner, but in varying degrees. Some combinations of metals possess the quality of relatively great expansibility. Another natural law is that the force required to move a body depends upon its size and weight. So it follows that with only a certain amount of available force a large body cannot be moved as rapidly as a small one. The force of 200 pounds of steam in a locomotive boiler might be sufficient to haul a train of six cars at a speed of thirty miles per hour, but if more cars be added it will result in a slower speed. The same principle applies to a watch as to a railway train. Therefore if the balance wheel becomes larger as it grows warmer, and the force which turns the wheel is not changed, the speed of movement must be reduced. One other natural law which affects the running of watches is this: Variations in temperature affect the elasticity of metals. Now the balance spring of a watch is made from steel, and is carefully tempered in order to obtain its highest elasticity. Increase in temperature therefore introduces three elements of disturbance, all of which act in the same direction of reducing the speed. First, it enlarges the balance wheel; second, it increases the length of the spring; third, it reduces the elasticity of the spring. To overcome these three disturbing factors a very ingenious form of balance has been devised.

Isn't it amazing that such a delicate mechanism can run so accurately? The wonder grows because this little machine is often moved around and can face extreme changes in position and temperature. High-quality watches are adjusted to five positions as well as temperature. Some are adjusted for temperature and three positions, while others just for temperature. It’s interesting how a watch automatically compensates for temperature changes. Different degrees of heat and cold always impact a watch. It's a natural law that all simple metals expand when heated and contract when cooled. Alloys, or mixtures of different metals, behave similarly, but to varying degrees. Some metal combinations have a greater ability to expand. Another natural law states that the force needed to move an object depends on its size and weight. So, with a limited amount of available force, a larger object can't be moved as quickly as a smaller one. For example, 200 pounds of steam in a locomotive boiler might be enough to pull a train of six cars at thirty miles per hour, but adding more cars will slow it down. The same principle applies to a watch as it does to a train. Therefore, if the balance wheel gets larger when it gets warmer, and the force that turns the wheel remains unchanged, the movement will have to slow down. Another natural law that affects how watches run is this: temperature changes impact the elasticity of metals. The balance spring of a watch is made from steel and is carefully tempered to achieve its best elasticity. An increase in temperature introduces three disruptive factors, all contributing to a slower speed. First, it makes the balance wheel larger; second, it lengthens the spring; and third, it decreases the spring's elasticity. To counter these three disruptive effects, a very clever design of balance has been created.

All the parts that go into a watch

170 Parts Compose a 16 Size Watch Movement. (A Little More than 12 Actual Size)

A size 16 watch movement consists of 170 parts. (Slightly more than 12 actual size)

A watch balance is made with a rim of brass encircling and firmly united to the rim of steel. In order to permit heat to have the desired effect upon this balance, the rim is completely severed at points near each of the arms of the wheel. If we[72] apply heat to this balance the greater expansion of the brass portion of its rim would cause the free ends to curl inward.

A watch balance consists of a brass rim surrounding and securely attached to a steel rim. To allow heat to have the intended effect on this balance, the rim is completely cut at points near each arm of the wheel. If we[72] apply heat to this balance, the greater expansion of the brass part of the rim would make the free ends curl inward.

In order to obtain exactly 18,000 vibrations of the balance in an hour, it will be seen that the weight of the wheel and the strength of the hair spring must be perfectly adapted each to the other. The shorter the spring is made the more rigid it becomes, and so the regulator is made a part of the watch, but its action must be very limited or its effect on the spring will introduce other serious disturbances. The practical method of securing the proper and ready adaptation of balances to springs is to place in the rims of the balance a number of small screws having relatively heavy heads. Suppose now that we have a balance fitted with screws of the number and weight to exactly adapt it to a spring, so that at a normal temperature of, say, 70 degrees, it would vibrate exactly 18,000 times per hour. When we place the watch in an oven the heat of which is 95 degrees, we might find that it had lost seven seconds. That would show that the wheel was too large when at 95 degrees, although just right at 70 degrees. Really, that is a very serious matter—it would lose at the rate of 245 minutes in a day. But after all it need not be so very serious, because if we change the location of one screw on each half of the balance so as to place it nearer the free end of the rim when the heat curls the rim inward, it will carry a larger proportion of the weight than if the screws had not been moved. It may require repeated trials to determine the required position of the rim screws, and both skill and good judgment are essential. It will be readily understood that numerous manipulations of this kind constitute no small items in the cost of producing high-grade watches.

To achieve exactly 18,000 vibrations of the balance in an hour, the weight of the wheel and the tension of the hairspring must be perfectly matched. A shorter spring is stiffer, so the regulator is integrated into the watch, but its movement must be restricted; otherwise, it can disrupt the spring’s function in significant ways. The practical approach to ensuring that balances adapt correctly to springs is to install several small screws with relatively heavy heads in the rims of the balance. Imagine we have a balance with screws weighted appropriately to match a spring so that at a normal temperature of around 70 degrees, it vibrates exactly 18,000 times an hour. If we place the watch in an oven heated to 95 degrees, we might find it has lost seven seconds. This indicates that the wheel was too large at 95 degrees, even though it was perfect at 70 degrees. This is a serious concern—it would result in a loss of approximately 2⁴/₅ minutes per day. However, it doesn’t have to be too serious because if we reposition one screw on each side of the balance closer to the free end of the rim, when the heat causes the rim to curve inward, it will carry more weight than if the screws were left in their original positions. Figuring out the right placement for the rim screws may take several attempts, requiring both skill and good judgment. It’s clear that these adjustments can significantly contribute to the manufacturing cost of high-quality watches.

Large quantities of the cheaper class of watches are now made by machinery in the United States, Switzerland, France, Germany and England. They are generally produced on the interchangeable system, that is, if any part of a watch has become unfit for service, it can be cheaply replaced by an exact duplicate, the labor of the watch repairer thus becoming easy and expeditious.

Large numbers of affordable watches are now produced using machines in the United States, Switzerland, France, Germany, and England. They are typically made using an interchangeable system, meaning that if any part of a watch is damaged, it can be easily replaced with an exact duplicate, making the work of watch repairers quick and efficient.


How does a Monorail Gyroscope Railway Operate?

The last decade has brought a railway with a single line of rails, on which the car is kept erect by the steadying power of a pair of heavy gyroscopes, or flywheels, rotating in opposite directions at very high velocity. There are two recent inventions of this kind, an English and a German, practically the same in character.

The last decade has introduced a railway with a single set of tracks, where the car stays upright thanks to the stabilizing force of two heavy gyroscopes, or flywheels, spinning in opposite directions at very high speeds. There are two recent inventions of this type, one from England and the other from Germany, both practically identical in nature.

The English, the invention of an Australian named Brennan, had its first form in a model, a small car on which the gyroscopes rotated at the enormous speed of seventy-five hundred revolutions per minute. They were hung in special bearings and rotated in a partial vacuum, the friction being so slight that the wheels would continue to revolve and give stability to the car for a considerable time after the power was shut off. Also, in such a case, supports at the side kept the car from overturning. This model showed itself capable of traveling at high speed on a single rail, rounding sharp curves and even traversing with ease a wire cable hung in the air.

The English, created by an Australian named Brennan, initially took the form of a model—a small car equipped with gyroscopes that spun at an incredible speed of seven thousand five hundred revolutions per minute. The gyroscopes were mounted in special bearings and rotated in a partial vacuum, creating such minimal friction that the wheels could keep turning and provide stability to the car for a significant amount of time after the power was turned off. Additionally, side supports prevented the car from tipping over in this situation. This model proved capable of high-speed travel on a single rail, navigating sharp turns, and even moving easily across a wire cable suspended in the air.

In 1909 a car was tried fourteen feet long and ten feet wide, capable of carrying forty passengers. The gyroscopes in this, moved by a gasoline engine, revolved in a vacuum at a speed of three thousand rotations a minute. They were three and a half feet in diameter and weighed together one and a half tons. With a full load of passengers, this car sped easily around a circular rail two hundred and twenty yards long and proved that it could not be upset, since when all the passengers crowded to one side the car remained firmly erect, the gyroscopes lifting it on the weighted sides. It is claimed that in the monorail system so equipped with the gyroscope, a speed of more than a hundred miles an hour is possible with perfect safety.

In 1909, a car was tested that was fourteen feet long and ten feet wide, capable of carrying forty passengers. The gyroscopes in this vehicle, powered by a gasoline engine, spun in a vacuum at a speed of three thousand rotations per minute. They measured three and a half feet in diameter and weighed a total of one and a half tons. With a full load of passengers, this car easily navigated a circular track two hundred and twenty yards long and demonstrated that it couldn't be tipped over; even when all the passengers shifted to one side, the car stayed upright, with the gyroscopes stabilizing it on the weighted sides. It is suggested that in a monorail system equipped with gyroscopes, speeds exceeding one hundred miles an hour are achievable with complete safety.

Monorail gyroscope car

A Monorail Gyroscope Car

A Monorail Gyro Car

The German invention, displayed by Herr Schorl, a capitalist of Berlin, is in many respects like the English one. The experimental car was eighteen feet long and four feet wide, the gyroscopic flywheels being very light, weighing but a hundred and twenty-five pounds each, while their speed of rotation was eight thousand per minute. The same success was attained as in the English experiments, and there seems to be a successful future before this very interesting vehicle of travel. There is also another type of monorail of overhead construction, the wheels running on the rail from which the car hangs.

The German invention showcased by Mr. Schorl, a businessman from Berlin, is similar in many ways to the English version. The test vehicle measured eighteen feet long and four feet wide, with very lightweight gyroscopic flywheels, each weighing only one hundred twenty-five pounds, and spinning at eight thousand revolutions per minute. The same success was achieved as in the English trials, and this intriguing mode of transportation seems to have a promising future. Additionally, there is another type of monorail with an overhead design, where the wheels move along the rail from which the car hangs.

The fundamental principle of the gyroscope lies in the resistance which a flywheel in rapid motion presents to any change of direction in the axis of rotation.

The basic principle of the gyroscope is the resistance that a quickly spinning flywheel offers to any change in the direction of its axis of rotation.

The gyroscope has been utilized to give steadiness to vessels in rough seas, and Sperry has made considerable progress in this country in applying it to give stability to an aeroplane. One of the most successful of the recent applications of the gyroscope is in its connection with the marine compass. All battleships in the United States Navy are now fitted with the gyroscopic compass. As a gyro compass is independent of the magnetism of the earth and of the ship, and, when running properly, always points to the North Pole, its great convenience in vessels carrying heavy guns and armor, the attraction of which would materially interfere with the operation of the ordinary type of compass, is at once apparent. Another important use of the gyroscope is found in its relation to the vertical and horizontal steering gear of the naval torpedo, especially the Whitehead pattern. Its first application to this purpose was made by an officer in the Austrian navy in 1895, and this device, or an improved modification of it, such as the Angle Gyroscope, invented by Lieut. W. I. Chambers of the United States Navy, is in use on all torpedoes.

The gyroscope has been used to provide stability to ships in rough seas, and Sperry has made significant advancements in applying it to stabilize airplanes. One of the most successful recent uses of the gyroscope is in connection with the marine compass. All battleships in the United States Navy now have a gyroscopic compass. Since a gyro compass is unaffected by the Earth's magnetism and the ship itself, and always points to the North Pole when functioning correctly, its convenience for vessels carrying heavy guns and armor, which could disrupt the normal compass's operation, is immediately clear. Another important application of the gyroscope is in the vertical and horizontal steering systems of naval torpedoes, especially the Whitehead model. Its first use for this purpose was by an officer in the Austrian navy in 1895, and this device, or an improved version like the Angle Gyroscope invented by Lieutenant W. I. Chambers of the United States Navy, is now used on all torpedoes.

Why are Finger-prints Used for Identification?

The plan of identifying people by their finger-prints, although at first used only on criminals, is now put to many other uses. It was introduced originally in India, where it was of very great assistance to the British authorities in impressing the natives with the fact that at last no evasion of positive identification of culprits was possible. It was later taken up by the Scotland Yard authorities in England, and its use has since spread to practically every country in the civilized world.

The practice of identifying people by their fingerprints, which was initially only used for criminals, now serves many other purposes. It was first introduced in India, where it significantly helped the British authorities demonstrate to the locals that there was no way to evade clear identification of offenders. It was later adopted by Scotland Yard in England, and its use has since spread to almost every country in the civilized world.

It has been proven, to the entire satisfaction of everyone who has ever made a careful study of the subject, that every human being has a marking on his or her fingers which is different from that of any other person on earth. Not only is it sure that no one else has a thumb or finger marked like yours, but it has also been established beyond dispute that every little detail will continue peculiar to your fingers as long as you have them.

It has been proven, to the complete satisfaction of everyone who has ever closely studied the subject, that every person has a unique pattern on their fingers that is different from anyone else's on the planet. Not only is it certain that no one else has a thumb or finger marked like yours, but it has also been firmly established that every little detail will remain unique to your fingers for as long as you have them.

There are many ways in which this knowledge is used to advantage; two methods now employed are particularly valuable. It is seldom that an unpremeditated crime is committed without its author leaving finger-marks on some object which is unconsciously touched, such as silver plate, cash boxes or safes, glassware or windows, polished wood-work, etc., and very often the professional criminal also neglects to take precautions against leaving his signature behind him. It is then a simple matter for the police to collect such marks for comparison with the finger-prints of anyone to whom suspicion may be directed.

There are many ways this knowledge is used to advantage; two methods currently in use are particularly valuable. It's rare for a spontaneous crime to happen without the perpetrator leaving fingerprints on something they unconsciously touch, like silverware, cash boxes, safes, glass, windows, polished wood, and so on. Often, professional criminals also forget to take steps to avoid leaving their fingerprints behind. The police can easily gather these prints to compare them with the fingerprints of anyone they suspect.

The plan has also been utilized a great deal in recent years for the identification of enlisted men in the army and navy. Finger-prints are made, immediately upon enlistment, of each separate finger and thumb of both hands. Group impressions are also taken with the four fingers of each hand pressed down simultaneously. When needed for any particular purpose, such finger-prints are usually enlarged by means of a special camera, to five times their natural size.

The plan has been used a lot in recent years to identify enlisted personnel in the army and navy. Fingerprints are taken right after enlistment for each individual finger and thumb of both hands. Group impressions are also collected with the four fingers of each hand pressed down at the same time. When needed for a specific purpose, these fingerprints are typically enlarged using a special camera to five times their actual size.


The Story in a Rifle[6]

How It Began.

A naked savage found himself in the greatest danger. A wild beast, hungry and fierce, was about to attack him. Escape was impossible. Retreat was cut off. He must fight for his life—but how?

A naked savage found himself in the greatest danger. A wild beast, hungry and fierce, was about to attack him. Escape was impossible. Retreat was cut off. He had to fight for his life—but how?

Should he bite, scratch or kick? Should he strike with his fist? These were the natural defenses of his body, but what were they against the teeth, the claws and the tremendous muscles of his enemy? Should he wrench a dead branch from a tree and use it for a club? That would bring him within striking distance to be torn to pieces before he could deal a second blow.

Should he bite, scratch, or kick? Should he hit with his fist? These were his body's natural defenses, but what good were they against the teeth, claws, and incredible strength of his opponent? Should he grab a dead branch from a tree and use it as a club? That would put him close enough to be ripped apart before he could land a second hit.

There was but a moment in which to act. Swiftly he seized a jagged fragment of rock from the ground and hurled it with all his force at the blazing eyes before him; then another, and another, until the beast, dazed and bleeding from the unexpected blows, fell back and gave him a chance to escape. He knew that he had saved his life, but there was something else which his dull brain failed to realize.

There was only a brief moment to act. Quickly, he grabbed a jagged piece of rock from the ground and threw it with all his strength at the fiery eyes in front of him; then another, and another, until the creature, dazed and bleeding from the sudden hits, fell back and gave him a chance to escape. He knew he had saved his life, but there was something else his dull mind couldn't grasp.

He had invented arms and ammunition!

He had created weapons and ammo!

In other words, he had needed to strike a harder blow than the blow of his fist, at a greater distance than the length of his arm, and his brain showed him how to do it. After all, what is a modern rifle but a device which man has made with his brain permitting him to strike an enormously hard blow at a wonderful distance? Firearms are really but a more perfect form of stone-throwing, and this early Cave Man took the first step that has led down the ages to the present-day arms and ammunition.

In other words, he needed to deliver a stronger hit than just his fist, from a distance greater than the reach of his arm, and his mind figured out how to do it. After all, what is a modern rifle but a tool that humans created using their intelligence, allowing them to deliver a powerful impact over long distances? Firearms are really just a more advanced way of throwing stones, and this early cave man took the first step that has led through the ages to today’s weapons and ammunition.

This strange story of a development that has been taking place slowly through thousands and thousands of years, so that today you are able to take a swift shot at distant game instead of merely throwing stones.

This unusual story of a change that has been happening gradually over thousands and thousands of years, so that now you can quickly take aim at faraway targets instead of just throwing rocks.

The Earliest Hunters.

The Cave Man and his descendants learned the valuable lesson of stone-throwing, and it made hunters of them, not big-game hunters—that was far too risky; but once in a while a lucky throw might bring down a bird or a rabbit for food. And so it went on for centuries, perhaps. Early mankind was rather slow of thought.

The Cave Man and his descendants learned the important skill of throwing stones, which turned them into hunters—not big-game hunters, since that was way too dangerous. But occasionally, a lucky throw would take down a bird or a rabbit for dinner. And this continued for centuries, maybe. Early humans were a bit slow to think things through.

At last, however, there appeared a great inventor—the Edison of his day.

At last, however, a great inventor emerged—the Edison of his time.

He took the second step.

He took the next step.

A Nameless Edison.

We do not know his name. Possibly he did not even have a name, but in some way he hit upon a scheme for throwing stones farther, harder and straighter than any of his ancestors.

We don’t know his name. Maybe he didn’t even have a name, but somehow he came up with a way to throw stones farther, harder, and straighter than any of his ancestors.

The men and women in the Cave Colony suddenly found that one bright-eyed young fellow, with a little straighter forehead than the others, was beating them all at hunting. During weeks he had been going away mysteriously, for hours each day. Now, whenever he left the camp he was sure to bring home game, while the other men would straggle back for the most part empty-handed.

The people in the Cave Colony suddenly noticed that one bright-eyed young guy, with a slightly straighter forehead than the others, was outdoing them all in hunting. For weeks, he had been disappearing mysteriously for hours each day. Now, whenever he left the camp, he always returned with game, while the other men usually came back mostly empty-handed.

Was it witchcraft? They decided to investigate.

Was it witchcraft? They chose to look into it.

Throwing rocks at a bear

The First Missile

The First Missile

The Cave Man of prehistoric times unconsciously invented arms and ammunition.

The caveman of prehistoric times unknowingly created weapons and ammo.

What They Saw.

Accordingly, one morning several of them followed at a careful distance as he sought the shore of a stream where water-fowl might be found. Parting the leaves, they saw him pick up a pebble from the bank and then, to their surprise, take off his girdle of skin and place the stone in its center, holding both ends with his right hand.

Accordingly, one morning, several of them followed closely but carefully as he looked for the edge of a stream where he might find some waterfowl. As they parted the leaves, they watched him pick up a pebble from the bank and, to their surprise, remove his leather belt and place the stone in the middle, holding both ends with his right hand.

Stranger still, he whirled the girdle twice around his head, then released one end so that the leather strip flew out and the stone shot straight at a bird in the water.

Stranger still, he spun the belt twice around his head, then let go of one end so that the leather strip shot out and the stone flew straight at a bird in the water.

The mystery was solved. They had seen the first slingman in action.

The mystery was solved. They had witnessed the first slingman in action.

The Use of Slings.

The new plan worked with great success, and a little practice made expert marksmen. We know that most of the early races used it for hunting and in war. We find it shown in pictures made many thousands of years ago in ancient Egypt and Assyria. We find it in the Roman army where the slingman was called a “funditor.”

The new plan was very successful, and with some practice, people became skilled marksmen. We know that most early cultures used it for hunting and warfare. There are illustrations from thousands of years ago in ancient Egypt and Assyria that show this. We also see it in the Roman army, where the person using a sling was called a "funditor."

We find it in the Bible where it is written of the tribe of Benjamin: “Among all these people there were seven hundred chosen men left-handed; every one could sling a stone at an hair breadth and not miss.” Surely, too, you remember the story of David and Goliath when the young shepherd “prevailed over the Philistine with a sling and with a stone.”

We see it in the Bible where it talks about the tribe of Benjamin: “Among all these people, there were seven hundred selected left-handed men; each one could sling a stone at a hair's breadth and not miss.” You probably also remember the story of David and Goliath when the young shepherd “defeated the Philistine with a sling and a stone.”

Today shepherds tending their flocks upon these same hills of Syria may be seen practicing with slings like those of David. Yes, and slings were used in European armies until nearly a hundred years after America was discovered.

Today, shepherds watching their flocks on these same hills of Syria can be seen practicing with slings like those of David. In fact, slings were used in European armies until nearly a hundred years after America was discovered.

Something Better.

Yet they had their drawbacks. A stone slung might kill a bird or even a man, but it was not very effective against big game.

Yet they had their downsides. A stone thrown could kill a bird or even a person, but it wasn't very effective against larger game.

What was wanted was a missile to pierce a thick hide.

What was needed was a missile to penetrate a tough exterior.

Man had begun to make spears for use in a pinch, but would you like to tackle a husky bear or a well-horned stag with only a spear for a weapon?

Man had started making spears for emergency use, but would you really want to take on a strong bear or a well-horned stag with just a spear?

No more did our undressed ancestors. The invention of the greatly desired arm probably came about in a most curious way.

No more did our naked ancestors. The invention of the much-needed arm probably happened in a really interesting way.

Long ages ago man had learned to make fire by patiently rubbing two sticks together, or by twirling a round one between his hands with its point resting upon a flat piece of wood.

Long ago, people figured out how to make fire by carefully rubbing two sticks together or by spinning one stick between their hands while its tip rested on a flat piece of wood.

In this way it could be made to smoke, and finally set fire to a tuft of dried moss, from which he might get a flame for cooking. This was such hard work that he bethought him to twist a string of sinew about the upright spindle and cause it to twirl by pulling alternately at the two string ends, as some savage races still do. From this it was a simple step to fasten the ends of the two strings to a bent piece of wood, another great advantage, since now but one hand was needed to twirl the spindle, and the other could hold it in place. This was the “bow-drill” which also is used to this day.

In this way, he could make it smoke and eventually ignite a bundle of dried moss, which he could use to create a flame for cooking. It was such hard work that he thought of twisting a string of sinew around the upright spindle and spinning it by pulling alternately at both ends of the string, like some primitive cultures still do. From this, it was an easy move to tie the ends of the two strings to a curved piece of wood, which was another big advantage because now only one hand was needed to spin the spindle, while the other could hold it steady. This was the "bow-drill," which is still used today.

A Fortunate Accident.

But bent wood is apt to be springy. Suppose that while one were bearing on pretty hard with a well-tightened string, in order to bring fire quickly, the point of the spindle should slip from its block. Naturally, it would fly away with some force if the position were just right.

But bent wood tends to be flexible. Imagine if, while applying significant pressure with a tightly secured string to create fire quickly, the tip of the spindle slipped from its block. Naturally, it would shoot off with some force if everything was aligned just right.

This must have happened many times, and each time but once the fire-maker may have muttered something under his breath, gone after his spindle, and then settled down stupidly to his work. He had had a golden chance to make a great discovery, but didn’t realize it.

This must have happened many times, and every time except once the fire-maker might have grumbled something quietly, gone after his spindle, and then mindlessly got back to work. He had a golden opportunity to make a significant discovery, but he didn’t realize it.

Hunting water fowl with a sling

The Sling Man in Action

The Sling Man in Action

Practice developed some wonderful marksmen among the users of this primitive weapon.

Practice developed some great marksmen among the users of this basic weapon.

But, so it has been suggested, there was one man who stopped short when he lost his spindle, for a red-hot idea shot suddenly through his brain.

But, it has been suggested, there was one man who came to a halt when he lost his spindle, because a brilliant idea suddenly flashed through his mind.

He forgot all about his fire-blocks while he sat stock still and thought.

He completely forgot about his fire-blocks as he sat still and thought.

Once or twice he chuckled to himself softly. Thereupon he arose and began to experiment.

Once or twice, he chuckled quietly to himself. Then, he got up and started to experiment.

He chose a longer, springier piece of wood, bent it into a bow, and strung it with a longer thong. He placed the end of a straight stick against the thong, drew it strongly back and released it.

He picked a longer, springier piece of wood, shaped it into a bow, and strung it with a longer cord. He propped the end of a straight stick against the cord, pulled it back hard, and let it go.

The shaft whizzed away with force enough to delight him, and, lo, there was the first bow-and-arrow!

The arrow shot off with enough force to thrill him, and, look, there was the first bow and arrow!

What Came of It.

After that it was merely a matter of improvement. The arrow-end was apt to slip from the string until some one thought to notch it. Its head struck with such force that the early hunter decided to give it a sharp point, shaped from a flake of flint, in order that it might drive deep into the body of a deer or bear.

After that, it was just a matter of getting better. The arrow tip tended to slide off the string until someone thought to notch it. Its head hit with such force that the early hunter chose to sharpen it, using a flake of flint, so it could pierce deep into the body of a deer or bear.

Making arrows

But, most of all, it must fly true and straight to its mark. Who of all these simple people first learned to feather its shaft? Was it some one who had watched the swift, sure-footed spring of a bushy-tailed squirrel from branch to branch? Possibly, for the principle is the same. At all events with its feathers and its piercing point the arrow became the most deadly of all missiles, and continued to be until long after the invention of firearms.

But most importantly, it has to fly true and straight to its target. Who among these simple people was the first to fletch its shaft? Was it someone who had observed the quick, agile leap of a bushy-tailed squirrel from branch to branch? That seems likely, as the principle is the same. In any case, with its feathers and sharp point, the arrow became the deadliest of all projectiles and remained so long after firearms were invented.

A Great Variety.

It is interesting to see how many different forms of bow were used. The English had a six-foot “long bow” made of yew or ash, in a single straight piece, that shot arrows the length of a man’s arm. The Indians had bows only forty inches on the average, since a short bow was easier to handle in thick forests. They used various kinds of wood, horn or even bone, such as the ribs of large animals. These they generally backed with sinew.

It’s fascinating to observe the variety of bow designs that were used. The English had a six-foot “longbow” made of yew or ash, crafted from a single straight piece, which shot arrows the length of a man’s arm. The Indigenous peoples had bows averaging only forty inches, as shorter bows were easier to maneuver in dense forests. They used different types of wood, horn, or even bone, like the ribs of large animals. These were typically reinforced with sinew.

Sometimes they cut spiral strips from the curving horns of a mountain sheep, and steamed them straight. Then they glued these strips together into a wonderfully tough and springy bow. Once in a while they even took the whole horns of some young sheep, that had not curved too much, and used the pair just as they grew. In this case each horn made one-half of the bow, and the piece of skull between was shaped down into a handle. This gave the shape of a “Cupid’s Bow,” but it could shoot to kill.

Sometimes they sliced spiral strips from the curved horns of a mountain sheep and steamed them straight. Then they glued these strips together to create an incredibly strong and springy bow. Occasionally, they even used the whole horns from young sheep that hadn’t curved too much, using each pair just as they naturally grew. In this case, each horn served as half of the bow, and the piece of skull in between was shaped into a handle. This resulted in the shape of a “Cupid’s Bow,” but it was powerful enough to kill.

Hunting wild boar with long bow

The “Long Bow” in Sherwood Forest

The "Long Bow" in Sherwood Forest

One of Robin Hood’s famous band encounters a savage tusker at close range.

One of Robin Hood's famous gang comes face-to-face with a wild boar up close.

As to Arrows.

The arrows were quite as important, and their making became a great industry with every race. This was because so many must be carried for each hunt or battle.

The arrows were equally important, and making them became a big industry for every group. This was because a lot of them had to be carried for each hunt or battle.

Who is not familiar with the chipped flint arrow-heads that the farmer so often turns up with his plow as a relic of the period when Americans were red-skinned instead of white? These arrow-heads have generally a shoulder where the arrow was set into the shaft, there to be bound tightly with sinew or fiber. Many of them are also barbed to hold the flesh.

Who isn’t familiar with the chipped flint arrowheads that farmers often find with their plows as reminders of the time when Americans were red-skinned instead of white? These arrowheads usually have a shoulder where the arrow was attached to the shaft, tightly bound with sinew or fiber. Many of them are also barbed to grip the flesh.

A Shooting Machine.

But the age of machinery was coming on. Once in a while there were glimpses of more powerful and complicated devices to be seen among these simple arms.

But the age of machines was approaching. Every now and then, there were hints of more powerful and complex devices visible among these simple tools.

A new weapon now came about through warfare. Man has been a savage fighting animal through pretty much all his history, but while he tried to kill the other fellow, he objected to being killed himself.

A new weapon has now emerged due to warfare. Throughout most of history, humans have been savage fighters, but while they tried to kill others, they were opposed to being killed themselves.

Therefore he took to wearing armor. During the Middle Ages he piled on more and more, until at last one of the knights could hardly walk, and it took a strong horse to carry him. When such a one fell, he went over with a crash like a tin-peddler’s wagon, and had to be picked up again by some of his men. Such armor would turn most of the arrows. Hence invention got at work again and produced the cross-bow and its bolt. We have already learned how the tough skin of animals brought about the bow; now we see that man’s artificial iron skin caused the invention of the cross-bow.

So, he started wearing armor. During the Middle Ages, he kept adding more and more, until finally one of the knights could barely walk, and it took a strong horse to carry him. When one of them fell, it was like a crash of a tin peddler’s wagon, and his men had to pick him up again. Such armor could deflect most arrows. This led to more inventions, resulting in the crossbow and its bolt. We've already seen how the tough skin of animals led to the bow; now we see that man's artificial iron skin led to the creation of the crossbow.

What It Was.

What was the cross-bow? It was the first real hand-shooting machine. It was another big step toward the day of the rifle. The idea was simple enough. Wooden bows had already been made as strong as the strongest man could pull, and they wished for still stronger ones—steel ones. How could they pull them? At first they mounted them upon a wooden frame and rested one end on the shoulder for a brace. Then they took to pressing the other end against the ground, and using both hands. Next, it was a bright idea to put a stirrup on this end, in order to hold it with the foot.

What was the crossbow? It was the first real hand-held shooting device. It represented a significant advance towards the era of rifles. The concept was pretty straightforward. Wooden bows had already been crafted to be as powerful as the strongest person could pull, and they were looking for even stronger ones—steel ones. How could they draw them? Initially, they mounted them on a wooden frame and rested one end on their shoulder for support. Then, they started pressing the other end against the ground and using both hands. Eventually, they had the clever idea to add a stirrup on this end, allowing them to hold it with their foot.

Still they were not satisfied. “Stronger, stronger!” they clamored; “give us bows which will kill the enemy farther away than he can shoot at us! If we cannot set such bows with both arms let us try our backs!” So they fastened “belt-claws” to their stout girdles and tugged the bow strings into place with their back and leg muscles.

Still, they weren't satisfied. “Stronger, stronger!” they shouted; “give us bows that can kill the enemy from farther away than he can shoot at us! If we can’t pull back these bows with both arms, let’s use our backs!” So they attached “belt-claws” to their sturdy belts and pulled the bowstrings into place using their back and leg muscles.

“Stronger, stronger again, for now the enemy has learned to use belt-claws and he can shoot as far as we. Let us try mechanics!”

“Stronger, stronger than ever, because now the enemy has figured out how to use belt-claws and he can shoot just as far as we can. Let’s try mechanics!”

So they attached levers, pulleys, ratchets and windlasses, until at last they reached the size of the great siege cross-bows, weighing eighteen pounds. These sometimes needed a force of twelve hundred pounds to draw back the string to its catch, but how they could shoot!

So they added levers, pulleys, ratchets, and windlasses, until they finally got to the size of the huge siege crossbows, which weighed eighteen pounds. These sometimes required a force of twelve hundred pounds to pull the string back to its catch, but wow, could they shoot!

And Now for Chemistry.

Human muscle seemed to have reached its limit, mechanics seemed to have reached its limit, but still the world clamored, “Stronger, stronger! How shall we kill our enemy farther away than he can kill us?” For answer, man unlocked one of the secrets of Nature and took out a terrible force. It was a force of chemistry.

Human muscle seemed to have hit its peak, mechanics felt like they had maxed out, yet the world shouted, “Stronger, stronger! How can we take out our enemies from a greater distance than they can reach us?” In response, humans uncovered one of Nature's secrets and harnessed a devastating power. It was a power of chemistry.

Deer stalking with a cross-bow

Deer-Stalking with the Cross-Bow

Hunting Deer with a Crossbow

This compact arm with its small bolt and great power was popular with many sportsmen.

This compact arm with its small bolt and powerful performance was popular among many athletes.

Who first discovered the power of gunpowder? Probably the Chinese, although all authorities do not agree. Strange, is it not, that a race still using cross-bows in its army should have known of explosives long before the Christian Era, and perhaps as far back as the time of Moses? Here is a passage from their ancient Gentoo Code of Laws: “The magistrate shall not make war with any deceitful machine, or with poisoned weapons, or with cannons or guns, or any kind of firearms.” But China might as well have been Mars before the age of travel. Our civilization had to work out the problem for itself.

Who was the first to discover the power of gunpowder? Probably the Chinese, although not everyone agrees. It's strange, isn't it, that a culture still using crossbows in its army had knowledge of explosives long before the Christian Era, possibly even dating back to the time of Moses? Here’s a quote from their ancient Gentoo Code of Laws: “The magistrate shall not make war with any deceitful machine, or with poisoned weapons, or with cannons or guns, or any kind of firearms.” But China might as well have been Mars before the age of travel. Our civilization had to figure out the problem on its own.

Playing with Fire.

It all began through playing with fire. It was desired to throw fire on an enemy’s buildings or his ships, and so destroy them. Burning torches were thrown by machines, made of cords and springs, over a city wall, and it became a great study to find the best burning compound with which to cover these torches. One was needed which would blaze with a great flame and was hard to put out.

It all started with playing with fire. The goal was to throw fire at an enemy’s buildings or ships to destroy them. Flaming torches were launched by machines made of cords and springs over a city wall, and it became a serious focus to find the best flammable substance to coat these torches. It needed to be something that would ignite with a big flame and be tough to extinguish.

Hence the early chemists made all possible mixtures of pitch, resin, naphtha, sulphur, saltpeter, etc.; “Greek fire” was one of the most famous.

Hence the early chemists created every possible combination of pitch, resin, naphtha, sulfur, saltpeter, and so on; “Greek fire” was one of the most renowned.

What Two Monks Discovered.

Many of these were made in the monasteries. The monks were pretty much the only people in those days with time for study, and two of these shaven-headed scientists now had a chance to enter history. Roger Bacon was the first. One night he was working his diabolical mixture in the stone-walled laboratory, and watched, by the flickering lights, the progress of a certain interesting combination for which he had used pure instead of impure saltpeter.

Many of these were made in the monasteries. The monks were basically the only ones back then with time to study, and two of these bald-headed scholars now had a chance to make history. Roger Bacon was the first. One night, he was working on his mysterious concoction in the stone-walled lab, and, by the flickering lights, he observed the progress of a particular interesting mixture for which he had used pure rather than impure saltpeter.

Suddenly there was an explosion, shattering the chemical apparatus and probably alarming the whole building. “Good gracious!” we can imagine some of the startled brothers saying, “whatever is he up to now! Does he want to kill us all?” That explosion proved the new combination was not fitted for use as a thrown fire; it also showed the existence of terrible forces far beyond the power of all bow-springs, even those made of steel.

Suddenly, there was an explosion, destroying the chemical equipment and likely shocking everyone in the building. “Good grief!” we can picture some of the startled brothers exclaiming, “What on earth is he doing now? Does he want to blow us all up?” That explosion proved that the new combination wasn’t safe for use as a thrown fire; it also revealed the presence of terrifying forces that were far stronger than any bow-springs, even those made of steel.

Roger Bacon thus discovered what was practically gunpowder, as far back as the thirteenth century, and left writings in which he recorded mixing 11.2 parts of the saltpeter, 29.4 of charcoal, and 29 of sulphur. This was the formula developed as the result of his investigations.

Roger Bacon discovered what was basically gunpowder back in the thirteenth century and wrote about mixing 11.2 parts saltpeter, 29.4 parts charcoal, and 29 parts sulfur. This was the formula he came up with from his research.

Berthold Schwartz, a monk of Freiburg, studied Bacon’s works and carried on dangerous experiments of his own, so that he is ranked with Bacon for the honor. He was also the first one to rouse the interest of Europe in the great discovery.

Berthold Schwartz, a monk from Freiburg, examined Bacon’s works and conducted his own risky experiments, earning him recognition alongside Bacon. He was also the first to spark Europe’s interest in the significant discovery.

And then began the first crude, clumsy efforts at gunmaking. Firearms were born.

And that’s when the first rough, awkward attempts at making guns started. Firearms were created.

The Coming of the Matchlock.

Hand bombards and culverins were among the early types. Some of these were so heavy that a forked support had to be driven into the ground, and two men were needed, one to hold and aim, the other to prime and fire. How does that strike you for a duck-shooting proposition? Of course such a clumsy arrangement could only be used in war.

Hand guns and cannons were among the early types. Some of these were so heavy that a forked support had to be driven into the ground, and two people were needed—one to hold and aim, and the other to load and fire. How does that sound for a duck-shooting idea? Of course, such a clumsy setup could only be used in warfare.

Improvements kept coming, however. Guns were lightened and bettered in shape. Somebody thought of putting a flash pan for the powder, by the side of the touch-hole, and now it was decided to fasten the slow-match, in a movable cock, upon the barrel and ignite it with a trigger. These matches were fuses of some slow-burning fiber, like tow, which would keep a spark for a considerable time. Formerly they had to be carried separately, but the new arrangement was a great convenience and made the matchlock. The cock, being curved like a snake, was called the “serpentine.”

Improvements kept coming, though. Guns were made lighter and better shaped. Someone came up with the idea of adding a flash pan for the powder next to the touch-hole, and it was now decided to attach the slow-match to a movable cock on the barrel and ignite it with a trigger. These matches were fuses made of slow-burning fiber, like tow, which could hold a spark for a long time. Previously, they had to be carried separately, but the new setup was a huge convenience and created the matchlock. The cock, curved like a snake, was called the “serpentine.”

Muzzle-loading a flint-lock rifle

An Unexpected Meeting

An Unexpected Meeting

The “Kentucky Rifle” with its flint-lock was accurate, but had to be muzzle-charged.

The "Kentucky Rifle" with its flintlock was accurate, but had to be loaded from the muzzle.

The Gun of Our Ancestors.

Everybody knows what the flint-lock was like. You simply fastened a flake of flint in the cock and snapped it against a steel plate. This struck off sparks which fell into the flash-pan and fired the charge.

Everybody knows what a flintlock was like. You just secured a flake of flint in the hammer and snapped it against a steel plate. This created sparks that fell into the flash pan and ignited the charge.

It was so practical that it became the form of gun for all uses; thus gunmaking began to be a big industry. Invented early in the seventeenth century, it was used by the hunters and soldiers of the next two hundred years. Old people remember when flint-locks were plentiful everywhere. In fact, they are still being manufactured and are sold in some parts of Africa and the Orient. One factory in Birmingham, England, is said to produce about twelve hundred weekly, and Belgium shares in their manufacture. Some of the Arabs use them to this day in the form of strange-looking guns with long, slender muzzles and very light, curved stocks.

It was so practical that it became the go-to type of gun for all purposes, leading to the rise of gunmaking as a major industry. Invented in the early seventeenth century, it was used by hunters and soldiers for the next two hundred years. Older folks remember when flintlocks were everywhere. In fact, they're still being made and are sold in some areas of Africa and the Orient. One factory in Birmingham, England, reportedly produces about twelve hundred every week, and Belgium is also involved in their production. Some Arabs still use them today, often in the form of unique-looking guns with long, slender barrels and very light, curved stocks.

Caps and Breech-Loaders.

Primers were tried in different forms called “detonators,” but the familiar little copper cap was the most popular. No need to describe them. Millions are still made to be used on old-fashioned nipple guns, even in this day of fixed ammunition.

Primers were experimented with in various forms known as "detonators," but the well-known little copper cap was the most popular. There's no need to describe them. Millions are still produced for use on traditional nipple guns, even today with the prevalence of fixed ammunition.

Remington rifle

The First Remington Rifle

The First Remington Gun

Then came another great development, the breech-loader.

Then came another significant advancement, the breech-loader.

From Henry VIII to Cartridges.

Breech-loaders were hardly new. King Henry VIII of England, he of the many wives, had a match-lock arquebus of this type dated 1537. Henry IV of France even invented one for his army, and others worked a little on the idea from time to time. But it was not until fixed ammunition came into use that the breech-loader really came to stay—and that was only the other day. You remember that the Civil War began with muzzle-loaders and ended with breech-loaders.

Breech-loaders weren't exactly new. King Henry VIII of England, known for having many wives, had a match-lock arquebus of this type from 1537. Henry IV of France even created one for his army, and others occasionally experimented with the idea. However, it wasn't until fixed ammunition was introduced that breech-loaders became a permanent fixture—and that was just recently. Remember that the Civil War started with muzzle-loaders and ended with breech-loaders.

Houiller, the French gunsmith, hit on the great idea of the cartridge. If you were going to use powder, ball and percussion primer, to get your game, why not put them all into a neat, handy, gas-tight case? Simple enough, when you come to think of it, like most great ideas. But it required good brain-stuff to do that thinking.

Houiller, the French gunsmith, came up with the brilliant idea of the cartridge. If you were going to use gunpowder, bullets, and percussion caps to hunt, why not combine them all into a neat, convenient, gas-tight casing? It seems simple in hindsight, like most great ideas. But it took some serious brainpower to come up with that concept.

A Refusal and What Came of It.

Two men, a smith and his son, both named Eliphalet Remington, in 1816, were working busily one day at their forge in beautiful Ilion Gorge, when, so tradition says, the son asked his father for money to buy a rifle, and met with a refusal.

Two men, a blacksmith and his son, both named Eliphalet Remington, in 1816, were busy one day at their forge in the beautiful Ilion Gorge when, according to tradition, the son asked his father for money to buy a rifle and was turned down.

Remington junior working on a rifle

Young Remington at Work on Rifle

Young Remington Working on a Rifle

The boy set his wits to work. Looking around the forge, he picked up enough scrap iron to make a gun barrel, and with this set to work to make a rifle for himself. At that time gun barrels were made, not by drilling the bore out of a solid rod of metal, but by shaping a thick, oblong sheet of metal around a rod the size of the[86] bore, and lapwelding the edges. When the rod was withdrawn, there was your barrel.

The boy put his mind to work. Scanning the forge, he gathered enough scrap iron to create a gun barrel and began crafting a rifle for himself. Back then, gun barrels weren't made by drilling out a solid metal rod; instead, a thick, oblong sheet of metal was shaped around a rod the size of the [86] bore, and then the edges were lap-welded. Once the rod was removed, there was the barrel.

It took him several weeks to work out this job and get it right, but he succeeded. He had no tools to cut the rifling. There was a gunsmith in Utica, and he walked there, fifteen miles over the hills, to have his barrel finished. The gunsmith was so impressed by the boy and his accomplishment that, after rifling the barrel, he fitted it with a lock. Then when Remington fitted on a wooden stock his weapon was ready.

It took him a few weeks to figure out this job and get it done right, but he pulled it off. He didn't have the tools to cut the rifling. There was a gunsmith in Utica, so he walked there, fifteen miles over the hills, to have his barrel finished. The gunsmith was so impressed by the kid and what he had accomplished that, after rifling the barrel, he attached a lock to it. Then, when Remington added a wooden stock, his weapon was ready.

This was the first Remington rifle, and it proved a surprisingly good one.

This was the first Remington rifle, and it turned out to be surprisingly good.

Neighbors tried it, and wanted guns like it. Remington made them. The first rifle—or one exactly like the first one, at least—that Remington made is still in Ilion, the property of Walter Green. Before long the demand was so brisk that Remington would take as many barrels as he could carry over to the Utica gunsmith to be rifled, bringing back a load that had been left there on a previous trip, a journey of thirty miles on foot.

Neighbors tried it and wanted guns like that. Remington made them. The first rifle—or one just like the first one, at least—that Remington made is still in Ilion, owned by Walter Green. Before long, the demand was so high that Remington would take as many barrels as he could carry over to the Utica gunsmith to be rifled, bringing back a load that had been left there on a previous trip, a thirty-mile journey on foot.

When a new business grows at that rate, of course, it soon needs power. So, later, in 1816, the two Remingtons went “up the creek,” building a shop three miles from home, at Ilion Gulph, which was part of the father’s farm. That was the actual beginning of the plant and the industry of which the centennial was celebrated in 1916. During its early years this shop made anything in its line that could be sold in the neighborhood—rifles, shotguns, crowbars, pickaxes, farm tools. The power was taken from a water wheel in Steele’s Creek, and the first grindstones for smoothing down the welded edges in gun barrels were cut from a red sandstone ledge up the gorge.

When a new business grows that quickly, it definitely needs power. So, later, in 1816, the two Remingtons went “up the creek,” building a shop three miles from home at Ilion Gulph, which was part of their father’s farm. This was the actual start of the plant and the industry that celebrated its centennial in 1916. During its early years, this shop made anything it could sell in the neighborhood—rifles, shotguns, crowbars, pickaxes, farm tools. The power was sourced from a water wheel in Steele’s Creek, and the first grindstones used to smooth out the welded edges in gun barrels were cut from a red sandstone ledge up the gorge.

Guns sold better than all other products. Orders came from greater distances. By and by shipments were made on the new Erie Canal. For a while, as packages were small, they were taken to the canal bridge, a board lifted from the floor, and the package dropped onto a boat as it passed under. There was no bill of lading. Remington took down the name of the boat and notified his customer by mail, so the latter would know which craft was bringing his guns.

Guns sold better than any other products. Orders came from farther away. Gradually, shipments were made through the new Erie Canal. For a time, since the packages were small, they were taken to the canal bridge, where a board was lifted from the floor, and the package was dropped onto a boat as it passed underneath. There was no bill of lading. Remington recorded the name of the boat and informed his customer by mail, so the customer would know which vessel was delivering his guns.

When the trade had extended into all the surrounding counties, however, the new business needed another prime essential of industry—transportation facilities. Shipments were growing larger, and materials like grindstones, bought outside, had to be brought from the canal to Ilion Gulph. In 1828, therefore, the elder Remington bought a large farm in Ilion proper, and there, on the canal, the present plant was started. This was also the beginning of Ilion, for at that period the place was nothing more than a country corner. In 1828 the elder Remington met his death through accident and the business was carried on by his son, who brought water for several power wheels from Steele’s Creek, built a house to live in, and installed in his wooden shop quite a collection of machinery for gunmaking—the list names a big tilt hammer, several trip hammers, boring and rifling machines, grindstones, and so on.

When the trade expanded into all the nearby counties, the new business needed another crucial aspect of industry—transportation facilities. Shipments were getting larger, and materials like grindstones, purchased from elsewhere, had to be transported from the canal to Ilion Gulph. In 1828, the elder Remington bought a large farm in Ilion proper, and there, on the canal, the current plant was established. This also marked the beginning of Ilion, since at that time the area was just a rural corner. In 1828, the elder Remington died in an accident, and his son took over the business. The son brought water for several power wheels from Steele’s Creek, built a house to live in, and equipped his wooden shop with a range of machinery for making guns—this included a large tilt hammer, several trip hammers, boring and rifling machines, grindstones, and more.

The Beginning of Precision in Mechanics.

Not so many years before that, in England, James Watt was complaining about the difficulty of boring a six-inch cylinder for his steam engine with sufficient accuracy to make it a commercial success. No matter how he packed the piston with cork, oiled rags and old hats, the irregularities in the cylinder let the steam escape, and it was believed that neither the tools nor the workmen existed for making a steam engine with sufficient precision. When a young manufacturer named Wilkinson invented a guide for the boring tool, and machined cylinders of fifty inches diameter so accurately that, as Watt testified, they did not err the thickness of an old shilling in any part, it seemed as though the last refinement in machinery had been achieved. That was not very accurate by present-day standards of the thousandth part of an inch, for a shilling is about one-sixteenth of an inch in thickness.

Not too many years before that, in England, James Watt was expressing frustration over the challenge of boring a six-inch cylinder for his steam engine with enough accuracy to be commercially viable. No matter how he stuffed the piston with cork, oiled rags, and old hats, the imperfections in the cylinder caused steam to leak, and it was thought that neither the tools nor the workers were capable of creating a steam engine with the precision required. When a young manufacturer named Wilkinson invented a guide for the boring tool and machined cylinders with a fifty-inch diameter so accurately that, as Watt noted, they didn’t deviate more than the thickness of an old shilling in any area, it felt like the pinnacle of machinery had been reached. That was not very precise by today’s standards of a thousandth of an inch, since a shilling is roughly one-sixteenth of an inch thick.

Old boring tool

Old Boring Tool

Outdated Tool

Remington was right in the thick of development with a gunmaking plant, of course, for as his business grew he had to invent and adapt machines to increase output. The lap-welded barrel was standard until 1850, and he got together a battery of trip hammers for forging and welding his barrels. Finer dimensions became a factor in his business when the output grew large enough to warrant carrying a stock of spare parts for his customers, and so he improved those parts in ways that gave at least the beginnings of interchangeability.

Remington was heavily involved in developing a gun-making plant. As his business expanded, he needed to create and modify machines to boost production. The lap-welded barrel was the norm until 1850, and he assembled a set of trip hammers for forging and welding his barrels. As production increased, finer dimensions became important, prompting him to stock spare parts for his customers. He then improved those parts, laying the groundwork for some level of interchangeability.

Materials were very crude. There was no buying of foundry iron by analysis, no high carbon steels, no fancy tool steels—nor any “efficiency experts” with their stop watches and scientific speed-and-feed tables. Iron was secured by sending teams around the neighborhood to pick up scrap, and when the scrap iron was all cleaned up, fresh metal was brought from ore beds in Oneida County. Coal was scarce, and charcoal made the chief fuel, burnt in the hills round about Ilion.

Materials were pretty basic. There was no purchasing foundry iron based on analysis, no high carbon steels, no fancy tool steels—or any “efficiency experts” with their stopwatches and scientific speed-and-feed tables. Iron was gathered by sending teams around the neighborhood to collect scrap, and when all the scrap iron was cleaned up, fresh metal was sourced from ore beds in Oneida County. Coal was hard to come by, and charcoal was the main fuel, burned in the hills around Ilion.

And the world was fairly swarming with inventors!

And the world was buzzing with inventors!

That was long before invention became a research department full of engineers. The individual inventor, with a queer-shaped factory process, carried on by a head and a rough model in his carpet-bag, had a chance to influence industry. Few of the useful contrivances had been invented yet, and almost any one of these chaps might be a genius. So, from the very first, Remington was interested in inventors. He was an inventor himself! His pioneer spirit was so strong that Ilion became a place of pilgrimage for men with ideas. Inventors came from everywhere, and Remington listened to them all. Some brought models, others drawings, still others a bare idea, and a few, of course, had just a plain “bug.”

That was long before invention turned into a research department filled with engineers. Individual inventors, with their unique processes, carried on with just a head full of ideas and a rough model in their bag, had the opportunity to impact the industry. Very few useful devices had been created at that point, and any one of these guys could be a genius. From the beginning, Remington was interested in inventors. He was an inventor himself! His pioneering spirit was so strong that Ilion became a hub for people with ideas. Inventors came from all over, and Remington listened to every one of them. Some brought models, others brought drawings, some had just a basic idea, and a few, of course, had just a straight-up “bug.”

Pole lathe

Pole Lathe of 1800

1800s Pole Lathe

The First Government Contract.

The first government contract came in 1845. War with Mexico loomed up on the horizon. William Jencks had invented a carbine, and Uncle Sam wanted several[88] thousand guns made in a hurry under the patent. A contract had been let to Ames & Co., of Springfield, Mass., and they had made special machinery for the job. Remington took over the contract and the machinery, added to his power, secured by putting in another water race, erected the building now known as the “Old Armory,” and made the carbines.

The first government contract came in 1845. War with Mexico was on the horizon. William Jencks had invented a carbine, and Uncle Sam wanted several[88] thousand guns made quickly under the patent. A contract had been awarded to Ames & Co., of Springfield, Mass., and they had created special machinery for the job. Remington took over the contract and the machinery, increased his capabilities by adding another water race, built the structure now known as the “Old Armory,” and produced the carbines.

In 1850 the art of gunmaking began to improve radically. The old lap-welded barrel gave way to the barrel drilled from solid steel. This was accomplished for the first time in America at the Remington plant, in making Harper’s Ferry muskets. Then followed the drilling of small-bore barrels from solid steel, the drilling of doubled-barrel shotguns from one piece of steel, the drilling of fluid steel and nickel steel barrels, all done for the first time in this country at the Ilion shops. Three-barrel guns were also made from one piece of steel, two bores for shot and the third rifled for a bullet. A customer wanted some special barrels with nine bores in a single piece of steel. These were made at Ilion, and the Remington plant soon became noted for its ability to bore almost anything in the shape of a gun, from the tiniest squirrel calibers up to boat guns weighing sixty pounds or more, which were really small caliber cannon.

In 1850, gunmaking started to see major advancements. The old lap-welded barrels were replaced by barrels drilled from solid steel. This innovation first happened in America at the Remington plant with the production of Harper’s Ferry muskets. Following this, they began drilling small-bore barrels from solid steel, creating double-barrel shotguns from a single piece of steel, and drilling fluid steel and nickel steel barrels—all done for the first time in this country at the Ilion shops. They also manufactured three-barrel guns from one piece of steel, featuring two smoothbores for shot and a third rifled for bullets. A customer requested special barrels with nine bores made from one piece of steel, which were crafted at Ilion. The Remington plant quickly gained a reputation for its ability to bore virtually anything in the shape of a gun, from the smallest squirrel calibers to boat guns weighing sixty pounds or more, which were essentially small-caliber cannons.

Loading vessel through the deck of the bridge

Shipping Remingtons in the Early Days

Shipping Remingtons in the Early Days

Between the time when Remington made his first rifle at Ilion Gulph and the outbreak of the Civil War, most of the basic things in machine tools had been adapted to general production—the slide-rest lathe, planer, shaper, drill press, steam hammer, taps and dies, the vernier caliper that enabled a mechanic at the bench to measure to one-thousandth of an inch, and so on.

Between the time Remington made his first rifle at Ilion Gulph and the start of the Civil War, most of the essential machine tools had been adapted for mass production—the slide-rest lathe, planer, shaper, drill press, steam hammer, taps and dies, and the vernier caliper that allowed a mechanic at the bench to measure to one-thousandth of an inch, and so on.

When Fort Sumter was fired upon, Uncle Sam turned to the Remington plant, among others, for help out of his dilemma of “unpreparedness.” The first contract was given for 5,000 Harper’s Ferry rifles, and it took two years to complete it. Five thousand Harper’s Ferry muskets came in to be changed so that bayonet or sabre could be attached, and this particular job was finished in two weeks, every man and boy in Ilion working at it. There was a big contract for army revolvers, and that had to be taken care of by starting a separate plant in Utica, which ran until the end of the war, when its machinery and tools were moved to Ilion. Steam power was now installed, and the plant, increased by new buildings and machinery, ran day and night.

When Fort Sumter was attacked, Uncle Sam reached out to the Remington plant, among others, to solve his problem of being “unprepared.” The first contract was for 5,000 Harper’s Ferry rifles, which took two years to complete. Five thousand Harper’s Ferry muskets were modified so that a bayonet or saber could be attached, and this specific job was done in two weeks, with every man and boy in Ilion pitching in. There was a huge contract for army revolvers, which required starting a separate plant in Utica that operated until the end of the war, after which its machinery and tools were moved to Ilion. Steam power was installed, and the plant, expanded with new buildings and machinery, operated day and night.

Hunter with automatic rifle

Master of the Situation

Master of the Situation

The modern sportsman with his automatic rifle is prepared for all emergencies.

The modern athlete with his automatic rifle is ready for any situation.

In 1863, the Remington breech-loading rifle was perfected, and proved to be so great an improvement over previous inventions in military arms that an order for 10,000 of them was obtained from our government. The Ilion plant being taxed to its utmost capacity, the contract was transferred to the Savage Arms Company, of Middletown, Conn., which completed the job in 1864.

In 1863, the Remington breech-loading rifle was perfected and turned out to be such a significant improvement over earlier military weapons that our government placed an order for 10,000 of them. The Ilion plant was operating at full capacity, so the contract was handed over to the Savage Arms Company in Middletown, Conn., which finished the job in 1864.

Turning gun stocks 40 yards range
Illustrations by courtesy of the Winchester Repeating Arms Co.

The tools and fixtures used in making Remington breech-loading rifles for the United States were brought back from Connecticut in 1866, and an inventive genius named John Rider was set to work, with a staff of the best mechanics obtainable, to develop this gun still further. He devised the famous system of a dropping breech block, backed up by the hammer.

The tools and fixtures used to make Remington breech-loading rifles for the United States were brought back from Connecticut in 1866, and a talented inventor named John Rider was hired, along with the best mechanics available, to further develop this firearm. He created the well-known system of a dropping breech block, supported by the hammer.

Uncle Sam had a great number of muzzle-loading Springfield rifles left from the Civil War. By the Berdan system, these were turned into breech-loaders at the Ilion plant, the breech being cut out of the barrel and a breech-block inserted, swinging upward and forward. Spain had 10,000 muskets to modernize by the same system, and the breech-block attachments were made at Ilion.

Uncle Sam had a large number of muzzle-loading Springfield rifles leftover from the Civil War. Using the Berdan system, these were converted into breech-loaders at the Ilion plant, where the breech was cut out of the barrel and a breech-block was inserted, swinging upward and forward. Spain had 10,000 muskets to upgrade using the same system, and the breech-block attachments were made at Ilion.

The Berdan system, with a slight alteration, was the foundation of the Allen gun, made by the United States government for the army until superseded by the Krag-Jorgensen.

The Berdan system, with a minor change, formed the basis of the Allen gun, produced by the U.S. government for the army until it was replaced by the Krag-Jorgensen.

The repeating rifle now seemed an interesting possibility and large sums were spent in developing a weapon of this type. It did not prove to have merit, however.

The repeating rifle now seemed like an interesting option, and a lot of money was invested in developing this type of weapon. However, it didn’t turn out to be very useful.

Then James P. Lee designed the first military rifle with the bolt type of cartridge chamber, the parent of the military rifle of today. The model was made at Ilion, but another type of bolt gun, the Keene, seemed to offer still greater possibilities at the moment, and the plant was being prepared to manufacture this. The Lee gun was taken up at Bridgeport, but not made successfully, and finally, as the Keene gun had not met expectations, falling short of government tests, the Lee type was brought back to Ilion, tools worked out and manufacture undertaken in quantities. It afterwards became the basis for the famous British army rifle, the Lee-Metford.

Then James P. Lee designed the first military rifle with a bolt-type cartridge chamber, which is the ancestor of today’s military rifles. The model was produced in Ilion, but another bolt-action rifle, the Keene, seemed to hold even greater potential at the time, and preparations were made to manufacture it. The Lee rifle was taken to Bridgeport, but it wasn’t produced successfully. Eventually, since the Keene rifle didn’t live up to expectations and failed government tests, the Lee design was brought back to Ilion, where they refined the tools and began mass production. It eventually became the foundation for the famous British army rifle, the Lee-Metford.

Scenes from the testing facilities

Extreme Care in Testing is Necessary to Accuracy of Aim in the Finished Product

It's important to be very careful during testing to make sure the aim is accurate in the final product.

Illustrations by courtesy of the Winchester Repeating Arms Co.

Illustrations courtesy of the Winchester Repeating Arms Co.

At this period the plant made many other interesting guns. The Whitmore double-barrel breech-loading shotgun was designed, and later developed into the Remington breech-loading shotgun. Eliott hammerless breech-loading pistols with one, two, four and five barrels, discharged by a revolving firing pin, were made in large quantities, as well as a single-barrel Eliott magazine pistol. The Eliott magazine pump rifle was perfected in Ilion, but afterwards made in New England. Vernier and wind gauge sights, attachable to any rifle, were made, and novelties like the “gun cane,” which had the appearance of a walking-stick, but was a perfect firearm, carried as a protection against robbery.

During this time, the plant produced many other intriguing firearms. The Whitmore double-barrel breech-loading shotgun was designed and later evolved into the Remington breech-loading shotgun. Eliott hammerless breech-loading pistols with one, two, four, and five barrels, fired by a revolving firing pin, were manufactured in large quantities, along with a single-barrel Eliott magazine pistol. The Eliott magazine pump rifle was refined in Ilion but later produced in New England. Vernier and wind gauge sights, which could be attached to any rifle, were created, as well as novelties like the “gun cane,” which looked like a walking stick but was actually a fully functional firearm, used for protection against robbery.

Assembling repeating shotguns and rifles

Making Barrels.

One of the most important features is, of course, the making of barrels. The machines for drilling and boring are the best that money can buy, and the operatives the most skilful to be found anywhere. Care at this stage reduces the necessity for straightening later. Every point is given the minutest attention. In drilling 22-calibers, for example, the length of the hole must be from 100 to 125 times the diameter of the drill.

One of the most important aspects is, of course, barrel making. The machines for drilling and boring are top-of-the-line, and the workers are some of the most skilled you'll find anywhere. Care at this stage minimizes the need for straightening later on. Every detail is given the utmost attention. In drilling .22 calibers, for instance, the length of the hole must be between 100 and 125 times the diameter of the drill.

Improvements have made it possible to drill harder steel than formerly. This reduces the weight of the gun, and is important to the man who carries it.

Improvements have made it possible to drill harder steel than before. This reduces the weight of the gun and is important for the person who carries it.

Taking off 21000 of an Inch.

The boring is an especially delicate task. In choke-boring your shotgun, for example, the final reamer took off only 21000 of an inch. Think of such a gossamer thread of metal! But it insures accuracy. No pains can be too great for that.

The boring is a particularly sensitive job. When choke-boring your shotgun, for instance, the final reamer removed just 21000 of an inch. Imagine such a fine sliver of metal! But it guarantees precision. No effort is too much for that.

This exquisite painstaking will be seen still more in the barrel-inspection department, to which we will go now. In passing, we must not forget the grinding shop, where is, perhaps, the finest battery of grinding machines in the United States; or the polishers running at the dizzy speed of 1,500 to 1,700 revolutions per minute and making the inside of the barrel shine like glass. This high polish is important, for it resists rust and prevents leading.

This meticulous work will be even more evident in the barrel inspection department, which we'll visit now. By the way, we mustn't overlook the grinding shop, which likely has the best set of grinding machines in the United States; or the polishers operating at an astonishing speed of 1,500 to 1,700 revolutions per minute, giving the inside of the barrel a glass-like shine. This high polish is crucial, as it helps resist rust and prevents leading.

Shooting room of ballistic department

* The bullet breaks a metal tape at the moment of leaving the muzzle. This time and the time of striking target are electrically recorded on the Chronograph.

* The bullet breaks a metal tape when it exits the muzzle. This timing, along with the moment it hits the target, is electronically recorded on the Chronograph.

Some of the shooting tests Chronograph for measuring velocities Weighing bullets

That is the atmosphere of the whole place. Every action has its reason. There is not an unnecessary motion made by any one, and there is not one necessary thing omitted, whatever the cost or trouble.

That’s the vibe of the entire place. Every action has a purpose. No one makes unnecessary movements, and nothing essential is left out, no matter the cost or hassle.

Lathes

Courtesy of the Winchester Repeating Arms Co.

Courtesy of the Winchester Repeating Arms Co.

The Making of Ammunition Today.

It is no easy matter to secure a pass to the Bridgeport plant. Its great advantage over other concerns lies, to a large degree, in the exclusive machinery that has been developed at so much pains and expense and the secrets of which are so carefully guarded. In our case, however, there will be nothing to hinder us from getting a few general impressions, provided we do not go into mechanical details too closely.

It’s not simple to get a pass to the Bridgeport plant. Its main advantage over other companies comes largely from the unique machinery that has been developed with great effort and expense, and the secrets of that machinery are carefully protected. However, in our situation, there’s nothing stopping us from gaining some general impressions, as long as we don’t dive too deeply into the mechanical details.

The very size of the great manufactory is impressive—sixteen acres of floor space, crowded with machinery and resounding with activity. In building after building, floor above floor, the sight is similar: the long rows of busy machines, the whirling network of shafts and belts above, the intent operatives, and the steady clicking of innumerable parts blended into a softened widespread sound. It seems absolutely endless; it is a matter of hours to go through the plant. Stop at one of the machines and see the speed and accuracy with which it turns out its product; then calculate the entire number of machines and you will begin to gain a little idea as to what the total output of this vast institution must be.

The sheer size of the massive factory is impressive—sixteen acres of floor space filled with machinery and buzzing with activity. In building after building, floor after floor, the scene is the same: long lines of busy machines, the spinning web of shafts and belts overhead, focused workers, and the steady clicking of countless parts creating a mellow, widespread sound. It seems absolutely endless; it takes hours to get through the whole facility. Stop at one of the machines and watch how quickly and accurately it produces its product; then consider the total number of machines, and you'll start to get a sense of the overall output of this enormous enterprise.

Putting metal heads on paper shot shells

More than once you will find yourself wondering whether there can be guns enough in the world, or fingers enough to press their triggers, to use such a tremendous production of ammunition. But there are, and the demand is steadily increasing. This old world is a pretty big place after all.

More than once you’ll find yourself questioning whether there are enough guns in the world, or enough fingers to pull their triggers, to use such a huge amount of ammunition. But there are, and the demand keeps growing. This old world is actually a pretty big place, after all.

Assembling auto shotguns Examining paper shells Repeating shotgun machining department Inspecting metallic shells

Handling Deadly Explosives.

Operatives, girls in many cases, handle the most terrible compounds. We stop, for example, where they are making primers to go in the head of your loaded shell, in order that it may not miss fire when the bunch of quail whirrs suddenly into the air from the sheltering grasses. That grayish, pasty mass is wet fulminate of mercury. Suppose it should dry a trifle too rapidly. It would be the last thing you ever did suppose, for there is force enough in that double handful to blow its surroundings into fragments. You edge away a little, and no wonder, but the girl who handles it shows no fear as she deftly but carefully presses it into molds which separate it into the proper sizes for primers. She knows that in its present moist condition it cannot explode.

Operatives, often young women, work with some really dangerous materials. We pause, for instance, where they’re producing primers that go into the heads of your loaded shells, so they won’t misfire when a flock of quail suddenly takes off from the tall grass. That grayish, pasty substance is wet fulminate of mercury. Imagine if it dried just a bit too fast. It would be the last thing you ever imagined, because there’s enough force in that small amount to blow everything around it to bits. You step back a little, and it’s understandable, but the girl handling it shows no fear as she skillfully but carefully presses it into molds that shape it into the right sizes for primers. She knows that in its current moist state, it can’t explode.

Extreme Precautions.

Or, perhaps, we may be watching one of the many loading machines. There is a certain suggestiveness in the way the machines are separated by partitions. The man in charge takes a small carrier of powder from a case in the outside wall and shuts the door, then carefully empties it into the reservoir of his machine, and watches alertly while it packs the proper portions into the waiting shells. He looks like a careful man, and needs to be. You do not stand too close.

Or maybe we’re just watching one of the many loading machines. There’s something intriguing about how the machines are divided by partitions. The guy in charge takes a small powder carrier from a case in the outer wall and closes the door, then carefully pours it into his machine's reservoir and watches closely as it fills the waiting shells with the right amounts. He seems like a cautious guy, and he has to be. You don’t stand too close.

The empty carrier then passes through a little door at the side of the building, and drops into the yawning mouth of an automatic tube. In the twinkling of an eye it appears in front of the operator in one of the distributing stations, where it is refilled and returned to its proper loading machine, in order to keep the machine going at a perfectly uniform rate; while at the same time it allows but a minimum amount of powder to remain in the building at any moment. Each machine has but just sufficient powder in its hopper to run until a new supply can reach it. Greater precaution than this cannot be imagined, illustrating as it does, that no effort has been spared to protect the lives of the operators.

The empty carrier then goes through a small door on the side of the building and drops into the wide opening of an automatic tube. In the blink of an eye, it shows up in front of the operator at one of the distribution stations, where it gets refilled and sent back to its designated loading machine to keep everything running smoothly at a steady pace; meanwhile, it ensures that only a minimal amount of powder is kept in the building at any time. Each machine has just enough powder in its hopper to operate until a new supply arrives. Greater care than this is unimaginable, showing that no effort has been spared to ensure the safety of the operators.


How does an Artesian Well Keep Up Its Supply of Water?

Artesian wells are named after the French Province of Artais, where they appear to have been first used on an extensive scale.

Artesian wells are named after the French region of Artois, where they seem to have been first used extensively.

Cross-section of artesian well

Artesian Well (D) in the London Basin

Artesian Well (D) in the London Basin

They are perpendicular borings into the ground through which water rises to the surface of the soil, producing a constant flow or stream. As a location is chosen where the source of supply is higher than the mouth of the boring, the water rises to the opening at the top. They are generally sunk in valley plains and districts where the formation of the ground is such that that below the surface is bent into basin-shaped curves. The rain falling on the outcrops of these saturates the whole porous bed, so that when the bore reaches it the water by hydraulic pressure rushes up towards the level of the highest portion of the strata.

They are vertical holes drilled into the ground through which water flows up to the surface, creating a constant stream. When a site is selected where the water supply is located higher than the opening of the hole, the water rises to the opening on top. These holes are typically drilled in valleys and areas where the ground forms basin-shaped curves below the surface. Rain that falls on these areas saturates the entire porous layer, so when the hole reaches it, the water rushes up due to hydraulic pressure toward the highest level of the rock layers.

The supply is sometimes so abundant as to be used extensively as a moving power, and in arid regions for fertilizing the ground, to which purpose artesian springs have been applied from a very remote period. Thus many artesian wells have been sunk in the Algerian Sahara which have proved an immense boon to the district. The same has been done in the arid region of the United States. The water of most of these is potable, but a few are a little saline, though not to such an extent as to influence vegetation.

The supply is sometimes so plentiful that it’s widely used as a source of energy, and in dry areas, it's used to fertilize the land, a practice that's been around for a long time with artesian springs. Many artesian wells have been dug in the Algerian Sahara, and they have been a huge benefit to the area. The same has been done in the dry regions of the United States. Most of this water is drinkable, but a few are slightly salty, though not enough to affect plant growth.

The hollows in which London and Paris lie are both perforated in many places by borings of this nature. At London they were first sunk only to the sand, but more recently into the chalk. One of the most celebrated artesian wells is that of Grenelle near Paris, 1,798 feet deep, completed in 1841, after eight years’ work. One at Rochefort, France, is 2,765 feet deep; at Columbus, Ohio, 2,775; at Pesth, Hungary, 3,182, and at St. Louis, Mo., 3,84312. Artesian borings have been made in West Queensland 4,000 feet deep. At Schladebach, in Prussia, there is one nearly a mile deep.

The depressions where London and Paris are located have many spots drilled into them like this. In London, the initial drills only went down to the sand, but more recently, they've reached the chalk. One of the most famous artesian wells is in Grenelle near Paris, at a depth of 1,798 feet, completed in 1841 after eight years of work. There's one in Rochefort, France, that's 2,765 feet deep; in Columbus, Ohio, it's 2,775 feet; in Pesth, Hungary, it's 3,182 feet; and in St. Louis, Missouri, it's 3,84312. Artesian wells have also been drilled in West Queensland to a depth of 4,000 feet. In Schladebach, Prussia, there's one nearly a mile deep.

As the temperature of water from great depths is invariably higher than that at the surface, artesian wells have been made to supply warm water for heating manufactories, greenhouses, hospitals, fishponds, etc. The petroleum wells of America are of the same technical description. These wells are now made with larger diameters than formerly, and altogether their construction has been rendered much more easy in modern times.

As water from deep underground is always warmer than at the surface, artesian wells have been created to provide warm water for heating factories, greenhouses, hospitals, fish ponds, and more. The oil wells in America are similar in design. Nowadays, these wells are constructed with larger diameters than in the past, and the overall process has become much easier with modern technology.

Boring in the earth or rock for mining, geologic or engineering purposes is effected by means of augers, drills or jumpers, sometimes wrought by hand, but now usually by machinery, driven by steam or frequently by compressed air.

Boring into the earth or rock for mining, geological, or engineering purposes is done using augers, drills, or jumpers, sometimes operated by hand, but now typically by machines powered by steam or often by compressed air.

In ordinary mining practice a bore-hole is usually commenced by digging a small pit about six feet deep, over which is set up a shear-legs with pulley, etc. The boring rods are from ten to twenty feet in length, capable of being jointed together by box and screw, and having a chisel inserted at the lower end. A lever is employed to raise the bore-rods, to which a slight twisting motion is given at each stroke, when the rock at the bottom of the hole is broken by the repeated percussion of the cutting tool. Various methods are employed to clear out the triturated rock.

In standard mining operations, a borehole usually begins with digging a small pit about six feet deep, where shear legs with a pulley and other equipment are set up. The boring rods are between ten to twenty feet long, designed to be connected with a box and screw, and have a chisel at the lower end. A lever is used to lift the bore rods, giving them a slight twisting motion with each stroke, as the rock at the bottom of the hole is shattered by the repeated impact of the cutting tool. Different methods are used to remove the crushed rock.

The work is much quickened by the substitution of steam power, water power, or even horse power for manual labor. Of the many forms of boring machines now in use may be mentioned the diamond boring machine, invented by Leschot, a Swiss engineer. In this the cutting tool is of a tubular form, and receives a uniform rotatory motion, the result being the production of a cylindrical core from the rock of the same size as the bore or caliber of the tube. The boring bit is a steel thimble about four inches in length, having two rows of Brazilian black diamonds firmly embedded therein, the edges projecting slightly. The diamond teeth are the only parts which come in contact with the rock, and their hardness is such that an enormous length can be bored with but little appreciable wear.

The work is greatly accelerated by using steam power, water power, or even horsepower instead of manual labor. Among the many types of boring machines currently in use, we can mention the diamond boring machine, invented by Leschot, a Swiss engineer. In this machine, the cutting tool is tubular and rotates uniformly, which produces a cylindrical core from the rock that matches the size of the bore or caliber of the tube. The boring bit is a steel thimble about four inches long, with two rows of Brazilian black diamonds securely embedded in it, with the edges slightly protruding. The diamond teeth are the only parts that touch the rock, and their hardness allows for boring an extensive length with very little noticeable wear.

Where do Dates Come From?

Besides the dried dates which we are accustomed to seeing in this country, they are used extensively by the natives of Northern Africa and of some countries of Asia.

Besides the dried dates we’re used to seeing in this country, they are widely used by the people in Northern Africa and some Asian countries.

It consists of an external pericarp, separable into three portions, and covering a seed which is hard and horny in consequence of the nature of the albumen in which the embryo plant is buried.

It has an outer shell that can be divided into three parts, and it covers a seed that is tough and hard because of the type of substance surrounding the embryo plant.

Next to the cocoanut tree, the date is unquestionably the most interesting and useful of the palm tribe. Its stem shoots up to the height of fifty or sixty feet without branch or division, and of nearly the same thickness throughout its length. From the summit it throws out a magnificent crown of large feather-shaped leaves and a number of spadices, each of which in the female plant bears a bunch of from 180 to 200 dates, each bunch weighing from twenty to twenty-five pounds.

Next to the coconut tree, the date palm is definitely the most fascinating and useful among the palm family. Its trunk can grow to a height of fifty or sixty feet without any branches or divisions, and it maintains a similar thickness along its entire length. At the top, it produces a stunning crown of large, feather-shaped leaves and several flower clusters. Each cluster on the female tree produces a bunch of 180 to 200 dates, with each bunch weighing between twenty to twenty-five pounds.

The fruit is eaten fresh or dried. Cakes of dates pounded and kneaded together are the food of the Arabs who traverse the deserts. A liquor resembling wine is made from dates by fermentation.

The fruit can be eaten fresh or dried. Cakes made from pounded and kneaded dates are the food of Arabs who travel through the deserts. A drink similar to wine is made from dates through fermentation.

Persia, Palestine, Arabia and the north of Africa are best adapted for the culture of the date-tree, and its fruit is in these countries an important article of food. It is now being introduced into California.

Persia, Palestine, Arabia, and North Africa are ideally suited for growing date palms, and their fruit is a significant food source in these regions. It is now being introduced in California.


The Story of Rubber

Rubber is the coagulated sap of more than 300 varieties of tropical trees and vines—the Landolphia of Africa, the Ficus of the Malay Peninsula, the Guayule shrub of Mexico and the Castilloa of South America, Central America and Southern Mexico are all important rubber producers, but far more important than all of the others together is the Hevea, a native of Brazil.

Rubber is the thickened sap from over 300 species of tropical trees and vines. The Landolphia tree from Africa, the Ficus from the Malay Peninsula, the Guayule shrub from Mexico, and the Castilloa from South America, Central America, and Southern Mexico are all significant rubber producers. However, the Hevea, which originates from Brazil, is by far the most important of them all.

Hevea trees are scattered through the dense forests of practically every part of the Amazon Basin, a territory more than two-thirds as large as the United States.

Hevea trees are found throughout the thick forests of almost every area in the Amazon Basin, which is a region that's more than two-thirds the size of the United States.

How was Rubber First Used?

Down in Brazil, several hundred miles up the Amazon River, there stood a great forest of trees and in this forest—the same as in forests of today—were birds and animals and bugs and beetles, etc. All trees are protected by nature; some are protected from bugs eating their leaves, by other bugs eating up these bugs; other trees are protected by having a thorny or bristly bark.

Down in Brazil, several hundred miles up the Amazon River, there was a vast forest filled with trees, and in this forest—just like in today’s forests—there were birds, animals, insects, and beetles, among others. All trees are safeguarded by nature; some have protection from insects munching on their leaves because other insects eat those pests; other trees defend themselves with thorny or prickly bark.

Handball playing Indians

Indians Playing With a Rubber Ball When Columbus Came in Sight

Indians Playing with a Rubber Ball When Columbus Arrived

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

In these forests in which the rubber tree grows there was a wood-boring beetle, and this beetle would attack these rubber trees, boring into them; but the tree, in order to protect itself, had a poisonous juice, and as soon as the beetle bored into the tree, this juice killed him. Then the juice would fill up the hole the beetle had made, and the tree would go on growing as before.

In these forests where rubber trees grow, there was a wood-boring beetle that would attack them by boring into the trunks. To defend itself, the tree produced a toxic sap, and as soon as the beetle penetrated the tree, the sap would kill it. Then, the sap would fill the hole the beetle had created, and the tree would continue to grow as usual.

In those days the natives around these forests (who were half Indian and half Negro) happened to find some of this juice sticking on the tree. They cut it off, rolled it together and made a ball, with which they would play games. The first mention of it was made by Herrera in his account of the second voyage of Columbus, wherein he speaks of a ball used by Indians, made from the gum of a tree which was lighter and bounced better than the far-famed balls of Castile.

In those days, the locals around these forests (who were part Native American and part Black) found some of this sap on the tree. They cut it off, rolled it together, and made a ball with which they played games. The first mention of it was made by Herrera in his account of Columbus's second voyage, where he talks about a ball used by Native Americans that was made from the gum of a tree and was lighter and bounced better than the famous balls from Castile.

Snapshots of rubber production

In the Jungle
Llama, Domestic Animal of the Andes, Used to Carry Rubber over Mountains
Railroad Around the Rapids of the Madeira Terminal
Crude Rubber “Biscuits” on the Banks of the Amazon

In the Jungle
Llamas, domestic animals from the Andes, used to transport rubber over mountains
Railroad around the rapids of the Madeira terminal
Raw rubber “biscuits” on the banks of the Amazon

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

The way they gather this rubber is very interesting. When it comes from the tree it is nothing but a milky juice. The natives of South America soon discovered that the white man was willing to pay them beads and other trinkets for chunks of this rubber, so they became active in gathering it.

The way they collect this rubber is quite fascinating. When it comes out of the tree, it’s just a milky fluid. The indigenous people of South America quickly realized that the white man was ready to trade beads and other trinkets for pieces of this rubber, so they started gathering it eagerly.

River in Brazil

On the Banks of the Rio Guapore—Brazil

On the Shores of the Rio Guapore—Brazil

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

What is a Rubber Camp Like?

In this locality the rubber harvest commences as soon as the Amazon falls which is usually about the first of August. When this date approaches bands of natives set out from their primitive homes and go, in many instances, hundreds of miles into the forest lowlands. There, within easy reach of the rubber trees, they set up their camp and the actual work of harvesting the rubber crop begins. It usually covers a period of about six months, extending from August to January or February.

In this area, the rubber harvest starts as soon as the Amazon River falls, which is typically around the beginning of August. As this date gets closer, groups of locals leave their simple homes and often travel hundreds of miles into the forest lowlands. There, close to the rubber trees, they set up camp, and the actual work of collecting the rubber begins. This process usually lasts about six months, from August to January or February.

The camps are usually great distances from the nearest town and procuring supplies is not only difficult but very expensive as well. The natives build their huts out of small poles covered with palm thatch and live in little colonies while the rubber harvest is going on. The Brazilian name for a rubber gatherer is “seringuero.”

The camps are typically far from the nearest town, making it not only hard to get supplies but also quite costly. The locals construct their huts from small poles topped with palm thatch and live in small groups while the rubber collection is happening. The Brazilian term for a rubber collector is “seringuero.”

Hut in jungle

Rubber Gatherer’s Hut Near the Amazon

Rubber Gatherer's Hut by the Amazon

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Courtesy of B. F. Goodrich Co.

A roof and floor with the flimsiest of walls, set up on piling for coolness, defense against animals and insects, and to keep the building dry during flood season, forms the home of the rubber gatherer. The more pretentious and better furnished home of the superintendent of the “estate,” together with the storehouses, etc., are called the “seringal.”

A roof and floor with the flimsiest walls, raised on stilts for coolness, protection from animals and insects, and to keep the place dry during the flood season, makes up the home of the rubber gatherer. The fancier and better-equipped home of the estate’s superintendent, along with the storehouses, is referred to as the “seringal.”

The buildings are usually grouped together at a favorable spot on the banks of the Amazon or one of its tributaries.

The buildings are typically clustered together in a prime location along the banks of the Amazon or one of its tributaries.

Furniture is of the most primitive type. The laborers and their families sleep in hammocks or on matting on the floor. Food is largely made up of canned goods and the ever-present farina, a sort of tapioca flour.

Furniture is very basic. The workers and their families sleep in hammocks or on mats on the floor. Their diet mainly consists of canned goods and the ever-present farina, a type of tapioca flour.

The climate of the South American rubber country is usually fatal to white[101] men, and even among the Indians the fevers, the poisonous insects and reptiles, and the other perils of a tropical forest cause a high death rate. The production of South American rubber is limited by a shortage of men rather than a shortage of trees.

The climate of the South American rubber region is often deadly for white[101] men, and even among the Indigenous people, the fevers, poisonous insects and reptiles, and other dangers of a tropical forest lead to a high death rate. The production of South American rubber is restricted by a lack of manpower rather than a lack of trees.

In December the rainy season begins. The waters of the Amazon begin to rise and the work ceases. The superintendent and many of the workers go down the river to Para and Manaos or to villages on higher ground. However, a number of the laborers usually remain in the huts, loafing and fighting the animals and insects that seek refuge from the rising waters. They have but little to eat, and during the entire season practically no communication with the outside world.

In December, the rainy season starts. The waters of the Amazon begin to rise, and work stops. The superintendent and many workers travel down the river to Para and Manaos or to villages on higher ground. However, some laborers usually stay in the huts, hanging out and battling the animals and insects that are looking for shelter from the rising waters. They have very little to eat, and throughout the entire season, there's practically no contact with the outside world.

Hut in the jungle

A Home of the Rubber Gatherers

A Place for Rubber Collectors

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Thanks to the United States Rubber Co.

At the end of the rainy season, early in May, the laborers return to their task. The quick-growing vegetation has filled the estradas and this must be cleared away and perhaps new estradas opened. An estrada is simply a path leading from one Hevea tree to another and circling back to camp. Each estrada includes about one hundred of the scattered Heveas.

At the end of the rainy season, in early May, the workers get back to their job. The fast-growing plants have filled the paths, and these need to be cleared, and new paths may need to be created. A path is just a route that connects one rubber tree to another and loops back to the camp. Each path has about one hundred of the scattered rubber trees.

After having established themselves in camp the natives take up their monotonous round, which is followed day after day as long as the rubber trees continue to yield their valuable sap. When the seringuero starts out he equips himself with a tomahawk-like axe having a handle about thirty inches long. This is called a “macheadino.”

After setting up their camp, the locals begin their repetitive routine, which they follow day after day as long as the rubber trees keep producing their valuable sap. When the rubber tapper heads out, he prepares by taking a tomahawk-like axe with a handle that's about thirty inches long. This tool is called a “macheadino.”

Cutting the rubber tree

Tapping Hevea Rubber Tree—Brazil

Tapping Hevea Rubber Tree—Brazil

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

How is Rubber Gathered by the Natives?

The trees are tapped very much like maple syrup trees. Only the juice is found between the outer bark and the wood. So these men make a cut in the tree through the bark, almost to the wood. A little cup is then fastened to the tree with a piece of soft clay to press the cup against it, and the juice runs into this cup. Sometimes they have from ten to thirty cups on one tree and the average yield of a tree is ten pounds of rubber a year.

The trees are tapped similarly to how maple syrup trees are tapped. The juice is located between the outer bark and the wood. So, these men make a cut in the tree through the bark, almost down to the wood. A small cup is then attached to the tree using a piece of soft clay to press the cup against it, allowing the juice to flow into the cup. Sometimes, they have between ten and thirty cups on a single tree, and the average yield from one tree is ten pounds of rubber per year.

Some two hours after the tapping is done the flow entirely ceases and the tree must be tapped anew to secure a fresh flow.

Some two hours after the tapping is done, the flow completely stops, and the tree needs to be tapped again to get a fresh flow.

The film of rubber that forms on the inside of the cup and the bits of rubber remaining on the tree are collected and sold as coarse Para.

The rubber film that forms inside the cup and the leftover bits of rubber on the tree are gathered and sold as coarse Para.

Riverview

On the Banks of the Amazon

On the Shores of the Amazon

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Thanks to B. F. Goodrich Co.

Collecting raw rubber milk Raw rubber milk dripping from tree
Collecting Rubber Milk—Brazil How the Rubber Milk Drips from the Cut in the Tree—Brazil
Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

The rubber gatherer carries in addition to a macheadino and many small tin cups, a larger vessel for gathering the liquid and carrying it to camp. One man will tap as many as 100 trees in a single morning and then cover the same ground again in the afternoon or on the following morning, gathering the sap that drips slowly[104] from the cuts made in the trees. On these journeys the harvester frequently travels long distances over paths so buried by the undergrowth of the jungle that they are almost invisible to the untrained eye. On such expeditions rubber gatherers usually go armed with rifles to protect themselves against wild animals, reptiles and savage Indians.

The rubber gatherer carries not only a machete and several small tin cups but also a larger container for collecting the liquid to take back to camp. One person can tap as many as 100 trees in a single morning and then cover the same area again in the afternoon or the next morning, collecting the sap that drips slowly from the cuts made in the trees. During these trips, the gatherer often travels long distances along paths that are so overgrown by the jungle that they are almost invisible to the untrained eye. On these expeditions, rubber gatherers usually carry rifles to protect themselves from wild animals, reptiles, and hostile tribes.

Rubber tapping on Borneo

A Plantation in Borneo

A Plantation in Borneo

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Thanks to the B. F. Goodrich Co.

How is Rubber Smoked?

After the juice has been gathered in this way, the native builds a fire; over it he places a cover shaped like a large bottle with the bottom knocked out of it. This fire is built of oily nuts found in the forest, and the thick smoke arises through what would be the neck of the bottle.

After the juice has been collected this way, the local person builds a fire; over it, they place a cover shaped like a large bottle with the bottom cut out. This fire is made from oily nuts found in the forest, and the thick smoke rises through what would be the neck of the bottle.

Smoking rubber in the jungle

Smoking Rubber on the Lower Amazon

Smoking Rubber on the Lower Amazon

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

With a stick shaped something like the wooden shovels used at the seashore, he dipped into the milky juice in the bowl, then turned this stick or paddle around very rapidly in the smoke until the juice baked on the paddle. He then added more juice and went through the same operation again and again until there were between five and six pounds of rubber baked on this paddle. He then cuts this off with a[105] wet knife which made it cut more rapidly. That formed what is called a rubber “biscuit,” and he then started over again for his next five or six pounds. Later, as the demand for these “biscuits” increased, instead of the native using the paddle, he erected two short fence-like affairs about six feet apart, but parallel with each other, and in between was the smoky fire. Then he obtained a long pole, stretched it across these two rails and poured a small quantity of this juice on this pole, over where the smoke came in contact with it, and rolled the pole around until this juice was baked, adding more, until, instead of a small five- or six-pound “biscuit,” he would get an immense ball. In order to get this off his pole, he would jog one end of the pole on the ground until the “biscuit” would slide off. This is the way crude rubber first came into our market and the way it comes today.

With a stick that looked like a wooden shovel used at the beach, he dipped it into the milky juice in the bowl and then spun the stick or paddle quickly in the smoke until the juice baked onto it. He added more juice and repeated the process over and over until there were about five to six pounds of rubber baked onto the paddle. He then cut this off with a[105] wet knife, which made the cutting easier. This created what’s known as a rubber “biscuit,” and then he started again for his next five or six pounds. As the demand for these “biscuits” grew, instead of using the paddle, he built two short fence-like structures about six feet apart, parallel to each other, with a smoky fire in between. He then got a long pole, stretched it across these two rails, poured a small amount of the juice on the pole where the smoke touched it, and rolled the pole around until the juice baked, adding more until, instead of a small five- or six-pound “biscuit,” he ended up with a massive ball. To get this off the pole, he would bump one end of the pole against the ground until the “biscuit” slid off. This is how crude rubber first entered our market and how it’s still made today.

Smoking rubber in the jungle

Smoking Rubber—Upper Amazon

Smoking Rubber—Upper Amazon

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

How was Vulcanizing Discovered?

Up to this time, these “biscuits,” when exposed to heat, would become very soft and sticky, and when exposed to the cold, would become hard like a stone.

Up until now, these “biscuits,” when heated, would get super soft and sticky, and when chilled, would turn hard like a rock.

Jogging off the ball of smoked rubber

Removing Biscuit from Pole after Smoking

Removing Biscuit from the Pole after Smoking

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

There was an American by the name[106] of Charles Goodyear who had heard how the natives of the rubber-growing countries used this milky juice in many ways for their own benefit. One use they put it to was the waterproofing of their cloaks. How could this be done so that our clothing would be made water-tight and yet not be sticky in summer or stiff in winter? Goodyear devoted a great deal of his time to solving this problem, and, like many other great inventors, he passed through many trials. His many failures caused his friends to forsake him and he was put in prison for not paying his debts. He persisted in his quest, however, and it was accident at last that opened the way to discovery of the processes of vulcanization for which Goodyear was seeking.

There was an American named[106] Charles Goodyear who had learned how the natives in rubber-producing countries used this milky substance in various ways for their own benefit. One application was waterproofing their cloaks. How could this be achieved so that our clothing would be waterproof yet not sticky in summer or stiff in winter? Goodyear spent a lot of his time trying to solve this problem and, like many other great inventors, he faced numerous challenges. His many failures led his friends to abandon him, and he ended up in prison for not paying his debts. However, he continued to pursue his goal, and it was eventually a fortunate accident that led him to discover the vulcanization processes he had been searching for.

Waterproofing native cloth

Indian Waterproofing Cloth by “Painting” it with Rubber “Milk”—Brazil

Indian Waterproofing Cloth by “Painting” it with Rubber “Milk”—Brazil

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

At Woburn, Mass., one day, in the spring of 1839, he was standing with his brother and several other persons near a very hot stove. He held in his hand a mass of his compound of sulphur and gum, upon which he was expatiating in his usual vehement manner, the company exhibiting the indifference to which he was accustomed. In the crisis of his argument he made a violent gesture, bringing the mass in contact with the stove, which was hot enough to melt India-rubber instantly; upon looking at it a moment afterwards, he perceived that his compound had not melted in the least degree! It had charred as leather chars, but no part of the surface had dissolved. There was not a sticky place upon it. To say that he was astonished at this would but faintly express his ecstasy of amazement. The result was absolutely new to all experience—India-rubber not melting in contact with red-hot iron! He felt as Columbus felt when he saw the land bird alighting upon his ship and the driftwood floating by. In a few years more his labors were crowned with success.

One day in the spring of 1839 in Woburn, Massachusetts, he was standing with his brother and a few others near a really hot stove. He was holding a chunk of his mixture of sulfur and gum, passionately explaining it as usual, while the others showed the indifference he was used to. At the peak of his argument, he made a dramatic gesture, bringing the mixture close to the stove, which was hot enough to instantly melt rubber. A moment later, when he looked at it, he realized that his mixture hadn’t melted at all! It had charred like leather, but no part of the surface had dissolved. There wasn’t a sticky spot on it. To say he was shocked would barely capture his overwhelming amazement. The result was something totally new—rubber not melting when it touched red-hot iron! He felt like Columbus must have when he saw a land bird land on his ship and driftwood floating by. In just a few more years, his efforts led to success.

This great invention made it possible for us to have rubber boots and rubber shoes and many other things made of rubber.

This amazing invention allowed us to have rubber boots, rubber shoes, and many other products made from rubber.

Stages in rubber manufacturing

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

Up to this time, all the rubber was called Para rubber, named from the town of Para in Brazil, from which all rubber was shipped. The full-grown tree is quite large, ranging sixty feet and over in height and about eight feet around the trunk. It has a flower of pale green color and its fruit is a capsule containing three small brown seeds, with patches of black. These seeds lose their life very quickly, so a great deal of care is necessary to pack them if they are wanted to plant in another place. The safest way is to lay them loosely in a box of dry soil or charcoal.

Up until now, all rubber was referred to as Para rubber, named after the town of Para in Brazil, where all rubber was shipped from. The fully grown tree is quite large, reaching over sixty feet tall and about eight feet around the trunk. It has pale green flowers, and its fruit is a capsule that contains three small brown seeds with black patches. These seeds quickly lose their viability, so a lot of care is needed to pack them if they are to be planted elsewhere. The safest method is to place them loosely in a box filled with dry soil or charcoal.

Rubber leaves and fruits

Rubber Twigs

Rubber Twigs

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

The rubber tree grows best in rich, damp soil and in countries where the temperature is eighty-nine to ninety-four degrees at noon-time and not less than seventy-four degrees at night, and where there is a rainy season for about six months in the year, and the soil and atmosphere is damp the year round.

The rubber tree thrives in nutrient-rich, moist soil and in regions where the temperature ranges from eighty-nine to ninety-four degrees during the day and doesn't drop below seventy-four degrees at night. It also grows well in areas with a rainy season that lasts about six months each year, where the soil and climate remain humid throughout the year.

The name of this species of tree is Hevea, but many years ago it was called Siphonia on account of the Omaqua Indians using squirts made of a piece of pipe stuck into a hollow ball of rubber.

The name of this tree species is Hevea, but many years ago it was called Siphonia because the Omaqua Indians used squirts made from a piece of pipe inserted into a hollow ball of rubber.

How did Rubber Growing Spread to Other Places?

Back in the seventies an English botanist, Wickham by name, smuggled many Hevea seeds out of Brazil. The tree was found to grow well in the Eastern tropics and today the rubber plantations of Ceylon, Borneo, the Malay Peninsula and neighboring regions are producing more than half of the world’s supply of crude rubber. Here the natives work under pleasant climatic conditions and the trees under cultivation grow better and yield better than in the forest.

Back in the seventies, an English botanist named Wickham smuggled a lot of Hevea seeds out of Brazil. It turned out that the tree thrived in the Eastern tropics, and today, the rubber plantations in Ceylon, Borneo, the Malay Peninsula, and nearby areas produce over half of the world’s crude rubber supply. Here, the locals work in nice weather, and the cultivated trees grow and produce better than those in the wild.

On these plantations, rubber trees are cultivated just the same as other crops. All weeds are removed and great care is used with the young trees. Low-growing plants which absorb nitrogen from the air which enriches the soil, such as the passion flower and other sensitive plants, were planted around these small rubber trees, for it was found that when the weeds were removed to give the trees a chance to grow, the ground became hard and dry.

On these plantations, rubber trees are grown just like other crops. All the weeds are cleared away, and special care is taken with the young trees. Low-growing plants that soak up nitrogen from the air, which enriches the soil—like passion flowers and other delicate plants—were planted around these small rubber trees. It was found that when the weeds were cleared to allow the trees to grow, the ground became hard and dry.

Steps in rubber manufacturing

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

The method of tapping is different, too. Instead of ten to thirty taps, a series of cuts the shape of a V is made on four sides of the tree, from the bottom up to as high as a man can reach, and a cup placed at the point of the V. Another way is to make one long cut down the tree and then cut out slanting channels about one foot apart into this, and put a cup at the bottom of the long cut; another is making a spiral around the tree with the cup at the bottom.

The method of tapping is different now, too. Instead of ten to thirty taps, a series of V-shaped cuts is made on four sides of the tree, going from the bottom up as high as a person can reach, with a cup placed at the point of the V. Another approach is to make one long cut down the tree and then create slanting channels about a foot apart into this, placing a cup at the bottom of the long cut. Another method involves making a spiral around the tree with the cup at the bottom.

How is Rubber Cured on Modern Plantations?

With these big plantations some other way to cure the rubber had to be devised from the smoking process used in curing the native rubber which comes from South America. The milky juice is emptied from the cups into a tank and lime juice is added and it is then allowed to stand. The juice, as it comes from the tree, contains considerable water: the lime juice is added to separate the rubber from the water.

With these large plantations, a different method for curing rubber needed to be developed instead of the smoking process used for the native rubber from South America. The milky sap is collected from the cups and poured into a tank, where lime juice is added, and then it's left to sit. The sap that comes from the tree has a lot of water in it; the lime juice is added to help separate the rubber from the water.

Young rubber trees

A Young Rubber Plantation

A Young Rubber Farm

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Provided by the United States Rubber Co.

Sometimes separators are used much like our cream separators; in fact, the whole process and the appearance of the interior of these rubber “dairies” very much resembles our own dairies where real milk is made into butter, curds or cheese.

Sometimes separators are used just like our cream separators; in fact, the whole process and the look of the inside of these rubber “dairies” closely resembles our own dairies where real milk is turned into butter, curds, or cheese.

Para, at the mouth of the Amazon, and Manaos, a thousand miles up, are both modern cities of more than one hundred thousand population. They have schools, churches, parks, gardens and museums, and, except for the Indians, certain peculiarities in architecture and the ever-present odor of rubber, they differ but little from our northern cities of equal size. Here the rubber markets are located and here the rubber is carefully examined, graded, boxed and shipped to New York or Liverpool.

Para, at the mouth of the Amazon, and Manaos, a thousand miles upstream, are both modern cities with populations of over one hundred thousand. They have schools, churches, parks, gardens, and museums, and aside from the Indigenous people, some unique architectural features, and the constant scent of rubber, they are quite similar to our northern cities of the same size. This is where the rubber markets are found, and it's where the rubber is meticulously inspected, graded, packaged, and shipped to New York or Liverpool.

Plantation rubber usually comes in the form of sheets of various shapes and sizes. The rubber shown here is in oblong sheets. Sometimes it is in the form of “pancakes” or in “blocks.” Often, after being coagulated, it is smoked, and “smoked plantation sheet” is, next to Para, the best rubber obtainable.

Plantation rubber typically comes as sheets of different shapes and sizes. The rubber shown here is in rectangular sheets. Sometimes it comes as “pancakes” or in “blocks.” Often, after it's coagulated, it is smoked, and “smoked plantation sheet” is, next to Para, the highest quality rubber available.

Stages in rubber production

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

How is Crude Rubber Received Here?

Crude rubber is received in many forms under various names. There are more than three hundred standard kinds, depending on source and method of handling; e. g., “Sernamby” is simply bundles of Para tree scrap and scrap from the cups where milk has cured in the open air. “Guayule” is a resinous rubber secured from a two-foot shrub that grows on the arid plains of Texas and Northern Mexico.

Crude rubber comes in various forms and is referred to by different names. There are over three hundred standard types, depending on their source and how they are processed; e. g., “Sernamby” consists of bundles of Para tree scraps and leftover material from cured milk cups that have dried in the open air. “Guayule” is a resinous rubber obtained from a two-foot shrub that grows on the dry plains of Texas and Northern Mexico.

Our picture shows a bin of crude up-river Para the finest rubber known. Every “biscuit” or “ham” has been cut in two to find out whether the native has loaded it in any way.

Our picture shows a bin of raw rubber from up the river, considered the best around. Every “biscuit” or “ham” has been split in half to check if the local has tampered with it in any way.

Herringbone cuts

Another Ceylon Tapping Method—The Herringbone

Another Ceylon Tapping Method—The Herringbone

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

How is Rubber Prepared for Use?

Now that we have rubber so that it can be used, we find there are a great many operations necessary between gathering the crude rubber and finally the finished rubber coat or shoe. These various operations are called washing, drying, compounding, calendering, cutting, making, varnishing, vulcanizing and packing and each one of these main operations requires several smaller operations.

Now that we have rubber ready for use, we discover that there are many steps involved from collecting the raw rubber to producing a finished rubber coat or shoe. These steps include washing, drying, compounding, calendering, cutting, making, varnishing, vulcanizing, and packing, and each of these main processes involves several smaller tasks.

The grinding and calendering department is the one in which the crude rubber is washed, dried, compounded and run into sheets ready to be cut into the various pieces which constitute a boot or shoe.

The grinding and calendering department is where the raw rubber is washed, dried, mixed, and formed into sheets that are ready to be cut into the different pieces that make up a boot or shoe.

Street market in Manaos

Rubber Market in Manaos

Manaus Rubber Market

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

The cultivated rubber comes practically clean, but the crude rubber “biscuits” contain more or less dirt and foreign vegetable matter which have to be removed. The rubber is softened in hot water for a number of hours and then passed through the corrugated rolls of a wash mill in which a stream of water plays on the rubber as it is thoroughly masticated and formed into thin sheets. These sheets are taken to the drying loft. Here they are hung up so that the warm air can readily circulate through them and are allowed to remain from six to eight weeks, until every trace of moisture has been removed. The vacuum dryer is used where rubber is wanted dry in a short space of time. This is a large oven containing shelves. The wet sheets of rubber are cut in square pieces, placed on perforated tin pans and loaded into the dryer, which will hold about eight hundred pounds of rubber. The doors are closed, fastened, and by the vacuum process the water is extracted, leaving the rubber perfectly dry in about three hours’ time.

The processed rubber comes out mostly clean, but the raw rubber "biscuits" still have some dirt and bits of foreign plant material that need to be removed. The rubber is softened in hot water for several hours and then goes through the corrugated rolls of a wash mill, where a stream of water works on the rubber as it's thoroughly mashed and shaped into thin sheets. These sheets are taken to the drying loft. There, they are hung up to allow warm air to circulate around them, and they stay there for six to eight weeks until all the moisture is gone. A vacuum dryer is used when rubber needs to be dried quickly. This is a large oven with shelves. The wet sheets of rubber are cut into square pieces, placed on perforated tin pans, and loaded into the dryer, which can hold about eight hundred pounds of rubber. The doors are closed and locked, and through the vacuum process, the water is extracted, leaving the rubber completely dry in about three hours.

Mechanically cutting rubber sheets

Special Designed Machine for Cutting Rubber

Machine Specifically Designed for Cutting Rubber

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

Tapping rubber tree

Tapping Hevea Rubber Tree on Ceylon Plantation

Tapping Hevea rubber trees on a plantation in Ceylon.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Softening tanks

Softening Vats

Softening Tanks

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

After the rubber is dry, and has been tested by the chemist, it goes to the grinding mills where it is refined on warm rolls and made ready for the compounding or mixing. It is impossible to make out of rubber alone, shoes or other products that will withstand extreme changes in temperature; certain amounts of sulphur, litharge and other ingredients are necessary in combination with the pure rubber to give a satisfactory material. The gum from the grinding mills is taken to the mixing mills, where, between the large rolls, the various materials are compounded into a homogeneous mass. The compounded rubber goes from the mixing mills to refining mills, to be prepared for the calenders.

After the rubber is dry and has been tested by the chemist, it goes to the grinding mills where it's refined on warm rolls and gets ready for the compounding or mixing. It’s impossible to make shoes or other products solely out of rubber that can withstand extreme temperature changes; certain amounts of sulfur, litharge, and other ingredients are needed in combination with the pure rubber to create a satisfactory material. The rubber from the grinding mills is taken to the mixing mills, where, between the large rolls, the various materials are combined into a uniform mass. The compounded rubber then moves from the mixing mills to refining mills, to be prepared for the calenders.

Stages in the production process

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Co.

Courtesy of the United States Rubber Company.

Automobile, motorcycle and bicycle tires, belting, footwear and many other rubber articles must have a base or backbone of cotton fabric, and in order that the fabric may unite firmly with the rubber it must be “frictioned” or forced full of rubber. This is done by drawing it between enormous iron rollers, rubber being applied on its surface as it passes through. The pressure is so great that every opening between the fibers of cotton, every space between threads is forced full of rubber.

Automobile, motorcycle, and bicycle tires, belts, shoes, and many other rubber products need a cotton fabric base or backing. To make sure the fabric bonds tightly with the rubber, it has to be "frictioned," or saturated with rubber. This process involves feeding the fabric through huge iron rollers while rubber gets applied to its surface. The pressure is so intense that every gap between the cotton fibers and every space between the threads gets filled with rubber.

Mill room

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

The Mill Room

The Mill Room

The fabric is then ready to go with the milled rubber to the various departments of the factory to be incorporated into rubber goods. The calender is also used to press rubber into sheets of uniform thickness.

The fabric is then ready to be combined with the milled rubber and sent to the different departments of the factory to be made into rubber products. The calender is also used to press the rubber into sheets of the same thickness.

How are Rubber Shoes Made?

In making footwear, the linings and such parts as can be piled up layer on layer are cut by dies, usually on the large beam-cutting machines, commonly seen in leather shoe factories. The uppers are cut by hand from the engraved sheets, while metal patterns are used on the plain stock. The soles are cut by specially designed machines. The sheets of rubber from which the uppers and soles are cut are at this stage of the work plastic and very sticky. It is necessary on this account to cut the various pieces one by one and keep them separate, by placing them between the leaves of a large cloth book. In an ordinary rubber shoe there are from twelve to fifteen pieces, while in a common boot there are over twenty-five pieces.

In making shoes, the linings and parts that can be stacked layer by layer are cut using dies, typically on large beam-cutting machines found in leather shoe factories. The uppers are hand-cut from engraved sheets, while metal patterns are used on the plain material. The soles are cut by specially designed machines. The rubber sheets used for the uppers and soles are very flexible and sticky at this stage. Because of this, it's necessary to cut the different pieces one at a time and keep them separate by placing them between the pages of a large cloth book. In a regular rubber shoe, there are around twelve to fifteen pieces, while in a typical boot, there are more than twenty-five pieces.

Bulb making department

Making Rubber Bulbs

Creating Rubber Bulbs

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

The various pieces are next delivered to the making department, where they are fitted together on the “lasts” or “trees” in such a way that all the joints and seams are covered and the lines of the shoe kept exactly. Considerable skill is required to do this, as all the joints and seams must be rolled down smooth and firm to ensure a solid boot or shoe. The goods are all inspected before they are loaded on the iron cars to go to the varnishing department, where they receive the gloss which makes them look like patent leather.

The various pieces are then sent to the making department, where they are assembled on the “lasts” or “trees” to ensure that all the joints and seams are concealed and the shoe’s lines are maintained perfectly. This requires a lot of skill, as all the joints and seams need to be smoothed down tightly to guarantee a sturdy boot or shoe. Everything is inspected before it’s loaded onto the iron cars to head to the varnishing department, where they get the shine that makes them look like patent leather.

Straighline rubber production

Making Straightline Rubbers

Making Straight-Line Rubbers

Truck tyres in storage

In the Truck Tire Stock Room

In the Truck Tire Stock Room

Garden hose production

Making Garden Hose (Wrapped Construction)

Making a Garden Hose (Wrapped Construction)

Automobile inner tube inspection

Inspecting Automobile Inner Tubes

Checking Car Inner Tubes

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Large roll of rubber

Belt Press and Roll of Conveyor Belt

Belt Press and Roll of Conveyor Belt

Production of water bottles

“Building” Water Bottles

"Making" Water Bottles

Vulcanisation of truck tyres

Vulcanizing Truck Tires

Vulcanizing Truck Tires

Insulated wire on rolls

Insulated Wire Ready for Shipment

Insulated Wire Ready to Ship

Courtesy of the B. F. Goodrich Co.

Thanks to the B. F. Goodrich Co.

From the varnishing department the shoes are taken to the vulcanizers, which are large ovens heated by innumerable steam pipes. The shoes remain in these vulcanizers from six to seven hours, subjected to extreme heat. This heating or vulcanizing process fixes the elasticity of the rubber, increases its strength enormously and unites the parts in such a way as to make the shoe practically one piece.

From the varnishing department, the shoes are moved to the vulcanizers, which are large ovens heated by countless steam pipes. The shoes stay in these vulcanizers for six to seven hours, exposed to intense heat. This heating or vulcanizing process sets the rubber's elasticity, significantly boosts its strength, and bonds the parts together so that the shoe is practically one piece.

The shoes next go to the packing department, where they are taken off the “lasts,” inspected, marked, tied together in pairs, sorted and packed. They are then sent to the shipping department to be shipped immediately or stored in one of the spacious storehouses.

The shoes then move on to the packing department, where they are removed from the “lasts,” inspected, labeled, paired up, sorted, and packed. After that, they are sent to the shipping department to be shipped right away or stored in one of the large warehouses.

How are Automobile Tires Made?

In making tires, the strips of fabric are built together about a steel core to form the body or carcass of the tire. The beads are also added. The side strips, the breaker strip and finally the tread are applied. All of these pieces are sticky, and as they are laid together and rolled down by small hand rollers they adhere to each other, and when the tire is completed it looks very much like the tires you see on automobiles, but it is not yet vulcanized. The rubber is much like tough, heavy dough—there is not much stretch to it and in a cold place it would become hard and brittle.

In making tires, the strips of fabric are assembled around a steel core to create the body or carcass of the tire. The beads are also attached. The side strips, the breaker strip, and finally the tread are added. All of these components are sticky, and as they are put together and rolled down with small hand rollers, they stick to each other. When the tire is finished, it resembles the tires you see on cars, but it hasn't been vulcanized yet. The rubber is similar to tough, heavy dough—it's not very stretchy, and in a cold environment, it would become hard and brittle.

The tire on its steel core is taken to the mold room and placed in a steel box or mold, shaped to exactly enclose it. It is then placed with many others on a steel frame and lowered into a sort of a well or oven, where it remains for a time under pressure in the heat of live steam, after which it is removed, a finished tire.

The tire with its steel core is taken to the mold room and put into a steel box or mold that perfectly fits around it. It’s then placed with many others on a steel frame and lowered into a type of well or oven, where it stays for a while under pressure in the heat of live steam, after which it is taken out as a finished tire.

Vulcanization is simply the heating of the rubber mixed with sulphur—this causes a chemical change in the substance; it becomes tougher, more elastic and less affected by heat and cold.

Vulcanization is just the heating of rubber mixed with sulfur—this triggers a chemical change in the material; it becomes tougher, more elastic, and less affected by heat and cold.

This process, discovered in 1839, made rubber the useful substance it is today. The discoverer, Charles Goodyear, to whom we referred before, was never connected in any way except by name with any of the manufacturers of the present day, but his discovery was the real beginning of a great industry.

This process, discovered in 1839, made rubber the useful material it is today. The inventor, Charles Goodyear, who we mentioned earlier, was never actually linked to any of today’s manufacturers, but his discovery marked the true start of a major industry.


How did the Expression “Before you can say Jack Robinson” Originate?

Jack Robinson was a man in olden days who became well known because of the shortness of his visits when he came to call on his friends, according to Grose, who has looked up the subject very carefully. When the servants at a home where Jack Robinson called went to announce his coming to the host and his assembled guests, it was said that they hardly had time to repeat his name out loud before he would take his departure again. Another man, Halliwell, who has also investigated the development of the expression, thinks that it was derived from the description of a character in an old play, “Jack, Robes on.”

Jack Robinson was a man from the past who became famous for the briefness of his visits when he dropped by to see friends, according to Grose, who researched the topic thoroughly. When the servants at a house where Jack Robinson visited went to announce his arrival to the host and the guests, it was said that they barely had time to say his name before he would leave again. Another researcher, Halliwell, who also looked into the origin of the phrase, believes it comes from a character described in an old play called “Jack, Robes on.”

It is also interesting to learn that the sandwiches which we all enjoy so much at picnics are so called because of the fact that an English nobleman, the Earl of Sandwich, always used to eat his meat between two pieces of bread.

It’s also interesting to find out that the sandwiches we all love at picnics got their name from an English nobleman, the Earl of Sandwich, who always ate his meat between two slices of bread.

What is an Aerial Railway Like?

Wonderful ingenuity has been shown in contriving a means to enable people to ascend the Wetterhorn Mountain in Switzerland. The sides of the mountain are so irregular and rough in their formation that it was found impossible to build even the incline type of railway, such as is usually resorted to where the ascent to a mountain is particularly steep. So the engineers who studied the problem finally contrived two huge sets of cables, securely fastened at the top, and fixed to a landing place a short distance from the base of the mountain. Cars, holding twenty passengers each, are carried up and down these cables, one car balancing the other, by means of a cable attached to each, which passes around a drum at the top.

Amazing creativity has been shown in coming up with a way for people to climb Wetterhorn Mountain in Switzerland. The mountain's sides are so uneven and rugged that it was impossible to build even a cable railway, which is commonly used for steep climbs. So, the engineers who looked into the issue ultimately designed two massive sets of cables, securely anchored at the top and connected to a landing area a short distance from the mountain's base. Cars that hold twenty passengers each are transported up and down these cables, with one car balancing the other, using a cable attached to each that wraps around a drum at the top.

Wetterhorn Aerial Railway cars

The Wetterhorn Aerial Railway

Wetterhorn Aerial Lift

Reproduced by permission of The Philadelphia Museums.

Reproduced with permission from The Philadelphia Museums.

There is probably no railway in all Europe upon which travel affords more wonderful scenery than this trip, suspended in the air, up the side of the Wetterhorn Mountain, the three peaks of which are all considerably more than two and a quarter miles high.

There’s probably no railway in all of Europe that offers more amazing scenery than this trip, which hangs in the air while climbing the side of the Wetterhorn Mountain, whose three peaks are all significantly over two and a quarter miles high.

Why are They Called “Newspapers”?

Although something like an official newspaper or government gazette existed in ancient Rome, and Venice in the middle of the sixteenth century also had official news sheets, the first regular newspaper was published at Frankfort in 1615. Seven years later the first regular newspaper appeared in England.

Although there were official newspapers or government publications in ancient Rome, and Venice had official news sheets in the mid-sixteenth century, the first regular newspaper was published in Frankfurt in 1615. Seven years later, the first regular newspaper was launched in England.

It was customary to print the points of the compass at the top of the early single-sheet papers, to indicate that occurrences from all four parts of the world were recorded. Before very long, the publisher of one of the most progressive papers rearranged the letters symbolic of the points of the compass, into a straight line, and printed the word NEWS, and in a very short time practically every newspaper publisher decided to adopt the idea.

It was common to print the directions of the compass at the top of early single-sheet papers to show that events from all four corners of the world were covered. Before long, the publisher of one of the most innovative papers arranged the letters representing the compass points into a straight line and printed the word NEWS. In no time, almost every newspaper publisher chose to adopt this idea.

It is interesting to find that American colonies were not far behind England in establishing newspapers, and equally interesting to know that the most remarkable development of the newspaper has been in the United States, where, in proportion to population, its growth and circulation has been much greater than in any other country. Practically a half of all the newspapers published in the world are published in the United States and Canada.

It’s interesting to note that the American colonies were not far behind England in starting newspapers, and it's equally noteworthy that the most significant growth of newspapers has occurred in the United States, where, relative to its population, the growth and circulation have exceeded that of any other country. Almost half of all the newspapers published worldwide are released in the United States and Canada.

Every trade, organization, profession and science now has its representative journal or journals, besides the actual newspapers and magazines of literary character, and Solomon’s remark might be paraphrased to read: “To the making of newspapers there is no end.”

Every trade, organization, profession, and field of science now has its own representative journal or journals, in addition to the regular newspapers and literary magazines, and Solomon’s remark could be rephrased as: “There’s no end to the creation of newspapers.”

The great and rapid presses of recent years, the methods of mechanical typesetting and the cheapness and excellence of photographic illustrations, have all been necessary elements of the great sheets and enormous circulations of the present day, and the twentieth century newspaper is one of the greatest achievements in the whole field of human enterprise.

The significant and speedy advancements in recent years, the techniques of mechanical typesetting, and the affordability and quality of photographic illustrations have all contributed to the large formats and massive circulations of today's publications. The twentieth-century newspaper stands as one of the greatest accomplishments in the entire realm of human endeavor.

How Did the Cooking of Food Originate?

As soon as man found that he could produce fire by friction, as the result of rapidly rubbing two sticks together, he began to have accidents with his fires, just as we do today. And it was probably because of one of these accidents, in which some food was cooked quite unintentionally, that primitive man made the great discovery that most of the meats and fruits and roots that he had been accustomed to eating raw, were far better if they were put in or near the fire for a while first.

As soon as humans realized they could create fire by rubbing two sticks together, they started having accidents with their fires, just like we do today. It was likely because of one of these accidents, where some food was cooked accidentally, that early humans discovered that most of the meats, fruits, and roots they used to eat raw tasted much better when cooked or warmed by fire first.

How Far Away is the Sky-Line?

Unless you happen to be of the same height as the person standing next to you, the sky-line is a different distance away from each of you, for it is really just a question of the distance the eye can see from different heights above the sea-level. A person five feet tall, standing on the beach at the seaside, is able to see about two and three-quarter miles away, while one a foot taller can see about a quarter of a mile further.

Unless you happen to be the same height as the person next to you, the horizon is a different distance for each of you because it all depends on how far you can see from different heights above sea level. A person who is five feet tall, standing on the beach, can see about two and three-quarters miles away, while someone who's a foot taller can see about a quarter of a mile farther.

A person on the roof of a house a hundred feet high is able to see more than thirteen miles away, on a clear day, and a forty-two mile view may be enjoyed from the top of a mountain a thousand feet high. The aviator who goes up to a level a mile above the sea is able to see everything within a radius of ninety-six miles and the further up he goes the larger the earth’s circle becomes to him.

A person on the roof of a house a hundred feet high can see more than thirteen miles away on a clear day, and someone at the top of a mountain a thousand feet high can enjoy a view of forty-two miles. An aviator flying at an altitude of a mile above sea level can see everything within a radius of ninety-six miles, and the higher he goes, the larger the Earth's visible circle becomes for him.


The Story of Rope[7]

Everybody knows what rope is, but everybody does not know how rope is made or of what kinds of fiber it is manufactured. And very few probably know the history of rope making, or how it developed from the simple thread to the great cable which now holds giant vessels to their wharves or aids to anchor them in ocean storms.

Everybody knows what rope is, but not everyone knows how it's made or what types of fiber it's made from. And very few probably know the history of rope making, or how it evolved from simple thread to the massive cables that now hold huge ships to their docks or help anchor them in ocean storms.

Let us go back and try to trace the history of the rope. It is a long one, going out of sight in the far past. In very early times men must have used some kinds of cords or lines for fishing, for tying animals, at times for tying men. These may have been strips of hide, lengths of tough, flexible wood, fibrous roots, and such gifts of nature, and in time all these were twisted together to make a longer and stronger cord or rope.

Let’s go back and try to trace the history of the rope. It’s a long one, stretching far back into the past. In ancient times, people must have used various types of cords or lines for fishing, tying up animals, and occasionally tying up other people. These might have been strips of hide, pieces of durable, flexible wood, fibrous roots, and other resources from nature. Over time, all these materials were twisted together to create a longer and stronger cord or rope.

Egyptian kitchen scene

Scene in Egyptian Kitchen, Showing Use of a Large Rope to Support a Sort of Hanging Shelf

Scene in an Egyptian Kitchen, Showing the Use of a Large Rope to Support a Type of Hanging Shelf

We have evidence of this. Tribes of savages still have in use cords made of various materials and some of them very well made. These have been in use among them for long centuries. Take the case of our own Indian tribes. They long made use of cordage twisted from cotton and other fibers, or formed from the inner bark of various trees and the roots of others, and from the hairs, skins and sinews of animals.

We have proof of this. Groups of indigenous people still use cords made from different materials, and some of them are very well crafted. These have been in use among them for many centuries. Take, for example, our own Native American tribes. They have long used cordage twisted from cotton and other fibers, or made from the inner bark of various trees, the roots of others, and from the hair, skin, and tendons of animals.

Egyptians making leather cords

Reproduction of Sculpture From a Tomb in Thebes, Showing Preparation of Leather Cords by Process Similar to Rope Making

Reproduction of a sculpture from a tomb in Thebes, illustrating how leather cords were created using a method similar to rope making.

Good rope was made also by the old Peruvians, by the South Sea Islanders, and by the natives of many other regions. Those on the seashore made fishing lines and well-formed nets, and certain tribes, among them the Nootka Indians, harpooned the whale, using cords made from the sinews of that animal, these being very strong and highly pliable. The larger ropes used by them, two inches in diameter, were made from the fibrous roots of the spruce.

Good rope was also made by the ancient Peruvians, the South Sea Islanders, and the natives of many other areas. Those living by the ocean created fishing lines and well-crafted nets, and certain tribes, like the Nootka Indians, hunted whales using cords made from the sinews of those animals, which were very strong and flexible. The larger ropes they used, two inches in diameter, were made from the fibrous roots of spruce trees.

Civilized Rope Makers.

All the ancient civilized peoples used ropes and cordage, made from such flexible materials as their countries afforded. We have pictures of this from ancient Egypt, in which the process of twisting strips of leather into rope is shown on the walls of their tombs. One workman is seen cutting a long strand from a hide which he turns round as he cuts, while another man walks backward with this, twisting it as he goes. The Egyptians also made ropes from papyrus and palm fibers, of which specimens still exist. Only by the use of large and strong ropes could they have moved the massive stones seen in their pyramids and temples.

All ancient civilizations used ropes and cordage made from whatever flexible materials their regions had. We have evidence of this from ancient Egypt, where the process of twisting strips of leather into rope is depicted on the walls of their tombs. One worker is shown cutting a long strand from a hide that he spins as he cuts, while another person walks backward with it, twisting it as he goes. The Egyptians also created ropes from papyrus and palm fibers, some of which still exist today. They could only have moved the massive stones seen in their pyramids and temples with the help of large, strong ropes.

Scenes of rope making

Cordage Manufacture by the Rope Walk Method

Rope Making with the Rope Walk Method

Yarns passing from bobbins through perforated plates in forming of strands.
Top truck used in laying of rope.
Forming machine making strands.
Closing tarred Russian hemp cable, 1534 inch circumference, for Argentine Battleship “Rivadavia.”

Yarns going from bobbins through holes in plates to create strands.
Top truck used for laying rope.
Forming machine producing strands.
Sealing a tarred Russian hemp cable, 1534 inch circumference, for the Argentine Battleship “Rivadavia.”

When men began to move boats by sails, ropes of some kind must have been needed, and the early ships no doubt demanded long and strong cordage. We have pictures of these from several centuries before the Christian era, and we are told by Herodotus that Xerxes, when he built his famous bridge of boats across the Hellespont, 480 B. C., fastened them together by enormous cables which stretched from shore to shore, a distance of nearly a mile. Twelve of these ropes were used, about nine inches thick, some of them being made of flax and others of papyrus.

When people started using sails to move boats, they definitely needed some kind of ropes, and early ships must have required long and strong cordage. We have images of these from several centuries before Christ, and Herodotus tells us that Xerxes, when he built his famous bridge of boats across the Hellespont in 480 B. C., secured them together with massive cables that stretched nearly a mile from shore to shore. Twelve of these ropes were used, each about nine inches thick, with some made from flax and others from papyrus.

Yarn spinning machine

Early Type of Machine for Spinning Rope Yarn

Early Type of Machine for Spinning Rope Yarn

During the medieval and later centuries rope making was an active industry and America was not long settled before the rope maker became active. John Harrison, an English expert in this line, set up a ropewalk in Boston in 1641 or 1642, and for many years had a monopoly of the trade. But after his death the art became common and in 1794 there were fourteen large ropewalks in that city. In 1810 there were 173 of these industries in the United States, and from that time on the business has grown and prospered.

During the medieval and later centuries, rope making was a thriving industry, and it didn't take long for this trade to establish itself in America. John Harrison, an English expert in rope making, opened a ropewalk in Boston around 1641 or 1642 and held a monopoly on the business for many years. However, after his death, the craft became widespread, and by 1794, there were fourteen large ropewalks in the city. By 1810, the U.S. had 173 of these businesses, and the industry has continued to grow and thrive since then.

Hand Spinning.

In the period referred to all the work was done by hand, machine spinning being of later date. American hemp was used, this softer fiber being spun by hand long after Manila hemp was spun by machines. The hand-making process, long used, is an interesting one. The first step was to “hackle” the hemp. The hackle was a board with long, sharp steel teeth set in it. This combed out the matted tow of the hemp into clean, straight fiber. The instrument used in spinning was a large wheel, turned by hand, and setting in motion a set of “whirls” or revolving spindles, which twisted the hemp by their motion. The spinner wrapped a quantity of the hackled hemp around his waist and attached some of the fibers to the whirls, which twisted the hemp as he walked backward down the ropewalk, pulling out new fiber from his waist by one hand and pressing it into form and size with the fingers of the other.

In that era, all the work was done by hand, with machine spinning coming later. American hemp was used, and this softer fiber was spun by hand long after Manila hemp was spun by machines. The hand-making process, which had been around for a long time, is quite interesting. The first step was to “hackle” the hemp. The hackle was a board with long, sharp steel teeth embedded in it. This combed out the tangled fibers of the hemp into clean, straight strands. The tool used for spinning was a large wheel that was turned by hand, setting in motion a set of “whirls” or revolving spindles, which twisted the hemp as they spun. The spinner wrapped a portion of the hackled hemp around their waist and attached some of the fibers to the whirls, which twisted the hemp as they walked backward down the ropewalk, pulling out new fiber from their waist with one hand and shaping it with the fingers of the other.

Rope making machine

Four-Strand Compound Laying Machine Making Strands and Laying Rope in a Single, Continuous Operation

Four-Strand Compound Laying Machine: Making Strands and Laying Rope in One Continuous Process

16-inch tow line

Sixteen-Inch Towline with Eye Splice

16-Inch Towline with Eye Splice

In forming a small rope, two of the yarns thus formed were twisted together in a direction opposite to that of the first twist. Then a second twisting followed, the direction being again reversed. Thus rope making may be seen to consist in a series of twisting processes, each twist opposite to the former, the rope growing in size and strength at each operation. Horse power or water power was used when the ropes became too large to be made by hand.

In making a small rope, two of the yarns created were twisted together in the opposite direction of the first twist. Then a second twist was added, with the direction reversed once more. So, rope making can be seen as a series of twisting processes, each twist counter to the previous one, with the rope increasing in size and strength with each step. When the ropes got too large to be made by hand, horsepower or water power was used.

Formation of Sliver (for Spinning) on First Breaker

Making Sliver (for Spinning) on the Initial Breaker

Modern ropewalk

Interior of Present-Day Ropewalk

Interior of Today's Ropewalk

Machine-made Ropes.

The old ropewalk is today largely obsolete, the rope-making machine taking the place of the hand-making process, which was not adapted to produce the large cables which in time were called for. Steam-driven machines were first introduced about 1838. These are now used alike in making fine threads and yarns and in large ropes.

The old ropewalk is mostly outdated now, with rope-making machines replacing the manual process that couldn't keep up with the demand for the large cables that were eventually needed. Steam-powered machines were first introduced around 1838. Today, they are used for both making fine threads and yarns as well as large ropes.

There are two methods in the modern system of rope making. In one the strands are formed on one type of machine and twisted into a rope on another. In the second method both operations are performed on a single machine. The latter saves space, but is not so well fitted for large ropes as the former. A plant for the two-part method comprises two or more horizontal strand-forming machines, several bobbin frames, and a vertical laying-machine. The former twists several strands into a rope, the latter several ropes into a cable.

There are two methods in today's rope-making system. In one, the strands are made on one type of machine and twisted into a rope on another. In the second method, both operations are done on a single machine. The latter saves space but isn't as suitable for making large ropes as the former. A facility using the two-part method includes two or more horizontal strand-forming machines, several bobbin frames, and a vertical laying machine. The former twists several strands into a rope, and the latter twists several ropes into a cable.

The yarns, which are wound around bobbins, are drawn from them through perforated plates, these so placed that the yarns converge together and pass into a tube. In this they are compressed and at the same time twisted by the revolution of a long carriage or flyer, which can be made to vary in speed and direction. After being twisted the strands are wound around reels in readiness for the second, or laying process.

The yarns, which are wrapped around spools, are pulled through perforated plates that are arranged to allow the yarns to come together and move into a tube. Inside the tube, they are compressed and simultaneously twisted by the rotating motion of a long carriage or flyer, which can change speed and direction. After twisting, the strands are wound around reels, preparing them for the second step, or laying process.

In this the full reels are lifted by overhead chains and are placed in the vertical flyers of the laying-machine. Here again the strands are made to pass through openings and converge into a central tube, through which they pass to the revolving flyers, which perform the final duty of twisting them into rope. The finished product is delivered to a belt-driven coiling reel on which it is wound.

In this process, the full reels are lifted by overhead chains and placed into the vertical flyers of the laying machine. Again, the strands are passed through openings and come together in a central tube, which leads them to the revolving flyers. These flyers complete the task of twisting the strands into rope. The finished product is then delivered to a belt-driven coiling reel where it is wound up.

Complete strand wound upon reel

Removing Reel with Completed Strand from Forming Machine

Removing the finished strand reel from the forming machine

The most complete rope-making machine yet reached is that in which these two machines are combined into one. It economizes space, machinery and workmen, and also is more rapid in reaching the final result. But there are disadvantages which render it unfit for the larger sizes of rope, and it is therefore used only on a limited range of sizes.

The most advanced rope-making machine developed so far is the one that combines these two machines into a single unit. It saves space, reduces the number of machines and workers needed, and is faster in producing the final product. However, there are drawbacks that make it unsuitable for larger rope sizes, so it is only used for a limited range of sizes.

American Hemp.

Among the fibers employed in rope making that of the hemp plant long held the supremacy, though in recent years it has been largely supplemented by other and stronger fibers. This plant is a native of Asia, but is now grown largely in other continents, taking its name from the country in which it is raised, as Russian hemp, Italian hemp, and American, or Kentucky, hemp, it having long found a home in the soil of Kentucky. It differs from the Manila fiber, which has now very largely supplanted it, by being much softer, though of less strength. In the old days of the sailing vessel hempen rope was largely used for the rigging of merchant and war ships, but the use of other fibers and of wire for rigging has greatly reduced the market for Kentucky hemp. There are various other fibers known under the name of hemp, the New Zealand, African, Java, etc., but the Manila and Sisal fibers, since the middle of the last century, have largely taken their place.

Among the fibers used in rope making, hemp has traditionally been the most dominant, although in recent years, it has been mostly replaced by stronger fibers. This plant is native to Asia but is now widely cultivated on other continents, taking its name from the countries where it's grown, such as Russian hemp, Italian hemp, and American or Kentucky hemp, which has long been associated with the soil of Kentucky. It differs from Manila fiber, which has largely replaced it, by being much softer, though it is weaker. In the past, hemp ropes were extensively used for the rigging of both merchant and warships, but the adoption of other fibers and wire for rigging has significantly decreased the demand for Kentucky hemp. There are several other fibers referred to as hemp, including New Zealand, African, and Java hemp, but Manila and Sisal fibers have mostly taken their place since the mid-19th century.

Scenes of pine tar production
How Pine Tar is Made in the Southern Atlantic States
1. Building the kiln.
2. Starting fire. 3. Racking back coals.
4. Tar coming from kiln.
5. Dipping and barreling. 6. Working around kiln.
7. After hard day and night.
8. Tar makers at home. 9. Burning completed.

Manila and Sisal Fibers.

Manila hemp, as it is called, is a product of our Philippine dependency, being obtained from a species of the banana plant which grows abundantly in those islands. Its fiber is very long, ranging from six to ten feet, and is noted for its smoothness and pliability, a feature which makes it ideal for rope making. Gloss and brilliancy are also characteristics of good quality Manila.

Manila hemp, as it's known, comes from our Philippine territory and is sourced from a type of banana plant that grows abundantly in those islands. Its fiber is very long, measuring between six to ten feet, and is recognized for its smoothness and flexibility, making it perfect for making ropes. Shine and brightness are also features of high-quality Manila.

American hemp after harvest

American Hemp Stacked in Fields

American Hemp Piled in Fields

Manila hemp is obtained from the leaf stalks of the Philippine plant known as the Abacá, the leaf stems of which are compressed together, and constitute the trunk of the plant. It is obtained by scraping the pulp from the long fibers, drying these when thoroughly cleaned, and baling them for market.

Manila hemp comes from the leaf stalks of the Philippine plant called Abacá. The leaf stems are compressed together to form the trunk of the plant. It's made by scraping the pulp off the long fibers, drying them after they’re thoroughly cleaned, and then baling them for sale.

The high price of the Manila product, however, has brought a cheaper fiber, of American growth, into the market; this being that known as Sisal, extracted from henequen, a cactus-like plant of Yucatan. As a substitute for or rival of Manila hemp it has come into common use. Its cheapness recommends it despite the fact that it is not of equal strength, and also that its fibers are shorter, being from two to four feet in length. Sisal also lacks the flexibility of Manila, being much more stiff and harsh. The development of the self-binding reaper on our western grain-fields has opened a gold mine for Sisal cordage. Of the annual import of this fiber to the United States, 300,000,000 pounds in quantity, a large proportion finds its way to the wheat fields of the West. It is also used in all other wheat-yielding countries.

The high price of Manila products has, however, introduced a cheaper fiber from America into the market; this is known as Sisal, extracted from henequen, a cactus-like plant found in Yucatan. As a substitute for or competitor to Manila hemp, it has become widely used. Its affordability makes it appealing, even though it isn’t as strong and its fibers are shorter, ranging from two to four feet in length. Sisal also lacks the flexibility of Manila, being much stiffer and rougher. The introduction of the self-binding reaper in our western grain fields has created a huge demand for Sisal cordage. Of the annual import of this fiber to the United States, which totals 300,000,000 pounds, a significant portion goes to the wheat fields of the West. It is also utilized in all other wheat-producing countries.

Hemp cart

Philippine Hemp Cart

Philippine Hemp Cart

Loading sisal leaves

Loading Fiber from Sisal Fiber Plant onto Plantation Car

Loading fiber from the sisal fiber factory onto the plantation car.

Henequen is now grown on large plantations, the plant being about five years old before the long, sword-like leaves are ready to cut. It continues to yield a supply for ten or twenty years, this lasting until the flower stalk, or “pole,” appears, after which the plant soon dies. As Manila fiber is at times adulterated with Sisal, so has the latter its adulterant in a plant called Istle, which grows in Mexico and has hitherto been chiefly used in brush making.

Henequen is now cultivated on large farms, with the plant taking about five years to grow before its long, sword-like leaves are ready for harvesting. It continues to produce for ten to twenty years, lasting until the flower stalk, or “pole,” appears, after which the plant quickly dies. Just as Manila fiber is sometimes mixed with Sisal, Sisal also has a counterpart called Istle, which grows in Mexico and has primarily been used for making brushes.

New Zealand hemp plants Cleaning Manila fiber
New Zealand Hemp or Flax Basic Manual Cleaning Method for Manila Fiber on Plantation

These are the chief plants used in rope making. To them we may add coir, obtained from the brush of the cocoanut, which has been long used in India, and has come into use in Europe in recent years. It is fairly strong and has the advantage of being considerably lighter than hemp or Manila. And, unlike these, it does not need to be tarred for preservation, as it is not injured by the salt water. Two other rope-making fibers of importance are the Sunn hemp of India and cotton, ropes of the latter being largely used for certain purposes, such as driving parts of textile machinery.

These are the main plants used to make rope. We can also include coir, which comes from the husk of the coconut. It's been used in India for a long time and has become popular in Europe in recent years. It's fairly strong and has the advantage of being much lighter than hemp or Manila. Plus, unlike those, it doesn’t need to be tarred for preservation, since it’s not damaged by salt water. Two other important fibers for making rope are Sunn hemp from India and cotton, with cotton ropes being widely used for specific purposes, like in parts of textile machinery.

Wire Ropes.

We have not completed the story of rope making. There is the wire rope to consider, a kind of cordage now largely used in many industries, in which it has superseded hemp ropes and chains. These seem to have originated in Germany about 1821. In the bridge at Geneva, built in 1822, ropes of untwisted wire, bound together, were used, and some fifteen years later “stranded” wire ropes were employed in the Harz mines. These at first were made of high-class wire, but only steel is now used in their manufacture. A strand of wire rope generally consists of from six to nine wires and sometimes as many as eighteen, but much larger ropes are made by twisting these strands together. They are generally galvanized to prevent them from rusting.

We haven't finished the story of rope making. We still need to talk about wire rope, a type of cord that's now widely used across many industries, replacing hemp ropes and chains. This seems to have started in Germany around 1821. In the bridge at Geneva, built in 1822, they used ropes made of untwisted wire that were bound together, and about fifteen years later, “stranded” wire ropes were used in the Harz mines. Initially, these were made from high-quality wire, but now only steel is used in their production. A strand of wire rope usually has six to nine wires and sometimes as many as eighteen, but much larger ropes are created by twisting these strands together. They are typically galvanized to prevent rusting.

Storage of Manila fiber bales

Stacking Bales of Manila Fiber with Portable Compressed Air Engine

Stacking Bales of Manila Fiber with a Portable Air Compressor

Manila fiber hank

Hank of Manila Fiber Twelve Feet Long

Hank of Manila Fiber, Twelve Feet Long

The applications of wire ropes are very numerous, an important one being for winding and hauling purposes in mines. For aerial ropeways they are extensively employed, and are of high value in bridge building, the suspension bridge being sustained by them. The strength of the steel wire used for ropes varies from seventy to over one hundred tons per square inch of sectional area, the weight of a hemp rope being about three times that of a wire rope of equal strength.

The uses of wire ropes are very diverse, with one significant application being for winding and hauling in mines. They are widely used for aerial ropeways and are highly valued in bridge construction, particularly in suspension bridges, which rely on them for support. The strength of the steel wire used for ropes ranges from seventy to over one hundred tons per square inch of cross-sectional area, while a hemp rope weighs about three times as much as a wire rope of the same strength.

Pine Tar for Ropes.

Who does not know of the tarred rigging that once meant so much to the rope maker? Its very odor seems to cling to the pages of seafaring books. When steam power took the place of wind power in ships the use of tarred rigging naturally declined, yet tarred goods still form an important branch of the rope business. Pine tar is the kind best suited for cordage, the yellow, longleaf, or Georgia pine holding the first rank in the United States for tar making. This tree is found along the coast region from North Carolina to Texas.

Who doesn't know about the tarred rigging that used to be so important to rope makers? Its smell seems to linger on the pages of sailing books. When steam power replaced wind power in ships, the use of tarred rigging naturally decreased, but tarred products still play a significant role in the rope industry. Pine tar is the best for rope, with yellow, longleaf, or Georgia pine being the top choice in the United States for making tar. This tree is found along the coastal areas from North Carolina to Texas.

In tar-kiln burning only dead wood is used, the green tree yielding less tar and of lower quality. It is a slow process, as a brisk fire would consume the wood without yielding tar. As the tar comes from the kiln it is caught in a hole dug before the outlet and is dipped up and poured into barrels, the average yield being one barrel of tar to the cord of wood. As above said, it is indispensable to protect cordage exposed to the effects of moisture, except in the case of coir ropes. Oiling is also an important process in the manufacture of ropes from hard fibers, as Manila, Sisal and New Zealand. This softens them and makes them more workable, and it also acts as a preservative.

In tar-kiln burning, only dead wood is used because green trees produce less tar and of lower quality. It's a slow process since a fast fire would burn the wood without generating tar. The tar that comes from the kiln is collected in a hole dug before the outlet and then scooped up and poured into barrels, with the average yield being one barrel of tar per cord of wood. As mentioned earlier, it's crucial to protect ropes exposed to moisture, except for coir ropes. Oiling is also a key step in making ropes from tough fibers like Manila, Sisal, and New Zealand. This softens the fibers, making them easier to work with, and it also acts as a preservative.

Manila fiber being inspected

Inspecting Manila Fiber at Dock

Checking Manila Fiber at Dock

Coils of rope ready for shipping

Shipping Platform of a Large Factory

Shipping Platform of a Big Factory

Why does Rope Cling Together?

This is probably due to a degree of roughness in the surface of fibers, often imperceptible to the eye, yet preventing them when in close contact from slipping easily upon each other. This is greatly increased by twisting the fibers together, and is added to by the toughness of the fibers themselves, the whole giving to rope a great resisting power. In the case of wire rope it is the firmness with which the metal holds together that gives it its great resisting strength. It is also not unlikely that the pressure of gravitation takes part in rope making, by holding the fibers in close contact, even if we do not know how this force operates.

This is likely due to the roughness of the fiber surfaces, which is often invisible but prevents them from easily sliding against one another when they are close together. Twisting the fibers together increases this friction, and the strength of the fibers themselves contributes to the overall strength of the rope. For wire rope, it’s the way the metal tightly binds that provides its impressive strength. Additionally, it's possible that gravity plays a role in rope making by keeping the fibers pressed together, even if we aren't sure how this force works.

What is Rope Used for?

This is a question that has already been answered in great part. Its uses, in fact, are innumerable. It serves to hold things together, and also to hold them apart; to lift things into the air and to hold them down to the ground; to pull things forward and pull things back—but not to push things forward. For the latter something less flexible than rope is needed. Animals are tied or tethered by it and led by it, and man, himself, is one of its victims. This is especially the case in the dismal way in which man’s career upon earth has so often been ended by lifting him from the ground by the aid of a rope loop around his neck. It is of some comfort to know that this brutal use of the rope is being replaced by more humane methods of ending the lives of condemned criminals.

This question has mostly been answered already. Its uses are actually countless. It can hold things together and also keep them apart; it can lift things into the air and keep them grounded; it can pull things forward and pull things back—but it can’t push things forward. For that, you need something less flexible than rope. Animals are tied or tethered by it and led by it, and humans, too, can fall victim to it. This is especially true in the grim way that humans’ lives have so often ended when a rope loop is placed around their necks to lift them off the ground. It’s somewhat comforting to know that this cruel use of rope is being replaced by more humane methods for executing condemned criminals.


How did the Expression “A-1” Originate?

We have all become so accustomed to hearing the term “A-1” used to designate a thing as perfect that it does not occur to many of us to wonder how it originally came to be used in that connection. Its first use was as a symbol in the code by which vessels were graded in the register of shipping kept by Lloyd’s, the originators of marine insurance. “A-1” was the best rating given to the highest class vessels, “A” standing for perfect condition of the hull of the ship and “1” meaning that the rigging and whole equipment was complete and in good order.

We’ve all gotten so used to hearing the term “A-1” used to describe something as perfect that many of us don’t even think about how it came to be used in that way. It was first used as a symbol in the code that graded vessels in the shipping register maintained by Lloyd’s, the founders of marine insurance. “A-1” was the highest rating given to top-class vessels, with “A” indicating the hull of the ship was in perfect condition and “1” meaning that the rigging and all other equipment were complete and in good shape.

How has Man Helped Nature Give Us Apples?

The original of all the varieties of the cultivated apple is the wild crab, which is a small and extremely sour fruit, and is native of most of the countries of Europe. We use the crab-apple for preserving even now, although man’s ingenuity has succeeded in inducing nature to give us many better tasting kinds.

The original of all cultivated apple varieties is the wild crab apple, a small and very sour fruit that originates from most European countries. We still use crab apples for preserving, even though humans have managed to develop many tastier varieties through ingenuity.

The amazingly large number of different varieties which we have today have all been brought into existence through the discovery of the process of “grafting.” There are a half a dozen or more different methods of grafting. The method most commonly practiced in working with apple trees is called “bud-grafting,” and consists of transferring a plate of bark, with one or more buds attached, from one tree to another.

The incredibly large number of different varieties we have today came into existence thanks to the discovery of the process known as “grafting.” There are six or more different methods of grafting. The method most commonly used for working with apple trees is called “bud-grafting,” which involves transferring a piece of bark with one or more buds attached from one tree to another.

The wood of apple trees is hard, close-grained and often richly colored, and is suitable for turning or cabinet work. Apple-growers classify apples into three different kinds, each consisting of a great many separate varieties. The three general divisions are—table apples, which are characterized by a firm, juicy pulp, a sweetish acid flavor, regular form and beautiful coloring; cooking apples, which possess the quality of forming by the aid of heat into a pulpy mass of equal consistency, and also by their large size and keeping properties; and cider apples, which have a considerable astringency and a richness of juice.

The wood from apple trees is hard, has a fine grain, and often comes in rich colors, making it great for turning or cabinet making. Apple growers categorize apples into three main types, each with many different varieties. The three main categories are—table apples, which have a firm, juicy flesh, a mildly tangy flavor, a regular shape, and vibrant colors; cooking apples, which can break down into a smooth consistency when cooked and are known for their large size and good storage qualities; and cider apples, which are notably tart and have a rich juice content.

Picking apples

In the Land of the Apple

In the Land of the Apple

The Rogue River Valley, Oregon, in one section of which this photograph was taken, is known all over America for its wonderful apples. One apple-raiser in this district gathered two hundred bushels of apples per acre from his six-year-old trees.

The Rogue River Valley in Oregon, where this photograph was taken, is famous across the United States for its amazing apples. One apple grower in this area harvested two hundred bushels of apples per acre from his six-year-old trees.

What Kind of a Crab Climbs Trees?

Besides the water-crabs that we are most of us used to seeing and eating, there are several different kinds of land-crabs. Probably the most interesting of them all is the great Robber-crab, which is found on certain islands of the Pacific. He is a creature of immense strength and climbs palm trees in order to pick, and break open, the cocoanuts. He lives in a den which he digs for himself in the ground.

Besides the water crabs that most of us are used to seeing and eating, there are several different types of land crabs. Probably the most interesting of all is the great Robber crab, which is found on certain islands in the Pacific. It is an incredibly strong creature that climbs palm trees to pick and break open coconuts. It lives in a burrow that it digs for itself in the ground.

Darwin gives an interesting description of these extraordinary animals: “I have before alluded to a crab which lives on cocoanuts; it is very common on all parts of the dry land, and grows to a monstrous size. The front pair of legs terminate in very strong and heavy pincers, and the last pair are fitted with others weaker and much narrower. It would at first be thought quite impossible for a crab to open a strong cocoanut covered with husk, but Mr. Liesk assures me that he has repeatedly seen this effected. The crab begins by tearing the husk, fiber by fiber, and always from that end under which the three eye-holes are situated. When this is completed, the crab commences hammering with its heavy claws on one of the eye-holes till an opening is made. Then turning round its body, it extracts the white albuminous substance with its posterior and narrow pair of pincers.

Darwin gives an interesting description of these extraordinary animals: “I have previously mentioned a crab that lives on coconuts; it is very common on dry land and can grow to a huge size. The front pair of legs ends in very strong and heavy pincers, while the last pair has weaker and much narrower ones. At first, it might seem impossible for a crab to open a tough coconut covered with husk, but Mr. Liesk assures me that he has seen this happen many times. The crab starts by tearing the husk, fiber by fiber, always from the end with the three eye-holes. Once that’s done, the crab begins hammering with its heavy claws on one of the eye-holes until it makes an opening. Then, it turns its body and uses its narrow, back pincers to extract the white, albuminous substance inside.”

“Every night it is said to pay a visit to the sea, no doubt for the purpose of moistening its gills. The young are likewise hatched, and live for some time, on the coast. These crabs inhabit deep burrows, which they hollow out beneath the roots of trees, and there they accumulate surprising quantities of the picked fibers of the cocoanut husk, on which they rest as a bed. To show the wonderful strength of the front pair of pincers, I may mention that Captain Moresby confined one in a strong tin box, the lid being secured with wire; but the crab turned down the edges and escaped. In turning down the edges, it actually punched many small holes through the tin!”

“Every night, it's said to visit the sea, probably to keep its gills moist. The young are also hatched and live for a while along the coast. These crabs create deep burrows that they dig out under the roots of trees, where they gather amazing amounts of the picked fibers from coconut husks to use as bedding. To illustrate the incredible strength of their front pincers, I can mention that Captain Moresby once trapped one in a sturdy tin box, with the lid secured by wire. However, the crab managed to bend the edges and escape. In the process of bending the edges, it actually punched several small holes through the tin!”

How are Files Made?

A good tool-kit holds a number of files of various shapes. Some are flat, others half-round, three-sided, square and round. They are generally thickest in the middle, while their teeth are of various degrees of fineness and of different forms.

A good tool kit has several files in different shapes. Some are flat, while others are half-round, triangular, square, and round. They're usually thickest in the middle, and their teeth vary in how fine they are and come in different shapes.

A file whose teeth are in parallel ridges only is called single-cut or float-cut. Such are mostly used for brass and copper. When there are two series of ridges crossing each other the file is double-cut, which is the file best suited for iron and steel.

A file with teeth arranged in parallel ridges is called a single-cut or float-cut file. These are mainly used for brass and copper. When there are two sets of ridges crossing each other, the file is double-cut, which is the best type for working with iron and steel.

Rasps are files which have isolated sharp teeth separated by comparatively wide spaces, and are chiefly used for soft materials such as wood and horn.

Rasps are tools that have distinct sharp teeth set apart by relatively wide gaps, and they're mainly used for softer materials like wood and horn.

Each of these three classes of files is made in six different degrees of fineness, the coarsest being called rough, the next middle, followed by bastard, second-cut, smooth and superfine or dead-smooth, each a degree finer than that which precedes it.

Each of these three types of files comes in six different levels of fineness, starting with the coarsest, known as rough, then middle, followed by bastard, second-cut, smooth, and superfine or dead-smooth, with each one being a step finer than the one before it.

Files are usually made with the hand, file-cutting machines not having been as yet perfectly successful on account of the delicacy of touch required in the work.

Files are typically made by hand, as file-cutting machines have not been entirely successful yet due to the precise touch needed for the job.

The blanks, as the steel before it has teeth is called, are laid on the anvil and struck with the chisel, which rests obliquely on the blank, each blow raising a ridge or tooth. The strength of the blow depends on the hardness of the metal, and when one part is harder than another the workman alters his blows accordingly. When one side is covered with single cuts if the file is to be double cut he adds in the same manner a second series, crossing the others at a certain angle.

The blanks, known as steel that has teeth, are placed on the anvil and struck with a chisel positioned at an angle on the blank. Each blow creates a ridge or tooth. The force of the blow depends on the hardness of the metal, and when one part is harder than another, the worker adjusts his strikes accordingly. Once one side is covered with single cuts, if the file is supposed to have double cuts, he adds a second series of cuts in the same way, crossing the first ones at a specific angle.

In making fine files a good file-cutter will cut upwards of two hundred teeth within the space of an inch. The files, except those that are used for soft substances, are hardened by heating them to a cherry-red color and then dipping them in water. They are then finished by scouring and rubbing over with olive oil and turpentine.

In creating high-quality files, a skilled file-cutter can carve over two hundred teeth in just one inch. The files, except for those meant for soft materials, are hardened by heating them until they’re cherry-red, then plunging them into water. Finally, they are polished and rubbed down with olive oil and turpentine.


The Story of Self-Loading Pistols[8]

Colt Pistols.

The machine gun of the present day, the murderous weapon which has numbered its victims by the hundreds of thousands during the European war, had its origin in the mind of a man whose birth dates back to almost exactly one hundred years before this war began, that of Samuel Colt, born at Hartford, Conn., on July 19, 1814.

The modern machine gun, the deadly weapon responsible for the deaths of hundreds of thousands during the European war, originated from the ideas of a man born nearly a century before this conflict started: Samuel Colt, born in Hartford, Connecticut, on July 19, 1814.

Battle scene

Custer’s Last Stand

Custer's Last Stand

The revolver played a large part in Indian warfare.

The revolver played a significant role in Indian warfare.

The small arm of the previous period, the old “Brown Bess,” used in the British army for 150 years, was a muzzle-loading, flint-lock musket of the crudest make. The only important improvement made in it during that long term of service was the substitution of the percussion cap for the flint lock. This took place in the last period of its use. A breech-loading rifle was also invented about this time. This was the “Needle Gun,” of which 60,000 were issued to the Prussian army in 1841, and which was first used in 1848, in the German war with Denmark.

The small arm from the previous era, the old “Brown Bess,” which was used by the British Army for 150 years, was a muzzle-loading, flint-lock musket of very basic design. The only significant upgrade made to it during that long period of use was replacing the flint lock with a percussion cap, which happened in the final years of its service. Around this time, a breech-loading rifle called the “Needle Gun” was also invented. This rifle saw 60,000 units issued to the Prussian army in 1841 and was first utilized in 1848 during the German war with Denmark.

The Colt pistol had appeared before this date. The idea of it grew in the mind of young Colt when he left his father’s silk mill and shipped as a boy sailor in the ship “Carlo,” bound from Boston to Calcutta. While on this voyage the conception of a revolving pistol came to him, and he whittled out a rude model of one with a penknife from a piece of wood.

The Colt pistol had come into existence before this date. The idea started to take shape in young Colt's mind when he left his father's silk mill and set off as a boy sailor on the ship "Carlo," which was headed from Boston to Calcutta. During this journey, he envisioned a revolver and carved a rough model of it with a penknife from a piece of wood.

Single action revolver Patterson revolver
Single Action Army and Frontier Revolver—The "Cowboy's Friend" The Patterson Model, 1836
Powder and ball revolver
Old Model "Powder and Ball" Revolver Used in the Mexican and Civil Wars
Mounted gun

Gun Mounted on Landing Carriage With Shaft Attachment

Gun Mounted on Landing Carriage with Shaft Attachment

When he returned he sought in vain to interest his father and others in his idea of a pistol with a revolving cylinder containing six chambers to be discharged through a single barrel. This boyish notion won no converts, and at the age of eighteen he went on a lecture tour on chemistry, under the dignified title of Dr. Coult. These lectures met with success, and he used the money made by them in developing his pistol, which was in a shape to patent by 1835. Patents were taken out by him in this and the following year in the United States, Britain and France, and in 1836 he established the “Patent Arms Company” at Paterson, N. J., with a paid-in capital stock of about $150,000. This was a bold move by the young inventor, then just escaped from boyhood.

When he came back, he tried unsuccessfully to get his father and others interested in his idea for a pistol with a revolving cylinder that had six chambers and could be fired through a single barrel. This youthful idea didn't gain any supporters, and by the time he turned eighteen, he went on a lecture tour about chemistry, using the impressive title of Dr. Coult. These lectures were successful, and he used the earnings to develop his pistol, which was ready to patent by 1835. He filed patents for it in that year and the next in the United States, Britain, and France. In 1836, he founded the “Patent Arms Company” in Paterson, N.J., with a capital stock of about $150,000. This was a bold move for the young inventor, who had just left his teenage years behind.

Machine gun packed on saddle

Pack Saddle for Carrying Automatic Machine Gun and Complete Equipment

Pack saddle for transporting an automatic machine gun and full gear.

Machine gun with ammunition chests

Automatic Machine Gun Mounted on Light Landing Carriage, Ammunition Chests Open, Showing How Feed Boxes, etc., are Carried

Automatic Machine Gun Mounted on Light Landing Vehicle, Ammunition Boxes Open, Displaying How Feed Boxes, etc., Are Carried

Young Colt tried in vain to interest government officials in his new weapon, their principal objection being that he used in it the new percussion caps instead of the time-honored flint-lock. But success came during the Seminole War of 1837, when some of the officers, who had seen the new revolving pistol, decided to give it a trial and sent to the factory for a supply.

Young Colt tried unsuccessfully to get government officials interested in his new weapon, their main concern being that he used the new percussion caps instead of the traditional flint-lock. However, success arrived during the Seminole War of 1837, when some officers who had seen the new revolving pistol decided to test it out and ordered a supply from the factory.

Its value was soon proved. The Indians looked on this weapon that could be fired six times after one loading, as something magical. It was too much for their philosophy and the war soon came to an end. At a later date it was used by the Texans in their war against Mexico, and from that time on every Texas ranger wanted a revolver. It has ever since been the favorite weapon of the cowboy and frontiersman.

Its value was quickly established. The Native Americans saw this weapon that could shoot six times without needing to be reloaded as something magical. It was beyond their understanding, and the war soon ended. Later on, it was used by the Texans in their fight against Mexico, and from that point forward, every Texas ranger wanted a revolver. Since then, it has been the preferred weapon of cowboys and frontiersmen.

Colt automatic pistol

Automatic Pistol—Government Model, Caliber .45

.45 Caliber Government Model Pistol

In this model the slide remains open after firing the last cartridge. When reloading the arm in this position, insert the magazine, then press downward the slide stop (to the rear of the trigger as illustrated). The slide goes forward, inserting a cartridge without any movement of the slide by hand. The slide stop is operated by the thumb of the hand holding the pistol.

In this model, the slide stays open after the last round is fired. To reload the firearm in this position, insert the magazine, then press down on the slide stop (located behind the trigger as shown). The slide moves forward, loading a round automatically without needing to move the slide by hand. You use your thumb on the hand holding the pistol to operate the slide stop.

Colt police-positive revolver

Police-Positive Revolver

Police-Positive Revolver

Adopted by the Police Departments of the principal cities of the United States and Canada.

Adopted by the police departments of major cities in the United States and Canada.

Colt hammerless automatic pistol

Automatic Pistol—Pocket Model, Hammerless

Compact Automatic Pistol, No Hammer

The action of this pistol is automatic except that the trigger must be pulled to fire each shot; continued discharge will not result from one pull of the trigger.

The action of this pistol is automatic, but you need to pull the trigger to fire each shot; holding down the trigger won't keep it firing.

But wars ran out, the market closed, and the “Patent Arms Company” failed. What put Colt on his feet again was the Mexican war a few years later. General Taylor offered Colt a contract for one thousand revolvers at $24 each, and though the young inventor was looked upon as a ruined man he took the contract, got together the necessary capital, and built a factory on the Connecticut at Hartford. From that time on there was no want of a market. The “Forty-Niners” took revolvers to California, foreign governments sent orders for them, and armories were built in England and in Russia for their manufacture. Colt died in 1862, but the Civil War had previously opened a great market for his pistols, and before the conflict ended the Colt factory at Hartford was in a highly flourishing state. In the following years the revolver became a prime necessity in dealing with the Indians of the West, and a school-book statement of that date was to the effect that: “The greatest civilizer of modern times is the Colt revolver.” Another writer, speaking of the “Peacemaker,” an effective weapon produced after 1870, said: “It has the simplicity, durability, and beauty of a monkey-wrench.”

But wars ended, the market closed, and the “Patent Arms Company” went under. What got Colt back on his feet was the Mexican War a few years later. General Taylor offered Colt a contract for one thousand revolvers at $24 each, and even though people saw the young inventor as a failure, he accepted the contract, gathered the necessary funds, and built a factory on the Connecticut River in Hartford. From that point on, there was no shortage of demand. The “Forty-Niners” took revolvers to California, foreign governments placed orders, and armories were established in England and Russia to produce them. Colt died in 1862, but the Civil War had already created a huge market for his pistols, and before the conflict was over, the Colt factory in Hartford was thriving. In the years that followed, the revolver became essential for dealing with the Native Americans in the West, and it was commonly stated back then that: “The greatest civilizer of modern times is the Colt revolver.” Another writer referred to the “Peacemaker,” an effective weapon made after 1870, saying: “It has the simplicity, durability, and beauty of a monkey wrench.”

Tripod-mounted machine gun

Automatic Machine Gun Mounted on Tripod, Showing Belt Passing Out (Right Side)

Automatic machine gun on a tripod, with the belt feeding out from the right side.

Machine Guns.

The revolving idea was applied to guns about 1861 by Richard J. Gatling, the first Gatling guns fitted for use with metalling ammunition being produced by the Colt Company in 1870. These guns had ten barrels revolving around a central shaft and in their developed form were capable of being fired at the rate of one thousand shots a minute. The first of these to be used prominently in warfare was the French mitrailleuse, used by France in the war of 1870-71. The Gatling soon made its way widely, and its rapidity of fire became a proverb. If anything moved quickly it was said to “go like a Gatling” or “sound like a Gatling.”

The idea of a revolving mechanism was introduced to firearms around 1861 by Richard J. Gatling. The first Gatling guns designed to use metallic cartridges were manufactured by the Colt Company in 1870. These guns featured ten barrels that rotated around a central shaft and, in their advanced versions, they could fire at a rate of one thousand rounds per minute. The first prominent use of these weapons in warfare was by the French mitrailleuse during the Franco-Prussian War of 1870-71. The Gatling gun quickly gained popularity, and its rapid firing became legendary. If something moved fast, people would say it “goes like a Gatling” or “sounds like a Gatling.”

Automobile-mounted machine gun

Automatic Gun Mounted on Automobile

Car Mounted Automatic Gun

Other guns of this type are the Hotchkiss, the Nordenfeldt and the Gardner, and a more recent one is the Maxim, which, after the first shot is fired by hand power, continues to fire shot after shot by means of the power derived from the explosion of each successive cartridge. In the early form of the revolver the empty cartridge cases had to be ejected from the cylinder singly by an ejector rod or handy nail. In 1898 a new type was introduced with a lateral swinging cylinder which permitted the simultaneous ejection of all the empty shells.

Other guns of this type include the Hotchkiss, the Nordenfeldt, and the Gardner, with a more recent model being the Maxim, which, after the first shot is fired manually, continues to shoot automatically through the power generated by the explosion of each subsequent cartridge. In the earlier versions of the revolver, empty cartridge cases needed to be ejected from the cylinder one by one using an ejector rod or a handy nail. In 1898, a new design was introduced with a sideways swinging cylinder that allowed for the simultaneous ejection of all the empty shells.

Near the time of the Spanish-American War appeared what is known as the Colt automatic gun, operated by the action of the powder gases on a piston and lever near the muzzle of the barrel. This could be fired at the rate of 400 to 500 shots a minute, and by reason of its light weight could be very easily carried. The British used it effectively in the Boer War.

Near the time of the Spanish-American War, the Colt automatic gun was introduced. It worked by using the gases from the gunpowder to activate a piston and lever near the front of the barrel. This weapon could fire at a rate of 400 to 500 shots per minute and was lightweight, making it easy to carry. The British effectively used it in the Boer War.

Today the Colt Company manufacture revolvers in which the simultaneous ejection of the cartridge-cases and recharging of the chambers is combined with a strong, jointless frame; automatic magazine pistols in which the pressure of the powder gases, as above said, is utilized after giving the proper velocity to the projectile,[146] it requiring only a slight continued pressure on the trigger for each shot; automatic machine guns firing at will single shots or volleys while requiring only a slight pull upon the trigger; and the improved manually-operated Gatling gun firing the improved modern ammunition. The cartridges are carried on a tape which feeds them with the necessary rapidity into the barrel.

Today, the Colt Company manufactures revolvers that combine the simultaneous ejection of cartridge cases with reloading the chambers, all within a strong, seamless frame; automatic magazine pistols that use the pressure from the gunpowder gases, as mentioned earlier, to achieve the right speed for the projectile, requiring just a light, constant pressure on the trigger for each shot; automatic machine guns that can fire single shots or bursts with just a slight pull on the trigger; and the upgraded manually-operated Gatling gun that fires modern ammunition. The cartridges are carried on a tape that feeds them quickly into the barrel.[146]

What would be the history of the European War without the machine gun is not easy to state, but as a highly efficient weapon of war its quality has been abundantly proved.

What the history of the European War would look like without the machine gun is hard to say, but its effectiveness as a weapon of war has been clearly demonstrated.


How does the Poisonous Tarantula Live?

When the National Guardsmen from all over the Union were concentrated along the Mexican border, many reports were sent home of thrilling experiences with tarantulas, to whose bite the natives of Mexico, Italy and many other warmer countries have ascribed a disease called “tarantism.” The Italian peasants believe that this disease can only be cured by a certain kind of music.

When the National Guardsmen from across the country were gathered along the Mexican border, many reports were sent back home sharing exciting encounters with tarantulas, whose bites the locals in Mexico, Italy, and several other warmer regions associate with a condition called “tarantism.” Italian farmers believe that this condition can only be treated with a specific type of music.

The tarantula, like many other members of the spider family, is an expert in the making of burrows. Its burrows are artfully planned. At first there is a sheer descent four or five inches in depth, but at that distance below the surface the tunnel turns aside before dipping straight down again to its termination. It is at the angle or elbow of the tunnel that the tarantula watches for the approach of enemies or prey, like a vigilant sentinel, never for a moment off its guard, lying hidden during the day, if nothing disturbs it, and coming out at nightfall to seek its prey.

The tarantula, like many other types of spiders, is a skilled burrow maker. Its burrows are carefully designed. Initially, there's a steep drop about four or five inches deep, but at that depth, the tunnel bends before dropping straight down again to its end. It's at the angle of the tunnel where the tarantula waits for enemies or prey, like a watchful guard, always alert, staying hidden during the day unless disturbed, and coming out at night to hunt.

Unlike most other spiders, it hunts its game without the aid of webs or snares. It does, however, possess the ability to spin the silk which we have all seen other spiders make, for, in digging its hole, it makes neat little packages of the dirt it has scraped up, bound together with silk and slime from its mouth, and flips them to one side out of the way. When it comes to hunting, it makes sure that it can pounce on its prey, by building the entrance of its hole about two inches in diameter and up from the surface an inch or so, so that it can spread its legs for the leap.

Unlike most other spiders, it hunts its prey without using webs or traps. However, it can spin silk, like the other spiders do. While digging its burrow, it creates neat little packages of the dirt it has removed, held together with silk and slime from its mouth, and tosses them to the side. To catch its prey, it ensures it can leap by making the entrance of its burrow about two inches wide and a little above the surface, so it can spread its legs for the jump.

How do the Indians Live Now?

The Indians of the United States are now largely gathered into reservations and their former dress, arms and habits are being gradually changed for those of the whites. Civilization is invading their homes and driving out their older characteristics. This is especially the case with the large numbers now dwelling in the former Indian Territory, now Oklahoma, although those confined in the reservations of Arizona, New Mexico and Montana are clinging more to their old modes, as is shown in the accompanying illustrations.

The Native Americans in the United States are now mostly living on reservations, and their traditional clothing, weapons, and ways of life are slowly being replaced by those of the white people. Modern society is moving into their homes and taking away their traditional identities. This is particularly true for the many who now live in what used to be Indian Territory, now known as Oklahoma, although those in the reservations of Arizona, New Mexico, and Montana are holding on to their old ways more, as seen in the illustrations that accompany this text.

In ancient times the body was covered with furs and skins according to the seasons, but now the white man’s clothes and blanket have generally superseded the native dress; though the moccasin of deer or moose hide, and, in the wilder tribes, the ornamental leggings and head-dresses are still retained. Their dwellings are made of bark, skins and mattings of their own making, stretched on poles fixed in the ground. The arms of the wilder tribes consist of the bow and arrow, the spear, tomahawk and club, to which have been added the gun and knife of the whites. Canoes are made of logs hollowed out, or of birch bark stretched over a light frame, skilfully fastened with deers’ sinews and rendered water-tight by pitch.

In ancient times, people wore furs and skins that changed with the seasons, but now the clothing and blankets from white settlers have mostly replaced traditional attire. However, in some of the more remote tribes, deer or moose hide moccasins, as well as decorative leggings and head-dresses, are still worn. Their homes are constructed from bark, skins, and mats they make themselves, stretched over poles stuck in the ground. The weapons of the more wild tribes include bows and arrows, spears, tomahawks, and clubs, with guns and knives introduced by white settlers. Canoes are made from hollowed-out logs or birch bark stretched over a light frame, expertly secured with deer sinews and sealed with pitch to make them water-resistant.

Apache woman carrying wood

More Picturesque than Beautiful

More Scenic than Beautiful

The Apaches, formerly one of the most powerful and warlike of the Indian tribes, are now confined to reservations in Arizona and New Mexico.

The Apaches, who were once one of the most powerful and aggressive Native American tribes, are now restricted to reservations in Arizona and New Mexico.

Blackfeet camp

A Picturesque Camp

A Beautiful Camp

Blackfeet Indians in camp on St. Mary Lake.

Blackfeet people camping at St. Mary Lake.

The American Indian is described as of haughty demeanor, taciturn and stoical; cunning, brave and often ferocious in war; his temperament poetic and imaginative, and his simple eloquence of great dignity and beauty. They have a general belief in Manitous, or spiritual beings, one of them being spoken of as the Great Spirit. They believe in the transmigration of the soul into other men and into animals, and in demons, witchcraft and magic. They believe in life after death, where the spirit is surrounded with the pleasures of the “happy hunting grounds.” They adopt a “totem” or symbol of the family and this is generally some animal, the turtle, bear and wolf being favorites.

The American Indian is portrayed as having a proud attitude, reserved and composed; smart, courageous, and often fierce in battle; with a temperament that is poetic and imaginative, and their straightforward speech carries a strong sense of dignity and beauty. They generally believe in Manitous, or spiritual beings, one of which is referred to as the Great Spirit. They believe in the reincarnation of the soul into other people and animals, as well as in demons, witchcraft, and magic. They have faith in life after death, where the spirit enjoys the pleasures of the “happy hunting grounds.” They take on a “totem” or family symbol, typically an animal, with favorites including the turtle, bear, and wolf.

The number of Indians in the United States at the taking of the Federal Census in 1910, was 265,683; and there are about 130,000 in the British possessions, 1,500,000 in Central America and 4,000,000 in Mexico. In all North America there are somewhere about 6,000,000 and there are probably 10,000,000 more in South America, many of them being more or less civilized.

The number of Indians in the United States during the Federal Census in 1910 was 265,683; there are around 130,000 in British territories, 1,500,000 in Central America, and 4,000,000 in Mexico. Overall, there are about 6,000,000 in North America and probably an additional 10,000,000 in South America, many of whom are somewhat civilized.

How does the Beach Get Its Sand?

Most of the sands which we find on the beaches and in other places are the ruins of rocks which have come apart, usually as the result of the action of water. A large part of the ocean bottom is made up of “sandstone” and the continual washing of the water over this causes particles to break away and float off, whereupon they are swept up upon the beaches by the waves.

Most of the sand we see on beaches and in other places is made up of the remnants of rocks that have broken down, usually due to the action of water. A significant portion of the ocean floor consists of “sandstone,” and the constant movement of water over this causes particles to break off and drift away, where they are then brought ashore by the waves.

Sands differ in color according to the rocks from which they are derived. In addition to the sands on the beaches, they occur very abundantly in many inland locations, which were formerly sea bottoms, and very extensively in the great deserts of the world.

Sands vary in color based on the rocks they come from. Besides the sands on the beaches, they are found in many inland areas that used to be sea floors, and they are also prevalent in the vast deserts around the world.

Valuable metallic ores, such as those of gold, platinum, tin, copper and iron, often occur in the form of sand or mixed with that substance. Pure siliceous sands are very valuable for the manufacture of glass, for making mortar, filters, ameliorating dense clay soils, for making molds in founding and for many other purposes.

Valuable metal ores, like gold, platinum, tin, copper, and iron, often appear as sand or mixed with it. Pure silica sand is highly valuable for making glass, creating mortar, filters, improving heavy clay soils, making molds for casting, and many other uses.

The silica, which is the principal ingredient of sand, as well as of nearly all the earthy minerals, is known as “rock crystal” in its naturally crystallized form. Colored of a delicate purple, these crystals are what we call “amethysts.” Silica is also met with in the “carnelian” and we find it constituting jasper, agate, cat’s-eye, onyx and opals. In the latter it is combined with water. Many natural waters present us with silica in a dissolved state, although it is not soluble in pure water. The resistance offered by silica to all impressions is exemplified in the case of “flint” which consists essentially of silica colored with some impurity.

The silica, which is the main component of sand and almost all earthy minerals, is referred to as “rock crystal” when it’s in its natural crystal form. These crystals are a light purple color and are what we call “amethysts.” Silica is also found in “carnelian,” and it makes up jasper, agate, cat’s-eye, onyx, and opals. In opals, it mixes with water. Many natural waters contain dissolved silica, even though it doesn’t dissolve in pure water. The durability of silica against various impacts is illustrated by “flint,” which is mainly silica colored by some impurities.

How did Nodding the Head Up and Down Come to Mean “Yes”?

Like a multitude of other things, the signs which we give by the movements of our heads to indicate “yes” and “no” were copied from animal life.

Like many other things, the way we nod our heads to say “yes” and shake them to say “no” came from observing animals.

When the mother animal brought her young a choice morsel of food she would hold it up temptingly before its mouth and the quick forward movement of the head, with mouth open, showed the young animal’s desire and acceptance of the offer. Even today when we make a forward movement of our heads to indicate “yes” it is observed that the lips are usually quite unconsciously opened a little.

When the mother animal brought her young a tasty piece of food, she would hold it up enticingly in front of its mouth, and the quick forward movement of the head, with the mouth open, showed the young animal's eagerness and acceptance of the offer. Even today, when we lean forward to signal "yes," it's noted that our lips often open slightly without us even realizing it.

In much the same manner, when the young had been well fed and were no longer hungry, a tightly closed mouth and a shaking of the head from side to side were resorted to, to keep the mother from putting the food into their mouths. Our natural impulse now is to slightly clinch our teeth when we shake our heads to mean “no.”

In a similar way, once the young had eaten enough and weren’t hungry anymore, they would tightly close their mouths and shake their heads back and forth to stop their mother from feeding them. Now, our instinct is to slightly clench our teeth when we shake our heads to indicate “no.”

Why do We Call a Man “a Benedict” When He Marries?

We call men “benedicts” when they become married because that was the name of a humorous gentleman in Shakespeare’s play, “Love’s Labor Lost,” who was finally married to a character named “Beatrice.”

We refer to men as “benedicts” when they get married because that was the name of a funny guy in Shakespeare’s play, “Love’s Labor Lost,” who ended up marrying a character named “Beatrice.”


The Story in Firecrackers and Sky-Rockets[9]

The blaze and noise, indispensable to patriotic celebrations among all peoples, was produced a century ago in America by simple agencies. Washington’s Birthday was ushered in by cannon salutes in every garrisoned place in the United States, and boys the country over built bonfires as they still do in old New England towns to celebrate the day. But the Fourth of July was the great hurrah time of the year, when every youth who owned a gun or could borrow one, brought it into use as a contribution to the general noise. He might lack shoes and be short of shot and bullets for hunting, but for this occasion no young man was so poor as to have failed to lay in a hornful of powder, and at the stroke of twelve midnight, which began the day, he and his companions blazed away with guns loaded to the danger point, and kept up their fusillade as long as ammunition lasted. For demonstrations on a larger scale, a small cannon was secured if possible, but lacking this, two blacksmith’s anvils were made to do the same service, the hole in the top of one being filled with powder, a fuse laid into it and the second anvil placed as a stopper upon the first before the charge was exploded.

The fire and noise, essential for patriotic celebrations among all people, were created a hundred years ago in America by simple means. Washington's Birthday was celebrated with cannon salutes in every military post in the United States, and boys all across the country built bonfires, just like they do in old New England towns, to mark the day. But the Fourth of July was the biggest celebration of the year, when every young person who owned a gun or could borrow one brought it out to join in the noise. They might not have had shoes or enough ammunition for hunting, but no young man was too poor to stock up on a bit of gunpowder for this occasion. At midnight, marking the start of the day, he and his friends fired away with their guns loaded to the brim, continuing their shooting as long as they had ammo left. For bigger displays, they would try to get a small cannon, but if that wasn’t possible, they would use two blacksmith's anvils instead, filling the hole in the top of one with gunpowder, inserting a fuse, and placing the second anvil on top before igniting the charge.

A favorite firearm for celebration purposes was one of the old “Queens Arm” muskets which were common in country communities, being trophies captured from the British during the Revolutionary War. One of these cumbersome flint-lock pieces might be loaded halfway to the muzzle and fired without bursting, and would roar in the discharge in a way highly pleasing to patriotic ears.

A popular gun for festivities was one of the old “Queens Arm” muskets that were common in rural areas, as they were trophies taken from the British during the Revolutionary War. One of these heavy flintlock guns could be loaded halfway and fired without exploding, producing a loud bang that was very satisfying to patriotic listeners.

It was near the close of the eighteenth century that Chinese firecrackers first came into use in celebrating the American Independence Day. For many years they were used sparingly and only in large cities. They had been known in the New England coast cities ever since the year 1787, when Elias Haskett Derby’s ship of Salem, the first American vessel to engage in deep-water commerce, returned from her voyage to Calcutta, China and Isle of France. Among the things she brought back—more as a curiosity than as an article of cargo—was a consignment of Chinese firecrackers. Their capabilities in aiding the uproar on the Fourth of July were quickly recognized, and thereafter every ship that made the voyage from Massachusetts Bay to India or China brought back firecrackers with the tea, silks and rice. In time, rockets, squibs and torpedoes were included in the consignment, but it was not until the middle of the nineteenth century that their use became general in America.

It was around the end of the eighteenth century that Chinese firecrackers first started being used to celebrate American Independence Day. For many years, they were used sparingly and mainly in large cities. They had been known in the coastal cities of New England since 1787, when Elias Haskett Derby’s ship from Salem, the first American vessel to engage in deep-sea trade, returned from her journey to Calcutta, China, and the Isle of France. Among the items she brought back—more as a curiosity than as actual cargo—was a shipment of Chinese firecrackers. Their ability to contribute to the noise on the Fourth of July was quickly recognized, and from then on, every ship that made the trip from Massachusetts Bay to India or China brought back firecrackers along with tea, silks, and rice. Over time, rockets, squibs, and torpedoes were added to the shipments, but it wasn’t until the mid-nineteenth century that their use became widespread in America.

Finishing rockets

Interior of Rocket Finishing Shop

Inside Rocket Finishing Shop

Finishing shells

Interior of Shell Finishing Shop

Shell Finishing Shop Interior

Torpedo prduction shop

Interior of Torpedo Shop

Inside the Torpedo Shop

The time when the more complicated fireworks, which we owe both to Europe and the Orient, came into vogue in this country, no one perhaps could now definitely tell. Their use was known to our seafaring men in the “forties,” for it was in that decade that Capt. Decimus Forthridge, of the American brig “Independence,” showed his Yankee pluck and resource in defeating an attack of Malay pirates with no other armament than fancy fireworks. During his voyage in the East Indies he had laid in a supply of fireworks with which to celebrate the Fourth of July in a manner worthy an American captain. For some reason no ammunition was available for swivels or muskets, when, in the mid-watch of the night, two war proas, deeply laden with armed Malays, were seen coming quickly up on the vessel’s quarter as she lay becalmed off Firabader Point in the Island of Sumatra. The cry of “All hands on deck to repel pirates” brought the crew on deck in haste, but without ammunition the chance that they would beat the enemy off was a long shot compared with the probability that the throat of every man on board would be cut as a preliminary to plundering and scuttling the vessel. Even in their extremity the crew laughed and jeered when the captain ranged them along the quarter rail with boarding pikes and empty muskets in hand to give the enemy the idea that they were ready for business, and then, opening the box of fireworks, he began to shoot rockets and roman candles at the pirates. If the crew laughed, the Malays did not, and when the captain of one of the proas was struck by a rocket, both crafts rested oars and came no nearer. But while Captain Forthridge was attending to these, a third proa came up unobserved under the port quarter, and the first that was known of its presence was the attempt of its occupants to board the vessel by the chains. To make matters worse it was discovered that the paper wrappings of the fireworks in the box were on fire. While the crew with clubbed muskets and boarding pikes kept the Malays outside the rails, Captain Forthridge picked up the blazing box, carried it to the chains, and while the mate and sailors warded the spears and krises from him, dropped it into the proa. The box was blown to pieces the minute it struck, scattering the fireworks through the proa, and with firecrackers snapping and jumping and fiery serpents running round among their bare legs, the Malays chose to take their chances with the sharks, and all hands went overboard into the water at double-quick. A little breeze came up and the brig drew away from the pirates, leaving the two proas to pick up those Malays from the water that the sharks had missed.

The exact time when the more elaborate fireworks, influenced by both Europe and the East, became popular in this country is hard to pinpoint. Our seafaring men knew of them in the 1840s because, in that decade, Captain Decimus Forthridge of the American brig “Independence” showed his grit and cleverness by fending off a Malay pirate attack using nothing but fancy fireworks. During his trip to the East Indies, he had stocked up on fireworks to celebrate the Fourth of July in a way befitting an American captain. For some reason, there was no ammunition available for the swivels or muskets when, in the middle of the night, two war proas filled with armed Malays were spotted approaching the ship as it lay still off Firabader Point in Sumatra. The shout of “All hands on deck to repel pirates” quickly brought the crew to the deck, but without ammunition, their chances of driving off the enemy seemed slim compared to the likelihood that every man aboard would be killed before the ship was plundered and sunk. Even in this dire situation, the crew laughed and mocked as the captain lined them up along the railing with boarding pikes and empty muskets to give the pirates the impression they were prepared. Then, opening the box of fireworks, he started shooting rockets and Roman candles at the attackers. While the crew found it funny, the Malays did not; when the captain of one proa was hit by a rocket, both boats paused and did not advance. However, while Captain Forthridge was dealing with this, a third proa approached unnoticed from the ship’s port side, and the first indication of its presence was when its crew attempted to board using the chains. To make things worse, it was realized that the paper wrappings of the fireworks in the box were on fire. While the crew used clubbed muskets and boarding pikes to keep the Malays away, Captain Forthridge picked up the flaming box, carried it to the chains, and while the mate and sailors fended off the spears and krises, dropped it into the proa. The box exploded the moment it landed, scattering fireworks everywhere, and with firecrackers popping and sparking and fiery serpents slithering around their legs, the Malays opted to take their chances with the sharks, jumping overboard in a hurry. A light breeze picked up, and the brig drifted away from the pirates, leaving the two proas to retrieve the Malays from the water that the sharks had left behind.

In the days of the China clippers, those famous ships sailed many a race from Hong Kong and Canton, with New York as the goal, to get there with “first tea” and to forestall the Fourth of July market with a cargo of firecrackers.

In the era of the China clippers, those famous ships raced from Hong Kong and Canton, aiming for New York, to be the first to deliver "first tea" and to beat the Fourth of July market with a load of firecrackers.

In China and the East Indies, fireworks, like “the fume of the incense, the clash of the cymbal, the clang and the blaze of the gong,” are a part of the worship of the gods, as well as a feature of coronations and weddings. China is the birthplace of fireworks. From China the knowledge of them spread to India, and in both these lands rockets were used as missiles of war as early as the ninth century. The Chinese war rocket was a long, heavy affair, fitted at the end with a barb-like arrow, and to a foe unacquainted with firearms, it must have seemed a formidable missile. After gunpowder was introduced in Europe, fireworks came into use on the continent, and the use of both explosives undoubtedly was learned from the Chinese.

In China and the East Indies, fireworks, along with “the scent of incense, the sound of cymbals, and the loud crash and light of gongs,” are part of religious ceremonies as well as important events like coronations and weddings. China is where fireworks originated. The knowledge of them then spread to India, and in both places, rockets were used as weapons in warfare as early as the ninth century. The Chinese war rocket was long and heavy, equipped with a barb-like arrow at the end, which must have seemed like a powerful weapon to enemies unfamiliar with firearms. After gunpowder was introduced in Europe, fireworks started to be used on the continent, and both gunpowder and fireworks were undoubtedly learned from the Chinese.

Fireworks were manufactured in Italy as early as 1540, and in France we have accounts of their employment in great celebrations between the years 1606 and 1739. Long before this time, some form of rocket, now unknown, that would burn in water, constituted the famous Greek fire which struck terror to the hearts of invaders from Northern Europe in medieval times when the Saracens launched it against their ships. Early in the present century during the Napoleonic Wars, the rocket perfected by Sir William Congreve was used in the siege of Boulogne and in the battle of Leipsic. The conditions of modern warfare have so changed that the rocket is no longer of practical use in fighting except as a signal. In case of shipwreck it is often employed to carry a line from the shore to a stranded vessel. It is noteworthy that while almost every kind of fireworks is manufactured in Europe and the United States, the small firecrackers are still imported from China. But larger quantities are now manufactured in the United States, and it is only a matter of time when the “Young American” salute will take the place of the Chinese firecrackers.

Fireworks were made in Italy as early as 1540, and in France, we have records of their use in major celebrations between 1606 and 1739. Long before that, some kind of rocket, now unknown, that would burn in water made up the famous Greek fire, which terrified invaders from Northern Europe during medieval times when the Saracens used it against their ships. Early in this century, during the Napoleonic Wars, the rocket perfected by Sir William Congreve was used in the siege of Boulogne and at the battle of Leipsic. The conditions of modern warfare have changed so much that rockets are no longer useful for combat except as signals. In the event of a shipwreck, they are often used to carry a line from the shore to a stranded vessel. It's interesting to note that while almost all types of fireworks are made in Europe and the United States, small firecrackers are still imported from China. However, larger quantities are now produced in the United States, and it’s only a matter of time before the “Young American” salute replaces the Chinese firecrackers.

Rolling shop

Interior of Rolling Shop

Inside the Rolling Shop

Making Roman candles

Interior of Roman Candle Shop

Inside Roman Candle Shop

Making balloons

Interior of Balloon Shop

Inside Balloon Shop

It was about ten years before the Civil War that “set pieces” began to form a part of fireworks celebrations. In those days the most famous pyrotechnic display in the whole country was given on Boston Common on the Fourth of July, and the country boy who was so lucky as to see that display, with the miracle of George Washington’s benign face illuminated amid spouting flames and a shower of fireballs and rockets, had something to talk about for the rest of the year.

It was about ten years before the Civil War when “set pieces” started to become part of fireworks celebrations. Back then, the most famous fireworks show in the entire country took place on Boston Common on the Fourth of July. A lucky country boy who got to see that display, with the amazing sight of George Washington’s friendly face lit up among shooting flames and a rain of fireballs and rockets, had plenty to talk about for the rest of the year.

The American Civil War which did so much toward the modern development of firearms and munitions of war, brought also a great advance in pyrotechny, and soon after the close of the struggle, extensive manufacture of fireworks began in this country, with New York as the headquarters of the principal firms engaged in the business.

The American Civil War, which greatly influenced the modern development of firearms and military munitions, also led to significant advancements in pyrotechnics. Shortly after the war ended, large-scale production of fireworks began in this country, with New York becoming the main hub for the leading companies in the industry.

In 1865 the first displays of fireworks in the United States, illustrating historical events, were made by a company in New York City. They were the pioneers in this line of displays. Their success was immediate, and from these displays has grown the successes of today in pyrotechnics.

In 1865, the first fireworks displays in the United States that depicted historical events were presented by a company in New York City. They were the trailblazers in this type of display. Their success was instant, and from these events, the achievements in pyrotechnics that we see today have developed.

Fireworks now enter into the celebration of every important event in our national, political and business life. The celebrations at Washington, D. C., at the inaugurations of our Presidents, the coronations of emperors and kings in lands beyond our borders, are all brought to a close by brilliant displays of fireworks.

Fireworks are now a part of every significant event in our national, political, and business life. The celebrations in Washington, D.C., during the inaugurations of our Presidents, and the coronations of emperors and kings in other countries, all end with spectacular fireworks displays.

The writer, in visiting the plant of a large fireworks manufacturer, found that they were turning out large quantities of time fuses and primers for shrapnel shells for the foreign powers, and are working night and day on orders for the United States government on aeroplane bombs and signals. They have also worked out a searchlight projectile which is arranged to burst in the air, throwing out a number of luminous bodies that light up the surrounding country and reveal the movements of the enemy.

The writer, while visiting a major fireworks factory, discovered that they were producing large amounts of time fuses and primers for shrapnel shells for foreign countries, and they’re working around the clock on contracts for the U.S. government for airplane bombs and signals. They have also developed a searchlight projectile designed to explode in the air, releasing several glowing objects that illuminate the surrounding area and expose enemy movements.

All large displays of fireworks are now fired by electricity and every known color and effect is produced by the pyrotechnist of the present day.

All big fireworks shows are now ignited with electricity, and every color and effect imaginable is created by today's pyrotechnicians.

The water displays are scarcely less varied, consisting of flying fish, diving devils, prismatic fountains, floating batteries, fiery geysers and submarine torpedoes, all of which, being ignited and thrown into the water, go through their stunts as readily as other kinds do on land and in the air.

The water shows are hardly any less diverse, featuring flying fish, diving devils, colorful fountains, floating batteries, fiery geysers, and underwater torpedoes. When set on fire and tossed into the water, they perform their acts just as easily as other types do on land and in the air.

From every part of the civilized world, from Mexico, Central and South America and Europe, orders for fireworks come in increasing numbers to American firms, who now lead the world in this art. The Philippines will soon be a customer for them, and with the general opening up of China to modern civilization, from causes now in operation, it will not be strange if some day we should supply fireworks to the land of their origin.

From all over the civilized world, from Mexico, Central and South America, and Europe, orders for fireworks are coming in greater numbers to American companies, which now dominate this industry. The Philippines will soon be a customer, and with China's gradual opening up to modern civilization due to current trends, it wouldn't be surprising if one day we end up supplying fireworks to the place they originated from.


What Makes a Chimney Smoke?

Smoky chimneys are usually caused either by the presence of other buildings obstructing the wind and giving rise to irregular currents of air, or by improper construction of the fireplace and adjacent parts of the chimney.

Smoky chimneys are typically caused by nearby buildings blocking the wind, which creates irregular air currents, or by the fireplace and surrounding parts of the chimney being poorly constructed.

The first may generally be cured by fixing a chimney-pot of a particular construction, or a revolving cowl, on the chimney top, in order to prevent the wind blowing down; in the second case the narrowing of the chimney throat will generally create a better draft.

The first can usually be fixed by adding a specially designed chimney pot or a revolving cowl at the top of the chimney to stop the wind from blowing down. In the second case, narrowing the chimney throat typically improves the draft.

The longer a chimney is, the more perfect is its draft, provided the fire is great enough to heat the column of air in it, because the tendency of the smoke to draw upwards is in proportion to the difference of weight between the heated air in a chimney and an equal column of external air.

The longer a chimney is, the better the draft works, as long as the fire is strong enough to heat the column of air inside it. This is because the smoke rises more easily when there's a bigger difference in weight between the heated air in the chimney and the cooler outside air.

The first we hear of chimneys, for the escape of the smoke from a fire or furnace, is in the middle ages.

The first time we hear about chimneys, used for letting smoke out from a fire or furnace, is during the Middle Ages.

Floating dry dock with large vessel inside

Floating Dry Dock “Dewey”

Floating Dry Dock "Dewey"

This dry dock, which is capable of floating the largest battleship, was towed from Sparrow’s Point, Maryland, to Olangapo, Philippine Islands, a voyage of 13,000 miles. In operation, the dock is sunk by admitting water into its tanks until the ship can be floated in. The water is then pumped out and the dock with the ship inside rises to the proper level as shown.

This dry dock, which can float the biggest battleship, was towed from Sparrow’s Point, Maryland, to Olangapo, Philippine Islands, a journey of 13,000 miles. When in use, the dock is sunk by taking in water into its tanks until the ship can float in. The water is then pumped out, and the dock with the ship inside rises to the correct level as shown.

Battleship in dry dock

U. S. Battleship “Mississippi” in Dry Dock at League Island

U.S. Battleship "Mississippi" in Dry Dock at League Island

What are Dry Docks Like?

Although divers are able to go down under the water to examine the bottom of a ship while it is afloat, it is usually necessary to have it up on dry land when thorough inspections or repairs have to be made. So a berth something like a huge box stall in a stable is built, with the part where a horse would stand in the stall full of water, and a door, either made like swinging gates opening in the middle, or a caisson which is operated up and down like a window, at the end. The ship is floated into the dock and then after the door is shut to prevent any more coming in, all of the water is pumped out until the vessel rests on a lot of great big wooden blocks and supporting props with which the bottom and sides of the dock are lined. Supports are also placed between the vessel and each side of the dock. Then, when the work has been finished, and the ship is ready to go to sea, water is let back either by pumping it in or else by gradually opening the door at the end, and the vessel is able to float out into the river or harbor again.

Although divers can go underwater to inspect the bottom of a ship while it’s afloat, it’s usually necessary to have the ship on dry land for thorough inspections or repairs. So, a berth resembling a huge box stall in a stable is built, with the area where a horse would stand filled with water, and a door that can either swing open in the middle like gates or operate up and down like a window at the end. The ship is floated into the dock, and once the door is closed to keep water from entering, all of the water is pumped out until the vessel rests on large wooden blocks and supporting props lining the bottom and sides of the dock. Supports are also placed between the vessel and each side of the dock. Then, when the work is finished and the ship is ready to go to sea, water is let back in either by pumping it in or by gradually opening the door at the end, allowing the vessel to float out into the river or harbor once again.

Although all of the navy yards and some private corporations in this country have docks of this kind, they are not of as much importance here as in England, where they are used, without pumping out the water, for the loading and unloading of vessels, because of the very great rise and fall of the tides there straining and otherwise damaging ships tied up to ordinary docks.

Although all of the navy yards and some private companies in this country have docks like this, they aren't as significant here as they are in England. In England, they’re used for loading and unloading ships without having to pump out the water, thanks to the huge tides there that can strain and damage ships moored at regular docks.

There are nine important navy yards in the United States, located at Brooklyn, N. Y.; Boston, Mass.; Portsmouth, N. H.; Philadelphia, Pa.; Portsmouth, Va.; Mare Island, Cal.; New London, Conn.; Pensacola, Fla.; Washington, D. C., and Port Orchard, Wash.

There are nine key naval yards in the United States, located in Brooklyn, NY; Boston, MA; Portsmouth, NH; Philadelphia, PA; Portsmouth, VA; Mare Island, CA; New London, CT; Pensacola, FL; Washington, DC, and Port Orchard, WA.

There is another kind of dry dock, called “floating docks,” which float on the surface of the water and may be sunk sufficiently to allow of a vessel being floated into them, and then raised again by pumping the water out of the tanks around the sides. They are usually built of iron, with water-tight compartments, and not closed in at either end. They are sunk to the required depth by the admission of water into so many of the compartments, till the vessel to be docked can float easily above the bottom of the dock, and then they are raised by pumping out the water until the ship can be propped up as in the land dry dock.

There’s another type of dry dock known as “floating docks,” which float on the surface of the water and can be submerged enough to allow a vessel to float into them, then raised again by pumping the water out of the tanks around the sides. They’re typically made of iron, with watertight compartments, and aren’t closed at either end. They are submerged to the needed depth by letting water into several of the compartments until the vessel can float easily above the bottom of the dock, and then they are raised by pumping out the water until the ship can be supported just like in a land dry dock.

Why does a Lightning Bug Light Her Light?

The lightning bugs or fireflies which are seen so often on summer evenings in the country and among the trees in the parks of the city, are similar to the species of beetle called the glowworm in Great Britain, although the glowworm there does not give as much light as the firefly in America.

The lightning bugs or fireflies that are commonly seen on summer evenings in the countryside and among the trees in city parks are similar to a type of beetle called the glowworm in Great Britain, although the glowworm there doesn't emit as much light as the firefly in America.

In reality it is only the female which is the lightning bug, for the male is not equipped with any lighting power. He has the bad habit of going out nights, and so the female has had to make use of her ability to make part of her body shine with a sort of a phosphorus green light in order to show him the way home, very much as a dweller in a poorly-lighted street keeps a light in the window or on the porch to guide visitors or the late home-comer to the proper house. She seems to possess the power of moderating or increasing the light at will.

In reality, it's only the female that is the lightning bug because the male lacks any ability to produce light. He has the annoying habit of going out at night, so the female uses her ability to make part of her body glow with a kind of phosphorus green light to guide him home, similar to how someone living on a dimly lit street keeps a light in the window or on the porch to help visitors or latecomers find the right house. She seems to have the power to adjust the brightness of her light whenever she wants.

The most brilliant fireflies are found only in the warmer regions of the world. The ordinary firefly to which we are accustomed gives off a very much brighter light if placed in warm water. Fine print may be read by the light of one kind which is found in the West Indies; in Cuba the ladies have a fashion of imprisoning them in bits of netting or lace of a fine texture and wearing them as dress ornaments, and in Hayti they are used to give light for domestic purposes, eight or ten confined in a vial emitting sufficient light to enable a person to write.

The brightest fireflies are only found in the warmer parts of the world. The common firefly that we're used to shines much brighter when it's in warm water. You can read small print by the light of a specific type found in the West Indies; in Cuba, women have a trend of trapping them in fine netting or lace and wearing them as fashion accessories. In Haiti, they use these fireflies to light up homes, with eight or ten of them inside a vial providing enough light for someone to write.


The Story in the Making of a Picture[10]

Let us suppose, for the purposes of explanation, that as far as seeing goes, any object is made up of countless infinitesimal points of light, and that the business of the eye is to gather them in and spread them out at the back of the eye in exactly the same relation they bore to each other on the object. The points of light, so duplicated, would thus form the image of the object.

Let’s assume, for the sake of explanation, that when it comes to seeing, every object is made up of countless tiny points of light, and the eye's job is to collect them and arrange them at the back of the eye in the same way they relate to each other on the object. These duplicated points of light would then create the image of the object.

The camera works very much the same way. The lens at the front of the camera is the eye, and the plate or film at the back of the camera corresponds to the back of the eye. The lens collects all the points of light of the object we wish to photograph, and directs them to the plate or film in such fashion that they occupy exactly the same relative position that they did before. An image of the object is formed.

The camera functions in a similar way. The lens at the front of the camera acts like the eye, and the plate or film at the back corresponds to the back of the eye. The lens gathers all the light points from the object we want to photograph and directs them to the plate or film so that they maintain the same relative positions as before. An image of the object is created.

Now if we could look inside the camera and the image were visible, we would see that it was upside down. The reason for this is very simple, as the accompanying diagram shows. The ray of light from “A” at the bottom of the object passes through the lens at an angle, and continues in a straight line until interrupted by the film or plate. It started at the bottom of the object and ended at the top of the image. The position of all the points of light is just reversed, although their relative position remains the same.

Now, if we could look inside the camera and see the image, we would notice that it was upside down. The reason for this is quite simple, as the diagram shows. The light ray from “A” at the bottom of the object passes through the lens at an angle and continues in a straight line until it hits the film or plate. It started at the bottom of the object and ended at the top of the image. The position of all the points of light is just reversed, although their relative positions stay the same.

Working of a lens

Showing Inversion of the Image

Inverting the Image

“Then here,” you say, “is where your analogy between the camera and the eye falls down.”

“Then here,” you say, “is where your comparison between the camera and the eye breaks down.”

Not at all. It is true that we do not see things upside down, but this is because of mental readjustment during the passage of the impressions from the eye to the brain.

Not at all. It's true that we don't see things upside down, but this is because of the mental adjustment that happens when the impressions travel from the eye to the brain.

Now let us suppose that we have our camera loaded with film, and that mother has succeeded in keeping the baby quiet long enough for us to uncover the lens for an instant and let the points of light through to the film. The next question is, how are we going to make the resulting image permanent. We know that it is there, but in its present state it is not going to do us a great deal of good. In fact, if we should peek in the back of the camera, and to do so would ruin the exposure, we could not even see it.

Now let's say we have our camera loaded with film, and mom has managed to keep the baby quiet long enough for us to uncover the lens for a moment and let some light hit the film. The next question is, how are we going to make the resulting image permanent? We know it's there, but in its current state, it’s not going to help us much. In fact, if we peek at the back of the camera, which would ruin the exposure, we wouldn’t even be able to see it.

But let us go back a bit. We ought to know a little something about the composition of this film on which the image has been projected.

But let's go back a bit. We should know a little something about the composition of this film on which the image has been projected.

In brief, film is a cellulose base coated with silver bromide and gelatine. If we were using a plate the only difference would be that instead of cellulose as a base we would have a sheet of glass. The gelatine is there to afford lodgment to this sensitized silver. The silver, being sensitive to the action of light, is there to record the image. As soon as one of these silver particles has been touched by light, it becomes imbued with the power of holding whatever the lens has transmitted to it. The image was formed, we remember, by points of light grouped in the same relative positions as the points of light of the object we were photographing. Consequently[163] it is only those silver particles within the image-forming area that are affected, because that is where the light struck.

In short, film is made of a cellulose base that's coated with silver bromide and gelatin. If we were using a plate instead, the only difference would be that we’d have a sheet of glass instead of cellulose. The gelatin helps hold the sensitized silver in place. The silver is sensitive to light and is used to capture the image. As soon as one of these silver particles is exposed to light, it gains the ability to hold onto whatever the lens has projected onto it. The image is created by points of light arranged in the same relative positions as the light points from the object we’re photographing. Therefore[163] only the silver particles in the area where the image is formed are affected, since that’s where the light hit.

The lens, then, gathered in the points of light and dispersed them on the film so as to form an image. The silver particles held this image, but not visibly—it is a latent image, and it is the purpose of development to bring it out.

The lens gathered the points of light and spread them onto the film to create an image. The silver particles captured this image, but it wasn't visible right away—it’s a latent image, and the purpose of developing it is to make it appear.

It is the particular business of a chemical called “pyro” to release this latent image. When attacked by pyro, those silver bromide particles which have been affected by light—and only those—change to black metallic silver. After all the silver bromide particles, the ones that held the image, have been transformed into metallic silver, another chemical called “hypo” effectively disposes of all the silver bromide that was not affected by light. Now only the image-forming silver bromide particles remain, and these have been transformed to metallic silver. The result is a permanent image—a negative.

It’s the specific job of a chemical called “pyro” to reveal this hidden image. When exposed to pyro, the silver bromide particles that were influenced by light—and only those—turn into black metallic silver. Once all the silver bromide particles that contained the image have changed into metallic silver, another chemical called “hypo” cleans up all the silver bromide that wasn’t exposed to light. Now, only the image-forming silver bromide particles are left, and these have changed to metallic silver. The outcome is a permanent image—a negative.

But it is a negative, so called because everything in it is reversed—not only from left to right, but in the details of the image. Mother’s dark blue gown looks light, for example, and baby’s white dress, dark.

But it is a negative, which is called that because everything in it is reversed—not just from left to right, but also in the details of the image. Mom’s dark blue gown looks light, for example, and the baby’s white dress looks dark.

To get our picture as it should be, we must place the negative in contact with a sheet of paper coated with a gelatine containing silver. This emulsion, as the coating is called, is, as we might readily infer from the presence of the silver, sensitive to the action of light in much the same manner as was the original film. We place the negative and paper in contact, then, in what is called a printing frame, so that light may shine through the negative and impress the image on the sensitive paper. It is obvious that the light parts of the negative will let through the most light, and that consequently the silver emulsion on the paper underneath will be most blackened, while the dark parts will hold back the light and the emulsion on the paper underneath will be less affected. In other words, the very faults that we noted in the negative, from a picture point of view, automatically right themselves. Mother’s dress looks dark and baby’s dress white—just as the lens saw it.

To get our picture right, we need to place the negative in direct contact with a piece of paper coated with a gelatine that has silver in it. This coating, known as emulsion, is sensitive to light just like the original film. We put the negative and the paper together in a printing frame so that light can shine through the negative and create the image on the light-sensitive paper. It's clear that the light areas of the negative will allow the most light through, which means the silver emulsion on the paper beneath will darken the most, while the dark areas will block the light and the emulsion on the paper beneath will be less affected. In other words, the flaws we noticed in the negative, from a pictorial perspective, fix themselves naturally. Mom's dress appears dark, and the baby’s dress looks white—just as the lens captured it.

We then have the picture in its finished form.

We then have the picture in its final form.

The story of the making of the camera is as interesting as that of the making of the pictures by the camera.

The story of how the camera was created is just as fascinating as the story of the pictures taken by the camera.

Back in 1732, J. H. Schulze discovered that chloride of silver was darkened by light and all unwittingly became the father of photography. In 1737, Hellot, of Paris, stumbled on the fact that characters written with a pen dipped in a solution of silver nitrate would be invisible, until exposure to light, when they would blacken and become perfectly legible. However, it was not until early in the nineteenth century that these two discoveries were put to any practical use, as far as photography was concerned.

Back in 1732, J. H. Schulze found out that silver chloride darkened when exposed to light, unintentionally becoming the father of photography. In 1737, Hellot from Paris discovered that text written with a pen dipped in silver nitrate solution would be invisible until exposed to light, at which point it would darken and become completely readable. However, it wasn't until the early 1800s that these two discoveries were actually used practically in photography.

Dorothy Catherine Draper

Artotype Copy of the Earliest Sunlight Picture of a Human Face

Artotype Copy of the First Sunlight Image of a Human Face

Miss Dorothy Catherine Draper, taken by her brother, Prof. John W. Draper, M.D., LL.D., in 1840.

Miss Dorothy Catherine Draper, presented by her brother, Prof. John W. Draper, M.D., LL.D., in 1840.

People of an artistic turn of mind had been in the habit of making what were called “silhouettes.” The sitter was so posed that the light from a lamp threw the profile of his face in sharp shadow against a white screen. It was then easy enough to obtain a fairly accurate silhouette, by either outlining the profile or cutting it out from the screen.

People with an artistic mindset often created what were known as “silhouettes.” The subject would be positioned in a way that the light from a lamp cast their profile in sharp shadow against a white screen. This made it relatively simple to produce a reasonably accurate silhouette by either outlining the profile or cutting it out from the screen.

It occurred to a man by the name of Wedgwood that this profile might be printed on the screen by using paper treated with silver nitrate, and he not only succeeded in accomplishing this, but also in perfecting what was then called the “camera obscura,” the forerunner of the kodak of today. The camera obscura consisted of a box with a lens at one end and a ground glass at the other, just like a modern camera. It was used by artists who found that by observing the picture on the ground glass they could draw it more easily. Wedgwood tried to make pictures by substituting his prepared paper for the ground glass, but the paper was too insensitive to obtain any result. Sir Humphrey Davy, continuing Wedgwood’s experiments, and using chloride of silver instead of nitrate, succeeded in making[164] photographs through a microscope, by using sunlight. These were the first pictures made by means of a lens on a photographic material. But none of these pictures were permanent, and it was not until 1839 that Sir John Herschel found that “hypo,” which he had himself discovered in 1819, would enable him to “fix” the picture and make it permanent.

A man named Wedgwood realized that a profile could be printed on a screen using paper treated with silver nitrate. Not only did he achieve this, but he also improved what was then called the “camera obscura,” which was the precursor to today’s Kodak cameras. The camera obscura was a box with a lens on one end and ground glass on the other, similar to a modern camera. Artists used it because they could draw more easily by looking at the image on the ground glass. Wedgwood attempted to create pictures by replacing the ground glass with his prepared paper, but the paper was not sensitive enough to produce results. Sir Humphrey Davy continued Wedgwood’s experiments and, using silver chloride instead of nitrate, managed to make[164] photographs through a microscope using sunlight. These were the first images created with a lens on photographic material. However, none of these images were permanent, and it wasn’t until 1839 that Sir John Herschel discovered that “hypo,” which he had found in 1819, would allow him to “fix” the image and make it permanent.

At about this time, Daguerre announced discoveries that gave photography at least a momentary impetus, but the Daguerre process did not long survive, as it was slow, costly and troublesome. The daguerreotype was made on a thin sheet of copper, silver plated on one side, polished to a high degree of brilliancy, and made sensitive by exposing it to the fumes of iodine. The first daguerreotype made in America, that of Miss Catherine Draper, was exposed for six minutes in strong sunlight, and the face of the sitter thickly powdered, to facilitate the exposure. An exposure today with a modern camera, under similar conditions, could be made in 11000 of a second.

At around this time, Daguerre announced discoveries that briefly boosted photography, but the Daguerre process didn't last long since it was slow, expensive, and difficult to use. The daguerreotype was created on a thin sheet of copper, coated with silver on one side, polished to a high shine, and made sensitive by being exposed to iodine fumes. The first daguerreotype taken in America, featuring Miss Catherine Draper, was exposed for six minutes in bright sunlight, with the sitter's face heavily powdered to improve the exposure. A modern camera could take a similar photograph today in 11000 of a second.

It was impossible, of course, to find many sitters as patient as Miss Draper—try keeping perfectly quiet for even a minute if you would know why Miss Draper should be ranked as a photographic martyr—and many experiments were made in an attempt to materially shorten the time of exposure. The only real solution, of course, was to find some method where the light had to do only a little of the work, leaving the production of the image itself to chemical action.

It was, of course, impossible to find many people as patient as Miss Draper—try staying perfectly still for even a minute if you want to understand why Miss Draper should be considered a photographic martyr—and many attempts were made to significantly reduce the exposure time. The only real solution was to discover a way for the light to do only a small part of the work, allowing chemical action to handle the actual image creation.

Travelling photographer loaded with equipment

Old-Fashioned Photographic Equipment

Vintage Camera Gear

The first great step in this direction was taken by Fox Talbot in 1841. He found, that if he prepared a sheet of paper with silver iodide and exposed it in the camera, he got only a very faint image, but if, after exposure, he washed over the paper with a solution of silver nitrate and gallic acid, the faint image was built up into a strong picture. And not only was Fox Talbot the first to[165] develop a faint or invisible image; he was also the first to make a negative and use it for printing.

The first major advancement in this area was made by Fox Talbot in 1841. He discovered that if he coated a piece of paper with silver iodide and then exposed it in a camera, he would only get a very faint image. However, after exposing the paper, if he washed it with a solution of silver nitrate and gallic acid, the faint image would develop into a strong picture. Not only was Fox Talbot the first to[165] develop a faint or invisible image, but he was also the first to create a negative and use it for printing.

Kodak camera Film changing system
The First Kodak (1888), Featuring a Roll Holder and Roll Film for 100 Exposures The First Daylight Loading Method
Folding camera Dope
The First “Folding Kodak” Designed for Plates or Roll Film “Cool” Barrel

In spite of all these advances, photography was almost exclusively a studio proposition, when, in 1880, experiments were begun which were to result in photography that could be universally enjoyed—photography as we know it today. Of course there were amateurs even in those early photographic days, but they were few and far between. There was something about the bulk and weight of the old-time photographic outfit that failed to beget general enthusiasm.

In spite of all these advances, photography was mainly something that happened in studios until 1880, when experiments started that would lead to photography that everyone could enjoy—photography like we have today. Sure, there were some amateurs in those early days, but they were rare. The bulk and weight of old-school photography equipment just didn’t inspire widespread excitement.

Stock of raw Kodak material

Raw Stock Rolls, Kodak Park

Raw Stock Rolls, Kodak Park

Camera assembly work

Assembling Room, Camera Works

Assembly Room, Camera Operations

To lighten the camera burden, and to simplify the various photographic processes, were the problems that confronted the American inventor. The first step toward film photography—and it was film photography that relegated camera bulk to the scrap heap—was a roll film made of coated paper to which a sensitive emulsion was applied, but the real goal was reached when cellulose was substituted as a film base. This made practicable the present flexible, transparent film with its attendant convenience and dependability.

To make the camera easier to handle and to simplify the different photography processes were the challenges faced by the American inventor. The initial step towards film photography—and it was film photography that put bulky cameras out of use—was a roll film made of coated paper with a sensitive emulsion applied to it. However, the real breakthrough came when cellulose was used as the film base. This allowed for the development of the current flexible, transparent film, which offers convenience and reliability.

The kodak was the natural outcome of the roll film system. The first one appeared in 1888, and its development, which proceeded simultaneously with the film discoveries, soon reached the point where the loading and unloading could be done in daylight. Daylight developing soon followed, and the dark room, as far as the kodaker was concerned, took its proper place as a relic of the dark ages.

The Kodak was the natural result of the roll film system. The first one came out in 1888, and its development, which happened alongside film discoveries, quickly reached a point where loading and unloading could be done in daylight. Daylight developing soon followed, and for the average Kodak user, the darkroom became just a thing of the past.

With 1914 came autographic photography, so that now with a kodak in one pocket and a handful of film in the other, the amateur is equipped for a picture-making tour of the world—not simply a pictorial record, but a written record as well, for autographic photography permits the dating and titling of each negative directly after exposure.

With 1914, autographic photography arrived, so now with a Kodak in one pocket and a handful of film in the other, amateurs are ready for a picture-making adventure around the world—not just a visual record, but a written one too, because autographic photography allows you to date and title each negative right after taking the shot.

Photography, not so many years ago an exclusive pleasure for the few, is now easy fun for millions.

Photography, which not too long ago was a privilege for only a few, is now simple enjoyment for millions.

Filter room

Filter Room, Kodak Park

Filter Room, Kodak Park

Cellulose Acetate Manufacturing

Cellulose Acetate Production


How Deep is the Deepest Part of the Ocean?

Man has not been able to tell definitely just what the greatest depth of the ocean is, because it would be a practically unending task to go over every bit of it to take measurements. A great many exploring expeditions have been sent out to determine that interesting information so far as possible, however, and one of these, the Murray-Challenger expedition, has reported that the greatest depth that could be found in the Atlantic Ocean is 27,366 feet, in the Pacific Ocean 30,000 feet, in the Indian Ocean 18,582 feet, in the Southern Ocean 25,200 feet and in the Arctic Ocean 9,000 feet. They also stated that the Atlantic Ocean has an area in square miles, of 24,536,000; the Pacific Ocean, 50,309,000; the Indian Ocean, 17,084,000; the Southern Ocean, 30,592,000 and the Arctic Ocean, 4,781,000.

Man hasn't been able to say for sure what the greatest depth of the ocean is, because it would be an almost endless job to measure every part of it. Many exploration missions have been launched to find out this fascinating information as accurately as possible. One of these, the Murray-Challenger expedition, reported that the deepest point in the Atlantic Ocean is 27,366 feet, in the Pacific Ocean it's 30,000 feet, in the Indian Ocean it's 18,582 feet, in the Southern Ocean it's 25,200 feet, and in the Arctic Ocean it's 9,000 feet. They also noted that the Atlantic Ocean covers an area of 24,536,000 square miles; the Pacific Ocean covers 50,309,000; the Indian Ocean covers 17,084,000; the Southern Ocean covers 30,592,000; and the Arctic Ocean covers 4,781,000.

Why do We Say “Get the Sack”?

The use of the expression “get the sack,” when we mean “to be discharged,” originated through the impression made upon people in this country when stories were brought to them of the way the Sultan of Turkey disposed of members of his harem of whom he had tired. When he wanted to get rid of one of his harem he was said to have had her put into a sack and thrown into the Bosporus. People who heard of this report repeated it to others and they became so used to telling the tale that they slipped quite naturally into the habit of saying “to get the sack” when they meant that they expected to be put out of a position suddenly.

The phrase “get the sack,” meaning “to be fired,” came from the impression people in this country had when they heard stories about how the Sultan of Turkey dealt with members of his harem whom he no longer wanted. It was said that when he wanted to get rid of one of his harem, he had her placed in a sack and tossed into the Bosporus. Those who heard this story shared it with others, and eventually, it became a common way of saying “to get the sack” when they thought someone might be abruptly let go from a job.

In very much the same way the phrase “Hobson’s choice” is supposed to have resulted from the story told here of a livery-stable keeper at Cambridge, England, called Hobson, who obliged each customer to take the horse nearest the stable door, when a wish to hire one was expressed, even though he might permit customers to make the rounds of all the stalls, examining and perhaps selecting other horses. Since the interest inspired by that report, “Hobson’s choice” has come to mean a choice without any alternative, or the chance to take the thing which is offered or nothing.

In much the same way, the term “Hobson’s choice” is said to have come from the story of a livery stable owner in Cambridge, England, named Hobson, who forced each customer to take the horse closest to the stable door when they wanted to rent one. Although he might allow customers to look around at all the stalls and possibly choose other horses, they ultimately had no real choice. Since that story, “Hobson’s choice” has come to mean a choice that doesn’t actually offer any alternatives, or the option to take what is offered or nothing at all.

Why do We Call Them X-Rays?

At the time the discovery of X-rays was announced by Prof. Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen of the University of Würzburg, Germany, he was not sure of their exact nature, and so he named them “X-Rays,” because “X” has always been understood to be the symbol for an “unknown quantity.”

At the time Prof. Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen from the University of Würzburg, Germany, announced the discovery of X-rays, he wasn't certain about their exact nature, so he called them "X-Rays" because "X" has always been seen as a symbol for an "unknown quantity."

They are invisible rays transmitted through the air in a manner similar to light. They are produced by passing unidirectional electric current of from twenty to one hundred thousand volts pressure through a specially constructed high vacuum tube, within which rays radiating from the surface of a concave cathode (the negative electrode of a galvanic battery), are focused upon and bombard a target of refractory material such as tungsten, iridium, platinum, from which focus spot the X-rays radiate in all directions.

They are invisible rays sent through the air in a way that's similar to light. They're created by passing a one-way electric current of twenty to one hundred thousand volts through a specially designed high vacuum tube, where rays coming from the surface of a concave cathode (the negative electrode of a battery) are concentrated on and hit a target made of heat-resistant materials like tungsten, iridium, or platinum, from which the X-rays spread out in all directions.

They are used in medicine and surgery, to photograph the skeleton and all the internal organs of the human body, as an aid in diagnosis; also to destroy diseased tissue without the aid of surgery. Cancers and tumors of certain kinds and a number of skin diseases are said to be made to disappear by their use. When the apparatus is used, the subject is placed on a long table and the X-ray tube, in its lead glass shield container, is brought over the part of the body to which the rays are to be applied.

They are used in medicine and surgery to capture images of the skeleton and all the internal organs of the human body, helping with diagnosis; they can also eliminate diseased tissue without surgery. Certain cancers, tumors, and various skin diseases are said to vanish with their use. When the equipment is used, the person lies on a long table, and the X-ray tube, housed in its lead glass shield, is positioned over the part of the body where the rays will be applied.

The most up-to-date apparatus consists of a high-tension transformer and rectifier, driven by a rotary converter, which derives power from direct-current electric service and delivers alternating current to the high-tension transformer.

The latest equipment includes a high-voltage transformer and rectifier, powered by a rotary converter that takes energy from direct-current electrical service and provides alternating current to the high-voltage transformer.

X-Ray machine

Modern X-Ray Apparatus

Modern X-Ray Machine

How did the Term “Yankee” Originate?

Although some people maintain that the word “Yankee” originated with the way white men interpreted the Indians’ name for the early settlers, most of those who have wondered about it have decided that it came to be used as a nickname for persons born in the United States, because of a farmer, named Jonathan Hastings and living in Cambridge, Massachusetts, in the eighteenth century, using it to describe some good, home-made cider of his making, as “Yankee cider.” The word was taken up by the students of Harvard University, and gradually spread throughout the whole country.

Although some people believe that the word “Yankee” came from how white men interpreted the term the Native Americans used for the early settlers, most who have thought about it have concluded that it became a nickname for people born in the United States because a farmer named Jonathan Hastings from Cambridge, Massachusetts, in the eighteenth century referred to his good homemade cider as “Yankee cider.” The term was adopted by Harvard University students and gradually spread throughout the entire country.

Why do We Say “Kick the Bucket”?

A great many years ago a man called Bolsover became crazed by some unhappy experiences and decided to kill himself by fastening a rope around his neck and hanging from a cross-beam overhead. In selecting a place to tie the rope high enough to accomplish his purpose he found that he would have to stand on something in order to reach it, and so he reached for the nearest thing, which happened to be a bucket; after the rope was firmly adjusted he kicked the bucket out from under his feet and his full weight hung suspended from the rope about his neck. The publicity given his act resulted in the adoption of the phrase “to kick the bucket” as meaning “to die,” and that is the explanation which most people who have tried to look up the origination of the term give as its first use.

Many years ago, a man named Bolsover became overwhelmed by some bad experiences and decided to take his own life by tying a rope around his neck and hanging from a crossbeam above him. To tie the rope high enough to achieve his goal, he realized he needed to stand on something to reach it, so he grabbed the closest thing, which was a bucket. After securing the rope, he kicked the bucket out from under his feet, and his entire weight hung from the rope around his neck. The publicity surrounding his act led to the phrase “to kick the bucket” being adopted as a way to say “to die,” and that’s the explanation most people find when they look up where the term came from.

When does a Tortoise Move Quickly?

Tortoises lay their eggs in underground nests, where they remain for almost a year, and, strange to say, they have a very curious way of drilling holes for these nests with their tails. A tortoise picks a spot where the earth is bare, and then stiffens its tail by contracting the muscles strongly, placing the tip firmly against the ground and boring a hole by moving it round and round in a circle, until a cone-shaped cavity is produced, wide at the top but tapering to a point below. When this operation is completed, it immediately sets to work to enlarge the hole with the help of its hind legs. It does this by scooping out “shovelfuls” of dirt, first with one of its hind feet and then with the other, and heaping it up like the wall of a fortress around the pit. Tortoises use their feet like hands when they do this, very carefully placing the dirt in a circle at some little distance from the edge of the cavity, and the work is continued until the hole is dug down as deep as the hind legs will reach. When it finds that no more soil can be removed, that is, at the end of an hour or more of steady digging, the tortoise accepts the job as completed and proceeds to deposit its eggs inside very carefully, just as you would put hen’s eggs into a basket. While all this is going on the body is scarcely moved and the head is kept inside the shell.

Tortoises lay their eggs in underground nests, where they stay for almost a year. Interestingly, they have a unique method of digging holes for these nests using their tails. A tortoise finds a spot with bare ground, then stiffens its tail by tightening the muscles, pressing the tip firmly against the ground and turning it in a circle to create a cone-shaped cavity that is wide at the top and narrowing to a point below. Once this is done, it immediately starts to widen the hole using its hind legs. It does this by scooping out "shovelfuls" of dirt, first with one hind foot and then the other, piling it up like a fortress wall around the pit. Tortoises use their feet like hands in this process, carefully placing the dirt in a circle a little away from the edge of the cavity, continuing until the hole is dug as deep as their hind legs can reach. When it can’t remove any more soil—usually after an hour or more of solid digging—the tortoise considers the job done and carefully lays its eggs inside, just like you would place hen’s eggs into a basket. Throughout this, its body barely moves, and its head stays hidden in the shell.

There are usually nine eggs and they just about fill the bottom of the nest, which measures approximately five inches across and is itself shaped more or less like an egg, being wider inside than at the top. After about half an hour’s rest, the hardest part of the work is begun—that of filling up the hole and leveling the ground. The dirt is placed carefully over the eggs, a “handful” at a time, the hind legs being used alternately again for that purpose. As the cavity is gradually filled up the tortoise presses the earth down with the outer edge of its foot. It takes another half hour’s rest after all the dirt has been carried back again, and then commences the part of the operation where the tortoise moves quickly enough to merit another racing title. It beats down the dirt-mound and stamps it firm and flat with the under side of its hard shell, raising the hind end of its body and then hurriedly letting it drop to the ground again, turning round and round in a circle very briskly in the meantime, at the same time doing all it can to remove any traces which might lead to the discovery of its nest.

There are usually nine eggs, and they nearly fill the bottom of the nest, which is about five inches wide and shaped more or less like an egg, being wider inside than at the top. After about half an hour of resting, the toughest part of the job begins—filling the hole and leveling the ground. Dirt is carefully placed over the eggs, one “handful” at a time, with the hind legs being used alternately for that purpose. As the hole is gradually filled, the tortoise presses the soil down with the outer edge of its foot. It takes another half hour’s rest after all the dirt has been moved back, and then starts the part of the process where the tortoise moves quickly enough to earn another racing title. It beats down the dirt mound and packs it firm and flat with the underside of its hard shell, raising the back of its body and then quickly letting it drop back down to the ground, spinning around in a brisk circle in the meantime, all while trying to eliminate any signs that might lead to the discovery of its nest.


The Story in a Newspaper[11]

Among the marvels of machinery of the present day there are none more complicated and bewildering in appearance than that by which the news of the world is sent adrift within the daily newspaper and none more marvelously effective in its operation. If we go back to the days when the seeds of the modern press were planted, we find them in the hand-printing done by the Chinese with their engraved blocks, and with the simple press used by Gutenberg about 1450, when he printed the first book from movable types.

Among the incredible machines of today, none are more complex and confusing in appearance than the one that spreads the news of the world through daily newspapers, and none are more impressively effective in its operation. If we look back to when the foundations of the modern press were laid, we see them in the hand-printing done by the Chinese using engraved blocks, and in the simple press used by Gutenberg around 1450, when he printed the first book from movable type.

His press consisted of two upright timbers held together by cross pieces at top and bottom. The flat bed on which the types rested was held up by other cross timbers, while through another passed a wooden screw, by the aid of which the wooden “platen” was forced down upon the types. The “form” of type was inked by a ball of leather stuffed with wool, the printer then spread the paper over it, laying a piece of blanket upon the paper to soften the impression, after which the screw forced the platen down on the paper and this on the type. This press was not original, since similar cheese and linen presses were then in use.

His press was made of two vertical wooden beams connected by crosspieces at the top and bottom. The flat surface where the types sat was supported by additional cross timbers, and a wooden screw ran through another piece, allowing the wooden “platen” to be pushed down onto the types. The “form” of type was inked with a leather ball filled with wool, after which the printer spread paper over it, placing a blanket over the paper to soften the impression. Then, the screw pressed the platen down on the paper and onto the type. This press wasn’t original, as similar cheese and linen presses were already in use at that time.

Blaew press

The Blaew Press, 1620

The Blaew Press, 1620

For 150 years this crude method of printing continued in operation, the first known improvement being made by an Amsterdam printer about 1620, he adding a few parts to render the work more effective. Such was the simple press still employed when Benjamin Franklin began his work as a printer a century later. In 1798 the Earl of Stanhope had a cast-iron frame made to replace the wooden one and added levers to give more power to the pressman. Woodcuts were then being printed and needed a stronger press.

For 150 years, this rough printing method stayed in use, with the first known improvement made by a printer in Amsterdam around 1620, who added a few parts to make the process more effective. This was the basic press still in use when Benjamin Franklin started his printing career a century later. In 1798, the Earl of Stanhope had a cast-iron frame created to replace the wooden one and added levers to give the pressman more power. At that time, woodcuts were being printed, which required a stronger press.

We must go on with the old Gutenberg method and its tardy improvements, for another century, or until about 1816, when George Clymer, a printer of Philadelphia,[173] did away with the screw and employed a long and heavy cast-iron lever, by the aid of which the platen was forced down upon the type, the operation being assisted by accompanying devices.

We have to stick with the old Gutenberg method and its slow improvements for another century, or until around 1816, when George Clymer, a printer from Philadelphia,[173] replaced the screw with a long and heavy cast-iron lever. This lever helped push the platen down onto the type, with the help of additional devices.

As will be seen, the growth of improvements had until then been very slow. From this time forward it became far more rapid, some useful addition to the press being made at frequent intervals. The “Washington” press, used at this time by R. H. Hoe & Co., of New York, embodied these improvements, and became one of the best hand-printing presses so far made. The first steam-power press was introduced by Daniel Treadwell, of Boston, in 1822, the bed and platen, or its successor, the cylinder, being used in these and in the improved forms that followed until after the middle of the century.

As we will see, the progress of improvements had been very slow up to that point. From then on, it became much quicker, with useful additions to the press happening frequently. The “Washington” press, used at this time by R. H. Hoe & Co. in New York, included these improvements and became one of the best hand-printing presses made so far. The first steam-powered press was introduced by Daniel Treadwell from Boston in 1822, with the bed and platen, or its successor, the cylinder, being used in these and the improved versions that came afterward until after the middle of the century.

1798 printing press 1816 printing press
Stanhope Press, 1798 Clymer's Columbian Press, 1816

The idea of replacing the platen by a cylinder was not a new one. It was employed in printing copper-plate engravings in the fifteenth century, a stationary wooden roller being employed, beneath which the bed, with its form and paper, was moved backward and forward, a sheet being printed at each movement. With this idea began a new era in the evolution of the printing press. A vast number of patents have since been issued for printing machines in which the cylinder is connected with the bed and later for the operation of two cylinders together, one holding the form of type and the other making the impression. But all these were for improvements, the underlying principle remaining the same. The conception of a press of this character in which the paper was to be fed into the press in an endless roll or “web” goes back to the beginning of the nineteenth century, though it was not made available until a later date.

The idea of using a cylinder instead of a platen wasn't new. It had been used for printing copper-plate engravings in the fifteenth century, with a stationary wooden roller underneath, while the bed with its type and paper moved back and forth, printing a sheet with each movement. This concept marked the start of a new era in the development of the printing press. Many patents have since been issued for printing machines where the cylinder is connected to the bed, and later for machines using two cylinders together, one holding the type and the other making the impression. However, these were all just improvements, while the basic principle stayed the same. The idea of a press where paper is fed in as an endless roll or “web” dates back to the early nineteenth century, although it wasn't put into use until later.

Meanwhile, however, patent after patent for the improvement of the cylinder press were taken out and the art of printing improved rapidly, the firm of Hoe & Co. being one of the most active engaged in this business, the United States continuing in advance of Europe in the development of the art. The single small cylinder and double small cylinder introduced by this firm proved highly efficient, the output of the[174] former reaching 2,000 impressions per hour, while the double type, used where more rapid work was needed, yielded 4,000 per hour.

Meanwhile, many patents for improving the cylinder press were issued, and printing technology advanced quickly. The firm of Hoe & Co. was one of the most actively involved in this industry, with the United States leading Europe in developing the art. The small single cylinder and double small cylinder introduced by this company were highly effective, with the output of the[174] single cylinder reaching 2,000 impressions per hour, while the double type, used for faster work, could produce 4,000 impressions per hour.

1822 printing press

Peter Smith Hand Press, 1822

Peter Smith Hand Press, 1822

But the demands of the newspaper world steadily grew and in 1846 a press known as the Hoe Type Revolving Machine was completed and placed in the office of the Public Ledger, of Philadelphia. By increasing the number of cylinders the product was rapidly added to, each cylinder printing on one side 2,000 sheets per hour.

But the demands of the newspaper industry kept increasing, and in 1846, a press called the Hoe Type Revolving Machine was completed and installed in the office of the Public Ledger in Philadelphia. By increasing the number of cylinders, the output was quickly boosted, with each cylinder printing 2,000 sheets per hour on one side.

In 1835 Sir Rowland Hill suggested that a machine might be made that would print both sides of the sheet from a roll of paper in one operation. A similar double process had been performed for many years in the printing of cotton cloth. This remained, however, a mere suggestion until many years later, and the one-side printing continued. But, by adding to the number of cylinders, a speed of 20,000 papers thus printed was in time reached.

In 1835, Sir Rowland Hill proposed that a machine could be created to print on both sides of a sheet of paper from a roll in a single operation. A similar double printing process had been used for years in the printing of cotton cloth. However, this idea remained just a suggestion for many years, and printing only on one side continued. Eventually, by increasing the number of cylinders, a printing speed of 20,000 sheets was achieved.

1822 printing press

Treadwell’s Wooden-frame Bed and Platen Power Press, 1822

Treadwell's Wooden-frame Bed and Platen Power Press, 1822

To prevent the possible fall of types from a horizontal cylinder, the vertical cylinder was introduced by the London Times, but this danger was overcome in the Hoe presses, and by the subsequent invention of casting stereotype[175] plates in a curve the final stage of perfection in design was reached. In 1865 William Bullock, of Philadelphia, constructed the first printing press capable of printing from a web or continuous roll of paper, knives being added to cut the sheets, which were then carried through the press by tapes or fingers and delivered by the aid of metal nippers. There were difficulties in this series of operations, but these were overcome in the later Hoe press, in which the sheets were merely perforated by the cutter, and were afterward fully separated by the pull of accelerating tapes.

To prevent the possible fall of types from a horizontal cylinder, the vertical cylinder was introduced by the London Times, but this risk was eliminated in the Hoe presses, and with the later invention of casting stereotype plates in a curve, the design reached its final stage of perfection. In 1865, William Bullock from Philadelphia built the first printing press that could print from a web or continuous roll of paper, adding knives to cut the sheets, which were then transported through the press by tapes or fingers and delivered by metal nippers. There were challenges in this series of operations, but these were resolved in the later Hoe press, where the sheets were simply perforated by the cutter and then completely separated by the pull of accelerating tapes.

The old-time rag-paper had disappeared for newspaper work, being superseded by wood-pulp paper, the cheapness of which added to the desire to produce presses of greater speed and efficiency. It was also desirable that papers should be delivered folded for the carrier, and this led to the invention of folding machines, one of the earliest of which, produced in 1875, folded 15,000 per hour.

The old rag paper is no longer used for newspapers, as it has been replaced by wood-pulp paper, which is cheaper and fueled the push for faster, more efficient printing presses. It was also important for newspapers to be delivered already folded for the carriers, which resulted in the creation of folding machines. One of the first machines, made in 1875, was able to fold 15,000 newspapers an hour.

We have in the foregoing pages told the main story of the evolution of the printing press from the crude machine used by Gutenberg in 1450 to the rapid cylinder press of four centuries later. There is little more to be said. Later changes were largely in the matter of increase of activity, by duplication and superduplication of presses until sextuple and octuple presses were produced, and by adding to the rapidity and perfection of their operation, and the extraordinary ingenuity and quickness with which the printed sheets were folded and made ready for the convenience of the reader. Sir Rowland Hill’s dream of a press which would print both sides of the paper at one operation in due time became a realized fact, while vast improvements in the matter of inking the forms, and even the addition of colored ink by which printing in color could be done, were among the new devices.

We have shared the main story of how the printing press evolved from the simple machine used by Gutenberg in 1450 to the fast cylinder press developed four centuries later. There's not much else to add. Later changes mainly involved increasing productivity by duplicating and further duplicating presses until six and eight-page presses were created. They also focused on improving the speed and quality of operations, along with the remarkable creativity and efficiency in folding and preparing printed sheets for readers. Sir Rowland Hill’s vision of a press that could print on both sides of the paper at once eventually became a reality, along with significant advancements in inking the forms and the introduction of colored ink, allowing for color printing.

1827 printing press

Washington Hand Press, 1827

Washington Hand Press, 1827

What we have further to say is a question of progress in rapidity of action rather than of invention. The 20,000 papers printed per hour, above stated, has since been seen passed to a degree that seems fairly miraculous. The quadruple press of 1887 turned out eight-page papers at a running speed of 18,000 per hour, these being cut, pasted and folded ready for the carrier or the mails. Four years later came the sextuple press (the single press six times duplicated) with an output of 72,000 eight-page papers per hour, and in a few years more the octuple press, its output 96,000 eight-page papers per hour. Larger papers were of course smaller, but its capacity for a twenty-page paper was 24,000 per hour.

What we want to discuss next is about making progress in how quickly things happen rather than coming up with new ideas. The 20,000 papers printed every hour, mentioned earlier, has now increased to what seems almost unbelievable. The quadruple press from 1887 produced eight-page papers at a speed of 18,000 per hour, with them being cut, glued, and folded, ready for delivery or mailing. Four years later, the sextuple press (one press duplicated six times) was able to produce 72,000 eight-page papers every hour, and a few years after that, the octuple press managed an output of 96,000 eight-page papers per hour. Larger papers were, of course, printed in smaller quantities, but its capacity for a twenty-page paper was still 24,000 per hour.

1830 printing press

Isaac Adams’ Bed and Platen Press, 1830

Isaac Adams' Bed and Platen Press, 1830

1832-1900 printing press

Single Large Cylinder Press, 1832-1900

Single Large Cylinder Press, 1832-1900

1835-1900 printing press

Single Small Cylinder Press, 1835-1900

Single Small Cylinder Press, 1835-1900

1835-1900 printing press

Double Cylinder Press, 1835-1900

Double Cylinder Press, 1835-1900

These presses were built up to 1900 and this picture shows the latest design brought out about 1882.

These presses were built up until 1900, and this picture shows the latest design released around 1882.

1903 printing press

Double Octuple Newspaper Web Perfecting Press, 1903

Double Octuple Newspaper Web Perfecting Press, 1903

1911 dryong machine

Electric-Heated Pneumatic Matrix-Drying Machine, 1911

Electric Heated Pneumatic Drying Machine, 1911

As may well be conjectured, the twentieth century has had its share in this career of progress, the perfected press of 1916 being credited with the astounding output of 216,000 eight-page papers in an hour, all folded, cut and counted in lots. Where part of the pages are printed in three colors this press has still a running speed of 72,000 per hour. This machine is composed of 27,100 separate pieces, it being 47 feet long, 8 feet wide and 13 feet high, while such a mighty complication of whirling wheels and oscillating parts nowhere else exists.

As you can imagine, the twentieth century has contributed to this ongoing progress, with the advanced press of 1916 being capable of producing an incredible 216,000 eight-page newspapers in an hour, all folded, cut, and counted in batches. When some of the pages are printed in three colors, this press can still run at a speed of 72,000 per hour. This machine consists of 27,100 individual pieces, measuring 47 feet long, 8 feet wide, and 13 feet high, and such a complex arrangement of spinning wheels and moving parts is unmatched anywhere else.

A word more and we are done. To feed such giant presses the old hand method of setting and distributing type has grown much too slow. The linotype machine has added greatly to the rapidity of this centuries-old process. To this has been added the later monotype, of similar rapidity, while type distributing has become in large measure obsolete, the types, once used, going to the melting pot instead of to the fingers of the distributors.

A bit more and we're finished. The traditional way of manually setting and distributing type has become way too slow for these massive printing presses. The linotype machine has significantly sped up this age-old process. Then there's the newer monotype, which is also fast, while type distribution has largely become a thing of the past; the type that gets used now goes straight to the melting pot instead of into the hands of distributors.


What do We Mean by the “Flying Dutchman”?

The Flying Dutchman is a phantom ship said to be seen in stormy weather off the Cape of Good Hope, and thought to forbode ill luck. One form of the legend has it that the ship is doomed never to enter a port on account of a horrible murder committed on board; another, that the captain, a Dutchman, swore a profane oath that he would weather the Cape though he should beat there till the last day. He was taken at his word, and there he still beats, but never succeeds in rounding the point. He sometimes hails vessels and requests them to take letters home from him. The legend is supposed to have originated in the sight of some ship reflected from the clouds. It has been made the ground-work of one or two novels and an opera by Wagner.

The Flying Dutchman is a ghost ship said to appear in stormy weather off the Cape of Good Hope, believed to bring bad luck. One version of the legend claims that the ship is cursed to never enter a port because of a terrible murder that happened on board; another version says that the captain, a Dutchman, swore a blasphemous oath that he would navigate the Cape, even if it took him until the end of time. He was taken seriously, and now he endlessly sails but never manages to round the point. He sometimes calls out to passing ships, asking them to deliver letters home for him. The legend is thought to have originated from seeing a ship's reflection in the clouds. It has inspired a couple of novels and an opera by Wagner.

Why does a Duck’s Back Shed Water?

Nature has provided the duck with a protection against water just as she has so wisely protected all animals against such elements as they have to live in.

Nature has given the duck protection from water just like she has wisely protected all animals from the elements they have to endure.

The feathers on a duck are very heavy and close together, and at the bottom of each feather is a little oil gland that supplies a certain amount of oil to each feather. This oil sheds the water from the back of a duck as soon as it strikes the feathers.

The feathers on a duck are quite heavy and tightly packed together, and at the base of each feather is a small oil gland that provides a specific amount of oil to each feather. This oil repels water from the duck's back as soon as it hits the feathers.

Canvasback ducks are considered the finest of the water-fowls for the table. The canvasback duck is so called from the appearance of the feathers on the back. They arrive in the United States from the north about the middle of October, sometimes assembling in immense numbers. The waters of Chesapeake Bay are a favorite locality for them. Here the wild celery, their favorite food, is abundant, and they escape the unpleasant fishy flavor of the fish-eating ducks.

Canvasback ducks are regarded as the best waterfowl for dining. The canvasback gets its name from the look of the feathers on its back. They migrate to the United States from the north around mid-October, often gathering in large flocks. Chesapeake Bay is one of their preferred spots. Here, wild celery, their favorite food, is plentiful, allowing them to avoid the off-putting fishy taste found in fish-eating ducks.

Why doesn’t the Sky ever Fall Down?

The sky never falls down because there is nothing to fall. What we see and call the sky is the reflection of the sun’s rays on the belt of air that surrounds the earth. That beautiful blue dome that we sometimes hear spoken of as the roof of the earth is just the reflected light of the sun on the air.

The sky never falls because there's nothing to fall. What we see and refer to as the sky is just the reflection of the sun’s rays on the layer of air surrounding the earth. That lovely blue dome that we sometimes hear described as the roof of the earth is really just the sunlight reflecting off the air.

The atmosphere of the earth consists of a mass of gas extending to a height which has been variously estimated at from forty-five to several hundred miles, possibly five hundred, and bearing on every part of the earth’s surface with a pressure of about fifteen pounds per square inch.

The Earth's atmosphere is made up of a layer of gases that reaches a height estimated to be between forty-five and several hundred miles, possibly up to five hundred. It exerts a pressure of about fifteen pounds per square inch on every part of the Earth's surface.

How are Sand-Dunes Formed?

Sand-dunes are composed of drift sand thrown up by the waves of the sea, and blown, when dry, to some distance inland, until it is stopped by large stones, tree roots or other obstacles. It gradually accumulates around these, until the heaps become very large, often forming dunes or sand-hills.

Sand dunes are made up of sand that has been pushed up by the sea waves and carried inland by the wind when it's dry, until it gets stopped by large rocks, tree roots, or other obstacles. Over time, that sand builds up around these barriers, creating large mounds that often turn into dunes or sand hills.

What do We Mean by an “Eclipse”?

Any good dictionary will tell us that an eclipse is an interception or obscuration of the light of the sun, moon or other heavenly body by the intervention of another and non-luminous heavenly body. Stars and planets may suffer eclipse, but the principal eclipses are those of the sun and the moon.

Any good dictionary will tell us that an eclipse is when the light of the sun, moon, or another celestial body is blocked or obscured by another non-luminous celestial body. Stars and planets can also experience eclipses, but the main ones are those of the sun and the moon.

An eclipse of the moon is an obscuration of the light of the moon occasioned by the interposition of the earth between the sun and the moon; consequently all eclipses of the moon happen at full moon; for it is only when the moon is on that side of the earth which is turned away from the sun, and directly opposite, that it can come within the earth’s shadow. Further, the moon must at that time be in the same plane as the earth’s shadow; that is, the plane of the ecliptic in which the latter always moves. But as the moon’s orbit makes an angle of more than five degrees with the plane of the ecliptic, it frequently happens that though the moon is in opposition it does not come within the shadow of the earth.

An eclipse of the moon occurs when the earth blocks the light from the sun, casting a shadow on the moon. This means that all lunar eclipses take place during a full moon, since the moon is only on the side of the earth that faces away from the sun, directly opposite it, allowing it to enter the earth’s shadow. Additionally, the moon must be aligned with the earth’s shadow in the plane of the ecliptic, which is the path the shadow takes. However, since the moon's orbit is tilted at an angle of more than five degrees to the ecliptic, it's common for the moon to be directly opposite the sun but still not enter the earth’s shadow.

Mechanisms of eclipses

Diagrams Illustrating the Theory of Eclipses.

Diagrams Illustrating the Theory of Eclipses.

The theory of lunar eclipses will be understood from Fig. 1, where S represents the sun, E the earth, and M the moon. If the sun were a point of light there would be a sharply outlined shadow or umbra only, but since the luminous surface is so large, there is always a region in which the light of the sun is only partially cut off by the earth, which region is known as the penumbra (P P). Hence during a lunar eclipse the moon first enters the penumbra, then is totally eclipsed by the umbra, then emerges through the penumbra again.

The concept of lunar eclipses can be understood from Fig. 1, where S stands for the sun, E for the earth, and M for the moon. If the sun were just a dot of light, there would be a clearly defined shadow or umbra only. However, since the sun's surface is quite large, there's always an area where the sunlight is only partially blocked by the earth, called the penumbra (P P). Therefore, during a lunar eclipse, the moon first passes into the penumbra, then becomes fully eclipsed by the umbra, and finally moves back through the penumbra again.

An eclipse of the sun is an occultation of the whole or part of the face of the sun occasioned by an interposition of the moon between the earth and the sun; thus all eclipses of the sun happen at the time of new moon.

An eclipse of the sun is when the moon blocks all or part of the sun's face as it moves between the earth and the sun; therefore, all solar eclipses occur during a new moon.

Fig. 2 is a diagram showing the principle of a solar eclipse. The dark or central part of the moon’s shadow, where the sun’s rays are wholly intercepted, is here the umbra, and the light part, where only a part of them are intercepted, is the penumbra; and it is evident that if a spectator be situated on that part of the earth where the umbra falls there will be a total eclipse of the sun at that place; in the penumbra there will be a partial eclipse, and beyond the penumbra there will be no eclipse.

Fig. 2 is a diagram illustrating how a solar eclipse works. The dark or central area of the moon's shadow, where the sun's rays are completely blocked, is called the umbra, while the lighter area, where only some of the rays are blocked, is the penumbra. It's clear that if someone is standing on the part of the Earth where the umbra falls, they will experience a total eclipse of the sun; in the penumbra, there will be a partial eclipse, and outside the penumbra, there will be no eclipse at all.

As the earth is not always at the same distance from the moon, and as the moon[182] is a comparatively small body, if an eclipse should happen when the earth is so far from the moon that the moon’s shadow falls short of the earth, a spectator situated on the earth in a direct line between the centers of the sun and moon would see a ring of light around the dark body of the moon; such an eclipse is called annular, as shown in Fig. 3; when this happens there can be no total eclipse anywhere, because the moon’s umbra does not reach the earth.

As the Earth isn't always the same distance from the moon, and since the moon is relatively small, if an eclipse occurs when the Earth is too far from the moon for the moon’s shadow to reach the Earth, a viewer on Earth in a straight line between the centers of the sun and moon would see a ring of light around the dark shape of the moon. This type of eclipse is called an annular eclipse, as shown in Fig. 3; during this event, a total eclipse can't occur anywhere because the moon’s umbra doesn't reach the Earth.

An eclipse can never be annular longer than twelve minutes twenty-four seconds, nor total longer than seven minutes fifty-eight seconds; nor can the entire duration of an eclipse of the sun ever exceed two hours.

An eclipse can never last longer than twelve minutes and twenty-four seconds for an annular eclipse, nor longer than seven minutes and fifty-eight seconds for a total eclipse; additionally, the total duration of a solar eclipse will never exceed two hours.

An eclipse of the sun begins on the western side of his disc and ends on the eastern; and an eclipse of the moon begins on the eastern side of her disc and ends on the western.

An eclipse of the sun starts on the western edge of its disc and finishes on the eastern; and an eclipse of the moon starts on the eastern edge of its disc and finishes on the western.

The average number of eclipses in a year is four, two of the sun and two of the moon; and as the sun and moon are as long below the horizon of any particular place as they are above it, the average number of visible eclipses in a year is two, one of the sun and one of the moon.

The average number of eclipses in a year is four, with two solar and two lunar eclipses; and since the sun and moon are below the horizon for as long as they are above it at any specific location, the typical number of visible eclipses in a year is two, one solar and one lunar.

What are Dreams?

The dictionary tells us that a dream is a train of vagrant ideas which present themselves to the mind while we are asleep.

The dictionary defines a dream as a stream of wandering thoughts that come to our mind while we’re asleep.

We know that the principal feature, when we are dreaming, is the absence of our control over the current of thought, so that the principal of suggestion has an unlimited sway. There is usually a complete want of coherency in the images that appear in dreams, but when we are dreaming this does not seem to cause any surprise.

We know that the main characteristic of dreaming is the lack of control over our thoughts, which means that suggestion has complete power. The images in dreams usually don't make much sense, but while we're dreaming, this doesn't seem surprising at all.

Occasionally, however, intellectual efforts are made during sleep which would be difficult to surpass when awake.

Sometimes, though, we make intellectual strides while we sleep that would be tough to match when we're awake.

It is said that Condillac often brought to a conclusion in his dreams, reasonings on which he had been employed during the day; and that Franklin believed that he had been often instructed in his dreams concerning the issue of events which at that time occupied his mind. Coleridge composed from two to three hundred lines during a dream; the beautiful fragment of “Kubla Khan,” which was all he had committed to paper when he awoke, remaining as a specimen of that dream poem.

It’s said that Condillac often wrapped up his thoughts in his dreams based on what he had worked on during the day; and that Franklin believed he often received guidance in his dreams about the outcomes of events that were on his mind at the time. Coleridge wrote two to three hundred lines in a dream; the beautiful excerpt of “Kubla Khan,” which was all he had written down when he woke up, serves as a sample of that dream poem.

The best thought points to the fact that dreams depend on natural causes. They generally take their rise and character from internal bodily impressions or from something in the preceding state of body or mind. They are, therefore, retrospective and resultant, instead of being prospective or prophetic. The latter opinion has, however, prevailed in all ages and among all nations, and hence the common practice of divination or prophesying by dreams, that is, interpreting them as indications of coming events.

The best understanding is that dreams are influenced by natural causes. They usually arise and are shaped by internal physical sensations or something from the previous state of the body or mind. Therefore, they reflect the past instead of predicting the future. However, the belief that dreams can forecast events has persisted throughout history and across cultures, leading to the widespread practice of interpreting dreams as signs of what’s to come.

What Makes Our Teeth Chatter?

When one is cold there is apt to be a spasm of shivering over which the brain does not seem to have any control. The spasm causes the muscles of the jaw to contract very quickly and as soon as they are contracted, they let the jaw fall again of its own weight. This occurring many times in rapid succession is what causes the teeth to chatter.

When you’re cold, you often start shivering, and your brain can’t really control it. This spasm makes the jaw muscles contract quickly, and then as soon as they contract, the jaw drops back down due to its own weight. This happening repeatedly is what makes your teeth chatter.

There are two kinds of spasms, “clonic” and “tonic.” In the former, the muscles contract and relax alternately in very quick succession, producing an appearance of agitation. In the latter, the muscles contract in a steady and uniform manner, and remain contracted for a comparatively long time.

There are two types of spasms: “clonic” and “tonic.” In clonic spasms, the muscles contract and relax quickly in succession, creating a look of agitation. In tonic spasms, the muscles contract steadily and uniformly, and stay contracted for a relatively long time.


The Story in a Honey-Comb[12]

When one thinks of honey one instinctively closes the eyes and a mental picture of fruit trees laden with snowy bloom, of beautiful clover fields, of green forests in a setting quiet and peaceful, comes before the mind so realistic that the delicate perfume of the fragrant blossoms is almost perceptible and the memory of the musical hum of the little honeybee as she industriously flits from blossom to blossom, or wings her homeward way heavily laden with the delicious nectar, rests one’s jaded nerves. Into this picture fits closely the old bee master among his old-fashioned skeps, with the atmosphere of mystery that has so long been associated with the master and his bees that one is almost reluctant to think of the production of honey as a great commercial industry, employing great factories in the manufacture of beehives and other equipment necessary for the modern beekeeper that he may take full advantage of the wonderful and almost inconceivable industry of the honeybee in storing the golden nectar of the blossoms.

When you think of honey, you instinctively close your eyes, and a mental image of fruit trees covered in white blooms, beautiful clover fields, and green forests in a calm and peaceful setting comes to mind. It's so vivid that you can almost smell the delicate fragrance of the blossoms, and the memory of the sweet hum of the little honeybee flitting from flower to flower, or flying home heavily loaded with delicious nectar, soothes your frazzled nerves. This scene includes the old beekeeper with his traditional hives, surrounded by an air of mystery that has long been linked to him and his bees, making it almost hard to view honey production as just a big commercial industry. Nowadays, it involves large factories producing beehives and other gear for modern beekeepers to fully benefit from the incredible and almost unimaginable work of the honeybee in gathering the golden nectar from the flowers.

Bee on flower

Fertilizing a Pumpkin Flower

Pollinating a Pumpkin Flower

The development of the industry has been very slow; only during the past fifty years has real progress been made, although honey formed one of the principal foods of the ancients, which was secured by robbing the wild bees. During the early history of the United States, beekeeping was engaged in only as a farmer’s side line, a few bees being kept in any kind of a box sitting out in the backyard, boarding themselves and working for nothing. Even under such conditions amazing results were often obtained. Lovers of nature and the out-of-doors were attracted by the study of bee life, and early beekeepers were invariably bee lovers. The mysteries of the hive as revealed in the story of the family life of the bee—typical in many ways of our modern city life—is as fascinating as a fairy tale.

The development of the industry has been very slow; it’s only in the past fifty years that significant progress has been made. Honey was one of the main foods for ancient people, collected by harvesting wild bees. In the early days of the United States, beekeeping was mostly just a side hobby for farmers, with a few bees kept in any old box out in the backyard, fending for themselves and not costing anything. Even in those conditions, impressive results were often achieved. Nature enthusiasts were drawn to studying bee life, and early beekeepers were usually bee lovers. The mysteries of the hive, revealed through the family life of bees—which is somewhat similar to modern urban life—are as captivating as a fairy tale.

The average population of the modern beehive varies from forty to sixty thousand, with a well organized system of government. Intense loyalty to the queen mother is apparent in all their activities and arrangements. The close observer will discover a well-defined division of labor, different groups of bees performing certain operations. The housekeeping operations seem to be delegated to the young bees under sixteen days old, while the policemen are the older ones whose dispositions are not so mild and who would be more likely to detect a stealthy robber. It was this intensely interesting side of bee life that attracted the attention of a clergyman in failing health, forced to seek out-of-door occupation, in the early forties. He began to investigate bee life from a commercial standpoint, and about 1852 devised the movable hanging frame, which entirely revolutionized the bee business, making modern commercial beekeeping possible. Up to this time the box hive and straw skep were the only ones known, the combs being fastened to sticks, or the roof of the box, making it impossible to have any control over the activities of the hive. The new device or frame to which the bees fastened their combs in which brood was reared could be removed, one or all, at any time desired. This opened up undreamed-of possibilities in the bee business, which up to this time could hardly be called an industry.

The average population of today’s beehive ranges from forty to sixty thousand bees, all operating under a well-organized system of governance. Their intense loyalty to the queen is evident in everything they do. A careful observer will notice a clear division of labor, with different groups of bees handling specific tasks. The young bees, those under sixteen days old, are usually responsible for housekeeping duties, while the older bees, who are less docile, take on the role of guards to catch any sneaky intruders. This fascinating aspect of bee life caught the attention of a clergyman in poor health, who was searching for outdoor activities in the early 1840s. He began to study bee life from a business perspective and around 1852 invented the movable hanging frame, which completely transformed the beekeeping industry, making modern commercial beekeeping feasible. Before this, the only hives available were box hives and straw skeps, with the combs attached to sticks or the hive's roof, making it impossible to control hive activities. The new frame allowed bees to attach their combs where brood was reared, and these frames could be removed at any time. This innovation opened up unprecedented opportunities in beekeeping, which until then could barely be considered an industry.

Swarm of bees

An Italian Army of Bees

An Italian Bee Army

Drone Queen Worker
Italian Drone Italian Queen Italian Employee
(All are enlarged to about three times their size.)
Bees making honey

A Strange Home—but the Bees are Making Honey

An Interesting Place—but the Bees are Making Honey

The man who has been most active in developing practical bee culture and who has contributed more to the growth of the industry in the United States than any other person, lives in Medina, Ohio. In 1865 this man was a successful manufacturer of jewelry in the village of Medina. One day his attention was attracted to a swarm of bees flying over. One of his clerks noticing his interest asked what he would give for the bees. He replied that he would give a dollar, not expecting that by any means the bees could be brought down. Shortly after, he was much astonished to have the workman bring the bees safely stored inside a box and demand his dollar, which he promptly received, while his employer had the bees and soon developed a lot of bee enthusiasm. The returns from that swarm of bees convinced him that there were possibilities in the bee business, and very soon he gave up the jewelry business to engage in the bee business and manufacture of beehives. In this new move he encountered the opposition of his family and friends, for the general impression was that any man who would spend money or time on bees was either lazy or a fool. Knowing that this particular man wasn’t lazy he was called a fool to risk so much on an uncertain enterprise. In his defense he remarked that he expected to live to see the time when honey would be sold in every corner grocery; but we doubt if he expected to see his prophecy fulfilled to the extent it has been, for not only is honey sold over every grocer’s counter, his own private brand is sold in all the principal markets of the United States.

The man who has been the most active in developing practical beekeeping and who has contributed more to the growth of the industry in the United States than anyone else lives in Medina, Ohio. In 1865, this man was a successful jewelry manufacturer in the village of Medina. One day, he noticed a swarm of bees flying overhead. One of his clerks, seeing his interest, asked how much he would pay for the bees. He responded that he would pay a dollar, not really expecting the bees could be captured. To his surprise, a worker soon arrived with the bees safely contained in a box and asked for his dollar, which he promptly paid. His newfound possession sparked a strong interest in beekeeping. The profits from that swarm convinced him that there were real opportunities in the bee business, and he quickly left the jewelry trade to focus on beekeeping and manufacturing beehives. In this new venture, he faced opposition from family and friends, as many believed that anyone who invested time or money in bees was either lazy or foolish. Although they recognized he wasn’t lazy, they called him a fool for risking so much on an uncertain business. In his defense, he mentioned he expected to see a time when honey would be sold in every corner store; however, it’s likely he didn't anticipate how successful his prediction would become, as honey is now sold in every grocery store, and his own private brand is available in major markets across the United States.

Idyllic garden with bee hives

A Happy Home of the Honey Bees

A Joyful Home for Honey Bees

Queen bee

All Hail, the Queen

All Hail, the Queen

Shortly after securing his first swarm of bees he commenced the manufacture of beehives in the same room where he had his jewelry business, using a large windmill for power. Soon the business outgrew the small quarters and was moved to the present location of the plant. Hardly a year has passed that additions or new buildings have not been added, and the mammoth plant as it stands today covers sixteen acres of floor space, giving steady employment to several hundred people, and for many years modern agricultural appliances have gone from this factory to all parts of the world.

Shortly after managing to capture his first swarm of bees, he started making beehives in the same room where he ran his jewelry business, using a large windmill for power. Soon, the business outgrew the small space and was moved to its current location. Hardly a year has gone by without adding new structures or expansions, and the huge plant as it exists today covers sixteen acres of floor space, providing steady jobs for several hundred people. For many years, modern agricultural equipment has been shipped from this factory to all corners of the globe.

The old method of straining honey has long since been replaced by the centrifugal honey extractor, which simply empties the cells of honey, not injuring the combs. The combs are then replaced in the hive to be refilled by the bees, thus saving them the labor of rebuilding the costly structure, increasing the quantity of extracted honey which a single colony can produce, while comb honey is produced so perfect in appearance as to cause some to believe it to be manufactured by machinery; but comb honey, nature’s most exquisite product, comes in its dewy freshness untouched by the hand of man, from the beehive to the table, a food prepared in nature’s laboratory fit for the Gods.

The old way of straining honey has long been replaced by the centrifugal honey extractor, which efficiently empties the honey cells without damaging the combs. The combs are then put back in the hive for the bees to refill, saving them the effort of rebuilding the expensive structure and increasing the amount of honey a single colony can produce. The comb honey looks so perfect that some people think it’s made by machines; however, comb honey, nature’s most exquisite product, comes in its fresh, untouched state from the beehive to the table, a food created in nature’s laboratory fit for the gods.

As beekeeping developed as an industry, the close relationship to fruit growing and horticulture became apparent, as bees were discovered to be the greatest pollen carrying agents known. The government then began to spend more money on the development of the various branches of agriculture; a Department of Apiculture was established and through the work of this department beekeeping is recognized as one of the most profitable branches of agriculture.

As beekeeping grew into an industry, the strong connection to fruit growing and horticulture became clear since bees were found to be the best pollinators. The government then started to invest more in developing different areas of agriculture; a Department of Apiculture was created, and due to the efforts of this department, beekeeping is now recognized as one of the most profitable sectors of agriculture.

Boy stung by bee

The Result of a Bee’s Sting

The Outcome of a Bee Sting

The intense enthusiasm of this pioneer beekeeper was contagious and resulted in many taking up beekeeping. As no attention had been given to developing a market for honey and production increased, older beekeepers became alarmed and raised the cry that he was making too many beekeepers. Seeing the need for some means of increasing the demand for honey, a small honey business was started to dispose of the product of customers who had no market. Soon a definite educational campaign on the value of honey as a food was started, enlisting the co-operation of beekeepers wherever possible. Immediately the necessity for more care in selecting and marketing honey was apparent.

The excitement of this pioneering beekeeper was infectious, leading many people to start beekeeping. Since no effort had been made to build a market for honey and production was rising, established beekeepers grew concerned and claimed he was producing too many beekeepers. Recognizing the need to boost honey demand, a small honey business was launched to help sell the product of customers lacking a market. Soon, a focused educational campaign on the benefits of honey as a food began, involving beekeepers' cooperation wherever feasible. It quickly became clear that more care had to be taken in selecting and marketing honey.

Bees bending down a young tree

A Large Swarm of Italians on a Young Locust Tree

A Large Group of Italians on a Young Locust Tree

Honeycomb Bee's egg
Cell Arrangement in Comb Super Close-Up Egg
Old bee hive

An Old-Style Hive—What is inside?

An Old-Style Hive—What's inside?

The introduction of Italian bees into the United States in the early sixties marked an epoch in beekeeping, as they soon demonstrated their superiority as honey gatherers, their gentleness and other traits proving them more adaptable to domestication and to modern methods of beekeeping. The marked superiority of some colonies over others attracted the attention of beekeepers to the possibility of race improvement by careful breeding, which gradually developed a new branch of beekeeping aside from honey production—that of queen rearing—as it was discovered that improvement of stock must come through the queen mother. The average production of honey per colony has been materially increased, due not alone to improved methods, but to improvement in stock by careful breeders; and there are many beekeepers engaged exclusively in this branch of the industry who enjoy international reputation as breeders of superior strains of queens, and many thousands are annually sent through the mails to all parts of the world. Live bees are shipped by express as easily as poultry or other live stock.

The introduction of Italian bees to the United States in the early sixties was a turning point in beekeeping, as they quickly showed their advantage in honey gathering. Their gentle nature and other characteristics made them easier to domesticate and better suited to modern beekeeping techniques. The clear superiority of certain colonies over others caught the attention of beekeepers, leading to the idea of improving bee breeds through selective breeding. This gradually created a new aspect of beekeeping beyond just honey production—queen rearing—since it became clear that breeding improvements had to start with the queen mother. The average honey production per colony has greatly increased, thanks not only to better methods but also to the efforts of careful breeders. Many beekeepers now focus exclusively on this field and have gained international recognition for breeding top-quality queen bees, with thousands being shipped worldwide each year. Live bees can be sent by express delivery just as easily as poultry or other livestock.

Placing honey comb in centrifuge

Loading an Up-to-Date Centrifugal Extractor

Loading a Modern Centrifugal Extractor

Centrifuging honey

In Action—For a Few Minutes Only

In Action—For Only a Few Minutes

Large hive

A Man-Size Hive of Italian Bees

A Standard-Sized Hive of Italian Bees

Lots of bees on the comb

We Must Brush the Bees Off So that We Can See the Comb

We need to move the bees out of the way so we can see the honeycomb.

Opened honey comb

After Cell Cappings are Cut Off—Ready to Extract

After the Cell Caps Are Removed—Ready for Extraction

The honey industry is unique in this respect, that there is hardly a part of the United States where one cannot engage in it with profit. Locality has much to do with the flavor and quality of honey, owing to the different sources from which it is produced. Honey is simply blossom nectar gathered by the bees, distilled or evaporated in the beehive with the same distinctive flavor as the perfume of the blossoms from which it was gathered; consequently we have as many different flavors of honey as plants that bloom in sufficient profusion to produce honey. For this reason it is easy to recognize the distinct flavors of honey produced in different localities. In California orange honey we get the delicate aroma of the orange blossoms, and the water-white honey from the mountain sage has its characteristic flavor. Throughout the states east of the mountains and west of the Mississippi, are produced the well-known varieties of honey—alfalfa, sweet clover and other honeys from fall flowers. From the Middle West and Eastern states comes the matchless white clover honey, basswood and the dark aromatic buckwheat. The Southern states produce a multitude of different honeys, the sweet clover, tupelo, and the palmetto being the most common. The total annual production of honey in the United States as given by the best authorities is approximately 55,000,000 pounds. This, compared with other crop reports, may appear very small, but when considered from the standpoint of the enormous amount of bee labor represented, it is stupendous. Undoubtedly present reports will greatly exceed those given.

The honey industry is unique because there’s hardly a part of the United States where you can’t make a profit from it. The location plays a big role in the flavor and quality of honey, due to the different sources it comes from. Honey is simply nectar from flowers that bees collect and process into honey in the hive, retaining the unique flavor of the blossoms it came from. That’s why we have as many different flavors of honey as there are plants that bloom enough to produce it. Because of this, it’s easy to identify the distinct flavors of honey from different areas. For example, California orange honey has the light aroma of orange blossoms, while the water-white honey from mountain sage has its own unique taste. In the states east of the mountains and west of the Mississippi, you can find popular varieties like alfalfa, sweet clover, and other honeys made from fall flowers. From the Midwest and Eastern states comes the famous white clover honey, basswood, and the dark, aromatic buckwheat honey. The Southern states produce a wide variety of honeys, with sweet clover, tupelo, and palmetto being the most common. The total annual honey production in the United States, according to the best sources, is about 55,000,000 pounds. While this may seem small compared to other crop totals, it’s impressive when considering the enormous amount of work bees put in. Clearly, future reports will likely show much higher numbers.

Bees' hive in the open

Fresh Air Bees”—No hive needed.

“Fresh Air Bees”—No hive required.

Large size of queen cells

Queen Cells—Note size compared with worker cells.

Queen Cells—Check the size in relation to worker cells.

Section of honey comb

Magnified View of Section of Honeycomb

Close-Up View of a Honeycomb Section

Large-scale bee keeping

Some of the Best Honey Comes from Such Localities

Some of the best honey comes from these regions.

Beautiful honey comb

A Nice, Even Frame of Bees

A Nice, Even Frame of Bees

Bee hives arranged in garden

A Model Arrangement for Keeping Bees for Pleasure

A Practical Setup for Enjoying Beekeeping

Brushing bees of the comb

Removing Bees from Comb

Removing Bees from Honeycomb

Honey comb sections

Sections of Honey as Taken from the Supers

Parts of Honey Gathered from the Supers

Thirty-two stages in honey comb construction

Stages of Work in Building a Section of Honey

Steps Involved in Building a Section of Honey

Girls spreading figs for drying

Uruk Girls Spreading Figs

Uruk Girls Distributing Figs

Fig orchard

Typical Smyrna Fig Orchard

Typical Smyrna Fig Orchard


Where do Figs Come From?

The fig tree, which is of the mulberry family, belonged originally in Asia Minor, but it has been naturalized in all the countries around the Mediterranean. It grows from fifteen to twenty, or even thirty, feet high.

The fig tree, part of the mulberry family, originally comes from Asia Minor, but it has become naturalized in all the countries around the Mediterranean. It can grow from fifteen to twenty, or even thirty, feet tall.

In good climates it bears two crops in a season; one in the early summer, from the buds of the last year; the other, which is the chief harvest, in the autumn, from those on the spring growth.

In good climates, it produces two crops in a season: one in early summer from last year’s buds, and the other, which is the main harvest, in autumn from the new spring growth.

Figs, particularly dried figs, form an important article of food in the countries of the Levant, and are exported in large quantities to America and Europe. The best come from Turkey.

Figs, especially dried figs, are a significant food item in the Levant countries and are exported in large amounts to America and Europe. The finest ones come from Turkey.

What are “Fighting Fish”?

Fighting fish are a small fish and belong to the climbing perch family. They are natives of the southeast of Asia and are remarkable for their pugnacious propensities.

Fighting fish are small fish that belong to the climbing perch family. They are native to Southeast Asia and are known for their aggressive behavior.

In Siam these fish are kept in glass globes, as we keep goldfish, for the purpose of fighting, and an extravagant amount of gambling takes place about the result of the fights.

In Siam, these fish are kept in glass bowls, like we keep goldfish, for the purpose of fighting, and a huge amount of gambling takes place on the outcomes of the fights.

When the fish is quiet its colors are dull, but when it is irritated it glows with metallic splendor.

When the fish is calm, its colors are muted, but when it gets annoyed, it shines with a metallic brilliance.

How is the Exact Color of the Sky Determined?

An instrument called a “cyanometer,” meaning “measurer of blue,” is used for ascertaining the intensity of color in the sky.

An instrument called a “cyanometer,” meaning “measurer of blue,” is used for measuring the intensity of color in the sky.

It consists of a circular piece of metal or pasteboard, with a band divided by radii into fifty-one portions, each of which is painted with a shade of blue, beginning with the deepest, not distinguishable from black, and decreasing gradually to the lightest, not distinguishable from white. The observer holds this up between himself and the sky, turning it gradually round till he finds the tint of the instrument exactly corresponding to the tint of the sky.

It is a circular piece of metal or cardboard, featuring a band divided by lines into fifty-one segments, each painted in a shade of blue. It starts with the darkest blue, which looks nearly black, and gradually lightens to the lightest blue, which is almost white. The observer holds it up between themselves and the sky, slowly rotating it until they find the shade on the tool that exactly matches the color of the sky.

What is a “Divining Rod”?

A divining rod is a wand or twig of hazel or willow used especially for discovering metallic deposits or water beneath the earth’s surface.

A divining rod is a stick or branch of hazel or willow used mainly for finding metallic deposits or water underground.

It is described in a book written in 1546 and it has also a modern interest, which is set forth by Prof. W. F. Barrett, F.R.S., the chief modern investigator. The use of the divining rod at the present day is almost wholly confined to water finding, and in the hands of certain persons it undoubtedly has produced results along this line that are remarkable, to say the least. The professional water-finder provides himself with a forked twig, of hazel, for instance, which twig, held in balanced equilibrium in his hands, moves with a sudden and often violent motion, giving to the onlooker the impression of life within the twig itself. This apparent vitality of the twig is the means whereby the water-finder is led to the place where he claims underground water to exist, though its presence at that particular spot was hitherto wholly unsuspected. While failure is sometimes the outcome of the water-finder’s attempts, success as often and, indeed, according to the testimony of Professor Barrett, more often crowns his efforts. Various explanations, scientific and other, of the phenomenon have been advanced. Professor Barrett ascribes it to “motor-automatism” on the part of the manipulator of the divining rod, that is, a reflex action excited by some stimulus upon his mind, which may be either a sub-conscious suggestion or an actual impression. He asserts that the function of the forked twig in the hands of the water-finder may be to act as an indicator of some material or other mental disturbance within him. While a hazel or willow twig seems to be preferred by the professional water-finders, twigs from the beech, holly or any other tree are employed; sometimes even a piece of wire or watch spring is used, with apparently as good results.

It is described in a book written in 1546, and it also holds modern interest, as noted by Prof. W. F. Barrett, F.R.S., the leading contemporary researcher. Today, the use of the divining rod is almost entirely limited to finding water, and in the hands of certain individuals, it has indeed produced noteworthy results. The professional water-finder typically uses a forked twig, often made of hazel, which, when held steady in their hands, moves suddenly and often dramatically, giving the impression that the twig has a life of its own. This seeming vitality of the twig guides the water-finder to the spot where they claim underground water exists, even though its presence was previously unknown. While sometimes the water-finder's efforts fail, they often find success, and according to Professor Barrett, success actually outweighs failure. Various scientific and other explanations for this phenomenon have been proposed. Professor Barrett attributes it to “motor-automatism” on the part of the person using the divining rod—essentially, a reflex action triggered by some stimulus in their mind, which could be either a subconscious suggestion or an actual impression. He argues that the role of the forked twig in the hands of the water-finder may be to indicate some material or mental disturbance within them. While professional water-finders tend to prefer hazel or willow twigs, they also use twigs from beech, holly, or other trees; sometimes even a piece of wire or a watch spring is employed, with seemingly equal effectiveness.


The Story of Electricity in the Home[13]

How wonderful to youth always has been the magical story of Aladdin and the wonderful lamp which, through its supernatural powers, he could gently stroke and thereby make genii of the unknown world his slaves.

How amazing the story of Aladdin and the magical lamp has always been to young people. With its supernatural powers, he could rub it gently and make the genies of the unknown world his servants.

In the rush of modern affairs there is that which is even more fascinating, even more wonderful, than the story of Aladdin and the magical power exerted through his lamp, but which is given but a passing thought because of the rapid changes through which we are passing.

In the hustle of today's world, there’s something even more captivating and incredible than the tale of Aladdin and the magical power of his lamp, yet it’s often overlooked because of the rapid changes we’re experiencing.

Mythical as it may sound, yet nevertheless it is true, that man has harnessed for his use every snowflake that falls in the mountain tops and settles itself in the banks of perpetual ice and snow. How man has tapped the mountain fastnesses and converted the melting snows into a servant more powerful, more magical, more easily controlled, than Aladdin’s genii, should be known to everyone. This servant is electricity.

Mythical as it may sound, it’s still true that humans have harnessed every snowflake that falls on the mountaintops and settles in the banks of everlasting ice and snow. Everyone should know how we’ve tapped the mountains and transformed the melting snow into a servant that is more powerful, more magical, and easier to control than Aladdin’s genie. This servant is electricity.

This silent, invisible servant is ever present, always ready at the touch of a button or the snap of a switch, without hesitation, without grumbling, to do silently, swiftly, without dirt, without discomfort, without asking for a day off or for higher wages, the work which is laid out for it.

This quiet, unseen helper is always around, ready at the press of a button or the flip of a switch, without hesitation or complaints, to work quietly and quickly, without mess, without fuss, and without asking for time off or a raise, on any task assigned to it.

The use of electricity is so common today that the average person does not stop to think of it as a magical power wielding a tremendous influence for betterment in every-day affairs.

The use of electricity is so common today that the average person doesn't pause to see it as a magical force that significantly improves daily life.

Electricity has rapidly found its way into the home for domestic purposes, eliminating at its entrance a host of cares of the household.

Electricity has quickly become a part of home life for everyday tasks, removing many of the worries that come with managing a household.

So recently, as to seem almost yesterday, the genius of man’s brain coupled electricity with mechanical devices for the comfort and efficiency of the home.

So recently, it feels like it was just yesterday, the brilliance of human ingenuity combined electricity with machines to enhance the comfort and efficiency of our homes.

Although a number of attempts have been made to build appliances for use in the home that would utilize electricity, the real beginning of the present almost universal use of electrical appliances seems to have been in the manufacture of the electric iron. One instance, at least, coupled with the manufacture of this household necessity, offers something of romanticism.

Although several efforts have been made to create home appliances that use electricity, the real start of the widespread use of electrical appliances today seems to have been with the making of the electric iron. At least one example, linked to the production of this household essential, has a touch of romance.

To a certain western state, a young electrical engineer betook himself, obtaining a position as superintendent of an electric power company and establishing his abode in a tent far up a canyon, more for the benefit of his wife’s health than for the thought of being near the power plant and his work. The melting snow which gathered in little rivulets made a roaring mountain stream which generated such an excess of power for the company, that the young electrical engineer began looking about for other means of utilizing it than for lighting the homes of the villages below the mouth of the canyon. He designed a crude electric iron, placed a number of them in use, and found they gave fairly good service and at the same time enabled the power company to sell additional current. Development of the device was rapid, so rapid, in fact, that the young engineer’s time was soon taken up with it and he resigned from his position with the power company to organize a small concern for the purpose of manufacturing electric irons which at first were sold to the consumers of the power company and later to a large nearby city.

A young electrical engineer moved to a certain western state, took a job as the superintendent of an electric power company, and set up his home in a tent up a canyon, primarily for his wife’s health rather than the proximity to the power plant and his work. The melting snow created small streams that made a loud mountain river, producing so much excess power for the company that the young engineer started exploring other ways to use it beyond lighting the homes in the villages at the canyon's base. He designed a basic electric iron, implemented a few of them, and found they performed reasonably well while allowing the power company to sell additional electricity. The development of the device progressed quickly, so quickly that the engineer soon devoted all his time to it, leading him to resign from the power company to start a small business manufacturing electric irons, initially selling them to the power company’s customers and later to a nearby major city.

These irons met with such a ready reception and were so popular with housewives because of the time saving and the convenience, that attention was next turned to other appliances which could be used in the home and which would assist[201] the power company in the sale of current. About one hundred electric cooking sets were manufactured, consisting of ovens and crude round stoves. These were distributed among the customers of the power company and thenceforth their operation was carefully watched and improvements made from time to time, using always the suggestions offered by the housewives to make an appliance that would meet the needs of the home.

These irons were welcomed with such enthusiasm and became so popular with housewives due to their time-saving features and convenience that attention soon shifted to other household appliances that could help the power company sell more electricity. Around one hundred electric cooking sets were made, including ovens and basic round stoves. These were given to the power company's customers, and from that point on, their performance was closely monitored, with improvements made over time, always incorporating the suggestions from housewives to create appliances that would fit the needs of the home.

This particular company, which was started but little more than ten years ago in a small room of a store building in a small town of Southern California, has grown rapidly from that time when its complete office and factory force consisted of a man and two boys. It now places in homes well toward a million appliances each year.

This company, which was started a little over ten years ago in a small room of a store building in a small town in Southern California, has grown quickly from when its entire office and factory team was just a man and two boys. It now delivers nearly a million appliances to homes each year.

Since the home can now be operated almost exclusively with electrical appliances, including everything from the electric iron to the modern labor-saving electric range, it is well to note briefly some of the many reasons for the success of electrically-heated appliances.

Since homes can now be run almost entirely with electrical appliances, including everything from electric irons to modern, time-saving electric stoves, it's important to briefly mention some of the many reasons for the success of electrically heated appliances.

Perhaps most noticeable is cleanliness and the absolute absence of dirt and grime in using pure electric heat. There is no soot, no smoke nor discoloration. There are none of the bad effects so often caused by the air becoming vitiated, due to the burning up of oxygen in the air by gas and other fuels. There is no corrosion, oxidization or other form of deterioration.

Perhaps the most obvious benefit is the cleanliness and the complete lack of dirt and grime that comes with using pure electric heat. There’s no soot, no smoke, and no discoloration. You avoid all the negative effects that often happen when the air gets polluted from burning oxygen with gas and other fuels. There’s no corrosion, oxidation, or any other kind of deterioration.

Perfect and absolute control of heat seems to be secured. The easy snap of the controlling switch on the electric burner gives a certain intensity of heat which remains at that temperature so long as the switch remains in that position. Thus, with modern appliances, the housewife operates them at high, medium or low to suit her desires.

Perfect and complete control of heat seems to be achieved. The simple flip of the switch on the electric burner provides a specific level of heat that stays at that temperature as long as the switch is in that position. Therefore, with modern appliances, the homemaker can set them to high, medium, or low to fit her needs.

Fire risk is reduced to a minimum, because there are no matches, no kindlings, no kerosene cans, no oil barrels and nothing of the sort to endanger life and property.

Fire risk is minimized because there are no matches, no kindling, no gas cans, no oil barrels, and nothing like that to threaten life and property.

The efficiency obtained through the operation of electrical appliances soon becomes evident to the user. The heat generated for ironing, for instance, is all utilized. This is true as well with heating or cooking appliances, and this utilization of practically all of the heat units naturally results in economy in operation in communities where the lighting or power company has made a favorable rate.

The efficiency of using electrical appliances quickly becomes clear to the user. For example, all the heat generated for ironing is fully utilized. This is also the case with heating or cooking appliances, and this effective use of nearly all the heat produced leads to cost savings in areas where the local lighting or power company offers competitive rates.

Because the electric iron seems to have been the forerunner of electrical appliances for the home, it is well first to describe briefly the processes of manufacture necessary before the iron can be placed in the home and take its position as one of the modern labor-saving devices.

Because the electric iron appears to be the original electrical appliance for the home, it’s best to first briefly describe the manufacturing processes needed before the iron can be put in the home and become one of the modern labor-saving devices.

Old electric iron Modern electric irons
Electric Iron Electric Irons, 1916

One of the first irons to be manufactured, an illustration of which is shown herewith, did not offer the pleasing appearance nor give the service of its youngest sister, the illustration of which is also shown. One of the first problems was to control the heat at the iron, and to do this a separable switch plug was developed, enabling the operator to connect or disconnect the current supply at the iron.

One of the first irons to be made, a illustration of which is shown here, did not have the attractive look or provide the same performance as its newer counterpart, the illustration of which is also shown. One of the initial challenges was managing the heat of the iron, and to address this, a detachable switch plug was created, allowing the user to connect or disconnect the power supply at the iron.

The real problem, the one of most vital importance from the point of efficiency, was that of the heating element that would do more than heat the center of the sole plate. One of the pioneer manufacturers, after numerous experiments, concluded that, since the point or nose of an iron comes first in contact with the damp goods, naturally it should have first and most heat applied to it. The result was a double[202] heating element in the form of a V, the resistance wire used being symmetrically wound on a flat, thin mica core. This V-shaped element, the point of the V coming up into the nose of the iron, insured a hot point, as well as hot sides, center, back and heel, where the terminals were connected with the switch plug receptacle. Another development which followed was that of an attached stand, eliminating the necessity of lifting the iron on and off a stand many times during the ironing. At first the iron was heavy and clumsy, being built of cast iron, but modern manufacture has made it possible to build the sole plate of cast iron and the top of pressed steel.

The main issue, which was crucial for efficiency, was creating a heating element that could heat more than just the center of the sole plate. One of the early manufacturers, after many tests, determined that since the tip or nose of an iron is the first part to touch damp clothes, it should receive the most heat. The outcome was a V-shaped double heating element, with the resistance wire symmetrically wound around a flat, thin mica core. This V-shaped design, with the tip of the V reaching into the nose of the iron, ensured that not only the tip but also the sides, center, back, and heel were hot, where the terminals connected to the switch plug receptacle. Another improvement that followed was an attached stand, which removed the need to repeatedly lift the iron on and off a stand during ironing. Initially, the iron was heavy and awkward, made of cast iron, but modern manufacturing has enabled the sole plate to be made of cast iron while the top is made of pressed steel.

Casting eletric iron soles

Fig. 1.—Pouring Molten Metal into Molds for Casting Iron Sole Plates

Fig. 1.—Pouring molten metal into molds to create cast iron sole plates

Polishing iron sole

Fig. 2.—Workman Polishing Sole Plates

Fig. 2.—Worker Polishing Sole Plates

The illustrations show some of the steps necessary before the iron reaches the shipping room. Fig. 1 shows the workman pouring an earthen ladle of molten metal into the molds in which the sole plates are cast. Fig. 2 shows the sole plate in the hands of the workman, held against a rapidly revolving polishing wheel, after it has been run through a milling machine and ground to a perfect size. Fig. 3 shows a huge punch press which cuts the blank of steel that is afterwards drawn to the shape of the iron top. The workman is seen holding in his hand the blank cut from[203] a sheet of steel (Fig. 4). The blanks of flat steel of such irregular shape are next passed to a mammoth draw press which draws blanks into the perfect shape to be fitted over the top of the pressure plate which holds the heating element firmly against the sole plate. At the operator’s left hand is a stack of blanks and in his left hand he holds one ready to be placed in the draw press. In his right hand is a top just pulled from the press, and at the extreme right a large truck full of finished tops ready for the polishing wheels.

The illustrations show some of the steps needed before the iron gets to the shipping room. Fig. 1 shows the worker pouring molten metal from an earthen ladle into the molds where the sole plates are cast. Fig. 2 shows the sole plate in the worker's hands, pressed against a rapidly spinning polishing wheel, after it has been milled and ground to the perfect size. Fig. 3 shows a huge punch press that cuts the blank of steel, which is then shaped into the iron top. The worker is seen holding a blank cut from[203] a sheet of steel (Fig. 4). The irregularly shaped flat steel blanks are then passed to a giant draw press that shapes them perfectly to fit over the top of the pressure plate, which holds the heating element securely against the sole plate. The operator has a stack of blanks on his left and holds one ready to be placed in the draw press with his left hand. In his right hand, he holds a top just removed from the press, and to the far right, there is a large truck filled with finished tops ready for polishing.

Cutting out the tops

Fig. 3.—Blanking the Steel Tops

Fig. 3.—Covering the Steel Tops

Installing the blanks

Fig. 4.—Drawing the Blanks into the Perfectly Shaped Tops

Fig. 4.—Filling in the Blanks of the Perfectly Shaped Tops

Mica, which so many people know as isinglass, is one of the most important materials in the manufacture of the standard electric iron. The highest grade mica comes from India and the open box in the picture shows thin, transparent pieces just tumbled out (Fig. 5). At the edge of the table is a stack of mica strips known as cores. Hanging over the top of the board are several cores on which the resistance wire has been wound, showing the V-shaped heating element.

Mica, commonly known as isinglass, is one of the most essential materials in producing the standard electric iron. The best quality mica is sourced from India, and the open box in the picture displays thin, transparent pieces that have just been poured out (Fig. 5). At the edge of the table is a stack of mica strips known as cores. Hanging over the top of the board are several cores with the resistance wire wrapped around them, illustrating the V-shaped heating element.

One of the most important and yet seemingly simple parts of an electric iron is the switch plug which connects the electric light socket with the iron. The operator in Fig. 6 is shown assembling switch plugs and is in the act of driving home a screw which holds in place the fiber bar over which the cord bends.

One of the most important yet seemingly simple parts of an electric iron is the switch plug that connects the electric outlet to the iron. The operator in Fig. 6 is shown putting together switch plugs and is in the process of tightening a screw that secures the fiber bar over which the cord bends.

Mica chrystals Checking for defects in element
Operator Holding Element Before Bright Light to Spot Flaws in the Mica
Manual check of finished product
Fig. 5.—Displaying a Box of Imported Mica
Above on the table, a stack of “cores” and several elements ready for insertion in the iron. Notice the V shape. Inspector with Carefully Trained, Sensitive Fingers Checking Finished Irons Before they're Packaged in the Carton
Putting the switch plug together Complete ironing set with curling iron
Fig. 7.—Electric Boudoir Set 3-pound Iron
Fig. 6.—Operator Assembling Switch Plugs Stand for converting the iron into small stove, curling tongs heater, felt bag.

A standard six-pound iron consists of seventy-nine parts and represents two hundred and ten distinct factory operations. Every part is carefully inspected before being routed to the assembling department, and after being fully assembled the irons are placed on a traveling table where each is examined in its turn by an inspector with carefully trained fingers, sensitive as those of a miller who tells the quality of flour by pinching it between his thumb and forefinger. This inspector can quickly detect in the handsome finish a defect that is unnoticeable to the average person.

A standard six-pound iron is made up of seventy-nine parts and involves two hundred and ten different manufacturing processes. Each part is thoroughly inspected before it's sent to the assembly department, and once fully assembled, the irons are placed on a moving table where each one is examined by an inspector with finely trained hands, as sensitive as a miller who assesses flour quality by pinching it between his thumb and forefinger. This inspector can quickly spot a flaw in the sleek finish that an ordinary person wouldn’t even notice.

The Traveler’s Iron.

Electric current is so nearly universally obtainable that milady who travels much has come to carry in her grip or suitcase a light-weight iron, usually of about three pounds, and to aid to further convenience, the manufacturer has supplied with this iron, curling tongs, curling tongs heater and an attached stand so that the iron can be inverted and its sole plate used as a small disc stove. The entire outfit is placed in a neat felt bag as shown by Fig. 7.

Electric current is so widely available that women who travel often carry a lightweight iron, usually around three pounds. To make things even more convenient, the manufacturer has included curling tongs, a curling tongs heater, and an attached stand, so the iron can be flipped over and its sole plate used as a small disc stove. The whole set is packaged in a neat felt bag as shown by Fig. 7.

Toaster

Electric Toaster Stove

Electric Toaster

Electric Cooking Appliances.

It is stated that not until the reign of Queen Elizabeth did women begin to take over generally the handling of the kitchen work. Their absence from this important part of the household is not so much to be wondered at when we consider the size of the joints served prior to the time of that well-known queen and the crude methods of preparing the meal. On the other hand, it may have been due to the fact that the Armada called for men, and the women had to go into the kitchen irrespective of conditions. Be that as it may, we naturally conclude that the evolution of the kitchen and kitchen work began at about that time, for very shortly after the open fire gave way to some of the more crude methods of contained fire pots.

It is said that it wasn't until the reign of Queen Elizabeth that women started taking over kitchen duties. Their absence from this crucial part of the household isn't too surprising when we think about the size of the joints served before that famous queen's time and the basic methods of meal preparation. On the flip side, it could have been because the Armada required men, forcing women to step into the kitchen regardless of the circumstances. Regardless, we can logically conclude that the evolution of the kitchen and kitchen work began around that time, as shortly afterward, the open fire was replaced by the more primitive methods of contained fire pots.

It was many years after Good Queen Bess’ reign that electricity was introduced in England for cooking purposes; in fact, not until as late as 1891, when H. J. Dowsing, one of the pioneers of electric cooking, exhibited electric cookers and heaters at the Crystal Palace Electrical Exposition in London, was much interest manifested.

It was many years after Good Queen Bess's reign that electricity was introduced in England for cooking; in fact, it wasn't until 1891, when H. J. Dowsing, one of the pioneers of electric cooking, showcased electric cookers and heaters at the Crystal Palace Electrical Exposition in London, that there was much interest.

Divided into Three Classes.

Electric cooking appliances can very conveniently be divided into three classes: table appliances, and the light and heavy duty kitchen appliances; the latter being those requiring special wiring. Among table appliances are toasters, coffee percolators, electric teapots, chafing dishes and numerous other articles that add to the convenience of preparing food. These are termed light-duty appliances, as they operate from the light socket.

Electric cooking appliances can easily be categorized into three types: table appliances, and light and heavy-duty kitchen appliances; the latter requiring special wiring. Table appliances include toasters, coffee makers, electric kettles, warming dishes, and many other items that make food preparation more convenient. These are considered light-duty appliances since they plug into regular outlets.

It might be well to explain that the lamp-socket appliances are those operating from the light socket and are built to carry not over 660 watts of current. Should you attach an appliance of heavier wattage to a light socket you will doubtless “blow” a fuse.

It’s important to clarify that lamp-socket appliances are designed to operate from a light socket and can handle no more than 660 watts of current. If you connect an appliance with a higher wattage to a light socket, you will likely blow a fuse.

Toaster

Fig. 8.—Electric Upright Toaster

Fig. 8.—Electric Toaster

Electric Toaster.

In the rush and hurry of modern life, we are inclined to go back to the days of barbarism, when real home life was unknown. Instead of all members of the family gathering about the breakfast table when the meal is ready, they come straggling in one by one. This made it very difficult for the housewife to serve the breakfast hot, and particularly the toast, which is a favorite dish of our breakfast table. The necessary steps back and forth from the breakfast room to the kitchen to prepare hot, crunchy toast made this portion of breakfast-getting a not agreeable feature. The thought, taken up by electrical engineers, brought out an electric toaster, rectangular in shape, with handsome frame, nickel supports and wire heating element. This was indeed very efficient and could be used also as a small stove. This type of toaster was followed a little later by an upright toaster (Fig. 8). The heating element is of the radiant type, made of flat resistance wire wound on mica and placed in a vertical position between the two bread racks. When the current is switched on, the heating element becomes red and the bread is inserted under the gravity-operated bread clamps on each side. The bread clamp is simply raised at the edge of the slice of bread, and holds the bread firmly in place. This appliance toasts bread evenly, rapidly, and costs very little to operate. The flat top can be used for keeping a plate warm for the toast.

In the hustle and bustle of modern life, we tend to revert to a time when real family life didn’t exist. Instead of everyone gathering around the breakfast table when the meal is ready, they trickle in one by one. This makes it really hard for the person cooking to serve a hot breakfast, especially the toast, which is a staple on our breakfast table. The constant trips between the breakfast room and the kitchen to prepare hot, crunchy toast turn breakfast prep into a hassle. This issue caught the attention of electrical engineers, leading to the creation of an electric toaster, rectangular in shape, with an attractive frame, nickel supports, and a wire heating element. This was incredibly efficient and could also double as a small stove. Soon after, an upright toaster (Fig. 8) was introduced. It features a radiant heating element made of flat resistance wire wound on mica and positioned vertically between the two bread racks. When switched on, the heating element glows red, and the bread is placed under gravity-operated clamps on each side. The clamp is simply lifted at the edge of the bread slice and holds it securely in place. This appliance toasts bread evenly and quickly, and it’s very economical to run. The flat top can also be used to keep a plate warm for the toast.

Percolator

Fig. 9.—Electric Nickel Valveless Percolator

Fig. 9.—Electric Nickel Valveless Percolator

Electric Coffee Percolator.

Lovers of good coffee want it served hot, but boiling spoils coffee. The modern electric percolator, which can be operated on the dining table, has solved coffee-making problems. The particular style of percolator shown in Fig. 9 has no valves or floats or traps that continually get out of order and that make the cleaning of a percolator so disagreeable. This valveless percolator is very easily cleaned and requires no brush. The heating element of this type percolator is in the bottom of the pot in the center of the water space, and is of the immersion type, protruding up from the center of the bottom of the pot. The heating element is made of flat ribbon resistance wire wound on mica, then bent into the form of a cylinder to fit into the German silver shell. A screw-operated spreader in the center presses the heating element tightly against the entire surface of the shell and insures rapid conduction of the heat from the element to the water. A study of the illustration showing the inside of the percolator (Fig. 10) will make clear to you the method of operation. With this style of electric percolator, percolation begins within thirty seconds after the water has been placed in the pot and[207] the current turned on, and delicious coffee, clear as amber, is ready to pour in ten minutes.

Coffee lovers want it served hot, but boiling ruins coffee. The modern electric percolator, which can be used right on the dining table, has solved coffee-making issues. The specific style of percolator shown in Fig. 9 has no valves, floats, or traps that often malfunction and make cleaning a hassle. This valveless percolator is very easy to clean and doesn't need a brush. The heating element in this type of percolator is located at the bottom of the pot in the center of the water space, and it’s of the immersion type, sticking up from the center of the pot’s bottom. The heating element consists of flat ribbon resistance wire wrapped around mica, then shaped into a cylinder to fit inside the German silver shell. A screw-operated spreader in the middle presses the heating element tightly against the entire surface of the shell, ensuring quick heat conduction from the element to the water. Looking at the illustration of the inside of the percolator (Fig. 10) will clarify how it works. With this style of electric percolator, brewing starts within thirty seconds after the water is placed in the pot and the power is turned on, and delicious coffee, clear as amber, is ready to pour in ten minutes.

Percolator

Fig 10.—X-Ray Showing the Valveless Mechanism, Electric Percolator

Fig 10.—X-Ray Showing the Valveless Mechanism, Electric Percolator

The above gives a comprehensive insight into the general construction, equipment and operation of valveless Percolators. 1—Glass globe. 2—Aluminum coffee basket. 3—Element, with German-silvershell—completely surrounded by water. (Highly efficient.) 4—Interchangeable switch-plug. 5—Ebonized wood—always-cool handle. 6—Copper body—nickeled and highly polished. 7—White metal spout. 8—Lid—securely fastened hinge.

The above provides a detailed look at the overall design, equipment, and function of valveless Percolators. 1—Glass globe. 2—Aluminum coffee basket. 3—Element with a German-silver shell—completely surrounded by water. (Very efficient.) 4—Interchangeable switch-plug. 5—Ebonized wood—always-cool handle. 6—Copper body—nickeled and shiny. 7—White metal spout. 8—Lid—securely fastened hinge.

Percolators of this type are made by the manufacturer from sheet copper spun in perfect shape, and also aluminum spun. The latter makes an especially desirable percolator.

Percolators like this are made by the manufacturer from perfectly shaped spun sheet copper and also spun aluminum. The aluminum version is particularly desirable.

Percolator

Fig. 11.—Electric Machine Type Valveless Percolator

Fig. 11.—Electric Machine Type Valveless Percolator

Machine Type Percolator.

Because some prefer to draw coffee from a faucet rather than pour it from a spout, manufacturers have made a percolator of this type called the machine style. These are sold in various patterns from the Colonial design, like the illustration shown (Fig. 11), to those patterned after the Grecian urn.

Because some people prefer to get coffee from a faucet instead of pouring it from a spout, manufacturers have created a percolator of this kind called the machine style. These come in different designs, ranging from Colonial styles, like the illustration shown (Fig. 11), to ones inspired by Grecian urns.

We have already mentioned how an electrical engineer, shortly after placing irons in the homes of his customers, followed them with a number of small stoves and ovens. These required special wiring, as the wattage was too heavy to allow of their operation from the light socket. Principally, they were used in the kitchen on one end of the table or on a small shelf. This method necessitated carrying considerable food to the dining room after it was cooked, and brought out the thought of a means of preparing breakfast or a luncheon at the dining table. For this purpose a small stove seemed desirable, and the result was a small disc stove made of cast iron, highly nickel plated and polished.

We’ve already talked about how an electrical engineer, soon after installing irons in his customers’ homes, followed up with a range of small stoves and ovens. These needed special wiring because their wattage was too high to be powered from a regular light socket. Mainly, they were used in the kitchen on one end of the table or on a small shelf. This setup required carrying a lot of cooked food to the dining room, which led to the idea of having a way to prepare breakfast or lunch at the dining table. For this purpose, a small stove seemed ideal, resulting in the creation of a small disc stove made of cast iron, which was highly nickel plated and polished.

On this little stove, herewith illustrated (Fig. 12), minor cooking operations can be performed, such as frying, boiling, etc., and it is used by many for toasting bread by placing a piece of metal screen on top. It is also very serviceable for frying hot cakes. The heating element is of the same construction as that in the iron; the mica is clapped tightly against the metal top and below this is a plate of asbestos which prevents the downward radiation of the heat.

On this small stove, shown here (Fig. 12), you can perform simple cooking tasks like frying and boiling. Many people also use it for toasting bread by putting a piece of metal screen on top. It’s quite handy for frying pancakes as well. The heating element is built the same way as the one in an iron; the mica is pressed tightly against the metal surface, and beneath that is a plate of asbestos to stop the heat from radiating downwards.

Table stove

Fig. 12—Electric Disc Stove

Fig. 12—Electric Cooktop

This disc stove was first made in single heat, but the later improved stoves of this same type are made in three-heat style.

This disc stove was initially made with a single heat setting, but the later versions of this type have been designed with three heat settings.

Many improvements have been made on the disc stoves and they are sold not only as single, but as double or twin, and triple discs.

Many improvements have been made to disc stoves, and they are available not only as singles but also as doubles or twins, and triples.

One often finds it inconvenient, when traveling, to obtain hot water whenever needed. The light four-inch disc stove has proved to be a very desirable possession in cases of this kind. Its size makes it very convenient to pack in trunk or grip, and since it operates from any light socket, it is very handy, not only for the traveler and in the kitchen, but is a boon to many a bachelor man or maid.

One often finds it annoying when traveling to get hot water whenever needed. The small four-inch disc stove has proven to be a really useful item in situations like this. Its size makes it easy to pack in a suitcase or bag, and since it works with any light socket, it's super handy—not just for travelers and in the kitchen but also a great help for many single men and women.

Perhaps, before going further, it is well to explain the meaning of single and three-heat. Let us suppose that you are operating one of the small disc stoves and that the stove will carry 600 watts of current. If that stove is equipped with a single heat, you will be using the full 600 watts whenever the switch is on. If it is equipped with a three-heat switch, it can be adjusted to 600 watts at full, 300 at medium and 150 at low, which means a great saving in current for most small cooking operations.

Perhaps, before moving on, it’s important to clarify what single and three-heat mean. Let’s say you’re using one of those small disc stoves that uses 600 watts of power. If the stove has a single heat setting, it will consume the full 600 watts whenever it's turned on. If it has a three-heat switch, you can adjust it to 600 watts on high, 300 watts on medium, and 150 watts on low, which allows for significant energy savings for most small cooking tasks.

Two Distinct Types of Heating Elements.

There are two very distinct types of electric heating elements or burners, the disc or closed type, and the open-coil type. These two types operate on entirely different principles. The disc stove conveys the heat to the food by the principle of conduction, i. e., the heated metal top of the stove in turn conducts the heat to the metal of the dish and thereby heats the food within the dish.

There are two very different types of electric heating elements or burners: the disc or closed type, and the open-coil type. These two types work on completely different principles. The disc stove transfers heat to the food through conduction; that is, the heated metal surface of the stove conducts heat to the metal of the dish, which then heats the food inside the dish.

The open-coil type of element operates on the principle of radiant heat. The heat rays from the element are focused on the dish in which the food is being prepared. In the former style burner, sufficient time is required to heat the metal top of the stove before the heat can be utilized, while in the latter, the heat is almost instantaneously effective. Below the coils of the radiant type of grills and heaters shown in this section is placed a highly polished, nickeled disc which serves to reflect all the heat units that are directed downward, back to the dish in which the food is being prepared, thereby utilizing a maximum of the heat units produced.

The open-coil element works on the principle of radiant heat. The heat rays from the element are directed towards the dish where the food is being cooked. With the old-style burner, it takes a significant amount of time to heat the metal surface of the stove before the heat can be used, while the newer models provide heat almost instantly. Below the coils of the radiant grills and heaters shown in this section is a highly polished, nickel-coated disc that reflects all the heat directed downward back to the dish, maximizing the heat produced.

One very distinct advantage in the open-coil over the disc type is that in the former practically all the utensils found in the average home can be satisfactorily used, granite and enamel-ware being especially desirable, while in the disc-type stoves, it is necessary to have dishes with smooth, clean bottoms and that they fit very closely in order to make metallic contact over the entire surface.

One clear advantage of the open-coil type over the disc type is that with the former, almost all the cookware found in a typical home can be used effectively, with granite and enamel cookware being particularly preferred. In contrast, with disc-type stoves, it's crucial to have pots and pans with smooth, clean bottoms that fit closely in order to make proper metal contact across the entire surface.

Rectangular grill

Fig. 13.—Electric Rectangular Grill

Fig. 13.—Electric Rectangle Grill

Round grill

Fig. 14.—Electric Three-heat Grill

Fig. 14.—Electric Three-heat Grill

Round stove

Fig. 15.—Electric Radiant Stove

Fig. 15.—Electric Radiant Stove

The lightness, convenience, and general utility of the small open-coil stove has been responsible for a number of designs being manufactured and sold in enormous[209] quantities, these being made up not only as stoves, but as grills. The accompanying illustration (Fig. 13) is of a rectangular grill, made of pressed steel and highly polished, designed to operate from any electric light socket. The heating element is of the open-coil reflector type and is so placed in the frame that cooking can be done both above and below the glowing coils at the same time. This is a convenience and economy, as one is able to cook two dishes of food at the cost of one. This particular grill is furnished with three dishes, any one of which can be used either above or below the coils. When cooking above the coils only is desired, the small flat pan is placed in a groove below the coils to reflect to the cooking operation any heat that would be thrown downward from the heating element. The shallow pan also serves as a cover for either of the deeper dishes or for a hot-cake griddle.

The lightweight, convenient, and versatile small open-coil stove has led to many designs being produced and sold in large[209] quantities, not just as stoves, but also as grills. The illustration (Fig. 13) shows a rectangular grill made of pressed steel and highly polished, designed to plug into any electric light socket. The heating element uses an open-coil reflector type and is positioned in the frame so that cooking can happen both above and below the glowing coils at the same time. This is convenient and economical since you can cook two dishes simultaneously for the cost of one. This grill comes with three dishes, any of which can be used above or below the coils. When you want to cook only above the coils, the small flat pan is placed in a groove below the coils to reflect any heat that might otherwise go downward from the heating element. The shallow pan also acts as a cover for either of the deeper dishes or for a hot-cake griddle.

This radiant grill is light in weight, occupies a small space and is a most desirable appliance in the home, to be used in either the living room or dining room for the preparation of a light luncheon or afternoon tea service.

This stylish grill is lightweight, takes up minimal space, and is a desirable appliance for the home, perfect for use in the living room or dining room for making a light lunch or afternoon tea.

Of the same manufacture is the radiant grill shown in Fig. 14. This grill, you will note, is round, which particularly adapts it to the use of utensils ordinarily found in the kitchen of the average home. You will note that there are two dishes to this grill, a top dish with a broiling grid, to be used underneath the coils for broiling chops, and a shallower dish to be used above the coils[210] for frying operations. There is furnished also a reflector which is so designed that it serves equally well as a cover for either dish and makes a very choice griddle for baking hot cakes.

Of the same brand is the radiant grill shown in Fig. 14. This grill is round, which makes it perfect for using the utensils typically found in the kitchen of the average home. You’ll notice that there are two dishes for this grill: a top dish with a broiling grid, meant to be used underneath the coils for broiling chops, and a shallower dish to be used above the coils[210] for frying. There’s also a reflector included that works as a cover for either dish and serves as a great griddle for baking pancakes.

While this particular grill is furnished with a wattage providing for operation from a lamp-socket, it is of the three-heat style already spoken of as so desirable in appliances of this character. A companion grill to this is of the same design, excepting that it is furnished in single heat only and lists at a somewhat lower price.

While this grill comes with a wattage that allows it to be used with a lamp socket, it features the three-heat option that has already been mentioned as highly desirable in appliances like this. A similar grill is available with the same design, but it has a single heat setting and is priced a bit lower.

You will remember that in explaining the many advantages of the open-coil type of burner, it was stated as one of these that the housewife could use cooking utensils ordinarily found in the home, and because of this peculiar adaptability the round grills here spoken of and illustrated are having an exceedingly large sale. These open-coil grills are also very efficient as toasters, the bread being placed on top of the grating, which protects the coils from injury. Where only chops, toast, and coffee are to be had for breakfast, chops can be prepared below the coils, the toast above, while the coffee gurgle-gurgles in the percolator.

You’ll remember that when we talked about the many benefits of the open-coil burner, we mentioned that one major advantage is that home cooks can use the usual cooking utensils they have at home. Because of this unique flexibility, the round grills we discussed and illustrated are selling very well. These open-coil grills are also quite efficient as toasters; the bread is placed on top of the grating, which protects the coils from damage. When breakfast consists of just chops, toast, and coffee, you can cook the chops below the coils, toast above, while the coffee brews in the percolator.

Some people who have not felt any need of a grill have desired an open-coil stove, and of this same general type of manufacture there is the open-coil radiant stove herewith illustrated (Fig. 15). It is equipped with the same kind of a burner or element with a reflector underneath, and can be used very efficiently with ordinary cooking utensils and is also very serviceable as a toaster. Using this stove in combination with the ovenette, which will be illustrated further on, the owner is provided with a table range which meets most of the requirements in a small family.

Some people who haven't needed a grill have wanted an open-coil stove, and of this same general type there’s the open-coil radiant stove illustrated here (Fig. 15). It comes with the same kind of burner or element with a reflector underneath and works very efficiently with regular cooking pots. It's also quite handy as a toaster. When combined with the ovenette, which will be illustrated later, the owner has a table range that satisfies most needs for a small family.

Chafing dishes

Fig. 16.—Electric Chafing Dishes

Fig. 16.—Electric Serving Dishes

A line of cooking utensils would not be complete without suitable designs of chafing dishes, and these are made in several styles, both with and without heating elements, the latter being used on the disc and open-coil stoves already illustrated, while the former contains a heating element very much along the lines of the percolator. These are furnished, as you will note from the illustration (Fig. 16), with suitable cooking pans for the preparation of chafing-dish dainties.

A set of cooking tools wouldn't be complete without the right designs of chafing dishes, which come in various styles, some with heating elements and some without. The ones without heating elements are designed for use on the disc and open-coil stoves previously shown, while those with heating elements operate similarly to a percolator. As you can see in the illustration (Fig. 16), these come with appropriate cooking pans for making chafing-dish delicacies.

Small oven

Fig. 17.—Electric Lamp-Socket Oven

Fig. 17.—Electric Lamp-Socket Oven

Baking and Roasting.

It is only natural to suppose that manufacturers of electric stoves of both light and heavy duty should next turn their attention to ovens, since oven cooking is even primary to cooking that is done on open burners and is now coming to be even of more importance. The first oven herewith shown (Fig. 17) is of the lamp-socket type, equipped with three heats, providing a very efficient oven for small operations. The second one illustrated (Fig. 18) is of standard size and accommodates a quantity of food equal to that of any large range oven. It is provided with a heavy wattage and therefore requires special wiring.

It makes sense that manufacturers of both light and heavy-duty electric stoves would next focus on ovens, as oven cooking is essential and is becoming increasingly important. The first oven shown here (Fig. 17) uses a lamp-socket design and has three heat settings, making it a highly efficient option for small tasks. The second oven illustrated (Fig. 18) is a standard size and can hold as much food as any large range oven. It has a high wattage and needs special wiring.

Larger oven

Fig. 18.—Electric Standard Oven

Fig. 18.—Electric Standard Oven

To meet the requirements of the many families in which such a small amount of baking is done, and to cater particularly to apartment-house dwellers, the manufacturers[211] of the line of radiant stoves described and illustrated have brought forth a small cylindrical oven called the ovenette. This little oven fits either the radiant stove or the round radiant grill. It is made of pressed steel and finished in highly polished nickel. This ovenette, in combination with either the radiant stove or the round radiant grill, provides complete cooking equipment upon which an entire meal can be prepared, whether it be heating rolls and preparing crisp bacon or chops for breakfast, or baking a roast, a loaf cake or even bread for the dinner. It will bake pies, cake, biscuit, potatoes, roast meats, etc., up to its capacity, at a less current cost than is possible with the larger oven and in less time. This ovenette has what is called a middle ring, which makes it adjustable to two sizes when large or small quantities of food are to be prepared.

To meet the needs of the many families that do minimal baking, especially those living in apartments, the manufacturers[211] of the radiant stoves described and illustrated have introduced a small cylindrical oven called the ovenette. This compact oven can fit onto either the radiant stove or the round radiant grill. It's made from pressed steel and has a sleek, polished nickel finish. The ovenette, when paired with either the radiant stove or the round radiant grill, provides a full cooking setup where you can prepare an entire meal, whether it's heating rolls and cooking crispy bacon or chops for breakfast, or baking a roast, a loaf cake, or even bread for dinner. It can bake pies, cakes, biscuits, potatoes, roast meats, and more, up to its capacity, at a lower energy cost than larger ovens and in less time. This ovenette features a middle ring that allows it to adjust to two sizes, making it suitable for preparing both large and small quantities of food.

So you see, the woman of today who utilizes current furnished through the light socket, can bring to her command genii as wonderful as those at the command of Aladdin when he stroked the wonderful lamp. Her household duties are made easier. There is far less preparatory work and she is able to place her home on a much more efficient basis than with ordinary methods.

So, you see, the modern woman who uses appliances powered by electricity can summon incredible conveniences just like Aladdin did when he rubbed the magic lamp. Her household chores are simpler. There's much less prep work, and she can run her home much more efficiently than with traditional methods.

Aluminium comfo

Electric Aluminum Comfo

Electric Aluminum Comfort

The home electrical is not complete without containing at least some of the electrical appliances which have been designed for the purpose of alleviating pain. One of these is an electric heating pad made of steel units, so hinged as to make the appliance sufficiently flexible to be wrapped around an arm or limb and to conform to the curves of the body. The other is a pad made of aluminum which is concave on one side and convex on the other and may be used in a wet pack. Each of these heating pads is covered with a high-grade cover of eiderdown which provides a soft contact for the skin.

The home electrical setup isn’t complete without having some appliances designed to relieve pain. One of these is an electric heating pad made of steel components, hinged to be flexible enough to wrap around an arm or limb and to fit the body’s curves. The other is an aluminum pad that is concave on one side and convex on the other, which can be used for a wet pack. Each of these heating pads is covered with a high-quality eiderdown cover that provides a soft touch against the skin.

Flexible comfo

Electric Flexible Comfo (Metal)

Electric Flexible Comfort (Metal)

Perhaps next in importance along this line of electrical appliances is the small immersion heater shown in Fig. 19, and which requires so little space that it can be easily carried even in a woman’s handbag. This style of heater will quickly heat a glass of water by simply immersing the heater in the water. This device is very extensively used by mothers in heating milk for the baby, by men in heating water for shaving, and by doctors and dentists who require small quantities of hot water for sterilizing and other uses.

Perhaps next in importance among electrical appliances is the small immersion heater shown in Fig. 19, which takes up so little space that it can be easily carried even in a woman’s handbag. This type of heater quickly heats a glass of water by simply placing it in the water. This device is widely used by mothers to heat milk for their babies, by men for heating water for shaving, and by doctors and dentists who need small amounts of hot water for sterilizing and other purposes.

Immersion heating elements

Fig. 19.—Electric Immersion Heater

Fig. 19.—Electric Immersion Heater

One thing most desirable in connection with practically all of the lamp-socket appliances described and illustrated in this section is the very small cost of operation. Lighting companies have so reduced the cost of current within the last two or three[212] years that a breakfast may now be prepared electrically for not more than a couple of cents, while one of the pads may be used an entire night at a cost of less than one cent in soothing rheumatic pains or in driving away the chill for outdoor sleepers.

One thing that is highly desirable about almost all the lamp-socket devices described and shown in this section is their extremely low operating cost. Lighting companies have significantly lowered the cost of electricity in the last two or three[212] years, so it's now possible to prepare breakfast electrically for just a couple of cents. Additionally, one of the pads can be used all night for under a cent, providing relief from rheumatic pain or warming up outdoor sleepers.

Vacuum cleaner

Fig. 20.—Electric Vacuum Cleaner

Fig. 20.—Electric Vacuum Cleaner

But one of the hardest domestic tasks is that of keeping the house clean. To obviate the difficulties encountered in this connection and to make the home sanitary, electric vacuum cleaners are provided by several manufacturers, a very recent acceptable type being illustrated in Fig. 20. This type of vacuum cleaner, which is reasonable in price, is made of steel and finished in very highly polished nickel. It operates from any light socket and consumes but a very small amount of current, much less than is consumed by a toaster. It can also be purchased with different attachments with which curtains, radiators, clothes and walls may be cleaned. The possession in the home of one of these vacuum cleaners makes it unnecessary[213] to take up rugs, carpets, tear down curtains and go through the semi-annual worry, wear and tear of house cleaning. The vacuum cleaner will do it better and many times quicker without removing a single article of furniture or disturbing a rug or curtain; and instead of scattering the dust-laden germs in the air, to be drawn into the nostrils and lungs of the family, the cleaner sucks them up into a dust-tight bag from which they can be deposited on a paper and burned.

But one of the toughest household chores is keeping the house clean. To ease the challenges that come with this task and to make the home sanitary, several manufacturers offer electric vacuum cleaners, with a recently popular model illustrated in Fig. 20. This vacuum cleaner, which is reasonably priced, is made of steel and boasts a highly polished nickel finish. It plugs into any light socket and uses very little electricity, much less than a toaster. It can also be bought with various attachments for cleaning curtains, radiators, clothes, and walls. Having one of these vacuum cleaners at home makes it unnecessary[213] to pull up rugs, take down curtains, and deal with the stress and wear of semi-annual cleaning. The vacuum cleaner does the job better and often faster without moving any furniture or disturbing a rug or curtain; and instead of scattering dust-laden germs into the air to be inhaled by the family, it sucks them into a dust-tight bag that can be emptied onto paper and burned.

The evolution in cooking and heating appliances for the home in the last ten years has indeed been rapid, but it is very recently indeed that the housewife has been able to satisfy the longing and the desire that has kept getting stronger from day to day, since first she began to use electric cooking appliances. She has been dreaming of that which would make her kitchen a domestic-science laboratory, and her dream can come true because now she can purchase an electric range patterned in general style after the more acceptable gas or other fuel ranges, but infinitely more efficient.

The changes in cooking and heating appliances for homes over the last ten years have been swift, but it's only very recently that homemakers have been able to fulfill the growing desire they've felt since they first started using electric cooking appliances. They've envisioned a kitchen that resembles a domestic science lab, and now that dream can become a reality because they can buy an electric range designed in the same style as the more popular gas or other fuel ranges, but with far greater efficiency.

The ideal kitchen range

Fig. 21.—Electric Range

Fig. 21.—Electric Stove

The particular type of range herewith illustrated (Fig. 21) uses a burner of the open-coil type, both for the surface burners and for the oven. The ovens are highly insulated with a thick packing of best grade mineral wool, which reduces air leakage to a minimum and retains the heat generated for a long period. Many cooking operations which are performed in ordinary ovens with the burners on, can be prepared in this particular style of oven by using stored heat for the last half of the operation. The range is simplicity itself in operation. Each burner is operated by an indicating snap switch which has three separate heats, full, medium and low; medium being one-half of full and low one-half of medium. There are no matches; there is no danger from fire. There is no vitiated, foul air because of noxious gases from ordinary cooking stoves. There is no soot or grime, no ashes, no wood or coal to carry; there are fewer steps; there is less watching of the range; practically none at all, because when a burner is turned to medium, for instance, you know that you have a certain degree of heat for just as long as the switch is in that position. Results are eminently satisfactory and there is a sufficient saving in the weights and the nutritive value of foods cooked, especially in the oven, to make the electric range indeed a most desirable and economical addition to any home.

The specific type of range shown here (Fig. 21) features open-coil burners for both the surface and the oven. The ovens are well-insulated with high-quality mineral wool, minimizing air leakage and keeping heat trapped for a long time. Many cooking tasks typically done in conventional ovens with the burners running can be completed in this type of oven by utilizing stored heat for the last part of the cooking process. The range is incredibly easy to use. Each burner is controlled by a snap switch with three heat settings: full, medium, and low; medium is half of full and low is half of medium. There are no matches required; there's no fire hazard. There’s no bad air due to harmful gases from regular stoves. There's no soot or grime, no ashes, and no wood or coal to deal with; it involves fewer steps and less supervision—almost none, really—because when you set a burner to medium, you know you’ll maintain that heat level as long as the switch stays in that position. The results are highly satisfactory, and there's a significant saving in the weight and nutritional value of the foods cooked, especially in the oven, making the electric range a truly desirable and cost-effective addition to any home.

Today, the housewife, whether the provider of the home be a laborer or a merchant prince, can, with a simple touch of the button or a snap of the switch, bring to her immediate command, and subservient to her wishes, that subtle something which came in the snowflake, and which, while invisible, yet provides the greatest boon to mankind—electricity.

Today, whether the person in charge of the household is a worker or a wealthy business owner, a housewife can, with just the push of a button or the flip of a switch, instantly access and harness that invisible yet vital force that came with the snowflake—electricity—making it serve her needs.


Why is there Always a Soft Spot in a Cocoanut Shell?

A cocoanut shell always has a soft spot at one end because this is the provision nature has made to allow the embryo of the future tree to push its way out of the hard shell.

A coconut shell always has a soft spot at one end because this is how nature allows the future tree's embryo to break through the hard shell.

Cocoanuts, as most of us know, have a thick, hard shell, with three black scars at one end. The soft scar may easily be pierced with a pin; the others are as hard as the rest of the shell. Outside of this hard shell we are accustomed to seeing another covering of considerable thickness, of an extremely fibrous substance. When cocoanuts are picked, however, they have still another covering-an outer rind which has a smooth surface.

Coconuts, as most of us know, have a thick, hard shell with three black marks at one end. The soft mark can easily be pierced with a pin; the others are as tough as the rest of the shell. Outside of this hard shell, we usually see another layer that is quite thick and made of a very fibrous material. However, when coconuts are picked, they have yet another layer—an outer rind that has a smooth surface.

The tree which produces the cocoanut is a palm, from sixty to a hundred feet high. The trunk is straight and naked, and surmounted by a crown of feather-like leaves. The nuts hang from the summit of the tree in clusters of a dozen or more together.

The tree that produces coconuts is a palm, standing sixty to a hundred feet tall. The trunk is straight and bare, topped with a crown of feathery leaves. The nuts grow in clusters of a dozen or more at the top of the tree.

Food, clothing and the means of shelter and protection are all afforded by the cocoanut tree. The kernels are used as food in a number of different forms, and when pressed, they yield an oil which is largely used in candle making and in the manufacture of soaps. When they are dried before the oil is pressed out they are known as “copra.”

Food, clothing, and the means for shelter and protection come from the coconut tree. The kernels can be eaten in various forms, and when pressed, they produce an oil that is mainly used for making candles and soaps. When dried before the oil is extracted, they are called “copra.”

We have given the name “milk” to the sweet and watery liquid, of a whitish color, which is inclosed in considerable quantity in the kernel.

We call the sweet, watery liquid that fills the kernel "milk," and it has a whitish color.

By boring the tree itself, a white, sweetish liquid called “toddy” exudes from the wound. This yields one of the varieties of the spirit called “arack” when distilled. A kind of a sugar called “jaggery” is also obtained from the cocoanut juice.

By boring into the tree itself, a white, sweet liquid called “toddy” seeps from the wound. This can be distilled into one of the types of the spirit known as “arack.” A type of sugar called “jaggery” can also be extracted from the coconut juice.

The fibrous coat of the nut is made into a preparation called “cellulose,” which is described in another story in this book, and also into the well-known cocoanut matting. The coarse yarn obtained from it is called “coir,” and it is also used for cordage. The hard shell of the nut is polished and made into cups and other domestic utensils. The fronds are wrought into baskets, brooms, mats, sacks and many other useful articles; and the trunks are made into boats, and furnish timber for the construction of houses. Altogether the cocoanut palm will be seen to be a very useful member of the plant kingdom.

The fibrous outer layer of the nut is turned into a product called "cellulose," which is explained in another section of this book, and also into the popular coconut matting. The thick yarn obtained from it is known as "coir," and it’s used for making ropes. The hard shell of the nut is polished and crafted into cups and other household items. The fronds are woven into baskets, brooms, mats, sacks, and many other practical things; the trunks are made into boats and provide wood for building houses. Overall, the coconut palm is clearly a very valuable member of the plant kingdom.

How does a Gasoline Motor Run an Electric Street Car?

A gasoline-electric railroad train was introduced in Germany in 1913. It comprises a power car and ten other cars, each of a five-ton capacity, which trail along behind. The power car carries two gasoline engines of a hundred and twenty-five horse-power each which drive a dynamo installed in the center. The current is transmitted to the electric motors, actuating each of the wheels of the power car and the trailers. The General Electric Company has perfected a similar car for use on the suburban branches of street railroads in this country. Most of them are equipped with a two hundred horse-power gasoline engine directly connected to a dynamo from which power is generated and transmitted to the motors, which are located on the car axles. Cars of this type can be made of a larger seating capacity than is customary and can easily attain a speed of a mile a minute.

A gasoline-electric train was introduced in Germany in 1913. It consists of a power car and ten other cars, each with a capacity of five tons, that follow behind. The power car has two gasoline engines with one hundred and twenty-five horsepower each, which drive a dynamo installed in the center. The electricity generated is sent to electric motors, powering each wheel of both the power car and the trailers. The General Electric Company has developed a similar car for use on suburban streetcar lines in this country. Most are equipped with a two hundred horsepower gasoline engine directly connected to a dynamo that generates and transmits power to the motors located on the car axles. Cars of this type can have a larger seating capacity than usual and can easily reach a speed of a mile a minute.

Gasoline engines offer great advantages over steam because of the absence of boilers, coal and ashes, and a much higher efficiency is obtainable, a consumption of one pint of gasoline per horse-power hour being good practice for well-designed motor engines and a total efficiency of from ten to thirty-five per cent of the energy in the fuel being available, as against one to twenty per cent for steam averages. The utilization of the gasoline engine to generate electric power for surface cars, in instances where it is not practical to transmit energy from power stations, presents wonderful possibilities.

Gasoline engines have significant advantages over steam engines because they don't require boilers, coal, or produce ashes. They also achieve much higher efficiency, with one pint of gasoline per horsepower hour being standard for well-designed motors. Total efficiency can reach between ten to thirty-five percent of the energy in the fuel, compared to just one to twenty percent for steam engines. Using gasoline engines to generate electric power for surface cars where transmitting energy from power stations isn't feasible offers amazing possibilities.

San Francisco gasoline-electric railway car

A Suburban Railway Car of the Gasoline-Electric Type

A Suburban Train Car Powered by Gas and Electricity

How do “Carrier Pigeons” Carry Messages?

The real carrier pigeon is a large bird with long wings, a large tuberculated mass of naked skin at the base of the beak, and a circle of naked skin round the eyes, but the variety generally employed to carry messages more resembles an ordinary pigeon.

The true carrier pigeon is a big bird with long wings, a prominent rough patch of bare skin at the base of its beak, and a ring of bare skin around its eyes, but the type usually used to send messages looks more like an average pigeon.

The practice of sending letters by pigeons belongs originally to Eastern countries, though in other countries it has often been adopted, more especially before the invention of the electric telegraph. An actual post-system in which pigeons were the messengers was established at Bagdad by the Sultan Nureddin Mahmud, who died in 1174, and lasted till 1258, when Bagdad fell into the hands of the Mongols and was destroyed by them.

The practice of sending letters by pigeons originally comes from Eastern countries, although it was often adopted in other areas, especially before the invention of the electric telegraph. A real postal system using pigeons as messengers was set up in Bagdad by Sultan Nureddin Mahmud, who died in 1174, and it continued until 1258, when Bagdad was taken over and destroyed by the Mongols.

These birds can be utilized in this way only in virtue of what is called their “homing” faculty or instinct, which enables them to find their way back home from surprising distances. But if they are taken to the place from which the message is to be sent and kept there too long, say over a fortnight, they will forget their home and not return to it. They are tried first with short distances, which are then gradually increased. The missive may be fastened to the wing or the tail, and must be quite small and attached so as not to interfere with the bird’s flight.

These birds can only be used this way because of their “homing” ability, which allows them to find their way back home from surprising distances. However, if they are taken to the location where the message is meant to be sent and kept there for too long, like over two weeks, they will forget their home and won’t return. They start with short distances, which are then gradually increased. The message can be attached to the wing or the tail and has to be small enough not to interfere with the bird’s flight.

By the use of microphotography a long message may be conveyed in this way, and such were received by the besieged residents in Paris during the Franco-Prussian War of 1870-71 the birds being conveyed out of the city in balloons.

By using microphotography, a long message can be sent in this way, and such messages were received by the trapped residents in Paris during the Franco-Prussian War of 1870-71, with the messages being carried out of the city in balloons.

Seventy-two miles in two and one-half hours, a hundred and eighty in four and one-half, have been accomplished by carrier pigeons. Large numbers of these birds are now kept in England, Belgium, France, etc., there being numerous pigeon clubs which hold pigeon races to test the speed of the birds. These pigeons are also kept in several European countries for military purposes.

Seventy-two miles in two and a half hours, and a hundred and eighty in four and a half, have been achieved by carrier pigeons. Many of these birds are currently kept in England, Belgium, France, and other places, with numerous pigeon clubs organizing races to measure the birds' speed. These pigeons are also maintained in several European countries for military purposes.

What Family has Over 9,000,000 Members?

Each female cod has more than 9,000,000 eggs, but the numbers are kept down by a host of enemies.

Each female cod has over 9,000,000 eggs, but that number is reduced by many predators.

The most interesting species is the “Common” or “Bank Cod.” Though they are found plentifully on the coasts of other northern regions, such as Britain, Scandinavia and Iceland, a stretch of sea near the coast of Newfoundland is the favorite annual resort of countless multitudes of cod, which visit the “Grand Banks” to feed upon the molluscous animals abundant there, and thus attract fleets of fishermen.

The most interesting species is the “Common” or “Bank Cod.” While they are widely found along the coasts of other northern areas like Britain, Scandinavia, and Iceland, a section of ocean near the coast of Newfoundland is the preferred annual destination for countless cod, which come to the “Grand Banks” to feed on the abundant mollusks there, drawing in fleets of fishermen.

The spawning season on the banks of Newfoundland begins about the month of March and terminates in June; but the regular period of fishing does not commence before April, on account of the storms, ice and fogs. The season lasts till the end of June, when the cod commence their migrations.

The spawning season along the shores of Newfoundland starts around March and ends in June; however, the official fishing period doesn't kick off until April due to storms, ice, and fog. The season continues until the end of June, when the cod begin their migrations.

The average length of the common cod is about two and one-half or three feet, and the weight between thirty and fifty pounds, though sometimes cod are caught weighing three times as much. The color is a yellowish gray on the back, spotted with yellow and brown; the belly white or red, with golden spots in young specimens.

The average length of a common cod is about two and a half to three feet, and it weighs between thirty and fifty pounds, although some cod can be caught that weigh up to three times that amount. The color is a yellowish gray on the back, spotted with yellow and brown; the belly is white or red, with golden spots in younger specimens.

Few members of the animal creation are more universally serviceable to man than the codfish. Both in its fresh state and when salted and dried, it is a substantial and wholesome article of food. The tongue is considered a delicacy. The swimming-bladders or “sounds,” besides being highly nutritious, supply, if rightly prepared, isinglass equal to the best of that which is brought from Russia. The oil, which is extracted from the liver, is of great medicinal value, and contributes considerably to the high economic value of the cod.

Few members of the animal kingdom are more universally useful to humans than the codfish. Both when fresh and when salted and dried, it's a substantial and healthy food option. The tongue is regarded as a delicacy. The swimming bladders, or “sounds,” aside from being very nutritious, can be prepared to produce isinglass that's as good as the best from Russia. The oil extracted from the liver is highly medicinal and significantly adds to the cod's economic value.

The finest and palest oil is made from fresh and carefully cleaned liver, the oil being extracted either in the cold or by a gentle heat. Only the pale oils are used in medicine; the dark oils are too rank and acrid, and they are only used in dressing leather.

The best and lightest oil is made from fresh, thoroughly cleaned liver, using either cold extraction or gentle heat. Only the light oils are used in medicine; the dark oils are too strong and harsh, and they’re only used for treating leather.


The Story in the Telephone[14]

On March 10, 1876, Alexander Graham Bell, standing in a little attic at No. 5 Exeter Place, Boston, sent through his crude telephone the first spoken words ever carried over a wire, and the words were heard and understood by his associate, Thomas A. Watson, who was at the receiver in an adjacent room. On that day the telephone was born, and the first message went over the only telephone line in the world—a line less than a hundred feet long. On January 25, 1915, less than forty years later, this same Alexander Graham Bell, in New York, talked to this same Thomas A. Watson, in San Francisco, over a wire stretching 3,400 miles across the continent.

On March 10, 1876, Alexander Graham Bell was in a small attic at No. 5 Exeter Place, Boston, when he sent the first spoken words ever transmitted over a wire through his basic telephone. His associate, Thomas A. Watson, heard and understood these words from the receiver in a nearby room. That day marked the birth of the telephone, with the first message traveling over the world's only telephone line, which was less than a hundred feet long. Less than forty years later, on January 25, 1915, the same Alexander Graham Bell, in New York, spoke to the same Thomas A. Watson, in San Francisco, over a wire that spanned 3,400 miles across the continent.

Dr. Bell and associates under Queen Victoria's portrait

Dr. Alexander Graham Bell at the Opening of the Transcontinental Line

Dr. Alexander Graham Bell at the Launch of the Transcontinental Line

In front of Dr. Bell is the replica of his original telephone, and to his left is the glass case containing a piece of the wire over which Dr. Bell and Mr. Watson carried on the first telephone conversation in the world.

In front of Dr. Bell is the replica of his original telephone, and to his left is the glass case containing a piece of the wire over which Dr. Bell and Mr. Watson had the first telephone conversation in the world.

In that memorable year of 1876, Dom Pedro, Emperor of Brazil, while visiting the Philadelphia Centennial, was attracted to Bell’s modest telephone exhibit, picked up the receiver, listened as Professor Bell talked at the other end of the room, and, amazed at the wonder of the thing, cried out, “My God—it speaks![218]” From that time, the first telephone exhibit became the center of attraction at the exposition. Had Dom Pedro lived to see the Panama-Pacific Exposition he might have listened to Professor Bell talking not merely from the other end of a room, but from the other side of a continent.

In the memorable year of 1876, Dom Pedro, the Emperor of Brazil, was visiting the Philadelphia Centennial when he was drawn to Bell’s simple telephone display. He picked up the receiver and listened as Professor Bell spoke from the other end of the room, and, amazed by the wonder of it, exclaimed, “My God—it speaks!”[218] From that moment, the first telephone exhibit became the main attraction at the exposition. If Dom Pedro had lived to see the Panama-Pacific Exposition, he might have listened to Professor Bell talking not just from the other end of a room, but from the other side of a continent.

Some idea of the rapid growth of the telephone business in the United States may be gathered from the statistician’s figures, which show that in 1880 there were less than 100,000 telephones in use in this country, and in 1915 there were more than 9,000,000 telephones in the Bell System alone. Of the 14,000,000 telephones in the world, 10,000,000 are in this country. Sixty-five per cent of all the telephones in the world are in this country, although it has only five and five-tenths per cent of the world’s population. The Bell System alone reaches 70,000 places, 5,000 more than the number of post-offices and 10,000 more than the number of railroad stations.

Some idea of the rapid growth of the telephone business in the United States can be seen from the statistics, which show that in 1880 there were fewer than 100,000 telephones in use in the country, and by 1915 there were over 9,000,000 telephones in the Bell System alone. Out of the 14,000,000 telephones worldwide, 10,000,000 are in the U.S. Sixty-five percent of all the telephones in the world are located in this country, even though it has only about 5.5 percent of the world's population. The Bell System alone serves 70,000 locations, which is 5,000 more than the number of post offices and 10,000 more than the number of railroad stations.

Early telephone exchange

Central Telephone Exchange, New York City, 1880

Central Telephone Exchange, New York City, 1880

The telephone wire mileage in the United States is over 22,000,000 miles. In the Bell System there are over 18,000,000 miles of wire which carry over 26,000,000 telephone talks daily—or nearly 9,000,000,000 per year.

The telephone wire mileage in the United States is over 22,000,000 miles. In the Bell System, there are over 18,000,000 miles of wire that handle more than 26,000,000 phone calls every day—or almost 9,000,000,000 each year.

Essential Factor in American Life.

Such broad use is made of the telephone service of America that the progress in telephony is an essential factor in all American progress.

The telephone service in America is used so widely that advancements in telephony are a crucial part of all American progress.

A visiting Englishman envying the light, airy accommodations in the tall office buildings in American cities, has sagely said that the skyscraper would be impossible without the adequate telephone service which is here provided.

A visiting Englishman, envious of the bright, spacious rooms in the tall office buildings of American cities, wisely remarked that skyscrapers would be unfeasible without the reliable telephone service available here.

In the housing of the people the telephone is a pioneering agent for better conditions. In the cities telephone service is indispensable in apartment houses and hotels which raise people above the noise and dust of the street. In the suburbs the telephone and the trolley make the waste places desirable homes, and although a man may walk some distance to reach some transportation line, the telephone must enter his own dwelling place before he is content to live there.

In people's homes, the telephone is a groundbreaking tool for improving living conditions. In cities, phone service is essential in apartment buildings and hotels that keep residents above the street noise and dust. In the suburbs, the telephone and public transit make previously undesirable areas attractive places to live. Even if someone has to walk a bit to get to a transport line, having a telephone in their home is a must for their satisfaction with living there.

Modern telephone exchange

A Typical Operating Room in an American City, with the most Modern Bell Switchboard

A Typical Operating Room in an American City, Featuring the Latest Bell Switchboard

This desirable decentralization of the population in which the telephone has been so important a factor extends beyond the suburbs to the rural districts, and the American farmer with his wife and family is blessed by facilities for communication unknown in any other part of the world. The fact that the farms and ranches in this country, and especially in the west, have been of comparatively large area, has had a tendency to make American farm life particularly lonely. It is safe to say that nothing has done more to relieve this loneliness and prevent the drift from the farms to the cities, than the widespread establishment of rural telephone service.

This desirable decentralization of the population, in which the telephone has played such an important role, extends beyond the suburbs to rural areas. The American farmer, along with his wife and family, benefits from communication facilities that are unmatched anywhere else in the world. The fact that farms and ranches in this country, especially in the west, tend to be quite large has often made American farm life feel particularly lonely. It's fair to say that nothing has done more to ease this loneliness and stop the movement from farms to cities than the widespread availability of rural telephone service.

The telephone development of the United States is not confined to the large centers of population, but is well distributed, the large number of farm telephones in this country being in strong contrast to the small number of farm telephones in European countries.

The development of telephones in the United States isn't limited to big cities; it's spread across the country. The high number of farm telephones here stands in sharp contrast to the low number of farm telephones in European countries.

It is obvious that the ordinary methods of commerce and manufacture would have to be radically made over if the telephone service should lose any of its present efficiency or if it should fail to advance so as to meet the constantly increasing demands made upon it. With the first day of telephone congestion ordinary business would come to a standstill, and when an adjustment was made, everybody would find himself slowed down, doing less work in longer hours and at greater expense, and being unable to take advantage of opportunities for advancement which he had come to consider an inalienable right.

It’s clear that the typical ways of doing business and manufacturing would need a complete overhaul if the telephone service were to lose any of its current efficiency or if it couldn’t keep up with the ever-growing demands placed on it. As soon as telephone lines get congested, regular business would grind to a halt, and when things were finally sorted out, everyone would be working slower, accomplishing less in longer hours, spending more, and missing out on opportunities for advancement that they had come to see as an undeniable right.

Not only would methods be changed, but the physical structure of business, especially in cities, would be completely metamorphosed. The top floors of office buildings and hotels would be immediately less desirable. In tall buildings the multitude of messengers and the frequent passing in and out would demand the increase in elevator facilities and even the enlargement of halls and doorways. Many of the narrower streets would be impassable. Factories and warehouses now located in the open country where land is cheap and the natural conditions of working and living are most favorable, would be relocated in cities as close as possible to their administrative and merchandising headquarters.

Not only would methods change, but the physical layout of businesses, especially in cities, would be completely transformed. The upper floors of office buildings and hotels would become less desirable. In tall buildings, the large number of messengers and the constant coming and going would require more elevators and even wider halls and doorways. Many of the narrower streets would become impassable. Factories and warehouses currently situated in the outskirts, where land is inexpensive and living and working conditions are best, would move to cities as close as possible to their administrative and retail offices.

It would be hard to find a line of business where progress would not be seriously retarded by an impairment of the present telephone efficiency.

It would be difficult to find a field of business where progress would not be significantly hindered by a decline in current telephone efficiency.

America Leads in Telephone Growth.

It is a far cry from Bell’s first telephone to Universal Service.

It’s a long way from Bell’s first telephone to Universal Service.

Bell’s invention had demonstrated the practicability of speech transmission, but there were many obstacles to overcome and many problems to be solved before the telephone could be of commercial value and take its place among the great public utilities.

Bell’s invention had shown that speech could be transmitted, but there were still many hurdles to clear and issues to address before the telephone could be commercially viable and join the ranks of major public utilities.

Professor Bell had demonstrated that two people could talk to each other from connected telephones for a considerable distance. In order to be of commercial value, it was necessary to establish an intercommunicating system in which each telephone could be connected with every other telephone in the system. This has been accomplished through the invention of the multiple switchboard and a great number of inventions and improvements in all the apparatus used in the transmission of speech.

Professor Bell had shown that two people could talk to each other over connected telephones from a long distance. To make it commercially viable, it was important to set up a communication system where each telephone could connect with every other phone in the network. This was achieved through the invention of the multiple switchboard, along with many other inventions and enhancements in all the equipment used for transmitting speech.

But it was an unexplored field into which the telephone pioneers so courageously plunged. There were no beaten paths, and the way was beset with unknown perils; there was no experience to guide. A vast amount of educational work had to be done before a skeptical public would accept the telephone at its true value, yet courage and persistency triumphed. Discoveries and inventions followed scarcely less important than Professor Bell’s original discovery.

But it was an uncharted territory that the telephone pioneers bravely dove into. There were no established routes, and the journey was filled with unknown dangers; there was no experience to rely on. A significant amount of educational work needed to be done before a doubtful public would see the telephone for what it was worth, yet courage and persistence prevailed. Discoveries and inventions followed that were nearly as important as Professor Bell’s original breakthrough.

A Typical American Central Office Building, Showing the Efficient Arrangement of the Various Departments

A Typical American Central Office Building, Displaying the Efficient Arrangement of Various Departments

That the United States has from the beginning far outstripped the rest of the civilized world in the growth of the telephone is shown by comparison.

That the United States has consistently outpaced the rest of the civilized world in telephone growth from the very beginning is evident when making a comparison.

In all Great Britain there are but 700,000 telephones as against 10,000,000 in the United States. France has slightly more than half as many as Greater New York. In Germany the telephone development is only one-fifth of that of the United States. Italy has not as many telephones as San Francisco, and all Russia, fewer than Chicago. Sweden, Norway and Denmark show a higher telephone development than the other European countries, but even in Denmark, where the telephone development is highest, we find but 3.9 telephones per hundred population—less than half the development in the United States.

In all of Great Britain, there are only 700,000 telephones compared to 10,000,000 in the United States. France has just over half as many as Greater New York. In Germany, telephone usage is only one-fifth of that in the United States. Italy has fewer telephones than San Francisco, and all of Russia has fewer than Chicago. Sweden, Norway, and Denmark have a higher rate of telephone usage than other European countries, but even in Denmark, where it's the highest, there are only 3.9 telephones per hundred people—less than half the rate in the United States.

The total number of telephones in all other European countries is considerably less than may be found in two American cities, Chicago and Philadelphia; all of South America has less than Boston, and the remainder of the world, including Asia, Africa and Oceanica, has less than the City of New York.

The total number of telephones in all other European countries is significantly lower than what's found in just two American cities, Chicago and Philadelphia; all of South America has fewer than Boston, and the rest of the world, including Asia, Africa, and Oceania, has fewer than New York City.

Italian telephone pole American telephone pole
Pole Line Running Through Main Street in an Italian Town A Typical Example of American Pole Line Construction

American Telephone Practice Superior.

The superior telephone development in America is largely due to the efficiency of American telephone equipment and practice. The mechanical development has not only kept pace with public needs, but has anticipated them.

The advanced telephone technology in America is mainly because of the effectiveness of American telephone equipment and practices. The mechanical development has not only matched public needs but has also anticipated them.

It is the practice of the Bell System, for example, to make what are called “fundamental development plans,” in which a forecast is made of the telephone requirements of each American city twenty years ahead. The construction in each city is begun with these ultimate requirements in view. Underground conduits are built, central offices located and cables provided with an eye to the future, and if these plans are carried out important economies are obtained. If the plans are abandoned, the loss may be very great. Furthermore, there are sure to be times when the service will be interrupted and seriously impaired if such plans for the future are not made and consistently carried out.

It’s standard practice for the Bell System to create what are known as “fundamental development plans,” which forecast the telephone needs of each American city twenty years into the future. Construction in each city starts with these long-term needs in mind. They build underground conduits, locate central offices, and lay cables with future demands in consideration, and if these plans are executed, significant savings can be achieved. If the plans are discarded, the financial loss can be substantial. Additionally, there will inevitably be times when service is disrupted and severely affected if future plans are not made and consistently followed through.

Erecting telephone pole with motor-truck derrick French desk telephone
American Method of Raising Poles by Derrick with Power Provided by Motor-Truck. One of the Different Types of Desk Telephones Used in France
American telephone Tile conduits for underground cables
The Standard American Desk Phone Tile Conduits Used in American Underground Construction

It is characteristic of the best telephone management that while it cannot always perfectly forecast the direction of immediate growth, it should be built far enough ahead of present requirements to have a pair of wires ready for each new customer. The fact that New York and other large American cities have a considerable investment in telephone plant constructed to meet a prospective demand, is the price which must be paid by any telephone management which really supplies the wants of the American people. Every additional subscriber that is connected with the system, requires sooner or later an outlay of new capital for his proportionate share of the whole plant, including equipment, wires, poles, cables, switchboards and real estate. In America the new subscriber finds his need anticipated and the facilities provided.

It’s typical of the best telephone management that, while it can't always perfectly predict immediate growth, it should be planned far enough in advance to have extra lines ready for each new customer. The fact that New York and other large American cities have made significant investments in telephone infrastructure to meet expected demand is the cost that any telephone management must bear to truly meet the needs of the American people. Every new subscriber added to the system will eventually require additional capital for their fair share of the entire infrastructure, which includes equipment, lines, poles, cables, switchboards, and real estate. In America, new subscribers find their needs anticipated, with the necessary facilities already in place.

American hotel switchboard

This Private Switchboard, in one American Hotel, is Larger than Many a Switchboard Abroad, which Serves a Whole City

This private switchboard, in one American hotel, is bigger than many switchboards overseas that serve an entire city.

It is characteristic of private management that plans can be made for the future with reasonable assurance that the necessary funds will not be arbitrarily withheld, or that the work of the past will not be ruthlessly cast aside.

It’s typical of private management that plans can be created for the future with a good level of confidence that the needed funds won’t be randomly withheld, or that the efforts from the past won’t be brutally discarded.

Another factor of telephone service in America is promptness. Local connections are made in a few seconds. In the case of interurban and long-distance calls, to prevent the long waiting for a turn, which abroad sometimes is a matter of hours,[225] the American engineer provides enough long-distance trunks, so that, except in cases of accident, customers at the busiest times of the day are connected with distant points without delay.

Another important aspect of telephone service in America is speed. Local calls are connected in a matter of seconds. For interurban and long-distance calls, to avoid the long wait times that can sometimes last for hours in other countries,[225] American engineers ensure there are enough long-distance lines available, so that, except in cases of emergencies, customers during peak times are connected to distant locations without any delays.

The First Transcontinental Line.

The opening of the first transcontinental line between New York and San Francisco on January 25, 1915, was an epoch-making event in telephone history. The line is 3,400 miles long. It crosses thirteen states; it is carried on 130,000 poles. Four hard-drawn copper wires, .165 of an inch in diameter, run side by side over the entire distance, establishing two physical and one phantom circuit. The ordinary telephone connection consists of two wires technically called a telephone circuit, each wire constituting one “side” of the circuit. A phantom circuit is a circuit superimposed on two ordinary circuits by so connecting the two wires or “sides” of each ordinary circuit that they can be used as one side of the phantom circuit. In this way three practical talking circuits can be obtained from four wires. One mile of single wire used in the transcontinental line weighs 435 pounds, the weight of the wires in the entire line being 5,920,000 pounds, or 2,960 tons.

The launch of the first transcontinental line between New York and San Francisco on January 25, 1915, was a groundbreaking moment in telephone history. The line spans 3,400 miles, crossing thirteen states and supported by 130,000 poles. Four hard-drawn copper wires, each .165 of an inch in diameter, run parallel over the entire distance, creating two physical circuits and one phantom circuit. An ordinary telephone connection consists of two wires, which are technically called a telephone circuit, with each wire representing one “side” of the circuit. A phantom circuit is an additional circuit layered over two regular circuits by connecting the two wires or “sides” of each regular circuit in a way that allows them to also function as one side of the phantom circuit. This setup allows for three practical talking circuits to be created from four wires. A mile of single wire used in the transcontinental line weighs 435 pounds, making the total weight of the wires throughout the entire line 5,920,000 pounds, or 2,960 tons.

Mules hauling poles through difficult terrain

This Picture Shows the Difficulties Encountered in Hauling Poles in a Mountainous Section Along the Transcontinental Line of the Bell System

This picture shows the difficulties encountered when moving poles through a mountainous region along the Transcontinental Line of the Bell System.

In addition to the transmission wires, each circuit uses some 13,600 miles of fine hair-like insulated wire .004 of an inch in diameter in its loading coils.

In addition to the transmission wires, each circuit uses about 13,600 miles of fine, hair-thin insulated wire that is .004 of an inch in diameter in its loading coils.

It was, perhaps, little more difficult to string wires from Denver to San Francisco than from New York to Denver, but the actual construction of the line was the least of the telephone engineer’s troubles. His real problem was to make the line “talk,” to send something 3,000 miles with a breath as the motive power. In effect, the voyage of the voice across the continent is instantaneous; if its speed[226] should be accurately measured, a fifteenth of a second would probably be nearly exact. In other words, a message flying across the continent on the new transcontinental line, travels, not at the rate of 1,160 feet per second, which is the old stagecoach speed of sound, but at 56,000 miles per second. If it were possible for sound to carry that far, a “Hello” uttered in New York and traveling through the air without the aid of wires and electricity would not reach San Francisco until four hours later. The telephone not only transmits speech, but transmits it thousands of times faster than its own natural speed.

It was probably not much harder to run wires from Denver to San Francisco than from New York to Denver, but actually building the line was the least of the telephone engineer’s challenges. His main issue was making the line “talk,” to send something 3,000 miles powered only by a breath. Essentially, the journey of the voice across the continent is instantaneous; if you could accurately measure its speed[226], it would probably take about a fifteenth of a second. In other words, a message zipping across the continent on the new transcontinental line travels not at the old stagecoach speed of sound of 1,160 feet per second, but at 56,000 miles per second. If sound could travel that far, a “Hello” spoken in New York and traveling through the air without wires and electricity would reach San Francisco four hours later. The telephone not only carries speech but does so thousands of times faster than its own natural speed.

But while the telephone is breaking speech records, it must also guarantee safe delivery of these millions of little passengers it carries every few minutes in the way of sound waves created at the rate of 2,100 a second. There must be no jostling or crowding. These tiny waves, thousands and thousands of varying shapes, which are made by the human voice, and each as irregular and as different from the other as the waves of the sea, must not tumble over each other or get into each other’s way, but must break upon the Pacific coast as they started at the Atlantic, or all the line fails and the millions of dollars spent upon it have been thrown away. And in all this line, if just one pin-point of construction is not as it should be, if there is one iota of imperfection, the miles of line are useless and the currents and waves and sounds and words do not reach the end as they should. It is such tremendous trifles, not the climbing of mountains and the bridging of chasms, that make the transcontinental line one of the wonders of the ages.

But while the telephone is smashing speech records, it also has to ensure the safe delivery of millions of little messages it carries every few minutes in the form of sound waves created at a rate of 2,100 a second. There can be no jostling or crowding. These tiny waves, thousands and thousands of different shapes made by the human voice, each as unique and varied as ocean waves, must not collide or interfere with each other; they must reach the Pacific coast as they started at the Atlantic, or the whole system fails, and all the millions of dollars spent on it go to waste. And within this entire system, if just one tiny detail of construction isn’t right, if there’s even a slight imperfection, the miles of wire become useless, and the currents, waves, sounds, and words don’t arrive as they should. It’s these crucial little details, not the climbing of mountains or the bridging of gaps, that make the transcontinental line one of the wonders of the ages.

The engineer in telephony cannot increase his motive power. A breath against a metal disk changes air waves into electrical currents, and these electrical currents, millions of which are required for a single conversation, must be carried across the continent and produce the same sound waves in San Francisco as were made in New York. Here is a task so fine as to be gigantic. It was to nurse and coax this baby current of electricity 3,000 miles across the continent, under rivers and over mountains, through the blistering heat of the alkali plains and the cold of snow-capped peaks, that has taken the time and thought and labor of the brightest minds of the scientific world.

The engineer in telecommunications can't boost his power source. A breath against a metal disk converts air waves into electrical currents, and these electrical currents, millions of which are needed for a single conversation, have to travel across the continent and reproduce the same sound waves in San Francisco as those made in New York. This is a task that is incredibly detailed and massive. It took the care and effort to guide this tiny current of electricity 3,000 miles across the continent, under rivers and over mountains, through the sweltering heat of the alkali plains and the cold of snow-capped peaks, which has occupied the time, thought, and work of the smartest minds in the scientific community.

This great problem in transmission was due to the cumulative effect of improvements, great and small, in telephone, transmitter, line, cable, switchboard and every other piece of apparatus and plant required for the transmission of speech.

This significant issue in transmission stemmed from the combined impact of various enhancements, both major and minor, in telephones, transmitters, lines, cables, switchboards, and all other equipment and facilities necessary for transmitting speech.

The opening of the transcontinental telephone line has been followed by the extension of “extreme distance” transmission into all the states of the Union, by applying these new improvements to the plant of the Bell System. It is now possible to talk from points in any one state to some points in every other state of the Union, while over a very large part of the territory covered by the Bell System, it is possible for any subscriber to talk to any other subscriber, regardless of distance.

The launch of the transcontinental telephone line has been followed by extending "long-distance" transmission across all the states in the U.S., thanks to the implementation of these new advancements in the Bell System's infrastructure. It's now possible to communicate from locations in one state to various points in every other state, and for a significant portion of the area served by the Bell System, any subscriber can talk to any other subscriber without worrying about distance.

Wireless Speech Transmission.

During the year 1915 very notable development in radio-telephony, the transmission of speech without wires, was made.

During the year 1915, there was a significant advancement in radio-telephony, which is the wireless transmission of speech.

On April 4th the Bell telephone engineers were successful in transmitting speech from a radio station at Montauk Point, on Long Island, to Wilmington, Del.

On April 4th, the Bell telephone engineers successfully transmitted speech from a radio station at Montauk Point on Long Island to Wilmington, Delaware.

On the 27th of August, with the Bell apparatus, installed by permission of the Navy Department at the Arlington, Va., radio station, speech was successfully transmitted from Arlington, Va., to the Navy wireless station equipped with Bell apparatus at the Isthmus of Panama.

On August 27th, using the Bell equipment installed with the approval of the Navy Department at the Arlington, Va., radio station, speech was successfully transmitted from Arlington, Va., to the Navy wireless station equipped with Bell equipment at the Isthmus of Panama.

On September 29th speech was successfully transmitted by wire from the headquarters of the company at 15 Dey Street, New York, to the radio station at Arlington, Va., and thence by radio or wireless telephony across the continent to the radio station at Mare Island Navy Yard, Cal.

On September 29th, a speech was successfully sent by wire from the company's headquarters at 15 Dey Street, New York, to the radio station in Arlington, Va., and then broadcast by radio across the continent to the radio station at Mare Island Navy Yard, Cal.

Erecting pole in shallow water

Setting Poles Across a Shallow Lake in Nevada During the Construction of the Transcontinental Line of the Bell System

Setting Poles Across a Shallow Lake in Nevada While Building the Transcontinental Line of the Bell System

On the next morning, at about one o’clock, Washington time, wireless telephone communication was established between Arlington, Va., and Pearl Harbor in the Hawaiian Islands, where the Bell engineer, together with United States naval officers, distinctly heard words spoken into the apparatus at Arlington.

On the next morning, around one o’clock, Washington time, wireless phone communication was set up between Arlington, Va., and Pearl Harbor in the Hawaiian Islands, where the Bell engineer, along with U.S. naval officers, clearly heard words spoken into the device in Arlington.

On October 22d, from the Arlington tower in Virginia, speech was transmitted across the Atlantic Ocean to the Eiffel Tower at Paris, where the Bell engineers, in company with French military officers, heard the words spoken at Arlington.

On October 22nd, from the Arlington tower in Virginia, a speech was broadcast across the Atlantic Ocean to the Eiffel Tower in Paris, where Bell engineers, along with French military officers, listened to the words spoken at Arlington.

On the same day, when speech was being transmitted by the Bell apparatus at Arlington to the engineers and the French military officers at the Eiffel Tower in Paris, the telephone company’s representative at Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, together with an officer of the United States Navy, heard the words spoken from Arlington to Paris.

On the same day, while speech was being transmitted through the Bell apparatus from Arlington to the engineers and French military officers at the Eiffel Tower in Paris, the telephone company’s representative at Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, along with a United States Navy officer, heard the words being spoken from Arlington to Paris.

Telephone versus horse back rider as military messengers

By Means of the Universal Bell System the Nation May be Promptly Organized for United Action in Any Great National Movement

With the Universal Bell System, the country can quickly unite for coordinated action in any major national movement.

It is believed that wireless telephony will form a most important adjunct and extension to the existing schemes of communication. By its means communication can be established between points where it is impracticable to extend wires. For many reasons wireless telephony can never take the place of wire systems, but it may be expected to supplement them in a useful manner. Wireless telephone systems are subject to serious interference from numerous conditions, atmospheric and others. For many uses the fact that anyone suitably equipped can listen in on a wireless telephone talk would be a serious limitation to its use.

It’s believed that wireless telephony will become a crucial addition and extension to current communication systems. It allows communication to happen in places where running wires is not practical. For various reasons, wireless telephony will never replace wired systems, but it is expected to complement them effectively. Wireless phone systems can experience significant interference from many factors, including atmospheric conditions. For many applications, the ability for anyone with the right equipment to listen in on a wireless phone conversation would be a major drawback.

The Mobilization of Communication.

Besides these radio experiments, a demonstration has been given of the availability of the Bell System and its wonderful potentiality in case of an emergency which would require quick and satisfactory intercommunication between the different[229] departments of the government and its scattered stations and officers throughout the whole country.

Besides these radio experiments, a demonstration has shown the readiness of the Bell System and its amazing potential in case of an emergency that would need fast and effective communication between various[229]government departments and their dispersed stations and officials across the entire country.

From 4 P. M., May 6, to 8 A. M., May 8, 1916, the United States Navy Department and the American Telephone and Telegraph Company co-operated in a general mobilization of the forces of communication. It was a test of what could be done in a sudden military emergency, and was gratuitously undertaken by the company at the request of the Secretary of the Navy.

From 4 P.M., May 6, to 8 A.M., May 8, 1916, the United States Navy Department and the American Telephone and Telegraph Company worked together for a large-scale mobilization of communication resources. It was a test of what could be achieved in a sudden military emergency and was voluntarily carried out by the company at the request of the Secretary of the Navy.

It was a sort of war game that brought into play the latest scientific developments of telephone and telegraph communication, by wire and by wireless, and demonstrated an efficiency that has not been attained in any other country.

It was a kind of war game that showcased the latest advancements in telephone and telegraph communication, both wired and wireless, and demonstrated an efficiency that hasn't been matched in any other country.

For some time the officers of the United States Navy had been working together with the engineers of the Bell System in the study of wire and wireless communications, and the Navy Department had permitted the telephone engineers to use its towers for long-distance wireless telephone experiments.

For a while, the officers of the United States Navy had been collaborating with the engineers of the Bell System to study both wire and wireless communications. The Navy Department had allowed the telephone engineers to use its towers for long-distance wireless telephone experiments.

So, in the latest demonstration, the land towers of the navy were utilized in connection with a wireless telephone installation on the U. S. S. “New Hampshire,” and Captain Chandler, cruising off shore, talked directly with the Secretary’s office in Washington.

So, in the latest demonstration, the naval land towers were used alongside a wireless phone setup on the U.S.S. “New Hampshire,” and Captain Chandler, sailing off the coast, spoke directly with the Secretary’s office in Washington.

For the time being the operating forces of the telephone company all over the country were placed at the disposal of Captain W. H. G. Bullard, Chief of the Bureau of Communications, and General Superintendent of Plant F. A. Stevenson, of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company, was assigned as his aide. While all the facilities of the Bell System were available, only about 53,000 miles of wire were necessary to connect all the navy yards and stations for telephonic and telegraphic communication.

For now, all the operating forces of the telephone company across the country were put under the command of Captain W. H. G. Bullard, Chief of the Bureau of Communications, and General Superintendent of Plant F. A. Stevenson from the American Telephone and Telegraph Company was assigned to assist him. Although all the resources of the Bell System were accessible, only about 53,000 miles of wire were needed to connect all the navy yards and stations for phone and telegraph communication.

The successful demonstration showed that in case of any trouble requiring any such service, because of the central control of the Bell System, the government could have ready-made at its immediate disposal a plant, equipment and operating staff which, for completeness and efficiency, would not be possible in any other way.

The successful demonstration proved that if any issues arose that needed such services, the government could have immediate access to a fully equipped facility and staff due to the central control of the Bell System, which wouldn't be achievable in any other way for effectiveness and efficiency.


Why do They Call Them “Fiddler-Crabs”?

There is one member of the crab family for which the Latin name is Gelasimus, which means “laughable.” He certainly is appropriately named, for he is a very queer little fellow. The male has one claw of immense size, the other being quite small. The big claw is brightly colored, and when he runs he waves it about as if he were energetically beckoning, or playing some very stirring tune on a violin; hence he is often known as a “Calling-crab” or a “Fiddler-crab.”

There’s a member of the crab family called Gelasimus, which means “laughable.” The name suits him well, as he’s quite a quirky little guy. The male crab has one huge claw and a small one. The big claw is brightly colored, and when he scurries around, he waves it as if he’s energetically beckoning or passionately playing a tune on a violin; that’s why he’s often referred to as a “Calling-crab” or a “Fiddler-crab.”

Fiddler-crabs inhabit various parts of the world, and are usually found in large numbers on muddy or sandy flats left dry by the tide, where they may be seen hurrying over the sand or peering out of their holes, into which they immediately vanish when alarmed. The holes, which usually are about a foot deep, are made by the crab persistently digging up and carrying away little masses of mud or sand. When he is doing this the crab presents a very funny appearance. Scraping up a quantity of sand into a little heap, he grasps it with three of the legs on one side and hurries away with it to some little distance. Having deposited his load, he raises his eyes, which he can do quite effectively, as they are situated at the end of very long, slender stalks, peers curiously around, and scuttles back to the hole for another load of sand.

Fiddler crabs are found in various parts of the world and are usually seen in large groups on muddy or sandy flats that are exposed by the tide. They can be observed scurrying across the sand or looking out of their burrows, where they quickly disappear when scared. The burrows, typically about a foot deep, are created by the crab constantly digging and transporting small clumps of mud or sand. When doing this, the crab looks quite amusing. It scoops up a bunch of sand into a small pile, grabs it with three legs on one side, and rushes away with it for a short distance. After dropping off its load, it lifts its eyes, which have a great range thanks to being attached to very long, slender stalks, gazes around with curiosity, and then scuttles back to the burrow for another scoop of sand.

How Far can a Powerful Searchlight Send Its Rays?

Searchlights have recently been made capable of being seen nearly a hundred miles away. Such lights are very valuable for signaling purposes in time of war, and they are also much used on warships, enabling the officers to detect the approach of an enemy in the dark and to guard against torpedo boats.

Searchlights can now be seen from almost a hundred miles away. These lights are extremely useful for signaling during wartime and are also widely used on warships, allowing officers to spot an approaching enemy in the dark and protect against torpedo boats.

Large searchlights

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

Long Ribbons of Light

Long Strands of Light

The giant scintillator erected on the shore of the bay was not the least wonderful of all the wonderful sights of the Panama-Pacific Exposition at San Francisco.

The giant scintillator set up on the shore of the bay was one of the most amazing sights at the Panama-Pacific Exposition in San Francisco.

We are all familiar with the less powerful ones which are universally used on automobiles for night driving and in a multitude of other every-day practices. The illustration shows a battery of powerful searchlights, the use of which furnished some very effective displays during the Panama-Pacific Exposition at San Francisco in 1915.

We all know about the weaker ones that are commonly used in cars for nighttime driving and in many other everyday situations. The image shows a set of powerful searchlights, which provided some impressive displays during the Panama-Pacific Exposition in San Francisco in 1915.

Searchlights are ordinarily electric arc lights of great candle-power, arranged with a parabolic reflector so that the rays are sent almost wholly in one direct line, forming a path of light which may be projected for miles.

Searchlights are typically high-intensity electric arc lights, set up with a parabolic reflector to direct the beams almost entirely in a straight line, creating a path of light that can reach for miles.

What Started the Habit of Touching Glasses Before Drinking?

Just as athletes shake hands before the beginning of a contest today, the people who fought duels in the olden days used to pause before their fighting long enough to each drink a glass of wine furnished by their friends. In order to make sure that no attempt was made to forestall the results of the duel by poisoning the wine in either cup, they developed the habit of pouring part of the contents of each glass into the other, so that if either contestant was poisoned the other would be too.

Just like athletes shake hands before a competition today, duelists in the past would take a moment before fighting to share a glass of wine provided by their friends. To ensure that neither of them tried to cheat by poisoning the wine, they came up with the practice of pouring some of each glass into the other, so that if one person was poisoned, the other would be as well.

This habit has continued up to the present time, although there is no thought given now to the danger of poison, and in the present day the ceremony of actually pouring the drink from one glass to another has been omitted, merely the motion, as if to touch the glasses, sufficing as an expression of friendliness and good will.

This habit has continued to this day, although no one thinks about the risk of poison anymore, and nowadays the act of pouring the drink from one glass to another has been dropped; just the gesture of touching the glasses is enough to show friendliness and good will.

Touching glasses together in drinking, preparatory to a confidential talk, has come to be nicknamed “hob-nobbing” because of the equipment incidental to that action years ago. A “hob” was the flat part of the open hearth where water and spirits were warmed; and the small table, at which people sat when so engaged, was called a “nob.”

Touching glasses together before a private conversation has become known as “hob-nobbing” due to the tools associated with that action many years ago. A “hob” was the flat area of the open hearth where drinks and t^ea were heated; and the small table where people sat while doing this was referred to as a “nob.”

Why are Windows Broken by Explosions?

When the large cannons in the forts on our coast are discharged during target practice, there are usually a lot of windows broken in the nearby houses. In Jersey City, N. J., several freight cars and boats loaded with dynamite and ammunition full of high explosives furnished the power for an explosion which, in July, 1916, broke considerably over a hundred thousand dollars worth of windows in the lower part of New York City.

When the large cannons in the forts along our coast are fired during practice, a lot of windows in nearby houses typically get broken. In Jersey City, N.J., several freight cars and boats loaded with dynamite and ammunition packed with high explosives caused an explosion that, in July 1916, shattered over a hundred thousand dollars' worth of windows in lower Manhattan.

The force of an explosion, whatever its source, throws back the air in huge waves, very much like the waves of the ocean, and whatever they come in contact with must have a sort of a tug-of-war with them, the weaker side being crumpled up and pushed back by the other. Broad expanses of glass, unprotected and without any support, except at the extreme edges, present an easy mark for air waves, therefore, and the amount of damage done to windows by explosions is usually only limited by the power of the explosives which produce the force of air waves.

The force of an explosion, no matter where it comes from, pushes the air back in massive waves, similar to ocean waves. Anything these waves hit gets caught in a kind of tug-of-war, with the weaker side getting crushed and pushed back by the stronger one. Large areas of glass, unprotected and with support only at the edges, are easy targets for these air waves. As a result, the damage to windows from explosions is typically limited only by the strength of the explosives that create the air waves.

The earth beneath, and the roof and walls of a building above, all receive the effects of these air waves in exactly the same way as do windows, and the resulting disaster is in direct proportion to their resisting capacity as against the pressure caused by the explosion. Many striking examples of the power of explosives have been accidentally furnished of late, in the course of making munitions for the European war.

The ground below, along with the roof and walls of a building above, all react to these airwaves just like windows do, and the resulting damage is directly related to how much pressure they can withstand from the explosion. Recently, we’ve seen many dramatic examples of the power of explosives due to accidents that happened while making munitions for the European war.

What does the Expression “Showing the White Feather” Come From?

We say people “show the white feather” when they display cowardice, because a white feather in a bird marks a cross breed, and it is not found on a fighting game-cock.

We say people “show the white feather” when they act cowardly, because a white feather in a bird indicates a mix breed, and it's not seen on a fighting game-cock.


The Story in Elevators and Escalators[15]

Going up and down stairs is a duty every man, woman and child finds it necessary to perform daily and in many cases hourly, and some means for doing this is necessary in every modern household. Even in the old-time one-story house, steps from the outside to the inside were usually necessary, and when the two or more storied houses came into use the stairway became an indispensable feature. In modern times the art of building has had such an upward trend that edifices looming far into the air, hotels, stores, apartment houses, office buildings, etc., have come into use, one notable specimen, the Woolworth building in New York, towering upwards to fifty-four stories in height. This upward tendency has rendered the elevator, or lifting apparatus, an indispensable necessity, alike for passengers and freight, and it has been installed abundantly in all our large cities.

Going up and down stairs is a task that everyone—men, women, and children—needs to do every day, often multiple times a day, so there's a need for a way to make this easier in every modern home. Even in the old one-story houses, steps were usually needed to get from the outside to the inside, and when two or more stories became common, stairways became essential. Nowadays, the trend in construction has reached new heights with buildings that stretch far into the sky, such as hotels, stores, apartment buildings, and office towers, including the iconic Woolworth Building in New York, which rises up to fifty-four stories. This upward trend has made elevators, or lifting devices, a must-have for transporting both people and goods, and they've been widely installed in all our major cities.

Stairs Ladder
To make climbing easier, humans created the staircase, which eventually led to the development of the escalator, further reducing physical effort. Primitive man climbed a ladder when he wanted to move from one level to another.

The elevator is not exactly a new idea. Its pioneer form may be traced back to the Middle Ages, when heavy weights were lifted by aid of an apparatus worked by hand power. But it was not until well on into the nineteenth century that the steam-power elevator came into service. The first example is said to have been produced by Elisha Graves Otis, who applied steam power to an elevating machine in a little shop at Yonkers, on the banks of the Hudson, New York. A few years later, at the International Exhibition of 1853 in New York, he displayed the first elevator with a safety device to prevent the car from falling in case of a broken cable.

The elevator isn't exactly a new concept. Its earliest form can be traced back to the Middle Ages when heavy loads were lifted using a manually operated device. However, it wasn't until the late nineteenth century that steam-powered elevators became operational. The first one is said to have been created by Elisha Graves Otis, who integrated steam power into an elevating machine in a small shop in Yonkers, along the Hudson River in New York. A few years later, at the International Exhibition of 1853 in New York, he showcased the first elevator with a safety mechanism designed to prevent the car from falling if a cable broke.

Manually operated early elevator

An Elevator of the Middle Ages

A Boost from the Middle Ages

History tells us this form of elevator was used in monasteries for hoisting passengers and supplies.

History tells us that this type of elevator was used in monasteries to lift passengers and supplies.

The elevator was then a novelty. It has long since grown into a necessity. It is to be seen in all hotels and high buildings, and the art of getting up stairs has in very many cases changed into that of being lifted up by a moving car in an enclosed shaft or cage. The steam elevator, at first used, has now in great measure been replaced by the electric elevator, the first moved by an electric motor being[233] the Otis elevator installed in the Demarest Building, New York, in 1889. This is still in active use.

The elevator was once a novelty. It has since become a necessity. You can find it in all hotels and high-rise buildings, and the way we go up stairs has largely shifted to being lifted by a moving car in a closed shaft or cage. The steam elevator, which was used at first, has mostly been replaced by the electric elevator, with the first one powered by an electric motor being[233] the Otis elevator installed in the Demarest Building, New York, in 1889. It is still in active use.

The first electric elevators were confined to the drum type of machine, these having a grooved drum around which the hoisting cables were wound, the drum being revolved through worm gearing by an electric motor. But the erection of buildings, ranging from 200 to 700 feet in height has put this type of traction out of business on account of the great size of drums required and the necessary slowness of motion. It has been replaced by the electric traction elevator. In this the hoisting cables from which the car is suspended have at the other end a counterweight and pass around driving sheaves in place of a drum. This, in its latest form known as the gearless traction elevator, does away with all intricate machinery, and yields a machine moving with equal speed whatever the height.

The first electric elevators were limited to the drum type of machine, which had a grooved drum that the hoisting cables wrapped around. The drum was turned by an electric motor through worm gearing. However, as buildings reached heights of 200 to 700 feet, this type of traction became unfeasible due to the large size of drums needed and the required slow motion. It has since been replaced by the electric traction elevator. In this system, the hoisting cables that support the car also connect to a counterweight at the other end and loop around driving sheaves instead of a drum. The latest version, known as the gearless traction elevator, eliminates all complicated machinery and enables the machine to move at the same speed regardless of height.

Woolworth building and elevator installed therein

Elevator Installation in the Woolworth Building, New York

Elevator Installation in the Woolworth Building, New York

To obviate danger from accidents, safety devices are installed for gripping the rails in case of the car attaining excessive speed. Another feature of security is the oil cushion buffer. One of these is placed in the hoistway under the car and one under the counterweight, they being capable of bringing a car to rest from full speed without discomfort to those in the car. The oil in the buffer is driven by the impact of the car from one chamber of the buffer to another, but this is made to take place at a fixed rate of retardation, the oil acting as a liquid cushion which stops the car gradually and without shock.

To prevent accidents, safety devices are installed to grip the rails if the car goes too fast. Another safety feature is the oil cushion buffer. One of these is placed under the car in the hoistway and another under the counterweight, both able to bring the car to a stop from full speed without causing discomfort to those inside. The impact of the car pushes the oil from one chamber of the buffer to another, but this happens at a controlled rate, with the oil acting as a liquid cushion that gradually stops the car without any jolt.

Steam elevator

A Steam-Driven Elevator of Early Date

An Early Steam Elevator

To do business in the modern lofty building without the aid of elevators (or lifts, as they are called in England) is today out of the question, while the great grain-transporting edifices in cities in which our annual crops are lifted and lowered, are known by the specific name of elevators. There is, however, another means of getting up and down stairs which is coming somewhat rapidly into use and in which the old stairway is restored. It is one in which the stair itself does the moving instead of the passengers upon it. This new and interesting device is known as an escalator.

To conduct business in a tall modern building without elevators is simply not feasible today, while the large grain-storage buildings in cities where we load and unload our annual crops are specifically called elevators. However, there's another way to travel between floors that's becoming more common, which revives the traditional staircase. In this system, the stairs themselves move instead of the people on them. This innovative and fascinating feature is called an escalator.

The Escalator.

The earliest way to get upward from the ground was that adopted by climbing animals in clambering up tree trunks, and by man himself in “shinning” up trees by aid of his arms and legs. This was followed by the plank leading from a lower to a higher level, by the ladder, and finally by the stairway. In our days the stairway has been put on a set of revolving wheels and moves upward itself, carrying its passengers with no need on their part to use their feet. This simple but effective device is known as the escalator.

The earliest method for getting up from the ground was similar to how climbing animals scale tree trunks, and how humans would "shinny" up trees using their arms and legs. This was later followed by using a plank to move from a lower to a higher level, then a ladder, and eventually the stairway. In modern times, the stairway has been transformed into a set of revolving wheels that moves upward on its own, carrying passengers without them needing to use their feet. This straightforward but efficient device is called the escalator.

It is a very useful contrivance for tired shoppers needing to make their way from floor to floor in the great department stores, for travelers on subway or elevated railways, for large mills, theaters, or other places where easy getting up and down stairs is necessary. The escalator is a simple device. No intricate machinery is needed. It is so arranged as to be always going, traveling upwards or downwards, and returning out of sight below. It has been called “an elevator with the doors always open.” It is capable of carrying all the passengers who can crowd upon it, stepping on or off at the bottom or top, it being estimated that more than 10,000 people an hour can be thus moved.

It’s a really handy invention for tired shoppers who need to get from one floor to another in big department stores, for travelers on subways or elevated trains, and for large mills, theaters, or other places where it’s important to easily go up and down stairs. The escalator is a straightforward device. There’s no complicated machinery required. It’s designed to always be in motion, going either up or down, and then disappearing out of sight below. It’s been described as “an elevator with the doors always open.” It can carry as many people as can fit on it, allowing them to step on or off at the bottom or top, with estimates suggesting that it can move over 10,000 people per hour.

Row of elevator doors

Battery of Elevators in a Department Store

Battery of Elevators in a Department Store

Complete elevator installation Dumb waiter installation
A Complete Installation of a 2:1 Electric Traction Passenger Elevator, Showing the Machine and Controller at the Top of the Shaft
This elevator is used where the slower speeds are required as in department stores. Electric Dumbwaiter Setup with Machine in Basement Displaying Call Buttons
Escalator to train platform

Escalator or Moving Stairway at Sixth Avenue and Thirty-third Street Station of Elevated Railway, New York City

Escalator or Moving Sidewalk at the Sixth Avenue and Thirty-third Street Station of the Elevated Railway, New York City

Double escalator

A Duplex Escalator of the Cleat Type in a Department Store

A Cleat-Type Duplex Escalator in a Department Store

This type of escalator makes use of hard wood cleats in place of steps.

This type of escalator uses hardwood cleats instead of steps.

Workers' escalator in textile plant

An Escalator or Moving Stairway for the Use of Employees in a Large Worsted Mill

An escalator or moving staircase for employee use in a large wool mill

Details of escalator

A Cleat Type Escalator, Showing the Hardwood Cleats Used in Place of Steps

A Cleat Type Escalator, Displaying the Hardwood Cleats Used Instead of Steps

The Cleat Escalator.

In the original type of escalator the steps flatten out into a level platform at top and bottom, easy to step on and off, and divide into regular steps as they climb upward, passengers in a hurry being able to hasten their speed by walking at the same time that they are carried. Another type is that known as the cleat escalator. In this there are no steps, it being composed of hardwood cleats moving in longitudinal ridges and grooves, there being a handrail on either side moving at the same speed. The platform glides through the prongs of a comb at the lower level and journeys upward at a moderate speed. At the upper level it disappears through a similar comb and returns out of sight. The passengers slide off upon the prongs of the comb at the top and land without jar or shock. Both these types of escalators can be made to move up or down by aid of a swinging switch, or two of them can be placed side by side, one moving upward and the other downward.

In the original type of escalator, the steps flatten into a level platform at the top and bottom, making it easy to step on and off. They then turn into regular steps as they ascend, allowing passengers in a hurry to speed up by walking while being carried. Another type is known as the cleat escalator. This one doesn't have steps; it's made up of hardwood cleats that move in long ridges and grooves, with a handrail on either side moving at the same speed. The platform glides through the prongs of a comb at the lower level and travels upward at a moderate speed. At the top, it disappears through a similar comb and goes out of sight. The passengers slide off onto the prongs of the comb at the top and arrive without any jolt or shock. Both types of escalators can be made to move up or down using a swinging switch, or two of them can be set up side by side, with one going up and the other going down.

The Moving Platform.

A device acting on the same principle is the moving platform, with the difference that this may be of indefinite length and act as a sort of railway for carrying passengers from place to place. The passenger steps from a sideway at rest to one in moderate motion, and from this to a second one moving more rapidly, and in this way can be carried horizontally at a fair rate of speed. On reaching his station he has but to step back on the slower platform and from this to the moveless sideway. The pioneer example of this contrivance was installed on a long pier leading into Lake Michigan at the Chicago Exposition of 1893, and plans for putting it into practical use in various cities have been entertained. None of these, however, have yet been put into effect. Certain drawbacks, possibly that of cost of installation and operation, has served as a hindrance.

A device that works on the same principle is the moving platform, but it can be of any length and functions like a railway to transport passengers from one location to another. A passenger steps from a stationary walkway onto one that’s moving at a moderate speed, and then from there to a second platform that’s moving faster. This way, they can travel horizontally at a decent pace. When they reach their destination, they simply step back onto the slower platform and then to the stationary walkway. The first example of this system was set up on a long pier leading into Lake Michigan during the Chicago Exposition of 1893, and there have been plans to implement it in various cities. However, none of these plans have been carried out yet. Certain drawbacks, likely including the cost of installation and operation, have prevented this from happening.

Helical gravity conveyor

A Gravity Conveyor of the Single Spiral Open Type

A Single Spiral Open Type Gravity Conveyor

For the quick and safe conveyance of heavy goods from upper to lower levels.

For the fast and safe transport of heavy items from higher to lower levels.


What Happens when Animals Hibernate?

We have all heard of certain animals sleeping through the long winter months and most of us have probably wondered what happens to them when they do this.

We’ve all heard about some animals hibernating through the long winter months, and most of us have probably wondered what happens to them during that time.

This hiding away for a long sleep, or hibernation, as it is called, commences when the food of the animal begins to get scarce, and the length and depth of the sleep depends on the habit and constitution of the animal.

This long sleep, or hibernation, starts when the animal's food becomes scarce, and the duration and depth of the sleep depend on the animal's habits and physical makeup.

Bats, bears, some animals of the rodent order, such as the porcupine, the dormouse, some squirrels, etc., all the animals belonging to the classes of Amphibia and Reptilia, such as tortoises, lizards, snakes, frogs, etc., and many species of mollusks and insects, hibernate more or less completely, retiring to suitable places of concealment—the bat to dark caves, the hedgehog to fern-brakes, snakes to holes in trees, etc.

Bats, bears, certain rodents like porcupines, dormice, and some squirrels, as well as animals from the classes of Amphibia and Reptilia, such as tortoises, lizards, snakes, frogs, and many types of mollusks and insects, hibernate to varying degrees, hiding away in safe spots—bats in dark caves, hedgehogs in patches of ferns, and snakes in tree hollows, among others.

During hibernation there is a great decrease of heat in the bodies of the animals, the temperature sometimes sinking to 40° or even 20° F., or in general to a point a little above that of the surrounding atmosphere. The respiration as well as the pulsation of the heart is exceedingly slow, and the irritability of the animal often so low that in some cases it can be awakened only by strong electric shocks.

During hibernation, animals experience a significant drop in body heat, with temperatures sometimes falling to 40° or even 20° F., or generally just above the surrounding environment. Their breathing and heart rate become extremely slow, and the animal's responsiveness is often so minimal that in some cases, it can only be roused by strong electric shocks.

With frogs and amphibious reptiles the dormant state is very common, and if the temperature is kept low by artificial means they may remain dormant for years.

With frogs and amphibious reptiles, the dormant state is quite common, and if the temperature is kept low artificially, they can stay dormant for years.

The term “æstivation” has been used to describe a similar condition into which certain animals, such as serpents and crocodiles, in tropical countries pass during the hottest months of the year.

The term “æstivation” has been used to describe a similar condition that some animals, like snakes and crocodiles, in tropical areas enter during the hottest months of the year.

How do Peanuts Get in the Ground?

Peanuts are really the seeds or pods of a plant belonging to the family called the earthnut in Great Britain, the nuts there being used chiefly to fatten swine. The peanut-stand so commonly seen on street corners here is kept well supplied by the extensive cultivation of peanuts in the United States, mainly in the South, and in several tropical countries.

Peanuts are actually the seeds or pods of a plant from the family known as earthnut in Great Britain, where the nuts are primarily used to feed pigs. The peanut stand that you frequently see on street corners here is well-stocked thanks to the wide cultivation of peanuts in the United States, mainly in the South, and in several tropical countries.

As most people have discovered, the nuts have a much more agreeable taste after being roasted. They also yield an oil which is often used for olive oil, and very good “peanut butter” is now made by grinding them up and mixing them with oil.

As most people have found out, nuts taste a lot better after they're roasted. They also produce an oil that is often used in place of olive oil, and really good "peanut butter" is now made by grinding them up and mixing them with oil.

The peanut plant, or groundnut as it is also called, has a hairy stem and the leaves usually grow in sets of two pairs each, on the extreme end of each little branch-stem. The pod or nut is situated at the end of a separate stalk, which is longer than the leaf-stems, this stalk having the peculiarity, after flowering, of bending down and pushing the fruit into the earth. After the peanuts have reached their full growth, they are dug up very much in the same way as potatoes, a machine potato digger now being extensively used for this purpose.

The peanut plant, also known as groundnut, has a hairy stem, and its leaves typically grow in pairs at the tips of each small branch. The pod or nut is found at the end of a separate stalk, which is longer than the leaf stems. Interestingly, after flowering, this stalk bends down and pushes the fruit into the ground. Once the peanuts have fully grown, they are harvested in much the same way as potatoes, with a machine potato digger now widely used for this purpose.

Mule-drawn potato digger harvesting peanuts

Machine Potato Digger Digging Peanuts

Machine Potato Digger for Peanuts

Hand-picking peanuts

Picking Peanuts by Hand

Hand-Picked Peanuts

How did Your State Get Its Name?

Alabama is named after the Indian word which means “Here we rest;” Alaska comes from the Eskimo word “Alakshak” or “Alayeska” and means “The main land;” Arizona is the result of the Indian word “Arizonac,” meaning “small springs” or “few springs;” and Arkansas is sort of a mixture of the Indian “Kansas,” which means “smoky water,” and the French prefix “arc,” meaning “bow” or “bend.”

Alabama is named after an Indigenous word that means “Here we rest;” Alaska comes from the Eskimo word “Alakshak” or “Alayeska,” which means “The mainland;” Arizona is derived from the Indigenous word “Arizonac,” meaning “small springs” or “few springs;” and Arkansas is a blend of the Indigenous word “Kansas,” which means “smoky water,” and the French prefix “arc,” meaning “bow” or “bend.”

California comes from the Spanish words “Caliente Fornalla,” or “hot furnace;” Colorado, also from the Spanish “colored,” from the red color of the Colorado River; and Connecticut, in Indian, means “long river.”

California comes from the Spanish words “Caliente Fornalla,” meaning “hot furnace;” Colorado, also derived from the Spanish “colored,” references the red color of the Colorado River; and Connecticut, in Native American language, means “long river.”

Delaware was named after Lord De la Warr; Florida originated from the Spanish “Pascua de Flores,” which means “Feast of Flowers,” because it was discovered on Easter Day; Georgia was called after King George II of England; and Hawaii is a native name peculiar to the natives there, although Captain Cook called it part of the “Sandwich Islands” after Lord Sandwich.

Delaware was named after Lord De la Warr; Florida comes from the Spanish "Pascua de Flores," meaning "Feast of Flowers," since it was discovered on Easter Day; Georgia was named after King George II of England; and Hawaii is a native name specific to the indigenous people there, although Captain Cook referred to it as part of the "Sandwich Islands" after Lord Sandwich.

Idaho is Indian, meaning “Gem of the Mountains;” Illinois is another mixture of Indian and French, the Indian word “illini” and the French suffix “ois” meaning “tribe of men;” and Indiana and Iowa are both plain Indian, the former standing for “Indians’ land,” and the latter, “beautiful land.”

Idaho is derived from an Native American word that means “Gem of the Mountains;” Illinois is a blend of Native American and French, combining the Native term “illini” with the French suffix “ois,” which means “tribe of men;” and Indiana and Iowa come from Native American roots as well, with the former meaning “land of the Indians,” and the latter translating to “beautiful land.”

Kansas and Kentucky are Indian, too, Kansas meaning “smoky water” and Kentucky “at the head of the river,” or “the dark and bloody ground;” and Louisiana is named after Louis XIV of France.

Kansas and Kentucky have Native American roots as well, with Kansas meaning “smoky water” and Kentucky meaning “at the head of the river” or “the dark and bloody ground.” Louisiana is named after Louis XIV of France.

Maine and Maryland each come from abroad, Maine being called after the Province of the same name in France, and Maryland after Queen Henrietta Maria of England, consort of Charles I; while Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Mississippi and Missouri are all from the native Indian language, meaning, in the order in which they are given, “place of great hills,” “fish weir,” “sky-tinted water,” “great father of waters” and “muddy;” and Montana traces back to the Latin word “montanus,” meaning “mountainous.”

Maine and Maryland both have origins from overseas, with Maine named after the province of the same name in France, and Maryland named after Queen Henrietta Maria of England, the wife of Charles I. Meanwhile, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Mississippi, and Missouri all come from native Indian languages, meaning, in order, “place of great hills,” “fish weir,” “sky-tinted water,” “great father of waters,” and “muddy.” Montana comes from the Latin word “montanus,” which means “mountainous.”

Nebraska is another Indian name, and means “water valley;” while Nevada is Spanish, meaning “snow covered;” New Hampshire and New Jersey are both from across the water, the former after Hampshire County in England, and New Jersey after the Island of Jersey at the time when Sir George Carteret was its Governor; New York and both North and South Carolina were also named after monarchs abroad, New York after the Duke of York in England, and the Carolinas after Charles IX of France; while North and South Dakota bring us back to the Indian language again, meaning “allies.”

Nebraska is another Native American name, meaning "water valley," while Nevada is Spanish for "snow-covered." New Hampshire and New Jersey both come from across the ocean; the former is named after Hampshire County in England, and New Jersey is named after the Island of Jersey when Sir George Carteret was its Governor. New York, along with both North and South Carolina, was named after foreign monarchs—New York after the Duke of York in England, and the Carolinas after Charles IX of France. North and South Dakota also return to Native American language, meaning "allies."

Ohio and Oklahoma are both Indian, too, Ohio meaning “beautiful river,” and the latter, “Home of the red men;” while Oregon is from the Spanish word “oregano,” which stands for the wild marjoram, a plant abundant on the coast; Pennsylvania traces back to the Latin, meaning “Penn’s woody land;” the Philippine Islands come from the Spanish words “Islas Filipinas,” after King Philip; and Porto Rico is also Spanish, from “Puerto Rico,” meaning “rich port.”

Ohio and Oklahoma are both related to Native American languages, with Ohio meaning "beautiful river" and Oklahoma meaning "home of the red people." Oregon comes from the Spanish word "oregano," which refers to the wild marjoram, a plant that grows plentifully along the coast. Pennsylvania comes from the Latin, meaning "Penn's wooded land." The Philippine Islands are named after King Philip, derived from the Spanish "Islas Filipinas," and Puerto Rico is also Spanish, meaning "rich port."

Rhode Island is called after the Island of Rhodes; Tennessee, Texas and Utah are all Indian, Tennessee meaning “river with the great bend,” Texas coming from several different forms of very old Indian language, meaning “friends,” and Utah after the tribe by that name, also called the “Utes;” Vermont is from the French, meaning “green mountains,” and Virginia is called after Elizabeth, the “Virgin Queen” of England.

Rhode Island is named after the Island of Rhodes; Tennessee, Texas, and Utah all have Native American origins. Tennessee means “river with the great bend,” Texas comes from various ancient Native American words meaning “friends,” and Utah is named after the tribe known as the Utes. Vermont is derived from the French phrase meaning “green mountains,” and Virginia is named after Elizabeth, the “Virgin Queen” of England.

Washington gets its name from a good, straight American source—George Washington; West Virginia is so called because it was formerly the western part of Virginia; and Wisconsin and Wyoming are both Indian, the former meaning “gathering of the waters,” and the latter, “great plains.”

Washington gets its name from a straightforward American source—George Washington; West Virginia is called that because it used to be the western part of Virginia; and Wisconsin and Wyoming both come from Native American languages, with the former meaning “gathering of the waters” and the latter meaning “great plains.”


The Story of Coal Mining

An interesting story is told in an English book by Edward Cressy, of the great coal strike in 1912. Many factories and workshops had to close for want of fuel. A workman from one of these, on reaching home, purchased a sack of coal and set it up against the back door. Then he sat in the kitchen, in which there was no fire. From time to time, when he felt chilly he got up, flung the sack of coal across his shoulders and ran around the yard until he became warm. That was his way of saving fuel. He was only doing in his own fashion what all engineers and manufacturers are trying to do in other ways all the year round.

An interesting story is told in an English book by Edward Cressy about the great coal strike of 1912. Many factories and workshops had to shut down because they ran out of fuel. A worker from one of these places got home, bought a sack of coal, and leaned it against the back door. Then he sat in the kitchen, where there was no fire. Every so often, when he felt cold, he would get up, toss the sack of coal over his shoulders, and run around the yard until he warmed up. That was his way of conserving fuel. He was just doing in his own way what all engineers and manufacturers are trying to accomplish in different ways all year round.

The extent to which all manufacture and transport, all industry there, was paralyzed during the strike, shows the complete dependence of modern life upon fuel. In spite of the fact that in Great Britain nearly 240,000,000 tons of coal are raised annually, a temporary stoppage of supply threw all the ordinary machinery of existence out of action and revealed the magnitude of the debt that the world owes to those who win precious stores of fuel from the depths of the earth.

The extent to which all manufacturing and transportation, and all industries there, were stalled during the strike demonstrates how completely modern life depends on fuel. Even though Great Britain produces nearly 240 million tons of coal each year, a temporary halt in supply brought all the everyday machinery of life to a standstill and highlighted just how much we owe to those who extract valuable fuel from the earth's depths.

Probably no industrial operation excites more widespread interest, when accorded publicity, than the mining of coal, and that because of the dangers which attend it. The annual list of victims buried beneath a falling roof, or mangled by runaway cars, causes little comment, but every now and then the world is startled by an appalling catastrophe in which hundreds of men lose their lives. From the early days when growing industry demanded more coal, inventors have been busy devising all sorts of safety appliances for the miner.

Probably no industrial operation generates more widespread interest when it gets publicity than coal mining, and that's due to the dangers that come with it. The yearly list of victims buried under a collapsing roof or injured by runaway cars gets little attention, but now and then the world is shocked by a horrifying disaster where hundreds of men lose their lives. Since the early days when the expanding industry needed more coal, inventors have been hard at work creating all kinds of safety devices for miners.

The original safety-lamp, with which practically everyone is familiar, is the parent of scores of others, each claiming to offer some special advantage. All sorts of mechanical devices to prevent overwinding—an accident which would fling the cage with its coal or human freight out of the pit mouth—have been invented, and every section of the work has been made as safe as human ingenuity and human skill have been able to make it. But the number of disastrous explosions has not been materially reduced.

The original safety lamp, which almost everyone knows, is the predecessor of many others, each claiming to provide some unique benefit. Various mechanical devices have been created to prevent overwinding—an accident that could launch the cage with its coal or people out of the pit. Every aspect of the work has been made as safe as human creativity and skill can make it. Yet, the number of catastrophic explosions hasn't significantly decreased.

Many varieties of coal give off a gas known as marsh-gas or fire-damp. This is inflammable and, when mixed with air, violently explosive. It is the presence of this gas that necessitates the safety-lamp. There are a few kinds of mines which evolve no gas, and in these naked lights are used. But all mines must be ventilated by forcing air through them with a fan, and this air must be in sufficient quantity to keep the percentage of gas below a dangerous standard. Most mines are examined at regular intervals by a “fireman” who can estimate approximately the percentage of gas present by the size of the faintly luminous “cap” which hovers above the flame of his lamp.

Many types of coal emit a gas called marsh gas or fire-damp. This gas is flammable and can become dangerously explosive when mixed with air. It's the existence of this gas that makes safety lamps necessary. There are some kinds of mines that do not produce any gas, allowing the use of open flames. However, all mines need to be ventilated by pushing air through them with a fan, and this air must be sufficient to keep the gas level below a dangerous threshold. Most mines are regularly inspected by a "fireman" who can roughly gauge the gas concentration by observing the size of the faintly glowing "cap" that floats above the flame of his lamp.

Explosions have occurred, however, in cases where it is extremely doubtful whether gas has been present in dangerous quantity, and attention has been drawn to the possible causes. Many varieties of coal produce a quantity of fine dust which settles in the roadways, on roof, and sides, and floor. For many years there has been a controversy as to the relative importance of gas and dust in producing explosions, and the question is still one which gives rise to a lively difference of opinion. But there is no doubt that a mixture of coal-dust and air is explosive, and that even if an explosion is started by gas the disturbance creates clouds of dust which gives rise to secondary explosions and spread the disaster over a wider field than was originally affected.

Explosions have happened, though, in situations where it's really questionable whether gas was present in dangerous amounts, and attention has been called to potential causes. Many types of coal create a lot of fine dust that settles on the roads, roofs, sides, and floors. For many years, there’s been a debate about the relative importance of gas versus dust in causing explosions, and this question still sparks lively disagreements. However, it's clear that a mix of coal dust and air is explosive, and even if an explosion starts with gas, the disturbance generates clouds of dust that can cause secondary explosions and spread the disaster over a larger area than initially affected.

Mounds of coal on dock

Courtesy of the Link-Belt Co., Chicago.

Thanks to Link-Belt Co., Chicago.

Handling Coal

Dealing with Coal

Four-ton grab buckets operating on the four bridge-tramways pick up the coal from the hold of lake steamers and deposit it either on the dock or in cars. The four machines can be moved to any part of the dock to which steamers are moored and four ships can be unloaded rapidly at one time. The motive power is electricity.

Four-ton grab buckets working on the four bridge-tramways lift coal from the hold of lake steamers and drop it either on the dock or into cars. The four machines can be relocated to any part of the dock where steamers are tied up, allowing four ships to be unloaded quickly at the same time. The power source is electricity.

Mounds of anthracite in storage

Courtesy of the J. M. Dodge Co.

Courtesy of the J. M. Dodge Co.

Storing Coal

Coal Storage

A 480,000-ton anthracite coal storage plant. Coal cars are dumped into hoppers under the tracks and the coal carried to the top of the piles by conveyors. It is reloaded into cars by other conveyors operating at the base of each pile. This system has been of great value in preventing a shortage of coal during strikes.

A 480,000-ton anthracite coal storage facility. Coal cars are unloaded into hoppers beneath the tracks, and conveyors transport the coal to the top of the piles. It is then loaded back into cars using other conveyors that operate at the base of each pile. This system has been incredibly helpful in avoiding coal shortages during strikes.

Consequently a plan has been evolved for the ventilating current to be reversed periodically, in order to remove dust which has settled on the side of timbering and crevices, and the roadways to be watered in order to allay the dust. A plan has also been tried of spreading fine stone-dust in the roadways. This mixes with the coal-dust and renders it less inflammable.

Consequently, a plan has been developed to periodically reverse the ventilation current to remove dust that has settled on the timber and in crevices, and the roadways will be watered to reduce the dust. A method has also been tested of spreading fine stone dust on the roadways. This mixes with the coal dust and makes it less flammable.

Unfortunately the disastrous effects of an explosion do not end with the explosion itself. The main products of combustion, whether of fire-damp or coal-dust, are carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide. The latter causes suffocation and the former is a dangerous poison. It is the dreaded “after-damp” of the miner. Those who survive an explosion are therefore in danger of suffocation or poisoning, and it becomes imperative to restore the circulation of the air with the least possible delay. For even if the fan has escaped injury, fallen portions of the roof may have choked up some of the roadways, or the explosion may have torn down doorways and provided a short cut for the air. But if the atmosphere is dangerous for men in the pit at the time, it is equally dangerous for others to go down and effect repairs or render first aid.

Unfortunately, the devastating effects of an explosion don’t stop with the explosion itself. The main combustion products, whether from fire-damp or coal dust, are carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide. The latter causes suffocation, while the former is a toxic poison. It’s the feared “after-damp” for miners. Those who survive an explosion are therefore at risk of suffocation or poisoning, making it crucial to restore air circulation as quickly as possible. Even if the fan is unharmed, debris from the roof may have blocked some pathways, or the explosion might have knocked down doorways and created shortcuts for air. However, if the atmosphere is hazardous for the men in the pit at that moment, it’s just as dangerous for others to go down and make repairs or provide first aid.

The work of the rescue party is therefore a labor of desperate heroism and often attended by additional loss of life. It has recently been found possible to reduce the dangers of after-damp by providing rescue parties with respirators fitting over the mouth and nose, and supplied with oxygen from two steel bottles of the compressed gas strapped across the back. An effective apparatus of this kind, such as has been adopted by the United States Government for the use of the Bureau of Mines Rescue Crew, is shown in the accompanying illustration. The bag in front is known as a “breathing bag” and has separate compartments for the inhaling and exhaling, the tube at the right leading to the former and that at the left to the exhaling compartment, which usually contains sticks of caustic soda to absorb the carbon dioxide exhaled by the wearer.

The work of the rescue team is a tough job filled with extreme bravery and often results in additional loss of life. Recently, it's been possible to reduce the risks of after-damp by equipping rescue teams with respirators that fit over the mouth and nose and provide oxygen from two steel tanks of compressed gas strapped to their backs. An effective device like this, which has been adopted by the United States Government for the Bureau of Mines Rescue Crew, is shown in the accompanying illustration. The bag at the front is called a “breathing bag” and has separate sections for inhaling and exhaling, with the tube on the right leading to the inhaling part and the one on the left going to the exhaling section, which usually contains sticks of caustic soda to absorb the carbon dioxide breathed out by the user.

Coal is largely formed from vast masses of vegetable matter deposited through the luxuriant growth of plants in former epochs of the earth’s history. In the varieties of coal in common use the combined effects of pressure, heat and chemical action upon the substance have left few traces of its vegetable origin; but in the sandstones, clays and shales accompanying the coal the plants to which it principally owes its origin are presented in a fossil state in great profusion and frequently with their structure so distinctly retained, although replaced by mineral substances, as to enable the microscopist to determine their botanical affinities with existing species. Trees of considerable magnitude have also been brought to light.

Coal is mainly made from large amounts of plant material that were deposited during the rich plant growth in earlier periods of Earth's history. In the different types of coal we commonly use, the combined effects of pressure, heat, and chemical processes have left few signs of its plant origins. However, in the sandstones, clays, and shales found alongside the coal, the plants that primarily contributed to its formation are present in fossil form in great abundance, often preserving their structure so clearly, even though it has been replaced by minerals, that a microscopist can identify their botanical relationships to existing species. Large trees have also been discovered.

Geological profile of coal field

Section of Part of a Coal-field, Showing a Succession of Buried Trees and Land Surface

Section of a Coal Field, Displaying a Sequence of Buried Trees and the Land Surface

a, sandstones.
b, shales.
c, coal-seams.
d, under-clays or soils.

a, sandstones.
b, shales.
c, coal seams.
d, underclays or soils.

The animal remains found in the coal-measures indicate that some of the rocks have been deposited in fresh water, probably in lakes, while others are obviously of estuarine origin, or have been deposited at the mouths of rivers alternately occupied by fresh and salt water. The great system of strata in which coal is chiefly found is known as the carboniferous.

The animal remains found in the coal deposits show that some of the rocks were formed in fresh water, likely in lakes, while others clearly come from estuaries or were deposited at river mouths that were alternately filled with fresh and salt water. The extensive layers of rock where coal is mainly found are called the carboniferous system.

Rescue team with breathing apparatus

Mine Safety Crew

Mine Safety Team

Resuscitating victim with oxygen

Mine Rescue Work

Mine Rescue Efforts

Upper view, Bureau of Mines Rescue Crew in safety helmets, ready to enter a gas-filled mine. Lower view, resuscitating a victim overcome by gas by means of the oxygen reviving apparatus.

Upper view, Bureau of Mines Rescue Crew in safety helmets, ready to enter a gas-filled mine. Lower view, reviving a victim who was overcome by gas using the oxygen resuscitation device.

Machine to press coal dust into briquettes

Briquetting Machine

Briquette Maker

Enormous quantities of coal are lost at the mines in coal dust. By adding a binding material, such as pitch, and pressing the mixture into briquettes or small bricks, an excellent fuel is made.

Enormous amounts of coal are wasted in the mines as coal dust. By adding a binding material like pitch and pressing the mixture into briquettes or small bricks, a great fuel is produced.

Rescue workers in mine with canary

Mine Rescue Work

Mine Rescue Operations

The mine rescue crew is using the canary-bird test for poisonous gas. The bird succumbs to gas earlier than a man and thus indicates a dangerous condition of the atmosphere. The canary is revived by oxygen and the crew puts on safety helmets before proceeding.

The mine rescue crew is using the canary test for toxic gas. The bird reacts to the gas sooner than a human, alerting them to a hazardous atmosphere. They can revive the canary with oxygen, and then the crew puts on safety helmets before moving forward.

There are many varieties of coal, varying considerably in their composition, as anthracite, nearly pure carbon, and burning with little flame, much used for furnaces and malt kilns; bituminous, a softer and more free-burning variety; and cannel or “gas-coal,” which burns readily like a candle, and is much used in gasmaking. The terms semi-anthracite, semi-bituminous, coking coal, splint coal, etc., are also applied according to peculiarities.

There are many types of coal, which differ significantly in their composition. There's anthracite, which is nearly pure carbon and burns with little flame; it's commonly used for furnaces and malt kilns. Then there's bituminous, a softer and more freely burning type. Cannel or "gas-coal" burns easily like a candle and is widely used in gas production. Other terms like semi-anthracite, semi-bituminous, coking coal, and splint coal are also used based on specific characteristics.

All varieties agree in containing from 60 to over 90 per cent of carbon, the other elements being chiefly oxygen and hydrogen, and frequently a small portion of nitrogen. Lignite or brown coal may contain only 50 per cent of carbon. For manufacturing purposes coals are generally considered to consist of two parts, the volatile or bituminous portion, which yields the gas used for lighting, and the substance, comparatively fixed, usually known as coke, which is obtained by heating the coals in ovens or other close arrangements.

All types contain between 60 to over 90 percent carbon, with the other elements mainly being oxygen and hydrogen, and often a small amount of nitrogen. Lignite, or brown coal, may have as little as 50 percent carbon. For manufacturing purposes, coals are typically seen as having two components: the volatile or bituminous part, which produces the gas used for lighting, and the more stable material, commonly referred to as coke, which is created by heating the coals in ovens or similar confined setups.

About 260,000,000 tons of coal are annually mined in Britain, the value being over $300,000,000. Large quantities are exported. The British coal-fields, though comparatively extensive (covering about 9,000 square miles), are far surpassed by those of several other countries, as the United States and China, the former having coal-fields estimated to cover about 451,000 square miles; the latter over 200,000 square miles. Britain no longer mines the largest quantity, having been far surpassed by the United States. Other countries in which coal is worked are Belgium, France, Germany, Russia, India, New South Wales and Canada. China has hitherto mined only on a small scale.

About 260 million tons of coal are mined every year in Britain, with a value exceeding $300 million. Large amounts are exported. The British coalfields, while relatively extensive (covering about 9,000 square miles), are far outdone by those of several other countries, like the United States and China, with the U.S. coalfields estimated to cover around 451,000 square miles and China over 200,000 square miles. Britain is no longer the largest producer, having been significantly surpassed by the United States. Other countries where coal is mined include Belgium, France, Germany, Russia, India, New South Wales, and Canada. China has so far only mined on a small scale.

The annual production of anthracite coal in Pennsylvania is more than 86,000,000 tons of 2,240 pounds, valued at the mines at $198,000,000. In 1910 there were produced of bituminous coal 388,222,868 tons, valued at $463,654,776; amount of coke manufactured, 37,000,000 tons. This was distributed widely over the country, the greatest producers, after Pennsylvania, being Illinois, West Virginia, Ohio, Alabama and Colorado.

The annual production of anthracite coal in Pennsylvania is over 86,000,000 tons (2,240 pounds each), worth $198,000,000 at the mines. In 1910, bituminous coal production reached 388,222,868 tons, valued at $463,654,776, with 37,000,000 tons of coke produced. This was distributed widely across the country, with the biggest producers after Pennsylvania being Illinois, West Virginia, Ohio, Alabama, and Colorado.

Recently a very large output of coal has been discovered in Alaska, the value of which is as yet undetermined, though it is believed to hold a vast quantity of coal. The value of the western coal-fields also is far from known, and since 1906 very extensive tracts of coal-bearing lands have been withdrawn from settlement, principally in Wyoming, Montana, Colorado, Utah and New Mexico, their beds being largely of lignite. These cover about 50,000,000 acres, and, with those of Alaska, are held by the government as national assets. The mines of Alaska are claimed to be exceedingly rich, both in bituminous and anthracite coal, the beds examined being estimated to contain 15,000,000,000 tons, while there are large districts unexamined. They have not yet been worked, the government keeping them back for public ownership.

Recently, a massive coal deposit has been found in Alaska, the value of which is still uncertain, but it's believed to contain a huge amount of coal. The worth of the western coal fields is also not well known, and since 1906, extensive areas of coal-rich land have been set aside from settlement, mainly in Wyoming, Montana, Colorado, Utah, and New Mexico, with much of it being lignite. These areas cover about 50,000,000 acres, and along with those in Alaska, are held by the government as national assets. The coal mines in Alaska are claimed to be extremely rich in both bituminous and anthracite coal, with the examined beds estimated to hold 15,000,000,000 tons, while there are large areas that haven't been explored yet. They haven't been mined yet, as the government is reserving them for public ownership.


How can We Hear through the Walls of a Room?

We are able to hear easily through the walls of many rooms because the material used in those walls are good conductors of sound. We know that some things are better conductors of heat than others, and just in that same way, some things conduct sound better than others. Wood has been shown to be an even better conductor of sound than air. Most of us have stood at the foot of an overhead trolley pole to see if we could hear a car coming, and we know that the reason we did this was because we could hear the wire humming, when we put our ears against the pole, even though we could not hear any sound in the air.

We can easily hear through the walls of many rooms because the materials in those walls are good at conducting sound. We know that some things conduct heat better than others, and similarly, some materials conduct sound better than others. Wood is actually a better conductor of sound than air. Many of us have stood at the foot of an overhead trolley pole to see if we could hear a car coming, and we know this is because we could hear the wire humming when we pressed our ears against the pole, even though there was no sound traveling through the air.

When we are in a room that has wooden walls we can hear sounds in the next room very plainly, not because the wall is thin, but because the wood in the wall is a good conductor of sound. Other walls made of different kinds of material, are not as good conductors of sound. While you may hear through them, you cannot hear as plainly as you can through a wooden wall.

When we’re in a room with wooden walls, we can hear sounds from the next room very clearly, not because the wall is thin, but because the wood is a good conductor of sound. Walls made from other materials aren’t as effective at transmitting sound. While you might hear sounds through those walls, it’s not as clear as it is with a wooden wall.

What is a Diesel Engine Like?

The Diesel engine has caused a great deal of comment of late years because of the spectacular uses to which it has been successfully applied. A specially constructed Diesel engine was probably the chief aid in the accomplishment of the first submarine trans-Atlantic voyage by the German submarine “Deutschland.”

The Diesel engine has generated a lot of discussion in recent years due to the impressive applications it has been effectively used for. A specially built Diesel engine was likely the main factor in achieving the first submarine trans-Atlantic journey by the German submarine “Deutschland.”

It is an oil engine which was invented by Rudolph Diesel in 1893.

It’s an oil engine that was invented by Rudolf Diesel in 1893.

The engine operates at compression pressures very much higher than those used in any other internal combustion engines, and it dispenses with the usual igniting devices by rendering the air charge incandescent by compression.

The engine works at compression pressures much higher than those used in any other internal combustion engines, and it eliminates the typical ignition devices by heating the air charge to a glowing state through compression.

Diesel engine

The Diesel Engine

The Diesel Engine

The efficiency of the Diesel engine is high, and it can use low grades of fuel, but it has the disadvantage of greater weight per horse-power than other engines.

The Diesel engine is very efficient and can run on lower quality fuel, but it does have the downside of being heavier per horsepower compared to other engines.

It has found increasing favor for use in marine propulsion, and in 1913 was adapted to high-speed railway service, and put into use in Germany.

It has become more popular for marine propulsion, and in 1913, it was adapted for high-speed train service and implemented in Germany.

What does the Sheep-Grower Get for the Wool in a Suit of Clothes?

A man’s ordinary three-piece fall suit has about nine pounds of wool in it. Such a suit might cost somewhere between twenty and forty dollars, depending on whether it was bought ready made or whether it was made to order. If the price was questioned, the retailer would probably explain that it was all wool and that the wool cost was the reason it was expensive, and still the sheep-man who raised the wool only received an average of about eighteen cents a pound, or $1.62, for all the wool used on the suit.

A man's typical three-piece fall suit contains about nine pounds of wool. This suit might cost anywhere from twenty to forty dollars, depending on whether it was purchased off the rack or custom-made. If someone asked about the price, the seller would likely point out that it's all wool, and the cost of the wool is what makes it pricier. Meanwhile, the sheep farmer who produced the wool only gets about eighteen cents per pound, or $1.62, for all the wool used in the suit.

Of course, the largest part of the cost of a suit of clothes is really accounted for by the cost of transportation, weaving, tailoring and selling, but we must all agree that the sheep-man who tends the flock all winter and cuts the wool in the spring is not to blame for high prices.

Of course, the biggest part of the cost of a suit of clothes actually comes from the costs of transportation, weaving, tailoring, and selling. But we all have to agree that the sheep farmer who takes care of the flock all winter and shears the wool in the spring isn't the one to blame for high prices.


The Story in a Silver Teaspoon[16]

The spoon is older than history. There is, perhaps, no article or utensil of common use today that can trace an earlier origin. The evolution and development of the spoon into the graceful and beautiful forms in use on our tables is fascinating and instructive.

The spoon is older than recorded history. There’s probably no item or utensil we commonly use today that has an earlier origin. The evolution and development of the spoon into the elegant and beautiful shapes we use at our tables is both fascinating and educational.

Primitive men of the Stone Age used an implement that might by courtesy be called a spoon. From then on down through the Egyptian, Greek and Roman civilizations it can be clearly traced in varying forms and substances—wood, shell, flint, bone, ivory, bronze and the precious metals, gold and silver.

Primitive humans of the Stone Age used a tool that might kindly be called a spoon. From that point forward, it can be clearly traced through the Egyptian, Greek, and Roman civilizations in various forms and materials—wood, shell, flint, bone, ivory, bronze, and precious metals like gold and silver.

A witty Frenchman has said that spoons, if not as old as the world, are certainly as old as soup.

A clever Frenchman once said that spoons, while they may not be as old as the world, are definitely as old as soup.

In the Bible is the first recorded mention of the use of spoons made of precious metal. This reference is the twenty-fifth chapter of the Book of Exodus, wherein the Lord commanded Moses to make golden spoons for the Tabernacle.

In the Bible, the first recorded mention of spoons made of precious metal can be found. This reference is in the twenty-fifth chapter of the Book of Exodus, where the Lord instructed Moses to create golden spoons for the Tabernacle.

Excavations in Egypt have brought to light early examples of spoons of various materials, and it is certain that the early Greeks and Romans used gold and silver spoons, both at the table and in the Temple. Early specimens of spoons made of wood, ivory, bronze, silver and gold are preserved in the museums of Europe and Egypt.

Excavations in Egypt have uncovered early examples of spoons made from various materials, and it’s clear that the early Greeks and Romans used gold and silver spoons, both at the dinner table and in temples. Early examples of spoons made from wood, ivory, bronze, silver, and gold can be found in museums across Europe and Egypt.

During the early Christian and medieval eras spoons were in common use. Saxon and Early English examples are to be seen in the English museums today.

During the early Christian and medieval periods, spoons were commonly used. Saxon and Early English examples can be seen in English museums today.

The medieval spoon was of silver, horn or wood, etc. On the Continent, silver spoons were made much earlier than in England. In Italy they were in use probably long before 1000 A. D.

The medieval spoon was made of silver, horn, or wood, etc. On the Continent, silver spoons were created much earlier than in England. In Italy, they were likely in use well before 1000 A.D.

During the Tudor and Stuart reigns a fashionable gift at christenings was the apostle, so called because at the end of the handle was the figure of an apostle. Sometimes a thirteenth spoon was added, called the “Master” spoon, because it bore the figure of Christ. A complete set was a very valuable gift, and could only be afforded by the rich.

During the Tudor and Stuart periods, a popular gift at christenings was the apostle spoon, named for the figure of an apostle at the end of the handle. Sometimes, a thirteenth spoon, known as the “Master” spoon, was included because it featured the figure of Christ. A complete set was a highly valuable gift, affordable only to the wealthy.

Folks of limited means used copper, pewter, latten or alchemy spoons; the latter two materials being somewhat like brass, examples of which are sometimes found in this country in the graves of Indians of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, showing their intercourse with early English traders.

People with limited resources used copper, pewter, latten, or alchemy spoons; the last two materials are somewhat similar to brass. Examples of these have occasionally been discovered in this country in the graves of Indigenous people from the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, indicating their interactions with early English traders.

At this period the stems were hexagonal, ending in an acorn, a bird or a ball, while the bowls were fig shape. Later the stems were baluster shape with a seal top, and at the time of the Commonwealth the stem became flat and perfectly plain. These latter are called “Puritan” spoons.

At this time, the stems were hexagonal, ending in a design of an acorn, a bird, or a ball, while the bowls were shaped like figs. Later on, the stems took on a baluster shape with a seal top, and during the Commonwealth period, the stem became flat and completely plain. These latter ones are referred to as “Puritan” spoons.

Naturally, the early New England colonists brought with them the spoons they had used at home, and the early Colonial silversmiths followed closely the designs which they found at hand or which were later imported from England. In fact, within a few years after a certain type had become popular in the mother country, it was adopted in this country as the fashionable style. It is, therefore, easy to date, approximately, an American-made spoon, because it follows so closely in style the dated or hall-marked English spoon.

Naturally, the early New England colonists brought the spoons they used at home, and the early Colonial silversmiths closely followed the designs they found or those that were later imported from England. In fact, within a few years after a particular style became popular in the mother country, it was adopted here as the trendy style. Therefore, it’s easy to date an American-made spoon because it closely resembles the style of dated or hallmarked English spoons.

During the last quarter of the seventeenth century, both in England and America, spoons were generally of a style now known as rat-tail. From the end of the handle, down the back of the bowl to about the middle, ran a ridge shaped like a rat-tail.[254] This is sometimes thought to have been an attempt to strengthen the spoon, but its use must have been purely ornamental, for it adds little strength to these strongly made spoons. Sometimes the rat-tail was shaped like a long V and grooved, while on each side were elaborate scrolls. The bowl was perfectly oval in shape, while the end of the handle was notched or trifid.

During the last quarter of the seventeenth century, both in England and America, spoons were commonly styled as rat-tail. A ridge that looked like a rat-tail ran from the end of the handle down the back of the bowl to about the middle.[254] This is sometimes thought to have been an effort to strengthen the spoon, but its purpose was likely decorative, as it adds little strength to these well-made spoons. Sometimes, the rat-tail was shaped like a long V and had grooves, with elaborate scrolls on each side. The bowl was perfectly oval, while the end of the handle was notched or bifurcated.

American-Indian latten spoons

Latten Spoons

Latten Spoons

One found in an Indian grave at Deerfield, Mass., and the other in an Indian grave at Hadley, Mass. Period of about 1660. Actual size, 6 inches and 614 inches.

One was found in an Indian grave at Deerfield, Mass., and the other in an Indian grave at Hadley, Mass. Dating back to around 1660. Actual size: 6 inches and 614 inches.

This style of spoon was continued, with modifications, through the first third of the eighteenth century. Then the bowl became ovoid, or egg-shaped, and the end of the handle was rounded, without the notch.

This style of spoon continued, with some changes, through the first third of the eighteenth century. Then the bowl became oval, or egg-shaped, and the end of the handle was rounded, without the notch.

The rat-tail was gradually replaced by what is known as the drop, or double drop, frequently terminating in a conventionalized flower or shell, or anthemion, while down the front of the handle ran a rib.

The rat-tail was gradually replaced by what is now called the drop or double drop, often ending in a stylized flower or shell, or anthemion, while a rib ran down the front of the handle.

Later, the bowl became more pointed, the drop was replaced by a tongue, and the handle, after 1760, instead of slightly curving to the front at the end, reversed the position. Somewhat later, the handle became pointed, and was engraved with bright, cut ornaments and a cartouch at the end in which were engraved the initials of the owner.

Later, the bowl became more pointed, the drop was replaced by a tongue, and after 1760, the handle stopped curving slightly to the front at the end and switched direction. A bit later, the handle became pointed and was decorated with bright, cut ornaments and a cartouche at the end that had the owner's initials engraved on it.

During the first ten years of the nineteenth century a popular style was the so-called coffin-shaped handle, succeeded, probably about 1810, by a handle with a shoulder just above the junction with the bowl, while the end became fiddle-shaped or of a style now known as tipped, shapes produced to this day.

During the first ten years of the 1800s, a popular style was the coffin-shaped handle, which was likely replaced around 1810 by a handle that had a shoulder just above where it met the bowl. At the same time, the end of the handle became fiddle-shaped or adopted a style now referred to as tipped, designs that are still made today.

Until about 1770, spoons were of three sizes: the teaspoon, as small as an after-dinner coffee spoon; the porringer spoon, a little smaller than our present dessert size; and the tablespoon, with a handle somewhat shorter than that of today.

Until around 1770, spoons came in three sizes: the teaspoon, which was as small as a modern after-dinner coffee spoon; the porringer spoon, which was a bit smaller than today’s dessert spoon; and the tablespoon, which had a handle that was somewhat shorter than our current ones.

So few silver forks have been found in collections of old silver that it forces the belief that they were generally made of steel, with bone handles. There seems no reason why, if in general use, silver forks should not now be as common as spoons.

So few silver forks have been found in collections of old silver that it leads to the belief that they were usually made of steel, with bone handles. There doesn't seem to be any reason why, if they were widely used, silver forks shouldn't be just as common as spoons today.

In the great silver exhibition recently held in the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, of more than one thousand pieces, there were only two forks to be found.

In the recent silver exhibition at the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, which featured over a thousand pieces, only two forks were on display.

Great skill was developed by the early silversmiths of England and America. The purity and gracefulness of design in many cases remain as standards for our best craftsmen today. It is, however, erroneous to suppose that all of the ornamentation was done by hand.

Great skill was developed by the early silversmiths of England and America. The purity and elegance of design in many cases remain as standards for our best craftsmen today. It is, however, incorrect to assume that all of the ornamentation was done by hand.

Ornaments on the back of spoon bowls and handles were impressed by dies forced together by drop presses or under screw pressure. This is absolutely proven by the exact duplication of the pattern on sets of spoons. Accurate measurements show that these ornaments were not handwork, for there is not the slightest deviation in dimensions.

Ornaments on the back of spoon bowls and handles were stamped using dies pressed together by drop presses or with screw pressure. This is clearly demonstrated by the precise duplication of the pattern on sets of spoons. Accurate measurements indicate that these ornaments were not handmade, as there is no deviation in dimensions whatsoever.

But, however beautiful the silver of our forbears and however valuable now, from a historic standpoint, there are few of us who, if given the choice, would not decide in favor of the product of the twentieth century silversmith, who brings to his creations all of the good of the old masters, and who has the facilities for turning out work more perfect in line and detail and uniformity than was ever dreamed of by the silver worker of old.

But, no matter how beautiful the silver from our ancestors is, and no matter how valuable it is today from a historical perspective, there are few of us who, if given the choice, wouldn’t pick the work of a twentieth-century silversmith. These artisans incorporate all the best qualities of the old masters while having the tools to create pieces that are more perfect in design, detail, and consistency than anything the silver workers of the past could have imagined.

Rat-tail spoons

Fronts and Backs of Two Early American Spoons of the Rat-Tail Type

Front and Back of Two Early American Rat-Tail Spoons

The spoon in the center is the earliest of that type, made about 1690. The other dates about 1695.

The spoon in the center is the earliest of its kind, made around 1690. The others date to about 1695.

We admire the beautiful silverware that we see in the shop windows, we derive satisfaction and pleasure from the daily use of silver on our tables, but few people[256] have any understanding how silver plate is made; and there is, perhaps, still less knowledge of its interesting history.

We admire the beautiful silverware in the shop windows, and we enjoy using silver on our tables every day, but few people[256] really understand how silver plating is made. There's probably even less awareness of its fascinating history.

The combining of two separate metals—that is, the plating of a base metal with a finer one—was, until the eighteenth century, a lost art of the ancients.

The process of combining two different metals—specifically, covering a base metal with a finer one—was, until the eighteenth century, a forgotten skill of ancient times.

The application of one metal upon another was practiced by the Assyrians, who overlapped iron with bronze; copper implements and ornaments coated with silver have been found at Herculaneum, while many ancient Roman specimens of harness and armor are found to be ornamented with silver on copper. The Aztecs of Mexico and the Incas of Peru used the process of fixing two metals together by the action of heat, before making up. The method was also known to the old Celts, as shown by specimens found in Iceland. It seems, however, to have been a lost art in Europe, probably because up to the thirteenth century the Church had control of the arts and crafts in England, and the finer metal work was used only for church vessels, the household implements being very simple and mostly of wood and cheap metal.

The Assyrians practiced applying one metal over another, overlapping iron with bronze. Archaeologists have found copper tools and ornaments coated with silver at Herculaneum, and many ancient Roman examples of harness and armor are decorated with silver on copper. The Aztecs in Mexico and the Incas in Peru used heat to bond two metals together before shaping them. This technique was also known to the ancient Celts, as evidenced by artifacts discovered in Iceland. However, it appears to have been a lost art in Europe, likely because, until the thirteenth century, the Church controlled crafts and arts in England, and finer metalwork was reserved for church vessels, while household items were usually simple and made mainly of wood and inexpensive metal.

Horace Walpole, writing in 1760, states: “I passed through Sheffield, a business town in a charming situation, with 22,000 inhabitants, and they remit £11,000 a week to London. One man there has discovered the art of plating copper with silver.”

Horace Walpole, writing in 1760, states: “I passed through Sheffield, a business town in a lovely location, with 22,000 residents, and they send £11,000 a week to London. One person there has figured out how to plate copper with silver.”

The inventor to whom the quotation refers was Thomas Bolsover, a skilled silversmith, who, in the year 1742, it is traditionally reported, while repairing a thin layer of silver on the copper handle of a knife, evolved the idea of combining copper with silver in layers ready for manufacture into any desired form.

The inventor mentioned in the quote was Thomas Bolsover, a talented silversmith, who, in 1742, is said to have come up with the idea of layering copper with silver while fixing a thin layer of silver on the copper handle of a knife, which made it possible to prepare them for manufacturing into any shape.

Coffin-handled spoons

Table and Teaspoon with the So-called Coffin-shaped Handle

Table and Teaspoon with the So-Called Coffin-Shaped Handle

A shape peculiar to America. This type common from 1800 to 1815. Reductions about one-half.

A shape unique to America. This style was common from 1800 to 1815. Sizes reduced by about half.

Bolsover himself apparently did not appreciate the importance of this invention, and it remained for Joseph Hancock, one of his apprentices, to develop the idea to a commercial success. He vigorously encouraged the trade in Sheffield, Birmingham and other manufacturing centers, and finally constructed a rolling-mill and made his fortune by supplying the plate to the silversmiths.

Bolsover himself apparently did not recognize the significance of this invention, and it was left to Joseph Hancock, one of his apprentices, to turn the idea into a commercial success. He actively promoted the trade in Sheffield, Birmingham, and other manufacturing hubs, and ultimately built a rolling mill, making his fortune by supplying the plate to the silversmiths.

The earlier specimens of this Sheffield plate, as it came to be known, had the silver on one side of the copper only, but later attempts were made to improve the appearance of finer pieces by covering the underside of the copper with tin.

The earlier examples of this Sheffield plate, as it became known, only had silver on one side of the copper. However, later efforts were made to enhance the look of finer pieces by covering the underside of the copper with tin.

Crude as this idea and the old methods of manufacture may seem, compared with modern processes, this old plate found a ready sale. It replaced in many households pewter ware which, until the introduction of Sheffield plate, was the best substitute for sterling silver. It became fashionable for everyday use by the nobility and wealthier families, who put aside their solid silverware to be used on state occasions only. The name “plate,” which is from the Spanish word platte, came to be used generally to designate the imitation of solid silver.

Crude as this idea and the old manufacturing methods may seem compared to modern processes, this old plate sold well. It replaced pewter ware in many households, which had been the best substitute for sterling silver until Sheffield plate was introduced. It became fashionable for everyday use among the nobility and wealthier families, who set aside their solid silverware for state occasions only. The name “plate,” which comes from the Spanish word platte, became commonly used to refer to imitation solid silver.

This plate, being such a close imitation of solid silver, was not permitted by the laws of England to bear any stamp whatever prior to 1773, when the town of Sheffield was specially privileged to put upon its product the marks of the makers. These marks, however, were not to bear any resemblance of the lion or leopard’s head, these being the hall-marks of England.

This plate, closely resembling solid silver, was not allowed by English law to have any stamp at all before 1773, when the town of Sheffield was given special permission to mark its products with the makers’ marks. However, these marks couldn’t look anything like the lion or leopard’s head, which are the hallmark symbols of England.

It was not until 1785 that this privilege was extended to the town of Birmingham and other manufacturing centers.

It wasn't until 1785 that this privilege was granted to the town of Birmingham and other manufacturing centers.

It is curious to note that this law against the imitation of silver, which really dated from the fifteenth century, made a special exception to articles made for the Church.

It’s interesting to point out that this law against imitating silver, which actually originated in the fifteenth century, made a special exception for items created for the Church.

Sometimes this old Sheffield plate, in addition to bearing the maker’s name, bore the name of the lord or earl for whom it was made, and today these old pieces are more highly valued by their owners than silver which is intrinsically more valuable.

Sometimes this old Sheffield plate, in addition to showing the maker’s name, displayed the name of the lord or earl for whom it was made, and today, these old pieces are valued more highly by their owners than silver, which is actually worth more.

Much of the charm of old plate was in its beauty of form and design, for the work attracted the best of English artisans. It would appear, too, that they were fairly well paid for their labor, as Pepys, in his “Diary,” refers to a present made him of a pair of flagons which cost £100. “They are said to be worth five shillings, some say ten shillings, an ounce for the fashion.”

Much of the appeal of old plate was in its beautiful shape and design, as it attracted the finest English craftsmen. It seems they were also fairly compensated for their work, as Pepys mentions in his “Diary” a gift of a pair of flagons that cost £100. “They’re said to be worth five shillings, some say ten shillings, an ounce for the style.”

Westminster spoon Frontenac spoon Brandon spoon
Westminster Frontenac Brandon
Modern Designs

The first notable improvement over the Sheffield work came toward the middle of the nineteenth century, when electro-silver plating was first practiced and, in 1847, commercially perfected, by Rogers Brothers of Hartford, Conn.

The first significant advancement over the Sheffield work occurred around the middle of the nineteenth century when electro-silver plating was first used and, in 1847, commercially refined by Rogers Brothers of Hartford, Conn.

The marvelous force of electricity was brought to bear on the making of silver-plated knives, forks, spoons, etc., as well as hollow-ware articles, such as coffee and tea pots, water pitchers, sugar bowls and platters. Instead of these articles being made of sheets of rolled copper and silver, a silver plate of any desired thickness is applied to the base metal by electricity.

The amazing power of electricity was used in the production of silver-plated knives, forks, spoons, and other hollow-ware items like coffee and tea pots, water pitchers, sugar bowls, and platters. Instead of these items being crafted from rolled sheets of copper and silver, a layer of silver of any desired thickness is applied to the base metal using electricity.

This quick and less expensive method of manufacture rendered silver plate available to all classes, and the Sheffield plate was quickly superseded, the old method of manufacture becoming obsolete.

This faster and cheaper way of making things made silver plating accessible to everyone, and Sheffield plate was soon replaced, leaving the old manufacturing method outdated.

While the process of manufacture was cheapened, the newer craftsmen wisely held to the art standards of the old masters. With the new process came the perfection of modern construction, and the cost is so much less than in the old days that a perfect table service of authentic design, of quality beyond question and guaranteed in every respect, is within the reach of any well-to-do family. Many of the old family pieces of Sheffield have found their way into the melting pot in exchange for the modern electro-plated silverware.

While manufacturing became cheaper, the new craftsmen wisely maintained the artistic standards of the old masters. With the new processes came the perfection of modern construction, and the costs are so much lower than before that a perfect set of authentic-designed tableware, of unquestionable quality and guaranteed in every respect, is now accessible to any well-off family. Many old family pieces from Sheffield have been melted down in exchange for modern electro-plated silverware.

The making of silver-plated flatware is an interesting process and one that requires a great amount of skill and care. The finished teaspoon, as it lies in the show-case or chest, is the result of over thirty distinct operations, while a plain silver-plated steel knife has passed through thirty-six stages in its evolution from the bit of steel rod, in which shape it begins its journey. Some of the more important steps in the making of a spoon are briefly described below:

The process of making silver-plated flatware is fascinating and involves a lot of skill and attention to detail. The finished teaspoon, whether showcased or stored, is the result of more than thirty different operations, while a simple silver-plated steel knife goes through thirty-six stages from the initial steel rod shape at the start of its transformation. Here are some of the key steps in making a spoon:

The Blank.

The metal underlying the silver plate of the best plated teaspoons is of nickel silver, a trade name for a metal composed of nickel, copper and zinc. This metal is procured in sheet form of varying lengths. From this sheet is cut a blank, which bears little resemblance to a spoon, being about half the length of the finished article and very much wider.

The metal beneath the silver layer of the best plated teaspoons is nickel silver, which is a term for a metal made up of nickel, copper, and zinc. This metal is supplied in sheet form in various lengths. From this sheet, a blank is cut, which looks very little like a spoon—it's about half the length of the final product and significantly wider.

Squeezed.

The blank is then “squeezed,” which gives to the part that is to become the handle a little more of the appearance that it will have later.

The blank is then “squeezed,” which gives the part that will become the handle a bit more of the appearance it will have later.

Rolling.

This “squeezed” blank is then passed through a series of steel rolls, giving length to the handle and width to the bowl, and distributing the metal according to the correct thickness—that is, the bowl will be thin and the shank thick.

This "squeezed" blank is then fed through a series of steel rollers, elongating the handle and widening the bowl, while evenly spreading the metal to achieve the right thickness—that is, the bowl will be thin and the shank will be thick.

Clipping.

The next process is termed “clipping,” the spoon being cut out from the blank in the correct outline of the pattern.

The next step is called “clipping,” where the spoon is cut out from the blank following the exact outline of the pattern.

Annealing.

The process of rolling the metal has so compressed the latter that it cannot be readily worked. It is necessary, therefore, that the spoon be annealed—that is, the shaped blanks are placed in an oven and brought to a red heat, which renders them malleable.

The process of rolling the metal has compressed it so much that it can't be easily worked anymore. Therefore, it's necessary to anneal the spoon—that is, the shaped pieces are put in an oven and heated until they're red hot, making them malleable.

The Evolution of a Spoon.

From the crude blank of nickel silver to the finished spoon, there are over thirty distinct operations necessary, a few of the more important stages being illustrated. When the spoon emerges from the plating solution (see No. 8), it is perfectly white and looks as if it had been treated with a heavy coat of enamel. It is then scratch-brushed, burnished and, in some patterns, the handle is greyed. After this, the spoon is buffed and finished.

From the basic piece of nickel silver to the completed spoon, there are more than thirty different steps involved, with some of the more significant stages shown. When the spoon comes out of the plating solution (see No. 8), it is completely white and looks like it has been covered with a thick layer of enamel. Then it gets scratch-brushed, polished, and for some designs, the handle is given a greyed finish. After that, the spoon is buffed and finalized.

Every operation is performed with the utmost care, and not until the piece is actually finished can this vigilance be relaxed, as it is the final processes that make the plating of pure silver an actual part of the spoon and insure its wearing qualities.

Every operation is done with great care, and only when the piece is actually finished can this attention to detail be relaxed, as the final steps are what embed the plating of pure silver into the spoon and ensure its durability.

Striking and Bowling.—The pattern is then stamped on the handle and the bowl is shaped.

Striking and Bowling.—The design is then imprinted on the handle and the bowl is molded.

Trimming, etc.—After the pattern and the bowl have been struck, there is usually a small burr left where the metal has oozed out between the dies. This is removed by trimming. The trademark is then stamped on the back of the handle.

Trimming, etc.—After the pattern and the bowl have been shaped, there’s typically a small burr left where the metal has squeezed out between the dies. This is cleaned up by trimming. The trademark is then stamped on the back of the handle.

Polishing.—The goods are put through various operations of polishing until they are brought to a high finish.

Polishing.—The products undergo several polishing processes until they achieve a high-quality finish.

Plating.—The articles to be plated are suspended in a frame in the silver solution. This frame is connected with the negative pole of a magneto-electro machine, while the silver is suspended in the solution from bars and connected with the positive or opposite pole of the machine, thereby forming a circuit for the electricity through the solution.

Plating.—The items to be plated are hung in a frame within the silver solution. This frame is linked to the negative pole of a magneto-electric machine, while the silver is suspended in the solution from bars and connected to the positive or opposite pole of the machine, creating a circuit for the electricity to flow through the solution.

Stages in the manufacture of spoons

1. The blank. 2. Squeezed. 3. Blank rolled. 4. Spoon cut from blank. 5. Design struck. 6. Bowl raised. 7. Trade-mark stamped. 8. After plating. 9. The finished spoon.

1. The blank. 2. Squeezed. 3. Blank rolled. 4. Spoon cut from blank. 5. Design made. 6. Bowl lifted. 7. Trade-mark stamped. 8. After plating. 9. The completed spoon.

A patent automatic scale, designed to weigh the silver while depositing, is balanced to the exact weight of silver to be deposited on the article. The circuit is completed by turning a switch and the plating begins.

A patented automatic scale, made to weigh the silver during the depositing process, is adjusted to the precise weight of silver required for the article. The circuit is completed by flipping a switch, and the plating starts.

As soon as the articles receive the proper weight of silver, the scale beam rises, thus making a separate connection with the electro-magnet, which springs the switch, breaking the electric current and stopping the plating at the same instant, also ringing an alarm bell to notify the workman that the articles have received the proper weight of silver.

As soon as the items reach the right amount of silver, the scale beam rises, connecting to the electro-magnet, which activates the switch, cutting off the electric current and halting the plating process at the same moment, while also sounding an alarm bell to alert the worker that the items have the correct weight of silver.

Quality.—Standard silver-plated spoons are made in two grades of plate—triple and quintuple. The former, however, is the one generally used and answers all ordinary requirements. The quintuple grade is designed more particularly for hotels, restaurants, clubs and other institutions where the wear is especially severe.

Quality.—Standard silver-plated spoons come in two grades—triple and quintuple. The triple grade is the one most commonly used and meets all typical needs. The quintuple grade is specifically made for hotels, restaurants, clubs, and other places where the wear is particularly heavy.

The Evolution of a Knife.

There are thirty-six stages in the evolution of a plain steel knife. At one end of the journey we see the cylindrical bar of steel, black and unlovely; at the other, the silver-plated knife, light, well-balanced and heavily plated with pure silver. In the case of other than plain knives, the work involves also the stamping of the pattern.

There are thirty-six steps in the development of a plain steel knife. At one end of the process, we find a cylindrical bar of steel, dull and unattractive; at the other end is the silver-plated knife, lightweight, well-balanced, and richly coated with pure silver. For knives with designs, the process also includes stamping the pattern.

Double Burnishing.—The thickness of the silver deposited, however, is not the only requisite to insure quality. The plating must be hard as well as thick. This is accomplished by means of a double-burnishing process after the article is plated and before it receives its final buffed finish.

Double Burnishing.—The thickness of the silver layer isn’t the only factor for ensuring quality. The plating also needs to be hard, not just thick. This is achieved through a double-burnishing process after the item is plated and before it gets its final buffed finish.

The first burnishing is on machines and this is followed by hand burnishing. This process produces a hard plate.

The first burnishing is done using machines, and then it's followed by hand burnishing. This process creates a hard plate.

Stages in the manufacturing of knives

1. Steel cut to length. 2. Handle formed by 1,000-pound blow. 3. Handle margin, or flash, removed. 4. Blade drawn out through a pair of rolls. 5. Blade cut out to shape. 6. Knife roughed with coarse emery. 7. Trade-mark etched. 8. After plating. 9. The finished knife.

1. Steel cut to length. 2. Handle shaped by a 1,000-pound blow. 3. Handle margin, or flash, trimmed off. 4. Blade pulled through a pair of rolls. 5. Blade cut into shape. 6. Knife smoothed with coarse emery. 7. Brand logo etched. 8. After plating. 9. The completed knife.

No matter how heavy the plate, if it is not properly burnished or hardened after plating, the article will not give satisfaction in long wear. When manufacturers treat their wares to as little burnishing as possible, practically relying upon the buff alone for their finish after plating, the result is most unsatisfactory. The buff finish looks all right, but it does not harden the silver sufficiently and in consequence the latter does not wear well. When the article comes out of the plating bath the silver deposited is in a comparatively porous and “fluffy” state. The buffing will hit the high spots but the proper process turns the minute edges, closes the pores and makes the silver hard and compact, vastly increasing the wearing quality.

No matter how heavy the plate is, if it isn’t properly burnished or hardened after plating, the item won’t hold up well over time. When manufacturers skimp on the burnishing process and mainly rely on buffing for their finish after plating, the outcome is quite disappointing. The buffed finish may look fine, but it doesn’t harden the silver enough, so it doesn’t wear well. When the item comes out of the plating bath, the silver that’s deposited is relatively porous and “fluffy.” Buffing only hits the high spots, but the right process smooths out the tiny edges, closes the pores, and makes the silver hard and dense, significantly improving its durability.

The silver thus deposited, is absolutely pure—finer, in fact, than any articles of sterling silver. Sterling is but .925 fine, requiring an alloy to stiffen it, whereas silver for plating can be used .999 fine.

The silver that has been deposited is completely pure—actually finer than any sterling silver items. Sterling is only .925 fine, needing an alloy to make it stronger, while silver for plating can be .999 fine.


How do Chimes Strike the Hour?

Chimes are ordinarily produced mechanically by the strokes of hammers against a series of bells, tuned agreeably to a given musical scale.

Chimes are usually made mechanically by hammers striking a set of bells, tuned to match a specific musical scale.

The hammers are lifted by levers acted upon by metallic pins or wooden pegs stuck in a large barrel, which is made to revolve by clockwork, and is so connected with the striking part of the clock mechanism that it is set in motion by it at certain intervals of time, usually every hour or every quarter of an hour.

The hammers are raised by levers activated by metal pins or wooden pegs inserted in a large barrel, which turns by clockwork. This barrel is linked to the striking mechanism of the clock, so it moves at specific intervals, typically every hour or every quarter-hour.

The chime mechanism is sometimes so constructed that it may be played like a piano, but with the fist instead of the fingers.

The chime mechanism is sometimes designed so that it can be played like a piano, but using the fist instead of the fingers.

Electricity transmission tower

Courtesy of the Niagara Falls Power Co.

Courtesy of the Niagara Falls Power Company.

Niagara Electric Transmission Line

Niagara Electric Transmission Line

Tower supporting high tension transmission cables of long span crossing of Niagara River between Buffalo and Fort Erie, Canada.

Tower supporting high-voltage transmission cables spanning the Niagara River between Buffalo and Fort Erie, Canada.

How is Electricity Brought into a House?

The electric transmission of power is effected by employing the source of power to drive a machine called a dynamo, which generates an electric current.

The electric transmission of power is achieved by using a power source to drive a machine called a dynamo, which produces an electric current.

This current is conveyed by a copper conductor, insulated from the earth, to the distant station, where it passes through a machine called an “electromotor,” one part of which is thereby made to revolve, and imparts its motion to the machinery which is to be driven.

This current is carried by a copper wire, insulated from the ground, to the remote station, where it goes through a device called an “electromotor,” making one part spin, and transferring its motion to the machinery that needs to be powered.

This is the simplest arrangement, and is that which is commonly employed when the original currents are not of such high tension as to be dangerous to life in the case of accidental shocks. There is, however, a great waste of power in employing low-tension currents when the distance is great; hence it is becoming a common practice to employ high-tension currents for transmission through the long conductor which connects the two stations, and to convert these into low-tension currents before they reach the houses or workshops where they are to be used. This is done sometimes by employing the high-tension currents to drive a local dynamo which generates low-tension currents.

This is the simplest setup, and it's the one that's usually used when the original currents aren't at such high voltage that they could be life-threatening in the event of accidental shocks. However, there's a lot of wasted power when using low-voltage currents over long distances; therefore, it's becoming common to use high-voltage currents for transmission through the long line connecting the two stations, and then convert them into low-voltage currents before they reach the homes or workshops where they'll be used. This is sometimes achieved by using the high-voltage currents to power a local generator that produces low-voltage currents.

The discovery that a Gramme machine is reversible—that is to say, when two Gramme machines are coupled together and one is operated as a generator, the other will act as a motor—was an important step taken in the transmission of power. Numerous efforts, since then, have been made to utilize electricity for the transmission of power over a long range. For this purpose the alternating current seems eminently adapted, as transformers only are needed to raise the line to high transmission voltage and to lower it again for use.

The discovery that a Gramme machine is reversible—meaning that when two Gramme machines are connected and one is used as a generator, the other will function as a motor—was a significant advancement in power transmission. Since then, many attempts have been made to use electricity for long-distance power transmission. For this purpose, alternating current seems particularly suitable, as only transformers are required to increase the line to high transmission voltage and then reduce it again for use.

The possibilities offered by electrical transmission of water power for sections of country favored with waterfalls are numerous and have been extensively developed, which should result in making them great industrial centers. In this direction much has been done in utilizing the immense power of the Niagara Falls by electrical transmission, works having been built for this purpose both in New York and Canada, and several hundred thousand horse-power developed. The application of the power of waterfalls to the generation of electricity is rapidly extending, and promises to become a great source of mechanical power in the future.

The potential of using electricity to transmit water power in areas with waterfalls is vast and has been greatly developed, which should lead to the growth of significant industrial hubs. A lot has been accomplished in harnessing the massive power of Niagara Falls through electrical transmission, with facilities built in both New York and Canada and several hundred thousand horsepower generated. The use of waterfall power to create electricity is spreading quickly and is expected to become a major source of mechanical power in the future.

What was the Origin of Masonic Signs?

Fable and imagination have traced back the origin of freemasonry to the Roman Empire, to the Pharaohs, the Temple of Solomon, the Tower of Babel, and even to the building of Noah’s ark. In reality, it took its rise in the middle ages along with other incorporated crafts.

Fable and imagination have traced the origin of freemasonry back to the Roman Empire, the Pharaohs, the Temple of Solomon, the Tower of Babel, and even the construction of Noah’s ark. In reality, it began in the Middle Ages along with other guilds.

Skilled masons moved from place to place to assist in building the magnificent sacred structures—cathedrals, abbeys, etc.—which had their origin in these times, and it was essential for them to have some signs by which, on coming to a strange place, they could be recognized as real craftsmen and not impostors.

Skilled masons traveled from location to location to help construct the amazing sacred buildings—cathedrals, abbeys, and more—that started during this period. It was important for them to have certain signs so that when they arrived in a new place, they could be identified as genuine craftsmen and not frauds.

What is a Dictograph?

The dictograph, to which much publicity is now given, by reason of its use in detective work, is an instrument for magnifying sound. It was invented by K. M. Turner of New York, in 1907.

The dictograph, which is currently receiving a lot of attention due to its use in detective work, is a device that amplifies sound. It was invented by K. M. Turner from New York in 1907.

It consists of a master station in the form of a box less than a foot long and six inches deep, and any number of sub-stations that may be required. Any voice within fifteen feet is taken by the receiving instrument and carried over the wires to any distance within about a thousand miles.

It includes a main station that looks like a box shorter than a foot and six inches deep, along with any number of sub-stations needed. Any voice within fifteen feet is picked up by the receiver and transmitted over the wires to a distance of about a thousand miles.

It has now been adopted by a great many business organizations as a convenient means of inter-communication.

It has now been embraced by many business organizations as an easy way to communicate with each other.


The Story of the Wireless Telegraph

Though one or more means of transmitting messages by electricity have been known now for a great many years, the mechanisms by which they are accomplished are understood only by those who take a general interest in physical science, and the few to whom electrical communication is a profession. So far as theory and details of working are concerned, there are a good many people still in the same shadowy frame of mind as the old Aberdeen postmaster, of whom the story is told. When asked to explain the working of a telegraph instrument he said, “Look at that sheep-dog. Suppose we hold his hind-quarters here and stretch him out until his head reaches Glasgow. Then if we tread on his tail here he will bark in Glasgow. As it is not convenient to stretch a dog, we stretch a wire, and that serves the purpose.”

Although various ways to send messages using electricity have been known for many years, the methods behind how they work are only understood by those interested in physical science and a few professionals in electrical communication. When it comes to the theory and fine details, many people remain as confused as the old postmaster from Aberdeen in the story. When asked to explain how a telegraph works, he replied, “Look at that sheepdog. If we hold his back end here and stretch him out until his head reaches Glasgow, then if we step on his tail here, he will bark in Glasgow. Since it's not practical to stretch a dog, we stretch a wire, and that works just as well.”

As the name implies, “stretching a wire” is unnecessary in wireless telegraphy, though in order to understand the finer points of theory one needs to stretch the imagination a little. That, however, is not so much, because there is any inherent obscurity or difficulty in the underlying principles, as because the mechanism of all electrical effects is more or less intangible. Electricity and magnetism operate across apparently empty space, and the links which connect cause and effect have to be guessed at.

As the name suggests, “stretching a wire” isn't needed in wireless telegraphy, but to get the finer details of the theory, you do need to stretch your imagination a bit. However, this isn't because the basic principles are inherently unclear or difficult, but rather because the mechanics of all electrical effects are somewhat intangible. Electricity and magnetism work through what seems like empty space, and the connections between cause and effect have to be inferred.

Three different methods have been made use of in wireless telegraphy, which may be classed as conduction, induction and wave methods. In the first method currents are sent through the earth from an electrode to another at the sending station. In induction, use is made of the property which alternating currents possess of exciting similar currents in neighboring conductors, the aim being to get as intense a current as possible in the secondary circuit. Mr. W. H. Preece, of England, by combining the two, signaled in this way as far as forty miles. The third and the only method which has proved practically available is by the use of electro-magnetic waves.

Three different methods are used in wireless telegraphy, which can be categorized as conduction, induction, and wave methods. In the first method, electric currents are transmitted through the ground from one electrode to another at the sending station. In induction, we take advantage of the property that alternating currents can induce similar currents in nearby conductors, aiming to generate as strong a current as possible in the secondary circuit. Mr. W. H. Preece from England managed to signal up to forty miles by combining these two methods. The third method, which has proven to be practically effective, involves using electromagnetic waves.

Guglielmo Marconi, an Italian, after long experiment, patented in 1897 a method entirely independent of wires, the electric waves being sent, presumably, through the ether, by the aid of a transmitting apparatus, and being detected by a coherer, a glass tube filled with metallic filings, into the end of which the terminals of a relay circuit enter. The wave falls on conducting material and, the spark gap being replaced by a coherer, the metallic filings magnetically cling together, closing the relay circuit, so that a signal is made. On breaking the current, a slight tap on the coherer or other means breaks the cohesion of the filings and the relay circuit is broken. In this way a rapid succession of signals can be sent.

Guglielmo Marconi, an Italian, after extensive experiments, patented in 1897 a method that didn’t rely on wires at all. Electric waves were sent, presumably, through the ether using a transmitting device, and were detected by a coherer—a glass tube filled with metal filings—into which the terminals of a relay circuit connect. When the wave hits the conducting material and the spark gap is replaced by the coherer, the metal filings stick together magnetically, closing the relay circuit and creating a signal. When the current is interrupted, a light tap on the coherer or other methods disrupts the cohesion of the filings, breaking the relay circuit. This allows for a fast series of signals to be sent.

In 1899 Marconi conducted in England an exhaustive series of successful experiments, sending messages across the English Channel from the South Foreland to the French coast near Boulogne, and extending his results until much longer distances were covered. The process of development was continued until, to the world’s astonishment, signals were sent across the Atlantic and, finally, commercial messages were transmitted over this distance.

In 1899, Marconi carried out an extensive series of successful experiments in England, sending messages across the English Channel from South Foreland to the French coast near Boulogne, and gradually covering much longer distances. The development process continued until, to everyone’s surprise, signals were transmitted across the Atlantic, and eventually, commercial messages were sent over that distance.

Marconi’s system is based on the property supposed to be exerted by the vibrations or waves of electric currents passing through a wire of setting up similar vibrations in the ether of space. These waves extend in every direction from the point of departure, and by ingenious and very delicate receiving instruments their presence in space is indicated and they are taken up in sufficient strength to repeat their pulsations and in this way reproduce the signals sent from the transmitter. One difficulty hitherto has been that a message may be received by hundreds of receiving instruments[264] in all directions, thus preventing secrecy. Many efforts have been made to overcome this defect, but as yet with only partial success.

Marconi’s system is based on the idea that the vibrations or waves of electric currents passing through a wire can create similar vibrations in the ether of space. These waves spread out in every direction from the point of origin, and with clever and very sensitive receiving devices, their presence in space can be detected and picked up with enough strength to reproduce their pulsations, thus recreating the signals sent from the transmitter. One challenge that has existed is that a message can be received by hundreds of receiving devices[264] in all directions, which makes keeping secrets difficult. Many attempts have been made to fix this issue, but so far, only partial success has been achieved.

The distance to which messages can be sent has so far depended largely on the height to which the wires extend above the earth’s surface, lofty poles being erected at the stations. The height of these has been gradually increased until the Eiffel Tower at Paris has been utilized as a sending station. The strength of the electric waves has been similarly increased to add to their space-penetrating capacity. The record of wireless telegraphy has been in this way improved until now it has come into daily competition with other means of news sending. Methods of tuning the instruments have been adopted which limit the influence of the currents to properly tuned receivers and in this way some degree of secrecy is attained.

The distance over which messages can be sent has mostly depended on how high the wires are above the ground, with tall poles set up at the stations. The height of these poles has been gradually increased, with the Eiffel Tower in Paris even being used as a sending station. The strength of the electric waves has also been boosted to enhance their ability to travel farther. As a result, the record of wireless telegraphy has improved to the point where it now competes daily with other methods of sending news. New tuning methods have been implemented to restrict the effects of the currents to properly tuned receivers, achieving a certain level of secrecy.

Radio transmission antennas

Marconi Wireless Station

Marconi Wireless Station

Though the honor of inventing the art of wireless telegraphy is generally ascribed to Marconi, this is to give him more credit than he deserves. The principles involved were discovered by others and the utmost done by him was to invent a practical method of applying them. There are other systems of wireless telegraphy of later invention than that of Marconi, through a different application of the same principles.

Though most people give Marconi all the credit for inventing wireless telegraphy, that's more credit than he deserves. Others discovered the underlying principles, and all he really did was come up with a practical way to use them. There are other wireless telegraphy systems invented later that apply the same principles in different ways.

Messages have been sent to enormous distances, far surpassing the width of the Atlantic, as from Nova Scotia and Ireland to Argentina, a distance of 5,600 miles. Under exceptional conditions a distance of 6,500 miles has been attained, but the daily effective range of the best equipped stations is little over 3,000 miles. For overland messages the limit of distance is about 1,000 miles.

Messages have been sent over huge distances, going way beyond the width of the Atlantic, like from Nova Scotia and Ireland to Argentina, which is 5,600 miles apart. In exceptional situations, a distance of 6,500 miles has been achieved, but the daily effective range of the best-equipped stations is just over 3,000 miles. For overland messages, the distance limit is about 1,000 miles.

There are a number of kinds of interference which arise from electrical disturbances in the earth’s atmosphere. A flash of lightning is liable to give rise to a wave of enormous power which will set half the aerials on the earth vibrating in spite of the differences of pitch to which they are tuned. Thunderstorms are at their worst[265] in the summer in temperate latitudes, but they occur to some extent all the year round, and those in the tropics are of extreme violence. As a consequence it is frequently almost impossible to decipher earthly messages owing to the imperious signals from the clouds. Of the various methods adopted for choking off the “atmospherics,” as the disturbances are called, one is to use receiving circuits which respond only to a narrow range of oscillations very different from those produced by a lightning flash. The employment of a high-pitched musical note in the telephone is also an advantage because its extreme regularity distinguishes it from the marked irregularity of the stray waves.

There are several types of interference that come from electrical disturbances in the Earth's atmosphere. A lightning strike can create a powerful wave that makes numerous antennas vibrate, regardless of the frequency they are set to. Thunderstorms are most severe in summer in temperate regions, but they happen to some extent all year round, with particularly intense storms in tropical areas. As a result, it’s often nearly impossible to read terrestrial messages due to the overwhelming signals from the clouds. One method used to block out these “atmospherics,” as they're known, is to use receiving circuits that only respond to a narrow range of oscillations quite different from those created by a lightning strike. Using a high-pitched musical note in the telephone is also helpful because its consistent tone sets it apart from the erratic stray waves.[265]

Steamship radio room

Wireless Station on a Steamship

Wireless Station on a Ship

On the palatial passenger steamers that plow the Atlantic the Marconi apparatus enables the travelers to keep in touch with their friends, to transact important business on either side of the water, and to secure a continuity of life which was formerly divided by a sea voyage. All the larger vessels now publish a daily paper on board, the news in which has been supplied by the same agencies who feed the newspaper on land. Information is flashed to meet or overtake the vessel and caught up by her aerial, as she pursues her way at twenty-five or thirty miles an hour.

On the grand passenger ships crossing the Atlantic, the Marconi equipment allows travelers to stay connected with their friends, handle important business across the ocean, and maintain a seamless lifestyle that used to be interrupted by a sea journey. All the larger ships now provide a daily newspaper on board, with news supplied by the same agencies that serve newspapers on land. Information is sent to meet or catch up with the ship and is picked up by its antenna as it travels at twenty-five to thirty miles an hour.

In the case of cargo vessels, the owners are able to get into touch with them at any point of their voyage. They can advise the captain where to call for coal or cargo, while he on his part can get into communication with the authorities or his firm’s agents at the port of call, and have every necessary or desirable preparation made for his arrival. Should an accident happen, he can call assistance, inform the owners or relieve anxiety and suspense. At no time is he isolated from the world. The fortitude, courage and daring of those “who go down to the sea in ships” has never been called into question, but it has if anything been emphasized by the receipt of messages from an operator at his post, to whom the bonds of duty were as bonds of steel, and who calmly operated the key until the waves entered his cabin and brought him honorable release.

In the case of cargo ships, the owners can contact them at any point during their journey. They can advise the captain on where to stop for coal or cargo, and the captain can communicate with port authorities or his company’s agents to ensure everything is ready for his arrival. If an accident occurs, he can ask for help, inform the owners, or ease worries. He’s never cut off from the world. The strength, bravery, and boldness of those “who go down to the sea in ships” have never been questioned; if anything, it’s been highlighted by messages from an operator at his post, whose sense of duty was unbreakable. He calmly operated the key until the waves filled his cabin and brought him an honorable end.

U.S. battleship showing wireless aerial

U. S. Battleships “Nevada,” “Oklahoma” and “Arizona”

U.S. Battleships "Nevada," "Oklahoma," and "Arizona"

The latest type of super-dreadnaught for the United States Navy, with a displacement of 27,500 tons and engines of 28,000 horse-power.

The newest super-dreadnought for the United States Navy weighs 27,500 tons and has engines that produce 28,000 horsepower.

NOTE THE WIRELESS EQUIPMENT AT THE TOP

Please note the wireless equipment at the top.

Relief has been brought in this way to vessels in distress and many lives saved. An important example is that of the sinking of the Titanic in 1912. By means of wireless messages from ship to ship the width of the Pacific has been practically covered, as ships en route from America to Australia or Asia can be kept in touch with Honolulu through almost the entire journey. A law in the United States now requires that all ocean passage-steamers carrying fifty or more passengers on routes of 200 miles or over must be equipped with efficient wireless apparatus and operators. The distance reached must be at least 100 miles. The Canadian law provides that every sea-going and coasting passenger ship of over 400 tons gross, registered in Canada, and every sea-going and coasting freight ship of over 1,200 tons gross, shall be equipped with a wireless apparatus. Wireless messages have been successfully sent from aeroplanes, balloons and submarine vessels, and the naval vessels of all nations are kept in easy communication by this method. Wireless press messages between America and Europe are also matters of daily performances.

Relief has been provided to distressed vessels, saving many lives. A notable example is the sinking of the Titanic in 1912. Through wireless messages exchanged between ships, the distance across the Pacific has been practically covered, allowing vessels traveling from America to Australia or Asia to stay in touch with Honolulu throughout most of their journey. A U.S. law now requires all ocean-going passenger ships carrying fifty or more passengers on routes of 200 miles or more to be equipped with effective wireless systems and operators. The coverage must extend at least 100 miles. Canadian law mandates that every sea-going and coasting passenger ship over 400 tons gross, registered in Canada, as well as every sea-going and coasting freight ship over 1,200 tons gross, must have a wireless system. Wireless messages have been successfully transmitted from airplanes, balloons, and submarines, and the naval vessels of all countries maintain easy communication through this method. Wireless press messages between America and Europe are also sent daily.


What is Forestry Work?

A Division of Forestry was organized in the Department of Agriculture, some years ago, and the most earnest efforts are being made to prevent any needless waste of our timber lands.

A Division of Forestry was established in the Department of Agriculture a few years ago, and serious efforts are being made to stop any unnecessary waste of our forested land.

The usefulness of forests to man lies: (1) In furnishing him with timber for building, manufacturing, fuel, etc., and with various other useful products of trees. (2) In their influence on climate. (3) In their influence on water-flow, by keeping the ground more moist, making the outflow more regular, checking the rapid melting of snow, and keeping the hillsides from being denuded of their soil, thus setting up streams and covering cultivated valley lands. The necessity of a proper preservation of the forests seems highly evident, but the nations have been slow in waking up to this fact. Several of the countries of Europe have been largely stripped of their woodlands by indiscreet cutting in the poorest countries, and only recently have the nations been roused to the necessity of their conservation. This is now being carefully attended to in several countries, especially Germany. In China broad mountain regions have been stripped of their trees, with the result that this soil has been swept away by the rains, leaving the rocks bare, while broad reaches of formerly fertile lowlands have been made sterile by the material spread over them by the rains that swept the mountain slopes.

The usefulness of forests to humans includes: (1) providing timber for building, manufacturing, fuel, and other useful tree products. (2) Influencing the climate. (3) Affecting water flow by keeping the ground moist, creating more consistent water flow, slowing down the rapid melting of snow, and preventing soil erosion on hillsides, which helps establish streams and covers cultivated valley land. The need for proper forest conservation is clearly evident, but countries have been slow to recognize this. Many European countries have lost large areas of woodlands due to reckless logging in poorer regions, and it’s only recently that nations have started to realize the importance of conserving them. This issue is now being actively addressed in several countries, especially Germany. In China, vast mountain areas have been deforested, leading to soil erosion from rain, leaving the rocks exposed, while large areas of once-fertile lowlands have become barren from the debris washed down from the mountains.

In the United States the broad original forests have been very largely cut away, and those remaining have of late years been so largely reduced by indiscriminate cutting and the ravages of carelessly kindled fires that great alarm is felt as to the future of the lumber supply. Within recent years vigorous efforts have been made to overcome this growing evil. The American Forestry Association, founded in 1882, its purpose being the conservative use of our forest resources, has now over 5,000 members, residents of every state, and of Canada and foreign countries. The first State Forest Commission was organized by New York in 1885 and has now a very large forest reserve set aside in the Adirondacks. Pennsylvania has also large forest reserves in its mountain districts, and many other states have taken similar action. The art of forestry is also being taught in the schools, and a large body of skilled foresters are now in the service of the states and the general government. In the new and active movement for the conservation of national resources the preservation of the public forests ranks high, and to aid in this purpose the government has withdrawn as national forest areas a vast amount of the public lands, amounting at the present time to 192,931,197 acres, an area about equal to that of Texas and Ohio combined. These woodlands are under the charge of the National Forest Service and cared for by about 3,000 men, of whom 250 are professional foresters. The trees in these forests are cut with careful discrimination, and new trees are planted to take their place, there being forest nurseries containing about 20,000,000 plants and capable of supplying 18,000,000 a year. New York has 1,600,000 acres in its forest reserve, Pennsylvania over 920,000, and the reserves of the other states amount to a very considerable area.

In the United States, the vast original forests have been largely cleared, and those that are left have significantly diminished in recent years due to reckless logging and the damage caused by carelessly started fires, leading to serious concerns about the future of our lumber supply. In response to this growing problem, significant efforts have been made recently. The American Forestry Association, established in 1882 to promote the responsible use of our forest resources, now has over 5,000 members from every state, as well as Canada and other countries. New York formed the first State Forest Commission in 1885, which has since created a large forest reserve in the Adirondacks. Pennsylvania also has extensive forest reserves in its mountainous areas, and many other states have taken similar steps. Forestry is now being taught in schools, and many skilled foresters work for state and federal governments. In the active movement to conserve national resources, preserving public forests is a top priority. To support this goal, the government has designated a vast expanse of public land, currently totaling 192,931,197 acres—an area roughly equivalent to Texas and Ohio combined—as national forest areas. These woodlands are managed by the National Forest Service, which employs around 3,000 people, including 250 professional foresters. The trees in these forests are selectively logged, and new ones are planted in their place, with forest nurseries holding about 20,000,000 plants and able to supply 18,000,000 each year. New York has 1,600,000 acres in its forest reserve, Pennsylvania has over 920,000 acres, and the reserves in other states constitute a significant area as well.

Looking out over forests

Forest Service—A Lookout Station

Forest Service—A Watchtower

Map showing U.S. forests

How did the Fashion of Wearing Cravats Commence?

Cravats get their name from the French “cravate,” meaning a croat, because this piece of dress was adopted in the eleventh century from the Croats who entered the French service. Towards the end of the eighteenth and the beginning of the nineteenth century the cravat attained an incredible degree of extravagance, but common sense at last brought in the simpler style of neckties that has since prevailed.

Cravats get their name from the French word “cravate,” which means a Croat, because this clothing item was adopted in the eleventh century from the Croats who joined the French army. By the end of the eighteenth and the start of the nineteenth century, the cravat became extremely extravagant, but common sense eventually led to a simpler style of neckties that has remained popular since then.

How does the Gas Meter Measure Your Gas?

The quantity of gas used by each consumer is measured by an instrument called a meter, of which there are two classes—the wet and the dry.

The amount of gas each user consumes is measured by a device called a meter, which comes in two types: wet and dry.

The wet meter is composed of an outer box about three-fifths filled with water. Within this is a revolving four-chambered drum, each chamber being capable of containing a definite quantity of gas, which is admitted through a pipe in the center of the meter, and, owing to the arrangement of the partitions of the chambers, causes the drum to maintain a constant revolution. This sets in motion a train of wheels carrying the hands over the dials which mark the quantity of gas consumed.

The wet meter consists of an outer box filled with water to about three-fifths of its capacity. Inside, there’s a rotating drum with four chambers, each able to hold a specific amount of gas. Gas enters through a pipe in the center of the meter, and due to the way the chambers are partitioned, the drum keeps spinning at a steady rate. This movement drives a series of wheels that move the hands across the dials, indicating how much gas has been used.

The dry meter consists of two or three chambers, each divided by a flexible partition or diaphragm, by the motion of which the capacity on one side is diminished while that on the other is increased. By means of slide valves, like those of a steam engine, worked by the movement of the diaphragms, the gas to be measured passes alternately in and out of each space. The contractions and expansions set in motion the clockwork which marks the rate of consumption. The diaphragms in all the chambers are so connected that they move in concert.

The dry meter has two or three chambers, each separated by a flexible partition or diaphragm. As the diaphragms move, they decrease the capacity on one side while increasing it on the other. Slide valves, similar to those found in a steam engine and activated by the diaphragms' movements, allow the gas being measured to flow in and out of each chamber alternately. The contractions and expansions trigger the clockwork that tracks the consumption rate. All the diaphragms in the chambers are linked so they move together.

What is a Game Preserve?

Game preserves have only been introduced comparatively recently in the United States, for the hunting grounds have been freely open to the hunter, but they have been common in Britain and other countries of Europe for centuries.

Game preserves have only been introduced relatively recently in the United States, as hunting grounds have traditionally been open to hunters. However, they have been common in Britain and other European countries for centuries.

Their purpose here is the preservation and increase of wild animals instead of their destruction.

Their goal here is to protect and increase wild animals instead of destroying them.

Deer parks have long been kept in this country, but the first systematic attempt to foster wild game was made about 1860 by Judge J. D. Caton in a park of Ottawa, Ill.

Deer parks have been common in this country for a long time, but the first organized effort to promote wild game was made around 1860 by Judge J. D. Caton in a park in Ottawa, Illinois.

Chief among those that followed on a large scale is the great game park of Austin Corbin, near Newport, N. H., an enclosure of 36,000 acres, in which a wire fence eight feet high encloses an oblong tract twelve by five miles, through which passes a mountain range 3,000 feet high. American game of all kinds are kept here, from buffalo, elk, and moose to the smaller and more timid varieties, and there has been a rapid increase.

Chief among those that followed on a large scale is the expansive game park of Austin Corbin, near Newport, NH, an enclosure of 36,000 acres, with a wire fence eight feet high surrounding a rectangular area twelve by five miles, through which a mountain range 3,000 feet high runs. American game of all kinds are housed here, from buffalo, elk, and moose to the smaller and more timid species, and there has been a rapid increase.

Dr. J. Seward Webb has a 9,000-acre preserve in the Adirondacks, and various other large parks have been established elsewhere, in which our fast-disappearing game animals are augmenting in numbers and game birds of foreign origin have been introduced.

Dr. J. Seward Webb has a 9,000-acre preserve in the Adirondacks, and several other large parks have been set up elsewhere, where our quickly vanishing game animals are increasing in numbers, and game birds from other countries have been introduced.


The Story of the Building of a Silo[17]

What is a Silo?

A silo is a place or receptacle for storing green feed to preserve it for future feeding on the farm. In this way green fodder, such as corn and similar crops, are preserved in a green state to be fed in the winter or next summer during an extremely dry season. The silo has the same relation to cattle feed as the glass fruit jar that mother uses has to the food she preserves in it.

A silo is a structure or container used for storing green feed to keep it for later use on the farm. This allows green fodder, like corn and similar crops, to be stored in a fresh state for feeding in the winter or the following summer during very dry periods. The silo serves the same purpose for cattle feed as a glass jar does for the food that mom preserves in it.

The First Silo.

Silos have been used since very early times in one form or the other, and probably the first we have ever heard of are traceable back in ancient history to the Syrians, who had pits in the ground for the storage of animal feed. These pits have been used in various parts of the Old World ever since and have also been used in the United States. The pit does not give the best results.

Silos have been around since ancient times in one way or another, and the earliest examples we know of trace back to the Syrians, who created pits in the ground to store animal feed. These pits have been used in different regions of the Old World and have also been utilized in the United States. However, the pit design doesn't yield the best results.

In order to overcome these defects we soon began to see silos erected above ground. Cement, brick, tile and wood were used as building material, with various results. The industry developed rapidly and soon demonstrated what was necessary to keep the silage pure, sweet, clean and succulent. Science and research have helped, until now we can produce silos that will keep this green fodder in a sweet and succulent state until the owner is ready to use it.

To address these issues, we quickly started building silos above ground. We used cement, brick, tile, and wood as materials, with mixed results. The industry grew quickly and soon showed what was needed to keep the silage fresh, sweet, clean, and tasty. Science and research have advanced to the point where we can now create silos that maintain this green fodder in a fresh and delicious state until the owner is ready to use it.

What is Put in the Silo?

The principal silage crop is corn, but in different parts of the country there are other crops which can be used to great advantage as substitutes for corn. Among these are kaffir corn, sorghum, alfalfa, clover, millet, cowpeas, soy-beans, sugar beets, oats and even weeds and thistles. All of these make good silage when properly harvested and stored. Any green fodder can be mixed with the above to make quantity and secure good results. The main point to be remembered is that the crops to be put away in the silo must contain a certain percentage of sugar and starch in every combination.

The main silage crop is corn, but in different parts of the country, there are other crops that can be used effectively as substitutes for corn. These include kaffir corn, sorghum, alfalfa, clover, millet, cowpeas, soybeans, sugar beets, oats, and even weeds and thistles. All of these make good silage when harvested and stored correctly. Any green fodder can be mixed with these options to increase quantity and achieve good results. The key point to remember is that the crops put in the silo must contain a certain percentage of sugar and starch in every combination.

Elements of Success or Failure.

There are several things to be remembered by farmers when putting fodder into the silo, if they want to have perfect silage to take out. One of the main things is to see that the silage is cut to proper lengths, which would be about half-inch or one-inch pieces. It should also be well packed, especially next to the wall of the silo. It should have a certain amount of moisture, which it naturally would have if put in at maturity. Good silage is a result of proper cutting, proper packing and a correct amount of moisture, because when the silage is stored it begins to ferment. Heat is generated in the process of fermentation. If the heat is lost through the silo wall, the fermentation is not correct. If the silage is not packed properly and tightly, especially next to the wall, it does not settle in a compact mass and air is admitted that spoils the silage; or if the silo wall is porous this is apt to occur. All these things must be guarded against or a great loss to the owner is probable.

There are several things farmers need to keep in mind when putting fodder into the silo if they want to have great silage to take out. One of the most important things is to make sure the silage is cut to the right lengths, around half an inch to one inch. It should also be packed well, especially against the wall of the silo. It needs to have a certain amount of moisture, which it should naturally have if it’s put in at maturity. Good silage results from proper cutting, proper packing, and the right amount of moisture because when the silage is stored, it starts to ferment. Heat is produced during fermentation. If heat escapes through the silo wall, the fermentation process isn’t right. If the silage isn’t packed properly and tightly, especially next to the wall, it won’t settle into a compact mass, allowing air in that spoils the silage; or if the silo wall is porous, this can happen too. All these factors must be carefully managed, or the owner could face significant losses.

Silo

A Modern Redwood Silo with Steel Dome Roof

A Contemporary Redwood Silo with a Steel Dome Roof


The Story of the Advance of Electricity[18]

It is often remarked that the history of electrical development is the history of modern industrial development. This is true, except that the terms should be reversed. Electric lighting was not invented to equip skyscrapers and the huge apartment buildings of today. In point of fact, the invention of these structures was possible only because electric light already existed. Electric motive power was not devised to supply the great manufacturing establishments of the present. On the contrary, such institutions were erected precisely because such a thing as the electric motor was available. The history of modern industry is thus seen emphatically to be the history of electricity.

It’s often said that the history of electrical development is the history of modern industrial growth. This is accurate, but the terms should be switched. Electric lighting wasn't created to illuminate skyscrapers and the massive apartment buildings we see today. In reality, the creation of these structures was only possible because electric light was already available. Electric power wasn't designed to serve today’s large manufacturing facilities. Instead, these businesses were built specifically because electric motors were accessible. Thus, the history of modern industry is clearly the history of electricity.

The First Commercial Central Station.

The first central station for the commercial distribution of electricity was set going on the 4th of September, 1882, by Thomas Edison himself, at 257 Pearl Street, New York City. Newspapers of the following day had much to say. Wonder was expressed over the “blazing horseshoe that glowed within a pear-shaped globe.” Another told of “the dim flicker of gas supplanted by a steady glare, bright and mellow.” A third observed, “As soon as it is dark enough to need artificial light, you turn the thumb-screw and the light is there; no nauseous smell, no flicker, no glare.”

The first central station for the commercial distribution of electricity was launched on September 4, 1882, by Thomas Edison himself, at 257 Pearl Street, New York City. Newspapers the next day had a lot to say about it. People were amazed by the “blazing horseshoe that glowed inside a pear-shaped globe.” Another one described “the dim flicker of gas replaced by a steady, bright glow.” A third noted, “As soon as it gets dark enough to need artificial light, you just turn the thumb-screw and the light is there; no nasty smell, no flicker, no glare.”

Among the five or six buildings supplied with the new lighting were the Herald offices and the Drexel Building, at the time one of New York City’s show places. The illumination of the latter was held to be a truly momentous achievement owing to its great size. The equipment, in other words, reached the grand total of 106 lamps. In comparison, it is interesting to mention the lighting equipment of the new Municipal Building, in New York City, numbering something over 15,000 lamps.

Among the five or six buildings equipped with the new lighting were the Herald offices and the Drexel Building, which was one of New York City's landmarks at the time. The lighting of the latter was considered a significant accomplishment because of its large size. In total, it had 106 lamps. In comparison, it's noteworthy to mention that the lighting system in the new Municipal Building in New York City included over 15,000 lamps.

The Old Pearl Street Plant.

This primitive central station in Pearl Street was a converted warehouse of brick construction, four stories high, and it was separated in two parts by a fire wall. One of these parts was used for the storing of underground supplies, while the other was occupied by the generating machinery, for the support of which a special foundation of steel and concrete was provided. The necessary steam boilers were accommodated in the basement, while the second floor was occupied by six generators of 125 horse-power each, nicknamed “Jumbos.”

This basic central station on Pearl Street used to be a brick warehouse, four stories tall, and was divided into two sections by a fire wall. One section was for storing underground supplies, while the other housed the generating machinery, which had a special foundation made of steel and concrete. The essential steam boilers were located in the basement, and the second floor had six generators, each with 125 horsepower, known as “Jumbos.”

Simple as sounds this original Edison equipment, it nevertheless represented years of research and experimenting on the part of Edison and those associated with him.

As straightforward as this original Edison equipment may seem, it still represented years of research and experimentation by Edison and his team.

Edison and the Electric Light.

In 1878 Thomas A. Edison, at his experimental laboratory at Menlo Park, New Jersey, where he had already invented the carbon telephone transmitter and many other things, undertook the task of devising a general system for the generation, distribution and utilization of electricity for lighting and power purposes.

In 1878, Thomas A. Edison, at his experimental lab in Menlo Park, New Jersey, where he had already created the carbon telephone transmitter and many other inventions, took on the challenge of developing a comprehensive system for generating, distributing, and using electricity for lighting and power.

The first marked accomplishment in operative detail was a lamp with a platinum wire burner of high resistance, protected by a high vacuum in an all-glass globe, and with the leading-in wires sealed into the glass by fusion. Such a lamp necessarily had a small illuminating power compared with that of the arc light, which was the only electric light then in commercial use.

The first significant achievement in practical details was a lamp featuring a high-resistance platinum wire burner, secured by a high vacuum inside an all-glass globe, with the leading wires fused into the glass. This type of lamp naturally had a lower light output compared to the arc light, which was the only electric light available for commercial use at the time.

Times Square, New York, in electric light

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

The Great White Way

“The Great White Way”

Times Square, New York, at night, with Broadway on the left, a curving ribbon of white light. Here every night in winter thousands upon thousands of people throng to theaters and cafés.

Times Square, New York, at night, with Broadway on the left, a winding strip of bright light. Every night in winter, thousands upon thousands of people flock to theaters and cafés.

The next step in the development of Mr. Edison’s electric-lighting system was taken on October 21, 1879, when he discovered that if a carbonized cotton thread were substituted as a burner for the platinum wire of his earlier lamp, the slender and apparently frail carbon was mechanically strong, and also durable under the action of the electric current. The announcement of the invention of the carbon filament lamp was first made to the public in December, 1879.

The next step in the development of Mr. Edison’s electric-lighting system happened on October 21, 1879, when he found that using a carbonized cotton thread instead of the platinum wire from his earlier lamp made the slender and seemingly weak carbon not only mechanically strong but also durable under the electric current. The public first heard about the invention of the carbon filament lamp in December 1879.

Steam powered dynamo

Steam Dynamo in Edison’s Old Station

Steam Dynamo at Edison’s Old Station

With the experience gained by an experimental system at Menlo Park, Mr. Edison began, in the spring of 1881, at the Edison Machine Works, Goerck Street, New York City, the construction of the first successful direct-connected steam dynamo. The development of an adequate underground conduit proved also most serious. The district selected for lighting was the area—nearly a square mile in extent—included between Wall, Nassau, Spruce, and Ferry Streets, Peck Slip and the East River in New York City. In those days such electrical transmission as existed—this of course related largely to telegraphy—was accomplished by means of a veritable forest of poles and wires augmented by the distribution equipments of fire alarm, telephone, burglar alarm and stock ticker companies. So used had people become to this sort of thing that even the most competent electrical authorities of the time doubted extremely whether Edison’s scheme of an underground system could be made either a scientific or a commercial success, owing to the danger of great loss through leakage. However, the Edison conduits once in use, both the public and even the telephone, telegraph and ticker companies acknowledged their feasibility. Such, in fact, was the success of the new method that the city compelled at length the removal of all telegraph poles.

With the experience gained from an experimental system at Menlo Park, Mr. Edison began constructing the first successful direct-connected steam dynamo in the spring of 1881 at the Edison Machine Works on Goerck Street in New York City. Developing a suitable underground conduit also turned out to be quite challenging. The area chosen for lighting was nearly a square mile, bordered by Wall, Nassau, Spruce, and Ferry Streets, Peck Slip, and the East River in New York City. Back then, any existing electrical transmission—mostly related to telegraphy—was achieved through a massive network of poles and wires, along with the distribution equipment for fire alarms, telephones, burglar alarms, and stock tickers. People had become so accustomed to this setup that even the best electrical experts of the time seriously doubted whether Edison's underground system could be both scientifically and commercially viable, mainly due to the potential for significant losses from leakage. However, once the Edison conduits were in use, both the public and even the telephone, telegraph, and ticker companies recognized their practicality. In fact, the success of this new method led the city to ultimately require the removal of all telegraph poles.

In the Trenches.

The systematic laying out of street mains in the first company district was begun in the summer of 1881. It must not be thought, of course, that these old-time[276] conduits resembled strikingly those of the present day. The method then used was to dig a trench in which were laid the pipes measuring twenty feet in length. Through these the conductors were drawn, two half-round copper wires kept in place first by heavy cardboard and afterward by rope. The conductors having been drawn in, a preparation of asphaltum and linseed oil was forced into the piping to serve as insulation. The spending of three and four arduous nights a week in these trenches by Mr. Edison and his associates suggests the rigor of the later European warfare. This work, together with that incident to the operation of the new station, often proved too much even for Edison’s phenomenal endurance. At such times he slept on a cot close beside the running engines, while the rest of the crew crawled in on the lower row of field-magnet coils of the dynamos, a place warm enough, though a trifle bumpy. One of the inventor’s early assistants tells of going to sleep standing up, leaning against a door frame—this, after forty-eight hours of uninterrupted work.

The organized installation of street mains in the first company district started in the summer of 1881. It's important to understand that these old conduits were not at all like those we have today. Back then, the method was to dig a trench where pipes, each twenty feet long, were laid. Through these pipes, two half-round copper wires were pulled in, held in place first by heavy cardboard and then by rope. Once the conductors were in place, a mixture of asphaltum and linseed oil was pumped into the pipes to act as insulation. Spending three or four exhausting nights a week in these trenches by Mr. Edison and his team shows the intensity akin to later European warfare. This labor, along with managing the new station, often pushed even Edison's remarkable stamina to its limits. During such times, he would sleep on a cot right next to the running engines, while the rest of the crew squeezed in on the lower row of field-magnet coils of the dynamos, which was warm enough but a bit bumpy. One of the inventor's early assistants recalls dozing off while standing against a door frame—this after forty-eight straight hours of work.

Edison's dynamo room

The Dynamo Room of the First Edison Electric Lighting Station in New York

The Dynamo Room of the First Edison Electric Lighting Station in New York

September 4th saw a full 400 lamps turned on from the Pearl Street station. From that day on the station supplied current continuously until 1895, with but two brief interruptions. One of these happened in 1883 and lasted three hours. The other resulted from the serious fire of January 2, 1890, and lasted less than half a day. The record in the second case would appear astounding, as no less a handicap occurred than the burning down of the station itself. The situation was saved, however, by the presence of an auxiliary plant that had already been opened on Liberty Street.

September 4th saw a full 400 lamps turned on from the Pearl Street station. From that day on, the station supplied electricity continuously until 1895, with only two brief interruptions. One of these happened in 1883 and lasted three hours. The other was due to a serious fire on January 2, 1890, and lasted less than half a day. The situation in the second case seems incredible, as the station itself burned down. However, it was saved by an auxiliary plant that had already opened on Liberty Street.

Edison as a Central Station Pioneer.

The layman, while appreciating the tremendous advance in generating machinery since the early eighties, is surprised to learn that the great Edison system of today is conducted upon principles that Edison developed and put into practice at that time. Edison’s, in truth, was the master mind, the forming spirit of all the advances made in the seventies and eighties. Exceedingly much, on the other hand, is due the energy of his fellow workers, many of whom figure conspicuously in the country’s electrical affairs at present.

The average person, while recognizing the huge progress in generating machinery since the early eighties, is surprised to find out that the great Edison system of today is based on the principles that Edison developed and implemented back then. In reality, Edison was the mastermind and driving force behind all the advancements made in the seventies and eighties. However, a significant amount is also credited to the efforts of his colleagues, many of whom play prominent roles in the country’s electrical sector today.

Electricity generation powered by waste gas

Courtesy of Indiana Steel Co.

Thanks to Indiana Steel Co.

Electric Power Station

Power Plant

The seventeen great gas engines are operated by gas from the blast furnaces which was formerly allowed to escape. Each engine drives a 2,500-kilowatt dynamo.

The seventeen large gas engines run on gas from the blast furnaces that used to be released into the air. Each engine powers a 2,500-kilowatt generator.

In this manner Edison and his assistants became established in New York City. Current at first was supplied free to customers for approximately five months, which speaks quite as much for Edison’s Scotch “canniness” as for his inventive genius. Well before the period was over the new illuminant had justified itself, until today it shows itself an element indispensable in every phase of the country’s activity.

In this way, Edison and his team set up in New York City. For about five months, they provided electricity free to customers, which highlights both Edison’s cleverness and his inventive brilliance. Long before that period ended, the new lighting had proven its worth, and today it is an essential part of every aspect of the country’s operations.

Lights bulbs being loaded

Electric Delivery Wagons Loading Edison Lamps

Electric Delivery Trucks Loading Edison Light Bulbs

Early Growth.

Within two years from the opening of the station the demand for service had so increased that over one hundred applications were filed in excess of what could be accepted, because the plant was taxed already to its utmost capacity. Allusion has already been made to the auxiliary plant at Liberty Street, a station of 2,000 lights’ capacity which was instituted in 1886. By 1887, not only a second but a third district had been mapped out, the whole extending from Eighteenth to Forty-fifth Street. All the underground system in the two new districts was laid according to Edison’s new three-wire patent; and it was presently announced that customers would be supplied with power as well as with light.

Within two years of the station's opening, the demand for service had grown so much that there were over a hundred applications beyond what could be accepted, as the plant was already operating at full capacity. There has already been mention of the auxiliary plant on Liberty Street, a station with a capacity of 2,000 lights that was established in 1886. By 1887, not only had a second district been mapped out, but a third one as well, covering the area from Eighteenth to Forty-fifth Street. The entire underground system in these two new districts was installed using Edison’s new three-wire patent, and it was soon announced that customers would receive not only power but also light.

Six months after the disastrous fire of 1890, in which the Pearl Street station was burned, the site was chosen for the Edison Duane Street building on which operations were so hastened that machines were installed and current turned on the first of May the following year.

Six months after the devastating fire of 1890, which destroyed the Pearl Street station, the location was selected for the Edison Duane Street building. Operations were rushed so that machines were set up and power was activated by May 1 of the following year.

The Waterside Stations.

For some time the need of a central generating plant had been apparent to all familiar with the company’s facilities and prospects. Already during the summer of 1898 an engineering commission had visited all the chief electrical stations of Europe and consulted the best-known experts of the industry, and in 1902 the first waterside station in New York was opened upon a site bordering the East River between[279] Thirty-eighth and Thirty-ninth Streets. The new operating room contained sixteen vertical engines with a capacity each of over 5,000 horse-power. From these current was generated by 3,500 kilowatt generators and sent out to the various distributing centers.

For some time, it had been clear to everyone familiar with the company’s facilities and future that a central power plant was necessary. As early as the summer of 1898, an engineering team visited the main electrical stations in Europe and consulted the top experts in the industry. By 1902, the first waterfront station in New York was opened on a site along the East River between[279] Thirty-eighth and Thirty-ninth Streets. The new operations room housed sixteen vertical engines, each capable of over 5,000 horsepower. From these, 3,500-kilowatt generators produced electricity that was distributed to various centers.

As a very natural consequence of such development, the company by 1902 had 420 miles of underground system supplying installation amounting to 1,928,090 fifty-watt equivalents.

As a natural result of this development, by 1902 the company had 420 miles of underground systems providing installations totaling 1,928,090 fifty-watt equivalents.

Electricity a Living Factor.

To talk about electrical development in terms of power consumed tells but one side of the story. More impressive even than figures are the immense number of uses to which electricity is put. Electric lighting, introduced in 1882, has become practically the standard for illumination, not only here, but for the entire civilized world.

To discuss electrical development just in terms of power used only tells part of the story. Even more impressive than the numbers are the countless ways electricity is utilized. Electric lighting, which was introduced in 1882, has essentially become the standard for illumination, not just here, but across the entire civilized world.

Electric sewing machines but no electric light

Electric Sewing Machines in the Manhattan Trade School

Electric Sewing Machines at the Manhattan Trade School

In the Printing Trade.

Electric power was introduced, timidly, by way of a few fans in 1884 and following this, in 1888, motor drive for printing presses was undertaken. At the present moment in New York City there is hardly a printing establishment worthy the name that is not electrically operated throughout. Among the largest customers of the central station in New York City are the great daily newspapers, among them the Times, the World, the Sun, the Evening Post, and the American.

Electric power was introduced cautiously, starting with a few fans in 1884, and later, in 1888, motor drives for printing presses were put into use. Today, in New York City, hardly any printing business worth mentioning isn't fully electrically operated. Some of the biggest customers of the central station in New York City are the major daily newspapers, including the Times, the World, the Sun, the Evening Post, and the American.

Construction.

Not only are passengers conveyed up and down by electric elevators in skyscrapers, but the buildings themselves are erected by means of electricity. Recent examples of such construction are the Woolworth and Equitable buildings in New York City; in this last instance a thousand horse-power was used in digging the foundations alone.

Not only are passengers transported up and down by electric elevators in skyscrapers, but the buildings themselves are built using electricity. Recent examples of this kind of construction are the Woolworth and Equitable buildings in New York City; in the case of the latter, a thousand horsepower was used just for digging the foundations.

Lots of electric light in New York

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

A Fairyland of Light

A Wonderland of Light

The canyon of lower Broadway, south from the Woolworth Building—a glorious miracle of light.

The canyon of lower Broadway, south of the Woolworth Building—an amazing wonder of light.

Not only are New York City’s subways operated by electricity; they were also built by electricity, a statement which applies to the new subways as well as the parts of the first system. In digging for the new Broadway subway, an electric company supplied 25,000 horse-power. The mammoth new aqueduct system by which water is carried from the Catskills to the Battery is another example of electricity as a source of power for large construction work. Still more picturesque is the use of electricity in building the under-river tubes. Indeed, it is doubtful whether this particular form of operation could have been carried on without the aid of electricity.

Not only are New York City’s subways powered by electricity; they were also built using electricity, which applies to both the new subways and parts of the original system. When digging for the new Broadway subway, an electric company provided 25,000 horsepower. The massive new aqueduct system that transports water from the Catskills to the Battery is another example of electricity being a power source for large construction projects. Even more striking is the use of electricity in constructing the under-river tunnels. In fact, it’s questionable whether this specific type of work could have been done without the help of electricity.

Loft Manufacturing.

Aside from these special instances of electricity in construction, one must think of electricity as responsible for nearly all the manufacturing, large and small, that goes on in the ever-increasing number of loft-buildings throughout all large cities. For example, New York City serves as the center of the garment-making industry for the entire country, there being fully a quarter of a million garment-trade workers in the Greater City. Along Fifth and Fourth Avenues are found the large establishments, electrically equipped throughout for cutting, stitching and pressing, while even in the smallest shops on the East Side foot-power machines have become almost a thing of the past.

Aside from these special cases of electricity in construction, we should see electricity as the driving force behind almost all the manufacturing, big and small, happening in the growing number of loft buildings across major cities. For instance, New York City is the hub of the garment industry for the entire country, with around a quarter of a million garment workers in the Greater City. Along Fifth and Fourth Avenues, you'll find large establishments fully equipped with electricity for cutting, stitching, and pressing, while even in the tiniest shops on the East Side, foot-powered machines have nearly disappeared.

Electric Heating.

The commercial use of electric heating is one of the more recent electrical developments. For the most part, this also applies to the garment trade and its closely allied clothing industries. In the modernly equipped factories one finds electric flat irons, velvet steamers and coffee urns. In the printing trade, electrically heated linotype melting pots are being introduced successfully, while glue-pots and sealing-wax melters can be seen in binderies and banking institutions. Absence of fire risk accounts for the introduction of electric heating units of different kinds into the motion-picture film manufacturing industry, a rapidly growing province. The same element of safety where inflammable substances are employed has produced the electric japan oven and similar apparatus.

The commercial use of electric heating is one of the more recent developments in electricity. This is largely true for the garment industry and its related clothing sectors. In modern factories, you'll find electric flat irons, steamers, and coffee urns. In the printing industry, electrically heated linotype melting pots are being successfully used, while glue pots and sealing wax melters can be found in binderies and banks. The lack of fire risk is why various types of electric heating units are being adopted in the rapidly expanding motion-picture film manufacturing industry. The same safety concern for flammable materials has led to the creation of electric japan ovens and similar devices.

Electricity and Safety.

The importance of electricity in factory work cannot be over-estimated. A shop fully equipped with electric machinery is the best possible kind of shop for employee as well as for the owner. Motor-driven machines are the safest possible kind, while absence of overhead shafting and dangerous belts mean health as well as security. In the electric shop, motor-driven blowers carry fumes and dust away from the worker and bring fresh air in. Electrically driven machinery is now regarded as the standard machinery. In the various vocational schools in New York City at present both boys and girls are taught to operate electrically driven machines, it being assumed that those will be what the pupils will be called upon to operate when they leave the school for the shop.

The importance of electricity in factory work cannot be overstated. A workshop fully equipped with electric machinery is the best possible environment for both employees and owners. Motor-driven machines are the safest option, and the absence of overhead shafting and dangerous belts promotes health and safety. In an electric shop, motor-driven blowers remove fumes and dust from the worker while bringing in fresh air. Electrically driven machinery is now considered the standard. In various vocational schools in New York City today, both boys and girls are taught how to operate electrically driven machines, as it's assumed they will use these when they leave school for the workforce.

Electricity in Medicine.

Another domain of electric enterprise of the greatest value for the country at large is the increasing use of electricity in medicine. The most conspicuous element in this is the wide-spread acceptance of the X-ray as a necessary tool of the medical profession. Newspapers and magazines were full of the remarkable X-ray achievements[282] of surgeons in charge of the various European war hospitals. Those, of course, were spectacular instances, but it should not be forgotten that every day, in our great hospitals, the X-ray is proving itself almost indispensable in the examination of the sick and injured. Besides utilizing X-ray in the diagnosis of disease, the rays themselves are employed in treatment of cancer and skin diseases. The oculist, the dentist, indeed medical specialists of all kinds, are coming to recognize the immense aid that electricity can give in its various forms and applications.

Another important area of electric innovation that's really benefiting the country is the growing use of electricity in medicine. The most noticeable aspect of this is how widely accepted the X-ray has become as an essential tool for doctors. Newspapers and magazines were filled with incredible stories about X-ray breakthroughs by surgeons in various European wartime hospitals. While those were certainly remarkable cases, it's important to remember that every day in our major hospitals, X-rays are proving to be almost essential for examining sick and injured patients. In addition to using X-rays for diagnosing illnesses, they are also used in treating cancer and skin conditions. Eye doctors, dentists, and medical specialists of all kinds are starting to recognize the tremendous help that electricity can provide in its various forms and uses.

Electric printing presses

The Great Press Room of “The New York Times” is all Electrically Operated

The Great Press Room of "The New York Times" is fully powered by electricity.

Electric Vehicles.

The electric truck has already demonstrated itself as a safer and less expensive rival of the gasoline delivery truck in many kinds of service. In the boroughs of Manhattan and the Bronx alone, in New York City, there were more than 2,000 such trucks in operation in 1916. Counting both pleasure and business vehicles, the borough of Manhattan boasted about 2,500 storage-battery driven wagons in active use. It is rather interesting to note that Chicago operates many more electric pleasure cars than New York, while New York does far more of its business by means of the electric vehicle. Recently, there was established in New York an electric co-operative garage, the joint enterprise of the electric passenger car manufacturers and an electric company. It was believed that by providing proper and adequate facilities for garaging electric pleasure vehicles the use of passenger-electrics in New York City would be greatly increased.

The electric truck has already proven to be a safer and cheaper alternative to gasoline delivery trucks across various services. In the boroughs of Manhattan and the Bronx alone, there were over 2,000 of these trucks in operation in 1916. Including both personal and commercial vehicles, Manhattan had about 2,500 storage-battery driven wagons actively in use. It's quite interesting to note that Chicago has many more electric cars for personal use than New York, while New York conducts much more of its business using electric vehicles. Recently, an electric cooperative garage was established in New York, a joint venture between electric passenger car manufacturers and an electric company. The aim was to provide proper and adequate facilities for parking electric cars to significantly boost the use of passenger electric vehicles in New York City.

Electricity and the Home.

In emphasizing the important part which electricity plays in the business of a great metropolis, the home should not be forgotten. It is now possible, by means of electric appliances, practically to eliminate all drudgery from housework. The use of many of these domestic machines is familiar to all: vacuum cleaners, washing machines, fans, and the more usual electric cooking devices. Within the next decade, one looks to see a remarkable advance in this direction. One anticipates the more extensive use of electric refrigeration and other electric labor-saving devices, to the great improvement of city homes, making them pleasanter and more healthy as toilsome operations are done away with. And it must not be forgotten that the city home, like the country home, is the backbone of the well-being of the community. Electricity can have no greater mission than improving, strengthening and upbuilding good homes.

In highlighting the crucial role that electricity plays in the life of a big city, we shouldn't overlook the home. Thanks to electric appliances, it's now possible to nearly eliminate all the tedious work from house chores. Many of these domestic tools are familiar to everyone: vacuum cleaners, washing machines, fans, and common electric cooking devices. In the next decade, we can expect significant progress in this area. We look forward to seeing the widespread use of electric refrigeration and other electric labor-saving tools, greatly enhancing city homes and making them more pleasant and healthier as exhausting tasks are eliminated. Plus, we must remember that the city home, just like the country home, is vital for the well-being of the community. Electricity has no greater purpose than to improve, strengthen, and build up good homes.

Electric chart and switches for trains

Electric Train Chart and Switch Control

Electric Train Chart and Switch Control

Subway showing third rail

Subway Construction

Subway Building

In the upper view the electric chart on the wall facing the switch operator indicates the location of every train in the New York subway system at all times. The lower view shows typical subway construction for third rail train and surface cars. The material used is reinforced concrete.

In the upper view, the electric chart on the wall in front of the switch operator shows the location of every train in the New York subway system at all times. The lower view displays typical subway construction for third rail trains and surface cars. The material used is reinforced concrete.

Electricty towers over railway lines

One Type of Electric Construction on Railroads

One Type of Electric Construction for Railroads

The system shown here is used upon the New York, New Haven and Hartford Railroad. It consists of pairs of wire cables supported by bridges placed about 300 feet apart. Rigid triangles of iron pipe are secured to these cables and the trolley wire attached to the triangles. The trolley wire is kept rigid and free from slack in this manner.

The system shown here is used on the New York, New Haven and Hartford Railroad. It consists of pairs of wire cables supported by bridges placed about 300 feet apart. Rigid triangles made of iron pipe are attached to these cables, and the trolley wire is connected to the triangles. This setup keeps the trolley wire rigid and free from slack.

Decreased Cost of Electricity.

Closely akin to this is another electrical development most pleasing to consider. Years ago, electricity was considered the luxury of the rich. Now electric light is coming to be shed on rich and poor alike. Little by little the shops, factories and dwellings of more humble inhabitants are provided with electricity, so that cleanliness, safety and comfort are by no means confined even to the well-to-do or the more comfortable homes.

Closely related to this is another exciting development in electricity. Years ago, electricity was seen as a luxury for the wealthy. Now, electric light is becoming available to everyone, regardless of their financial situation. Gradually, shops, factories, and homes of less affluent people are getting electricity, ensuring that cleanliness, safety, and comfort are not reserved just for the rich or those in nicer homes.

One great factor in this change has been the decreasing cost of electricity. Within the last decade, the cost of almost all necessities of life has ascended with leaps and bounds, so that a dollar now, expended in ordinary household goods, will purchase hardly more than what thirty cents would in 1890. But all this while, the cost of electricity has steadily decreased. With centralized generating plants, improved machinery and better lamps, one dollar today will buy eighteen times as much electric light as it would in 1884. With such facts before us, it is fairly easy to predict the still further electrical development of all important centers. There will be more and better light in homes; there will be more and better light in offices and factories, thus greatly lessening the chances for injury or eye-strain. In all industry, great and small, laborious hand processes will be replaced by safely operated electric machinery, while wider use of electric labor-saving appliances will extend into the home.

One major factor in this change has been the dropping cost of electricity. In the past decade, the prices of nearly all life’s essentials have skyrocketed, so that a dollar spent on everyday household items buys barely more than what thirty cents would have in 1890. But throughout this time, the cost of electricity has consistently gone down. With centralized power plants, improved machinery, and better light bulbs, one dollar today will buy eighteen times more electric light than it would in 1884. Given these facts, it’s pretty easy to predict the continued growth of electrical development in important areas. There will be more and better lighting in homes and offices, which will significantly reduce the risk of injury and eye strain. In every industry, big and small, labor-intensive manual processes will be replaced by safely operated electric machinery, while the use of electric labor-saving devices will become more common in households.

Hospitals, by aid of electricity, will be able to increase still more their splendid work for the relief of suffering, while cleaner and safer ways of living will serve as a preventive of disease. One can easily say that with increasing electrical development the country will come to be still greater, a country where electricity shall provide for the safety and well-being of all its people.

Hospitals, with the help of electricity, will be able to further enhance their amazing work in alleviating suffering, while cleaner and safer lifestyles will act as a preventive measure against disease. It's easy to say that with the growing development of electricity, the country will become even greater, a nation where electricity ensures the safety and well-being of all its citizens.


How is Die-Sinking Done?

Die-sinking is the art of preparing dies for stamping coins, buttons, medallions, jewelry, fittings, etc. The steel for the manufacture of dies is carefully selected, forged at a high heat into the rough die, softened by careful annealing, and then handed over to the engraver. After the engraver has worked out the design in intaglio the die is put through the operation of hardening, after which, being cleaned and polished, it is called a “matrix.” This is not, however, generally employed in multiplying impressions, but is used for making a “punch” or steel impression for relief. For this purpose another block of steel of the same quality is selected, and, being carefully annealed or softened, is compressed by proper machinery upon the matrix until it receives the impression. When this process is complete the impression is retouched by the engraver, and hardened and collared like the matrix. Any number of dies may now be made from this punch by impressing upon it plugs of soft steel.

Die-sinking is the process of creating dies for stamping coins, buttons, medallions, jewelry, fittings, and more. The steel used for making dies is carefully chosen, forged at high temperatures into a rough die, softened through careful annealing, and then given to the engraver. Once the engraver has finished the design in intaglio, the die is hardened, cleaned, and polished, becoming what’s called a “matrix.” However, this matrix isn’t typically used for creating multiple impressions; instead, it’s used to make a “punch” or steel impression for relief. For this, another block of steel of the same quality is selected, carefully annealed or softened, and then compressed with machinery against the matrix until it takes on the impression. After this, the impression is retouched by the engraver, hardened, and finished like the matrix. From this punch, any number of dies can be made by pressing plugs of soft steel into it.


The Story in the Making of a Magazine[19]

The printing of a few thousand copies of one of the great American magazines would not be a difficult feat for any large first-class printing plant. The putting of the pages into type and running them through the modern job presses could easily be accomplished. But when, instead of a few thousand copies, millions of copies of the magazine are printed, and these millions are produced unfailingly, week after week, month after month, in a quality of printing rivaling the production of but a few thousand copies, then, indeed, is it marvelous how results are attained.

The printing of several thousand copies of one of the great American magazines wouldn’t be a tough job for any top-tier printing facility. Setting the pages in type and running them through the modern printing presses can be done easily. But when, instead of a few thousand copies, millions of copies of the magazine are printed, and these millions are produced reliably, week after week, month after month, with a quality of printing matching that of just a few thousand copies, then it’s truly remarkable how these results are achieved.

Printing the Saturday Evening Post

One of the Scores of Presses on which the Inside Pages of “The Saturday Evening Post” are Printed

One of the many printing presses used to print the interior pages of “The Saturday Evening Post”

Obviously, one of the first necessities towards such quantity production is extra speed. This is secured to a certain degree by feeding the paper into the presses from rolls instead of sheet by sheet. But as the quality of the print must be retained, there is a limit in this speeding beyond which it is not safe to go. Some other method of increasing the production without lowering the quality of the printed sheet must be resorted to—and this is duplication. By the process of electrotyping, plates of metal duplicating exactly the printing surface of the type and engravings in the original page, can be made. By providing as many presses as may be needed, and by supplying each press with duplicates, or electrotype plates as they are called, the[287] problem of vast quantity requirements has been solved, so far as the actual printing is concerned.

Clearly, one of the first requirements for producing in large quantities is increased speed. This is somewhat achieved by feeding the paper into the presses from rolls instead of one sheet at a time. However, since the print quality must be maintained, there's a limit to how much speed can be increased without compromising safety. Another approach to boost production while keeping the quality of the printed sheets intact is duplication. Using electrotyping, metal plates that perfectly replicate the printing surface of the type and engravings from the original page can be created. By utilizing as many presses as needed and equipping each press with duplicates, or electrotype plates as they’re known, the[287] issue of high quantity demands has been addressed, at least concerning the actual printing.

But there are other factors to be considered. For example, the printed sheets, as they come from the press, must be folded to the size of the magazine. This is done in two ways. Machines which take the sheets, one by one, from the completed pile, and fold them to the required size, are used on some publications, while on others a folding machine and a binding attachment are included as integral parts of the press itself. The paper, as it comes from the printing section of the press, is mechanically folded, cut apart, the previously-printed cover sheet wrapped around it, and the whole stapled together with wire stitches. Thus the white paper, which enters the press from the roll in one long ribbon, is delivered at the other end of the press printed, folded and bound up into complete magazines at the rate of sixty each minute. Issues of a magazine of thirty-two, forty-eight, or even more pages, are produced in this manner.

But there are other factors to consider. For example, the printed sheets, as they come from the press, must be folded to the size of the magazine. This is done in two ways. Some publications use machines that take the sheets, one by one, from the completed pile and fold them to the required size, while others have a folding machine and a binding attachment as part of the press itself. The paper, as it comes from the printing section of the press, is mechanically folded, cut apart, a previously printed cover sheet wrapped around it, and the whole thing stapled together with wire stitches. So, the white paper that enters the press from the roll in one long ribbon is delivered at the other end printed, folded, and bound into complete magazines at a rate of sixty each minute. Issues of a magazine with thirty-two, forty-eight, or even more pages are produced this way.

Printing the Ladies' Home Journal

One of the Several Batteries of Presses Necessary to Print “The Ladies’ Home Journal”

One of the many printing presses required for “The Ladies’ Home Journal”

Many magazines, however, have more pages than this. Then it is necessary to print on separate presses the various sections, or signatures as they are called, which, when combined, will make up a complete magazine. If only a few thousand were printed, these signatures could be collected together by hand, and then fed into the wire-stitching machine, also by hand. This method of collecting the sections and binding them together was the one used until editions became so large that mechanical methods became necessary.

Many magazines, though, have more pages than this. So, it's necessary to print the different sections, or signatures as they're called, on separate presses. When combined, these will create a complete magazine. If only a few thousand copies are printed, these signatures can be gathered by hand and then fed into the wire-stitching machine manually. This method of assembling the sections and binding them together was used until editions got so large that mechanical methods became necessary.

Now, however, the various sections which go to make up the magazine are piled in certain troughs of a binding machine, which, with seeming human intelligence, clasps one copy of each section in turn, and combining them with a copy of the cover sheet, conducts them all, properly collated, into the wire-stitching device, from which they are ejected into orderly piles. Some magazines are bound together in a different manner, however, and are not stitched with wire, but have the inside pages and the cover glued together, and an ingenious binding machine has been perfected which does this automatically.

Now, the different sections that make up the magazine are stacked in certain slots of a binding machine that, almost like it has human intelligence, grabs one copy of each section at a time and combines them with a cover sheet. It then sends them all, properly organized, into a wire-stitching device, where they are released into neat piles. However, some magazines are bound in a different way; instead of wire stitching, the inside pages and the cover are glued together, and a clever binding machine has been developed to do this automatically.

Machines to fold flat sheets into magazines

A Group of Folding Machines which Automatically Grasp the Flat Sheet and Fold it up to the Size of the Magazine

A group of folding machines that automatically pick up the flat sheet and fold it to the size of the magazine.

Another marvel of the periodical of our day is the printing of some of the pages in the full colors of the original paintings. To get this result, it is necessary to print the sheet in four colors and to have each printing in exactly the correct spot on the sheet (a variation of only a hundredth of an inch being detrimental). The process would normally be quite slow—too slow, in fact, for the tremendous quantities necessary for the large editions of the modern magazine. Both of these objections have been overcome, however, by arranging four small cylinders, each printing its designated color—yellow, red, blue or black—so that as the sheet of paper travels around a larger cylinder it is brought into contact with the four printing cylinders in rapid succession.

Another amazing thing about today's magazines is that some pages are printed in the full colors of the original paintings. To achieve this, the sheet needs to be printed in four colors, and each print must be perfectly aligned on the sheet (a variation of just a hundredth of an inch can ruin it). This process would usually be quite slow—too slow, in fact, for the huge quantities needed for large magazine editions. However, both of these issues have been solved by arranging four small cylinders, each printing its specific color—yellow, red, blue, or black—so that as the sheet of paper moves around a larger cylinder, it quickly comes into contact with the four printing cylinders in quick succession.

Many magazines print two colors for covers and inside pages, instead of full four-color printings. Presses of a nature somewhat similar to those explained above are used.

Many magazines use two colors for their covers and inside pages instead of full four-color printing. Similar types of presses to those described above are utilized.

So much for the principal mechanical problems and their solutions, in producing millions of magazines of a high quality each week. But there must be some force that keeps this maze of machinery constantly at work, so that all the parts properly co-ordinate. A slip-up at one spot might cause such a delay as would result if, for instance, hundreds of thousands of the inside pages were printed and ready for binding, but lacked the printed covers. To prevent any such calamity in the work rooms, there is usually prepared a daily schedule which plots out what operation, on each issue of the magazine, is to be completed that day; and if by chance any operation is not up to the schedule, immediate steps are taken to speed up the work until the production has been brought back to where it should be.

So much for the main mechanical issues and their fixes in producing millions of high-quality magazines each week. But there must be some force that keeps this complicated machinery running smoothly so that all the parts coordinate properly. A mistake at one point could cause a delay, such as if hundreds of thousands of the inner pages were printed and ready for binding but the covers were missing. To avoid any such disaster in the workrooms, a daily schedule is usually created that outlines which operation on each magazine issue needs to be completed that day; and if any operation falls behind schedule, immediate action is taken to speed up the work until production is back on track.

And this schedule reaches out into the shipping and mailing departments, so arranging it that the first copies off the press are speeded to the far sections of the country. In this way all the copies as they come from the presses are dispatched, so that the man in San Francisco and the man in Philadelphia find the magazine on the news-stand on the same day.

And this schedule extends to the shipping and mailing departments, ensuring that the first copies off the press are quickly sent to the far parts of the country. This way, all the copies as they are produced are sent out, so that the person in San Francisco and the person in Philadelphia find the magazine on the newsstand on the same day.


How did the Ringing of the Curfew Originate?

The word “curfew” is derived from the French “couvre-feu,” meaning “cover fire.”

The word “curfew” comes from the French “couvre-feu,” which means “cover fire.”

The ringing of the curfew originated in England by William the Conqueror, who directed that at the ringing of the bell at eight o’clock all fires and lights should be extinguished. The law was repealed by Henry I in 1100, but the bell continued to be rung in many districts to modern times and probably may still be heard.

The curfew bell started in England with William the Conqueror, who ordered that at eight o’clock, when the bell rang, all fires and lights should be put out. Henry I repealed the law in 1100, but the bell kept ringing in many areas well into modern times and might still be heard today.

The name was also given formerly to a domestic utensil for covering up a fire.

The name was also used in the past for a household item used to cover a fire.

In the United States an ordinance establishing a curfew, with the purpose of keeping young people off the streets, has existed in Salem, Mass., since Puritan days.

In the United States, a law that sets a curfew to keep young people off the streets has been in place in Salem, Mass., since the days of the Puritans.

Similar ordinances have of late been adopted in other cities, in general providing that children under fifteen shall not frequent the streets after nine o’clock in summer and eight in winter.

Similar laws have recently been adopted in other cities, generally stating that children under fifteen cannot be on the streets after nine o’clock in the summer and eight in the winter.


The Story of America’s First Horseless Carriage

Mr. Elwood Haynes tells an interesting story of his first “horseless carriage:”

Mr. Elwood Haynes shares an intriguing story about his first "car:"

In 1890 I became interested in the natural gas field at Greentown, Ind. My work took me through the country a great deal, and I drove a horse, of course. The great trouble with the horse was his lack of endurance, and this became more apparent day after day.

In 1890, I got interested in the natural gas industry in Greentown, Indiana. My job required me to travel around a lot, and I was driving a horse, naturally. The main issue with the horse was its lack of stamina, which became clearer every day.

One afternoon, or night, rather, while driving home after a hard day’s work, I thought to myself that it would be a fine thing if I didn’t have to depend on the horse for locomotion. From then on my mind dwelt a great deal upon the subject of a self-propelled vehicle that could be used on any country road or city street.

One evening, while driving home after a long day at work, I thought it would be great not to rely on a horse for transportation. From that point on, I spent a lot of time thinking about a self-driving vehicle that could be used on any country road or city street.

I planned to use the gasoline engine. Even the lightest engines made at that time were very heavy per unit of power, and rather crude in construction.

I intended to use the gasoline engine. Even the lightest engines available back then were quite heavy for their power output and somewhat clunky in design.

My work was confined to Greentown, Ind., in 1890 and 1891. In the fall of 1892 I moved to Kokomo, and the following summer I had my plans sufficiently matured to begin the actual construction of a machine. I ordered a one-horse-power marine upright, two-cycle gasoline engine from the Sintz Gas Engine Company of Grand Rapids, Mich.

My work was limited to Greentown, Indiana, in 1890 and 1891. In the fall of 1892, I moved to Kokomo, and by the next summer, I had my plans developed enough to start the actual construction of a machine. I ordered a one-horsepower marine upright, two-cycle gasoline engine from the Sintz Gas Engine Company in Grand Rapids, Michigan.

This motor barely gave one brake horse-power and weighed 180 pounds. (It is interesting to note in this connection, that an aeroplane motor of the same weight readily gives forty horse-power.) Upon its arrival from Grand Rapids, in the fall of 1893, lacking a more suitable place, the motor was brought direct to my home and set up in the kitchen.

This motor barely produced one brake horsepower and weighed 180 pounds. (It’s interesting to note that an airplane motor of the same weight easily provides forty horsepower.) When it arrived from Grand Rapids in the fall of 1893, and without a better place to put it, the motor was brought straight to my home and set up in the kitchen.

When the gasoline and battery connection were installed, the motor, after considerable cranking, was started and ran with such speed and vibration that it pulled itself from its attachments to the floor. Luckily, however, one of the battery wires was wound about the motor shaft and thus disconnected the current. In order to provide against vibration I was obliged to make the frame of the machine much heavier than I first intended.

When the gas and battery connections were set up, the motor started after a lot of cranking and ran so fast and vibrated so much that it pulled itself up from where it was attached to the floor. Luckily, one of the battery wires was wrapped around the motor shaft and that cut off the power. To prevent this vibration, I had to make the machine's frame much heavier than I originally planned.

The machine was built up in the form of a small truck. The framework in which the motor was placed consisted of a double “hollow square” of steel tubing, joined at the rear corners by steel castings and by malleable castings in front. The hind axle constituted the rear member of the frame and the front axle was swiveled at its center to the front end of the “hollow square,” in which the motor and countershaft were placed.

The machine was designed like a small truck. The frame that held the motor was made of a double "hollow square" of steel tubing, connected at the back corners with steel castings and with malleable castings in the front. The back axle formed the rear part of the frame, while the front axle was pivoted at its center to the front end of the "hollow square," where the motor and countershaft were located.

The total weight of the machine when completed was about 820 pounds. July 4, 1894, when ready for test, it was hauled into the country about three miles, behind a horse carriage, and started on a nearly level turnpike.

The total weight of the machine when finished was around 820 pounds. On July 4, 1894, when it was ready for testing, it was pulled into the countryside for about three miles behind a horse-drawn carriage and started on a nearly flat road.

It moved off at once at a speed of about seven miles per hour, and was driven about one and one-half miles farther into the country. It was then turned about, and ran all the way into the city without making a single stop.

It took off immediately at a speed of around seven miles per hour and was driven about one and a half miles further into the countryside. It then turned around and made its way back to the city without stopping once.

I was convinced upon this return trip that there was a future for the “horseless carriage,” although I did not at that time expect it to be so brilliant and imposing.

I was sure on this return trip that there was a future for the “horseless carriage,” although I didn’t expect it to be so impressive and significant at that time.

First American motorcar

Courtesy of Haynes Auto Co.

Thanks to Haynes Auto Co.

America’s First Car, Built by Elwood Haynes

America's First Car, Created by Elwood Haynes


The Story in a Sausage[20]

Away back in the dark ages, even before the Christian era, a Chinese husbandman, so we are told, made a wonderful discovery—that pork was good to eat. No one had ever considered the possibility of eating pork, for in those days pigs were pets, and just as every family today has its dog “Rover,” so then, every family had its pig “Scraps.”

Away back in the dark ages, even before the Christian era, a Chinese farmer, as we’re told, made an amazing discovery—that pork was good to eat. No one had ever thought about eating pork, because back then, pigs were pets. Just like every family today has its dog “Rover,” back then, every family had its pig “Scraps.”

One day the house of Char-Lee was burned to the ground. The cause of the fire is unknown. Char-Lee was filled with remorse and, as he walked about among the ruins of his home, he felt that the gods of Good Luck had indeed turned their backs on him. As he was thus bewailing his misfortunes, he stumbled over a charred timber and fell flat on the ground. In lifting himself to his feet, he burned the fingers of his right hand, and, as does a child, he immediately proceeded to suck those fingers.

One day, Char-Lee's house was completely destroyed by a fire. The reason for the fire is still a mystery. Char-Lee was filled with regret, and as he walked through the wreckage of his home, he felt like the gods of Good Luck had truly abandoned him. While lamenting his misfortunes, he tripped over a burned timber and fell to the ground. As he got back up, he accidentally burned the fingers of his right hand, and like a child, he immediately started to suck on those fingers.

Imagine his amazement to find clinging to his fingers a substance most luscious to the taste, and most gratifying to the palate! He looked to see what it could be, and—behold, he saw that it was the remains of “Scraps,” who had been lost in the burning house and roasted as perhaps never has a pig been roasted since.

Imagine his surprise to find something incredibly delicious clinging to his fingers, something very satisfying to taste! He looked to see what it could be, and—lo and behold, he realized it was the remains of “Scraps,” who had been lost in the burning house and roasted like no pig ever has been before.

Eager to further enjoy this new delicacy, Char-Lee proceeded to feast himself, and it was then he found that pork not only pleases and gratifies—but satisfies. Desiring to share his new delights with his friends and neighbors, he called them together and they had a wonderful feast. From that day to this we have eaten roasted pork.

Eager to enjoy this new treat even more, Char-Lee started to dig in, and that’s when he realized that pork not only tastes great and is satisfying—but really hits the spot. Wanting to share his newfound love with his friends and neighbors, he gathered them all together for an amazing feast. Since then, we’ve been enjoying roasted pork.

It was many, many years later that a Roman farmer, living on a beautiful little farm at the mouth of the Tiber, formed the habit of putting fresh pork in a covered pan and burying the whole deep in the cool sands by the water’s edge. But one day he put the pan too near the edge and at high tide the salt water from the ocean came up, filled the pan, and so smoothed the surface of the sands that he was unable to find the place where he had buried the container.

It was many years later that a Roman farmer, who lived on a lovely little farm at the mouth of the Tiber, developed the habit of putting fresh pork in a covered pan and burying it deep in the cool sand by the water's edge. But one day, he placed the pan too close to the edge, and during high tide, the saltwater from the ocean came in, filled the pan, and smoothed out the surface of the sand so thoroughly that he couldn't find the spot where he had buried the container.

After several fortnights he accidentally found his meat again. He examined it carefully and was surprised to find that it had seemingly kept in perfect condition, the only trouble being that the water had gotten into his pan and his meat was all wet. So he carried it to his house, and, putting a long skewer through the piece, he hung it high above the fire in his open hearth, to dry it off before he should wish to roast it.

After a couple of weeks, he stumbled upon his meat again. He looked it over closely and was surprised to see that it had apparently stayed in great condition, the only problem being that water had gotten into his pan and his meat was soaked. So he took it home, and, putting a long skewer through the piece, he hung it high above the fire in his open hearth to dry it off before he planned to roast it.

Later in the day he set out with two companions for a two-days’ hunting expedition in the woods. As the party returned, laden with the spoils of the hunt, his cook was preparing a meal for them. As he walked into the house, he thought of his piece of pork. You can readily imagine his astonishment when he found that the smoke from the smouldering embers, while he was away, had turned the meat a deep cherry hue, and that the fire, built up to prepare the home-coming feast, had broiled the piece to a nicety. It savored of an aroma so rare that it was given preference over even the choice pheasants which had been prepared.

Later in the day, he set out with two friends for a two-day hunting trip in the woods. As the group returned, loaded with the spoils of the hunt, his cook was getting a meal ready for them. When he walked into the house, he thought about his piece of pork. You can easily imagine his surprise when he saw that the smoke from the smoldering embers, while he was away, had turned the meat a deep cherry color, and that the fire, built up to prepare the celebratory feast, had grilled the piece perfectly. It had an aroma so unique that it was preferred over even the fine pheasants that had been cooked.

This was the first time a cured and smoked piece of pork had ever been eaten, but could you have seen how delighted these men were with the result of this accidental preparation, you would have known from their enthusiasm that cured, smoked pork would one day have a very great popularity.

This was the first time anyone had ever eaten cured and smoked pork, but if you had seen how thrilled these men were with the outcome of this accidental cooking method, you would have realized from their excitement that cured, smoked pork would eventually become extremely popular.

Later, a farmer and his family decided that they would like to eat meat even during the summer months when the activity of haying season made it impossible to prepare it in the usual way, and so, in March, or during some other convenient cool[293] period, he would kill the pig which had been fattening all winter, and dissect the carcass into hams, shoulders, bacon sides and mess pork.

Later, a farmer and his family decided they wanted to eat meat even during the summer months when the haying season made it hard to prepare it the usual way. So, in March or during some other convenient cool[293] period, he would kill the pig that had been fattening all winter and divide the carcass into hams, shoulders, bacon sides, and miscellaneous pork.

These parts were cured by different methods; one very popular way was to put the hams and shoulders on about an inch of salt in the bottom of a barrel, keeping these parts around the edge so as to leave room for the mess pork and bacon sides in the center. Each part would be carefully rubbed with salt before it was packed away, and slits were cut from the surface of the hams to the bone, so that one might force salt in them, thus keeping the meat from turning sour. The top of the meat was sprinkled with sugar and saltpetre. A small barrel head was laid on the top of the meat and a heavy stone placed on the head so as to hold the meat firmly in place. At the end of a week just enough water was added to cover the barrel head.

These parts were cured using different methods; one very popular way was to place the hams and shoulders on about an inch of salt at the bottom of a barrel, keeping these parts around the edge to leave room for the mess pork and bacon sides in the center. Each piece would be carefully rubbed with salt before being packed away, and slits were made from the surface of the hams to the bone, so that salt could be forced in, preventing the meat from going bad. The top of the meat was sprinkled with sugar and saltpeter. A small barrel head was placed on top of the meat, and a heavy stone was set on the head to hold the meat securely in place. After a week, just enough water was added to cover the barrel head.

Chester White sows

Chester White Sows[21]

Chester White Pigs __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lard Type Hogs

Lard-type pigs

Another way was to make a very strong salt brine. To this brine would be added a little sugar and saltpetre, and, after packing the meat the same as in the other case, enough of this brine would be added to entirely cover the meat. By not letting the brine get old, or by keeping plenty of salt on it, the meat could be kept in this way for several months, but would be available for use at any time.

Another way was to make a really strong salt brine. A little sugar and saltpeter would be added to this brine, and after packing the meat just like in the other method, enough of this brine would be added to completely cover the meat. By making sure the brine didn’t get old or by keeping plenty of salt in it, the meat could be preserved this way for several months and would be ready for use at any time.

Hams and shoulders were always smoked at the end of about two months. When getting ready to smoke some pieces, the farmer would first soak them twenty-four hours in clear, cold water. By tying a string through the shank of a ham and running this string up through a hole in the bottom of an inverted barrel, he could secure it by tying to a small stick on the outside of the hole. Under the barrel he would build a small fire, sometimes of corncobs, sometimes of hardwood and sawdust. It was the task of the small boy of the family to start this fire in the morning and maintain it all day, the idea being to keep a fire which was not too hot but which would give off plenty of smoke.

Hams and shoulders were always smoked after about two months. When it was time to smoke some pieces, the farmer would first soak them in clear, cold water for twenty-four hours. By tying a string through the shank of a ham and running it up through a hole in the bottom of an upside-down barrel, he could secure it by tying it to a small stick on the outside of the hole. Under the barrel, he would build a small fire, sometimes using corncobs, sometimes hardwood and sawdust. It was the responsibility of the family's young boy to start this fire in the morning and keep it going all day, with the goal of maintaining a fire that wasn’t too hot but produced plenty of smoke.

Tamworth boar Tamworth sow
Tamworth pig.[22] Bacon Type Hog. Tamworth Pig.[22] Bacon Type Hog.
Berkshire boar Berkshire sow
Berkshire Hog.[22] Berkshire Pig. Dual Purpose Hog.[22]

At the end of three days the meat was considered thoroughly smoked, although some men liked it smoked much longer. After it had cooled off from the smoking it was hung in a cool, dry place or packed in a barrel of oats, so as to keep it from getting a damp mold and spoiling.

At the end of three days, the meat was deemed fully smoked, although some guys preferred it to be smoked for a longer time. Once it cooled down from the smoking, it was either hung in a cool, dry spot or stored in a barrel of oats to prevent dampness and mold from ruining it.

When a farmer had killed a hog, he would render out certain of the fats in an iron caldron. He would take certain parts of the meat and make his home-made sausages, but further than that, by-products were practically unknown.

When a farmer killed a hog, he would render some of the fat in an iron pot. He would also use certain parts of the meat to make his homemade sausages, but beyond that, by-products were mostly unheard of.

The foregoing might be considered a short synopsis of the pork-packing industry up to the point which we will call the Modern Era.

The above could be seen as a brief overview of the pork-packing industry leading up to what we’ll refer to as the Modern Era.

This period had a small start back in the early days when a small dealer would kill a few hogs, sell the sausage and lard and cure and smoke the parts, carrying them as far into the summer months as he could, selling them out to his trade. Various methods were resorted to in order to keep mold and insects from spoiling the product. Perhaps the most generally used of these methods was to sew the piece of meat in a canvas sack and paint it with barytes. This gave them an airtight container for the meat and enabled them to keep smoked meats all during the summer months.

This period began small, back in the early days, when a local dealer would butcher a few pigs, sell the sausage and lard, and cure and smoke the leftover parts, keeping them available well into the summer months to sell to his customers. Different methods were used to prevent mold and insects from ruining the product. One of the most common methods was to sew the piece of meat into a canvas sack and coat it with barytes. This provided an airtight container for the meat, allowing them to preserve smoked meats throughout the summer.

The advent of refrigeration, however, really marked the beginning of the modern packing era. When men learned the control of temperature it became possible for slaughter houses to assume such proportions as to warrant scientific research for the best possible methods of carrying on the business.

The arrival of refrigeration, however, truly marked the start of the modern packing era. When people learned how to control temperature, slaughterhouses could expand significantly enough to justify scientific research into the best methods for running the business.

The story of the development of these methods would be almost endless, but a trip through an up-to-date packing plant of the present day will show what time has brought about.

The story of how these methods developed could go on forever, but a visit to a modern packing plant today will demonstrate the changes that have taken place over time.

As the hogs come in from the farmers and shippers they are received by the live stock department, where they are carefully sorted and graded, and then run into holding pens, to carry over until they shall be driven to slaughter. These pens must hold thousands of hogs, for although the stock is held two or three days at the most before it is slaughtered, we must remember that the more important of the packing houses kill thousands of hogs each day, so these pens must be more or less gigantic affairs. The more modern of them are constructed of concrete and brick, and are a picture of cleanliness and sanitation. They are well protected by substantially built roofs and side walls so that the animals are not exposed to the weather at any time of the year.

As the pigs arrive from farmers and shippers, the livestock department receives them, carefully sorting and grading them before placing them in holding pens until they are sent to slaughter. These pens need to accommodate thousands of pigs because, even though the stock is held for only two or three days at most before slaughter, it’s important to note that the larger packing houses process thousands of pigs every day. Therefore, these pens are quite large. The more modern ones are made of concrete and brick and are very clean and sanitary. They are well protected with sturdy roofs and walls so that the animals aren’t exposed to the elements at any time of the year.

Veterinarians in the employ of the government examine all the hogs that come into these pens, and any that seem to be at all sickly, or for any reason unfit for food, are held out.

Veterinarians working for the government check all the pigs that come into these pens, and any that appear to be sick or otherwise unsuitable for food are kept out.

On the killing floor a small army of men is engaged in the business of cleaning and dressing the carcass of the hog. Each man has his particular part of the work to do, and to this end the hogs are conveyed around the room past the various workmen by means of an endless chain and trolley, so that each butcher’s work is put right before him and he does not have to make any unnecessary moves. The whole department works like one vast machine, and each man is a very definite and necessary cog in the whole scheme of procedure.

On the killing floor, a small army of men is busy cleaning and dressing the hog carcasses. Each man has his specific task to handle, and to make this easier, the hogs are moved around the room past the different workers on an endless chain and trolley system, so each butcher has their work right in front of them without having to make unnecessary movements. The entire department operates like one huge machine, and each man is an important and essential part of the overall process.

Perhaps the most wonderful thing about this department is the perfection that they are able to reach in cleaning the carcasses. The hogs are first run through a great machine which takes all but a few stray hairs from them. This machine contains a number of rotating beaters and high-pressure streams of water.

Perhaps the most amazing thing about this department is the level of cleanliness they achieve in processing the carcasses. The hogs are first put through a large machine that removes almost all the stray hairs. This machine has several rotating beaters and high-pressure jets of water.

As soon as they come out of the machine, the men on the rail finish the job of cleaning the carcass and each animal is then run through a high-pressure washing machine so that it is absolutely clean before a single incision is made in it.

As soon as they come out of the machine, the workers on the rail complete the cleaning of the carcass, and each animal is then run through a high-pressure washing machine to ensure it is completely clean before any cuts are made.

Refrigeration plant

Refrigerating Machinery

Refrigeration Equipment

These great pumps are used for circulating the brine through the cooling system of one of the great packing houses in Buenos Ayres, Argentine

These powerful pumps are used to circulate the brine through the cooling system of one of the major packing houses in Buenos Aires, Argentina.

Reproduced by permission of The Philadelphia Museums.

Reproduced by permission of The Philadelphia Museums.

Beef cattle waiting for the butcher

The Half-way House

The Halfway House

Cattle from the Western plains gathered in the Union Stockyards awaiting slaughter and subsequent shipment. The great Union Stockyards in Chicago are the largest live-stock market in the world. Beef is slaughtered and cleansed very much in the same manner as the pork described in “The Story in a Sausage.”

Cattle from the Western plains gathered in the Union Stockyards waiting for slaughter and shipment. The huge Union Stockyards in Chicago are the largest livestock market in the world. Beef is slaughtered and cleaned in a way that's very similar to the pork described in “The Story in a Sausage.”

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

The workmen all stand on high benches, up from the floor, and under the hogs we find troughs to keep any scraps from getting under the workmen’s feet. The floors at all times are kept as clean as can be, and the meat is taken away quickly so that there is no chance of contamination of the finished product with the hogs which are just coming from the slaughter house.

The workers all stand on high benches above the floor, and beneath the hogs, there are troughs to catch any scraps and prevent them from getting under the workers' feet. The floors are always kept as clean as possible, and the meat is removed quickly to avoid any risk of contamination of the finished product with the hogs that just came from the slaughterhouse.

Trained men, some of them veterinarians, in the employ of the government, make a thorough inspection of the glands and other organs of the hog. They are so particular that even bruises must be trimmed out before the animals are allowed to pass and go on with the bulk which are fit for food. It is surprising to learn how many carcasses, or parts, are condemned because of one thing or another, for the least sign of sickness or unfitness of any kind calls forth a government “Condemned Tag” and holds the animal out to one side to be used for fertilizer or some other inedible purpose.

Trained professionals, including some veterinarians, working for the government, conduct a thorough inspection of the glands and other organs of the hog. They are so meticulous that even bruises must be removed before the animals are allowed to pass and continue on with the bulk that is fit for food. It's surprising to learn how many carcasses, or parts, are rejected due to various issues, as even the slightest sign of illness or unfitness results in a government “Condemned Tag,” setting the animal aside to be used for fertilizer or other non-food purposes.

Passing through the hog chill rooms, on the way from the killing floor, one is impressed with the great number of hogs hanging there in a temperature near the freezing point. This temperature is maintained both winter and summer, so that the hogs may be thoroughly chilled and the animal heat entirely eliminated as quickly as possible after the killing, so that there will be no chance of the meat souring or any unwholesome condition arising.

Passing through the hog chill rooms on the way from the killing floor, you are struck by the large number of hogs hanging there at a temperature close to freezing. This temperature is kept consistent in both winter and summer, ensuring that the hogs are properly chilled and all the animal heat is removed as quickly as possible after the kill. This process prevents the meat from spoiling or developing any unhealthy conditions.

After about forty-eight hours in these chill rooms, the hogs are run onto the cutting floor, where they are made into the various commercial cuts which are seen in the meat markets at home. They start out with the whole side of a hog and work it through, until they have what the packers call the “Commercial Cuts”—that is to say, the hams, loins, spare ribs, the bacon sides, and so on.

After about forty-eight hours in these cold storage rooms, the pigs are taken to the cutting floor, where they are processed into the different cuts of meat that you find in local markets. They start with the entire side of a pig and work it through until they have what the packers refer to as the “Commercial Cuts”—meaning the hams, loins, spare ribs, bacon sides, and so on.

The cutting room is a light, airy room with a high ceiling, and everything in it seems a perfect example of cleanliness, and men all work with white aprons, jackets and caps.

The cutting room is a bright, open area with a high ceiling, and everything in it looks immaculate, with all the men working in white aprons, jackets, and caps.

The next stop is in the by-products building. As the writer entered, his guide told him the old bromide about “everything about a packing house being saved except the squeal, and even that having been known to appear on a phonographic record.” He thought to have some fun by asking the guide about the smell, but the laugh was on him, for the guide showed him how the air containing any odor was simply run through a condenser into a great volume of water, which absorbed it. The gases which had made the odor in the first place were then taken out in the form of solids, simply by evaporating the water away. The big evaporators which take care of this work are extremely interesting pieces of machinery to see.

The next stop is in the by-products building. As the writer walked in, his guide shared the old saying about “everything in a packing house being saved except the squeal, and even that has been known to show up on a phonographic record.” He thought he’d have some fun by asking the guide about the smell, but the joke was on him, because the guide explained that any smelly air was simply passed through a condenser into a large volume of water, which absorbed it. The gases that caused the smell were then removed as solids by evaporating the water. The large evaporators handling this process are really fascinating machines to see.

There is a surprisingly large amount of expensive machinery in the hair plant. Hog hair would probably not appeal to the average person as being a thing of particular value, but it is processed so as to make the finished product worth as much as the meat itself.

There’s a surprisingly large amount of expensive equipment in the hair plant. Hog hair might not seem particularly valuable to the average person, but it’s processed in a way that the final product is worth just as much as the meat itself.

Certain parts of the hog carcasses which would not be palatable enough to go into human consumption are made up into stock foods. These are sold under a guaranteed analysis. Highly-paid chemists are busy all the time checking up the analysis of these foods, for they must contain certain amounts of protein and crude fiber, which is said to be very beneficial to stock in general.

Certain parts of pig carcasses that aren't tasty enough for human consumption are turned into feed for livestock. They are marketed with a guaranteed analysis. Highly paid chemists are constantly checking this analysis, as the feed must include specific levels of protein and crude fiber, which is believed to be very beneficial for animals in general.

Another department manufactures what is called a balanced ration, consisting of a certain amount of grain and a certain amount of this stock food, or “digester tankage,” as it is called. This balanced ration is said to be the most nutritious food and the quickest fattener which can be given to animals. It is made up as a result of protracted experiments and much scientific research, both by state institutions and by private individuals.

Another department produces what’s known as a balanced ration, made up of a specific amount of grain and a specific amount of this stock food, or “digester tankage,” as it’s called. This balanced ration is considered to be the most nutritious food and the fastest way to fatten animals. It’s created from extensive experiments and significant scientific research, conducted by both state institutions and private individuals.

There is always a certain amount of grease which is not edible, but which is suitable for soap stocks, and the tank products which are not fit for food are made into commercial fertilizers, which are gotten up under chemical formulas, and are made up particularly for different kinds of grains, grasses, flowers and the like.

There is always some grease that isn't safe to eat but can be used for making soap. The by-products that aren't suitable for food are turned into commercial fertilizers, produced using chemical formulas, and specifically formulated for various types of grains, grasses, flowers, and similar plants.

Beef carcasses in cold storage

Cold Storage of Meat, Buenos Ayres, Argentine

Chilled Meat Storage, Buenos Aires, Argentina

Interior of one of the great South American cold storage plants. Much of the meat consumed in Europe is shipped from this point.

Interior of one of the major cold storage facilities in South America. A significant portion of the meat eaten in Europe is shipped from here.

Reproduced by permission of The Philadelphia Museums.

Reproduced by permission of The Philadelphia Museums.

Ladies packing bacon in jars

Courtesy of Armour & Co.

Thanks to Armour & Co.

Packing Bacon

Packing Bacon

The girls are packing sliced bacon into glass jars, taking the slices from a moving belt which passes in front of them. The rooms are light, thoroughly ventilated, and cleaned at the end of each day. The girls’ hands are manicured at frequent intervals by manicurists employed by the company.

The girls are putting sliced bacon into glass jars, grabbing the slices from a conveyor belt that moves in front of them. The rooms are bright, well-ventilated, and cleaned at the end of each day. The girls’ hands are regularly manicured by manicurists hired by the company.

The next place is the lard department. Here great closed tanks cook the fats, under high steam pressure, and make them into snow-white lard. There are great open caldrons, steam jacketed, where an even and uniform temperature is maintained. Only the pure leaf lard, which is supposed to be the choicest fat of the hog, is cooked in these kettles. In the lard packing room there is much automatic machinery, with which the various sized packages of lard are weighed out. Machines hermetically seal the tins, and men pack them in crates and carefully weigh them over two scales.

The next section is the lard department. Here, large closed tanks cook the fats under high steam pressure, turning them into pure white lard. There are big open kettles, steam-jacketed, keeping a consistent and even temperature. Only the pure leaf lard, thought to be the finest fat from the pig, is processed in these kettles. In the lard packing area, there’s a lot of automatic machinery that weighs out different sizes of lard packages. Machines seal the tins airtight, and workers pack them into crates, carefully weighing them on two scales.

The average person does not have even an idea of what the modern curing cellar is like. The brines and curing mixtures are prepared by trained men who do no other work but this. Everything goes exactly according to formula, and the different ingredients are weighed out to the ounce. The guide insisted that a bare ten per cent of all the hams or bacon sides produced in the plant are finally allowed to bear the company’s trade-mark. The men who finally select these goods are the oldest and most trusted employees of the firm. They weigh out a certain amount of this meat for each tierce, or vat, to be packed, and then an exact number of gallons of pickle is put in with the meat so that each pound of meat will have just a certain amount of pickle to cure it. This is said to insure a uniform product so that one trade-marked ham is exactly like another.

The average person has no idea what a modern curing cellar is really like. The brines and curing mixtures are made by trained professionals who focus solely on this work. Everything is done by the formula, and the different ingredients are measured to the ounce. The guide pointed out that only about ten percent of all the hams or bacon sides produced in the facility are ultimately allowed to carry the company’s trademark. The individuals who select these products are the oldest and most trusted employees of the company. They measure a specific amount of this meat for each container, or vat, to be packed, and then a precise number of gallons of brine is mixed in with the meat, ensuring that each pound of meat gets just the right amount of brine for curing. This is said to guarantee a consistent product, so each trademarked ham is exactly like the next.

Even the length of time which these are left in cure must not vary a day. In the great curing room thousands of vats and tierces are piled, and the usual tierces hold about three hundred pounds of meat, while the vats hold nearly fifteen hundred pounds.

Even the duration for curing these must not change by a single day. In the large curing room, thousands of barrels and casks are stacked, with the standard casks holding about three hundred pounds of meat, while the barrels hold nearly fifteen hundred pounds.

In the dry-salt curing cellars are kept enormous stocks of the cheaper kinds of meat. These, instead of being cured in brine, are rubbed in salt and piled away. These piles are perhaps three or four feet high, and are so neat and true that they appear to have been the work of a master mason. A single one of these dry-salt curing rooms holds over three million pounds.

In the dry-salt curing cellars, massive quantities of the less expensive types of meat are stored. Instead of being cured in brine, they are packed in salt and stacked away. These stacks are about three or four feet high and are so neat and precise that they look like they were built by a skilled mason. One of these dry-salt curing rooms can hold over three million pounds.

Sliced bacon, fancy sausage and other specialties are usually packed in a separate room, into attractive cartons for the retail trade.

Sliced bacon, gourmet sausage, and other specialties are typically packaged in a separate room, in appealing cartons for the retail market.

The standard of cleanliness in the sausage kitchen has to be unusually high. Wherever white tile is not possible, white paint is used in profusion. The shining metal tables and trucks, on which the product is handled, give a new confidence in sausage. The girls and men employed all wear clean white aprons, jackets and caps, and no effort is spared in keeping everything and everybody in the place in an ideal condition.

The cleanliness standard in the sausage kitchen has to be exceptionally high. Where white tiles aren't feasible, white paint is used extensively. The gleaming metal tables and carts, where the product is handled, instill a renewed confidence in sausage. The workers, both men and women, all wear clean white aprons, jackets, and caps, and no effort is spared to keep everything and everyone in the space in pristine condition.

The meat is run through enormous automatic grinders and choppers, and through mixers that approach a dairy churn in size. After it has been properly mixed and thoroughly taken care of, it is put into automatic machinery, run by air pressure, which stuffs it into the ham sacks and casings, in which we see the sausage in the markets. The cooking is done in great vats and in enormous electric ovens.

The meat is processed through huge automatic grinders and choppers, as well as mixers that are nearly the size of dairy churns. Once it has been properly mixed and handled, it goes into automatic machines powered by air pressure, which stuff it into the ham sacks and casings that we see in the markets. The cooking takes place in large vats and massive electric ovens.

When we stop to think of the proportion of our food which is a packing-house product, we can be glad indeed that conditions such as those described above are becoming available more and more every day.

When we take a moment to consider how much of our food comes from processing plants, we can definitely be thankful that situations like those mentioned above are becoming more and more common every day.


Why do We Call them “Dog-Days”?

When we talk about “dog-days” now, we mean the period of the year between July 3d and August 11th, twenty days before and after the rising of the “dog-star.”

When we refer to "dog days" today, we're talking about the time of year from July 3rd to August 11th, which is twenty days before and after the rising of the "dog star."

The name was applied by the ancients to a period of about forty days, the hottest season of the year, at the time of the rising of Sirius, the dog-star.

The name was used by ancient people to describe a period of about forty days, the hottest time of the year, coinciding with the rising of Sirius, the dog star.

The time of the rising is now, owing to the precession of the equinoxes, different from what it was then (July 1st). It is now about July 23d.

The time of the rising is now, due to the precession of the equinoxes, different from what it was then (July 1st). It is now about July 23rd.

Lady operating electric coin press

Electric Coining Press, U. S. Mint, Philadelphia

Electric Coining Press, U.S. Mint, Philadelphia

Woman feeding planchets to brass tubes, from the bottom of which they are carried to the steel dies which form the coins.

Woman feeding planchets into brass tubes, from the bottom of which they are sent to the steel dies that shape the coins.

How is a Five Dollar Gold Piece Made?

The process of converting the precious metals into coins is an interesting one.

The process of turning precious metals into coins is quite fascinating.

The rolling machines through which the ingots are passed are adjustable, the space between the rollers being governed by the operator. About two hundred ingots are run through per hour on each pair of rollers.

The rolling machines that the ingots go through are adjustable, and the distance between the rollers is controlled by the operator. Each pair of rollers processes about two hundred ingots per hour.

When the rolling is completed the strip of metal is about six feet long. As it is impossible to roll perfectly true, it is necessary to “draw” these strips, after being softened by annealing. The drawing benches resemble long tables, with a bench on either side, at one end of which is an iron box secured to the table. In this are fastened two perpendicular steel cylinders. These are at the same distance apart that the thickness of the strip is required to be. It is drawn between the cylinders, which reduces the whole to an equal thickness.

When the rolling is finished, the metal strip is about six feet long. Since it's impossible to roll it perfectly straight, these strips need to be "drawn" after being softened by annealing. The drawing benches look like long tables, with a bench on each side, and at one end, there’s an iron box attached to the table. Inside this box, two vertical steel cylinders are fixed. They are set apart at the same distance as the desired thickness of the strip. The strip is pulled between the cylinders, which evens out the thickness.

These strips are now taken to the cutting machines, each of which will cut 225 planchets per minute. The press used consists of a vertical steel punch. From a strip worth $1,100 about $800 of planchets will be cut. These are then removed to the adjusting room, where they are adjusted. After inspection they are weighed on very accurate scales. If a planchet is too heavy, but near the weight, it is filed off at the edges; if too heavy for filing, it is thrown aside with the light ones to be remelted.

These strips are now taken to the cutting machines, each of which cuts 225 planchets per minute. The press used has a vertical steel punch. From a strip worth $1,100, about $800 worth of planchets will be cut. These are then moved to the adjusting room, where they are adjusted. After inspection, they are weighed on very accurate scales. If a planchet is too heavy but close to the correct weight, the edges are filed down; if it's too heavy to file, it’s set aside with the lighter ones to be remelted.

The planchets, after being adjusted, are taken to the coining and milling rooms, and are passed through the milling machine. They are fed to this machine through an upright tube, and as they descend are caught upon the edge of a revolving wheel and carried about a quarter of a revolution, during which the edge is compressed and forced up. By this apparatus 560 nickels can be milled in a minute; for large pieces the average is 120.

The planchets, after being adjusted, are taken to the coining and milling rooms and are sent through the milling machine. They are fed into this machine via a vertical tube, and as they drop down, they're caught on the edge of a spinning wheel and carried about a quarter of a turn, during which the edge is compressed and raised. This machine can mill 560 nickels per minute; for larger coins, the average is 120.

The massive but delicate coining presses coin from 80 to 100 pieces a minute. These presses do their work in a perfect manner. After being stamped the coins are taken to the coiner’s room. The light and heavy coins are kept separate in coining, and when delivered to the treasurer they are mixed in such proportions as to give him full weight in every delivery. By law, the deviation from the standard weight, in delivering to him, must not exceed three pennyweights in one thousand double eagles.

The large but fragile coin presses produce between 80 to 100 coins per minute. These presses operate flawlessly. Once stamped, the coins are taken to the coiner’s room. The lighter and heavier coins are kept separate during the coining process, and when delivered to the treasurer, they are mixed in such a way that he receives the correct total weight with each delivery. According to the law, the difference from the standard weight, when delivering to him, cannot exceed three pennyweights for every thousand double eagles.

The coinage of the United States mints since the organization of the government has amounted to nearly 6,000,000,000 pieces, valued at over $4,000,000,000.

The coins produced by the United States mints since the government was formed total nearly 6,000,000,000 pieces, worth over $4,000,000,000.

How does a Bird Fly?

The wing of a bird is an elastic, flexible organ, with a thick anterior and a thin posterior margin; hence the wing does not act like a solid board, but is thrown into a succession of curves. When a bird rises from the ground it leaps up with head stuck out and expanded tail, so that the body is in the position of a boy’s kite when thrown up. The wings are strongly flapped, striking forward and downward, and the bird quickly ascends. It has been shown that the wing describes a figure 8 in its action, the margin being brought down so that the tip of the wing gives the last blow after the part next the trunk has ceased to strike; hence, standing in front of a bird, the wing would be divided into two, the upper surface of one-half and the lower surface of the other being visible at the same time. These portions are reversed when the wing is drawn back and towards the body, before beginning another stroke; but it will be observed that during retraction the wing is still sloped, so that the resemblance to a kite is maintained. There are many varieties of flight among birds; of these the most remarkable is the sailing motion, in which the wings are but slightly moved. Probably the original impetus is maintained by the kite-like slope of the wing, and advantage may be taken of currents by a rotation of the wing at the shoulder, a movement invisible at any distance.

The wing of a bird is a flexible, elastic structure, with a thick front edge and a thin back edge. Because of this, the wing doesn’t act like a solid board but moves in a series of curves. When a bird takes off from the ground, it jumps up with its head extended and tail spread out, resembling a boy’s kite when thrown into the air. The wings flap vigorously, moving forward and downward, allowing the bird to quickly rise. Studies have shown that the wing follows a figure 8 pattern in its motion, with the edge brought down so that the tip of the wing delivers the final thrust after the section closest to the body has stopped moving. Thus, if you stand in front of a bird, you would see two views of the wing at the same time: the upper surface of one half and the lower surface of the other. These views switch when the wing is pulled back toward the body, preparing for another stroke. However, even during this retraction, the wing retains a sloped position, keeping the kite-like appearance. Birds exhibit various flight styles, the most notable of which is gliding, where the wings are barely moved. It’s likely that the initial momentum is sustained by the kite-like angle of the wing, and they can take advantage of air currents by rotating the wing at the shoulder, a movement that isn’t noticeable from a distance.


The Story of the Big Redwood Trees[23]

The “Big Trees” of California are the most magnificent specimens of tree growth that have ever been found. In addition, they are the oldest known living things; they connect the present with the past in a chain of living rings in the tree that betray their great age to the modern scientist. Estimates of the age of the “Big Trees” vary from the Christian Era through a period dating back beyond the coming of the Christian Saviour about 4,000 years.

The “Big Trees” of California are the most amazing examples of tree growth ever discovered. They are also the oldest known living things; they link the present with the past through a series of living rings in the trees that reveal their immense age to today’s scientists. Estimates of the age of the “Big Trees” range from the Christian Era to a period extending back over 4,000 years before the arrival of Jesus Christ.

The “Big Trees” of California are known as the “Sequoias,” and they are divided into two different although closely related species. The few enormous trees of great age which are now preserved in groves are known as the Sequoia Gigantia. These big trees grow at an altitude between 4,000 and 7,000 feet, and, whether individual or in groves, they are found in protected valleys, canyons, etc.

The “Big Trees” of California are known as the “Sequoias,” and they consist of two different but closely related species. The few massive trees that are very old and currently preserved in groves are called Sequoia Gigantia. These giant trees grow at elevations between 4,000 and 7,000 feet, and whether they stand alone or in groves, they can be found in protected valleys, canyons, and similar areas.

What is known as the Redwoods, or scientifically listed as Sequoia Sempervirens, grow in heavy stands and really are a younger growth of the “Big Trees.” The redwoods grow in the fog belt in the counties bordering the coast from Monterey Bay north to the Oregon line. These trees range in age from 500 to 2,000 years, and are generally supposed by the scientists to be a reproduction growth that began their earthly existence shortly after the glacial period. The Sequoia Gigantia reproduce from cones, while the redwoods reproduce from suckers that grow from the stump. The redwoods bear non-fertile cones. Both species of the sequoias are evergreen.

What we call the Redwoods, scientifically named Sequoia Sempervirens, grow in dense clusters and are essentially a younger generation of the “Big Trees.” These redwoods thrive in the fog belt along the coast from Monterey Bay to the Oregon border. They can live anywhere from 500 to 2,000 years and are generally believed by scientists to have started their existence shortly after the glacial period. The Sequoia Gigantia reproduce from cones, while the redwoods propagate through suckers that emerge from the stump. The redwoods produce non-fertile cones. Both types of sequoias are evergreen.

These trees, including both species, range in height from 100 to 400 feet and in circumference from 15 to 90 feet. When full grown the “Big Trees” are proportionate and symmetrical in girth and height and the beauty of the tree is enhanced by flutings that traverse the bark from the base to the apex. The root system is a remarkable feature of the “Big Trees,” for they have a very poor footing for trees of their great size and weight. The roots radiate a short distance below the surface of the ground and there is no stabilizer in the shape of a tap root such as in other woods. The bark ranges in thickness from four to thirty inches, although in rare instances it has been found fifty inches thick. The bark is light, soft and of a bright cinnamon color. The lumber from the redwood tree is light, and ranges in color from medium to light cherry, while the lumber from the “Big Trees,” or Sequoia Gigantia, has a decided pink cast.

These trees, which include both species, range in height from 100 to 400 feet and in circumference from 15 to 90 feet. When fully grown, the “Big Trees” are proportionate and symmetrical in girth and height, and their beauty is enhanced by flutings that run along the bark from the base to the top. The root system is a remarkable feature of the “Big Trees,” as they have very poor footing for trees of their size and weight. The roots spread a short distance below the surface of the ground, and unlike other trees, there is no stabilizing tap root. The bark varies in thickness from four to thirty inches, although in rare cases it has been found to be fifty inches thick. The bark is light, soft, and has a bright cinnamon color. The lumber from the redwood tree is lightweight and ranges in color from medium to light cherry, while the lumber from the “Big Trees,” or Sequoia Gigantia, has a definite pink hue.

John Muir, the eminent California naturalist, evolved the theory from the topographical position of the enormously big trees, which grow only in the vicinity of Yosemite Park, that they escaped the glacial action because they were located in protected places in the mountains.

John Muir, the famous California naturalist, developed the theory based on the geographical location of the giant trees that only grow around Yosemite Park. He believed they survived the glacial activity because they were situated in sheltered areas of the mountains.

Commercial redwood—and there are twenty-one mills cutting redwood—is one of the most valuable woods on the Pacific coast. It carries with it into lumber two traits of the tree itself—fire retardance and rot resistance. These two qualities are the real secrets of the “Big Trees.” There is no fungus growth on the redwoods neither are the redwoods attacked by boring worms or other insects so common to other species of wood.

Commercial redwood—which is processed by twenty-one mills—is one of the most valuable types of wood on the Pacific coast. It brings into lumber two characteristics of the tree itself: fire resistance and decay resistance. These two features are the true secrets of the "Big Trees." There’s no fungus growth on redwoods, and they aren't attacked by boring worms or other insects that often affect other types of wood.

Some of the giant redwood logs must be split in the woods with powder before they can be handled on the saw carriage, and the average yield per acre is in the neighborhood of 150,000 feet. At the present rate of cutting, about 400,000,000 feet a year, there is more than one hundred years’ supply of redwood still standing.

Some of the giant redwood logs need to be split in the forest with explosives before they can be moved on the saw carriage, and the average yield per acre is around 150,000 feet. At the current cutting rate of about 400,000,000 feet a year, there is more than a hundred years' worth of redwood still standing.

The redwoods thrive in moisture—it is taken into the roots, the foliage and the bark. This accounts for the remarkable rot-resisting quality. The railroads prefer redwood for ties because of its resistance to decay in contact with moist soil. The Southern Pacific Company today has in service in some of its sidings redwood ties that were put down under its rails fifty-five years ago.

The redwoods thrive in moisture—it gets absorbed by the roots, leaves, and bark. This is what gives them their impressive rot-resistant quality. Railroads choose redwood for ties because it doesn't decay when it's in contact with moist soil. The Southern Pacific Company currently has redwood ties in some of its sidings that were installed under its tracks fifty-five years ago.

Redwood tree

A Lordly Pillar in one of “God’s First Temples”

A Grand Column in one of "God's First Temples"

“Grizzly Giant,” a redwood in Mariposa Grove, California, one of the most wonderful of all wonderful sights in the West

“Grizzly Giant,” a redwood in Mariposa Grove, California, is one of the most amazing sights in the West.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Fire retardance is a remarkable feature of redwood. In the early days of logging, when modern machinery was not available, the woodsmen were confronted with the problem of moving tremendously heavy trees. About sixty per cent of redwood is moisture, and what is known as the “butt cut” logs—the first cut above the ground, which is usually sixteen feet in length, will weigh from thirty to fifty tons. In order to move these heavy logs, therefore, it was necessary for the woodsmen to get rid of the bark, the undergrowth and the branches, which, in logging parlance, is known as “slash.” He soon learned that redwood so strongly resists fire that it was entirely safe to set fire to the logged-over field, burning out this slash without any damage whatever to the logs, although they were exposed to a fierce fire for a period of eight to twelve hours. Redwood does burn, but very slowly, and those who are familiar with California redwood know that it is the despair of the camper to endeavor to build a fire with it. Redwood does not contain pitch, the inflammable element in wood, and, in addition, it is extremely porous, quickly absorbing water. These two traits, in addition to the chemical composition of the wood itself, give it the fire retardance quality.

Fire resistance is a notable characteristic of redwood. In the early days of logging, before modern machinery was available, loggers faced the challenge of moving incredibly heavy trees. About sixty percent of redwood is moisture, and the "butt cut" logs—the first cut above the ground, usually around sixteen feet long—can weigh between thirty and fifty tons. To move these hefty logs, the loggers needed to remove the bark, underbrush, and branches, which is referred to as “slash” in logging terms. They soon realized that redwood is so resistant to fire that it was completely safe to burn the logged-over area, clearing the slash without harming the logs, even though they were exposed to an intense fire for eight to twelve hours. Redwood does burn, but very slowly, and those familiar with California redwood know that it frustrates campers trying to start a fire with it. Redwood lacks pitch, the flammable component found in wood, and it is also very porous, quickly absorbing water. These two features, along with the wood's chemical makeup, contribute to its fire-resistant quality.

Redwood lumber, being light in weight and singularly free from many of the defects so prevalent in other wood, is extremely easy to work. When properly dried it does not shrink, warp or swell. It is capable of producing magnificent tones for interior finish, and some of the most charming homes on the Pacific coast have been made so by reason of the wonderful possibilities of redwood in this respect. Remarkable color-tone finishes are done by acid stains. Redwood is also a specialty wood. It has been used for years by the organ manufacturers in the West for organ pipes, giving eminent satisfaction. For incubators it is particularly desirable, while for concrete form lumber, and particularly in hot sections where the fierce heat of the sun is liable to warp other woods, it gives wonderful service by “staying put.” Redwood is one of the few woods that can be used over again for concrete work. For siding, sheathing, sub-flooring, shingles, window casings and frames, redwood is much used, because of its resistance to decay, both from contact with moisture or dry rot.

Redwood lumber is lightweight and largely free from many defects common in other woods, making it very easy to work with. When properly dried, it doesn't shrink, warp, or swell. It can create beautiful tones for interior finishes, and some of the prettiest homes on the Pacific coast have been built because of redwood's amazing potential in this area. Acid stains produce stunning color-tone finishes. Redwood is also a specialty wood that has been used for years by organ manufacturers in the West for making organ pipes, with great success. It's especially desirable for incubators, and when it comes to concrete form lumber, particularly in hot areas where the intense sun can warp other woods, it performs exceptionally well by "staying put." Redwood is one of the few woods that can be reused for concrete work. It is widely used for siding, sheathing, sub-flooring, shingles, window casings, and frames due to its resistance to decay from moisture contact or dry rot.

Redwood’s hardihood, due to the natural acids in the wood, make it so weather-resisting that it will last just as long unpainted as it does painted. However, there is no wood that takes and holds paint better. This is due to the absence of pitch and the porosity of the wood. It also possesses a remarkable resistance to corrosive acids and for this reason is the preferred material for tanks and vats in wineries, breweries, chemical works, mines, tanneries, etc.

Redwood's durability, thanks to the natural acids in the wood, makes it resistant to weather so that it lasts just as long unpainted as it does when painted. However, no wood takes and holds paint better. This is because it lacks pitch and has a porous structure. Additionally, it has an impressive resistance to corrosive acids, which is why it's the preferred material for tanks and vats in wineries, breweries, chemical plants, mines, tanneries, and more.

The great bulk of redwood lumber has for years been consumed in the State of California, with about 50,000,000 feet annually going to Australia and the Orient and about 50,000,000 feet shipped by rail to the Middle West and East, the eastern shipments consisting practically of house materials and finishing stock.

The majority of redwood lumber has been used in California for years, with around 50,000,000 feet being sent to Australia and Asia each year, and another 50,000,000 feet transported by rail to the Midwest and East. The shipments to the East mainly include building materials and finishing supplies.


How did the Expression “Forlorn Hope” Originate?

In the expression “forlorn hope” we have made the Dutch word “hoop” meaning a “company” into hope.

In the phrase “forlorn hope,” we’ve taken the Dutch word “hoop,” which means “company,” and turned it into hope.

The “forlorn hoop” was a body of men, usually volunteers, selected from different regiments, to lead an assault, enter a breach or perform some other service attended with uncommon peril.

The “forlorn hoop” was a group of men, usually volunteers, chosen from different regiments to lead an attack, enter a breach, or carry out some other task that involved significant danger.

Wall Street from a rooftop

Wall Street, Known Around the World

Wall Street, Known Globally

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

Why is “Wall Street” Known Around the World?

This narrow canyon street in the lower part of the Borough of Manhattan is the financial center of New York City. The various exchanges and the largest banking institutions are situated here, and stocks and bonds are dealt in to a vast extent. Its control over finance has spread until now it affects the whole country and is a rival of the great financial centers of Europe.

This narrow canyon street in the lower part of Manhattan is the financial hub of New York City. The different exchanges and the biggest banking institutions are located here, and a huge amount of stocks and bonds are traded. Its influence over finance has grown to the point that it impacts the entire country and competes with the major financial centers in Europe.

In the picture, Trinity Church is shown, lying at the head of Wall Street, on Broadway, with its quaint old churchyard and its spire insignificant amid the giant skyscrapers that surround it. Trinity Church was founded in 1696 and rebuilt in 1839. It is probably the wealthiest and most influential of the churches in the United States, controlling many valuable real estate properties in New York City, and having some of the richest and most prominent people in the country among its members.

In the picture, Trinity Church is depicted, located at the start of Wall Street on Broadway, featuring its charming old churchyard with a spire that seems dwarfed by the towering skyscrapers surrounding it. Founded in 1696 and rebuilt in 1839, Trinity Church is likely the wealthiest and most influential church in the United States, managing numerous valuable real estate properties in New York City and counting some of the richest and most prominent individuals in the country as its members.

Starting approximately a quarter of a mile south of Wall Street, Broadway, New York City’s main business thoroughfare, extends for fifteen miles to the northern end of Manhattan Island. The activity and variety of its traffic, the elegance of its shops, and the massiveness and grandeur of many of its public and private buildings, makes it one of the most interesting streets in the world.

Starting about a quarter of a mile south of Wall Street, Broadway, New York City’s primary business road, stretches for fifteen miles to the northern tip of Manhattan Island. The hustle and bustle of its traffic, the stylishness of its stores, and the impressive size and beauty of many of its public and private buildings make it one of the most fascinating streets in the world.

What Makes a Stick Seem to Bend in Water?

When we hold a stick partly in the water, it looks as though the stick bends just where it enters the water. That is due to the change of the direction of the light after it enters the water. This change in the direction of the light rays is called refraction. Glass, water and other solids and fluids each have different powers of refraction.

When we hold a stick partially in the water, it appears to bend right at the spot where it enters the water. This happens because the light direction changes as it moves into the water. This change in the direction of the light rays is known as refraction. Glass, water, and other solids and liquids each have different levels of refraction.

The law of refraction comes into operation when a ray of light passes through a smooth surface bounding two media not homogeneous, such as air and water, or when rays traverse a medium the density of which is not uniform, such as the atmosphere.

The law of refraction applies when a ray of light crosses a smooth boundary between two different substances, like air and water, or when rays move through a medium that has varying density, like the atmosphere.

What Causes a Lump in a Person’s Throat?

When we eat anything, it passes into the throat after we have chewed it, and instead of just dropping down into our stomachs, there is a nine or ten inch series of rings in our throats, that takes the food, passing or squeezing it from one set of muscle rings to the other. These muscle rings are capable of working both up and down. If something is eaten which causes vomiting, the muscles work the other way and force the matter from the stomach.

When we eat something, it goes into our throat after we chew it, and instead of simply dropping into our stomachs, there's a nine or ten-inch series of muscle rings in our throats that move the food along by squeezing it from one ring to the next. These muscle rings can push both upwards and downwards. If we eat something that makes us vomit, the muscles work in the opposite direction and push the contents out of the stomach.

When one is frightened a sort of a hollow feeling comes into the stomach and the muscles of the throat work upward, pressing against the windpipe and causing one to feel as if there was a lump there.

When someone is scared, a hollow feeling forms in the stomach, and the throat muscles tighten, pushing against the windpipe and making it feel like there's a lump there.

How are We Able to Hear Through Speaking-Tubes?

We know that when we speak, the sound waves that we set in motion are carried in every direction. Now when we speak into a tube, the sound waves cannot travel in all directions, but must follow the tube, and so we can hear through a tube at a greater distance than we can when speaking in the usual way.

We know that when we talk, the sound waves we create spread out in every direction. But when we talk into a tube, the sound waves can't go everywhere—they have to move along the tube. Because of this, we can hear better through a tube at a greater distance than we can when speaking normally.

The use of a megaphone or speaking trumpet for conveying the sound of the voice to a distance is based on the same principle.

The use of a megaphone or speaking trumpet to project the sound of your voice over long distances is based on the same principle.

Why do We Always Shake Hands with Our Right Hand?

The custom of shaking hands with the right hand has come down to us from the time when everyone carried a sword or knife. In those days when one met a stranger it was customary, as an indication of friendly intention, to hold out the right hand to show that it did not hold a sword or knife ready for attack.

The tradition of shaking hands with the right hand has been passed down from a time when everyone carried a sword or knife. Back then, when you met a stranger, it was common practice to extend your right hand as a gesture of friendly intent, showing that it wasn't holding a sword or knife ready for attack.


The Story in a Billiard Table[24]

The origin of billiards is lost in antiquity. Who invented the game and the early processes of its evolution remain mysteries.

The origin of billiards is lost in ancient history. Who invented the game and how it developed over time are still mysteries.

The first known reference to the game with any traditional or historical accuracy occurs in Abbe McGeoghegan’s “History of Ireland.” Cathire More, a sub-king who ruled over Leinster, died A. D. 148. The Abbe, quoting from King Cathire’s will, says, “To Drimoth I bequeath fifty billiard balls of brass with the cues of the same material.”

The first known mention of the game with any traditional or historical accuracy appears in Abbe McGeoghegan’s “History of Ireland.” Cathire More, a sub-king who ruled over Leinster, died A.D. 148. The Abbe, quoting from King Cathire’s will, says, “To Drimoth I leave fifty brass billiard balls along with cues made of the same material.”

As early as the fifteenth century we have much evidence of the universality of the game all over southern Europe. It was certainly known in France in the time of Louis IX, who died nine years before Columbus discovered America.

As early as the fifteenth century, we have plenty of evidence showing that the game was popular all over southern Europe. It was definitely known in France during the time of Louis IX, who died nine years before Columbus discovered America.

Shakespeare, in Anthony and Cleopatra (Act II, Scene 5), makes the latter say, “Let us to billiards.”

Shakespeare, in Anthony and Cleopatra (Act II, Scene 5), makes the latter say, “Let’s go play billiards.”

Cotton’s “Compleat Gamster” published in 1674, refers to billiards as “This most gentle, cleanly and ingenious game.” He states that it was first played in France, but later gives Spain as its birthplace.

Cotton’s “Compleat Gamster” published in 1674, refers to billiards as “This most gentle, cleanly and ingenious game.” He states that it was first played in France, but later gives Spain as its birthplace.

That the game was well known in England, and in fact in all Europe, is revealed when Cotton says, “For the excellency of the recreation, it is much approved of and played by most nations of Europe, especially England, there being few towns of note therein which hath not a public billiard table; neither are they wanting in many noble and private families in the country.”

That the game was well known in England, and in fact in all of Europe, is shown when Cotton says, “Because of the excellence of the game, it is highly regarded and played by most nations in Europe, especially England, where there are few notable towns that don’t have a public billiard table; it’s also found in many noble and private families in the countryside.”

Billiards was brought to America by the Spaniards who settled St. Augustine, Florida, in 1565. While we have no direct evidence, it is very safe to assume that the English gentlemen, so familiar with the game in the home land, who colonized Virginia in 1609, were not long in introducing it in Jamestown.

Billiards was introduced to America by the Spaniards who settled in St. Augustine, Florida, in 1565. Although we don't have direct evidence, it's reasonable to assume that the English gentlemen, well-acquainted with the game back home, who colonized Virginia in 1609, quickly brought it to Jamestown.

There is also every reason to believe that the French colonists in Maryland and Canada let no great time elapse before importing tables and equipment into those colonies.

There’s also every reason to think that the French colonists in Maryland and Canada didn’t wait long to bring in tables and equipment to those colonies.

In the days of Cromwell, billiards had been tabooed by the Puritan, not on moral grounds, but rather political. Billiards was the game of the aristocracy and the Puritan hated not only the aristocrat, but the style and color of his clothes, the cut of his hair, as well as the games he played.

In Cromwell's time, the Puritans had banned billiards, not out of moral reasons, but for political ones. Billiards was a game for the aristocracy, and the Puritans despised not just the aristocrats themselves, but also their fashion, hairstyle, and the games they enjoyed.

Doubtless this attitude was carried to America by the New England colonists, and only when those colonies had been diluted by the injection of other social groups did Puritan prejudice die and billiards enter into their recreational life.

Doubtless this attitude was brought to America by the New England colonists, and it was only when those colonies were mixed with other social groups that Puritan prejudice faded and billiards became part of their leisure activities.

However, there is no doubt that by the latter part of the seventeenth century the game was universally played in the United States.

However, there is no doubt that by the late seventeenth century, the game was played everywhere in the United States.

From that time to the present the tide of popularity for billiards as the premier indoor game has been steadily rising.

From that time to now, the popularity of billiards as the leading indoor game has been consistently increasing.

Unlike most things in the affairs of men, billiards has not developed at either end of society, thus working toward the opposite extreme; but it began at both ends and worked towards the middle.

Unlike many aspects of human affairs, billiards hasn't evolved from just one end of society; instead, it started at both ends and moved toward the center.

In the early days we witness the strange spectacle of the game being indulged in by the wealthy and leisurely class on the one hand, and the idle and vicious on the other. It is easy to understand why. The first group was the logical extension of the old-world aristocracy. The second group lived in an age when the great middle class was struggling for a foothold in a new country. Men had very little time and[310] disposition for play, and this, coupled with the remnants of Puritanic influence, left the game in the hands of those who lived by their wits rather than work.

In the early days, we see a strange sight of the game being enjoyed by the wealthy and leisurely class on one side, and the idle and corrupt on the other. It makes sense why this happened. The first group was a natural continuation of the old-world aristocracy. The second group existed in a time when the large middle class was trying to establish itself in a new country. People had very little time and[310]interest in play, and this, combined with the remnants of Puritan influence, left the game in the hands of those who relied on their wits rather than hard work.

From these two extremes, therefore, the game began to work toward the great middle classes. In process of time recreation became a necessity, until today it is considered a duty. Men learned to play and, casting about for a game worthy of them, naturally laid hold of billiards.

From these two extremes, the game started to appeal to the growing middle classes. Over time, recreation became essential, and today it is seen as a responsibility. People learned to play and, in search of a game that suited them, naturally gravitated toward billiards.

Toward this desired result the Y. M. C. A. and church clubs have contributed greatly. They have broken down much of the illogical prejudice against the games, and have shown the public-room keepers that billiards can flourish under good and healthful conditions.

Toward this desired outcome, the Y.M.C.A. and church clubs have made significant contributions. They've helped dismantle a lot of the unfair bias against the games and have demonstrated to venue operators that billiards can thrive in positive and healthy environments.

As the game became more universally played, a better class of billiard-room keepers entered the commercial field, thus helping to eliminate the incompetent and vicious.

As the game became more widely played, a better class of billiard hall operators entered the market, helping to get rid of the inexperienced and unscrupulous.

Today the game has practically thrown off the last vestige of disrepute. In those sporadic instances where such is not the case, it is due to two causes. First, the majority of people in the community have low ideals. Second, excessive license taxes forces certain room keepers to resort to disreputable means for keeping alive their business.

Today, the game has almost completely shed its negative reputation. In the few cases where that's not true, it's due to two reasons. First, most people in the community have low standards. Second, high licensing fees pressure some business owners to use questionable methods to keep their operations running.

Nevertheless, billiards today throughout the land is ranked among the highest and cleanest forms of recreation. The exceptions mentioned prove the rule.

Nevertheless, billiards today is considered one of the best and cleanest forms of entertainment across the country. The exceptions mentioned confirm this rule.

Through a long, hard, vigorous opposition the virtues of billiards have asserted themselves. Today the game stands vindicated and triumphant. It is entering thousands of homes, church clubs, industrial welfare, charitable, educational and all other institutions. There are more billiard players in the United States than there are baseball players; not mere spectators, but actual players.

Through a long, tough fight, the benefits of billiards have proven themselves. Today, the game is validated and thriving. It is making its way into thousands of homes, church clubs, industrial welfare programs, charitable organizations, educational institutions, and more. There are more billiard players in the United States than baseball players; not just fans, but actual players.

One large company alone manufactures 500,000 cues every year, and we must remember that a billiard cue, unlike a baseball bat, can be repaired and lasts for many years. This fact is sufficient to convey an idea of the vast extent to which the game is played.

One big company alone makes 500,000 cues each year, and we should keep in mind that a billiard cue, unlike a baseball bat, can be repaired and lasts for many years. This alone gives us an idea of how widely the game is played.

In the early part of the nineteenth century there were no manufacturers of billiard equipment in the United States.

In the early part of the 1800s, there were no makers of billiard equipment in the United States.

In 1840 J. M. Brunswick, who operated a small furniture repair shop in Cincinnati, Ohio, conceived the idea of making a pigeonhole table. Success in this line led him to experiment in the manufacture of billiard tables, practically all of which were then imported. The business flourished. At first only the 6 x 12 English pocket tables were made—later the small French carom tables were built.

In 1840, J. M. Brunswick, who ran a small furniture repair shop in Cincinnati, Ohio, came up with the idea of making a pigeonhole table. His success in this area encouraged him to try making billiard tables, nearly all of which were being imported at the time. The business thrived. Initially, they only produced the 6 x 12 English pocket tables, but later, they also made small French carom tables.

The two main objects of billiard construction are to create an accurate medium for play and then to keep the table permanently accurate by making it impervious to atmospheric or climatic conditions.

The two main goals of billiard table design are to create an accurate playing surface and to maintain that accuracy over time by making the table resistant to environmental factors like weather and humidity.

To accomplish this with wood has taken years of experience and experimentation.

Getting this done with wood has required years of experience and experimentation.

Accuracy is obtained by the employment of specially-trained and long-experienced workmen. One large company now has hundreds of men who have been in its employ for twenty years and many who have served from twenty-five to forty years. These men know their business.

Accuracy is achieved through the use of specially trained and highly experienced workers. One large company currently employs hundreds of individuals who have been with them for twenty years, and many who have been there for twenty-five to forty years. These workers know their stuff.

Permanent accuracy is obtained by close adherence to two principles. First, to give weight to the table. One model, 5 x 10 feet in size, weighs 2,000 pounds. Second, all wood parts are built up with veneer layers; never are they constructed of solid blocks of wood. A billiard table is the last word in the art of cabinet-making.

Permanent accuracy is achieved by strictly following two principles. First, the table needs to be heavy. For example, one model, measuring 5 x 10 feet, weighs 2,000 pounds. Second, all the wooden parts are made using layers of veneer; they are never built from solid wood blocks. A billiard table represents the pinnacle of cabinet-making craftsmanship.

There are six principal parts to all tables.

There are six main parts to all tables.

The Legs.—Massive as these are, they are built up, not turned from solid blocks. In all legs there are at least three veneers, two on the outside and one on the inside. On the highest-grade tables five veneers are used. Six legs are placed on the best and larger tables and four on the smaller.

The Legs.—As massive as they are, they’re constructed rather than carved from solid blocks. In all legs, there are at least three layers, two on the outside and one on the inside. The highest-quality tables use five layers. Six legs are used on the best and larger tables, while four are used on the smaller ones.

The Frame.—Like the legs, the four parts of the frame, which in every case is a perfect parallelogram, are built up and veneered on both sides. When the frame has been bolted to the legs, stretchers or braces are placed within. Two to four, depending on the size of the table, run lengthwise through the center, and two or three running equidistant, crosswise. The top of the stretcher is flush with the top of the frame, making a perfect level upon which the slate bed is to rest.

The Frame.—Similar to the legs, the four sections of the frame, which in every case is a perfect parallelogram, are constructed and veneered on both sides. Once the frame is attached to the legs, stretchers or braces are added inside. Depending on the size of the table, there are two to four stretchers running lengthwise through the center, and two or three placed evenly across. The top of the stretcher is flush with the top of the frame, creating a perfectly level surface for the slate bed to rest on.

The Slate Bed.—Only the highest-grade Vermont slate is used, and on the best tables of standard size, 4 x 8 feet, 412 x 9 feet, and 5 x 10 feet, the slabs, of which there are three, are 112 inches thick. At the factory the slate is cut to size and smoothed top and bottom. The pocket holes are next sawed out. On the center slab two are cut, one in the exact middle of either end. On the two end slabs they are cut on the two outside corners.

The Slate Bed.—Only the highest-quality Vermont slate is used, and on the best standard-sized tables, which are 4 x 8 feet, 412 x 9 feet, and 5 x 10 feet, the slabs, totaling three, are 112 inches thick. At the factory, the slate is cut to size and smoothed on both the top and bottom. Next, the pocket holes are sawed out. On the center slab, two holes are cut—one in the exact middle at each end. On the two end slabs, the holes are cut in the two outside corners.

The slabs, where they join, are then bored along the edges and brass dowels are inserted which engage sockets set in the opposite slab. This keeps all slabs level with each other. All around the outside edge they are bored for the insertion of the bolts to fasten the cushion rails to the slate. Screw holes, countersunk, are bored from the top down through the slabs, around the outer edges, through which the slate is screwed to the frame.

The slabs are bored along the edges where they connect, and brass dowels are inserted into sockets set in the opposite slab. This keeps all the slabs level with each other. They are also bored around the outer edge for bolts that will fasten the cushion rails to the slate. Screw holes are countersunk and bored from the top down through the slabs around the outer edges, allowing the slate to be screwed to the frame.

Storage room of billiard supplies

Supply Room at Muskegon

Supply Room in Muskegon

The many triangles will convey an idea of the vastness of the billiard industry.

The many triangles will give a sense of the scale of the billiard industry.

When the slate bed is laid, the slabs, doweled as the leaves of an extension dining table, are fitted together and screwed to the frame. The table is then pushed under a huge grinding machine and the slate surface is made plane, as nearly perfect as human ingenuity can make it.

When the slate bed is set, the slabs, pinned together like the leaves of an extendable dining table, are connected and screwed to the frame. The table is then moved under a gigantic grinding machine, and the slate surface is made flat, as close to perfect as human skill can achieve.

The Bed Cloth.—Only the finest grade of imported Belgium broadcloth is used on the best tables. It is colored green, which is restful for the eyes.

The Bed Cloth.—Only the highest quality imported Belgian broadcloth is used on the finest tables. It is green in color, which is easy on the eyes.

The bed cloth is first tacked to the frame beneath the slate at one corner. It is then stretched to its utmost to the opposite diagonal corner. When this is fastened the cloth is tacked around the remainder of the bed; being stretched as tightly as possible in every direction.

The bed cloth is first secured to the frame underneath the slate at one corner. It's then pulled tight to the opposite diagonal corner. Once that's fastened, the cloth is secured around the rest of the bed, stretched as tightly as possible in every direction.

The table is now ready for the rails and cushions. Like all other wood parts, the[312] rails are built up and veneered, rather than made of a single block of wood. When the rail has been formed, the ivory diamond-shaped squares and name plate are countersunk into the top. The squares are to enable the player to properly judge the angles of play.

The table is now set for the rails and cushions. Like all the other wooden parts, the[312] rails are assembled and veneered, instead of being made from a single piece of wood. Once the rail is shaped, the ivory diamond-shaped squares and nameplate are sunk into the top. The squares help the player accurately judge the angles of play.

The cushions are fastened to the inside of the rail by means of a specially prepared glue.

The cushions are attached to the inside of the rail with a specially designed glue.

Only the best grade of rubber is used for good cushions. The rubber is molded in long strips in some form of isosceles triangle, depending on the style of the game to be played. A highly resilient structure is given the cushion for the pocket table, and one less so for the carom. The latter is preferred for more accurate angle play, position and nursing. Nursing, means to keep the three balls as close to one another as possible.

Only the best quality rubber is used for quality cushions. The rubber is shaped into long strips in some form of an isosceles triangle, depending on the style of the game being played. A highly resilient structure is created for the pocket table cushion, while a less resilient one is used for the carom. The latter is preferred for more precise angle play, positioning, and nursing. Nursing means keeping the three balls as close to each other as possible.

The base of the triangle is grooved for the twofold purpose of making the rubber adhere better to the rail, and to increase resiliency. In fastening the rubber, utmost care must be exercised to have it attached to the rail, so that when the latter is fastened to the bed there shall be uniform height all around the table; otherwise the ball when it strikes the cushion will be deflected from the true course or rebound.

The base of the triangle has grooves to help the rubber stick better to the rail and to improve its bounce. When attaching the rubber, extreme care must be taken to ensure it’s securely attached to the rail, so that when the rail is fixed to the bed, the height is consistent all around the table; otherwise, when the ball hits the cushion, it will be deflected off its intended path or bounce incorrectly.

On top of the rail next to the cushion edge a narrow ∟ is cut the entire length. The cushion forms the other side, making a square groove, thus ⊔.

On the rail next to the cushion edge, there’s a narrow angle cut along the entire length. The cushion creates the other side, forming a square groove, like this: ⊔.

The cushion is now ready to be covered with the cloth.

The cushion is now ready to be covered with the fabric.

The latter, made of the same material as the bed cloth, is cut to fit. One edge is tucked into the groove just described, with the outside, or face, downward. A tight-fitting ferule is then forced into the groove, thus holding the cloth firmly between the cushion and the rail. The cloth is then drawn over the top of the ferule, hiding the latter from sight, and is drawn down over the rubber and fastened on the under side of the rail with steel tacks. Great care and much experience is necessary to successfully conduct this apparently simple operation; for it is quite easy to pull the cloth so tightly at different points as to bend out of shape the apex to the rubber triangle. On the other hand, not to pull it tight enough will leave the cloth loose, which is not only unsightly, but will impair the rubber and destroy the accuracy of the balls rebounding from it.

The latter, made of the same material as the bed cloth, is cut to fit. One edge is tucked into the groove described earlier, with the outside, or face, facing down. Then, a tight-fitting ferule is pushed into the groove, holding the cloth securely between the cushion and the rail. The cloth is pulled over the top of the ferule, hiding it from view, and then pulled down over the rubber and secured on the underside of the rail with steel tacks. Great care and a lot of experience are needed to successfully carry out this seemingly simple task; it's easy to pull the cloth too tightly at different points, which can distort the shape of the apex of the rubber triangle. On the flip side, if it’s not pulled tight enough, the cloth will be loose, which is not only unattractive but can also damage the rubber and affect the accuracy of the balls rebounding off it.

The completed rail is then covered with a finishing strip, known as the blind rail, which covers the unsightly bolt heads and adds to the artistic effect of the table. On the cheap grades there are no blind rails, the bolts being decorated with brass caps.

The finished rail is then covered with a finishing strip, called the blind rail, which hides the unattractive bolt heads and enhances the aesthetic appeal of the table. In the lower-end models, there are no blind rails; instead, the bolts are covered with brass caps.

The final operation is the construction of pockets.

The last step is creating pockets.

The pocket irons are semi-circular pieces of metal with flat flanges extending at right angles at both ends of the arc. Stout black leather is stitched around the round part of the iron, thus hiding the latter, and affording a good hold to which the leather, or worsted knitted, baskets are attached, and protection for billiard balls when striking.

The pocket irons are curved metal pieces with flat extensions at both ends of the arc. Thick black leather is sewn around the circular part of the iron, covering it and providing a solid grip for attaching the leather or knitted baskets, as well as protection for billiard balls when they hit.

The flanges are sunk flush into the top of the rail; thus the pocket iron spans the interstices between the rails. The half of the pocket net not attached to the irons is tacked to the edge of the frame, underneath the bed, and covered with red leather, to withstand wear and for decorative effect.

The flanges are set flush with the top of the rail, so the pocket iron bridges the gaps between the rails. The part of the pocket net that isn’t attached to the irons is fastened to the edge of the frame beneath the bed and covered with red leather to resist wear and for decoration.

Four hooks are then fastened to the frame, underneath the table, near the corner legs. These are termed bridge hooks and are for the purpose of having the cue-bridge ready of access for the players when necessary.

Four hooks are then attached to the frame, underneath the table, near the corner legs. These are called bridge hooks and are meant to keep the cue-bridge easily accessible for the players when needed.

The table is thus completed for playing use. There are ingenious devices, termed the “return gutters” and convertible rails, which are worthy of description.

The table is now ready for use in games. There are clever features called “return gutters” and adjustable rails, which are worth describing.

In tables thus equipped, the base of the pocket is opened—a stiff leather, funnel-shaped contrivance being substituted for the woolen or open leather pocket. This funnel opening leads into a wooden canal or gutter, the main stem of which runs on an incline the length of the table underneath. From this center gutter debouches[313] branch to each of the pockets. The gutters are lined with rubber, to render noiseless the balls as they roll from the pocket openings into and along the gutters, at the lowest point of which—the head of the table—they fall into the “receiver.” The latter is a specially designed box, felt lined, with sufficient capacity to contain the fifteen balls used in the pocket game.

In tables equipped this way, the base of the pocket is opened—a stiff leather, funnel-shaped device replaces the woolen or open leather pocket. This funnel opening connects to a wooden channel or gutter, which runs at an incline the entire length of the table underneath. From this central gutter, branches lead to each of the pockets. The gutters are lined with rubber to minimize noise as the balls roll from the pocket openings into and along the gutters, where they drop into the "receiver" at the lowest point—the head of the table. The receiver is a specially designed box, lined with felt, with enough space to hold the fifteen balls used in the pocket game.

The gutter return is a great convenience in collecting the balls to rack them for a new game.

The gutter return is really handy for collecting the balls so you can rack them up for a new game.

Carom tables have no pockets.

Carom tables don't have pockets.

Carom and pocket billiards are so different that either they must be played on separate tables, or else the rails are so constructed as to be interchangeable. The billiard expert is not satisfied unless the whole rail is changed. This is done by building the table without the regular rails, and by having a separate set of rails for each game, which are held in position by clamps and quickly interchanged. They conform to the general design and decoration of the table.

Carom and pocket billiards are so different that they have to be played on separate tables, or the rails have to be designed to be interchangeable. A billiard expert isn’t happy unless the entire rail is changed. This is achieved by building the table without the standard rails and having a separate set of rails for each game, which are secured in place by clamps and can be swapped out quickly. They match the overall design and decoration of the table.

Another method is merely to change the cushions. The back of the rubber is reinforced by a wood strip, into which are placed metal sockets. Bolts or ratchets are inserted through the rail, and clamp the cushion to the wall of the rail. The convertible rails, however, because of their rigidity, are more desirable than the convertible cushions.

Another method is just to swap out the cushions. The back of the rubber is strengthened with a wooden strip, which has metal sockets inserted into it. Bolts or ratchets go through the rail and hold the cushion against the wall of the rail. However, the convertible rails are more desirable than the convertible cushions due to their rigidity.

The cheapest and most unsatisfactory device is known as pocket plugs. On a permanently constructed pocket table, right-angled plugs of the rubber cushion are screwed to the corner pocket irons and straight sections are screwed to the side pocket irons. These, however, never perfectly fit at the cushion joints, consequently carom play at those points is out of the question.

The cheapest and most unsatisfactory device is known as pocket plugs. On a permanently built pocket table, right-angled rubber cushion plugs are screwed into the corner pocket irons, while straight sections are attached to the side pocket irons. However, these never fit perfectly at the cushion joints, making carom play at those points impossible.

Billiard table

A Modern High-Class Pocket Billiard Table

A Modern Luxury Pool Table

Cheap cues are made in one continuous piece; or a special piece for the “butt” and one for the shaft of the cue. The “butt” and body are dovetailed together.

Cheap cues are made in one seamless piece, or they feature a special piece for the “butt” and one for the shaft of the cue. The “butt” and body are joined together with dovetailing.

In making a high-grade cue, a choice piece of imported wood, such as ebony, mahogany, or rosewood, is cut into blocks about three inches square and twenty inches long. One of these is then roughly turned down on a lathe until it is round and slightly tapers all the way from one end to the other. At the narrow end it is then sawed four ways toward the thicker end, a distance of seven inches. This is the “butt.” The next section of either domestic or imported hard wood is forty-four inches long. This, too, receives a rough rotundity and tapering on a lathe. At the thicker end, a sawing-out process creates an opening, so that the “butt” and shaft can dovetail to a depth of seven inches.

In creating a high-quality cue, a premium piece of imported wood, like ebony, mahogany, or rosewood, is cut into blocks that are about three inches square and twenty inches long. One of these blocks is then roughly shaped on a lathe until it's round and slightly tapered from one end to the other. At the narrow end, it is then sawed four ways towards the thicker end, creating a cut of seven inches. This part is called the "butt." The next section, made of either domestic or imported hardwood, is forty-four inches long. This piece also gets rough shaping and tapering on a lathe. At the thicker end, a cutting process creates an opening, allowing the "butt" and shaft to fit together for a depth of seven inches.

The cue is then sawed across into halves. On the base of the upper half a hard wood screw is inserted and at the top of the butt a threaded hole is bored. To strengthen the joint, the hollow screw-hole end is capped with an ivory ferule sunk flush with the surface. This is the jointed cue—a great convenience to the player who travels or carries his cue home when he plays at the club or public academy.

The cue is then cut in half. A hard wood screw is inserted into the base of the upper half, and a threaded hole is drilled at the top of the butt. To reinforce the joint, the hollow end of the screw hole is capped with an ivory ferrule that’s flush with the surface. This is the jointed cue—a big convenience for players who travel or bring their cue home when playing at the club or public academy.

At the narrow end of the cue, the tapering ceases about three-quarters of an inch from the end and flanges out according to the kind of “tip” the player prefers. This end is capped with an ivory ferule and upon the top of the latter, the leather tip is glued.

At the narrow end of the cue, the taper stops about three-quarters of an inch from the end and flares out depending on the type of “tip” the player likes. This end is capped with an ivory ferrule, and the leather tip is glued on top of it.

Before this latter operation, the finished tapering, smoothing, varnishing and polishing is done by hand.

Before this last operation, the finished tapering, smoothing, varnishing, and polishing is done by hand.

Sometimes a flat surface a few inches long is planed on the circumference of the cue, extending up from the butt end and a mother-of-pearl name plate is sunk into the handle.

Sometimes a flat surface a few inches long is flattened on the circumference of the cue, extending up from the butt end, and a mother-of-pearl nameplate is set into the handle.

Cues run in weight from fifteen to twenty-two ounces. This means the manufacture of cues according to weight, as well as taper, material, finish and quality of the tip. Each of these embrace a mass of detail too voluminous for recital here.

Cues weigh between fifteen and twenty-two ounces. This involves making cues based on their weight, as well as their taper, material, finish, and the quality of the tip. Each of these factors includes a huge amount of detail that’s too extensive to cover here.

The Balls.—In the past, as far as we can historically trace, billiard balls were made of ivory. Until recently no superior substitute had been invented, but it is the consensus of opinion among expert billiardists that the newly manufactured synthetic ivory ball is equal, if not superior, in action and wearing quality, to real ivory.

The Balls.—Historically speaking, billiard balls were made from ivory. Until recently, there hadn't been a better alternative, but expert billiard players generally agree that the new synthetic ivory balls perform just as well, if not better, in terms of action and durability compared to actual ivory.

Men making billiard cues

Making Cues

Making Cues

Elephant-tusk ivory, the only kind used in billiard ball manufacturing, is growing scarcer every year, with a consequent increase in price.

Elephant-tusk ivory, the only type used for making billiard balls, is becoming rarer each year, resulting in rising prices.

In the ivory storage vaults of one large company, there is held from $150,000 to $300,000 worth of ivory, ranging from the tusk up to the finished product.

In the ivory storage vaults of one large company, there is stored between $150,000 and $300,000 worth of ivory, from tusks to finished products.

Ivory is of cellular, not fibrous, construction. Through the center of the tusk runs the great nerve of the tooth. The structural cells build up around the nerve. Surrounding the nerve, the cells are small and more compact. As the tusk grows in length on the living elephant it also expands; but the cells grow larger and less compact as the tusk expands in circumference. It is quite apparent, therefore, that the weight centers around the nerve. To have a perfectly balanced ball, one that will roll true in every direction, the ball must be so turned out of the tusk that the nerve center runs exactly through the middle of the ball.

Ivory is made of cellular material, not fibrous. A large nerve runs through the center of the tusk. Structural cells form around the nerve. The cells surrounding the nerve are smaller and more compact. As the tusk grows longer on the living elephant, it also gets wider; however, the cells become larger and less compact as the tusk increases in diameter. It's clear that the weight is centered around the nerve. To create a perfectly balanced ball that rolls smoothly in any direction, the ball must be cut from the tusk so that the nerve center runs directly through the center of the ball.

The process is as follows: The tusk is sawed into blocks about 234 inches in size. These are of irregular cylindrical form, depending on the form of the tusk’s circumference. Only that portion of the tusk can be used, the diameter of which is greater than the intended diameter of the ball. The rest of the tusk is used for ornaments, piano keys, etc. At least six inches from the point of the tusk must be discarded because the circumference is too small. The hollow part at the base of the tusk must also be discarded. There are defects discovered only when the ball is being turned or the segments cut. For all of the discarded portions and the fragments and[315] shavings from the segments when the ball is turned, the manufacturer receives less than one-fourth of the price per pound which he paid for the whole tusk.

The process is as follows: The tusk is cut into blocks about 234 inches in size. These blocks have an irregular cylindrical shape, depending on the circumference of the tusk. Only the part of the tusk that has a diameter larger than the intended size of the ball can be used. The rest of the tusk is utilized for ornaments, piano keys, and so on. At least six inches from the tip of the tusk must be discarded because the circumference is too small. The hollow section at the base of the tusk must also be removed. Defects are only identified when the ball is being shaped or when the segments are cut. For all the discarded portions, fragments, and[315] shavings from the segments when the ball is turned, the manufacturer receives less than a quarter of the price per pound that he paid for the entire tusk.

A segment is placed in a lathe—with the nerve center resting on the lathe point. The ball is then either turned down from the outside or cut out with an ingeniously constructed curved cutter from the inside of the segment. In the latter operation the ball lies loose in the center of the segment, which must be sawed in half to release it. Ivory seasons only to a slight depth. The thin seasoning on the surface seems to act as a shell which keeps raw the substance underneath. For this reason, when a ball is turned out of the tusk and the raw ivory thus exposed, the ball is stored away in a room of even temperature for about a year, that it may properly season before being finished. The red ball is dyed after seasoning, and at the time of final turning called finishing.

A segment is placed in a lathe, with the center resting on the lathe point. The ball is then either shaped from the outside or carved out with a cleverly designed curved cutter from the inside of the segment. In the latter case, the ball is loose in the middle of the segment, which needs to be sawed in half to release it. Ivory seasons only a little on the surface. The thin layer on the outside acts like a shell that keeps the material underneath raw. Because of this, when a ball is carved from the tusk and the raw ivory is exposed, the ball is stored in a room with a stable temperature for about a year, so it can properly season before finishing. The red ball is dyed after seasoning and during the final shaping, referred to as finishing.

Another peculiarity about ivory is the fact that, owing to the cellular construction, in seasoning the ball never contracts at the nerve ends, but always around the other circumference, termed the “belly.” Therefore, when the balls are turned, the circumference around the “belly” is made greater than around the nerve ends, to allow for the shrinkage in the former. Each manufacturer carefully guards the secret of his allowance, which is made according to his experience and knowledge of ivory seasoning variations.

Another interesting thing about ivory is that, because of its cellular structure, when it dries out, the ball never shrinks at the nerve ends but always around the other edge, known as the “belly.” So, when the balls are shaped, the area around the “belly” is made larger than around the nerve ends to accommodate for the shrinkage in that area. Each manufacturer carefully keeps the details of their adjustments secret, which are based on their experience and understanding of how ivory dries differently.

After seasoning, the balls are smoothed with shagreen and polished.

After seasoning, the balls are smoothed with shagreen and polished.

Except for the cue ball, no ivory balls are used today on the pocket table. As a substitute, a great variety of composition balls are used. The composition is another trade secret. Having been carefully weighed in a perfectly dry state, the necessary amount of composition is placed in a telescoping steel cylinder, the two ends of which are perfect hemispheres and the diameter of which on the inside is the exact diameter of the proposed ball. The cylinder is then placed in a hydraulic press and under a pressure of 30,000 pounds to the square inch, the cylinder and its contents are telescoped until the mass inside is perfectly round.

Except for the cue ball, no ivory balls are used today on the pool table. Instead, a wide variety of synthetic balls are used. The exact composition is a trade secret. After being carefully weighed in a perfectly dry state, the required amount of material is placed in a telescoping steel cylinder, with both ends shaped as perfect hemispheres and the interior diameter matching the intended ball size. The cylinder is then put in a hydraulic press, and under a pressure of 30,000 pounds per square inch, the cylinder and its contents are compressed until the mass inside is perfectly round.

The molded ball is then taken from the press and smoothed. The holes for the number tablets are bored and the tablets forced into position. The tablets are made to conform to the rotundity of the ball and set flush with the surface. The ball is then smoothed and polished.

The molded ball is then removed from the press and smoothed out. The holes for the number tablets are drilled, and the tablets are pressed into place. The tablets are shaped to fit the roundness of the ball and sit flush with the surface. The ball is then smoothed and polished.

The cue bridge handle is made in a manner similar to the cue, except that it is not jointed and the span is substituted for the tip. The span has four slots along the top, which maintains a contour to assist the player in striking the ball on either side, or top or bottom of the center facing the player, when the cue ball is too far away to make the bridge with his hand and fingers. The span is made of either hard wood or ivory.

The cue bridge handle is crafted similarly to the cue, except it isn't jointed, and the span replaces the tip. The span features four slots along the top, designed to help the player hit the ball on either side or at the top or bottom center facing them when the cue ball is too far away to reach with their hand and fingers. The span is made from either hardwood or ivory.

The temperate and torrid zones of the world are ransacked in order to secure the wood, the minerals and the animal substances, all of which are necessary to provide the means of play. Those of us who play the game (none of us, not even Willis Hoppe, know all its possibilities) may well paraphrase Thomas Carlyle’s reference to books and say, “Blessings on Herodotus, or whoever it was who invented billiards.”

The temperate and tropical regions of the world are exploited to gather the wood, minerals, and animal materials needed for recreation. Those of us who play the game (none of us, not even Willis Hoppe, fully understand all its possibilities) might as well echo Thomas Carlyle’s comment about books and say, “Cheers to Herodotus, or whoever it was who created billiards.”


What is the Hottest Place in the United States?

A narrow valley in California, called “Death Valley,” between the Panamint and Funeral Mountains, is considered the dryest and hottest place in the United States.

A narrow valley in California, known as "Death Valley," located between the Panamint and Funeral Mountains, is regarded as the driest and hottest place in the United States.

Its central part is three or four hundred feet below sea level and is covered with salt. Its temperature has reached the extreme of 122° F.

Its central part is three or four hundred feet below sea level and is covered with salt. Its temperature has reached a maximum of 122° F.

It is called “Death Valley” because a party of emigrants perished there in 1849.

It’s named “Death Valley” because a group of travelers died there in 1849.

White blackberries on bush

White Blackberry

White Blackberry

Spineless cacti with fruits

The Spineless Cactus in Fruit

The Spineless Cactus in Fruit

What are White Blackberries Like?

The accompanying illustrations show some remarkable white blackberries which have been developed by the great horticulturist, Luther Burbank of California. They grow thickly, are large in size and the taste is similar to that of the ordinary variety. Some spineless cactus in fruit are also shown. They make an excellent cattle food.

The accompanying illustrations shows some impressive white blackberries that have been cultivated by the renowned horticulturist, Luther Burbank from California. They grow densely, are large in size, and taste similar to the regular variety. Some spineless cactus in fruit are also displayed. They make a great feed for cattle.

He has also originated a new fruit, the plumcot, by combining the plum and the apricot; developed very excellent varieties of potatoes and cherries; and produced various new apples and stoneless prunes as well as new peaches, nuts, roses, callas, violet-odored lilies and many other new varieties.

He has also created a new fruit, the plumcot, by combining plums and apricots; developed excellent varieties of potatoes and cherries; and produced various new apples and pitted prunes as well as new peaches, nuts, roses, callas, violet-scented lilies, and many other new varieties.

The son of a Massachusetts farmer, he became deeply interested in plant life and engaged in experiments on hybridization of plants. Removing to California, he established the Burbank Exposition Farms at Santa Rosa, where he undertook the work of cross-breeding on an extended scale. In 1905 the Carnegie Institute granted him $10,000 yearly for ten years to continue his work. He has very many extensive experiments under way and has nearly 3,000 distinct botanical specimens in his plantation.

The son of a Massachusetts farmer, he became very interested in plants and conducted experiments on plant hybridization. After moving to California, he set up the Burbank Exposition Farms in Santa Rosa, where he began large-scale cross-breeding. In 1905, the Carnegie Institute awarded him $10,000 a year for ten years to support his work. He has numerous extensive experiments underway and has nearly 3,000 different botanical specimens in his plantation.

Why do They Have a Dog-Watch on Shipboard?

The “dog-watch” is a nautical term distinguishing two watches of two hours each, from 4 to 6 P. M. and 6 to 8 P. M.

The “dog-watch” is a nautical term that refers to two shifts of two hours each, from 4 to 6 P.M. and 6 to 8 P.M.

All the other watches count four hours each, and without the introduction of the dog-watches, the same hours would always fall to be kept as watch by the same portion of the crew.

All the other watches last four hours each, and without the introduction of the dog watches, the same crew members would always have to keep watch during the same hours.

How Much Gold has a 14-Carat Ring?

One often speaks of a ring as being 14-carat gold, or of 22- or 18-carat watch cases or jewelry, but do all of us know just what we mean by 14, 18 or 22 carat?

One often refers to a ring as being 14-carat gold, or to 22- or 18-carat watch cases or jewelry, but do we all really understand what 14, 18, or 22 carat means?

Gold is divided into twenty-four parts—that is, pure gold is said to contain twenty-four carats—the carat being just a measurement term. A ring or watch case marked 14K or 18K means that fourteen or eighteen parts of it are pure gold, the balance of the twenty-four carats being some sort of alloy, copper being generally used. If articles of jewelry were made of pure gold they would not wear well, as gold is a very soft metal, and it is, therefore, necessary to mix the gold with some harder substance.

Gold is divided into twenty-four parts, meaning that pure gold is said to have twenty-four carats—the carat being a measurement term. A ring or watch case marked 14K or 18K indicates that fourteen or eighteen parts of it are pure gold, with the rest of the twenty-four carats being some kind of alloy, usually copper. If jewelry were made from pure gold, it wouldn't hold up well, because gold is a very soft metal, so it's necessary to mix the gold with something harder.

What is an Electro-Magnet?

An electro-magnet is a piece of iron temporarily converted into a magnet by means of a current of electricity sent through a wire which is coiled around it. The wire is usually covered with silk, cotton, gutta percha or some other insulator, to prevent the current from leaping across, and compel it to travel through the whole length of the wire.

An electromagnet is a piece of iron that becomes a magnet temporarily when an electric current flows through a wire coiled around it. The wire is typically insulated with materials like silk, cotton, gutta-percha, or other insulators to stop the current from jumping across and ensure it travels through the entire length of the wire.

The more pure and soft the iron is, the stronger will its magnetism be while it lasts, and the more completely will it disappear when the current stops. Steel is less affected than soft iron for the time, but remains permanently magnetized after the current ceases. Electro-magnets are usually much more powerful than other magnets of the same size.

The more pure and soft the iron is, the stronger its magnetism will be while it lasts, and the more completely it will disappear when the current stops. Steel is less affected than soft iron for a while, but it stays permanently magnetized after the current ends. Electromagnets are usually much more powerful than other magnets of the same size.

The iron which is magnetized by the current passing around it is called the core. It is frequently straight, the wire being wound upon it like thread upon a reel; but very frequently it has the shape of a U or horseshoe, the wire being coiled round the two ends and the bend of the U left uncovered.

The iron that gets magnetized by the current flowing around it is called the core. It's often straight, with the wire wound around it like thread on a reel; however, it often takes the shape of a U or horseshoe, with the wire coiled around the two ends and the bend of the U left exposed.


The Story in a Pin[25]

A pin, so common and so cheap today, was once so expensive that only the wealthy could afford even a few. The term pin-money dates from that time and originally came from the allowance a husband gave his wife to purchase pins.

A pin, now so common and inexpensive, was once so costly that only the wealthy could buy even a few. The term pin-money originates from that era and initially referred to the allowance a husband provided his wife to buy pins.

From an historical point of view, it appears that the need of something with which to fasten together pieces of cloth and like material has been met from ancient times by various devices. Among the remains of the bronze age are found pins and brooches of bronze. In Egyptian tombs have been found elaborate and costly pins, which range in sizes from two inches to seven or eight inches long, and have large gold heads or bands of gold around the upper end. Designs were often worked on these heads and bands. The largest of these pins were probably used for fastening the hair. Till the middle of the sixteenth century the poorer class in England used rude skewers of wood, while the more fortunate had pins made of gold, silver and brass. The Indians, in the ancient cities of Mexico, satisfied their need for pins by using the thorn of the agave.

From a historical perspective, it seems that the need to connect pieces of fabric and similar materials has been addressed since ancient times through various tools. Among the remains from the Bronze Age, we find bronze pins and brooches. Egyptian tombs contain intricate and valuable pins that range in size from two inches to seven or eight inches long, often featuring large gold heads or bands of gold at the top. These heads and bands frequently showcased detailed designs. The largest pins were likely used to secure hair. Until the mid-sixteenth century, lower-income people in England used crude wooden skewers, while those with more means had pins made from gold, silver, and brass. In ancient Mexican cities, the indigenous people met their need for pins by utilizing the thorn of the agave plant.

As early as 1483, pins were important enough in England to warrant the passing of a law by Parliament prohibiting their importation. By 1540, however, they were being imported in large quantities from France. Parliament again passed a law regarding pins in 1543. This act provided that “no person shall put to sale any pins, but only such as shall be double-headed, and have the heads soldered fast to the shank of the pin, well smoothed, and shanks well shapen, the points well round filed, canted, and sharpened.” Some pins of good quality were made at this time, but a large portion of those against which the legislative enactment was directed were made of iron wire, blanched and passed for brass pins. Only three years after this prohibitory law was passed it became obsolete because of the improvements which had been made in the production of these articles. England continued to receive its supply from France until John Tilsby began their manufacture in Gloucestershire. His business increased to such an extent that in a few years he had 1,500 people in his employ. In 1636 the pinmakers of London formed a corporation and established the industry of Bristol and Birmingham. This latter city is still the center of the industry in England.

As early as 1483, pins were significant enough in England for Parliament to pass a law banning their import. However, by 1540, large quantities were being imported from France. In 1543, Parliament enacted another law regarding pins. This law stated that “no person shall sell any pins, except those that are double-headed, with the heads securely attached to the pin’s shank, well smoothed, properly shaped shanks, and points that are well rounded, angled, and sharpened.” Some high-quality pins were made during this time, but many of those targeted by the law were made from iron wire, bleached and sold as brass pins. Just three years after this prohibitory law was passed, it became outdated due to advancements in the production of pins. England continued to import pins from France until John Tilsby started manufacturing them in Gloucestershire. His business grew so much that within a few years, he employed 1,500 people. In 1636, the pinmakers of London formed a corporation and established the industry in Bristol and Birmingham. The latter city remains the hub of the industry in England today.

Pins

The First Pin is a Flat-headed Copper Pin Probably Used for Fastening Hair. The Second is a Star-headed Bronze Pin. Both are of the Types which have been Found Among the Remains of the Bronze Age. The Third Pin is a Handmade Pin of the Seventeenth Century

The First Pin is a flat-headed copper pin probably used to secure hair. The Second is a star-headed bronze pin. Both types have been found among the remains from the Bronze Age. The Third Pin is a handmade pin from the seventeenth century.

During this period the pins were made with two coils of wire fastened at one end of a length of wire, the other end of which was sharpened. First a wire, somewhat finer than that which was to be used for the pin, was coiled around a spit on a[319] lathe. This was cut up into sections, each consisting of two turns. These coils were then annealed or softened and placed in a heap. Boys stuck the ends of the pins, which had been cut to the proper length, into this pile until a coil stuck. A workman pressed this coil in a die to make it hold to the pin. The head was then soldered and the other end of the pin filed and sharpened. Finally the pin was straightened and blanched or whitened.

During this time, the pins were made with two coils of wire attached at one end of a length of wire, while the other end was sharpened. First, a wire that was slightly finer than the one intended for the pin was coiled around a spindle on a[319]lathe. This was then cut into sections, each having two turns. The coils were then softened through annealing and piled up. Boys inserted the ends of the pins, which had been cut to the right length, into this pile until a coil got stuck. A worker pressed this coil in a die to secure it to the pin. The head was then soldered, and the other end of the pin was filed and sharpened. Finally, the pin was straightened and whitened.

In the United States the colonists early felt the need of local production. The colonial legislature of Carolina offered prizes in 1775 for the first native-made pins and needles. The first American pins were made in Rhode Island, during the Revolution, by Jeremiah Wilkinson. About the same time, Samuel Slocum made pins in Providence. These were handmade with twisted wire heads.

In the United States, the colonists quickly recognized the need for local production. The colonial legislature of Carolina offered prizes in 1775 for the first pins and needles made by locals. The first American pins were produced in Rhode Island during the Revolution by Jeremiah Wilkinson. Around the same time, Samuel Slocum made pins in Providence. These pins were handmade with twisted wire heads.

Modern pin making machinery

A View of the Pin Machine Room in a Modern Pinmaking Plant

A Look at the Pin Machine Room in a Modern Pinmaking Facility

There are many types of pin machines which make anywhere from ninety to three hundred pins a minute, depending on the quality of the pin made.

There are various types of pin machines that produce between ninety and three hundred pins per minute, depending on the quality of the pin being made.

Pinmaking machines were first invented in the United States. During the War of 1812, the industry was started because of the difficulty of getting pins from England, where most of them were made. The industry was not successful, however, till 1836, when the Howe Manufacturing Company was formed at Birmingham, Conn. It is a curious coincident that the first successful American pin manufacturing company, making the new machine-made pins, should be established in the Connecticut town of the same name as the English city which had been the center of pinmaking for nearly two hundred years.

Pinmaking machines were first invented in the United States. During the War of 1812, the industry began due to the challenges of importing pins from England, where most were produced. However, the industry didn’t really take off until 1836, when the Howe Manufacturing Company was established in Birmingham, Connecticut. It’s an interesting coincidence that the first successful American pin manufacturing company, creating the new machine-made pins, should be set up in a Connecticut town that shares its name with the English city that had been the hub of pinmaking for nearly two hundred years.

In 1817 a paper was filed at the patent office by Seth Hunt, describing a machine[320] for making pins with “head, shaft, and point in one entire piece.” This machine, however, did not come into use. Lemuel W. Wright, of New Hampshire, secured, in 1824, an English patent for a machine for making solid-headed pins. This was the beginning of the present industry. A factory equipped with Wright’s machines was established in London, but was not successful. Daniel Foot-Taylen, of Birmingham, purchased this equipment and secured an extension of Wright’s patents for five years from 1838. He carried the production of machine-made pins to a commercial basis. Wright’s machines, however, did not complete all operations. Dr. John Neland Howe, a physician of Bellevue Hospital, New York City, formed a company in 1832 for the manufacture of pins. This concern was not successful, but in 1835 a second company was formed by Dr. Howe, who had great faith in the future of the industry. Nine years later, Samuel Slocum, of Connecticut, invented a new machine for sticking the pins on papers.

In 1817, Seth Hunt filed a document at the patent office describing a machine[320] for making pins with "head, shaft, and point in one single piece." However, this machine never went into production. In 1824, Lemuel W. Wright from New Hampshire obtained an English patent for a machine that made solid-headed pins. This marked the start of the current industry. A factory equipped with Wright's machines was set up in London, but it wasn’t successful. Daniel Foot-Taylen from Birmingham bought this equipment and secured a five-year extension of Wright's patents starting in 1838. He took the production of machine-made pins to a commercial level. However, Wright's machines didn't complete all the necessary operations. In 1832, Dr. John Neland Howe, a physician at Bellevue Hospital in New York City, formed a company for pin manufacturing. This venture failed, but in 1835, Dr. Howe started a second company, as he had strong confidence in the industry's future. Nine years later, Samuel Slocum from Connecticut invented a new machine for sticking pins onto papers.

Cleaning and plating pins

The Whitening Room, where the Pins are Cleaned and Plated

The Whitening Room, where the Pins are cleaned and coated.

In the tumbling barrels the pins are cleaned and dried by tumbling in sawdust which has been heated in the ovens in the center background.

In the tumbling barrels, the pins are cleaned and dried by tumbling in sawdust that has been heated in the ovens in the background.

Since that time there have been many pin machines developed, each accomplishing the same result in slightly different ways. In each case a special stiff pin wire is drawn into the machine from a large hank, which is placed on a drum on the machine. The wire is first passed through a series of rapidly revolving, straightening rolls which take out all twists and kinks. The proper length of wire is fed into the machine automatically, and the end is gripped by a set of jaws. A small part of the end of the wire extends beyond the jaws. This is struck several rapid blows by a die called the header. After the head is thus formed, the wire is cut off to the proper length and is then ready to be pointed. It is now carried along by a shaft[321] having a screw thread, and is made to revolve rapidly by a belt which passes over it. The end to be pointed passes over a series of coarse, medium and fine revolving files or cutters. The pin now drops into a pan, ready to be finished after being inspected.

Since then, many pin machines have been developed, each achieving the same result in slightly different ways. In each case, a special stiff pin wire is fed into the machine from a large spool, which sits on a drum on the machine. The wire first goes through a series of rapidly spinning, straightening rollers that remove all twists and kinks. The correct length of wire is automatically fed into the machine, and the end is held by a set of jaws. A small part of the end of the wire sticks out beyond the jaws. This is struck several quick blows by a tool called the header. Once the head is formed, the wire is cut to the correct length and is then ready to be pointed. It is now moved along by a shaft[321] with a screw thread and is made to spin rapidly by a belt that wraps around it. The end that needs to be pointed goes over a series of coarse, medium, and fine rotating files or cutters. The pin then drops into a pan, ready to be finished after inspection.

In the finishing room, the pins are put into a revolving or tumbling barrel and are rolled in sawdust, which absorbs all the oil, leaving them clean and bright. They are now dropped through a blower, where the sawdust is separated from the pins. The whitening is done by boiling the pins in a large copper kettle, which also contains layers of grained tin and a solution of argol or bitartrate of potash. After boiling for five or six hours, they have a thin coating of tin, which gives them their silvery appearance. Again they are cleaned, this time being washed in clean water, then tumbled in strong soap water, and finally tumbled in hot sawdust to dry them. The pins are separated from the sawdust as before. From there the pins go to the sticking department, where they are stuck on papers as you buy them. The sticking machine is of a simple construction, but is wonderful in operation, and requires no attention by the operator, except to keep it supplied with pins and papers.

In the finishing room, the pins are placed into a rotating or tumbling barrel and rolled in sawdust, which soaks up all the oil, leaving them clean and shiny. They are then passed through a blower, where the sawdust is separated from the pins. The whitening is done by boiling the pins in a large copper kettle, which also contains layers of grained tin and a solution of argol or cream of tartar. After boiling for five or six hours, they get a thin layer of tin, giving them their silvery look. They are cleaned again, washed in clean water, tumbled in strong soapy water, and finally tumbled in hot sawdust to dry them. The pins are separated from the sawdust as before. From there, the pins move to the sticking department, where they are attached to papers like the ones you buy. The sticking machine is simply designed but operates wonderfully, requiring no attention from the operator except to keep it supplied with pins and papers.

Pin sizes

The pins are put into a vibrating hopper, which slopes slightly towards the sticking machine. The conductor from the hopper to the machine is made of two strips of steel, down which the pins, held by their heads, slide. They are taken from the conductor by a screw thread and fed to the carrier, which takes thirty pins at a time and places them in front of a set of thirty punches. They are then forced along thirty grooves in the steel clamps, which crimp the paper, and on through the crimp. Thus a whole row of pins is stuck at once. The paper is now advanced the proper distance, and another row is stuck. When the center of the paper is reached, after six rows have been stuck, the machine automatically spaces the paper so as to skip the space used for the brand name. Then six more rows are stuck, and the operator removes the completed paper and inserts another without stopping the machine. These papers are inspected to make certain that no poorly made pins have gotten by the former inspection, are rolled and packed, usually in boxes of twelve papers each.

The pins go into a vibrating hopper that tilts slightly toward the sticking machine. The channel from the hopper to the machine consists of two strips of steel, down which the pins, held by their heads, slide. A screw thread extracts them from the channel and feeds them to a carrier, which holds thirty pins at a time and positions them in front of a set of thirty punches. They are then pushed along thirty grooves in the steel clamps, which crimp the paper, and through the crimp. This way, a whole row of pins gets stuck at once. The paper is then advanced the right distance, and another row is stuck. When the center of the paper is reached, after six rows have been stuck, the machine automatically spaces the paper to skip the area reserved for the brand name. Then, six more rows are stuck, and the operator removes the finished paper and inserts another without stopping the machine. These papers are checked to ensure that no poorly made pins have slipped past the previous inspection, rolled up, and packed, usually in boxes of twelve papers each.

Pins today are made in many sizes from the 312-inch stout blanket pins down to the fine, slender, bronze pins used by entomologists, 4,500 of which pins make an ounce. Toilet pins are usually made in six sizes as shown in the illustrations. Besides the common or toilet pins, there are today numerous special bank and desk pins which are made to meet special requirements.

Pins today come in various sizes, from 312-inch sturdy blanket pins to the fine, thin bronze pins used by entomologists, with 4,500 of those pins weighing an ounce. Toilet pins typically come in six sizes as shown in the illustrations. In addition to standard toilet pins, there are now many specialized bank and desk pins designed to meet specific needs.

Pin production in the United States has reached a high stage of development. The number of pins made in 1914 reached the tremendous total of 25,000,000,000. These figures are almost too great for comprehension. If all the pin wire used for these 25,000,000,000 pins were in one piece it would go around the earth fifteen times. Safety pins, hooks and eyes, and hairpins, are generally made by pin concerns. Each of these different articles require very ingenious machines. Many of them are almost human in their operation.

Pin production in the United States has advanced significantly. The number of pins made in 1914 hit an incredible total of 25,000,000,000. These numbers are almost beyond comprehension. If all the pin wire used for these 25,000,000,000 pins were laid out in one piece, it would circle the Earth fifteen times. Safety pins, hooks and eyes, and hairpins are typically produced by pin manufacturers. Each of these different items requires very clever machines. Many of them operate in ways that are almost human-like.


The popular name of the prominence seen in the front of the throat in a man is called the “Adam’s apple” because of the story in the Old Testament, telling of the eating of the forbidden fruit of the tree of knowledge by Adam, a piece being supposed to have lodged in his throat where the bulge appears.

The well-known name for the bump at the front of a man's throat is the "Adam's apple." This name comes from a story in the Old Testament that tells of Adam eating the forbidden fruit from the tree of knowledge, with a piece supposedly getting stuck in his throat, where the bulge is visible.

Ladies climbing a glacier in long skirts

An Alpine Glacier

An Alpine Glacier

Sea of ice

The Mer de Glace

The Sea of Ice

The upper view shows the method of crossing a glacier. Each of the climbers is carrying an alpenstock, or staff with ice ax at one end and spike at the other. The lower view is the famous sea of ice in Switzerland.

The upper view shows how to cross a glacier. Each climber is carrying an alpenstock, which is a staff with an ice axe on one end and a spike on the other. The lower view is the famous sea of ice in Switzerland.

View of Mount Rainier

Mount Rainier, Washington

Mount Rainier, WA

One of the largest glacial systems in the world radiating from a single peak is situated on this mountain in western Washington.

One of the largest glacial systems in the world, spreading out from a single peak, is located on this mountain in western Washington.

How are Glaciers Formed?

Away up in the high valleys formed among the peaks of the tallest mountain ranges of both the Rocky Mountains and the mountains of Alaska, as well as those in Switzerland and European countries, the snow freezes into great solid masses because of the intense cold, and is forced by its own pressure into vast fields and mountains of ice. This ice is not like that produced by the freezing of water, but resembles more a very hard, solid form of snow, being composed of thin layers filled with air bubbles and more brittle and less transparent than the ice we are accustomed to see. Glaciers exist in all zones in which mountains rise above the snow-line, that is, the height where it is so cold that there is always snow.

Up in the high valleys nestled among the peaks of the tallest mountain ranges, including the Rocky Mountains, the Alaskan mountains, and those in Switzerland and other European countries, snow freezes into huge solid masses due to the extreme cold. This snow is pressured into vast fields and mountains of ice. This ice isn't like what we get from freezing water; it’s more like a very hard, solid kind of snow, made up of thin layers filled with air bubbles. It's also more brittle and less transparent than the ice we're used to seeing. Glaciers can be found in all areas where mountains rise above the snow line, which is the altitude where it’s so cold that there’s always snow.

We all know that if we press two pieces of ordinary ice together each piece will melt at the place where it touches the other and just in that same way the pressure of the ice above them causes glaciers to be continually moving downward, frequently reaching the borders of cultivation even. As they descend they also experience a gradual diminution from the action of the sun and rain, and from the heat of the earth. Investigation has shown that they move very much like a river, the middle and upper parts faster than the sides and bottom, similar to the way in which a mass of thick mortar or a quantity of pitch flows down an inclined trough. The rate at which a glacier moves generally varies from eighteen to twenty-four inches in a day.

We all know that if we press two regular pieces of ice together, each piece will melt where they touch. In the same way, the weight of the ice above causes glaciers to keep moving downward, often reaching the farmland borders. As they flow down, they also gradually shrink due to the sun, rain, and heat from the earth. Research has shown that they move much like a river, with the middle and upper parts moving faster than the edges and bottom, similar to how thick mortar or pitch flows down a sloped channel. The speed at which a glacier moves typically ranges from eighteen to twenty-four inches a day.

The Glacier National Park is the latest addition to the series of great natural attractions which the United States Government has been acquiring for years. It lies in Northern Montana, between the Canadian border and the line of the Great Northern Railroad, and contains about a million acres of natural wonders, ranging from verdant valleys and wooded heights to glacial peaks. There are numerous glaciers and mountain lakes and the locality presents many examples of sublime scenery. The City of Tacoma, Washington, is situated in the valley below Mt. Rainier and commands a wonderful view of that mountain, on which there is situated one of the largest glacial systems in the world radiating from any single peak.

The Glacier National Park is the newest addition to the collection of amazing natural attractions that the United States Government has been acquiring for years. It’s located in Northern Montana, between the Canadian border and the Great Northern Railroad, and covers about a million acres of natural beauty, featuring lush valleys, wooded heights, and glacial peaks. There are plenty of glaciers and mountain lakes, and the area showcases many stunning landscapes. The City of Tacoma, Washington, sits in the valley below Mt. Rainier and offers a breathtaking view of the mountain, which has one of the largest glacial systems in the world radiating from a single peak.

One of the most famous glaciers of the Alps is the Mer de Glace, belonging to Mont Blanc, in the valley of Chamouni, about fifty-seven hundred feet above the level of the sea. Those of the Andes and the Southern Alps of New Zealand are conspicuous, and they abound in Norway, Iceland and Spitzbergen, but it is more especially in the chain of Monte Rosa that the phenomena of glaciers are exhibited in their greatest wonder, as also in their most interesting phases from a scientific point of view.

One of the most famous glaciers in the Alps is the Mer de Glace, which is part of Mont Blanc, located in the Chamouni valley, about 5,700 feet above sea level. Glaciers also stand out in the Andes and the Southern Alps of New Zealand, and they are widespread in Norway, Iceland, and Spitzbergen. However, it's especially in the Monte Rosa range that glacial phenomena are displayed in their most amazing ways, as well as in their most fascinating aspects from a scientific perspective.

How Large are Molecules?

When a great scientist named Sir William Thomson was asked about the size of a molecule, he replied: “If a drop of water were magnified to the size of the earth, the molecules would each occupy spaces greater than those filled by small shot and smaller than those occupied by cricket balls.” That gives us about as clear an idea as it is possible to get of the size of molecules. And yet molecules are made up of even smaller particles, called atoms. An atom is the smallest division of anything that we know about now.

When a great scientist named Sir William Thomson was asked about the size of a molecule, he replied: “If a drop of water were magnified to the size of the Earth, the molecules would each occupy spaces larger than those filled by small pellets and smaller than those occupied by cricket balls.” That gives us a pretty clear idea of the size of molecules. And yet, molecules are made up of even smaller particles called atoms. An atom is the smallest division of anything we know about now.

A molecule of water is made up of three atoms. Evaporation of water consists of the movement of these atoms in such a way as to make the liquid water change into a gas. Freezing water into ice is caused by making the molecules, and, in turn, the atoms, stick to each other. It takes a great deal of power to separate the molecules in water, and for this reason water was long regarded as something which could not be divided up, or, in other words, a basic element, such as the oxygen in the air.

A water molecule consists of three atoms. The evaporation of water involves the movement of these atoms, causing liquid water to transform into gas. Freezing water into ice happens when the molecules, and consequently the atoms, bond together. It requires a significant amount of energy to break the bonds between the molecules in water, which is why water was historically seen as something that couldn't be divided, essentially a fundamental element like the oxygen in the air.


Pictorial Story Of The Fishing Industry

Fishing scenes

Six pictures by courtesy of Gloucester (Mass.) Board of Trade.

Six pictures courtesy of the Gloucester (Mass.) Board of Trade.

Modern fishing vessels
Setting the trawl; Hauling the trawl
Pulling in the catch

Drawing the Net

Casting the Net

Fish curing
Preparing salt fish for market

The Story in a Box of California Oranges

For several hundred years oranges have grown in this country. For about the last forty years men have made a business of growing them.

For several hundred years, oranges have been grown in this country. For around the last forty years, people have turned it into a business.

Oranges and lemons are called citrus fruits on account of their content of citric acid.

Oranges and lemons are known as citrus fruits because they contain citric acid.

The two predominating varieties in California are the Washington Navel and the Valencia orange.

The two main types in California are the Washington Navel and the Valencia orange.

The California Navel orange is in the markets of the country from December 1st until about June 1st, when the California Valencia type takes its place and remains until the latter part of November.

The California Navel orange is available in the country's markets from December 1st until around June 1st, when the California Valencia variety takes over and stays until late November.

It is a fact, therefore, that oranges are now picked fresh every day the year round in this country, and that the California oranges you buy in the summer are not fruit that has been held in storage, but are as fresh as any fresh fruit that the retailers offer.

It’s a fact that oranges are now picked fresh every day of the year in this country, and the California oranges you buy in the summer aren’t fruit that’s been stored; they’re as fresh as any fresh fruit the retailers offer.

Most California oranges and lemons are picked from the trees by gloved hands, so that the finger nails of the pickers will not injure the skin, for even a tiny scratch on the skin of an orange or lemon is sufficient to open the way for germs of decay.

Most California oranges and lemons are picked from the trees by gloved hands, so the pickers' fingernails won't harm the skin, because even a tiny scratch on the skin of an orange or lemon can allow decay-causing germs to enter.

Mr. G. Harold Powell, formerly connected with the United States government, was the discoverer of this source of great loss to the citrus industry. The use of gloves in the picking is thought to save the growers approximately $1,000,000 yearly.

Mr. G. Harold Powell, who used to work with the United States government, discovered this significant source of loss for the citrus industry. It's believed that using gloves while picking helps save growers about $1,000,000 each year.

When the oranges have been picked they are sent in boxes to a packing house where they are put through an automatic washing machine which thoroughly scrubs all dust and dirt from the skin; they then pass through a dryer and thence along a belt to men and women who roll the oranges over for examination and distribute them to other belts according to their color and the condition of the skin with regard to blemishes of all kinds. The oranges then pass over automatic sizers—that is, V-shaped rollers revolving horizontally. The oranges continue along these rollers until the space between the rollers has widened to the point where each particular size drops into a labeled bin. The sizes are designated by numbers, such as 150, 176, 250, etc., these figures signifying the number of oranges that may be packed in a regulation size box in which the jobbers and retailers buy the fruit. In other words, size 150 is a larger orange than 250.

When the oranges are picked, they're sent in boxes to a packing house where they're washed in an automatic washing machine that thoroughly cleans off all the dust and dirt from their skin. They then go through a dryer and travel along a conveyor belt to workers who check the oranges for quality and sort them onto different belts based on their color and skin condition, looking for any blemishes. Next, the oranges move over automatic sizers—which are V-shaped rollers that spin horizontally. They continue along these rollers until the gap between the rollers opens wide enough for each specific size to drop into a labeled bin. The sizes are marked with numbers like 150, 176, 250, etc., which indicate how many oranges can fit in a standard size box that jobbers and retailers use to buy the fruit. In other words, size 150 is a bigger orange than size 250.

The quality of an orange is judged in the packing house merely by the color and the condition of the skin. Size has something to do with it, but this is only one consideration. Many of the smaller oranges are just as good to eat and sometimes very much better than the larger sizes, and the condition of the skin, unless it happens to be broken in any way so that germs of decay can enter, ordinarily has no depreciable effect upon the flavor. The public, of course, finally judges an orange by its sweetness and tenderness, and a large, well-colored, smooth fruit is likely to reach the market in better condition than the rougher fruit which has a marred skin.

The quality of an orange is assessed at the packing house based mainly on its color and the condition of its skin. Size plays a role, but it's just one factor. Many smaller oranges can taste just as good, or even better, than the larger ones, and the skin's condition, unless it’s broken in a way that lets decay germs in, usually doesn’t affect the flavor. Ultimately, the public judges an orange by its sweetness and tenderness, and a large, well-colored, smooth fruit is more likely to hit the market in better shape than rougher fruit with damaged skin.

Oranges are usually divided in grades into four classes called, in the order of their quality, Extra Choice, Choice, Standards and Culls.

Oranges are generally categorized into four grades based on their quality: Extra Choice, Choice, Standards, and Culls.

Lemons are handled throughout the processes in practically the same manner as oranges.

Lemons are treated almost the same way as oranges throughout the processes.

Orange groves in California

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

Where the Golden Orange Grows.

Where the Golden Orange Grows.

The far-reaching orange groves surrounding Riverside are one of the most beautiful of all beautiful sights in Southern California, and the fragrance of the blossoms is subtlest witchery.

The expansive orange groves around Riverside are among the most stunning sights in Southern California, and the scent of the blossoms is a delicate enchantment.

After the fruit has passed the graders and the several sizes are separated, it goes to the packers, who pick up each orange or lemon and place a tissue wrapper around it, and press it firmly into the shipping box until the fruit “stands up high” above the top of the box. The cover is then nailed on and the box is placed in the freight car which is waiting at a convenient door. The average car carries 400 boxes of oranges or lemons.

After the fruit has been sorted by size, it goes to the packers, who take each orange or lemon, wrap it in tissue paper, and press it firmly into the shipping box until the fruit sticks out above the top of the box. The lid is then nailed on, and the box is placed in the freight car that’s waiting at a nearby door. The average car carries 400 boxes of oranges or lemons.

The fruit is shipped in refrigerator cars, and is usually about eight days in making the trip from Southern California to the Eastern markets.

The fruit is shipped in refrigerated cars and typically takes about eight days to travel from Southern California to the Eastern markets.

The California Fruit Growers’ Exchange ships on an average of sixty-five per cent of the California production of citrus fruits. This is a strictly non-profit, co-operative organization of 8,000 growers, the largest body of agriculturists operating on the non-profit co-operative plan in the world, and probably the most successful. At least, the cost to market the citrus crop under this system is lower than the marketing cost of any other agricultural crop in the world, which accounts in part for the fact that oranges and lemons are sold throughout the United States at retail prices which place this fruit within the reach of all.

The California Fruit Growers’ Exchange transports about sixty-five percent of California's citrus fruit production. This is a completely non-profit, co-operative organization made up of 8,000 growers, making it the largest group of farmers working under a non-profit co-operative model in the world, and likely the most successful. At least, the cost to market the citrus crop with this system is lower than the marketing cost for any other agricultural crop globally, which helps explain why oranges and lemons are available at retail prices that are affordable for everyone across the United States.


What Kind of Steel Knives do not Stain nor Rust?

Shortly after the first of the year, in 1916, the U. S. Consul at Sheffield, England, reported that a new steel had been introduced there for use in making table cutlery. It was said to be untarnishable and unstainable even when used with the strongest acid foods, as well as non-rusting. The new product, which is called “Tirth’s Stainless” steel, can be thoroughly cleansed by ordinary washing with soap and water, and cutlery made from it will retain its original polish after use. The properties claimed for it are of the steel itself and not the result of any treatment; consequently knives made from the new product can easily be sharpened in the regular way without fear of resulting damage.

Shortly after the start of the year in 1916, the U.S. Consul in Sheffield, England, reported that a new type of steel had been introduced for making table cutlery. It was said to be tarnish-proof and stain-resistant even when used with the strongest acidic foods, as well as rust-free. The new product, called “Tirth’s Stainless” steel, can be easily cleaned with regular soap and water, and cutlery made from it will keep its original shine after use. The claimed properties belong to the steel itself and are not due to any treatment; as a result, knives made from this new material can be sharpened in the usual way without any worry of damage.

While the initial cost of cutlery made from “Tirth’s Steel” will probably be about double the usual cost, for not only is the price of the steel considerably more than that of other steels used for the same purpose, but it also costs more to work up, it is nevertheless expected to prove a welcome discovery to restaurant and hotel keepers as well as other large users of table cutlery because of the immense saving in labor occasioned by its use.

While the initial cost of cutlery made from "Tirth's Steel" will likely be about double the usual price, because the steel itself is significantly more expensive than other steels used for the same purpose, and it also costs more to manufacture, it is still expected to be a great find for restaurant and hotel owners, as well as other large users of table cutlery, due to the significant labor savings it provides.

Why is it Necessary to Keep Unusually Quiet when Fishing?

The experienced fisherman who smiles at the amateur’s restless fidgeting and complaining has discovered by careful observation that the fish who swims around in such an exasperating manner just a foot or so away from the temptingly baited hook has had an advance tip that something out of the ordinary is going on up above him. For sound, whether it be the noise of an oarlock or a companion’s casual remark, can be heard more than four times as easily by the fish in the water beneath than it can up above in the air. Sound travels very quickly through the air, traversing ten hundred and ninety feet in a second, but it reaches forty-seven hundred feet away under water in the same time.

The experienced fisherman who chuckles at the amateur’s restless fidgeting and complaints has learned through careful observation that the fish swimming around annoyingly close to the tempting baited hook is already aware that something unusual is happening above him. Sound, whether it’s the creaking of an oarlock or a friend’s casual comment, can be heard more than four times more easily by the fish underwater than it can be heard above in the air. Sound travels quickly through the air, covering 1,090 feet in a second, but it reaches 4,700 feet underwater in the same amount of time.

When the crowd on the other side of the baseball grounds yells across the field it seems as though we have heard their cheers as soon as they have been given, and so we have for all practical purposes, although in reality half a second has elapsed while the sound has been coming across the field. The time taken by sound in traveling is more apparent when the volume is sufficient to carry it a long distance. The sound of an explosion of a large quantity of dynamite and ammunition in Jersey City was not heard in Philadelphia, ninety miles away, for over seven minutes after it occurred.

When the crowd on the other side of the baseball field yells across, it feels like we hear their cheers right after they make them, and for all intents and purposes, we do, even though in reality, half a second has passed while the sound travels across the field. The delay of sound is more noticeable when it's loud enough to reach far distances. For example, the explosion of a large amount of dynamite and ammunition in Jersey City wasn't heard in Philadelphia, ninety miles away, for over seven minutes after it happened.

Cliff dwellings

Cliff Dwellings, Walpi, Arizona

Cliff Dwellings, Walpi, AZ

Cliff dwellings

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

Homes of the Long-Ago

Places from Long Ago

Famous reproduction of the Cliff-dwellers’ Ruins, near Colorado Springs, Col. The cliff-dwellers of early America built their habitations in the canyons of the Colorado and Rio Grande, where the action of the elements had worn away a layer of soft rock, leaving layers of hard rock above and below as roof and floor for the dwelling.

Famous reproduction of the Cliff-dwellers’ Ruins, near Colorado Springs, Col. The cliff-dwellers of early America built their homes in the canyons of the Colorado and Rio Grande, where the elements wore away a layer of soft rock, leaving hard rock layers above and below as the roof and floor for their dwellings.

What were the First Apartment Houses in this Country?

A great many years ago, long before the white men came to America, there was a race of Indians called “cliff-dwellers,” because they built their dwelling places far up on the sides of steep cliffs. They probably made their homes so hard to reach in order that they might be safe from visits of their enemies. While many of their homes were small single-family houses, there were also a number of large two and three-story dwellings with many rooms in which different families lived.

A long time ago, way before white settlers arrived in America, there was a group of Native Americans known as “cliff-dwellers” because they built their homes high up on the sides of steep cliffs. They likely chose these hard-to-reach locations to protect themselves from their enemies. Although many of their homes were small, single-family houses, some were large, two or three-story buildings with several rooms where different families lived.

Some of these cliff dwellings may still be seen in the valleys of the Rio Grande and the Rio Colorado and its tributaries. Close examination shows that many of them were very skilfully built, every advantage being taken of the natural rock formations, and the stones being dressed and laid in clay mortar, very much as the bricklayer does his work on an up-to-date apartment house today. The outsides of the buildings somewhat resembled the cement houses which have been put up in later days, a coat of clay being spread on the outside walls and carefully smoothed off. Oftentimes the inner walls were plastered too.

Some of these cliff dwellings can still be seen in the valleys of the Rio Grande and the Colorado River and its tributaries. A close look reveals that many of them were built very skillfully, taking full advantage of the natural rock formations, with stones shaped and laid in clay mortar, much like how a bricklayer works on a modern apartment building today. The exteriors of the buildings somewhat resembled the concrete houses built in later times, with a layer of clay spread on the outside walls and carefully smoothed out. Often, the inner walls were plastered as well.

Many relics of the inhabitants have been found in these cliff dwellings, although we cannot tell how they lived, for the region is now rainless and therefore destitute of food plants. Conditions must have been different then and the ground less barren.

Many artifacts from the people who lived here have been discovered in these cliff dwellings, even though we can't determine how they lived, since the area now receives no rain and lacks food sources. The conditions must have been different back then, and the land less desolate.

Why do We Call 32° Above Zero “Freezing”?

We know that freezing is the transformation of a liquid into solid under the influence of cold. Each liquid always solidifies at some fixed temperature, which is called its freezing point, and the solid melts again at the same temperature. Thus the freezing point and the melting point, or point of fusion, are the same, and the point is always the same for the same substance.

We know that freezing is when a liquid turns into a solid due to cold temperatures. Every liquid solidifies at a specific temperature, known as its freezing point, and the solid melts back at the same temperature. So, the freezing point and the melting point, or point of fusion, are identical, and this point is always consistent for the same substance.

Consequently the freezing point of water, or the melting point of ice (32° F.), is taken for one of the fixed points in thermometry. The freezing point of mercury is 39° below zero, of sulphuric ether 46° below zero, of alcohol 203° below zero F.

Consequently, the freezing point of water, or the melting point of ice (32°F), is used as one of the fixed points in thermometry. The freezing point of mercury is 39° below zero, of sulfuric ether is 46° below zero, and of alcohol is 203° below zero F.

How is Fresco Painting Done?

In producing fresco paintings, a finished drawing on paper, called a cartoon, exactly the size of the intended picture, is first made, to serve as a model.

In creating fresco paintings, a completed drawing on paper, known as a cartoon, exactly the size of the intended artwork, is first created to act as a model.

The artist then has a limited portion of the wall covered over with a fine sort of plaster, and upon this he traces from his cartoon the part of the design suited for the space. As it is necessary to the success and permanency of his work that the colors should be applied while the plaster is yet damp, no more of the surface is plastered at one time than what the artist can finish in one day. A portion of the picture once commenced, needs to be completely finished before leaving it, as fresco does not admit of retouching after the plaster has become dry. On completing a day’s work, any unpainted part of the plaster is removed, cutting it neatly along the outline of a figure or other definite form, so that the joining of the plaster for the next day’s work may be concealed.

The artist then covers a section of the wall with a fine type of plaster and sketches the part of the design that fits the space based on his cartoon. Since it’s crucial for the success and durability of his work that the colors are applied while the plaster is still wet, he only plasters as much surface as he can finish in one day. Once he starts on a section of the painting, it must be completed before he leaves, as fresco doesn’t allow for touch-ups once the plaster dries. At the end of the day’s work, any unpainted parts of the plaster are removed, cut neatly along the outline of a figure or other distinct shape, so that the seam for the next day’s work can be hidden.

The art is very ancient, remains of it being found in India, Egypt, Mexico, etc. Examples of Roman frescoes are found in Pompeii and other places. After the beginning of the fifteenth century fresco painting became the favorite process of the greatest Italian masters, and many of their noblest pictorial efforts are frescoes on the walls of palaces and churches.

The art is very ancient, with remains found in India, Egypt, Mexico, and more. Examples of Roman frescoes can be seen in Pompeii and other locations. After the start of the fifteenth century, fresco painting became the preferred technique of the greatest Italian masters, and many of their most notable works are frescoes on the walls of palaces and churches.

Some ancient wall paintings are executed in what is called “Fresco Secco,” which is distinguished from true fresco by being executed on dry plaster, which is moistened with lime water before the colors are applied.

Some ancient wall paintings are done in what's known as “Fresco Secco,” which is different from true fresco because it's applied to dry plaster that is soaked with lime water before the colors are added.

Fresco painting has in recent years again been revived, and works of this kind have been executed in the British Houses of Parliament and other public and private buildings, more especially in Germany.

Fresco painting has been making a comeback in recent years, with this style of artwork being created in the British Houses of Parliament and various other public and private buildings, especially in Germany.


The Story of a Piece of Chewing Gum[26]

The original “chewing gum” was spruce gum, the exudation of the cut branches of the spruce or fir tree. Later, pure white paraffin wax, variously flavored, took its place, but only in its turn to give way to the “chicle” now almost exclusively employed.

The original “chewing gum” was spruce gum, which came from the cut branches of spruce or fir trees. Later on, pure white paraffin wax, flavored in various ways, replaced it, but eventually, it was also replaced by “chicle,” which is now almost exclusively used.

Though its employment in the manufacture of chewing gum is of comparatively recent date, chicle was used by the Indians prior to the days of Columbus as a means of quenching their thirst. It was first commercially imported as a substitute for rubber, but its peculiar suitability for chewing gum has resulted in the entire product being consumed by that industry. In 1885 the United States imported 929,959 pounds of chicle. The growth of the chewing gum industry is shown by the importation of nearly 5,500,000 pounds for the year ending with June 30, 1910.

Though it was first used for making chewing gum fairly recently, chicle was utilized by the Indigenous people before Columbus arrived as a way to hydrate themselves. It was initially brought to the U.S. as a rubber substitute, but its unique properties made it perfect for chewing gum, leading to the entire supply being taken up by that market. In 1885, the United States imported 929,959 pounds of chicle. The expansion of the chewing gum industry is evident in the nearly 5,500,000 pounds imported in the year ending June 30, 1910.

The trees are “tapped” during the rainy season. The sap, or juice, as it exudes has the appearance of milk, but gradually changes to a yellow color and is about the thickness of treacle. The tree drains rapidly, the full supply of “milk” being generally obtained within a few hours, but an interval of several years usually elapses before it will yield a fresh supply. The milk differs from the juice obtained from the sugar maple, for example, in that it is not the life sap of the tree, and the flow varies greatly, some trees which show full life yielding much less than apparently poorer specimens. “Crude chicle” is obtained by simple boiling and evaporation of the milk, accompanied by frequent kneading. The product, as pressed in rough molds, is of a light gray color.

The trees are “tapped” during the rainy season. The sap, or juice, that comes out looks like milk but gradually turns yellow and has a thickness similar to syrup. The tree drains quickly, with the full supply of “milk” generally collected within a few hours, but it typically takes several years before it can produce another batch. This milk is different from the juice obtained from the sugar maple, for instance, as it is not the tree's life sap, and the amount produced varies a lot; some trees that seem healthy yield much less than some that look less vigorous. “Crude chicle” is made by simply boiling and evaporating the milk, while frequently kneading it. The final product, when pressed into rough molds, is light gray in color.

The bulk of the crude chicle manufactured is shipped in blocks to Canada, where it is further evaporated and carefully refined prior to importation into the United States. When the chicle arrives at one of the chewing-gum factories it is immediately turned over to the grinding department. It comes from Mexico in cakes, varying in size from twelve-to eighteen-inch cubes; these are a putty color, but in composition chicle is porous and brittle, particularly after it is thoroughly dried. In the cubical form it is said to contain from twenty-five to thirty per cent moisture. After it is ground and dried it is practically free of moisture, but one of the most difficult problems which the manufacturer faces is to thoroughly dry chicle before he proceeds to treat it for its introduction as the base of chewing gum.

The majority of the crude chicle produced is shipped in blocks to Canada, where it is further evaporated and carefully refined before being imported into the United States. When the chicle arrives at one of the chewing gum factories, it is immediately sent to the grinding department. It comes from Mexico in cakes that range from twelve to eighteen inches in size; these are a putty color, but chicle is porous and brittle in composition, especially after it’s fully dried. In its cubical form, it is said to contain about twenty-five to thirty percent moisture. Once it’s ground and dried, it is nearly free of moisture, but one of the biggest challenges manufacturers face is thoroughly drying chicle before they proceed to treat it for use as the base of chewing gum.

The cubes are broken by a large steam hammer into irregular-shaped pieces weighing from a few ounces to a pound. These chunks are then run through grinding machines, which reduce the chicle to a coarse meal. Sometimes this breaking and grinding is done in Mexico, but the duty on ground dried chicle is five cents per pound more than upon cube chicle.

The cubes are smashed by a big steam hammer into uneven pieces weighing from a few ounces to a pound. These chunks are then processed through grinding machines, which turn the chicle into a coarse powder. Sometimes this breaking and grinding happens in Mexico, but there's a five-cent-per-pound tariff on ground dried chicle compared to cube chicle.

Chicle meal is dried upon frames in a special drying room, which is kept at a temperature of 80° F. An electric blower exhausts all of the moisture from the air. The pure meal is then transformed into a thick syrup under intense heat and passed through a filtering machine, one of the latest and most expensive pieces of machinery employed in the entire manufacture of chewing gum. This machine has practically solved the perplexing problem of separating impurities and foreign substances from chicle. Before the filterer was invented it was almost impossible for the manufacturer of chewing gum to produce gum entirely free from particles of grit.

Chicle meal is dried on frames in a special drying room that's kept at a temperature of 80°F. An electric blower removes all the moisture from the air. The pure meal is then turned into a thick syrup under high heat and goes through a filtering machine, which is one of the latest and most expensive pieces of equipment used in chewing gum production. This machine has nearly solved the tricky issue of separating impurities and foreign substances from chicle. Before the filter was invented, it was nearly impossible for chewing gum manufacturers to create gum completely free from grit particles.

During the process of filtration the chicle is also sterilized, and comes from the machine as pure as distilled water.

During the filtration process, the chicle is also sterilized and comes out of the machine as pure as distilled water.

Sugar coating machines

A Battery of Sugar-Coating Machines

A Battery of Sugar-Coating Machines

Scoring room

A Corner of the Scoring Room

A Section of the Scoring Room

Laboratory

The Laboratory

The Lab

Ladies wrapping chewing gum

Wrapping and Packing Department

Packing and Shipping Dept

It is next passed to the cooking department and placed in huge steam-jacketed kettles, which revolve continually and thus keep the chicle from scorching. While it is being cooked in these large kettles sugar is added, and as soon as the gum is done it is placed in a kneading machine. It is now about the consistency of bread or cake dough, and after being kneaded and cooled, flavor is added.

It is then transferred to the cooking department and put into large steam-jacketed kettles, which constantly rotate to prevent the chicle from burning. While it cooks in these big kettles, sugar is added, and once the gum is ready, it is placed in a kneading machine. At this point, it has a consistency similar to bread or cake dough, and after being kneaded and cooled, flavor is added.

Peppermint, spearmint and other oils used are triply distilled and absolutely free of all impurities. The orange oil comes from Messina and is always the product of the very latest orange crop.

Peppermint, spearmint, and other oils used are triple distilled and completely free of impurities. The orange oil comes from Messina and is always made from the latest orange harvest.

From the kneading machine it reaches a sizing table, to which are attached heavy rollers for reducing the mass of gum to a strip about a quarter of an inch in thickness and twelve inches wide.

From the kneading machine, it moves to a sizing table, where heavy rollers are attached to reduce the gum mass to a strip about a quarter of an inch thick and twelve inches wide.

At this stage it will be seen the gum begins to take on a ribbon shape. As it comes from the first series of rollers, it is cut into short lengths sprinkled with powdered sugar, and these short lengths are passed in sticks about two feet high on to a second series of rollers. Under the second rollers each short length of gum is once more reduced in thickness and extended in length.

At this point, you can see that the gum starts to take on a ribbon shape. After it comes from the first set of rollers, it’s cut into short pieces and sprinkled with powdered sugar, and these pieces are stacked into sticks about two feet tall before moving onto a second set of rollers. Under the second set of rollers, each short piece of gum is once again flattened and stretched out.

The surfaces of the second rollers contain knives running lengthwise and around. These knives partially cut the gum to its final size. The thin sheets are then sent to another drying room. They remain in this room from twelve to forty-eight hours, according to the season of the year, and are then ready for the wrapping machines.

The surfaces of the second rollers have knives that run lengthwise and around. These knives partially cut the gum to its final size. The thin sheets are then sent to a different drying room. They stay in this room for twelve to forty-eight hours, depending on the season, and are then ready for the wrapping machines.

Machines have also been invented which stamp out little nuggets of gum. To be finished these pieces are sent to a long room containing a line of twelve large white kettles, each on a separate base. It is these machines which coat the nuggets with snowy sugar. The kettles revolve until a sufficient coating of the liquid sugar has adhered.

Machines have also been created that produce small pieces of gum. To complete the process, these pieces are sent to a long room with a line of twelve large white kettles, each sitting on its own base. These machines coat the pieces with a layer of white sugar. The kettles spin until enough liquid sugar has stuck to them.

The chewing gum wrapping machine is considered by machinery builders to be one of the most ingenious automatic manufacturing machines in use. It is about the size of an ordinary typewriter desk and is operated by one girl. She receives the thin sheet of partially cut gum from the last drying room. The machine operator drops the slabs of gum into a feeding chute. Each slab is here automatically wrapped in wax and silver-foil papers. These papers are fed from rolls, as printing paper is fed to a newspaper press.

The chewing gum wrapping machine is regarded by equipment manufacturers as one of the most clever automatic manufacturing machines in use. It's about the size of a regular typewriter desk and is operated by one person. The operator receives the thin sheet of partially cut gum from the last drying room. She drops the slabs of gum into a feeding chute. Each slab is automatically wrapped in wax and silver foil papers. These papers are fed from rolls, just like printing paper is fed to a newspaper press.

As the slabs are wrapped they slide into a pocket. When five of them are finished, two steel fingers remove them and put on the final outside wrapper. The complete, wrapped packages of five slabs slide along a little runway into boxes.

As the slabs get wrapped, they slide into a pocket. When five of them are done, two metal fingers take them and put on the final outer wrapper. The finished, wrapped packages of five slabs slide down a small runway into boxes.

The same girl who feeds the gum into the wrapping machine closes the lids of the boxes and places them on a packing table by her side. When the packing table is filled with boxes a boy removes it to the shipping room, where it is crated and forwarded to the wholesale dealers.

The same girl who loads the gum into the wrapping machine closes the lids of the boxes and sets them on a packing table next to her. Once the packing table is filled with boxes, a boy takes it to the shipping room, where it’s packaged and sent out to the wholesale dealers.


Where did the Ferris Wheel get Its Name?

The Ferris wheel was named after its builder, George W. Ferris, an able engineer, now dead.

The Ferris wheel was named after its creator, George W. Ferris, a skilled engineer, who has now passed away.

The original Ferris wheel was exhibited at the Chicago World’s Fair. It was a remarkable engineering feature.

The original Ferris wheel was showcased at the Chicago World’s Fair. It was an impressive engineering feat.

Its diameter was 270 feet and its circumference 825 feet. Its highest point was 280 feet. The axle was a steel bar, 45 feet long and 32 inches thick. Fastened to each of the twin wheels was a steel hub 16 feet in diameter. The two towers at the axis supporting the wheel were 140 feet high, and the motive power was secured from a 1,000 horse-power steam engine under the wheel.

Its diameter was 270 feet and its circumference 825 feet. Its highest point was 280 feet. The axle was a steel bar, 45 feet long and 32 inches thick. Attached to each of the twin wheels was a steel hub 16 feet in diameter. The two towers at the axis supporting the wheel were 140 feet high, and the power was provided by a 1,000 horsepower steam engine located under the wheel.

The thirty-six cars on the wheel each comfortably seated forty persons. The wheel and passengers weighed 12,000 tons.

The thirty-six cars on the wheel each comfortably held forty people. The wheel and passengers weighed 12,000 tons.

By the Ferris wheel the almost indefinite application of the tension spoke to wheels of large dimensions has been vindicated, the expense being far smaller than that of the stiff spoke.

By the Ferris wheel, the nearly limitless use of tension spokes in large wheels has been proven justified, with costs being much lower than those of rigid spokes.

Stell mill producing rails

Steel Rail Mill

Steel Rail Mill

Interior view of the Bethlehem Steel Company’s rail mill finishing department, showing the machinery for straightening and drilling rails.

Interior view of the Bethlehem Steel Company’s rail mill finishing department, showing the equipment for straightening and drilling rails.

What is Done to Keep Railroad Rails from Breaking?

The breaking of rails has been the cause of much attention on the part of railroad and steel engineering experts ever since the tendency toward the construction of heavy locomotives and greater train loads became evident.

The breaking of rails has drawn a lot of attention from railroad and steel engineering experts ever since it became clear that there was a trend towards building heavy locomotives and carrying larger train loads.

The report of the Interstate Commerce Commission for 1915 gave broken rails as the cause of 3,345 accidents, in which 205 people were killed and 7,341 were injured, with a property loss of $3,967,188. A steel man is authority for the statement that one cold winter day in 1913, a single locomotive, making excessive speed, broke about a hundred rails in the distance of a mile on one of the leading railroad systems.

The Interstate Commerce Commission's report for 1915 stated that broken rails caused 3,345 accidents, resulting in 205 deaths and 7,341 injuries, with property damage totaling $3,967,188. A steel industry expert claims that on a particularly cold winter day in 1913, a single locomotive, traveling at high speed, broke around a hundred rails over a mile on one of the major railroad systems.

Both steel and railroad men were, therefore, much interested in the announcement made by the New York Central Railroad, in August, 1916, to the effect that the road’s staff of specialists had discovered the cause and remedy for the hidden flaws in steel rails. It was said that no rails produced under the specifications provided by them had yet developed any fissures.

Both steel and railroad workers were very interested in the announcement made by the New York Central Railroad in August 1916, stating that their team of experts had found the cause and solution for the hidden flaws in steel rails. It was reported that no rails made according to their specifications had shown any cracks so far.

The process by which those rails were prevented from developing fissures consisted mainly of rolling them from reheated blooms, and although that method is said to have been used in a number of rail mills for many years, no mention had previously been recorded of the prevention of breakage in that way. The experiments are, therefore, sure to be watched with a great deal of interest, and it is probable that fewer accidents will occur from broken rails in the near future.

The method used to stop those rails from forming cracks mainly involved rolling them from reheated blooms. Although this technique has been used in several rail mills for many years, there hasn't been any recorded mention of preventing breakage this way before. Therefore, these experiments will definitely be observed with great interest, and it’s likely that there will be fewer accidents from broken rails in the near future.

The technical man will be interested in an outline printed in the Iron Age, which said: “Induced interior transverse fissures in basic open-hearth rails are due in part to an occasional hot rail being cooled so rapidly by the rolls or so chilled by the gusts of air before recalescence on the hot beds as to cause a log of some of the transformations of the metal in the interior of the rail head. Induced interior transverse fissures can only develop in the track from the effects of preceding causes, either of which is no longer a mystery.”

The technical person will find an outline published in the Iron Age interesting, which stated: “Induced interior transverse cracks in basic open-hearth rails are partly caused by a hot rail being cooled too quickly by the rollers or chilled by drafts of air before it can heat back up on the hot beds, which leads to some of the metal transformations inside the rail head. Induced interior transverse cracks can only form in the track due to prior conditions, both of which are no longer a mystery.”

The report of the railroad experts also laid stress on the theory that “gagging” rails—subjecting them to blows for the purpose of straightening them—was also likely to cause faults by injuring the metal.

The report from the railroad experts also emphasized the idea that “gagging” rails—hitting them to straighten them—could also lead to problems by damaging the metal.

How does a “Master Clock” Control Others by Electricity?

With the aid of electric currents, one clock can be made to control other clocks, so as to make them keep accurate time.

With the help of electric currents, one clock can control other clocks, ensuring they all keep accurate time.

By means of this method one high-class clock, usually in an astronomical observatory, compels a number of other clocks at considerable distances to keep time with it.

By using this method, one high-quality clock, typically found in an astronomical observatory, makes several other clocks located far away keep time with it.

The clocks thus controlled ought to be so regulated that if left to themselves they would always gain a little, but not more than a few minutes per day.

The clocks that are controlled should be set up in a way that if they were left alone, they would always gain a little time, but not more than a few minutes each day.

The pendulum of the controlling clock, in swinging to either side, makes a brief contact, which completes the circuit of a galvanic battery, and thus sends a current to the controlled clock. The currents pass through a coil in the bob of the pendulum of the controlled clock, and the action between these currents and a pair of fixed magnets urges the pendulum to one side and to the other alternately. The effect is that, though the controlled clock may permanently continue to be a fraction of a second in advance of the controlling clock, it can never be so much as half a second in advance.

The pendulum of the controlling clock, as it swings from side to side, briefly connects and completes the circuit of a battery, sending a current to the controlled clock. The currents flow through a coil in the pendulum bob of the controlled clock, and the interaction between these currents and a pair of fixed magnets pushes the pendulum back and forth alternately. The result is that, while the controlled clock may always be a tiny bit ahead of the controlling clock, it can never be more than half a second ahead.

An electrically controlled clock usually contains a small magnetic needle, which shows from which direction the currents are coming. The arrangements are usually such that at every sixtieth second no current is sent, and the needle stands still. Any small error is thus at once detected.

An electrically controlled clock typically has a small magnetic needle that indicates the direction of the incoming currents. The setup is usually designed so that no current flows at every sixtieth second, causing the needle to remain still. Any slight error is immediately noticeable.


The Story of the Calculating Machine

How did Men Learn to Count?

Historians tell us that man was able to count long before he was able to write. Of course, he could not count very far, but it was enough for his needs at that time. He had no money and very few possessions of any kind, so that he did not have much occasion to use arithmetic.

Historians say that humans could count long before they could write. Naturally, they couldn't count very high, but it was sufficient for their needs at the time. They had no money and very few belongings, so they didn't have much reason to use math.

It was fairly simple for prehistoric men to distinguish one from two, and to distinguish a few from a great number, but it was more difficult for him to learn to think of a definite number of objects between these extremes. Those who have studied the evolution of figures say that man found it hard to think of a number of objects without using a mark or a finger or something to stand for each object. That is how the first method of counting came into use.

It was pretty easy for prehistoric humans to tell one from two and to recognize a few versus a lot, but it was tougher for them to think about a specific number of objects between those extremes. Researchers who have looked into how numbers developed say that humans struggled to think of a quantity without using a mark or a finger or something to represent each item. That’s how the first counting method started.

Because man had ten fingers and thumbs, he learned to count in tens. When he had counted ten, he could make a mark to remind him of the fact, and then count them over again. Some of the early races learned to designate units from tens and tens from hundreds by working their fingers in various ways. Other peoples also made use of their toes in counting, so that they could count up to twenty without getting bothered.

Because humans have ten fingers and thumbs, they learned to count in tens. After counting to ten, they could make a mark to remember it and then count them again. Some early civilizations figured out how to represent units in tens and hundreds by using their fingers in different ways. Other cultures also used their toes for counting, allowing them to count up to twenty without getting confused.

Cantor, the historian, tells of a South African tribe which employed an unusual system of finger counting. Three men sat together facing a fourth who did the counting. Each of the three held up his fingers for the fourth man to count. The first man’s ten fingers and thumbs represented units; the second man represented tens, and the third hundreds. By this means, it was possible to count up to 999.

Cantor, the historian, talks about a South African tribe that used a unique method of finger counting. Three men sat together facing a fourth man who counted. Each of the three raised their fingers for the fourth to count. The first man's ten fingers and thumbs represented units, the second man represented tens, and the third represented hundreds. With this system, they could count up to 999.

Who Invented the First Adding Machine?

Early cuneiform inscriptions, made about 2200 B. C., show that the Babylonians had developed a fairly extensive system of figuring. This was in the days of the patriarch Abraham. When men’s minds were overtaxed with the strain of counting into the hundreds and thousands, the Babylonians invented the first adding machine, a “pebble board,” a ruled surface on which pebbles were shifted about to represent different values.

Early cuneiform inscriptions, created around 2200 BCE, demonstrate that the Babylonians had established a pretty advanced system of calculation. This was during the time of the patriarch Abraham. When people found it too challenging to count into the hundreds and thousands, the Babylonians invented the first adding machine, a “pebble board,” which was a ruled surface where pebbles were moved around to represent different values.

The next adding and calculating machine was an evolution from the digits of the human hand and is known as the abacus in China, and the soroban in Japan.

The next adding and calculating machine evolved from the fingers of the human hand and is known as the abacus in China and the soroban in Japan.

The abacus may be defined as an arrangement of movable beads which slip along fixed rods, indicating by their arrangement some definite numerical quantity. Its most familiar form is in a boxlike arrangement, divided longitudinally by a narrow ridge of two compartments, one of which is roughly some three times larger than the other. Cylindrical rods placed at equal intervals apart pass through the framework and are fixed firmly into the sides. On these rods the counters are beaded. Each counter slides along the rod easily and on each rod there are six tamas or beads. Five of these slide on the longest segment of the rod and the remaining one on the shorter. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and even square and cube root can be performed on the abacus, and in the hands of a skilled operator considerable speed can be obtained.

The abacus is a device made up of movable beads that slide along fixed rods, showing a specific numerical value based on their arrangement. Its most common design is a box divided lengthwise by a narrow ridge into two sections, one of which is about three times the size of the other. Cylindrical rods are spaced evenly apart and are securely attached to the sides of the frame. The beads slide on these rods. Each rod has six beads, with five sliding on the longer part of the rod and one on the shorter part. You can use the abacus for addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and even finding square and cube roots, and a skilled operator can achieve impressive speed with it.

Finger counting in Africa

Finger Counting was Common Among Earlier Peoples, and was Brought to a Fair Degree of Efficiency by South Africans

Finger counting was common among ancient peoples and became quite efficient in South Africa.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Thanks to the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Use of the abacus in a Chinese laudry

The “Abacus” was One of the Earliest Aids to Calculation

The "Abacus" was one of the first tools used for calculations.

It is still used extensively in China, and occasionally will be found in Chinese laundries in the United States.

It is still widely used in China and can sometimes be found in Chinese laundries in the United States.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Thanks to the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

The Oriental tradesman does not deign to perplex himself by a process of mental arithmetic; he seizes his abacus, prepares it by a tilt, makes a few rapid, clicking movements and his calculations are completed. We always look with some slight contempt upon this method of calculation, but a little experience and investigation would tend to transform this contempt into admiration, for it may be safely asserted that even the simplest of all arithmetical operations, the abacus, possesses distinctive advantages over the mental or figuring process. In competition in simple addition between a “lightning calculator” and an ordinary Japanese small tradesman, the Japanese would easily win the contest.

The Eastern merchant doesn't bother with complicated mental math; he grabs his abacus, gives it a quick tilt, makes a few fast clicking movements, and his calculations are done. We often look down on this way of calculating, but a little experience and research could turn that disdain into admiration. It's fair to say that even the most basic arithmetic tasks using the abacus have certain clear advantages over mental calculations or traditional methods. In a simple addition contest between a “lightning calculator” and an average Japanese small trader, the Japanese would easily come out on top.

Blaise Pascal, the wonderful Frenchman, who discovered the theorem in conic sections, or Pascal’s hexogram, was not only one of the foremost mathematicians of his day but also excelled in mechanics; when he was nineteen years old he produced the first machine for the carrying of tens and the first arithmetical machine, as we know it, was invented by him about 1641. This was the first calculating machine made with dials. The same principle, that of using discs with figures on their peripheries, is employed in present-day calculating machines. Among these are numbering machines of all kinds, speedometers, cyclometers and counters used on printing presses.

Blaise Pascal, the amazing Frenchman who discovered the theorem in conic sections, or Pascal’s hexogram, was not only one of the leading mathematicians of his time but also excelled in mechanics. At just nineteen years old, he created the first machine for carrying tens, and around 1641, he invented the first arithmetical machine as we know it today. This was the first calculating machine made with dials. The same principle of using discs with figures on their edges is used in modern calculating machines. These include various types of numbering machines, speedometers, cyclometers, and counters used on printing presses.

Burroughs bookkeeping machine

A Modern Bookkeeping Machine, Used for Ledger Posting and Statement Making

A Modern Bookkeeping Machine, Used for Ledger Entries and Statement Generation

It has seventeen “banks” or rows of keys, is electrically operated, and automatically adds, subtracts, and computes balances.

It has seventeen "banks" or rows of keys, is electrically powered, and automatically adds, subtracts, and calculates balances.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Thanks to the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Who Discovered the Slide Rule Principle?

It was early in the seventeenth century that Napier, a native of Naples, invented the first actual mechanical means of calculating. He arranged strips of bone, on which were figures, so that they could be brought into various fixed combinations. The instrument was called “Napier’s rod” or “Napier’s bones.” It was the beginning of the slide rule, which has been found of invaluable aid to accountants and engineers.

It was early in the 17th century when Napier, from Naples, created the first real mechanical device for calculations. He designed strips of bone with numbers, allowing them to be arranged in different fixed combinations. The tool was known as “Napier’s rod” or “Napier’s bones.” This invention marked the start of the slide rule, which has proven to be incredibly helpful for accountants and engineers.

One trouble with all these contrivances was that, although they aided man to figure, they offered no means of making a record of the work. The man who used these machines had no way of checking his work to know if it was right unless he did it all over again.

One problem with all these gadgets was that, while they helped people calculate, they provided no way to keep a record of the work. The person using these machines had no way to verify their work to see if it was correct unless they did everything all over again.

The first machine to perform multiplication by means of successive additions was invented by Leibnitz in the year 1671 and completed in 1694. It employed the principle of the “stepped reckoner.” This model was kept first at Göttingen and afterward at Hanover, but it did not act efficiently, as the gears were not cut with sufficient accuracy. This was long before the days of accurate machine tools.

The first machine to multiply through repeated additions was invented by Leibnitz in 1671 and finished in 1694. It used the principle of the “stepped reckoner.” This model was initially housed in Göttingen and later in Hanover, but it didn't work well since the gears weren't machined accurately enough. This was a long time before the era of precise machine tools.

The first satisfactory calculating machine of this nature was that of C. X. Thomas, which was brought out about 1820. It is usually called the Thomas de Colmar Arithmometer. This Thomas type of machine, which is commonly known as the beveled gear type, is still in use today in modern business.

The first effective calculating machine of this kind was created by C. X. Thomas, released around 1820. It's commonly referred to as the Thomas de Colmar Arithmometer. This type of machine, known as the beveled gear type, is still used today in modern businesses.

The “Difference Engine.”

In the year 1822 a very ambitious project was conceived by Charles Babbage. He commenced to construct an automatic calculating machine, which he called a[349] “difference engine.” The work was continued during the following twenty years, the English government contributing about $85,000 to defray its cost. Babbage himself spent a further sum of about $30,000. At the end of that time the construction of the engine, though nearly finished, was unfortunately abandoned, owing to some misunderstanding with the government. A portion of this engine is exhibited in South Kensington Museum, London, along with other examples of Babbage’s work. If the engine had been finished it would have contained seven columns of wheels, twenty wheels in each column, and also a contrivance for stereotyping the tables calculated by it. It was intended to perform the most extended calculations required in astronomy and navigation, and to stamp a record of its work into plates of copper or other material.

In 1822, Charles Babbage came up with a very ambitious project. He started building an automatic calculating machine, which he called a[349] “difference engine.” Work on it continued for the next twenty years, with the English government contributing about $85,000 to cover the costs. Babbage himself spent an additional $30,000. By the end of that period, the construction of the engine, although nearly complete, was sadly abandoned due to some misunderstandings with the government. A part of this engine is displayed at the South Kensington Museum in London, along with other examples of Babbage’s work. If the engine had been completed, it would have had seven columns of wheels, with twenty wheels in each column, plus a mechanism for stereotyping the tables it calculated. It was designed to handle extensive calculations needed in astronomy and navigation and to imprint a record of its work onto copper or other materials.

Babbage's Difference Engine

Charles Babbage’s “Engine of Differences” was the First Adding Machine Invented which was Designed to Print a Record of its Work, but it was not a Success

Charles Babbage's "Engine of Differences" was the first adding machine designed to print a record of its calculations, but it didn't succeed.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Thanks to the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Babbage began to design his “analytical engine” in 1833 and he put together a small portion of it shortly before his death in 1871. This engine was to be capable of evaluating any algebraic formula. The formula it is desired to evaluate would be communicated to the engine by two sets of perforated cards similar to those used in the Jacquard loom. These cards would cause the engine automatically to operate on the numerical data placed in it, in such a way as to produce the correct result. Notwithstanding its simple action, its structure is complicated by a large amount of adding mechanism. A complete set of adding wheels with carrying gear being required for the tabular number, and every order of difference except the highest order.

Babbage started designing his “analytical engine” in 1833 and managed to assemble a small part of it shortly before he died in 1871. This engine was meant to evaluate any algebraic formula. The formula to be evaluated would be communicated to the engine using two sets of punched cards similar to those used in the Jacquard loom. These cards would allow the engine to automatically process the numerical data inserted into it, resulting in the correct output. Despite its straightforward operation, its construction is complex due to a significant amount of adding mechanisms. A complete set of adding wheels with carrying gear is necessary for the tabular number and every order of difference except for the highest order.

After Babbage, there was much experimenting done by inventors to produce a real adding and listing machine. Also inspired by Babbage’s work Scheutz of Stockholm made a “difference engine,” which was exhibited in England in 1864, and subsequently acquired for Dudley Observatory, Albany, N. Y. Scheutz’s engine had mechanism for calculating with four orders of differences of sixteen figures each.

After Babbage, many inventors experimented to create a functioning adding and listing machine. Inspired by Babbage's work, Scheutz from Stockholm developed a "difference engine," which was displayed in England in 1864 and later acquired for Dudley Observatory in Albany, N.Y. Scheutz's engine had a mechanism for calculating using four orders of differences, with sixteen figures each.

As far as we know the first patent in this country issued by the patent office for a calculating machine was to O. L. Castle of Alton, Illinois, in 1850. It was for a ten-key adding machine which did not print and only added in one column.

As far as we know, the first patent in this country issued by the patent office for a calculating machine was to O. L. Castle of Alton, Illinois, in 1850. It was for a ten-key adding machine that didn’t print and could only add in one column.

Work on Some of the Present-Day Models.

Frank S. Baldwin, a construction engineer, living in the United States, began to work on calculating machines in 1870. In 1874 he received a patent for a small[350] hand adding machine. In 1875 a patent was granted him on a calculating machine. This machine was along entirely original lines. Mr. Baldwin did not even know of the existence of the Thomas machine at that time. The machine had a number of important advantages over the Thomas system. Scientists were very much interested in the invention at the time, and the John Scott medal for meritorious inventions was conferred upon Mr. Baldwin by the Franklin Institute. The only other invention being honored in that year (1875) was the George Westinghouse air brake.

Frank S. Baldwin, a construction engineer living in the United States, started working on calculating machines in 1870. In 1874, he was granted a patent for a small[350] hand adding machine. In 1875, he received a patent for a calculating machine that was completely original. At that time, Mr. Baldwin wasn’t even aware of the Thomas machine's existence. His machine had several significant advantages over the Thomas system. Scientists were very interested in the invention, and the John Scott medal for outstanding inventions was awarded to Mr. Baldwin by the Franklin Institute. The only other invention recognized that year (1875) was the George Westinghouse air brake.

Adding machine

The Modern Adding Machine

The Modern Calculator

Courtesy of the Monroe Calculating Machine Company.

Thanks to the Monroe Calculating Machine Company.

This calculating machine, however, seemed to be too much in advance of the times, and Mr. Baldwin was unable to interest capital in it. He was very successful in his business as construction engineer and continued to spend all his spare time and money in experimental work. He brought out a number of models at later dates with important improvements.

This calculating machine, however, seemed to be way ahead of its time, and Mr. Baldwin couldn’t get any investors interested in it. He was quite successful in his work as a construction engineer and kept putting all his free time and money into experimental projects. He released several models later on that had significant improvements.

In the early eighties one of Mr. Baldwin’s 1875 models found its way to Europe into the hands of one Ohdner, a Swede. He took out patents in all European countries on a machine that did not vary in any important particular from Mr. Baldwin’s machine, and several large manufacturing companies in Europe took it up. It is now appearing under ten to fifteen different names in Europe, the most important being “Brunsviga” and Triumphator in Germany. There is no essential difference between the machines they are turning out today and Mr. Baldwin’s original machine. More than 50,000 machines of this type have been sold throughout the world.

In the early eighties, one of Mr. Baldwin’s 1875 models made its way to Europe and ended up in the hands of a Swede named Ohdner. He secured patents in all European countries for a machine that was pretty much the same as Mr. Baldwin’s. Several large manufacturing companies in Europe adopted it, and now it’s being sold under ten to fifteen different names, with the most notable being “Brunsviga” and “Triumphator” in Germany. There’s no significant difference between the machines they’re producing today and Mr. Baldwin’s original model. Over 50,000 machines of this type have been sold worldwide.

Adding and listing machine

One of the First Successful Adding and Listing Machines

One of the First Successful Adding and Listing Machines

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Thanks to the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

In 1883 a young man who started to work in a bank in Auburn, N. Y., discovered that nine-tenths of his work was mechanical addition. He also found that the human brain is but an imperfect tool, incapable of sustained effort without accident. His health gave way under the strain, and he quit the bank to begin work in a machine shop in St. Louis.

In 1883, a young man who started working at a bank in Auburn, N.Y., realized that 90% of his job was just basic math. He also discovered that the human brain is an unreliable tool, unable to maintain focus without making mistakes. His health suffered from the pressure, and he left the bank to take a job in a machine shop in St. Louis.

This was William S. Burroughs. He was of mechanical turn of mind, with an intense hobby for painful accuracy. By lamplight at home he worked out pencil outlines of a machine which would write figures and at the same time add them. It required the most painstaking work for him to make a machine to do what he had in mind. His early associates say of Burroughs that no ordinary materials were good enough for his creation. His drawings were on metal plates that would not stretch nor shrink by the fraction of a hair. He worked with hardened tools ground to a point, and when he struck a center or drew a line, he did it under a microscope.

This was William S. Burroughs. He had a mechanical mindset and an intense passion for precision. By lamplight at home, he sketched out plans for a machine that would write numbers and add them at the same time. It took an immense amount of effort for him to create a machine that matched his vision. His early colleagues say that no ordinary materials were suitable for his creations. His designs were on metal plates that wouldn’t stretch or shrink by even the tiniest amount. He worked with hardened tools that were ground to a point, and when he marked a center or drew a line, he did it under a microscope.

In 1884 Burroughs took his plans to a St. Louis dry goods merchant, who thought so well of the idea that he raised $700 toward forming a company. The young man took up his work in the machine shop conducted by Joseph Boyer.

In 1884, Burroughs shared his plans with a dry goods merchant in St. Louis, who was impressed enough to contribute $700 to help start a company. The young man then began working in the machine shop run by Joseph Boyer.

It was in January, 1885, that he applied for his patent, which was not issued until 1887.

It was in January 1885 that he applied for his patent, which wasn’t issued until 1887.

His mechanism throughout operated on the pivotal principle. This means a minimum of friction, therefore the least wear on the machine and the least exertion on the part of the operator. The principle elements in the machine remain practically unchanged today, a fact which testifies to the excellence of the inventor’s work.

His mechanism operated on a key principle. This means minimal friction, which results in less wear on the machine and less effort from the operator. The main components of the machine are still mostly the same today, which shows the quality of the inventor’s work.

Experimenting on the machine swallowed a great deal of capital, and the stockholders of the company he had formed became impatient. Burroughs objected strenuously, for he did not wish to market the machine until he was convinced that it was perfect, but he finally agreed to manufacture fifty machines.

Experimenting with the machine consumed a lot of money, and the shareholders of the company he had founded grew impatient. Burroughs strongly opposed this, as he didn’t want to sell the machine until he was sure it was perfect, but he eventually agreed to produce fifty machines.

Boyer's workshop

The Boyer Machine Shop, St. Louis, Where One of the First Successful Adding and Listing Machines was Born

The Boyer Machine Shop in St. Louis, where one of the first successful adding and listing machines was developed.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Thanks to the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

In his public demonstrations, he could do wonders with the machine. The public was skeptical, however, and some averred that he was a “lightning calculator” who did sums in his head and printed them on the machine. The first machines worked all right for the inventor, but inexperienced operators obtained surprising results through punching the keys and jerking the crank.

In his public demonstrations, he could do amazing things with the machine. The audience was doubtful, though, and some claimed he was a “lightning calculator” who did math in his head and printed it on the machine. The first machines worked fine for the inventor, but inexperienced operators got unexpected results by pressing the keys and turning the crank.

To meet this trouble and make the machines “fool proof,” he invented the “automatic control” in 1890. This was a governor, called the “dash pot”—a small cylinder partially filled with oil, and in which was a plunger. This, in connection with an ingenious management of springs, absorbed the shocks and governed the[352] machine so that no matter what was done to it, it would operate only at a certain speed. It is this same shock-absorbing device which is used to catch the recoil on the immense siege guns used in modern warfare.

To solve this issue and make the machines “foolproof,” he invented the “automatic control” in 1890. This was a governor known as the “dash pot”—a small cylinder partially filled with oil, containing a plunger. This device, along with a clever arrangement of springs, absorbed shocks and regulated the[352] machine so that no matter what was done to it, it would only operate at a specific speed. This same shock-absorbing mechanism is now used to handle the recoil of the massive siege guns employed in modern warfare.

Other improvements were made, and in 1891 the first hundred machines that were really marketable were manufactured. While still flushed with his success, Burroughs thought of the first fifty machines which had proved such a disappointment. These machines still remained in a dusty storeroom to mock him. Determined to get them out of his sight and memory, he seized them and threw them one by one from a window to the pavement below.

Other improvements were made, and in 1891 the first hundred machines that were actually marketable were produced. Still high from his success, Burroughs recalled the first fifty machines that had been such a letdown. Those machines still sat in a dusty storeroom, mocking him. Determined to get them out of his sight and mind, he grabbed them and tossed them one by one from a window onto the pavement below.

Burroughs destroying his invention

“There’s an End to My Troubles,” Said William Seward Burroughs as He Threw into the Street the First Fifty Adding Machines He Had Made

“There’s an end to my troubles,” said William Seward Burroughs as he threw the first fifty adding machines he had made into the street.

He wished nothing to remain to remind him of this early failure.

He wanted nothing to be left that would remind him of this early failure.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

When he had disposed of the last one, he called Mr. Boyer to see the ruin. “There,” he exclaimed, “I have ended the last of my troubles.”

When he finished with the last one, he called Mr. Boyer to check out the mess. “There,” he exclaimed, “I’ve put an end to my problems.”

The first machines were called “Registering Accountants,” and “Arithmometers.” Burroughs lived to see the fulfilment of his dreams and the machine a[353] commercial success. He died September 14, 1898, at his country home in Citronelle, Alabama, a victim of tuberculosis.

The first machines were referred to as “Registering Accountants” and “Arithmometers.” Burroughs got to witness the realization of his dreams and the machine's [353] commercial success. He passed away on September 14, 1898, at his home in Citronelle, Alabama, succumbing to tuberculosis.

There were at that time 8,000 banks in the country, and it was Burroughs’ idea that as soon as these were supplied the market for adding machines would be exhausted. Today, there are more than 200,000 adding machines of that one make in use.

There were about 8,000 banks in the country back then, and Burroughs believed that as soon as these banks were provided with adding machines, the market for them would be saturated. Today, there are over 200,000 adding machines of that one brand in use.

The need for an all-around office assistant that could multiply, divide, subtract as easily as it could add, was an idea nourished in the mind and thought of a young student of the University of Michigan.

The need for a versatile office assistant that could multiply, divide, and subtract just as easily as it could add was a concept fostered in the mind of a young student at the University of Michigan.

After graduation, Jay R. Monroe turned his attention to clerical and commercial lines. He became acquainted with all the different types of adding and so-called calculating machines. He saw their limitations and restrictions. He saw the need for versatility—for more simplicity in operation—for getting away from arbitrary rules—for release from the sapping mental tax.

After graduation, Jay R. Monroe focused on clerical and business areas. He got to know all the various types of adding and so-called calculating machines. He recognized their limitations and drawbacks. He understood the need for flexibility—for more straightforward operation—for moving away from rigid rules—for relief from the exhausting mental burden.

Monroe calculating machine

The Latest Model Calculating Machine

The Newest Calculator

Courtesy of the Monroe Calculating Machine Company.

Thanks to the Monroe Calculating Machine Company.

So in 1911 Monroe met Mr. Baldwin. Mr. Monroe realized the possibilities of Mr. Baldwin’s idea. Together they set about designing the machine to make it as nearly perfect as possible in adaptation to the needs of modern business.

So in 1911, Monroe met Mr. Baldwin. Mr. Monroe recognized the potential of Mr. Baldwin’s idea. Together, they began designing the machine to make it as close to perfect as possible for the needs of modern business.

They produced a machine in which the best of the European features are said to be combined with the operating ease and simplicity of American-made machines.[354] Provision is made for the correction of errors, and operation is in two directions, forward for addition and multiplication, and backward for subtraction and division. The latest model is a desk machine, occupying less than one square foot of space and weighing about twenty-six pounds.

They created a machine that supposedly combines the best features from Europe with the user-friendly design of American-made machines.[354] It has a built-in error correction feature and operates in two directions: forward for addition and multiplication, and backward for subtraction and division. The latest model is a desk machine, taking up less than one square foot of space and weighing around twenty-six pounds.

One of the latest developments of the adding machine is a type that will post ledgers and statements. This machine is said to be the final step in relieving bookkeeping of its drudgery.

One of the latest advancements in the adding machine is a version that can update ledgers and statements. This machine is believed to be the ultimate solution for making bookkeeping less tedious.

Largest existing adding machine

The “Duodecillion”—The Largest Capacity Adding Machine in the World—Has Forty Rows of Keys and Will Add to Within a Unit of Ten Duodecillions

The “Duodecillion”—the largest capacity adding machine in the world—has forty rows of keys and can add up to ten duodecillions.

To appreciate this prodigious figure, imagine that a marvelous high-speed flying machine were invented that would go to the sun and back in a day. If you made this 186,000,000-mile trip every day, it would take you just 14,729,700,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 years to travel a duodecillion miles.

To grasp this incredible amount, picture a fantastic high-speed aircraft invented that could travel to the sun and back in a single day. If you took this 186,000,000-mile journey every day, it would take you about 14,729,700,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 years to cover a duodecillion miles.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Thanks to the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

How Big is the Largest Adding Machine in the World?

The largest adding machine ever made was produced in 1915 and has a capacity of forty columns, or within one unit of ten duodecillions. This is a number too prodigious for the mind of man to grasp. This machine was exhibited at the Panama Expositions in 1915.

The biggest adding machine ever created was made in 1915 and can handle up to forty columns, or close to ten duodecillion. This number is so massive that it's hard for anyone to really understand it. This machine was displayed at the Panama Expositions in 1915.

To get an idea of the capacity of this machine, suppose that your income is $1,000,000 a second. At this rate for twenty-four hours a day, with no stops for eating or sleeping, it would take you 352,331,022,041,828,731,333,333,333 years to[355] accumulate a duodecillion dollars. All the hairs on the heads of all human beings, which are supposed to be numberless, are only a small fraction of a duodecillion.

To get an idea of the capacity of this machine, imagine that your income is $1,000,000 per second. At that rate, working twenty-four hours a day without breaks for eating or sleeping, it would take you 352,331,022,041,828,731,333,333,333 years to[355] accumulate a duodecillion dollars. All the hairs on the heads of all human beings, which are thought to be countless, are just a tiny fraction of a duodecillion.

This machine has a practical use in adding several sums simultaneously, and takes the place of from ten to a dozen smaller machines.

This machine is useful for adding multiple sums at once and replaces about ten to twelve smaller machines.

Adding machines are made that figure in English pence, shillings and pounds; in Japanese yen, and in the monetary system of most civilized countries. They will change inches into feet, pounds into bushels, and do other “stunts” that would make the average schoolboy envious when it comes to arithmetic.

Adding machines are designed to calculate in English pence, shillings, and pounds; in Japanese yen; and in the currency systems of most developed countries. They can convert inches to feet, pounds to bushels, and perform other "tricks" that would make the average schoolboy jealous when it comes to math.

The most complicated problems of multiplication, division and fractions may be handled with ease on these machines. They have taken a great part in the day’s work of modern business, and it would be hard to imagine how the world’s finance and industry could be handled without them. Adding and calculating machines have become almost as necessary in modern business as the telephone and the typewriter.

The most complicated problems of multiplication, division, and fractions can be easily managed with these machines. They play a significant role in the daily operations of modern business, and it's hard to envision how the world’s finance and industry could function without them. Adding and calculating machines have become nearly as essential in modern business as the telephone and typewriter.

How are Adding Machines Used?

Adding machines may be found at work in all kinds of business places from corner groceries to department stores and manufacturing plants. In the various offices and plants of the Western Electric Company, which are scattered through the country, more than 1,600 machines are in use. Other big users are railroads, banks, mail-order houses, and city, state and government offices.

Adding machines can be found in all sorts of businesses, from small corner stores to big department stores and factories. In the different offices and plants of the Western Electric Company located throughout the country, over 1,600 machines are in use. Other major users include railroads, banks, mail-order companies, and city, state, and government offices.

The Bank of France, the Bank of England, and other of the world’s largest financial institutions do the burden of their figure work on adding machines made in the United States. The German post-office uses more than 1,200 machines. There are individual American banks, like the Corn Exchange National Bank of New York, that employ as many as 150 adding machines in their work.

The Bank of France, the Bank of England, and other major financial institutions around the world rely on adding machines made in the United States for their calculations. The German post office uses over 1,200 machines. Some American banks, such as the Corn Exchange National Bank of New York, use as many as 150 adding machines in their operations.

Small adding machine

One of the Smallest Adding Machines is Adapted for Use by Retail Merchants and Others Who do not Add Figures of More than Five Digits

One of the smallest adding machines is made for retail merchants and anyone else who doesn't need to add numbers larger than five digits.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Courtesy of the Burroughs Adding Machine Company.

Some surprising uses are found for adding machines. One is used in a Japanese boarding house in California; another is used by a retired Dayton millionaire to count the coupons he clips; the Rockefeller Sanitary Commission uses a machine in fighting the hook-worm; the United States government uses thousands in making census tabulations and in other ways. Others are used by newsboys, egg farmers, housewives, undertakers, dentists, judges in automobile races, and by persons in a thousand different lines of business. Without adding machines the public would be obliged to wait for days for the results of most elections.

Some surprising uses have been found for adding machines. One is used in a Japanese boarding house in California; another is used by a retired millionaire from Dayton to count the coupons he clips; the Rockefeller Sanitary Commission uses a machine in the fight against hookworm; the United States government uses thousands for making census tabulations and in other ways. Others are used by newsboys, egg farmers, housewives, undertakers, dentists, judges in car races, and by people in a thousand different types of businesses. Without adding machines, the public would have to wait days for the results of most elections.

In this way, the idea of a tired bank clerk came to change the figuring methods of the world.

In this way, the concept of a weary bank clerk transformed the calculations used around the globe.


The words “Almighty Dollar” have been generally adopted since Irving first used them in his “Creole Village,” and the use of “lynching” to represent mob law and the action of mobs has become common since a Virginia farmer by that name instituted the first vigilance committee in America.

The term “Almighty Dollar” has been widely accepted since Irving first coined it in his “Creole Village,” and the use of “lynching” to describe mob justice and the actions of mobs has become common since a Virginia farmer by that name started the first vigilance committee in America.

Where does Ermine Come From?

The ermine fur, with which we are all familiar, is furnished by the stoat, a small animal of the weasel tribe. It is found over both temperate Europe and North America, but is common only in the north.

The ermine fur that we all recognize comes from the stoat, a small animal in the weasel family. It is found throughout temperate Europe and North America, but it's mainly common in the northern regions.

Because of that change which occurs in the color of its fur at different seasons—by far most marked in the Arctic regions—it is not generally known that the ermine and stoat are the same. In winter, in cold countries or severe seasons, the fur changes from a reddish-brown to a yellowish-white, or almost pure white, under which shade the animal is recognized as the ermine. In both states the tip of the tail is black.

Because of the change in its fur color during different seasons—most noticeable in the Arctic regions—it's not widely known that the ermine and the stoat are actually the same animal. In winter, in cold areas or during harsh seasons, the fur shifts from reddish-brown to a yellowish-white or nearly pure white, under which the animal is identified as the ermine. In both forms, the tip of the tail is black.

Ermine

Ermine (Mustela Erminea)

Ermine (Mustela erminea)

Like many other species of this genus, the ermine has the faculty of ejecting a fluid of a musky odor.

Like many other species in this genus, the ermine can expel a fluid with a musky smell.

Its fur is short, soft and silky; the best skins being brought from Russia, Sweden and Norway and Hudson Bay territories. Its fur was formerly one of the insignia of royalty, and is still used by judges. When used as linings of cloaks the black tuft from the tail is sewed to the skin at irregular distances.

Its fur is short, soft, and silky; the best pelts come from Russia, Sweden, Norway, and the Hudson Bay regions. Its fur used to be a symbol of royalty and is still worn by judges. When used as linings in cloaks, the black tuft from the tail is sewn onto the skin at irregular intervals.

What is the Principle of “Foreign Exchange”?

Exchange, in commerce, is a transaction by which the debts of people residing at a distance are canceled by a draft or bill of exchange, without transfer of any actual money.

Exchange, in business, is a transaction that cancels the debts of people living far apart through a draft or bill of exchange, without the actual transfer of money.

A merchant in New York who owes $1,000 worth of goods in London, gives a bill or order for that amount which can be negotiated through banking agencies or otherwise against similar debts owing by other parties in London who have payments to make in New York. This obviates the expense and risk of transmitting money.

A merchant in New York who owes $1,000 worth of goods in London provides a bill or order for that amount, which can be processed through banking agencies or other means against similar debts owed by other people in London who need to make payments in New York. This eliminates the cost and risk of sending money.

The process of liquidating obligations between different nations is carried on in the same way by an exchange of foreign bills. When all the accounts of one country correspond in value with those of another, the exchange between the countries will be at par, that is, the sum for which the bill is drawn in the one country will be the exact value of it in the other.

The process of settling debts between different countries is done through an exchange of foreign bills. When all the accounts of one country match in value with those of another, the exchange rate between the countries will be equal, meaning the amount for which the bill is issued in one country will be the same value in the other.

Exchange is said to be at par when, for instance, a bill drawn in New York for the payment of $1,000 in London can be purchased there for $1,000. If it can be purchased for less, exchange is under par and is against London. If the purchaser is obliged to give more, exchange is above par and in favor of London.

Exchange is considered at par when, for example, a bill drawn in New York for the payment of $1,000 in London can be bought there for $1,000. If it can be bought for less, the exchange is below par and against London. If the buyer has to pay more, the exchange is above par and in favor of London.

Although the thousand circumstances which incessantly affect the state of debt and credit prevent the ordinary course of exchange from being almost ever precisely at par, its fluctuations are confined within narrow limits, and if direct exchange is unfavorable between two countries this can often be obviated by the interposition of bills drawn on other countries where an opposite state of matters prevails.

Although the many factors that constantly influence debt and credit keep the typical exchange rate from being exactly balanced, its fluctuations are usually kept within small limits. If direct exchange is unfavorable between two countries, this can often be resolved by using bills issued on other countries where the situation is the opposite.

What do We Mean by “The Old Moon in the New Moon’s Arms”?

“Earth-shine,” in astronomy, is the name given to the faint light visible on the part of the moon not illuminated by the sun, due to the illumination of that portion by the light which the earth reflects on her. It is most conspicuous when the illuminated part of the disc is at its smallest, as soon after new moon. This phenomenon is popularly described as “the old moon in the new moon’s arms.”

“Earth-shine” in astronomy refers to the faint light seen on the portion of the moon that isn’t lit by the sun, caused by the light that the earth reflects onto it. It's most noticeable when the lit part of the moon is at its smallest, right after the new moon. This phenomenon is often described as “the old moon in the new moon’s arms.”


The Story in a Bowling Alley[27]

From the “stone age” onward the probabilities are that man has always had some kind of bowling game.

From the "stone age" onward, it's likely that people have always had some form of bowling game.

Bowling, as we know today, is an indoor adaptation of, and an improvement upon, the old Dutch game of “nine-pins.” This game was brought from Holland by those colonists who settled Manhattan Island in 1623.

Bowling, as we know it today, is an indoor version of, and an enhancement to, the old Dutch game of “nine-pins.” This game was introduced from Holland by the colonists who settled Manhattan Island in 1623.

Washington Irving, in his story, “Rip Van Winkle,” refers to the old Dutch fairy tale, that the rolling thunder on the mountain tops of the Catskill was the noise made by the rolling balls as the elfs and gnomes engaged in their favorite pastimes of bowling.

Washington Irving, in his story, “Rip Van Winkle,” mentions the old Dutch fairy tale that the rumbling thunder on the mountain tops of the Catskills was the sound of rolling balls as the elves and gnomes played their favorite game of bowling.

That little section of New York City known as Bowling Green is the original spot which, in 1732, Peter Bayard, Peter Jay and John Chambers leased for eleven years and enclosed for a bowling green.

That small area of New York City called Bowling Green is the original location where, in 1732, Peter Bayard, Peter Jay, and John Chambers leased it for eleven years and turned it into a bowling green.

With the influx of German immigrants, who brought with them a game similar to the Dutch game, additional popularity was given to the sport.

With the arrival of German immigrants, who introduced a game similar to the Dutch version, the sport gained even more popularity.

Bowling ball return loop

Loop the Loop Return

Loop the Loop Return

The game was originally played on the bare ground. The Germans used a board about a foot wide on which to roll the ball, and then improved on this by using cohesive mineral substances solidly packed together. At an early date, the Dutch had covered the alley with a roof, and later enclosed it in a rough shed, to protect it and make play possible in any kind of weather. But, great as these improvements were over the crudeness of previous centuries, they are not worthy of comparison with a modern bowling academy.

The game was originally played on bare ground. The Germans used a board about a foot wide to roll the ball on, then improved it by using tightly packed mineral materials. Early on, the Dutch covered the alley with a roof, and later built a rough shed around it to protect it and allow for play in any weather. But while these improvements were significant compared to previous centuries, they can’t compare to a modern bowling academy.

In the best hard-wood section of the United States, one of the large bowling equipment manufacturers owns about thirty thousand acres of maple. From this raw material is gathered the chief stock that goes into bowling alleys and the pins.

In the prime hardwood region of the United States, a major bowling equipment manufacturer owns around thirty thousand acres of maple. This raw material is the main supply used in bowling alleys and the pins.

The company has its own logging crews that cut the timber and pile it on flat cars, whence it is transported over a private railroad until it arrives at the company sawmills. Here the raw material enters upon the manufacturing process.

The company has its own logging teams that cut the timber and stack it on flat cars, from which it is transported via a private railroad until it reaches the company's sawmills. Here, the raw material begins the manufacturing process.

The rough stock-strips for the alley “bed,” “leveling strips,” “return chute,” “post” and “kick-backs” are sawed out of certain of the logs. They are then shipped to a factory where they are seasoned, being kiln dried. The stock is next cut to the required sizes.

The rough stock pieces for the alley "bed," "leveling strips," "return chute," "post," and "kickbacks" are cut from specific logs. They are then sent to a factory where they are seasoned by being kiln-dried. The stock is then cut to the needed sizes.

The bed stock is cut into strips, planed on all sides, and tongued and grooved on the widest sides. When finished, the strips measure 3 x 1 inch. Part of the bed stock, however, is hard pine, shipped from the Southern states in the rough boards. This is finished similar to the maple strips.

The bed stock is cut into strips, planed on all sides, and has tongues and grooves on the wider sides. When finished, the strips measure 3 x 1 inch. Some of the bed stock, however, is hard pine, shipped from the Southern states as rough boards. This is finished in a similar way to the maple strips.

The “kick-backs” are the two partitions, shaped somewhat like a ship’s rudder, which form the two pit sides. Each consists of two facings of the best maple with a core of hard but resilient wood in the middle. They are built in this way to make the pins that fly side-wise spring back on the bed and knock down other standing pins, and also to withstand the exceedingly rough usage to which they are subject by the flying pins and rolling balls.

The “kick-backs” are the two walls, shaped somewhat like a ship’s rudder, that form the sides of the pit. Each one has two layers of the best maple with a strong but flexible wood core in the middle. They are designed this way to allow the pins that fly sideways to bounce back onto the bed and knock down other standing pins, and also to withstand the intense wear and tear from the flying pins and rolling balls.

The cushion forms the rear end of the pit. The frame is stoutly constructed, and the face thickly upholstered with scrap leather and a heavy but pliable covering. It swings on hinges which suspend it from the cross bar, running from each of the kick-backs across the pit end at the top. The cushion diminishes the force of the rolling balls and flying pins, permitting them to fall gently into the pit.

The cushion makes up the back of the pit. The frame is solidly built, and the front is heavily padded with scrap leather and a thick yet flexible covering. It swings on hinges that hang from the crossbar, which stretches between the kickbacks at the top of the pit. The cushion softens the impact of the rolling balls and flying pins, allowing them to land softly in the pit.

The “gutters” are the concave boards that extend the complete length of the alley, from the foul line to the pit, on both sides of the bed. The purpose is to take care of the misdirected balls that roll off the bed before reaching the pit.

The “gutters” are the curved boards that run the entire length of the alley, from the foul line to the pit, on both sides of the lane. Their purpose is to catch any misdirected balls that roll off the lane before they reach the pit.

The “return chute,” or “loop-the-loop return,” is the railway along which the balls travel in their return from the pit to the bowler. It is usually placed on the right-hand side of the alley, or between a pair of alleys.

The "return chute," or "loop-the-loop return," is the track where the balls go back from the pit to the bowler. It's typically located on the right side of the alley or between two alleys.

At the pit end, the chute is solidly constructed with a concave flanged surface placed on the top of the kick-back. It conforms to the downward curve of the latter, but the rail work begins at the top of the incline and extends back to the newel post at the bowler’s end of the alley. The flanges easily accommodate the balls when placed on the chute by the pin boy.

At the pit end, the chute is well-built with a concave flanged surface on top of the kick-back. It follows the downward curve of the kick-back, but the rail work starts at the top of the incline and goes back to the newel post at the bowler’s end of the lane. The flanges easily hold the balls when placed on the chute by the pin boy.

The newel post is not made of a solid block, but is built up, being veneered on the inside, as well as on the outside, to make it impervious to atmospheric changes. The top contains a sponge cup to moisten the fingers of the bowler.

The newel post isn’t just a solid block; it’s constructed and veneered both inside and out to protect it from weather changes. The top has a sponge cup to dampen the fingers of the bowler.

Cross-section of bowling alley bed

Cross-Section of Bowling Bed Showing Steel Clamp

Cross-Section of Bowling Bed Displaying Steel Clamp

The rails form a semicircle at the post, with the ends of the arc pointing down the alley. A tightly stretched leather strap extends horizontally from the upper end of the arc back to the post, where it is fastened with a swivel screw. Half way up, from the points of the arc, a second rail, i. e., the “receiver,” is built, with sufficient space between it and the strap to allow the passage of the largest size ball. With the momentum gained by rolling down the incline of the kick-back, the ball rolls back on the inside of the curve until it strikes the strap, where its course is stopped, and it drops on the receiver, ready again for use by the bowler.

The rails create a semicircle at the post, with the ends of the arc directed down the alley. A tightly pulled leather strap stretches horizontally from the upper end of the arc back to the post, where it's secured with a swivel screw. Halfway up, from the points of the arc, a second rail, i. e., the “receiver,” is built, with enough space between it and the strap to let the largest ball pass through. With the momentum gained from rolling down the incline of the kick-back, the ball rolls back on the inside of the curve until it hits the strap, stopping its movement, and then it drops onto the receiver, ready for the bowler to use again.

In beginning the construction of an alley, the mechanic lays the leveling strips on which the bed is to rest. These are set at right angles to the direction in which the bed is to lie, and must be spirit-leveled for accuracy, and firmly fastened to the foundation. A strip of cork carpet is then laid the full width of the alley and extending the entire length of the bed. This is to reduce to a minimum the sound of the balls dropping on and rolling down the bed.

In starting the construction of an alley, the worker lays the leveling strips that the bed will sit on. These are placed at right angles to the direction in which the bed will be positioned and must be leveled accurately and securely attached to the foundation. A strip of cork carpet is then laid across the full width of the alley and extends the entire length of the bed. This helps minimize the sound of the balls dropping onto and rolling down the bed.

On the leveling strips at the extreme side of where the bed is to lie, a 3 x 1-inch maple strip is laid, widest side downward, with its finished one-inch edge nearest to the gutter. One end of this strip marks the extreme end of the approach. The[359] other end of the strip is continued by adding other strips the full length of the bed. When these have been carefully squared to the exact direction the alley is to run, they are fastened to the leveling strips.

On the leveling strips at the far edge where the bed will be placed, a 3 x 1-inch maple strip is laid down with the wider side facing down and the finished one-inch edge closest to the gutter. One end of this strip indicates the far end of the approach. The[359] other end of the strip is extended by adding more strips to cover the entire length of the bed. Once these have been carefully aligned to ensure they run exactly in the direction of the alley, they are secured to the leveling strips.

The next strip, also of maple, is tongued into the lower one, but its continuous length extends only about five feet beyond the foul line, or about eighteen feet from the approach end.

The next strip, also made of maple, fits into the lower one, but its continuous length goes only about five feet past the foul line, or about eighteen feet from the approach end.

A bowling bed cannot be laid as an ordinary floor. It is built upon its side and when finished resembles a wooden wall about seventy-five feet long four inches high and three inches wide.

A bowling bed can't be set up like a regular floor. It's constructed on its side and, when done, looks like a wooden wall that's about seventy-five feet long, four inches high, and three inches wide.

The approach end of the bed, approximately eighteen feet long, is constructed of maple, with each alternate strip of the 3 x 1-inch bed stock about eighteen inches shorter. The pit end of the bed is similarly constructed for a distance of about six feet. The space between is filled in with the pine strips of the same dimensions, and the alternate long and short strips at the inner ends of the approach and pit ends form mortices into which the pine dovetails.

The approach at the end of the bed, roughly eighteen feet long, is made of maple, with each alternate strip of the 3 x 1-inch bed stock about eighteen inches shorter. The pit end of the bed is similarly made for about six feet. The space in between is filled with pine strips of the same size, and the alternating long and short strips at the inner ends of the approach and pit ends create mortises where the pine dovetails fit in.

Pit end of bowling alley

Pit End Section of Bowling Alleys

Pit End Section of Bowling Alleys

The wear on the bed occurs where the bowler walks and drops the ball and where the ball strikes the pins; hence the hard maple. The interior is filled with pine, which is softer, because it retains a higher polish and prevents the rolling ball from bumping; thus throwing it from its proper course.

The wear on the lane happens where the bowler walks and releases the ball, and where the ball hits the pins; that’s why it’s made of hard maple. The inside is filled with pine, which is softer, because it keeps a better polish and stops the rolling ball from bouncing, keeping it on its intended path.

The bed is thus built up for its continuous length, strip by strip, the tongue of one strip fitting into the groove of the other, and both nailed firmly together, until the proper width (while being built, the height) is attained. When the bed is finished, the strips are clamped with steel clamps, the turned-up ends of which firmly grip the sides of the bed, thus preventing warping or spreading. While the bed is still in this upright position, a one-inch slot is cut across where the foul line is to rest, and holes are bored through the bed. A black composition strip, i. e., the “foul-line,” is inserted in the slot and bolted through the holes to the bottom of the bed.

The bed is built up in a continuous length, strip by strip, with the tongue of one strip fitting into the groove of the next, and both securely nailed together until the correct width (while being built, the height) is reached. Once the bed is complete, steel clamps are used to hold the strips in place, with the turned-up ends firmly gripping the sides of the bed to prevent warping or spreading. While the bed is still standing upright, a one-inch slot is cut where the foul line will be positioned, and holes are drilled through the bed. A black composition strip, i.e., the “foul line,” is placed in the slot and bolted through the holes to the bottom of the bed.

At the pit end, circular slots are cut and holes bored for the purpose of countersinking and fastening the “pin spots.” The latter are of the same substance as the foul-line and all are sunk flush with the surface of the bed.

At the pit end, circular slots are cut and holes drilled to countersink and secure the “pin spots.” These are made of the same material as the foul line, and all are set flush with the surface of the bed.

This—clamping and fastening—explains the necessity for building the bed on its side.

This—clamping and securing—explains why it’s necessary to build the bed on its side.

It is now ready to be placed into position. It is merely toppled over, face side upward, clamped side underneath. So exact has it been built, according to specifications[360] and alignment, and the mass is so heavy, that the dead weight makes it lie where it falls and only the slightest adjustment is necessary.

It’s now set to be positioned. Just flip it over, with the face side up and the clamped side underneath. It’s been constructed so precisely, following the specifications[360] and alignment, and it’s so heavy that its own weight keeps it in place, requiring only a tiny adjustment.

The height of the leveling strips, plus the height of the bed, lift its surface about six inches from the foundation floor. At the pins end of the bed, this forms one of the sides and the bottom of the pit. The bottom is floored with maple and covered with a specially prepared pit mat, durable, yet soft, so as not to damage the balls and pins falling upon it. The back and sides of the pit are formed by the kick-backs, braces and cushion.

The height of the leveling strips, along with the height of the bed, raises its surface about six inches above the foundation floor. At the pin end of the bed, this creates one of the sides and the bottom of the pit. The bottom is made of maple and covered with a specially designed pit mat that is tough yet soft enough not to damage the balls and pins that fall onto it. The back and sides of the pit are created by the kick-backs, braces, and cushion.

After the kick-backs are placed in position, the gutters are laid, and then the return chute railway is laid, between and slightly above them. At the approach end of the bed the newel post is firmly fastened to the foundation, and the floor that is laid above the latter and flush with the surface of the bed serves to brace the post, making it immovable. The curved end of the chute and the receiver are then added.

After the kick-backs are set in place, the gutters are installed, and then the return chute railway is positioned between and slightly above them. At the entry end of the bed, the newel post is securely attached to the foundation, and the floor laid above it, flush with the surface of the bed, helps to stabilize the post, making it fixed. The curved end of the chute and the receiver are then added.

The bed is then planed its entire length, sandpapered, shellaced and polished. The remainder of the woodwork is finished in its natural color except the gutters, which are stained mahogany and shellaced. They are thus stained, not only for artistic effect, but to clearly define the outer edges of the bed—a matter of great importance to the bowler when trying to knock down the two outer pins in the third row.

The bed is then planed along its entire length, sanded, shellacked, and polished. The rest of the woodwork is left in its natural color, except for the gutters, which are stained mahogany and shellacked. They are stained not just for aesthetic appeal, but also to clearly outline the edges of the bed—a crucial factor for the bowler aiming to knock down the two outer pins in the third row.

In making the pins, the best selected logs are sawed into blocks about 2 x 1 feet. These are placed in a lathe and gouged out, forming the pin in the rough. They are next turned down to size and selected for quality and weight, after which they are kiln dried and receive a final turning to perfect their formation, then smoothed and finished.

In making the pins, the best chosen logs are sawed into blocks about 2 x 1 feet. These are put into a lathe and gouged out, creating the rough shape of the pin. They are then turned down to size and checked for quality and weight, after which they are kiln dried and get a final turning to refine their shape, then smoothed and finished.

Automatic pin setting equipment

Backus Automatic Pin Setters

Backus Automatic Pin Setters

The Backus pin-setter is almost human in its operation. The old way was to hire boys to set up the pins on the spots and return the ball via the return chute. The pin-setter relieves the boy of the major and most time-consuming part of this work. A frame holding the machine is set up over the spots. It is placed so high that it does not interfere with either the flying pins or the rolling balls.

The Backus pin-setter operates almost like a person. Previously, boys were hired to set up the pins and return the ball through the return chute. The pin-setter takes over the most significant and time-consuming parts of this job. A frame holding the machine is set up over the spots. It's positioned high enough not to interfere with either the flying pins or the rolling balls.

As the pins are knocked off into the gutters, or the pit, the pin boy picks them up and lays them flat on their sides into the pockets at the top of the machine. When a “frame” is rolled those pins standing on the alley remain there and the machine is lowered by a balance weight controlled by a lever. As it descends the pins are automatically set on end, and when they rest on the spots on the alley the machine releases them and springs up to its original position.

As the pins are knocked into the gutters or the pit, the pin boy collects them and lays them flat on their sides in the pockets at the top of the machine. When a "frame" is rolled, the pins that are still standing in the lane stay there, and the machine is lowered by a counterweight operated by a lever. As it goes down, the pins are automatically set upright, and when they land on the spots in the lane, the machine releases them and pops back up to its original position.

Wooden balls for bowling were never satisfactory. They wore out too easily and never retained perfect rotundity. Fortunes were spent in experimenting with other materials until at last the famous “mineralite” ball was perfected.

Wooden bowling balls were never good enough. They wore out too quickly and never stayed perfectly round. A lot of money was spent experimenting with other materials until, finally, the famous “mineralite” ball was perfected.

Its composition is a trade secret, but its chief ingredient is rubber.

Its composition is a trade secret, but its main ingredient is rubber.

First the composition is rolled into sheets. These are then molded and later vulcanized, being subject to terrific pressure. The balls are then smoothed and polished.

First, the material is rolled into sheets. These are then shaped and later vulcanized under intense pressure. The balls are then smoothed and polished.

As it is impossible to make a perfectly round ball and have the weight equally distributed, the ball can not roll true; an ingenious device overcomes the difficulty. The ball is set in a basin of mercury, where it floats. Naturally, the heavier side of the ball swings to the bottom. On the top, diametrically opposite to the center of weight, a chalk mark is placed on the ball and it is then lifted out of the mercury.

As it's impossible to create a perfectly round ball with evenly distributed weight, the ball can't roll straight; however, a clever device solves this problem. The ball is placed in a basin of mercury, where it floats. Naturally, the heavier side of the ball sinks to the bottom. On the top, directly opposite the center of weight, a chalk mark is made on the ball before it's lifted out of the mercury.

Diametrically opposite to the chalk mark a small hole is punched into the ball to indicate the weightiest point. Directly beneath this is stamped the trademark of the firm.

Diametrically opposite the chalk mark, a small hole is punched into the ball to show the heaviest point. Right underneath this is stamped the company's trademark.

Having ascertained the proper distance apart the finger holes are to be bored, the ball is weighed to determine the excess of its proposed weight when finished.

Having determined the correct distance between the finger holes, the ball is weighed to figure out how much extra weight it will have when it's finished.

The holes are then machine bored at the respective points, sufficiently deep to reduce the weight to exact specifications.

The holes are then drilled by machine at the specific points, deep enough to bring the weight down to exact specifications.


How are Artificial Precious Stones Made?

The art of manufacturing gems synthetically, that is, by the combination of chemical elements present in the real stone, has reached a high degree of success.

The process of creating synthetic gems, meaning by combining the chemical elements found in natural stones, has become highly successful.

The diamond, which is an allotropic form of carbon, has hitherto resisted attempts to reproduce it of sufficient size to have a commercial value. By dissolving carbon in molten iron and suddenly cooling the molten mass by a stream of water, whereupon the outer part contracts with great force and compresses the interior so that the carbon separates out, Moissan, the French chemist, succeeded in isolating small crystals, none, however, as large as one-twenty-fifth of an inch in diameter.

The diamond, an allotropic form of carbon, has so far resisted efforts to create it in large enough sizes for commercial use. By dissolving carbon in molten iron and then rapidly cooling the mixture with a stream of water, the outer layer contracts powerfully and compresses the inside, allowing the carbon to separate out. French chemist Moissan managed to isolate small crystals this way, but none were larger than one-twenty-fifth of an inch in diameter.

Experiments in the manufacture of the ruby have met with such success that the synthetic ruby is produced of a size and of a perfection that would place a prohibitive value on the natural stone. The ruby, chemically considered, is crystallized alumina, or oxide of aluminum, with a small percentage of oxide of chromium.

Experiments in making synthetic rubies have been so successful that we can now produce them in sizes and qualities that would make natural rubies extremely expensive. Chemically, a ruby is crystallized aluminum oxide with a small amount of chromium oxide.

Sapphire is of the same material, differing from the ruby only in color. The ruby owes its fine red color to the presence of oxide of chromium; the sapphire its deep blue to either a lower oxide of chromium or to an oxide of titanium.

Sapphire is made of the same material as ruby, differing only in color. The ruby gets its rich red color from chromium oxide, while the sapphire gets its deep blue from either a lower form of chromium oxide or titanium oxide.

Crystallized alumina in the different colors receives different trade names, as Oriental emerald for the green; Oriental topaz for the yellow; Oriental amethyst for the purple; while the water-clear, colorless crystal is known as white sapphire.

Crystallized alumina in various colors has different trade names, such as Oriental emerald for green, Oriental topaz for yellow, and Oriental amethyst for purple, while the clear, colorless crystal is called white sapphire.

The process of manufacture of rubies is carried on with the oxyhydrogen blow-pipe, to whose intense heat the powdered alumina with its coloring oxides is subjected. Rubies have been thus produced weighing twelve to fifteen carats when cut. The average weight of the native Burmese ruby is about one-eighth of a carat. The sapphire and the so-called Oriental stones are prepared in the same manner, with the addition of proper coloring matter.

The process of making rubies uses an oxyhydrogen blowpipe, which subjects powdered alumina and its color oxides to intense heat. Rubies produced this way can weigh between twelve to fifteen carats once cut. The average weight of a natural Burmese ruby is about one-eighth of a carat. Sapphires and so-called Oriental stones are made in a similar way, with the addition of the appropriate coloring agents.

The emerald and opal have not emerged from the experimental stage, although Becquerel, a French chemist, is reported to have produced opals from solutions of silicates with high-tension electric currents.

The emerald and opal have not yet moved past the experimental phase, although French chemist Becquerel is said to have created opals from silicate solutions using high-voltage electric currents.

To be distinguished from synthetic gems are reconstructed stones, which (as yet only done with the ruby) are pieces of the natural stone fused together. They are very brittle.

To differentiate them from synthetic gems, reconstructed stones—currently only done with rubies—are made from pieces of natural stone that have been fused together. They are quite brittle.

The pearl is not produced synthetically, but many imitations exist. The Japanese produce them by fastening a piece of mother-of-pearl in the shells of the pearl-oyster and allowing it to remain there for a number of years.

The pearl isn’t made artificially, but there are many imitations out there. The Japanese create them by placing a piece of mother-of-pearl inside the shells of the pearl oyster and letting it stay there for several years.

The turquoise, a phosphate of aluminum colored with copper, is not synthetically produced, although various experiments with its manufacture have been made.

The turquoise, a phosphate of aluminum tinted with copper, is not created synthetically, although several attempts to produce it have been made.

Bull fight

Reproduced by permission of The Philadelphia Museum.

Reproduced by permission of The Philadelphia Museum.

Mazzantini Bull-fight

Mazzantini Bullfight

The last act in a bull fight, City of Mexico. The bull, tired out by the attacks of the picadores or pikemen, and banderilleros or dart men, whose banderillas or darts are seen planted in the bull’s shoulders, faces the matador, armed with the estoque or sword, and carrying the muleta or red flag in his left hand, and about to deliver the death stroke.

The final act in a bullfight, Mexico City. The bull, exhausted from the assaults of the picadores or pikemen, and banderilleros or dart men, with their banderillas or darts sticking out of the bull’s shoulders, confronts the matador, equipped with the estoque or sword, and holding the muleta or red flag in his left hand, ready to deliver the killing blow.

What is a Mexican Bull-Fight Like?

Bull-fights are among the favorite diversions of the Spaniards. They are usually held in an amphitheater having circular seats rising one above another, and are attended by vast crowds who eagerly pay for admission.

Bullfights are one of the favorite pastimes for Spaniards. They typically take place in an amphitheater with circular seating that rises tier by tier, and are attended by large crowds who are eager to pay for tickets.

The combatants, who make bull-fighting their profession, march into the arena in procession. They are of various kinds—the picadores, combatants on horseback, in the old Spanish knightly garb; the chulos and banderilleros, combatants on foot, in gay dresses, with colored cloaks or banners; and finally, the matador (the killer).

The fighters, who have made bullfighting their career, enter the arena in a procession. They come in different types—the picadores, mounted fighters in traditional Spanish knightly attire; the chulos and banderilleros, foot fighters dressed in colorful outfits with bright capes or flags; and finally, the matador (the killer).

As soon as the signal is given the bull is let into the arena. The picadores, who have stationed themselves near him, commence the attack with their lances, and the bull is thus goaded to fury. Sometimes a horse is wounded or killed (only old, worthless animals are thus employed), and the rider is obliged to run for his life. The chulos assist the horsemen by drawing the attention of the bull with their cloaks; and in case of danger they save themselves by leaping over the wooden fence which surrounds the arena. The banderilleros then come into play. They try to fasten on the bull their banderillas—barbed darts ornamented with colored paper, and often having squibs or crackers attached. If they succeed, the squibs are discharged and the bull races madly about the arena.

As soon as the signal is given, the bull is released into the arena. The picadores, who have positioned themselves nearby, begin their attack with their lances, provoking the bull into a frenzy. Sometimes a horse gets injured or killed (only old, worthless animals are used for this), and the rider must run for their life. The chulos help the horsemen by distracting the bull with their capes; if there’s danger, they save themselves by jumping over the wooden fence surrounding the arena. Then, the banderilleros come into action. They try to attach their banderillas—barbed darts decorated with colored paper, often with firecrackers attached. If they succeed, the firecrackers go off, and the bull charges wildly around the arena.

The matador or espada now comes in gravely with a naked sword and a red flag to decoy the bull with, and aims a fatal blow at the animal. The slaughtered bull is dragged away, and another is let out from the stall. Several bulls are so disposed of in a single day.

The matador or espada now enters solemnly with a bare sword and a red cape to lure the bull, aiming for a lethal strike. The dead bull is pulled away, and another one is released from the pen. Several bulls are taken down in one day.

What is the Difference between “Alternating” and “Direct” Current?

Strong currents of electricity are generated in the electric central stations and supplied to our homes, street lamps and so forth, in one of the two forms, either “alternating” or “direct.” While many of us know which kind is furnished to our homes, everyone does not always understand the difference between the two.

Strong electric currents are generated at power plants and supplied to our homes, streetlights, and more, in one of two forms: “alternating” or “direct.” While many of us know which type we use at home, not everyone understands the difference between the two.

The central station contains a number of powerful dynamo machines, driven usually by steam power. The positive and negative terminals of the dynamo are put in connection with the positive and negative main conductors which are to supply the district, and from these mains smaller conductors branch off to the houses or lamps. All these conductors are of copper, that metal when pure having seven times the conductivity of iron.

The central station has several powerful dynamo machines, typically powered by steam. The positive and negative terminals of the dynamo connect to the positive and negative main conductors that supply the area, and from these mains, smaller conductors branch off to the homes or lamps. All these conductors are made of copper, which, when pure, has seven times the conductivity of iron.

Different methods are in use for keeping the supply of electricity steady in spite of the varying demands made upon it. In some systems of distribution, instead of the two main conductors being one positive and the other negative, each is positive and negative alternately, the reversals taking place some hundreds of times per second. The currents are then said to be “alternating.” When such reversals do not take place, the currents are said to be “direct.”

Different methods are used to maintain a steady supply of electricity despite fluctuating demand. In some distribution systems, instead of having one conductor be positive and the other negative, each conductor alternates between positive and negative, reversing hundreds of times per second. These currents are referred to as "alternating." When these reversals do not occur, the currents are called "direct."

What was the “Court of Love”?

The “Court of Love” existed in what we call the chivalric period of the middle ages.

The “Court of Love” existed during what we now refer to as the chivalric era of the Middle Ages.

It was composed of knights, poets and ladies, who discussed and gave decisions on subtle questions of love and gallantry. The first of these courts was probably established in Provence about the twelfth century. They reached their highest splendor in France, under Charles VI, through the influence of his consort, Isabella of Bavaria, whose court was established in 1380. An attempted revival was made under Louis XIV by Cardinal Richelieu.

It was made up of knights, poets, and ladies who talked about and made decisions on intricate issues of love and chivalry. The first of these courts was likely founded in Provence around the twelfth century. They reached their peak in France during the reign of Charles VI, thanks to his wife, Isabella of Bavaria, whose court was established in 1380. An attempt to bring it back occurred under Louis XIV by Cardinal Richelieu.


The Story of the Addressograph[28]

If you were asked to enumerate the different kinds of clerical work performed in the modern business office, you would probably fail to mention the writing of names. Yet the writing and rewriting of names is as essential in most offices as the addition of figures or the dictation of correspondence.

If you were asked to list the different types of clerical work done in a modern business office, you might overlook the task of writing names. However, the writing and rewriting of names is just as crucial in most offices as adding numbers or dictating correspondence.

In fact, names represent the backbone of nearly every business or organization. There is the list of names of those people you sell to; the names of those people you want to sell to; the names of those people you buy from; the names of those people who owe you money; the names of those people to whom you owe money and the names of those people who work for you. Then, lodges, clubs, churches and other organizations must maintain lists of names of their members; and so the different kinds of lists go on ad infinitum.

In fact, names are the core of almost every business or organization. There’s the list of names of your customers; the names of potential customers; the names of your suppliers; the names of those who owe you money; the names of those you owe money to; and the names of your employees. Additionally, lodges, clubs, churches, and other organizations need to keep track of their members' names, and the different types of lists continue ad infinitum.

Now, in most offices, these names must be written and rewritten over and over again—often many times each month—on envelopes, price-lists, statements, checks, pay forms, ledger sheets, order forms, tags, labels, etc. And in many offices the writing of names is still a slow, tedious, drudging task—as the workers in those offices will testify.

Now, in most offices, these names have to be written and rewritten repeatedly—often many times each month—on envelopes, price lists, statements, checks, pay forms, ledger sheets, order forms, tags, labels, and so on. In many offices, writing names is still a slow, tedious, and monotonous task, as the workers in those offices can confirm.

The Birth of Mechanical Addressing.

But in one office this monotonous task of writing and rewriting the same names over and over again became such a hardship that the man who had to do it, thinking twenty-five years ahead of his time, had a vision of performing such work mechanically. That vision was the forerunner of the Addressograph.

But in one office, the dull task of writing and rewriting the same names over and over again became such a burden that the man responsible for it, thinking twenty-five years into the future, imagined doing this work mechanically. That vision was the precursor to the Addressograph.

In the early 90’s, Mr. Joseph S. Duncan was manager of a little flour and grist mill in Iowa. The requirements of his business necessitated the daily addressing of 100 quotation cards. Those were the days of pen and ink and the imperfectly developed typewriter. Mr. Duncan’s office was small. He was the sole worker in that office—and as the typewriter was still a curiosity in that section of the country, Mr. Duncan was obliged to depend upon pen and ink in addressing his daily price cards. This routine task wasted a great deal of his valuable time each day. In an effort to finish the work quickly, so that he could devote his attention to more important matters, Mr. Duncan found that he was frequently sacrificing accuracy for speed. Result—his concern often suffered considerable loss of profit because his quotation cards did not reach the people for whom they were intended. Finally, becoming disgusted with inefficient and inaccurate pen and ink addressing methods, Mr. Duncan made a trip to Chicago for the purpose of purchasing a machine for addressing his price cards. But, on visiting the leading stationery and office equipment stores, he was told there was no such machine. He returned to his office resigned to the task of addressing his 100 daily quotation cards by pen and ink. But the drudgery and monotony of this work would not down in his mind. The mistakes and omissions made in addressing these price cards became no less frequent. Finally, because Mr. Duncan could no longer be reconciled to the drudgery, inaccuracy and expense of hand addressing, he determined to build for himself a machine that would lift from his shoulders this monotonous task.

In the early 90s, Mr. Joseph S. Duncan managed a small flour and grain mill in Iowa. His business required him to deal with 100 quotation cards every day. Back then, it was all about pen and ink and the still-developing typewriter. Mr. Duncan's office was small, and he was the only one working there. Since the typewriter was still pretty rare in that area, he had to rely on pen and ink to write out his daily price cards. This routine took up a lot of his valuable time each day. Trying to speed up the process so he could focus on more important tasks, Mr. Duncan found himself often sacrificing accuracy for speed. As a result, his business frequently lost profits because the quotation cards didn't reach the intended recipients. Frustrated with the inefficiency and inaccuracies of using pen and ink, Mr. Duncan traveled to Chicago to buy a machine to address his price cards. However, when he visited the top stationery and office supply stores, he was told there was no such machine available. He returned to his office resigned to writing out his 100 daily quotation cards by hand. But he couldn't shake off the drudgery and monotony of the task. The mistakes and omissions in the cards continued to happen too often. Ultimately, unable to accept the tediousness, inaccuracy, and cost of hand-addressing, Mr. Duncan decided to build a machine that would take this boring task off his hands.

Builds First Addressograph.

Primitive addressograph

The First Addressograph

The First Addressograph

Mr. Duncan invented and built his first addressing machine in 1892. He called it the “Addressograph”—a coined word meaning “to write addresses.” Although[365] Mr. Duncan appreciated the saving of time and money and increase in accuracy which his little invention would surely create in the writing of names and addresses, he did not at first realize the great place his remarkable invention was destined to take in the commercial world as a “business energizer” and simplifier of routine work.

Mr. Duncan invented and built his first addressing machine in 1892. He named it the “Addressograph”—a made-up word meaning “to write addresses.” Although[365] Mr. Duncan recognized the time and cost savings and the boost in accuracy his invention would bring to writing names and addresses, he initially didn’t realize the significant role his remarkable invention was destined to play in the commercial world as a “business energizer” and simplifier of routine tasks.

Like the first steam engine, telephone or automobile, the first addressograph was crudely simple and of course presented an uncouth mechanical appearance. Mr. Duncan experimented by gluing the rubber portion of a number of hand stamps to a wooden drum. This drum was placed on an operating shaft in the addressograph, so that after the printing of one name and address, the drum revolved so that the next name and address came into printing position. The type impressions thus obtained were fairly readable. But Mr. Duncan soon realized that the idea of gluing the type permanently to a wooden drum was unpractical. Only a few addresses could be placed around the drum and the method of gluing them permanently into place made it practically impossible to make corrections when changes in address occurred, or to add new names as occasion demanded.

Like the first steam engine, telephone, or car, the first addressograph was quite simple and had a rough mechanical look. Mr. Duncan experimented by attaching the rubber part of some hand stamps to a wooden drum. This drum was mounted on a shaft in the addressograph, so after printing one name and address, the drum would rotate to bring the next name and address into position for printing. The type impressions produced were fairly readable. However, Mr. Duncan soon realized that permanently gluing the type to a wooden drum wasn't practical. Only a few addresses could fit around the drum, and the method of gluing them made it nearly impossible to correct mistakes when addresses changed or to add new names as needed.

Greater flexibility was needed. So Mr. Duncan designed and built what is now known as the first chain addressograph. Individual rubber type characters were pushed into metal type holders with a pair of tweezers. These type holders were then ingeniously linked together in the form of an endless chain. These chains were placed over a revolving metal drum, and as each separate name and address came to the printing point of the addressograph, the operator pushed down on a vertical stamper rod which pushed the envelope, or whatever form was to be addressed, against the rubber type which was inked just before reaching the printing point. Here, at last, was a practical addressing machine which enabled the user to accurately print names and addresses—typewriter style—ten times faster than was possible by any other method, and, quite as important, to make changes and additions to the list.

Greater flexibility was needed. So Mr. Duncan designed and built what is now known as the first chain addressograph. Individual rubber type characters were pushed into metal type holders with a pair of tweezers. These type holders were then cleverly linked together to form an endless chain. The chains were placed over a revolving metal drum, and as each separate name and address came to the printing point of the addressograph, the operator pushed down on a vertical stamper rod, which pressed the envelope, or whatever form was being addressed, against the rubber type that was inked just before reaching the printing point. Finally, there was a practical addressing machine that allowed users to accurately print names and addresses—like a typewriter—ten times faster than any other method and, just as importantly, to make changes and additions to the list.

The Beginning of a Great Industry.

By this time, Mr. Duncan had moved his base of operations from Iowa to Chicago. So well was his first practical model of the addressograph received by Chicago business men that he sold the first half-dozen manufactured within a short time. Enthused with his success, Mr. Duncan decided to enter into the manufacture and sale of addressographs on as extensive a basis as the demand for his invention warranted. But to do this it was necessary for him to secure more capital. Consequently, he interested Mr. J. B. Hall—a Chicago business man—in his project, and in January, 1896, Mr. Duncan and Mr. Hall formed a partnership and called it the “Addressograph Company.”

By this time, Mr. Duncan had relocated his operations from Iowa to Chicago. The Chicago business community received his first practical model of the addressograph so well that he quickly sold the first six units. Excited by his success, Mr. Duncan decided to expand the production and sale of addressographs to meet the growing demand for his invention. However, to achieve this, he needed to secure additional capital. As a result, he engaged Mr. J. B. Hall—a Chicago businessman—in his venture, and in January 1896, Mr. Duncan and Mr. Hall formed a partnership called the “Addressograph Company.”

Mr. Hall’s first step was to find out what the leading business men of his time thought of the addressograph. So he made a trip to New York City—taking with him one of the little hand-operated chain addressographs. Here, Mr. Hall called upon Henry Clews, J. Pierpont Morgan and other prominent business men. He also visited the offices of the large public service and insurance companies. In every case, Mr. Hall was courteously received, but after demonstrating the addressograph was told that while it was interesting and a step in the right direction, it was still in too primitive a state to prove of any great value in addressing a large list of names.

Mr. Hall’s first step was to see what the top business leaders of his time thought about the addressograph. So he traveled to New York City, bringing one of the small hand-operated chain addressographs with him. While there, Mr. Hall met with Henry Clews, J. Pierpont Morgan, and other influential business figures. He also visited the offices of large public service and insurance companies. In every instance, Mr. Hall received a polite welcome, but after demonstrating the addressograph, he was told that while it was interesting and a step in the right direction, it was still too basic to be really useful for addressing a large list of names.

Answering Demand for Greater Speed.

Naturally, Mr. Hall’s first thought on his return to Chicago was to induce Mr. Duncan to build a larger model, capable of greater speed and greater output. Acting upon Mr. Hall’s suggestion, Mr. Duncan, in a short time, perfected a larger chain addressograph, operated by foot-lever and embodying several important improvements. As the Addressograph Company was maintaining at that time only a small sales office, a contract was let to the Blackman Machine Company, of Chicago, to build fifteen of these new foot-lever chain addressographs. And it was this new model which caused the addressograph to take its place in the business world as one of the leading office appliances. Many of these new chain addressographs were sold. Having formerly been engaged in the public service field, Mr. Hall was quick to realize the advantages which mechanical addressing offered to gas, electric light, water and telephone companies. As a result, the majority of the first addressograph sales were made to these lines of business.

Naturally, Mr. Hall’s first thought when he returned to Chicago was to convince Mr. Duncan to create a larger model that could achieve greater speed and output. Acting on Mr. Hall’s suggestion, Mr. Duncan quickly developed a larger chain addressograph, operated by a foot lever and featuring several important improvements. Since the Addressograph Company only had a small sales office at that time, they contracted the Blackman Machine Company in Chicago to build fifteen of these new foot-lever chain addressographs. This new model helped the addressograph establish itself as one of the leading office appliances in the business world. Many of these new chain addressographs were sold. Having previously worked in the public service sector, Mr. Hall quickly recognized the benefits that mechanical addressing provided to gas, electric light, water, and telephone companies. Consequently, the majority of the initial addressograph sales were made to these types of businesses.

Foot-operated addressograph

Rubber Chain Addressograph Operated by Foot Lever and Mounted in Wood Cabinet

Rubber Chain Addressograph Operated by Foot Pedal and Mounted in Wooden Cabinet

With the constantly increasing use of the addressograph, suggestions for improvement and further development were freely offered by addressograph customers and just as liberally entertained by Mr. Duncan. As a result of these suggestions, another important advance took place in addressograph development. A customer, after writing words of praise about his addressograph, suggested that if some means could be arrived at to avoid the necessity of setting and resetting the individual pieces of rubber type, a great saving in time and money could be accomplished in making changes and additions to a list of names.

With the constantly growing use of the addressograph, customers enthusiastically provided suggestions for improvement and further development, which Mr. Duncan readily considered. As a result of these suggestions, another significant breakthrough occurred in addressograph development. One customer, after expressing his appreciation for his addressograph, suggested that if a way could be found to eliminate the need to set and reset the individual pieces of rubber type, it would save a lot of time and money when making changes and additions to a list of names.

Invents Embossed Metal Address Plate.

After considerable thought, Mr. Duncan hit upon the plan of embossing, typewriter style, characters upon a metal plate. To do this, it was necessary for him to invent and perfect the Graphotype—a machine which writes names and addresses on metal plates almost as quickly as the same data can be written on paper with the typewriter. The first embossed metal plates were linked together in the form of an endless chain, similar to the rubber type plates. A new addressograph was perfected for printing impressions from these embossed metal plates. It was called the No. 2 Chain Addressograph.

After giving it a lot of thought, Mr. Duncan came up with the idea of embossing letters onto a metal plate using a typewriter style. To make this happen, he had to invent and perfect the Graphotype—a machine that writes names and addresses on metal plates almost as fast as you can write the same information on paper with a typewriter. The first embossed metal plates were connected together like an endless chain, similar to rubber type plates. A new addressograph was created to print impressions from these embossed metal plates, and it was called the No. 2 Chain Addressograph.

The Addressograph Company now had two models to sell. But, owing to the fact that the rubber chain addressograph permitted users to make changes and additions in their own offices, a greater number of machines of this model were sold than of the metal chain addressograph; because, with the latter model, it was necessary for the customer to send to Chicago to have his new metal links embossed with the graphotype for the changes and additions of his list.

The Addressograph Company now had two models to sell. However, because the rubber chain addressograph allowed users to make changes and additions in their own offices, more machines of this model were sold compared to the metal chain addressograph. With the latter model, customers had to send to Chicago to get their new metal links embossed with the graphotype for any changes and additions to their list.

By this time, the Addressograph Company had established itself in its own factory in Chicago. Branch offices had also been opened in New York, Philadelphia, Boston and other principal points, and out of these offices was traveling a small but enthusiastic group of salesmen. Many firms, large and small, throughout the country were using and recommending the chain addressograph. And, crude as that model seems now, it was proving a wonderful time and labor saver in the offices in which it was used—and paying back its cost many times each year because of[367] the fact that it accurately printed names and addresses ten times faster than was possible to write such data by pen or typewriter.

By this time, the Addressograph Company had set up its own factory in Chicago. Branch offices had also been opened in New York, Philadelphia, Boston, and other major cities, with a small but enthusiastic group of salespeople traveling out from these locations. Many businesses, big and small, across the country were using and recommending the chain addressograph. And while that model might seem outdated now, it was a fantastic time and labor saver for the offices that used it—and it paid for itself many times each year because it printed names and addresses ten times faster than writing them by hand or typing.

A Card Index that Addresses Itself.

As the use of the addressograph increased, Mr. Duncan and Mr. Hall realized the need of a more efficient way of making changes and additions to the list of names. It was important that individual names be located and removed from the list more quickly than was possible with the chain addressograph. Demand for improvement along this line was stimulated by the loose-leaf and card index wave which was just then beginning to sweep the country. And Mr. Duncan, taking the card index idea as a basis, designed what he called the Model “A” or Rubber Card Index Addressograph. Instead of the separate plates being linked together in the form of a chain, they were inserted into a tin holder—called the frame—which closely resembled in appearance a 3 x 5 paper file card. In addition to carrying a printing plate, this frame also carried a paper card bearing a proof of its respective printing plate. In this complete form, these address plates were filed in steel filing drawers like ordinary paper cards. About every fifteenth address plate in a drawer was equipped with a vertical, subdividing tab—numerical, alphabetical or geographical as the case might require. Each filing drawer carried a printed label showing the contents of the drawer—and by means of these complete card index features it proved a simple matter to locate and remove individual names when making revisions to the list; and, in addition, these features afforded all of the advantages of a perfect reference file, as the paper proof card could be provided with a printed form for retaining memoranda.

As the use of the addressograph grew, Mr. Duncan and Mr. Hall recognized the need for a more efficient method to make changes and additions to the name list. It was essential to find and remove individual names more quickly than was possible with the chain addressograph. The demand for improvement in this area was fueled by the rise of loose-leaf and card index systems that were just starting to gain popularity across the country. Mr. Duncan used the card index concept as inspiration and designed what he called the Model “A” or Rubber Card Index Addressograph. Instead of having separate plates linked together in a chain, they were inserted into a tin holder—referred to as the frame—that closely resembled a 3 x 5 paper file card. In addition to holding a printing plate, this frame also had a paper card showing proof of its respective printing plate. In this complete setup, the address plates were filed in steel filing drawers like regular paper cards. About every fifteenth address plate in a drawer was equipped with a vertical, subdividing tab—numerical, alphabetical, or geographical, depending on what was needed. Each filing drawer had a printed label indicating its contents—making it easy to locate and remove individual names during revisions; in addition, these features provided all the benefits of an ideal reference file, as the paper proof card could include a printed form for keeping notes.

Sample index address plate

Rubber Card Index Address Plate

Rubber Card Index Address Label

Of course, a new addressograph was necessary to handle this card index improvement. And in the Model “A” Addressograph, we find the basic principle of the addressograph of today. A drawerful of plates is emptied into the magazine. The empty filing drawer is placed beneath the addressograph so that after addressing the address plates fall back into the original drawer in their original card index order.

Of course, a new addressograph was needed to manage this card index upgrade. With the Model “A” Addressograph, we see the fundamental design of today’s addressograph. A drawer full of plates is loaded into the magazine. The empty filing drawer is positioned below the addressograph so that after the addressing, the address plates fall back into the original drawer in their original card index order.

Another sample index address plate

Metal Card Index Address Plate

Metal Card Index Address Plate

Electric Motor Increases Speed.

Not only was it necessary to meet the demand for card index conveniences, but it was also important to equip the Model “A” Addressograph with an electric motor for increasing its speed of operation and insuring a greater output. As was to be expected, the card index and electrically operated features caused thousands of concerns, large and small, to adopt the addressograph. Large mercantile houses, addressing thousands of names—who had formerly held aloof from the addressograph because of its limited advantages for making changes and additions—now placed their orders with instructions to rush delivery. With business houses all over the country rapidly changing from bound books to loose-leaf card[368] index records, the demand for chain addressograph models diminished and more and more orders were received for the rubber card index addressographs. Business men, generally, were now taking a real interest in mechanical addressing and the saving which the addressograph made possible in their offices. This interest was increased materially with the growth of mail-order businesses and the constantly increasing use of direct-by-mail advertising by business concerns, large and small. Firms having mailing lists were increasing them. Those firms which had not previously used direct-by-mail advertising were now coming to realize the many advantages of that modern selling short-cut and were compiling large lists of names. The rubber card index addressograph had by now proved itself a wonderful time and labor saver in addressing and maintaining lists of names of average size. But, with the advent of large lists, the high cost of rubber type presented a serious objection to many firms regarding the installation of the addressograph. Furthermore, large lists of names were subject to many changes and additions—and in this connection, setting up the address plates in rubber type proved quite slow and expensive. So, to bring the addressograph abreast of modern conditions, Mr. Duncan combined the card index filing idea with the embossed metal plate which he had previously worked out for use with the chain addressograph. With the coming of the metal card index addressograph and the modern graphotype for making the metal address plates, the addressing machine business was “revolutionized,” as Mr. Duncan put it. With the graphotype, address plates for changes and additions could be made at almost typewriter speed. The card index address plate required less filing space than was true of the rubber card index address plate, printed cleaner impressions and from every standpoint was superior to the rubber type system. In order that customers could make their changes and additions right in their office, the graphotype was further developed and furnished in two models, one operated by motor, the other by hand.

It was not only necessary to meet the demand for card index conveniences, but it was also important to equip the Model “A” Addressograph with an electric motor to increase its speed and ensure greater output. As expected, the card index and electric features led thousands of businesses, big and small, to adopt the addressograph. Large retailers, addressing thousands of names—who had previously stayed away from the addressograph due to its limited advantages for making changes and additions—now placed orders with requests for expedited delivery. With businesses nationwide quickly transitioning from bound books to loose-leaf card index records, demand for chain addressograph models decreased and more orders came in for the rubber card index addressographs. Businesspeople were now genuinely interested in mechanical addressing and the savings the addressograph made possible in their offices. This interest grew significantly with the rise of mail-order businesses and the increasing use of direct mail advertising by companies, both large and small. Firms with mailing lists were expanding them. Those that hadn’t used direct mail advertising before were starting to see the many benefits of this modern selling shortcut and were compiling extensive lists of names. The rubber card index addressograph had by now proven to be a fantastic time and labor saver for addressing and maintaining average-sized name lists. However, with the emergence of large lists, the high cost of rubber type posed a serious drawback for many firms considering the addressograph. Additionally, large name lists were subject to frequent changes and additions, and setting up address plates in rubber type turned out to be quite slow and costly. To modernize the addressograph, Mr. Duncan combined the card index filing concept with the embossed metal plate he had previously developed for the chain addressograph. With the introduction of the metal card index addressograph and the modern graphotype for creating the metal address plates, the addressing machine business was "revolutionized," as Mr. Duncan described it. With the graphotype, address plates for changes and additions could be produced at nearly typewriter speed. The card index address plate required less filing space compared to the rubber card index address plate, produced cleaner impressions, and from every angle was superior to the rubber type system. To enable customers to make their changes and additions right in their offices, the graphotype was further developed and offered in two models, one powered by a motor and the other operated by hand.

Electric Graphotype Manual Grpahotype
Electric Graphotype that embosses typewriter-style characters on metal address plates Hand Graphotype that embosses typewriter-style characters on metal address plates.

Attachments Increase Utility of Addressograph.

The first addressographs were intended for printing names and addresses consecutively on envelopes and post cards. And so much time was saved on this one application that customers soon began applying it to other kinds of work in their offices. To do this effectively, it was necessary for Mr. Duncan to work out additional parts called “attachments” which permitted the addressing, listing and imprinting of names and other data on office forms of every nature. To illustrate: the dating attachment enabled users to apply the addressograph to their statement work. With this attachment—which can quickly be thrown in or out of operation—the current date is printed at the head of a statement simultaneously with the printing of the name and address. Further, to use the addressograph effectively for statement work, it was necessary to devise a skipping attachment—manipulated by the operator’s knee—permitting him to skip the printing of impressions from address plates of those customers who had paid their accounts. By working out the listing attachment, Mr. Duncan made it possible for users to list names in one or more vertical columns on pay sheets, drivers’ route sheets, dividend and trial balance sheets. This attachment automatically feeds the paper and spaces the proper distances between the printing of each address. Then came the electric bell signal and automatic selector attachments. Users of classified lists of names were enabled by these attachments to place tabs in sockets at the top and back of the address plates to indicate the different classifications on the list, such as “Buying Seasons,” “Kinds of Products Wanted,” “Territories,” “Expired Dates,” etc., and by means of these attachments, automatically select for addressing certain address plates, skipping the addressing of others.

The first addressographs were designed to print names and addresses one after another on envelopes and postcards. This method saved so much time that customers quickly started using it for other tasks in their offices. To make this work well, Mr. Duncan had to develop extra parts called “attachments,” which allowed users to address, list, and print names and other information on various office forms. For example, the dating attachment enabled users to apply the addressograph to their statements. With this attachment—easily added or removed—the current date is printed at the top of a statement at the same time as the name and address. Additionally, to effectively use the addressograph for statements, a skipping attachment was created—controlled by the operator’s knee—that allowed the operator to skip printing for customers who had settled their accounts. By developing the listing attachment, Mr. Duncan made it possible for users to list names in one or more vertical columns on pay sheets, drivers’ route sheets, dividend sheets, and trial balance sheets. This attachment automatically feeds the paper and spaces the printing of each address correctly. Next came the electric bell signal and automatic selector attachments. Users of categorized name lists could utilize these attachments to place tabs in sockets at the top and back of the address plates to indicate different categories like “Buying Seasons,” “Kinds of Products Wanted,” “Territories,” “Expired Dates,” etc. These attachments allowed for the automatic selection of certain address plates for printing, while skipping others.

Listing attachment
Auto Listing Attachment
High speed addressograph Envelope feeder
High-Speed Automatic Feed Addressograph. Capacity: 7,500 Addressed Envelopes per Hour Automatic Envelope Feed Addressograph. Speed: 5,000 addressed envelopes per hour.

As the various uses for the addressograph increased, so the demand for different special attachments increased, until today, the addressograph addresses, lists and imprints names, addresses and other data upon every office form. The history of the addressograph has been one of constant development. With the growth of large lists, the demand for greater speed in addressing was answered by automatic feed addressographs. The Automatic No. 1 Addressograph was designed to automatically feed and address envelopes and cards at the rate of 4,000 to 5,000 an hour. In the Automatic No. 3 Addressograph we find the highest development of the system. This machine automatically feeds and addresses public service bills, insurance premium notices and receipts, cards, envelopes, circulars, etc., at the great speed of 6,000 to 8,000 an hour. The wrapper addressograph answered the demand of publishers for great speed and 100 per cent accuracy. This model of the addressograph automatically feeds wrappers from a roll and in addition to printing the name and address exact typewriter style, also prints the name of the publication and postal permit from electrotypes, indicates mail routes on the back of the wrappers, separates into a separate drawer the address plates of those people whose subscriptions have expired, and cuts the wrapper to the proper size—all at the speed of 7,500 per hour.

As the various uses for the addressograph grew, so did the need for different special attachments, until now, the addressograph can address, list, and print names, addresses, and other information on every office form. The history of the addressograph has been one of constant improvement. With the increase in large lists, the need for faster addressing was met with automatic feed addressographs. The Automatic No. 1 Addressograph was designed to automatically feed and address envelopes and cards at a speed of 4,000 to 5,000 per hour. In the Automatic No. 3 Addressograph, we see the highest advancement of the system. This machine automatically feeds and addresses public service bills, insurance premium notices, receipts, cards, envelopes, circulars, and more, at an impressive speed of 6,000 to 8,000 an hour. The wrapper addressograph fulfilled publishers' demands for high speed and 100 percent accuracy. This model automatically feeds wrappers from a roll and, in addition to printing the name and address in an exact typewriter style, also prints the name of the publication and postal permit from electrotypes, indicates mail routes on the back of the wrappers, sorts the address plates of those whose subscriptions have expired into a separate drawer, and cuts the wrapper to the right size—all at a speed of 7,500 per hour.

Small Users not Overlooked.

But, while Mr. Duncan and his associates have given every attention to the needs of users of large lists of names, he has not overlooked the lodge secretaries and other users of small lists of names. In the hand addressograph, which sells for as low as $27, he has worked out three practical models having an average speed of from 750 to 1,500 names and addresses an hour. Thousands of these little machines are in daily use and, like the larger models of the addressograph, are driving drudgery out of the office—freeing thousands of hands from the monotonous, laborious task of writing names and addresses by pen and ink—in short, elevating the position of the office worker far above that of a mere automaton and making it possible for him to earn more money and enjoy a happier existence by doing brain work instead of manual labor.

But while Mr. Duncan and his team have focused on the needs of users with large lists of names, he hasn't forgotten about lodge secretaries and others who work with smaller lists. With the hand addressograph, which starts at just $27, he has developed three practical models that can process between 750 and 1,500 names and addresses an hour. Thousands of these compact machines are used daily and, like the larger addressograph models, are eliminating tedious work in the office—liberating countless people from the repetitive, labor-intensive job of writing names and addresses by hand—in short, raising the status of office workers well above that of mere automatons and allowing them to earn more and lead happier lives by engaging in intellectual work instead of manual tasks.

Wrapper feed
Wrapper Feed Addressograph. Speed: 6,000 to 8,000
Addressed wrappers per hour.
Manual addressograph Tab on address plate
Hand Addressograph (Prints using a Ribbon). Speed: 1,000 to 1,500 typed addresses per hour. Demonstrating how Tabs are Added to the Back of the Address Plate for Indexing and Classifying Lists

The Addressograph—Its Place in Business.

Twenty-five years’ use of the addressograph in over 300 different lines of business—manufacturers, wholesalers and dealers, insurance companies, public service companies, government departments, associations, clubs, churches, lodges, hotels and schools, laundries, commission merchants, publishers, railroad and steamship companies—in truth, every business, large and small, where a list of names is frequently addressed—have proved the utter folly of slow, tiring hands attempting to compete with swift, untiring wheels. Wherever names are written, there you will usually find the addressograph in use, saving time and money, guaranteeing 100 per cent accuracy and insuring maximum efficiency. There are many different models—some operated by hand or foot-lever, others by electric motor; some are entirely automatic. So, no matter how many names and addresses are written—fifty or a million—the addressograph, like the telephone or typewriter, has come to be recognized as a modern business necessity.

For twenty-five years, the addressograph has been used in over 300 different types of businesses—manufacturers, wholesalers, dealers, insurance companies, public service companies, government departments, associations, clubs, churches, lodges, hotels, schools, laundries, commission merchants, publishers, and railroad and steamship companies. In fact, it has proven to be essential in every business, large and small, where names need to be addressed frequently. The experience shows that it's pointless for slow, tiring hands to try to compete with fast, tireless machines. Wherever names are written, you’ll likely find the addressograph in action, saving time and money, ensuring 100% accuracy, and providing maximum efficiency. There are many different models—some are operated by hand or foot pedal, while others use an electric motor; some are fully automatic. Regardless of whether you're dealing with fifty names or a million, the addressograph, much like the telephone or typewriter, has become a modern business essential.


What is “Dry Farming”?

Dry farming is a method which has been recently developed and which is coming into even wider use. The United States Department of Agriculture, through its experiment stations, has made a careful study of the conditions, possibilities and limitations of the practice, and the following is a brief abstract of the results:

Dry farming is a technique that has been newly developed and is gaining popularity. The United States Department of Agriculture, through its research stations, has thoroughly examined the conditions, potential, and limitations of this practice, and here’s a brief summary of the findings:

In defining the term dry farming it is explained that the practice includes (1) deep plowing before the rainy season sets in, in order to provide in the soil a capacious water storage reservoir and an ample space for root development; (2) light, deep, even seeding or planting in a well-prepared, moist soil; (3) frequent, thorough, level cultivation before as well as after sowing or planting; (4) the use of seed bred and selected for the conditions prevailing; (5) the use of machinery of large capacity; (6) the adoption of methods for the concentration of crops.

In defining dry farming, it is explained that the practice includes (1) deep plowing before the rainy season starts to create a large water storage area in the soil and enough space for roots to grow; (2) light, deep, even seeding or planting in well-prepared, moist soil; (3) frequent, thorough, and even cultivation both before and after sowing or planting; (4) using seeds that have been bred and selected for the existing conditions; (5) using large-capacity machinery; (6) adopting methods to concentrate crops.

Crops must be selected or developed that will fit the environment, and there is ample field for investigation in the improvement and development of crops suitable to dry lands. Wheat stands at the head among cereal crops. The durum or macaroni wheats do especially well; but other varieties are also grown, as are oats, rye, barley and spelt. The millets are among the best paying dry-farming crops. There are few legumes that have shown value on dry lands, but peas, beans and alfalfa are the most promising of development. Vegetables and both shade and fruit trees are being grown in districts where dry farming is practiced.

Crops need to be chosen or developed to suit the environment, and there is plenty of opportunity for research into improving and creating crops that thrive in dry lands. Wheat leads the way among cereal crops. Durum or macaroni wheat performs particularly well, but other varieties are also cultivated, as well as oats, rye, barley, and spelt. Millets are some of the most profitable dry-farming crops. There are few legumes that have proven valuable in dry lands, but peas, beans, and alfalfa show the most promise for development. Vegetables and both shade trees and fruit trees are being grown in areas where dry farming is practiced.

Fall seeding of cereals, wherever the conditions will permit, is preferable to spring seeding, and it is important to retain the snow upon the land, especially in sections where it forms the chief part of the total precipitation. The snowfall may be retained by leaving the ground rough after the late fall plowing, by throwing up borders across the field at right angles with the prevailing winds, or by planting hedge rows or shrubbery across the field at short intervals. Usually less seed should be planted per acre under dry-farming conditions than is used in humid sections. The less precipitation, the smaller should be the amount of seed planted.

Fall seeding of cereals, whenever conditions allow, is better than spring seeding, and it's important to keep the snow on the ground, especially in areas where it makes up most of the total precipitation. You can keep the snowfall by leaving the ground uneven after late fall plowing, creating barriers across the field at right angles to the prevailing winds, or by planting hedge rows or shrubs across the field at short intervals. Generally, you should plant less seed per acre in dry-farming conditions than you would in wetter areas. The less precipitation there is, the smaller the amount of seed you should plant.

What is a “Drying Machine” Like?

This is a machine used in bleaching, dyeing and laundry establishments, consisting of two concentric drums or cylinders, one within the other, open at the top, and having the inner cylinder perforated at its side with numerous small holes. The goods to be dried are placed within the inner cylinder, and the machine is then made to rotate with great velocity, when, by the action of centrifugal force, the water escapes through the holes in the side.

This is a machine used in bleaching, dyeing, and laundry facilities, made up of two concentric drums or cylinders, one inside the other, open at the top, with the inner cylinder having several small holes on its side. The items that need to be dried are placed inside the inner cylinder, and then the machine is made to spin quickly, allowing centrifugal force to push the water out through the holes in the side.

New York Stock Exchange trading floor

Copyright by Brown Bros.

Copyright by Brown Bros.

New York Stock Exchange

NYSE

This is the only photograph ever made of the interior of the New York Stock Exchange, the financial heart of the country. Each stock listed is allotted to one of the posts seen on the floor, which, during a panic, become the scene of the wildest excitement. The exchange is connected by private telegraph wires and “ticker” wires with every important financial center.

This is the only photo ever taken of the interior of the New York Stock Exchange, the financial hub of the country. Each stock listed is assigned to one of the posts on the floor, which, during a panic, become the site of the most intense excitement. The exchange is linked by private telegraph wires and “ticker” wires to every major financial center.

How does the New York Stock Exchange Operate?

The New York Stock Exchange is typical of most American stock exchanges, the leading ones of which are located in Boston, Pittsburgh, Philadelphia, Chicago, Baltimore, Cleveland, Cincinnati, New Orleans, Salt Lake City, Denver, San Francisco and St. Louis. American stock exchanges differ somewhat in their operation from the foreign stock exchanges, the principal ones of which are those of London, Paris, Berlin, Amsterdam, Antwerp, Brussels, Vienna and Petrograd.

The New York Stock Exchange is typical of most American stock exchanges, the major ones being in Boston, Pittsburgh, Philadelphia, Chicago, Baltimore, Cleveland, Cincinnati, New Orleans, Salt Lake City, Denver, San Francisco, and St. Louis. American stock exchanges function a bit differently than foreign stock exchanges, the main ones being in London, Paris, Berlin, Amsterdam, Antwerp, Brussels, Vienna, and Petrograd.

A stock exchange is really an organization of professional brokers, which conducts speculation and investment in securities, the paper representatives of transportation, industrial, mining, commercial and other properties. On the American stock exchanges one broker may specialize in the shares of the Union Pacific Railroad, for instance, another in those of the United States Steel Corporation, and so on. Some brokers deal particularly in “odd lots”—blocks of less than one hundred shares—and some members, called “room traders,” speculate entirely for their own account and do no commission business for customers. The commission charged for buying or selling is twelve and a half cents a share, so that on the usual order of one hundred shares, the broker receives twelve dollars and a half.

A stock exchange is essentially a group of professional brokers who engage in speculation and investment in securities, which are basically paper representations of various assets like transportation, industrial, mining, and commercial properties. On American stock exchanges, one broker might focus on shares of the Union Pacific Railroad, while another specializes in United States Steel Corporation shares, and so on. Some brokers specifically handle “odd lots”—which are blocks of fewer than a hundred shares—while others, known as “room traders,” trade exclusively for themselves and don’t conduct commission business for clients. The commission for buying or selling is twelve and a half cents per share, meaning that on a typical order of one hundred shares, the broker earns twelve dollars and fifty cents.

The business of buying and selling shares is done in a large room known as the “floor.” Scattered over the floor are a large number of high posts. Each post bears the name of the stock or stocks which may be traded in at that post. This provision is to bring buyers and sellers in any security together as quickly as possible. A broker desiring to buy shares of a certain stock will go to the part allotted to that stock and call out its name with the number of shares wished and the price he will pay. This is his bid. Other brokers may offer the stock to him at a slightly higher price, or his bid may be accepted at once. As soon as a price is agreed on, each broker—the buyer and the seller—makes a memorandum of the transaction, which is reported to the offices at once by telephone. Meanwhile the broker also hands another memorandum of the transaction to an errand boy, who takes the memorandum at once to the telegraph operator, who in turn sends it out onto the little instrument called the “ticker.”

The business of buying and selling shares takes place in a large room known as the “floor.” Scattered throughout the floor are many high posts, each labeled with the name of the stock or stocks that can be traded at that post. This setup is designed to connect buyers and sellers of any security as quickly as possible. A broker wanting to buy shares of a specific stock will go to the designated area for that stock and call out its name along with the number of shares they want and the price they’re willing to pay. This is their bid. Other brokers may offer the stock at a slightly higher price, or the initial bid might be accepted right away. Once a price is agreed upon, both brokers—the buyer and the seller—make a record of the transaction, which is immediately reported to the offices by phone. At the same time, the broker gives another record of the transaction to an errand boy, who quickly takes it to the telegraph operator, who then sends it out via the small device known as the “ticker.”

Transactions on the New York Stock Exchange may be made in three different ways: “Cash,” “regular” or on a “limited option” to buyer and seller as to the time of delivery or acceptance. “Cash” means that stock bought in this manner is taken up and paid for the same day; “regular” transactions mean that the stock bought in this way must be taken up and paid for by a quarter past two o’clock of the following afternoon.

Transactions on the New York Stock Exchange can be completed in three different ways: “Cash,” “regular,” or with a “limited option” for the buyer and seller regarding the timing of delivery or acceptance. “Cash” means that the stock purchased this way is taken and paid for on the same day; “regular” transactions mean that the stock bought this way must be accepted and paid for by 2:15 PM the next day.

Upon the outbreak of the European war, panic ensued among holders of securities, and the stock exchanges of the world were closed to prevent the selling of stocks at prices which would have brought ruin to banks and other financial houses. Practically none of them were opened until December, 1914, and then only under severe restrictions which were held in force until confidence had returned.

Upon the outbreak of the European war, panic broke out among investors, and stock exchanges around the world were closed to stop the selling of stocks at prices that could have led to the collapse of banks and other financial institutions. Almost none of them reopened until December 1914, and then only with strict limitations that remained in place until confidence was restored.

How did the Term “Cowboys” Originate?

The term “cowboys” was first used during the American Revolution. It was applied to a band of Tories who infested the neutral ground of Westchester County, New York, stealing cattle from both parties and doing other mischief.

The term “cowboys” was first used during the American Revolution. It was applied to a group of Tories who roamed the neutral ground of Westchester County, New York, stealing cattle from both sides and causing other trouble.

It has been used of recent years to designate the skilled horsemen who have charge of the cattle on the great ranges of the West. Many of them enlisted in the Rough Rider regiment of the Spanish war and proved daring soldiers.

It has been used in recent years to refer to the skilled horsemen who manage the cattle on the vast ranges of the West. Many of them joined the Rough Rider regiment during the Spanish war and became brave soldiers.


The Story in a Chemical Fire Extinguisher[29]

A little smoke, a flash, and a waste basket, a curtain or something else is in flames. A few years ago an excited person would fail to extinguish the blaze with water or with any other first aid at hand and would call for the fire department. When that arrived the fire frequently would be beyond control.

A bit of smoke, a flash, and a trash can, a curtain, or something else is on fire. A few years ago, an anxious person would struggle to put out the fire with water or any other makeshift method available and would call the fire department. By the time they arrived, the fire was often out of control.

Fire extinguisher

Modern methods have wrought great changes. Nowadays, in case of fire, any man, woman or child can reach for a fire extinguisher and after a few strokes of the pump the fire is out.

Modern methods have brought about significant changes. These days, if there's a fire, anyone—man, woman, or child—can grab a fire extinguisher and, with a few pushes of the handle, put the fire out.

This change did not come all at once. The fire extinguisher has been developing ever since man learned to fear fire. Devices for extinguishing fire are almost coeval with that element itself. In the second century before Christ, the Egyptians had pumps worked by levers to put out their fires. The Roman, Pliny, refers to fire extinguishers but gives no account of their construction. Apollodorus, architect of the Emperor Trajan, speaks of leathern bags with pipes attached. Water was projected by squeezing the bags. Medieval Europe used various forms of water pumps, and it was not until the opening of the nineteenth century that chemicals were used to combat fire.

This change didn’t happen overnight. The fire extinguisher has been evolving ever since humans learned to fear fire. Devices for putting out fires are almost as old as fire itself. In the second century BCE, the Egyptians had pumps operated by levers to extinguish their fires. The Roman author Pliny mentions fire extinguishers but doesn’t explain how they were made. Apollodorus, an architect for Emperor Trajan, talks about leather bags with pipes attached. Water was sprayed by squeezing the bags. Medieval Europe used various types of water pumps, and it wasn’t until the early nineteen hundreds that chemicals were used to fight fires.

There are two classes of chemical fire extinguishers: the soda and acid tank or three-gallon type, and the one-quart pump type. The latter came when the efficiency of carbon tetrachloride as an extinguishing agent became known. All the extinguishers of this type use a liquid which has carbon tetrachloride as a base. The liquid is a combination of organic materials with an aromatic odor and high specific gravity. When subjected to a temperature of 200° F. or over, it changes to a heavy, cohering, non-poisonous gas blanket which surrounds the burning material and cuts off the air supply necessary for the life of the fire.

There are two types of chemical fire extinguishers: the soda and acid tank or three-gallon type, and the one-quart pump type. The latter was introduced when the effectiveness of carbon tetrachloride as an extinguishing agent was recognized. All extinguishers of this type use a liquid with carbon tetrachloride as a base. The liquid is a blend of organic materials with a pleasant smell and high specific gravity. When exposed to temperatures of 200°F or higher, it transforms into a heavy, cohesive, non-toxic gas that surrounds the burning material and cuts off the oxygen supply needed for the fire to continue.

The first one-quart pump type of extinguisher appeared in the United States in 1907. There was little resemblance between it and the extinguisher of today. A cylindrical tube with a perforated end contained the liquid. The user was expected to sprinkle the liquid over the fire just as salt is sprinkled from a saltcellar over meat.

The first one-quart pump type fire extinguisher showed up in the United States in 1907. It looked nothing like the extinguishers we have today. It was a cylindrical tube with a perforated end that held the liquid. The user had to sprinkle the liquid onto the fire, similar to how you would sprinkle salt from a salt shaker over food.

One company applied the idea of pumping the liquid on the fire in 1909. They introduced a single-acting pump. The user inserted the nozzle in the liquid, drew it into the pump, and then ejected it on the flames. This company substituted a double-acting pump early in 1910. The container for the fluid and the pump were thus combined and the extinguisher had the general appearance of those now on the market.

One company came up with the idea of spraying liquid on fires in 1909. They launched a single-acting pump. The user would place the nozzle in the liquid, pull it into the pump, and then spray it on the flames. This company switched to a double-acting pump in early 1910. They combined the fluid container and the pump, making the extinguisher look similar to those available today.

Brass construction was substituted for tin in the latter part of 1910, and in 1911 all brass construction was adopted. The extinguisher has remained practically unchanged since 1911.

Brass construction replaced tin in the latter part of 1910, and by 1911, all brass construction was adopted. The extinguisher has stayed virtually the same since 1911.

This was the only one-quart type extinguisher on the market until 1911. Since then several others have been marketed. All use an extinguishing liquid with carbon tetrachloride as a base. They differ principally in the manner of its ejection. The original type pumps the liquid out by hand. Others eject it by air pressure or by a combination of the two methods. The objection made by some people to the use of air pressure is that it demands attention and the use of a complicated mechanism which more readily gets out of order.

This was the only one-quart type extinguisher available until 1911. Since then, several others have been introduced. All of them use an extinguishing liquid that has carbon tetrachloride as a base. They mainly differ in how the liquid is dispensed. The original type pumps the liquid out manually. Others use air pressure or a combination of both methods to eject it. Some people criticize the use of air pressure because it requires more attention and uses a complicated mechanism that is more likely to malfunction.

Fire extinguisher

The liquid extinguishing agent has seen little change since 1907. In 1914 it was modified so that it injures nothing with which it comes in contact. It puts out fires originating in oily wastes, turpentine and shellac, and fires resulting from the ignition of gasoline, benzine or acetylene gas, on which ordinary chemicals and water are useless. It extinguishes electrical fires without injuring insulation or apparatus and without injury to the operator. A stream of this liquid has been directed upon a circuit of 110,000 volts without the least harm to the operator.

The liquid fire extinguisher hasn't changed much since 1907. In 1914, it was updated to ensure it doesn't harm anything it touches. It is effective at putting out fires caused by oily waste, turpentine, and shellac, as well as fires from gasoline, benzene, or acetylene gas, where regular chemicals and water don't work. It can also put out electrical fires without damaging insulation or equipment, and it keeps the operator safe. A spray of this liquid has been aimed at a circuit of 110,000 volts without causing any harm to the operator.

A German originated the soda and acid type of extinguisher from tests made in Denmark between 1830 and 1835. The enterprising Teuton divided a hogshead into two parts. He filled one part with a solution of alcohol and water; the other division was partly filled with sulphuric acid. His problem was to unite the two when he wanted to put out a fire. This was accomplished by fastening a charge of gunpowder in such a way that when exploded it would break the partition and mix the solutions. French ingenuity added slight improvements a short time later.

A German invented the soda and acid type of extinguisher from experiments conducted in Denmark between 1830 and 1835. The clever German divided a large barrel into two sections. He filled one section with a mixture of alcohol and water, while the other section was partially filled with sulfuric acid. His challenge was to combine the two when he needed to extinguish a fire. He solved this by attaching a charge of gunpowder in such a way that when it exploded, it would break the barrier and mix the solutions. French inventiveness made some minor improvements shortly after.

Section of fire extinguisher

Alexander Graham, of Lexington, Virginia, applied for patents on this type of extinguisher a number of times between 1844 and 1849. He was unable to patent his invention. A fire extinguisher company in Chicago and one in Baltimore obtained patents on what was known as the “bicarbonate of soda and sulphuric acid” extinguisher by a special act of Congress in 1865. These patents were known as the Graham patents, and both extinguishers were called the “break-bottle type” because the soda and acid were mixed when a glass bottle containing the latter was broken.

Alexander Graham, from Lexington, Virginia, applied for patents on this type of extinguisher several times between 1844 and 1849. He was unable to secure a patent for his invention. A fire extinguisher company in Chicago and another in Baltimore obtained patents for what was known as the “bicarbonate of soda and sulfuric acid” extinguisher through a special act of Congress in 1865. These patents were referred to as the Graham patents, and both extinguishers were called the “break-bottle type” because the soda and acid were mixed when a glass bottle containing the acid was broken.

The “up-set” type of soda and acid extinguisher was adapted by Meyerose in St. Louis in 1891. The improvement lay in the vessel containing the acid being upset instead of broken. This extinguisher was of copper construction and had a capacity of three gallons. One fire extinguisher company improved upon the original type of “up-set” extinguisher in 1893 by lining the extinguisher with lead which the acid did not affect. Since 1893 there have been no improvements of consequence on the soda and acid extinguisher. It consists of a cylindrical container with a solution of sodium bicarbonate. Over the bicarbonate is suspended a vessel containing sulphuric acid. When in use the acid is tilted over and comes in contact with the bicarbonate. This liberates carbon dioxide. The pressure generated is[377] sufficient to throw a stream of the bicarbonate solution forty feet. The chief disadvantages of the soda and acid type of extinguisher are that its weight makes it cumbersome to operate and it cannot be safely used on electrical fires until the current has been turned off.

The “up-set” type of soda and acid extinguisher was developed by Meyerose in St. Louis in 1891. The improvement was that the vessel containing the acid was upset instead of being broken. This extinguisher was made of copper and had a capacity of three gallons. One fire extinguisher company enhanced the original design of the “up-set” extinguisher in 1893 by lining it with lead, which the acid did not affect. Since 1893, there haven't been any significant improvements to the soda and acid extinguisher. It consists of a cylindrical container filled with a solution of sodium bicarbonate. A vessel containing sulphuric acid is suspended over the bicarbonate. When in use, the acid is tilted over and comes into contact with the bicarbonate, which releases carbon dioxide. The pressure generated is[377] enough to project a stream of the bicarbonate solution forty feet. The main disadvantages of the soda and acid type of extinguisher are its weight, which makes it cumbersome to use, and that it cannot be safely used on electrical fires until the current has been turned off.


How is Gold Leaf Made?

The gold is cast into ingots weighing about two ounces each, and measuring about three-quarters of an inch broad. These ingots are passed between steel rollers till they form long ribbons of such thinness that a square inch will weigh six and one-half grains. Each one of these is now cut into 150 pieces, each of which is beaten on an anvil till it is about an inch square. These 150 plates are interlaid with pieces of fine vellum about four inches square, and beaten till the gold is extended nearly to the size of the vellum leaves. Each leaf is then divided into four, interlaid with goldbeater’s skin, and beaten out to the dimensions of the skin. Another similar division and beating finishes the operation, after which the leaves are placed in paper books ready for use. The leaves are about three and a quarter inches square and are produced in ten different shades of color, according as the gold was alloyed with much or little copper or silver.

The gold is melted down into ingots that weigh about two ounces each and are roughly three-quarters of an inch wide. These ingots are rolled out between steel rollers until they form long ribbons thin enough that a square inch weighs six and a half grains. Each of these ribbons is cut into 150 pieces, which are then hammered on an anvil until they are about an inch square. These 150 plates are layered with pieces of fine vellum that are about four inches square and hammered until the gold spreads nearly to match the size of the vellum leaves. Each leaf is then divided into four parts, layered with goldbeater’s skin, and hammered out to the size of the skin. Another similar round of division and hammering completes the process, after which the leaves are placed in paper books, ready for use. The leaves measure about three and a quarter inches square and come in ten different shades, depending on how much copper or silver was mixed in with the gold.

What is the Natural Color of Goldfish?

It is greenish in color in the natural state, the golden-yellow color being found only in domesticated specimens, and retained by artificial selection.

It is greenish in color in its natural state, with the golden-yellow color only found in domesticated specimens, which is kept through artificial selection.

These fishes are reared by the Chinese in small ponds, in basins or porcelain vessels, and kept for ornament. By careful selection, many strange varieties have been propagated.

These fish are raised by the Chinese in small ponds, in basins or porcelain containers, and are kept as decorative items. Through careful selection, many unusual varieties have been bred.

They are now distributed over nearly all the civilized parts of the world, but in large ponds they readily revert to the color of the original stock.

They are now found in almost all the developed areas of the world, but in large ponds, they quickly return to the color of their original breed.

When was “Liquid Fire” First Used in Warfare?

Long before the European war, an inflammable and destructive compound was used in warfare, especially by the Byzantine Greeks.

Long before the European war, a highly flammable and destructive substance was used in warfare, particularly by the Byzantine Greeks.

It was poured from caldrons and ladles, vomited through long copper tubes, or flung in pots, phials and barrels.

It was poured from cauldrons and ladles, spewed out through long copper pipes, or tossed into pots, bottles, and barrels.

The art of compounding it was concealed at Constantinople with the greatest care, but it appears that naphtha, sulphur and nitre entered into its composition.

The art of compounding was kept secret in Constantinople with the utmost care, but it seems that naphtha, sulfur, and saltpeter were part of its formula.

How did the Greyhound Get His Name?

The name appears to have no reference to the color, but is derived from the Icelandic “grey,” meaning a dog. They are used chiefly in the sport of coursing, a work for which their peculiar shape, strength, keenness of sight and speed make them exceedingly well fitted. This sport is preferred by many people to horse racing. There are several varieties, as the Irish greyhound, the Scottish, the Russian, the Italian and the Turkish.

The name doesn't seem to refer to the color but comes from the Icelandic word for “grey,” which means dog. They are mainly used in coursing, a sport for which their unique shape, strength, keen eyesight, and speed make them ideal. Many people actually prefer this sport to horse racing. There are several types, including the Irish greyhound, Scottish, Russian, Italian, and Turkish.

The common greyhound is of an elegant make of body, and is universally known as the fleetest of dogs.

The common greyhound has a sleek build and is widely recognized as the fastest of all dogs.

A good hound has a fine, soft, flexible skin, with thin, silky hair, a great length of nose, contracting gradually from the eye to the nostril, a full, clear and penetrating eye, small ears, erect head, long neck, chest capacious, deep, but not wide, shoulders deep and placed obliquely, ribs well arched, contracted belly and flank, a great depth from the hips to the hocks of the hind-legs, fore-legs straight and shorter than the hind legs.

A good hound has smooth, flexible skin with thin, silky fur, a long nose that narrows gradually from the eyes to the nostrils, clear and sharp eyes, small ears, an upright head, a long neck, a deep but not wide chest, sloped shoulders, well-arched ribs, a tucked-in belly and flanks, and a significant depth from the hips to the hocks on the back legs, with straight front legs that are shorter than the back legs.

New York Harbor with Statue of Liberty and Aquarium

The Gateway to America

The Gateway to America

The famous statue of Liberty in New York Harbor. The grassy space in the foreground is Battery Park, and the round building is the Aquarium. Here in the early days stood a rude “castle” or fort, later supplanted by an opera house. Washington often walked in the old garden around the building, as did other great Americans.

The famous Statue of Liberty in New York Harbor. The grassy area in the foreground is Battery Park, and the round building is the Aquarium. In the early days, a simple "castle" or fort stood here, which was later replaced by an opera house. Washington often strolled in the old garden around the building, as did other prominent Americans.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Why is It Called “Battery Park”?

The extreme southern end of Manhattan Island is both popularly and officially known as “Battery Park” because it was fortified in the seventeenth century for the protection of the town. In the picture the round building is the Aquarium, which is abundantly supplied with sea and river fishes. The picture was taken from a platform of the Elevated Railway, the trains of which run from this point to practically the northern extremity of the island, making stops en route at stations situated at approximately every eighth street.

The very southern tip of Manhattan Island is commonly and officially called “Battery Park” because it was fortified in the 1600s to protect the town. In the picture, the round building is the Aquarium, which is filled with a variety of sea and river fish. The picture was taken from a platform of the Elevated Railway, which runs trains from this point to almost the northern end of the island, stopping at stations about every eighth street along the way.

Manhattan Island was first visited in 1609 by Henry Hudson. The first settlement was located three years afterward on the present site of Battery Park. The Dutch settlement here formed gradually grew into a town called New Amsterdam, which in 1648 had 1,000 inhabitants. In 1664 it surrendered to the British and took its new name from the Duke of York, into whose hands it came. It was the capital of the State of New York from 1784 to 1797, and from 1785 to 1790 it was the seat of the Federal Government. Washington was inaugurated to the presidency at New York in 1789. The opening of the Erie Canal in 1825 gave the city command of internal commerce and since that date its progress has been rapid, almost beyond example.

Manhattan Island was first explored in 1609 by Henry Hudson. The first settlement was established three years later at the current site of Battery Park. The Dutch settlement gradually evolved into a town called New Amsterdam, which had 1,000 residents by 1648. In 1664, it surrendered to the British and was renamed after the Duke of York, who took control of it. It served as the capital of New York State from 1784 to 1797, and from 1785 to 1790, it was the seat of the Federal Government. Washington was inaugurated as president in New York in 1789. The opening of the Erie Canal in 1825 allowed the city to dominate internal trade, and since then, its growth has been rapid, almost unparalleled.

How do we Know that the Earth is Round?

We have all been taught that the earth is a nearly spherical body which every twenty-four hours rotates from west to east around an imaginary line called its axis—this axis having as its extremities the north and south poles respectively—while in the course of a year it completes a revolution around the sun.

We’ve all learned that the Earth is almost like a sphere and rotates from west to east every twenty-four hours around an imaginary line called its axis—this axis has the north and south poles at its ends—while it completes a full orbit around the sun each year.

To an observer whose view is not obstructed, any part of the earth presents itself as a circular and horizontal expanse, on the circumference of which the heavens appear to rest. Accordingly, in remote antiquity, the earth was regarded as a flat, circular body, floating on the water. But even in antiquity the spherical form of the earth began to be suspected.

To someone with an unobstructed view, any part of the earth looks like a flat, circular surface, with the sky appearing to rest on its edge. Because of this, in ancient times, people thought of the earth as a flat, circular disc floating on water. However, even back then, some began to wonder about the earth's spherical shape.

It is only on this supposition that we can explain how the horizon of vision grows wider and wider the higher the position we choose, how the tops of towers and mountains at a distance become visible before the bases, how the hull of a ship disappears first as she sails away, and how, as we go from the poles towards the equator, new stars become visible. Besides these proofs, there are many others, such as the circular shadow of the earth seen on the moon during an eclipse, the gradual appearance and disappearance of the sun, and especially the fact that since 1519 the earth has been regularly circumnavigated.

It is only on this assumption that we can explain how our view expands the higher we go, how the tops of towers and mountains appear before their bases when seen from afar, how a ship's hull is the first to vanish as it sails away, and how new stars can be seen as we travel from the poles to the equator. In addition to these examples, there are many others, like the round shadow of the Earth on the moon during an eclipse, the gradual rising and setting of the sun, and especially the fact that since 1519, the Earth has been regularly circumnavigated.

The earth is not, however, an exact sphere, but is very slightly flattened at the poles, so as to have the form known as an oblate spheroid. In this way the polar diameter, or diameter from pole to pole, is shorter than the diameter at right angles to this—the equatorial diameter. The most accurate measurements make the polar diameter about twenty-seven miles less than the equatorial, the equatorial diameter being found to be 7,925.6 miles, and the polar 7,899.14.

The earth isn't a perfect sphere; it's slightly flattened at the poles, giving it the shape of an oblate spheroid. This means the polar diameter, or the distance from one pole to the other, is shorter than the diameter at a right angle to this—the equatorial diameter. The most accurate measurements show that the polar diameter is about twenty-seven miles less than the equatorial diameter, which is measured at 7,925.6 miles, while the polar diameter is 7,899.14 miles.

What were “Ducking Stools”?

A ducking stool was a sort of a chair in which “common scolds” were formerly tied and plunged into water. They were of different forms, but that most commonly in use consisted of an upright post and a transverse movable beam on which the seat was fitted or from which it was suspended by a chain.

A ducking stool was a type of chair where “common scolds” were once tied up and dunked in water. They came in various designs, but the most commonly used one had a vertical post and a horizontal movable beam, onto which the seat was attached or from which it was hung by a chain.

The ducking stool is mentioned in the Doomsday survey; it was extensively in use throughout the country from the fifteenth till the beginning of the eighteenth century, and in one rare case at least—at Leominster—was used as lately as 1809.

The ducking stool is noted in the Doomsday survey; it was widely used across the country from the fifteenth to the early eighteenth century, and in at least one rare instance—at Leominster—it was still in use as recently as 1809.


The Story in Photo-Engraving[30]

Modern advertising would not have been possible without photo-engraving. Attention has been attracted, desire has been created and goods have been sold, largely through the pictorial or other artistic embellishments which have lifted particular “ads” out of the mass and attracted the favorable attention of the cursory reader. Pictures are the universal language, not only to those of divers tongues, but to those of every stage of mental development.

Modern advertising wouldn't exist without photo-engraving. Attention has been captured, desire has been sparked, and products have been sold, mainly through the images and other artistic touches that have set specific "ads" apart and grabbed the interest of casual readers. Pictures are a universal language, understood not only by people who speak different languages but also by those at every level of mental development.

Photo-engravings are a comparatively modern product. They superseded wood engravings, which for years has been the recognized medium for illustrations to print on a type printing press. Photo-engravings, broadly speaking, are divided into two classes—line engravings and halftones. The distinction between them lying in the fact that one, as its name implies, is a reproduction of a drawing made in lines or stipples, while the other, the halftone, gets its name from the method of its manufacture.

Photo engravings are a relatively modern creation. They replaced wood engravings, which had been the standard medium for illustrations in print on a letterpress for many years. Broadly speaking, photo engravings are categorized into two types—line engravings and halftones. The difference between them lies in the fact that one, as the name suggests, is a reproduction of a drawing made with lines or stipples, while the other, the halftone, is named after its manufacturing process.

Briefly stated, the process of making halftones is as follows: The subject to be engraved is photographed through a halftone screen, so-called. This halftone screen is a glass plate ruled with lines at right angles ranging, for different purposes, from 60 to 200 lines to the inch. This screen is placed between the lens and the sensitized plate which is to be the negative. The necessity for this screen is due to the fact that a photograph is made up of “tones.” That is to say, that the color changes imperceptibly in subtle gradations of light and shade. If this copy were photographed on a piece of copper it would present no chance for the etching fluid to act. The idea is to break up the surface into various sized dots, as the various gradations of color on the original cannot be transferred by any other method to a sheet of copper and etched.

In simple terms, the process of creating halftones works like this: The image to be engraved is captured through a halftone screen. This halftone screen is a glass plate with lines drawn at right angles, typically ranging from 60 to 200 lines per inch for different purposes. This screen is positioned between the lens and the sensitized plate that will serve as the negative. The reason for using this screen is that a photograph is made up of “tones.” In other words, the color changes subtly in slight gradations of light and shadow. If this image were photographed directly onto a piece of copper, there would be no way for the etching fluid to work. The goal is to break the surface into dots of various sizes since the different shades of color in the original cannot be transferred to a copper sheet and etched using any other method.

Halftone engraving of boy playing instrument

Halftone Engraving

Halftone Printing

The various tones must be changed either to lines or dots, so as to make a printing surface for the ink roller of the press to operate. This is necessary to get the desired printing surface.

The different tones need to be converted into lines or dots to create a printing surface for the ink roller on the press to work effectively. This is essential to achieve the desired printing surface.

The dots are of various sizes, ranging from a minute stipple to a solid black, and they present to the eye the same effect as the unbroken tones of a photograph. The negative when finished shows the drawing exactly like the original. The whites are opaque, the solid blacks are clear glass, the intermediate tones showing the same values in stipples of various sizes. The film of the negative is next removed from the[381] glass, turned and placed on a heavier plate glass with a number of others and printed on a sheet of metal which has been coated with a sensitized solution.

The dots come in different sizes, from tiny specks to solid black, creating an effect on the eye similar to the continuous tones of a photograph. Once finished, the negative displays the drawing just like the original. The whites are opaque, the solid blacks are clear glass, and the intermediate tones are shown in stipples of various sizes. Next, the film of the negative is taken off the[381] glass, flipped over, and placed on a heavier plate of glass along with several others, then printed onto a sheet of metal that's been coated with a sensitized solution.

This plate of heavy glass containing the several negatives is placed with the sensitized metal in a printing frame. The light passes through the clear part of the negative, the solid parts prevent the passage of light; thus we have the light acting chemically on the sensitized surface.

This thick glass plate with the various negatives is set up with the sensitized metal in a printing frame. Light goes through the clear areas of the negative, while the solid parts block the light; this way, the light chemically interacts with the sensitized surface.

After the print is removed from the printing frame, it is developed, the parts acted on by the light adhering to the metal. The opaque parts, through which no light has penetrated, leave the solution soft on the surface of the metal. This is removed by placing in water and wiping gently with absorbent cotton. The print is then dried and heated over a stove which bakes the sensitized solution to the metal. It can readily be seen that this sheet of metal is now in such shape that the etching fluid will etch away the uncovered portions of the metal and allow the protected parts, which represent the color of the original, to remain in relief.

After removing the print from the printing frame, it gets developed. The parts exposed to light stick to the metal, while the opaque areas that didn’t let any light through keep the solution soft on the surface of the metal. This is cleaned off by submerging it in water and gently wiping with absorbent cotton. The print is then dried and heated over a stove, which bakes the sensitized solution onto the metal. You can clearly see that this sheet of metal is now shaped so that the etching fluid will dissolve the exposed parts of the metal, leaving the protected areas, which represent the original color, in relief.

Similar picture as line engraving

Line Engraving

Line Engraving

This plate is etched—a flat proof, so called, is pulled on a hand press—and it is then taken up by the re-etcher. The re-etcher is the artist of the etching room. He takes the plate and by covering up certain parts and etching again gives additional play of color. Smaller developments of lights are worked out by careful manipulation of the etching fluid with small sable brushes. The differences in cost in the production of halftones is due largely to the length of time devoted to this work. The engraver or finisher then takes charge of it, preparing the engraving for the routing department, where the superfluous metal is removed. The plate is then returned to the engraving department, which completes the work, burnishing darks, engraving highlights, removing slight imperfections and otherwise perfecting the plate.

This plate is etched—a flat proof, as it's called, is made on a hand press—and then it's handed over to the re-etcher. The re-etcher is the artist in the etching room. They take the plate and, by covering certain areas and etching again, add more color variations. Smaller adjustments to the lights are done through careful manipulation of the etching fluid using small sable brushes. The differences in cost for producing halftones mainly come from the amount of time spent on this work. Next, the engraver or finisher takes over, getting the engraving ready for the routing department, where the excess metal is removed. After that, the plate goes back to the engraving department, which finishes the job by burnishing the dark areas, engraving highlights, fixing minor imperfections, and otherwise perfecting the plate.

It is then proofed and blocked. Nine separate men handle each engraving in the halftone department.

It is then proofed and blocked. Nine different men take care of each engraving in the halftone department.

The making of line engravings follows the same general course, with the exception that no halftone screen is needed, the copy to be reproduced being already made up of lines or dots or a combination of them. In the handling of line work, eight skilled men successively handle each plate.

The process of creating line engravings is similar overall, except that there's no need for a halftone screen since the original image is already made up of lines or dots, or a mix of both. When it comes to line work, eight skilled workers take turns working on each plate.

Similar picture in combination engraving

Combination Engraving

Combo Engraving

In addition to plates made by either line or halftone process, combinations of the two are frequently used, as, for instance, where decorative pen work is used to embellish a halftone picture, or where lettering is to be used in connection with a halftone and form part of the same plate. These plates made up of both line work and halftones are known as combination plates[382] or double-prints, depending upon the way they are produced. In both cases, negatives are made of both the halftone and fine copies.

In addition to plates created using either line or halftone processes, combinations of the two are often used. For example, decorative pen work might be added to enhance a halftone image, or lettering might be incorporated into a halftone as part of the same plate. These plates that include both line work and halftones are referred to as combination plates[382] or double-prints, depending on how they're produced. In both situations, negatives are created for both the halftone and fine copies.

Combination plates are made by combining the halftone and line negatives together and making one complete print on the metal.

Combination plates are created by merging the halftone and line negatives together and producing one complete print on the metal.

Double-print is used where the surface is covered with halftone screen, either the line or halftone negative is printed on the metal, the other is superimposed on it.

Double-print is used when the surface is covered with a halftone screen; either the line or halftone negative is printed on the metal, and the other is layered on top of it.

The Benday process, so called, is the use of mechanical appliances for adding lines or stipples to either drawings or plates. Its use is very extensive in the making of tint blocks or color work, used either in connection with line or halftone key plates.

The Benday process is the use of mechanical devices to add lines or dots to drawings or plates. It’s widely used in creating tint blocks or color work, either alongside line or halftone key plates.

The highlight process, possible only with certain kinds of copy, is a modification of the halftone in which, by manipulation of the time of exposure and the screen when making the negative, the halftone stipples are lost and in this way halftones are produced in which there are pure whites, without the necessity of the finisher cutting them by hand.

The highlighting process, which is only possible with certain types of copies, is a variation of the halftone technique. By adjusting the exposure time and the screen while creating the negative, the halftone dots can be eliminated. This results in halftones that feature pure whites, eliminating the need for the finisher to cut them out by hand.

Similar illustration as Benday engraving

Benday Engraving

Benday Printing

Color Engravings.

Let us assume that we have a painting or a drawing in colors from which it is desired to produce a set of printing plates to produce that drawing in facsimile. Under the old method of procedure, lithography, it would have been necessary to make a stone for each of the colors, which would mean, roughly speaking, from twelve to eighteen stones to reproduce it—it will be understood that this means the finished print must go through the press once for each color. This would mean twelve to eighteen impressions to get the desired result. The expense of doing this limited the use of lithography.

Let’s say we have a colorful painting or drawing that we want to turn into a set of printing plates to create an exact copy. With the old method of lithography, we would have needed to create a separate stone for each color, which would mean, roughly, twelve to eighteen stones to reproduce the artwork. This means the final print had to go through the press once for each color, resulting in twelve to eighteen impressions to achieve the desired outcome. The cost of this process made lithography less practical for widespread use.

Picturesque house as highlight engraving

Highlight Engraving

Highlight Engraving

The modern or photo-engraving method of reproducing a colored copy is based on the theory of the three primary colors, yellow, red and blue. It is assumed that every color is formed by some combination of these three colors—the problem confronting[383] us, therefore, is to separate these three colors and if possible make a printing plate of each color with the color values varying from light to dark in such proportions that when the three are printed in proper register over each other, with transparent printing inks, the varying color values will blend so as to reproduce the original. We go about this by making three negatives, one of each color, the red negative is made by placing at the lens a so-called color filter, which separates the red rays, whether they appear as pure red or any part of an orange or a purple, or any of the many tones of which red may form a part. In like manner the yellow and blue plates are made by the use of appropriate color filters, each of which acts for its required color as that used for the red.

The modern photo-engraving method for reproducing a colored copy is based on the theory of the three primary colors: yellow, red, and blue. It’s believed that every color is created by mixing these three colors. Our challenge, therefore, is to separate these three colors and, if possible, create a printing plate for each color, with the color values ranging from light to dark in proportions that allow the three to be printed in perfect alignment on top of each other. Using transparent printing inks, these varying color values will blend together to recreate the original. We achieve this by making three negatives, one for each color. The red negative is created by placing a color filter at the lens to isolate the red rays, whether they appear as pure red or any shades of orange, purple, or any other tones that may contain red. Similarly, the yellow and blue plates are made using their respective color filters, each functioning like the one used for red.

So far this would appear to be a purely mechanical operation, requiring simply the usual care in negative making, but unfortunately this theory does not work out so absolutely in practice, and for this reason, while any color may be produced in light rays by the union of the three primary colors of the proper quality, when the operation is attempted with material pigments or ink, produce results varying widely from the ideal. No pigment is absolutely pure, the adulterants or foreign substances will cause sufficient deviation from the abstract standard to cause a very noticeable difference in the finished result when united with another color which is of itself impure. The result is that the three negatives, instead of each being a true unit, ready for combination with the others, is really only a basis for further work. It might justly be compared with a sketch which is all right as far as it goes, but which requires toning down and elaboration before becoming a finished work of art.

So far, this seems like a purely mechanical process, requiring just the usual care in making negatives. Unfortunately, this theory doesn't hold up perfectly in practice. For this reason, while any color can be created in light rays by mixing the three primary colors of the right quality, using material pigments or ink leads to results that often differ significantly from the ideal. No pigment is completely pure; contaminants or foreign substances cause enough variation from the theoretical standard to create a noticeable difference in the final result when combined with another color that is also impure. As a result, the three negatives, instead of each being a true unit ready to be combined with the others, are really just a foundation for further work. It can be fairly compared to a sketch that looks good as far as it goes but needs refinement and detailing before it becomes a finished piece of art.

The three negatives are each printed on sensitized copper, as was noted with the black and white halftone; they are then turned over to the re-etcher, who may be rightly termed an “artist-etcher.” He has before him three prints on copper; on each of them are tones which to his trained eye are too light or too dark to produce the desired result when printed with the other two, which also vary more or less. It is his duty to strengthen and reduce and otherwise manipulate the plates so that they will, when finally printed, have the desired result.

The three negatives are each printed on sensitized copper, as mentioned with the black and white halftone; they are then handed over to the re-etcher, who can accurately be called an “artist-etcher.” He has three copper prints in front of him; on each of them, there are tones that, to his trained eye, are either too light or too dark to achieve the desired result when printed with the other two, which also vary somewhat. It is his job to enhance and adjust the plates so that they will, when finally printed, produce the intended outcome.

For every particular use to which an engraving can be put, there is some particular style or grade of engraving better adapted than any other. The successful use of halftones, whether in black and white or in colors, depends on the care with which the particular screen is selected to suit the paper stock and printing conditions. To illustrate this, the 150-line screen has 22,500 stipples to the square inch. It is apparent, therefore, that only certain kinds of paper can be used for such halftones, whereas a 60-line screen contains only 3,600 stipples to the square inch, which permits its use on a newspaper stock.

For every specific use of an engraving, there's a particular style or quality of engraving that works best. The effective use of halftones, whether in black and white or color, relies on carefully choosing the right screen to match the paper type and printing conditions. For example, the 150-line screen has 22,500 stipples per square inch. Clearly, only certain types of paper can handle such halftones, while a 60-line screen, which has only 3,600 stipples per square inch, can be used on newspaper stock.

The production of engravings is just as highly technical and scientific and involves as much experience and judgment in their application as any of the learned professions.

The process of making engravings is just as technical and scientific, requiring as much skill and judgment in its execution as any professional field of study.


Where are Milk-Pails Filled from Trees?

In South America there are some trees known as “cow-trees” which, when wounded, yield a rich, milky, nutritious juice in such abundance as to render it an important article of food. This fluid resembles in appearance and quality the milk of the cow.

In South America, there are trees called “cow-trees” that, when cut, produce a rich, milky, nutritious juice in such large quantities that it becomes an important food source. This liquid looks and tastes similar to cow's milk.

The cow-tree is a member of the bread-fruit family, and is most common in Venezuela, growing to the height of a hundred feet. The leaves are leathery, about a foot long and three or four inches broad.

The cow-tree is part of the breadfruit family and is primarily found in Venezuela, reaching heights of up to a hundred feet. The leaves are thick and leathery, measuring about a foot long and three to four inches wide.

In British Guiana the name is given to another large, much-branched tree, and there are also other varieties in Para and along the Rio Negro, which is a tributary of the Amazon River.

In British Guiana, the name refers to another large, highly branched tree, and there are also other types in Para and along the Rio Negro, which is a tributary of the Amazon River.

How did the Wearing of a Crown Originate?

When we speak of a crown now we mean the head-dress worn by royal personages as a badge of sovereignty, but it was formerly used to include the wreaths or garlands worn by the ancients upon special occasions.

When we talk about a crown today, we refer to the headpiece worn by royalty as a symbol of power, but it used to also refer to the wreaths or garlands worn by ancient people during special events.

Among the Greeks and Romans, crowns made of grass, flowers, twigs of laurel, oak, olive and so forth, and later of gold, were made use of as honors in athletic contests, as rewards for military valor, and at feasts, funerals and so forth.

Among the Greeks and Romans, crowns made of grass, flowers, and twigs of laurel, oak, and olive, as well as those made of gold, were used as honors in athletic contests, as rewards for military bravery, and at feasts, funerals, and similar events.

It is, however, with the eastern diadem rather than with the classic corona that the crown, as a symbol of royalty, is connected; indeed, it was only introduced as such a symbol by Alexander the Great, who followed the Persian usage. Antony wore a crown in Egypt, and the Roman emperors also wore crowns of various forms, from the plain golden fillet to the radiated or rayed crown.

It is, however, with the eastern diadem rather than with the classic crown that the crown, as a symbol of royalty, is associated; indeed, it was only introduced as such a symbol by Alexander the Great, who adopted the Persian custom. Antony wore a crown in Egypt, and the Roman emperors also wore crowns of different styles, from the simple golden band to the radiated or rayed crown.

Crowns

Crowns

Crowns

1. Crown of England. 2. Russian Crown. 3. French Crown. 4. Austrian Crown. 5. Imperial Crown (Charlemagne’s).

1. Crown of England. 2. Russian Crown. 3. French Crown. 4. Austrian Crown. 5. Imperial Crown (Charlemagne’s).

In modern states they were also of various forms until heralds devised a regular series to mark the grades of rank from the imperial crown to the baron’s coronet.

In modern states, they took on various forms until heralds created a standard series to indicate the levels of rank from the imperial crown to the baron's coronet.

The English crown has been gradually built up from the plain circlet with four trefoil heads worn by William the Conqueror. This form was elaborated and jeweled, and finally arched in with jeweled bands surmounted by the cross and scepter. As at present existing, the crown of England is a gold circle, adorned with pearls and precious stones, having alternately four Maltese crosses and four fleur-de-lis. From the top of the crosses rise imperial arches, closing under a mound and cross. The whole covers a crimson velvet cap with an ermine border.

The English crown has slowly evolved from the simple band with four trefoil heads that William the Conqueror wore. Over time, this design was enhanced and decorated with jewels, eventually becoming arched with jeweled bands topped with a cross and scepter. Today, the crown of England is a gold band embellished with pearls and gemstones, featuring alternating four Maltese crosses and four fleur-de-lis. Above the crosses rise imperial arches that meet under a mound and cross. The entire piece is topped with a crimson velvet cap lined with ermine.

The crown of Charlemagne, which is preserved in the imperial treasury of Vienna, is composed of eight plates of gold, four large and four small, connected by hinges. The large plates are studded with precious stones, the front one being surmounted with a cross; the smaller ones, placed alternately with these, are ornamented with enamels representing Solomon, David, Hezekiah and Isaiah, and Christ seated between two flaming seraphim.

The crown of Charlemagne, kept in the imperial treasury of Vienna, is made up of eight gold plates—four large and four small—that are connected by hinges. The large plates are adorned with precious stones, with the front plate featuring a cross; the smaller plates, placed alternately, are decorated with enamels depicting Solomon, David, Hezekiah, and Isaiah, along with Christ sitting between two flaming seraphim.

The Austrian crown is a sort of cleft tiara, having in the middle a semicircle of gold supporting a mound and cross; the tiara rests on a circle with pendants like those of a miter.

The Austrian crown is a type of split tiara, featuring a semicircle of gold in the center that holds up a mound and cross; the tiara sits on a band with pendants similar to those of a miter.

The royal crown of France is a circle ornamented with eight fleur-de-lis, from which rise as many quarter-circles closing under a double fleur-de-lis. The triple crown of the popes is more commonly called the tiara.

The royal crown of France is a circular design decorated with eight fleur-de-lis, from which spring eight quarter-circles that close under a double fleur-de-lis. The triple crown of the popes is more commonly known as the tiara.

Why do Lobsters Change Colors?

Before a lobster is cooked he is green, that being the color of the rocks around which he lives on the bottom of the ocean. However, as soon as a lobster is placed in boiling water his shell changes from green to red. This is due to a certain chemical substance contained in the shell which acts in that way when boiled.

Before a lobster is cooked, it is green, which is the color of the rocks it lives around on the ocean floor. However, as soon as a lobster is put in boiling water, its shell changes from green to red. This happens because of a specific chemical substance in the shell that reacts that way when heated.

How do Fishes Swim?

The fish is entirely surrounded by water which exerts an equal pressure on all sides. When the fish moves its tail, or makes any movement at all, he moves in the water. Of course, by moving his tail from side to side he propels himself forward and by bending his tail he goes in the direction in which it is bent.

The fish is completely surrounded by water that applies equal pressure from all directions. When the fish moves its tail or makes any movement, it moves through the water. Naturally, by moving its tail side to side, it pushes itself forward, and by bending its tail, it goes in the direction it’s bent.

Where do Pearls Come From?[31]

Below the surface of the ocean, there’s a strange, enchanted world. Living in the midst of its grandeur are most marvelous and delicate creatures that ceaselessly toil to strew the ocean’s bed with lustrous gems—pearls.

Below the surface of the ocean, there's a strange, magical world. Living in the midst of its beauty are the most amazing and delicate creatures that tirelessly work to scatter the ocean's floor with shiny gems—pearls.

Nature provides for the denizens of the deep that make these beautiful gems. The ocean pearl oyster or bivalve (avicula margaritifera) and fresh water mussel (unio margaritifera) have wonderful homes—their shells. Coarse, rough, rugged, often distorted on the outside, within they are lined with smooth, softly-glowing, iridescent “mother of pearl.” The membrane, attaching the bivalve to its shell, extracts lime from the water, building the shell from the inside outward in successive layers, preserving the finest nacreous secretions for the smooth inside lining, thus protecting its delicate body.

Nature sustains the inhabitants of the deep that create these beautiful gems. The ocean pearl oyster or bivalve (avicula margaritifera) and freshwater mussel (unio margaritifera) have amazing homes—their shells. Coarse, rough, rugged, and often distorted on the outside, inside they are lined with smooth, softly glowing, iridescent “mother of pearl.” The membrane that attaches the bivalve to its shell extracts lime from the water, building the shell from the inside out in layers, preserving the finest nacreous secretions for the smooth inside lining, thus protecting its delicate body.

In this comfortable home the mollusk is contented, but an enemy sometimes attacks it by boring through its hard shell. Leucodore, clione and other borers, parasitic or domiciliary worms work into the shell, and instinctively the protecting nacreous fluid envelops the intruder. This is the birth of the pearl. The intruder, now covered entirely with the pearl-nacre, is constantly rolled and lapped about, and successive layers of nacre are applied until in a few years a pearl of great size and value is formed and awaits the hardy, daring pearl fisher.

In this cozy home, the mollusk feels safe, but sometimes an enemy attacks by boring through its hard shell. Leucodore, clione, and other boring worms, whether parasitic or living nearby, invade the shell, and instinctively, the protective nacreous fluid surrounds the intruder. This is how a pearl is born. The invader, now completely covered with pearl nacre, is continually rolled and coated, and over the years, more layers of nacre are added until a large and valuable pearl is formed, waiting for the brave and adventurous pearl fisher.

Pearls were the first gems discovered and used as ornaments in prehistoric ages. Found in their natural state in utmost perfection, needing no cutting nor polishing, these glowing beads of the sea were the first baubles of savages, tribes and nations. Today the pearl is the favored gem of those who are surfeited with valuable jewels. It is essentially a gem for the wealthy. The connoisseur, accustomed to the possession of jewels, finds in its soft luster a grandeur above that of all the sparkling stones.

Pearls were the first gems discovered and used as ornaments in prehistoric times. Found in their natural state in perfect condition, needing no cutting or polishing, these luminous beads from the sea were the first adornments of early humans, tribes, and civilizations. Today, the pearl is the preferred gem for those who are overwhelmed with valuable jewelry. It is essentially a gem for the affluent. The connoisseur, used to owning jewels, sees in its soft shine a beauty that surpasses all the shining stones.

Fancy pearls include all those of decided color, having a rare and beautiful tint. “White pearls” include pure white and white slightly tinted with pink, blue, green or yellow. Of these colored white pearls, the delicate, lightly-tinted, pink pearl of fine color and luster known as “rose” is most beautiful. Every white pearl is classified according to its respective tint and thus its price is determined, the values ranging in the order named above, from highest for pure white, to lowest for yellowish-white.

Fancy pearls are those with distinct colors that have a rare and beautiful shade. “White pearls” refer to pure white ones and those that are slightly tinted with pink, blue, green, or yellow. Among these colored white pearls, the delicate, lightly-tinted pink pearl known as “rose” is the most beautiful. Each white pearl is classified by its specific tint, which determines its price, with values ranging from highest for pure white to lowest for yellowish-white.

What is Cork?

Cork is the outer bark of a species of oak which grows in Spain, Portugal and other southern parts of Europe and in the north of Africa. The tree is distinguished by the great thickness and sponginess of its bark, and by the leaves being evergreen, oblong, somewhat oval, downy underneath, and waved.

Cork is the outer bark of a type of oak tree that grows in Spain, Portugal, and other southern regions of Europe, as well as in northern Africa. This tree is notable for its thick, spongy bark and its evergreen leaves, which are oblong, somewhat oval, fuzzy underneath, and curved.

The outer bark falls off of itself if let alone, but for commercial purposes it is stripped off when judged sufficiently matured, this being when the tree has reached the age of from fifteen to thirty years. In the course of eight or nine years, or even less, the same tree will yield another supply of cork of better quality, and the removal of this outer bark is said to be beneficial, the trees thus stripped reaching the age of 150 years or more.

The outer bark sheds naturally if left alone, but for commercial use, it's removed when it's considered mature, usually when the tree is between fifteen and thirty years old. After about eight or nine years, or even sooner, the same tree can produce another batch of cork that's of better quality, and taking off this outer bark is said to be good for the trees, which can then live to be 150 years or older.

The bark is removed by a kind of ax, parallel cuts being carried around the tree transversely and united by others in a longitudinal direction, so as to produce oblong sheets of bark. Care must be taken not to cut into the inner bark, or the tree would be killed. The pieces of cork are flattened out by heat or by weights, and are slightly charred on the surface to close the pores.

The bark is taken off using a type of axe, making parallel cuts around the tree horizontally and connecting them with vertical cuts, creating long rectangular sheets of bark. It's important not to cut into the inner bark, or the tree could die. The cork pieces are then flattened using heat or weights and are lightly charred on the surface to seal the pores.

Cork is light, impervious to water, and by pressure can be greatly reduced in bulk, returning again to its original size. These qualities render it peculiarly serviceable for the stopping of vessels of different kinds, for floats, buoys, swimming-belts or jackets, artificial limbs, etc. Corks for bottles are cut either by hand or by means of a machine. The best corks are cut across the grain.

Cork is lightweight, water-resistant, and can be compressed under pressure, returning to its original size. These features make it particularly useful for sealing various types of containers, as well as for floats, buoys, swim belts or jackets, artificial limbs, and more. Bottle corks are either cut by hand or using a machine. The highest quality corks are cut across the grain.


The Story in a Giant Cannon

Origin of the Cannon.

The shotgun and rifle, the familiar weapons of the sportsman and the foot-soldier, are not the ancestors of the cannon, as might be surmised. On the contrary, the cannon was the predecessor of the musket and its successors. The rifle, however, antedated the rifled cannon, the type of modern artillery. We do not know when cannon first appeared, but it may have been soon after the discovery of gunpowder in Europe. This explosive seems to have been known in China long before knowledge of it reached the west, but we do not know to what extent it was developed and used in that country.

The shotgun and rifle, common weapons for hunters and soldiers, are not actually the ancestors of the cannon, as one might think. In fact, the cannon came before the musket and its later versions. However, the rifle existed before the rifled cannon, which is the type of modern artillery. We’re not sure when cannons first came about, but it’s likely they appeared not long after gunpowder was discovered in Europe. This explosive seems to have been known in China well before it made its way to the West, but we don’t know how much it was developed and used in that country.

Firing a field canon

Three-inch Field Gun Under Test at Fort Riley, Kansas

Testing of the Three-Inch Field Gun at Fort Riley, Kansas

In the trials conducted by the Board of Ordnance and Fortification of the United States Army. This gun and carriage, complete, weighs 2,020 pounds. Charge, 18.5 ounces of smokeless powder. Weight of projectile, 15 pounds. Muzzle velocity, 1,800-foot seconds.

In the trials conducted by the Board of Ordnance and Fortification of the United States Army, this gun and carriage, fully assembled, weighs 2,020 pounds. Charge: 18.5 ounces of smokeless powder. Projectile weight: 15 pounds. Muzzle velocity: 1,800 feet per second.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

The earliest cannon of which we have any knowledge were clumsy contrivances, at first wider at the mouth than at the chamber, and made of wood, and later of iron bars, hooped together with iron rings, a system of the same type as that now in use in the wire-wound cannon. They at first seem to have fired balls of stone, iron balls coming later. A doubtful statement exists to the effect that cannon were used at[387] the siege of Belgrade in 1073, and it is said that Edward III used them against the Scotch in 1327. Other dates of their use are 1338 and 1346, in which latter year Edward III employed them against the French at Crecy. For this we have the authority of Froissart. They were known under the varied names of bombards, serpentines, etc. Twelve cannon cast by Louis VII were named after the twelve peers of France, and Charles V gave twelve others the names of the twelve apostles. Other titles came later into general use, the royal or carthorne, carrying 48 pounds; the culverin, 18 pounds; the demi-culverin, 9 pounds; the basilisk, 48; the siren, 60, etc. In still later times cannon became known by the weight and the balls they carried, 6-pounders, 12-pounders, etc. But they are now usually called after the size of their bores, as 6-inch, 8-inch, or 12-inch cannon. The oldest example still in existence is “Mons Meg,” preserved at Edinburgh Castle. This is one of the iron-bar type, hooped by iron rings. It is supposed to have been used by James II of Scotland, at the siege of Threave Castle in 1455.

The earliest cannons we know about were awkward devices, initially wider at the mouth than at the chamber, and made of wood. Later, they were made from iron bars held together with iron rings, similar to the wire-wound cannons we use today. At first, they seemed to fire stone balls, with iron balls coming later. There's an uncertain claim that cannons were used at[387] the siege of Belgrade in 1073, and it's said that Edward III used them against the Scots in 1327. Other dates of use are 1338 and 1346, the latter year when Edward III employed them against the French at Crecy, which is backed by Froissart. They went by various names like bombards and serpentines. Twelve cannons made by Louis VII were named after the twelve peers of France, and Charles V gave twelve others the names of the twelve apostles. Other names became common later, such as the royal or carthorne, carrying 48 pounds; the culverin, 18 pounds; the demi-culverin, 9 pounds; the basilisk, 48; the siren, 60, and so on. In more recent times, cannons were named based on the weight of the balls they fired, like 6-pounders, 12-pounders, etc. Now, they are typically referred to by the diameter of their bores, such as 6-inch, 8-inch, or 12-inch cannons. The oldest example still around is “Mons Meg,” which is preserved at Edinburgh Castle. This is one of the iron-bar types, hooped with iron rings. It’s thought to have been used by James II of Scotland during the siege of Threave Castle in 1455.

Landing gun with carriage and limber

Three Inch Naval Landing Gun, Carriage and Limber

Three-Inch Naval Landing Gun, Carriage, and Limber

Weight of gun and mechanism, 675 pounds. Length of gun, 74.35 inches (25 calibers). Weight of projectile, 13 pounds. Travel of projectile in bore, 62.9 inches (20.97 calibers). Weight of charge, 18 ounces of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity, 1,650-foot seconds. Muzzle energy, 246-foot tons. Weight of gun, carriage, limber, drag ropes, tools, etc., and 60 rounds of ammunition, complete, 3,420 pounds. The carriage and limber have each two removable interchangeable ammunition boxes for 12 rounds each, with a box for 12 rounds below the axle of the limber.

Weight of the gun and mechanism: 675 pounds. Length of the gun: 74.35 inches (25 calibers). Weight of the projectile: 13 pounds. Travel of the projectile in the bore: 62.9 inches (20.97 calibers). Weight of the charge: 18 ounces of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity: 1,650 feet per second. Muzzle energy: 246 foot-tons. Total weight of the gun, carriage, limber, drag ropes, tools, etc., along with 60 rounds of ammunition: 3,420 pounds. The carriage and limber each have two removable, interchangeable ammunition boxes for 12 rounds each, plus an additional box for 12 rounds located below the axle of the limber.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Louis VI used bombards of great length and power against the Flemish in 1477, while as early as 1401 bronze cannon had been cast in several cities of West Prussia. Iron cannon were not cast until near the end of that century. Coming down to the seventeenth century, we are told of the great Bijapur cast-iron gun, the “Lord of the Plain,” cast by the Mogul emperor Auremgzebe or by his foes the Mahrattas. This huge gun was 14 feet long, 28 inches bore, and fired a ball of 1,600 pounds weight. Smooth-bore cannon and mortars of cast-iron and bronze are still retained in some fortresses, though rifled cannon are the only type now made. As late as 1864 smooth-bore 100- and 150-pounder wrought-iron guns were made for the British navy and a few bronze rifled guns were made in 1870 for service in India, but all such guns are now obsolete.

Louis VI used long and powerful bombards against the Flemish in 1477, while as early as 1401, bronze cannons had been cast in several cities of West Prussia. Iron cannons weren't cast until the end of that century. Moving into the seventeenth century, there's mention of the enormous Bijapur cast-iron gun, the “Lord of the Plain,” created by the Mughal emperor Aurangzeb or by his rivals, the Marathas. This massive gun was 14 feet long, had a 28-inch bore, and fired a 1,600-pound ball. Smooth-bore cannons and mortars made of cast iron and bronze are still kept in some fortresses, although rifled cannons are now the only type being produced. As late as 1864, smooth-bore 100- and 150-pound wrought-iron guns were manufactured for the British navy, and a few bronze rifled guns were made in 1870 for service in India, but all these guns are now outdated.

Austrian howitzer in the snow

Twenty-eight Ton Austrian Siege Howitzer Which Fires a Thousand-pound Projectile

Twenty-eight Ton Austrian Siege Howitzer That Fires a 1,000-pound Projectile

The Germans borrowed a large number of these great siege pieces from the Austrians and used them in the reduction of the Belgian defenses. Huge shells filled with high explosives from these mammoth guns rapidly destroyed the most modern and powerful fortifications known at the beginning of the great war. It is known that against such weapons of offense no fortifications can last and that the employment of such weapons has forced both armies to depend on their trenches as their main defense.

The Germans borrowed many of these massive siege weapons from the Austrians and used them to break down the Belgian defenses. Huge shells packed with high explosives from these giant guns quickly destroyed the most advanced and powerful fortifications known at the start of the Great War. It's recognized that no fortifications can withstand such offensive weapons, and the use of these tools has compelled both armies to rely on their trenches as their primary defense.

Hundreds of soldiers pulling a gun op the mountain

Conquering the Alps.

Conquering the Alps.

Immense labor and great ingenuity were required to haul the monster Italian guns up the steep mountain sides to their positions.

Immense effort and a lot of creativity were needed to transport the massive Italian guns up the steep mountainsides to their locations.

French 80 mm mountain gun

The Most Formidable of the French Army’s Trench Artillery

The Most Powerful of the French Army's Trench Artillery

80-m.m. mountain gun loaded with air-mine weighing 130 pounds. These mines can be thrown for a considerable distance and create havoc in the enemy’s trenches if the aim is true.

80-mm mountain gun loaded with an air mine weighing 130 pounds. These mines can be launched over a considerable distance and cause chaos in the enemy’s trenches if aimed accurately.

Mariner behind machine gun

The Bennett-Mercier Machine Gun

The Bennett-Mercier Machine Gun

This new automatic machine gun has been adopted by the United States Army, Navy and Marine Corps. It is handled by two men, one to aim and fire it, the other to feed the cartridges which are held in brass clips of 30 each. The complete gun weighs only about 35 pounds, fires 400 shots per minute, using regular 30-caliber Springfield rifle cartridges, with a maximum range of 3 miles and an effective range of about 2,000 yards. The weapon is air cooled and can be fired steadily for about 10 minutes without undue heating.

This new automatic machine gun has been taken on by the U.S. Army, Navy, and Marine Corps. It’s operated by two people: one aims and fires, while the other loads cartridges held in brass clips that contain 30 rounds each. The entire gun weighs around 35 pounds, fires 400 rounds per minute, and uses standard .30 caliber Springfield rifle cartridges, with a maximum range of 3 miles and an effective range of about 2,000 yards. The weapon is air-cooled and can be fired continuously for about 10 minutes without overheating.

Carriage mounted field gun with team of horses

Three-inch Field Gun, Long Recoil Carriage and Limber

3-Inch Field Gun, Long Recoil Carriage, and Limber

Weight of gun, carriage and limber complete, including 36 rounds of ammunition, 4,200 pounds; ground clearance, 22.5 inches. Seats are provided on axle of carriage for two gunners in transportation, one of whom operates the road brake.

Weight of the gun, carriage, and limber together, with 36 rounds of ammunition included, is 4,200 pounds; ground clearance is 22.5 inches. Seats are available on the axle of the carriage for two gunners during transport, one of whom operates the road brake.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

The development of the rifle from the old smooth-bore musket, by cutting grooves or channels in the form of a screw in the interior surface, was found so advantageous in increase of precision of aim and length of range, that the rifling of cannon in time followed and is now universally used. Breech loading has also replaced muzzle loading, another vast advantage in the use of artillery. A form of breech-loading cannon was introduced in the sixteenth century, but the advantageous use of this device is of late invention. An important result of these changes is the use of elongated instead of round balls, this permitting of the employment of much heavier projectiles for the same width of bore.

The rifle evolved from the old smooth-bore musket by adding grooves in a spiral pattern to the inside, which significantly improved accuracy and range. This advancement led to the rifling of cannons, which is now standard practice. Breech-loading has also replaced muzzle-loading, providing a major benefit in artillery use. Although a type of breech-loading cannon was introduced in the sixteenth century, its effective use is a more recent innovation. One important outcome of these changes is the switch from round to elongated projectiles, allowing for the use of much heavier ammunition within the same bore diameter.

Modern Cannon.

Until 1888 the largest cannon in use was the 119-ton Krupp, made in 1884 for Italy; but in 1888-90 the same house produced a 135-ton gun for Cronstadt. The heaviest British gun at that time was of 111-ton weight. This threw a projectile of 1,800 pounds with a muzzle velocity of 2,216 feet per second. But there later came a reaction in favor of lighter guns and quick firers. The heavy cannon of recent times are not cast, as of old, but are made of forged-steel by what is known as the building-up process. The different parts of these are called the tube, jacket, hoops, locking rings, trunnion rings, wire winding, etc.

Until 1888, the largest cannon in use was the 119-ton Krupp, made in 1884 for Italy; but from 1888 to 1890, the same company produced a 135-ton gun for Cronstadt. The heaviest British gun at that time weighed 111 tons. This gun could fire a projectile weighing 1,800 pounds at a muzzle velocity of 2,216 feet per second. However, there later was a shift toward lighter guns and quick-firing models. The heavy cannons made in recent times are not cast like before but are made of forged steel using what's known as the building-up process. The different parts of these cannons are called the tube, jacket, hoops, locking rings, trunnion rings, wire winding, and so on.

Cannons are subject to great stress in firing, this being of two kinds. One is the longitudinal stress, acting in the direction of the length and tending to pull the muzzle away from the breech. The other is the circumferential or tangential stress, which tends to split the gun open in lines parallel to the axis of the bore. These stresses are results of the longitudinal and radial pressures of the gas developed by the ignition and explosion of the powder. Such destructive forces have to be guarded against in the building of a cannon and have led to a great development over the old-time casting processes. As long as projectile velocities under 1,500 feet per second were employed cannons cast in one piece sufficed, but when greater velocities were sought, the pressure grew so extreme that no cast or forged metal tube would stand the strain.

Cannons experience significant stress when fired, which comes in two forms. One type is longitudinal stress, which acts along the length of the cannon and tries to pull the muzzle away from the breech. The other type is circumferential or tangential stress, which can cause the gun to split along lines that run parallel to the bore's axis. These stresses result from the longitudinal and radial pressures created by the gas from igniting and exploding the gunpowder. Such destructive forces need to be accounted for when building a cannon and have led to significant advancements beyond the old casting methods. When projectile velocities were below 1,500 feet per second, cannons made from a single piece were sufficient. However, as higher velocities were pursued, the pressures became so intense that no cast or forged metal tube could withstand the force.

Mountain gun disassembled for transport

Three-inch Mountain Gun and Carriage

3-inch Mountain Gun and Carriage

Weight of gun, 20612 pounds. Length of gun, 37.25 inches (12.4 calibers). Weight of projectile, 12 pounds. Travel of projectile in bore, 27.55 inches (9.2 calibers). Weight of charge, 12.5 ounces of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity, 1,224-foot seconds. Muzzle energy, 123-foot tons. Weight of gun and carriage complete, 726 pounds. This gun and carriage break up into four loads of approximately 200 pounds each. The equipment carries 16 complete rounds of ammunition with it, which are divided equally among four boxes. The saddles are so made that the load will go on any saddle.

Weight of the gun: 206.5 pounds. Length of the gun: 37.25 inches (12.4 calibers). Projectile weight: 12 pounds. Projectile travel in the bore: 27.55 inches (9.2 calibers). Charge weight: 12.5 ounces of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity: 1,224 feet per second. Muzzle energy: 123 foot-tons. Total weight of the gun and carriage: 726 pounds. This gun and carriage can be broken down into four loads, each weighing about 200 pounds. The equipment carries 16 complete rounds of ammunition, evenly distributed across four boxes. The saddles are designed so that the load can fit on any saddle.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Company.

How Cannon are Now Made.

It was found that the inner surface of the tube stretched more than the outer surface, and that after the inner surface had been stretched to its limit of elasticity the outer part failed to add to its strength, so that further thickness was of no benefit.[394] To do away with this condition cannon were constructed on the principle of varying elasticity, the metal with the greatest elongation within its elastic limit being placed next to the bore, yet in high-powered guns this system failed to yield the result desired and it was replaced by what is known as the initial tension system. This comprised two methods: the plain built-up gun and the wire-wound gun. In the latter certain parts of the gun were wrapped with wire in the form of a ribbon.

It was observed that the inner surface of the tube stretched more than the outer surface, and after the inner surface had reached its limit of elasticity, the outer part did not contribute to its strength, meaning that additional thickness provided no advantage. [394] To address this issue, cannons were designed based on the principle of varying elasticity, with the metal that could stretch the most within its elastic limit placed closest to the bore. However, in high-powered guns, this method did not produce the desired results and was replaced by what is known as the initial tension system. This included two methods: the plain built-up gun and the wire-wound gun. In the latter, certain parts of the gun were wrapped with wire in a ribbon-like manner.

Rapid fire gun

Rapid-Fire Gun

Automatic Weapon

Six-inch rapid-fire gun equipped with patented two-handed elevating gear, consisting of two hand wheels on opposite ends of the same shaft, the handles being 180 degrees apart. The pointer uses both hands in elevating and depressing the gun. The electric firing trigger A is worked by the index finger of the right hand without releasing the handle. There is a second firing handle B attached to the slide, for firing either electrically or percussively.

Six-inch rapid-fire gun featuring a patented two-handed elevating mechanism, which has two hand wheels on opposite ends of the same shaft, positioned 180 degrees apart. The operator uses both hands to raise and lower the gun. The electric firing trigger A is operated by the index finger of the right hand without letting go of the handle. There's a second firing handle B connected to the slide, allowing for either electric or percussive firing.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Company.

Built-Up and Wire-Wound Guns.

A built-up gun is made of several layers of forged steel. The parts of such a gun are known as the liner, the tube, the jacket and the hoops. The liner is a single piece which extends the length of the bore and is intended to contain the rifling and the powder chamber. This is inclosed by the tube, which is also in one piece, surrounding the liner throughout its length. Outside this is the jacket, made in two pieces and shrunk on the tube. Over the jacket lie the hoops, six or seven of these being used in a big gun. Like the jacket, these also are shrunk on. All these parts are made of the finest quality of open-hearth steel.

A built-up gun is made from several layers of forged steel. The parts of this gun are called the liner, the tube, the jacket, and the hoops. The liner is a single piece that stretches the entire length of the bore and is designed to hold the rifling and the powder chamber. Surrounding this is the tube, which is also a single piece and encases the liner along its full length. On the outside is the jacket, made of two pieces that are shrunk onto the tube. Over the jacket are the hoops, typically six or seven used for a large gun. Like the jacket, these are also shrunk on. All of these components are crafted from the highest quality open-hearth steel.

Naval gun with mount

Five-Inch Naval Gun and Mount

5-Inch Naval Gun and Mount

The latest type of gun used in the U. S. Naval Service in the secondary batteries on a battleship.

The newest type of gun used in the U.S. Naval Service in the secondary batteries on a battleship.

Coastal defence gun

Coast Defense Gun

Coastal Defense Gun

A modern 14-inch coast defense gun at Sandy Hook. The gun is mounted on a disappearing carriage, which lowers it out of sight behind the breastworks after firing. This is one of the most powerful guns in the world, firing a projectile which would pierce the armor of a battleship more than five miles away.

A modern 14-inch coastal defense gun at Sandy Hook. The gun is mounted on a disappearing carriage that lowers it out of sight behind the protective barriers after firing. This is one of the most powerful guns in the world, capable of launching a projectile that can penetrate the armor of a battleship over five miles away.

Coastal defence mortars

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N.Y.

A Battery of 12-inch Coast Defense Mortars

A Battery of 12-inch Coastal Defense Mortars

These powerful weapons fire a projectile which weighs from 700 to 1,046 pounds, depending on the range desired, and which is capable of piercing the deck armor of any battleship. They have a range of 20,000 yards with the 700-pound projectile. The gun is 1623 feet long and is fired only at elevations between 45° and 65°.

These powerful weapons shoot a projectile that weighs between 700 and 1,046 pounds, depending on the desired range, and can penetrate the deck armor of any battleship. They have a range of 20,000 yards with the 700-pound projectile. The gun is 1623 feet long and is fired only at angles between 45° and 65°.

Comparison of giant guns

Giant Guns—Their Muzzle-Energy, Projectiles, and Penetrating Powers

Giant Guns—Their Muzzle Energy, Bullets, and Penetrating Power

The British 13.5, which was known as the 12-inch-A until the “Lion” was launched, has a length of 45 calibers, and a muzzle-energy ten per cent greater than that of the 50-caliber 12-inch of 1909 and 1910. It may be noted that the caliber is the diameter of the bore of a gun. The statement that a gun has a length of 45 calibers, for example, implies that the gun is forty-five times the bore’s diameter. Thus a 12-inch gun of 45 calibers is 45 feet long.

The British 13.5, previously called the 12-inch-A until the launch of the "Lion," has a length of 45 calibers and a muzzle energy that's ten percent greater than that of the 50-caliber 12-inch guns from 1909 and 1910. It's important to note that the caliber refers to the diameter of the gun's bore. When we say a gun has a length of 45 calibers, it means the gun is forty-five times the diameter of the bore. Therefore, a 12-inch gun that is 45 calibers long measures 45 feet.

These pieces are prepared with the utmost care to prevent any defective material entering into the make-up of the gun. After the parts are put together a thorough forging follows, either by use of hammer or press, the latter being now used in preference. The usual practice in forging is to continue it until the ingot is decreased to one-half its original thickness and is within two inches of the desired diameter of the finished work. It is then annealed with great care to relieve the strains set up in the metal by the forging and next goes to the machine shop to be rough bored and turned. The final boring takes place after a second annealing. The above is only a rapid sketch of the total process, in which elaborate care is taken to prevent imperfection of any kind.

These parts are made with great attention to detail to ensure that no defective materials are used in the gun's construction. Once the parts are assembled, they undergo a thorough forging process, typically using a press rather than a hammer, as the press is preferred now. The standard procedure in forging is to continue until the ingot is reduced to half its original thickness and is within two inches of the target diameter for the final product. It is then carefully annealed to relieve any strains caused by the forging before moving on to the machine shop for rough boring and turning. The final boring occurs after a second annealing. This is just a brief overview of the entire process, which takes great care to avoid any imperfections.

Smoke from gun

Ordnance Proving Ground

Weapons Testing Facility

View showing smoke cone occurring during the proof firing of a twelve-inch gun with brown powder.

View showing a smoke cone forming during the test firing of a twelve-inch cannon with brown powder.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Thanks to the Bethlehem Steel Co.

In a wire-wound gun an inner tube of steel is thoroughly wrapped by successive layers of ribbon wire, each layer being wound with wire at a different tension. This type of gun is preferred by foreign manufacturers, but within the United States the built-up system is in higher favor and is almost exclusively employed. The makers of the wire-wound cannon claim for it a positive soundness of material impossible to secure in a built-up gun, and that it has greater firmness of material and superior tangential strength. But with this come certain disadvantages, a notable one being a lack of rigidity in the longitudinal direction, this tending to increase the “droop” of the muzzle and give a certain “whip” to the piece when fired that reduces accuracy. This and other disadvantages have given the built-up guns general preference in this country, they being found strong enough to bear any pressure desirable in service. In addition they are much cheaper to build than the wire-wound guns.

In a wire-wound gun, a steel inner tube is tightly wrapped with several layers of ribbon wire, with each layer being wound at a different tension. This type of gun is favored by manufacturers abroad, but in the United States, the built-up system is more popular and is used almost exclusively. The makers of the wire-wound cannons claim that their material consistency is superior to that of built-up guns, providing greater stability and better tangential strength. However, this design has some downsides, particularly a lack of rigidity along the length, which can lead to a drooping muzzle and a whip effect when fired, reducing accuracy. These and other drawbacks have made built-up guns the preferred choice in this country, as they are strong enough to handle the necessary pressure during use and are also much cheaper to produce than wire-wound guns.

Modern heavy guns are made of medium open-hearth carbon steel, forged as stated. The liner and tube are then placed upright in an assembling pit, the jacket and hoops shrunk on, and the finishing work done, as above said, the breech mechanism being finally fitted. Within recent years there has been a steady increase in the size and range of cannon, until an immense size and weight have been attained. For naval purposes the 14-inch gun is the largest now used in American battleships, but in the United States coast defense forts, 16-inch guns are installed. England has equipped several of her latest battleships with 15-inch guns and other nations are following in the same direction. In recent great battleships four turrets are used, each carrying three of these great guns, giving a broadside of twelve of these monster weapons of war. Of the three guns, the middle one is raised above the line of the others. A battleship thus armed is able to fire six guns ahead and six astern by raising the second and third turrets so as to fire over the others.

Modern heavy guns are made from medium open-hearth carbon steel, forged as mentioned. The liner and tube are then set upright in an assembly pit, the jacket and hoops are shrunk on, and finishing touches are applied, as previously stated, with the breech mechanism being fitted last. In recent years, there has been a steady increase in the size and range of cannons, achieving immense size and weight. For naval purposes, the largest gun currently used on American battleships is the 14-inch gun, but 16-inch guns are installed in the coast defense forts of the United States. England has outfitted several of its latest battleships with 15-inch guns, and other countries are following suit. In modern battleships, four turrets are used, each armed with three of these massive guns, providing a broadside of twelve of these formidable weapons. Of the three guns, the middle one is raised above the others. A battleship equipped this way can fire six guns forward and six backward by elevating the second and third turrets to shoot over the others.

Ejection of shell case from gun

Four-inch Fifty Caliber Rapid-Fire Gun on Pedestal Mount

4-inch .50 caliber rapid-fire gun on pedestal mount

Extraction of cartridge case by opening of breech mechanism. Weight of gun, 6,170 pounds. Length of gun, 205 inches (51.2 calibers). Weight of projectile, 33 pounds. Travel of projectile in bore, 165.6 inches (41.4 calibers). Weight of charge, 15 pounds of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity, 2,900-foot seconds. Muzzle energy, 1,928-foot tons. Weight of mount with shield, 9,470 pounds. Thickness of shield, 2 inches of nickel steel. Gun equipped with telescopic and night sights and with electric and percussion pull-off firing gear.

Extraction of the cartridge case is done by opening the breech mechanism. The weight of the gun is 6,170 pounds. The length of the gun is 205 inches (51.2 calibers). The weight of the projectile is 33 pounds. The projectile travels in the bore for 165.6 inches (41.4 calibers). The weight of the charge is 15 pounds of smokeless powder. The muzzle velocity is 2,900 feet per second. The muzzle energy is 1,928 foot-tons. The weight of the mount with the shield is 9,470 pounds. The thickness of the shield is 2 inches of nickel steel. The gun is equipped with telescopic and night sights, as well as electric and percussion firing mechanisms.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Military cannon are divided into three classes, based upon the length of caliber, and technically known as guns, mortars and howitzers. In guns the length is relatively great, in mortars relatively small, compared to their calibers. Howitzers form a class between guns and mortars in length. The field guns of the American army are the 3.6-inch breech-loading mortars, and the 3.6-inch heavy and 3.2-inch[401] light guns. The siege guns in the service are the 5-inch siege guns, the 7-inch howitzer, and the 7-inch mortar. The coast defense artillery consists of the 8-, 10-, 12- and 16-inch guns and the 12-inch mortars. In the recent European war very heavy cannon were used for field service, pieces of the size usually placed in forts being drawn to the field by powerful tractors, set on concrete platforms and used in attacks on fortified cities. It was through the use of such ordnance that the German army so easily reduced the strongly fortified Belgian cities.

Military cannons are categorized into three classes based on the length of their caliber, known as guns, mortars, and howitzers. Guns have a relatively long barrel, mortars have a relatively short barrel compared to their calibers, and howitzers fall in between guns and mortars in terms of length. The field guns used by the American army include the 3.6-inch breech-loading mortars, along with the 3.6-inch heavy and 3.2-inch light guns. The siege guns in use are the 5-inch siege guns, the 7-inch howitzer, and the 7-inch mortar. The coast defense artillery comprises 8-, 10-, 12-, and 16-inch guns, as well as 12-inch mortars. In the recent European war, very heavy cannons were employed for field service, with pieces typically stationed in forts being transported to the battlefield by powerful tractors, mounted on concrete platforms, and used in assaults on fortified cities. It was through the use of such artillery that the German army was able to easily take down the heavily fortified Belgian cities.

Fluid compression installation

Fluid Compression Plant

Fluid Compression Facility

While still in a molten condition in the mold, the steel used in manufacturing guns and shafting is subjected to hydraulic pressure until the ingot has cooled, thus insuring the solidity of the metal. The upper head of the compressor weighs 125 tons, and the lower one, including the cylinder through which the hydraulic pressure is applied, 135 tons.

While still molten in the mold, the steel used to make guns and shafts is put under hydraulic pressure until the ingot cools, ensuring the metal is solid. The upper part of the compressor weighs 125 tons, and the lower part, which includes the cylinder applying the hydraulic pressure, weighs 135 tons.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Different ammunition

Ammunition.[32] (See page 410.)

Ammo.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Test of elevation gear

Two-Handed Elevating Gear.[32] (See page 410.)

Two-Handed Lift Gear.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Aiming instruments

Range Finder and Predictor; Home and Distant Station Instruments.[33] (See page 410.)

Range Finder and Predictor; Home and Remote Station Instruments.[33] (See page 410.)

Armour piercing shells

Armor Piercing Projectiles, Capped and Uncapped.[33] (See page 410.)

Armor-Piercing Projectiles, Capped and Uncapped.[33] (See page 410.)

Range finder with chart attachment

Range Finder and Chart Attachment[34]. (See page 410.)

Range Finder and Chart Mount[34]. (See page 410.)

Very large torpedo gun

Eighteen-inch, Thirty-caliber Torpedo Gun.[34] (See page 410.)

Eighteen-inch, thirty-caliber torpedo gun.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Firing gear

Firing Gear for Guns.[35] (See page 410.)

Gun Firing Gear.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Various fuses

Fuses.[35] (See page 410.)

Fuses. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

The range of these giant cannon is enormous and their destructive power great, this being added to by the fact that the explosive shell has replaced the solid round shot of old-time gunnery. A 14-inch gun of 45 caliber can discharge a 1,400-pound projectile at a muzzle velocity of 2,600 feet per second. If we compare this with a locomotive going at the speed of sixty miles an hour, we have in the latter a speed of eighty-eight feet per second to compare with the 2,600 feet per second of the cannon ball. From this we can well conjecture the vast speed with which the latter moves, its enormous range and vast powers of destruction.

The range of these massive cannons is huge, and their destructive power is significant, especially since explosive shells have replaced the old solid rounds. A 14-inch gun with a 45-caliber can fire a 1,400-pound projectile at a speed of 2,600 feet per second. To put this in perspective, a train traveling at sixty miles an hour moves at eighty-eight feet per second, compared to the cannonball’s 2,600 feet per second. This really shows us the incredible speed of the cannonball, its extensive range, and its tremendous destructive capabilities.

Horse-drawn artillery gun

Three-inch Horse Artillery Gun, Long Recoil Carriage and Limber

Three-inch Horse Artillery Gun, Long Recoil Carriage and Limber

Length of gun, 85 inches (28 calibers). Weight of projectile, 12 pounds. Travel of projectile in bore, 74.65 inches (24.88 calibers). Weight of charge, 17.1 ounces of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity, 1,750-foot seconds. Muzzle energy, 255-foot tons. Weight of gun, carriage and limber, containing 36 rounds of ammunition, 3,355 pounds. Ground clearance, 18 inches.

Length of the gun is 85 inches (28 calibers). The weight of the projectile is 12 pounds. The travel distance of the projectile in the bore is 74.65 inches (24.88 calibers). The weight of the charge is 17.1 ounces of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity is 1,750 feet per second. Muzzle energy is 255 foot-tons. The total weight of the gun, carriage, and limber, containing 36 rounds of ammunition, is 3,355 pounds. Ground clearance is 18 inches.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

As facts are better than theories, it will be of interest to adduce a recent example of gunnery of a most illuminating type, but as regards distance and remarkable accuracy of aim. In September, 1916, the American battleship “Pennsylvania,” armed with a main battery of twelve 14-inch guns, fired these simultaneously at a target in the Chesapeake 22,000 yards, or more than twelve miles, away. The target was the sunken hulk of the “San Marcos,” formerly the battleship “Texas,” which for several years had been used for similar purposes. As the target was invisible to the gunners it was hardly to be expected that any of the shots should fall near the target. But the extraordinary result appeared that five of these twelve shots struck the hulk. As each of these projectiles weighed 1,400 pounds any battleship receiving such a broadside would probably have gone promptly to the bottom. The result, which has never before been equaled in accuracy, sufficiently attests the remarkable proficiency in range-finding that modern engineers have developed.

As facts are more reliable than theories, it’s worth sharing a recent example of gunnery that’s very enlightening, especially regarding distance and incredible accuracy. In September 1916, the American battleship “Pennsylvania,” equipped with a main battery of twelve 14-inch guns, fired all of them at once at a target in the Chesapeake that was 22,000 yards away, which is over twelve miles. The target was the sunken wreck of the “San Marcos,” which was formerly the battleship “Texas” and had been used for similar exercises for several years. Since the target was invisible to the gunners, it wasn’t expected that any of the shots would hit it. However, the surprising outcome was that five of those twelve shots actually struck the hull. Given that each of these projectiles weighed 1,400 pounds, any battleship receiving such a broadside would likely have sunk immediately. This result, which has never been matched in accuracy, clearly demonstrates the outstanding skill in range-finding that modern engineers have achieved.

As for the penetrating powers of such huge shot we may take the 15-inch gun, the type of the largest guns in our fortifications and which is claimed to be able to pierce sixteen inches of armor at a range of 18,000 yards and ten inches at a range of 20,000 yards. A notable example of this took place on September 15, 1916, at the proving grounds at Indian Head, on the Potomac River, when a 16-inch, 2,100-pound, solid steel shell, said to be the first ever fired from a naval gun of that caliber, with a small charge of explosive, went through a plate of armor, penetrated a thick sand backing, and continued its course, striking the house of an employee of the proving grounds and plunging through the kitchen rending all before it. This was a naval gun, the largest yet made for naval purposes.

As for the impressive power of such large artillery, we can look at the 15-inch gun, which is the largest type used in our fortifications and is said to be able to penetrate sixteen inches of armor at 18,000 yards and ten inches at 20,000 yards. A noteworthy incident occurred on September 15, 1916, at the testing grounds in Indian Head, along the Potomac River, when a 16-inch, 2,100-pound solid steel shell, considered the first ever fired from a naval gun of that size, with a small amount of explosive, went through an armor plate, pierced a thick sand backing, and continued on its path, striking the house of an employee at the proving grounds and crashing through the kitchen, destroying everything in its way. This was a naval gun, the largest ever made for naval use.

Chain rammer loading shell

Patented Chain Rammer

Patented Chain Rammer

As applied to loading twelve-inch turret guns. The space occupied by this rammer in the rear of the gun is less than one foot, with a possible ramming stroke of fifteen feet. The rammer being attached to the gun’s cradle or slide, moves with the gun in elevation and depression. The ammunition car also moves with the gun. Loading can be performed while the gun is kept in motion following a moving target. This rammer is stiff in all directions when extended.

As used for loading twelve-inch turret guns, the space taken up by this rammer at the back of the gun is less than one foot, with a potential ramming motion of fifteen feet. The rammer is connected to the gun’s cradle or slide, so it moves with the gun when it goes up or down. The ammo car also moves with the gun. Loading can happen while the gun is in motion tracking a moving target. This rammer is rigid in all directions when fully extended.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Thanks to the Bethlehem Steel Co.

In the make-up of modern guns the breech-loading mechanism is of essential importance, it being necessary that the breech should be capable of rapid opening for the insertion of the charge into the loading chamber, as rapidly closed and firmly secured to prevent it being forced open by the reaction of the discharge. It also must fit with such tightness as to prevent any escape of the gas in that direction, and force it to exert all its impelling power upon the ball. Various methods are used for this purpose, with the result that loading and firing can be very quickly and effectively performed. In the case of guns in fortifications, the disappearing carriage[408] is a highly important invention of recent date. By its aid the gun is quickly lifted to fire over the walls of the fort and is driven backward by the force of its discharge, sinking to a place of safety behind the walls. This saves the gun and its crew from injury by return fire.

In modern firearms, the breech-loading mechanism is crucial because it needs to open quickly for loading the ammunition and close securely to prevent it from being forced open by the discharge's reaction. It also has to fit tightly enough to stop any gas from escaping in that direction, ensuring all its force pushes the projectile forward. Various techniques are used for this, allowing loading and firing to be done swiftly and efficiently. For guns in fortifications, the disappearing carriage[408] is a significant recent innovation. It allows the gun to be quickly raised to fire over the fort's walls and then retracts to a safe position behind the walls after firing, protecting the gun and its crew from potential return fire.

We may say in conclusion that the great European war was notable for the use of artillery to an extent far surpassing its employment in any previous war. This great conflict, indeed, was very largely a contest of gun fire, in which the opposing fields of the battling armies were so swept with shells and other explosives as to render life impossible on the open land, trench digging being one of the main employments of the embattled hosts. Never before had the supreme value of gunnery in warfare been so fully demonstrated.

We can conclude that the major European war was significant for its use of artillery to a degree that far exceeded its use in any previous conflict. This large-scale battle was essentially a fight of gunfire, where the battlefields were bombarded with shells and explosives, making it impossible to survive on open land. Consequently, digging trenches became one of the primary activities for the fighting forces. Never before had the critical importance of artillery in warfare been so clearly shown.

Large gear wheel

Gear Wheel and Drum for Coal Hoisting Plane

Gear Wheel and Drum for Coal Hoisting System

Diameter of wheel, 20 feet 912 inches; face, 4312 inches; diameter of hub, 26 inches; number of teeth, 128; pitch, 618 inches; pitch diameter, 249.554 inches; shipping weight, 108,873 pounds.

Diameter of the wheel: 20 feet 9½ inches; face: 43½ inches; hub diameter: 26 inches; number of teeth: 128; pitch: 6⅛ inches; pitch diameter: 249.554 inches; shipping weight: 108,873 pounds.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Fragments of projectile that hit armour plate

Six-Inch Ribbed Cavity Armor-Piercing Shell

Six-Inch Ribbed Armor-Piercing Shell

Projectile was loaded with two pounds of black charcoal powder and fused with magazine fuse. Fired at six-inch Krupp hard-faced armor plate. Shell burst about eight feet to rear of plate after penetrating the same. Weight of largest fragment recovered 1014 pounds. Average weight of fragments, 2516 ounces. Total number of pieces recovered, 650.

Projectile was loaded with two pounds of black charcoal powder and fitted with a magazine fuse. It was fired at a six-inch Krupp hard-faced armor plate. The shell exploded about eight feet behind the plate after penetrating it. The weight of the heaviest fragment found was 1014 pounds. The average weight of the fragments was 2516 ounces. A total of 650 pieces were recovered.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Ammo. (See page 402.)

Made-up ammunition, with brass cartridge cases, and cast-iron and forged steel shells and armor-piercing projectiles. The rounds shown are as follows: Rounds with forged steel shell for one-pounder gun, for three-pounder gun and for six-pounder gun respectively; round with cast-iron shell for three-inch field gun; round with capped armor-piercing shell for three-inch fifty-caliber rapid-fire gun; round with forged steel shell for four-inch forty caliber rapid-fire gun; round with capped armor-piercing projectiles for the four-inch and twelve-centimeter fifty-caliber rapid-fire guns respectively, and round with forged shell for six-inch gun.

Made-up ammunition, featuring brass cartridge cases and cast-iron and forged steel shells, along with armor-piercing projectiles. The rounds described are as follows: rounds with forged steel shells for one-pounder, three-pounder, and six-pounder guns, respectively; a round with a cast-iron shell for a three-inch field gun; a round with a capped armor-piercing shell for a three-inch fifty-caliber rapid-fire gun; a round with a forged steel shell for a four-inch forty-caliber rapid-fire gun; rounds with capped armor-piercing projectiles for the four-inch and twelve-centimeter fifty-caliber rapid-fire guns, respectively; and a round with a forged shell for a six-inch gun.

Two-Handed Lifting Gear. (See page 402.)

Method of obtaining a variable movement of a miniature target, corresponding to rolls of a vessel of from 1 to 10 degrees. A series of 25,000 shots were fired thus, by eight gun pointers, at targets corresponding to the size of a battleship as seen at ranges of 1,500, 3,000, 6,000 and 9,000 yards. Using a sub-caliber rifle rigidly attached to the muzzle of the gun and fired electrically by the firing gear of the big gun. The record shows that under circumstances of average difficulty at sea (say 5 degrees roll and range of 3,500 yards), the gain in accuracy (increase in hits with a given expenditure of ammunition) is about 25 per cent, and the gain in speed of hitting (number of hits in a given time) is 50 per cent, with the two-hand gear as compared with the usual one-hand gear.

Method of achieving a variable movement of a miniature target, reflecting the roll of a vessel between 1 and 10 degrees. A total of 25,000 shots were fired this way by eight gun operators at targets sized like a battleship, at distances of 1,500, 3,000, 6,000, and 9,000 yards. A sub-caliber rifle was securely fixed to the gun's muzzle and fired electronically using the big gun's firing mechanism. The data indicates that under average sea conditions (approximately 5 degrees roll at a range of 3,500 yards), the increase in accuracy (more hits per unit of ammunition used) is about 25 percent, and the improvement in hitting speed (number of hits in a specific time frame) is 50 percent when using the two-hand gear compared to the standard one-hand gear.

Range Finder and Predictor; Home and Remote Station Instruments. (See page 403.)

Continuous readings, by means of automatic indicators, of either the actual or the predicted ranges and azimuths of moving target at every instant and for any distance from 1,000 to 15,000 yards and through an azimuth of 160 degrees, are clearly presented at all times. The ranges are read in scales of 10-yard steps, and the azimuths for each .01 degree are traversed. The corrected ranges for the various guns served by the instruments, either actual or automatically predicted for any interval of time, are constantly communicated to the various guns whose fire is being directed by the observation instrument.

Continuous readings, using automatic indicators, show the actual or predicted ranges and azimuths of moving targets at every moment and for distances from 1,000 to 15,000 yards across an azimuth of 160 degrees. The ranges are read in increments of 10 yards, and each azimuth is measured to .01 degrees. The adjusted ranges for the different guns operated by the instruments, whether actual or automatically predicted for any time period, are continuously shared with the various guns being directed by the observation instrument.

Armor-Piercing Ammo, Capped and Uncapped. (See page 403.)

The projectiles shown are a three-inch capped, a four-inch capped, a five-inch and a six-inch uncapped, eight-inch uncapped and capped, ten-inch uncapped and capped and twelve-inch capped.

The projectiles shown are a three-inch capped, a four-inch capped, a five-inch uncapped, a six-inch uncapped, an eight-inch uncapped and capped, a ten-inch uncapped and capped, and a twelve-inch capped.

Range Finder with Chart Attachment. (See page 404.)

The chart is drawn on the lower and ground side of a ground glass plate. A pencil point is secured to moving cross-head and marks position of target on ground glass, tracing movement of same thereon. The pillar mounting allows of ready removal of chart attachment when it is not desired to use the same.

The chart is drawn on the lower and ground side of a ground glass plate. A pencil point is attached to a moving cross-head and marks the position of the target on the ground glass, tracing its movement. The pillar mounting allows for easy removal of the chart attachment when it is not needed.

18-inch, .30 caliber Torpedo Gun. (See page 404.)

Weight, 134,000 pounds. Length of gun, 528 inches. Weight of projectile, 2,000 pounds. Travel of projectile in bore, 432.4 inches (24.02 calibers). Weight of charge, 310 pounds of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity, 2,000-foot seconds. Muzzle energy, 55,500-foot tons. Greatest diameter of gun, 45 inches. Its breech mechanism was opened and closed by one man in nine seconds. It was also opened without great effort by a boy twelve years of age.

Weight: 134,000 pounds. Length of gun: 528 inches. Weight of projectile: 2,000 pounds. Travel of projectile in bore: 432.4 inches (24.02 calibers). Weight of charge: 310 pounds of smokeless powder. Muzzle velocity: 2,000 feet per second. Muzzle energy: 55,500 foot-tons. Greatest diameter of gun: 45 inches. Its breech mechanism could be opened and closed by one person in nine seconds. It could also be opened without much effort by a twelve-year-old boy.

Gun Firing Gear. (See page 405.)

External firing gear for guns using loose ammunition. The primer is inserted in the firing gear when the breech mechanism is open, but is held at an angle to the lighting vent until the final locking motion of the breech block, making it impossible to light the gun’s charge before the breech mechanism is safely closed, even if the primer should be prematurely exploded. The primer case is automatically ejected by the opening of the breech mechanism.

External firing mechanism for guns using loose ammunition. The primer is placed in the firing mechanism while the breech is open, but is kept at an angle to the firing vent until the final locking action of the breech block, which prevents the gun's charge from igniting before the breech is securely closed, even if the primer were to ignite prematurely. The primer casing is automatically ejected when the breech mechanism is opened.

Fuses. (See page 405.)

The fuses shown from left to right are: minor caliber percussion fuse, minor caliber magazine percussion fuse, major caliber percussion fuse, major caliber magazine percussion fuse, triple, double and single train time fuses. The time fuses all contain a percussion element to insure their exploding on impact if not previously exploded. No special tool is required for setting these fuses. They are made up to 27 seconds burning time for guns of 2,600-foot seconds muzzle velocity, and up to 36 seconds for mortars and guns of 1400-foot seconds muzzle velocity.

The fuses displayed from left to right are: minor caliber percussion fuse, minor caliber magazine percussion fuse, major caliber percussion fuse, major caliber magazine percussion fuse, and triple, double, and single train time fuses. All the time fuses include a percussion element to ensure they explode on impact if they haven't already detonated. No special tool is needed to set these fuses. They are designed for a burning time of up to 27 seconds for guns with a muzzle velocity of 2,600 feet per second and up to 36 seconds for mortars and guns with a muzzle velocity of 1,400 feet per second.


What is a Deep-Sea Diver’s Dress Like?

There are now two general types of deep-sea diving equipment: an India rubber dress, covering the entire body, except the head, which is covered by a helmet, and another apparatus which is constructed entirely of metal.

There are now two main types of deep-sea diving gear: a rubber suit that covers the entire body except for the head, which is protected by a helmet, and another device that is made completely of metal.

The India rubber dress has a neck-piece or breast-plate, fitted with a segmental screw bayonet joint, to which the head-piece or helmet, the neck of which has a corresponding screw, can be attached or removed. The helmet has usually three eye-holes, covered with strong glass, and protected by guards. Air is supplied by means of a flexible tube which enters the helmet and communicates with an air pump above. To allow of the escape of the used air there is sometimes another flexible tube, which is led from the back part of the helmet to the surface of the water. But in the more improved forms of the dress, the breathed air escapes by a valve so constructed as to prevent water from getting in, though it lets the air out. Leaden weights are attached to the diver, and his shoes are weighted, that he may be able to descend a ladder, walk about below, etc.

The rubber diving suit has a neck-piece or chest plate, equipped with a segment screw bayonet joint, to which the helmet can be attached or removed; the neck of the helmet has a matching screw. The helmet usually has three eye openings, covered with durable glass and protected by guards. Air is supplied through a flexible tube that goes into the helmet and connects to an air pump above. To let out the used air, there's sometimes another flexible tube that runs from the back of the helmet to the water's surface. However, in the more advanced versions of the suit, the exhaled air exits through a valve designed to keep water from entering while allowing air to escape. Lead weights are attached to the diver, and their shoes are also weighted, so they can descend a ladder, walk around underwater, and so on.

Diving suit

Diving-Dress and Diving-Helmet, by Siebe, Gorman & Co.

Diving Suit and Diving Helmet, by Siebe, Gorman & Co.

A. Pipe by which air is supplied.
B. Valve by which it escapes.

A. Tube that supplies air.
B. Valve that lets it out.

Communication can be carried on with those above by means of a cord running between the diver and the attendants; or he may converse with them through a speaking tube or a telephonic apparatus. One form of diving-dress makes the diver independent of any connection with persons above the water. It is elastic and hermetically closed. A reservoir containing highly compressed air is fixed on the diver’s back, which supplies him with air by a self-regulating apparatus at a pressure corresponding to his depth. When he wishes to ascend he simply inflates his dress from the reservoir.

Communication can happen with those above through a cord connecting the diver and the attendants, or the diver can talk to them using a speaking tube or a phone system. One type of diving suit allows the diver to operate without any link to people above the water. It’s flexible and completely sealed. A tank filled with highly compressed air is attached to the diver’s back, supplying him with air via a self-regulating system that matches the pressure to his depth. When he wants to surface, he just inflates his suit from the tank.

Another form, known as the Fleuss dress, makes the diver also independent of exterior aid. The helmet contains a supply of compressed oxygen, and the exhaled breath is passed through a filter in the breast-piece which deprives it of its carbonic acid, while the nitrogen goes back into the helmet to be mixed with the oxygen, the supply of which is under the diver’s own control, and to be successively breathed. A diver has remained an hour and a half under thirty-five feet of water in this suit.

Another version, called the Fleuss dress, allows the diver to operate independently without external assistance. The helmet includes a supply of compressed oxygen, and the exhaled air is filtered through a device in the breastplate that removes carbon dioxide, while the nitrogen is returned to the helmet to mix with the oxygen. The diver controls the supply of oxygen, which can be breathed in successively. One diver has stayed underwater for an hour and a half at a depth of thirty-five feet while wearing this suit.

A considerable enlargement of the field of deep-sea diving is the result of the invention recently of a form of diving apparatus which is unaffected by the limitations hitherto imposed on work of this kind. A possible depth of 204 feet is recognized by the British Admiralty regulations under the conditions that obtain with the common form of diving suit. Yet this depth has probably never been reached. One hundred feet is the rare descent of the average diver and 150 feet his maximum. With the new apparatus a submergence of 212 feet has been obtained, and this might have been indefinitely extended had there been a greater depth of water at the place where the experiment took place—Long Island Sound during the latter part of 1914.

A significant expansion in deep-sea diving has occurred due to the recent invention of a type of diving gear that overcomes the previous limitations of this work. The British Admiralty regulations recognize a possible depth of 204 feet for standard diving suits. However, this depth has likely never been achieved. The average diver rarely descends beyond 100 feet, with 150 feet being the maximum. With the new equipment, a dive of 212 feet has been accomplished, and this could have been pushed even further if there had been more water depth at the testing location—Long Island Sound in late 1914.

The new diving apparatus is constructed entirely of metal, is rigid and is made of such materials that it is strong enough to resist the great pressures found in the depths to which it can penetrate. The material used is an alloy of aluminum, and the diving case weighs complete about 500 pounds. When in the air, the man inclosed in it is incapable of imparting movement to it, but in the water, which counterbalances the dead weight of the apparatus, he can easily move the articulated sections[412] as well as give himself motion through the water. The articulated portion consists of about fifty turning joints, fitted with leather packing, which swells and has an increased effectiveness under increased water pressure. To prevent the pressure-force of the deep sea from jamming the joints, roller bearings are so arranged about them that freedom of action is constantly maintained.

The new diving gear is made entirely of metal, is sturdy, and is constructed from materials strong enough to withstand the intense pressures found at the depths it can reach. The material used is an aluminum alloy, and the entire diving suit weighs about 500 pounds. When on land, the person inside it cannot move, but in the water, where the weight of the suit is offset, they can easily move the flexible sections[412] and propel themselves through the water. The flexible part has around fifty joint connections, equipped with leather seals that expand and become more effective under greater water pressure. To prevent the deep-sea pressure from locking up the joints, roller bearings are arranged around them to ensure smooth movement.

The diving case is not absolutely water-tight, nor is it desired that it should be so, as the slight leakage acts as a lubricant to the joints, and aids in their movements. The danger arising from the intake of water thus into the diving case is averted by the action of an ingenious pump appliance, which serves two purposes: that of pumping the water out and pumping the air in. The diver in this invention carries his pump with him and has air supplied to him at atmospheric pressure.

The diving case isn’t completely water-tight, nor is that the intention, since any minor leakage helps lubricate the joints and supports their movement. The risk of water entering the diving case is managed by a clever pump system that serves two functions: it pumps out the water and pumps in the air. In this design, the diver carries his pump with him and receives air at atmospheric pressure.

At the back of the diving case is a recess and in it is installed a compact but powerful pump, which sucks from the feet of the suit all leakage and forces it at once outward. This pump is worked by compressed air, and the air, after performing its mechanical part of driving the pump, is exhausted into the suit for the diver to breathe and then passes to the surface through the free space in an armored rubber tube, within which are led down to the diver the compressed air pipe for driving the pump, and the electrical connections for telephone and lamp. Thus the diving case receives a thorough ventilation, and it has been found that should the pump fail to work for a number of minutes there would still be enough air remaining in the diving case and the tube space to supply the diver’s needs for at least the length of time he is being hauled to the surface.

At the back of the diving case is a recessed area where a small but powerful pump is installed. This pump removes any leaks from the suit's feet and forces the water out immediately. It operates using compressed air, and once the air has driven the pump, it is released into the suit for the diver to breathe. The air then travels to the surface through an armored rubber tube that also contains the compressed air line for the pump and the electrical connections for the telephone and lamp. This setup ensures that the diving case is well-ventilated, and it has been determined that even if the pump stops working for a few minutes, there will still be enough air left in the diving case and tube to meet the diver's needs for at least the time it takes to bring him back to the surface.

During the experiment in Long Island Sound the pump was stopped for ten minutes, while the diver was at a depth of 100 feet. He suffered no inconvenience, and when the compressor again was started he was lowered to a depth of 212 feet. If such a condition as failure of the pump to work for ten minutes had arisen during a descent in the old elastic diving dress the result must necessarily have been fatal. Nor is a delay necessary in hoisting the diver clad in the new diving apparatus to the surface. According to the British Admiralty regulations, should a diver go down to a depth of 204 feet, the time of his ascent must be not less than one hour and a half. In the Long Island Sound experiments the diver was hoisted to the surface in eighty-seven seconds. He was totally unaffected by the abrupt change in pressure, although the deepest he had ever been was ninety feet, and on that occasion he had suffered from bleeding at the nose and ears.

During the experiment in Long Island Sound, the pump was stopped for ten minutes while the diver was at a depth of 100 feet. He felt no discomfort, and when the compressor was restarted, he was lowered to a depth of 212 feet. If the pump had failed for ten minutes during a descent in the old elastic diving suit, the outcome would have likely been fatal. Also, there’s no delay needed in bringing up the diver using the new diving gear. According to British Admiralty regulations, if a diver goes down to a depth of 204 feet, they must take at least one hour and a half to ascend. In the Long Island Sound experiments, the diver was brought to the surface in eighty-seven seconds. He was completely unaffected by the sudden change in pressure, even though the deepest he had ever been was ninety feet, and during that dive, he experienced bleeding from his nose and ears.

Why do We Smile when We are Pleased?

We smile to express our pleasure. When you meet a friend on the street you smile as you greet him. This is an indication of your pleasure at seeing him. This is often caused by an unconscious nervous action produced by the impression the occurrence creates on the brain. You do not have to think about smiling, but the muscles of your face contract and give you that pleased look without any effort on your part.

We smile to show our happiness. When you run into a friend on the street, you smile as you say hello. This shows that you’re glad to see them. This reaction often happens because of an automatic nervous response triggered by the impression the situation makes on your brain. You don’t have to think about smiling; your facial muscles just contract and create that happy expression effortlessly.

Why do Some of Us have Freckles?

Some people have freckles, when others do not, because all skins are not alike, just the same as eyes are not all of one color. People with certain kinds of skin freckle more quickly when the skin is exposed to the sun. The action of the sun on their skin causes small parts of the second layer of skin to give out a yellow or yellowish brown substance. Freckles are most common in persons of fair complexion and hair. In some cases freckles are permanent, but in most cases they disappear with the coming of cold weather.

Some people have freckles while others don’t, because not all skin is the same, just like not everyone has the same eye color. People with certain skin types develop freckles more quickly when their skin is exposed to the sun. The sun's rays cause small areas of the second layer of skin to produce a yellow or yellowish-brown substance. Freckles are most common in those with fair skin and hair. In some cases, freckles are permanent, but in most cases, they fade when colder weather arrives.


Pictorial Story of the Steel Industry

Open mine

Mining Ore, Island of Cuba.[36] (See page 415.)

Mining Ore, Cuba.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Buggy dumping ore into railway car

Loading Ore, Island of Cuba.[36] (See page 415.)

Loading Ore, Cuba.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Installation to cast pig iron

Pig Iron Casting Machine.[37] (See page 415.)

Pig Iron Casting Machine.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Open-air storage of materials

Open-Hearth Furnace Stock Yard.[37] (See page 415.)

Open-Hearth Furnace Stock Yard.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Mining Ore, Cuba. (See page 413.)

The immense veins of magnetic ore lie close to the surface and are mined or quarried by working along a series of benches or ledges.

The large veins of magnetic ore are located near the surface and are extracted by operating along a series of benches or ledges.

Loading Ore, Cuba. (See page 413.)

The ore is loaded into small buggies at the mines and run down an inclined plane, where it is dumped into railroad cars for transportation to the shipping wharves, seventeen miles distant.

The ore is loaded into small buggies at the mines and runs down an inclined plane, where it is dumped into railroad cars for transportation to the shipping wharves, seventeen miles away.

Pig Iron Casting Machine. (See page 414.)

No. 1 casting machine has a capacity of 1,000 tons per day. There are 180 molds, each pig weighing about 125 pounds.

No. 1 casting machine can handle 1,000 tons a day. It has 180 molds, with each pig weighing around 125 pounds.

No. 2 machine has a capacity of 1,800 tons per day. It has 278 molds, each for 125-pound pig.

No. 2 machine can handle 1,800 tons every day. It has 278 molds, with each one for a 125-pound pig.

Product, low phosphorus, Bessemer and basic, or high phosphorus machine-cast pig iron.

Product, low phosphorus, Bessemer and basic, or high phosphorus machine-cast pig iron.

Open-Hearth Furnace Storage Yard. (See page 414.)

The raw materials for the open-hearth furnaces are received on elevated railroad tracks graded and piled preparatory to sending to the furnaces. Yard No. 1 is 950 feet long and 87 feet wide, and is served by three electric traveling cranes of twenty tons and sixty tons capacity. Yard No. 2 is 790 feet long and 84 feet wide, and is served by two ten-ton electric traveling cranes.

The raw materials for the open-hearth furnaces are delivered on elevated railroad tracks that are graded and stacked in preparation for sending to the furnaces. Yard No. 1 is 950 feet long and 87 feet wide, and is equipped with three electric traveling cranes with capacities of twenty tons and sixty tons. Yard No. 2 is 790 feet long and 84 feet wide, and is served by two electric traveling cranes that can lift ten tons each.

Open-Hearth Ovens. (See page 416.)

No. 1 open-hearth plant consists of twelve furnaces, two ten-ton, two twenty-ton, five forty-ton and two fifty-ton basic furnaces and one forty-ton acid furnace with gas producers. Length of floor, 623 feet.

No. 1 open-hearth plant has twelve furnaces: two ten-ton, two twenty-ton, five forty-ton, and two fifty-ton basic furnaces, along with one forty-ton acid furnace equipped with gas producers. The length of the floor is 623 feet.

No. 2 plant consists of ten fifty-ton furnaces with gas producers. Length of floor, 890 feet.

No. 2 plant has ten fifty-ton furnaces with gas producers. The floor length is 890 feet.

Charging Floor of Open-Hearth Furnaces. (See page 416.)

The stock is delivered to the charging floor in iron boxes loaded on narrow-gauge buggies, and is charged into the furnaces by electric charging machines. Length of floor of No. 1 open-hearth plant, 477 feet; width, 28 feet. Length of floor of No. 2 open-hearth plant, 890 feet; width, 50 feet.

The stock is brought to the charging area in iron boxes loaded on narrow-gauge buggies, and it's loaded into the furnaces by electric charging machines. The length of the floor of No. 1 open-hearth plant is 477 feet; the width is 28 feet. The length of the floor of No. 2 open-hearth plant is 890 feet; the width is 50 feet.

Blast Furnace Storage Facility. (See page 417.)

The coal, coke, ore, etc., is delivered direct by the railroad cars under a traveling cantilever crane running on tracks laid the length of a wharf and is dumped from the cars through chutes into buckets and piled until needed at the furnaces. The plant is capable of storing over 1,000,000 tons of material.

The coal, coke, ore, etc., is delivered directly by railroad cars under a traveling cantilever crane that runs on tracks along the length of a wharf and is dumped from the cars through chutes into buckets, then piled up until needed at the furnaces. The plant can store over 1,000,000 tons of material.

Blast Furnaces. (See page 417.)

Showing stock house, blowing-engine house, etc. Plant consists of four furnaces 70 feet high, 18-foot boshet and 12-foot hearth. One furnace 90 feet high, 22-foot boshet and 11 feet 6 inches hearth. Blowing engines are of horizontal compound and horizontal vertical compound types, capable of blowing a pressure of 25 pounds of air. Four furnaces provided with fire-brick regenerator stoves 100 feet high and 18 feet in diameter. Large furnace has six stoves 100 feet high by 22 feet in diameter. Boilers fired with waste got from furnace.

Showing stock house, blowing-engine house, etc. The plant has four furnaces that are 70 feet tall, with an 18-foot boshet and a 12-foot hearth. There’s one furnace that is 90 feet tall, with a 22-foot boshet and an 11-foot 6-inch hearth. The blowing engines are of horizontal compound and horizontal vertical compound types, capable of generating a pressure of 25 pounds of air. All four furnaces are equipped with fire-brick regenerator stoves that are 100 feet high and 18 feet in diameter. The large furnace has six stoves that are 100 feet high and 22 feet in diameter. The boilers are fired with waste heat from the furnace.

Furnaces

Open-Hearth Furnaces.[38] (See page 415.)

Open-Hearth Furnaces.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Factory floor with furnaces

Charging Floor of Open-Hearth Furnaces.[38] (See page 415.)

Charging Floor of Open-Hearth Furnaces.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Storage yard

Blast Furnace Storage Plant.[39] (See page 415.)

Blast Furnace Storage Facility.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Exterior of blast furnace

Blast Furnaces.[39] (See page 415.)

Blast Furnaces. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Hydraulic press

15,000-Ton Hydraulic Forging Press

15,000-Ton Hydraulic Forging Press

In all respects this press is the largest and most powerful forging press in the world. Water is supplied to the two plungers under a pressure of 7,000 pounds per square inch, giving it a maximum capacity of 15,000 tons. The columns supporting the cross-head are 14 feet 6 inches apart, and the working height under cross-head is 17 feet 114 inches.

In every way, this press is the biggest and most powerful forging press in the world. Water is delivered to the two plungers at a pressure of 7,000 pounds per square inch, allowing for a maximum capacity of 15,000 tons. The columns that support the cross-head are 14 feet 6 inches apart, and the working height under the cross-head is 17 feet 114 inches.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Thanks to Bethlehem Steel Company.

Interior of drop forge die shop

Drop Forge Die Shop.[40] (See page 421.)

Drop Forge Die Shop.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Interior of projectile forge shop

View of a Section of Projectile Forge Shop.[40] (See page 421.)

View of a Section of the Projectile Forge Shop.[40] (See page 421.)

Hydraulic press forging heavy shaft

Forging Hollow Heavy Shaft.[41] (See page 421.)

Making Hollow Heavy Shaft.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Heavy shaft being lowered into oil bath

Oil-Tempering Heavy Shaft.[41] (See page 421.)

Oil-Tempered Heavy Shaft.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Drop Forge Die Shop. (See page 419.)

This shop has a floor space of 20,400 square feet. With full equipment of most modern die sinking tools.

This shop has a floor space of 20,400 square feet, equipped with the latest die sinking tools.

View of a Section of the Projectile Forge Shop. (See page 419.)

This shop has a floor space of 22,000 square feet and is thoroughly equipped with the necessary hammers, presses, furnaces, etc., for the forging, punching, closing in, treating and tempering of all sizes of armor-piercing and explosive projectiles and shells.

This shop covers 22,000 square feet and is fully equipped with all the necessary hammers, presses, furnaces, and more for forging, punching, closing, treating, and tempering various sizes of armor-piercing and explosive projectiles and shells.

Forging Hollow Heavy Shaft. (See page 420.)

No. 22. The block has a hole bored through its center, and in this the mandrel is inserted, the tube being forged around it. The hydraulic pressure for this 5,000-ton press is furnished by Whitworth pumping engines. This department contains also a 2,500-ton press of similar design.

No. 22. The block has a hole drilled through its center, into which the mandrel is placed, with the tube being forged around it. The hydraulic pressure for this 5,000-ton press is supplied by Whitworth pumping engines. This department also has a 2,500-ton press of similar design.

Oil-tempered heavy shaft. (See page 420.)

Showing a shaft weighing about 33,000 pounds being taken from the vertical heating furnace and suspended over the oil-tank preparatory to being lowered for tempering. The heating furnace and oil tank are served by a sixty-ton traveling crane and forty-ton jib crane. The shrinking pit for assembling is situated between the heating furnace and oil tank.

Showing a shaft weighing about 33,000 pounds being lifted from the vertical heating furnace and suspended over the oil tank, getting ready to be lowered for tempering. The heating furnace and oil tank are operated by a sixty-ton traveling crane and a forty-ton jib crane. The shrinking pit for assembly is located between the heating furnace and oil tank.

Armor Plate Machine Shop. (See page 423.)

The varied and complex machining required on armor plate demands tools of enormous size and strength as well as varied capacity. The equipment of this shop consists of large saws, planers, etc., together with numerous portable drill presses, grinders, etc. In this shop the different groups of armor are assembled in the positions they will occupy on the vessel and are finally inspected before shipment.

The different and complex machining needed for armor plate requires tools that are massive and strong, with varying capacities. The equipment in this shop includes large saws, planers, and more, along with several portable drill presses, grinders, and others. In this shop, the various groups of armor are put together in the positions they will hold on the vessel and are thoroughly inspected before shipping.

Making Armor. (See page 423.)

After heating, the ingot is placed under a 14,000-ton hydraulic forging press and forged to the required dimensions. The press is served by two 200-ton cranes with hydraulic lift and pneumatic travel. Weight of the porter-bar and chuck which hold the plate for forging is 125,000 pounds, exclusive of counterweights used.

After heating, the ingot is placed under a 14,000-ton hydraulic forging press and shaped to the necessary dimensions. The press is operated by two 200-ton cranes with hydraulic lift and pneumatic movement. The weight of the porter-bar and chuck that hold the plate for forging is 125,000 pounds, not including the counterweights used.

Special Car Designed for Transporting Large and Heavy Materials. (See page 424.)

Length of car over couplers, 103 feet 1012 inches; capacity, 300,000 pounds. Weight of car, 196,420 pounds. Shown here loaded with casting of large 5,000-ton flanging press. Weight of casting, 252,000 pounds.

Length of car over couplers: 103 feet 10½ inches; capacity: 300,000 pounds. Weight of car: 196,420 pounds. Shown here loaded with a casting of a large 5,000-ton flanging press. Weight of casting: 252,000 pounds.

The Biggest Steel Casting in the World. (See page 424.)

Combining the product of five 40-ton open-hearth furnaces. Steel casting forming part of a 12,000-ton armor-plate hydraulic forging press. Weight of casting, 325,000 pounds (145 gross tons).

Combining the output of five 40-ton open-hearth furnaces. Steel casting that is part of a 12,000-ton armor-plate hydraulic forging press. Weight of the casting: 325,000 pounds (145 gross tons).

Workers moving armour plate in hydraulic press

Bending Armor Plate

Bending Steel Plate

After being rough-forged to size and re-heated, the plate is sent to the bending press to be straightened or bent to shape. The one shown is a nickel steel side armor plate, 14 inches thick. The press exerts a hydraulic thrust of 7,000 tons, with two independently operated plungers, and is served by direct-fired furnaces with movable car bottoms and two seventy-five ton hydraulic cranes.

After being roughly shaped and reheated, the plate is sent to the bending press to be straightened or shaped. The one shown is a 14-inch thick nickel steel side armor plate. The press applies a hydraulic force of 7,000 tons, using two independently operated plungers, and is powered by direct-fired furnaces with movable car bottoms and two seventy-five ton hydraulic cranes.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Thanks to the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Interior of armour plate machine shop

Armor Plate Machine Shop.[42] (See page 421.)

Armor Plate Machine Shop.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Forging armour plate in hydraulic press

Forging Armor.[42] (See page 421.)

Making Armor.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Specially built railway car for heavy loads

Special Car Built for the Shipping of Large and Heavy Material.[43] (See page 421.)

Special Car Designed for Transporting Large and Heavy Materials.[43] (See page 421.)

World's largest steel casting

The Largest Steel Casting in the World.[43] (See page 421.)

The Biggest Steel Casting in the World.[43] (See page 421.)

Gun turret for battleship

Battleship Turret.[44] (See page 427.)

Battleship Turret.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Large field ring for dynamo

Nickel Steel Field Ring Forged without Weld for a 5,000-Horse-power Dynamo.[44] (See page 427.)

Nickel Steel Field Ring Forged without Weld for a 5,000-Horsepower Generator.[44] (See page 427.)

Forward turret for battleship Alabama

Turret for Two Twelve-inch Guns for United States Battleship “Alabama”.[45] (See page 427.)

Turret for Two 12-inch Guns for the United States Battleship “Alabama.”[45] (See page 427.)

Conning tower with shielded entrance for battleship Massachusetts

Conning Tower and Entrance Shield for United States Battleship “Massachusetts.”[45] (See page 427.)

Conning Tower and Entrance Shield for the United States Battleship "Massachusetts."[45] (See page 427.)

Battleship Gun Turret. (See page 425.)

Twelve-inch turret carrying two forty-five caliber twelve-inch guns for the U. S. Navy. These guns can be loaded at any angle of elevation or azimuth or while in motion. The turret is equipped with a broken or double hoist. The lower hoist supplying ammunition from the magazine to an upper handling room immediately below, and revolving with, the turret pan. This makes the upper or gun hoist shorter and increases the speed of ammunition service, besides interposing two fireproof bulkheads between the guns and the magazine handling room.

Twelve-inch turret equipped with two forty-five caliber twelve-inch guns for the U.S. Navy. These guns can be loaded at any angle of elevation or direction, even while moving. The turret features a broken or double hoist. The lower hoist delivers ammunition from the magazine to an upper handling room right below, rotating with the turret base. This design makes the upper or gun hoist shorter and boosts the speed of ammunition service, while also installing two fireproof bulkheads between the guns and the magazine handling room.

Nickel Steel Field Ring Forged Without Weld for a 5,000-Horsepower Dynamo. (See page 425.)

Forged dimensions: outside diameter, 141 inches; inside diameter, 131 inches; width, 51 inches. Rough machined dimensions: outside diameter, 13938 inches; inside diameter, 130 inches; width, 5034 inches; weight, 28,840 pounds. Average physical properties shown in United States Standard test bar taken from full-sized prolongation of end of forging: Elastic limit, 53,560 pounds per square inch. Elongation, 27.05 per cent.

Forged dimensions: outside diameter, 141 inches; inside diameter, 131 inches; width, 51 inches. Rough machined dimensions: outside diameter, 13938 inches; inside diameter, 130 inches; width, 5034 inches; weight, 28,840 pounds. Average physical properties shown in United States Standard test bar taken from full-sized extension of the end of the forging: Elastic limit, 53,560 pounds per square inch. Elongation, 27.05 percent.

Turret for Two 12-Inch Guns for the United States Battleship “Alabama.” (See page 426.)

Balanced type. Thickness of inclined plate, 14 inches; of side plates, 10 inches. Height of side plates, 7 feet. Largest diameter of turret, 393 inches. Weight of turret, 192.41 tons.

Balanced type. Thickness of the inclined plate, 14 inches; of the side plates, 10 inches. Height of the side plates, 7 feet. Largest diameter of the turret, 393 inches. Weight of the turret, 192.41 tons.

Conning Tower and Entrance Shield for the United States Battleship "Massachusetts." (See page 426.)

Conning tower, one piece hollow forging, nickel steel, oil tempered. Thickness of walls, 10 inches. Inside diameter, 83 inches. Height, 8212 inches. Top plate, nickel steel, oil-tempered, 112 inches thick. Shield, face-hardened nickel steel, 10 inches thick, 66 inches high.

Conning tower, a single hollow forging made of nickel steel, oil tempered. Wall thickness is 10 inches. Inside diameter is 83 inches. Height is 82.5 inches. The top plate is made of nickel steel, oil tempered, and is 1.5 inches thick. The shield is face-hardened nickel steel, 10 inches thick and 66 inches high.

Safe

Safe Deposit Armor Plate Vault

Safe Deposit Box Vault

Size, 42 feet 6 inches by 24 feet 6 inches by 9 feet 6 inches high; weight, 450 gross tons.

Size: 42 feet 6 inches long by 24 feet 6 inches wide by 9 feet 6 inches high; weight: 450 gross tons.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Safe door

Front Door, with Time Lock, for Armor Plate Safe Deposit Vault

Front Door with Timed Lock for Armor Plate Safe Deposit Vault

Thickness of front door plate, 1212 inches; weight of door plate, 12,000 pounds.

Thickness of front door plate: 12.5 inches; weight of door plate: 12,000 pounds.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

Courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Company.

Iron foundry

Reproduced by permission of the Philadelphia Museums.

Reproduced with permission from the Philadelphia Museums.

Casting Pig Iron

Casting Pig Iron

Molten iron from the blast furnace in the rear is allowed to flow out on this molding floor in which the shape of the “pig” is molded in the sand. After cooling, the pigs are broken apart and stored.

Molten iron from the blast furnace at the back is allowed to flow onto this molding floor, where the shape of the “pig” is formed in the sand. Once it cools, the pigs are broken apart and stored.

Interior of steel production plant

Courtesy of Indiana Steel Co.

Thanks to Indiana Steel Co.

Open-Hearth Furnaces

Open-Hearth Furnaces

Iron is converted into steel by the basic or open-hearth method in the furnaces shown here. The 100-ton ladles are in position at the tapping side of the furnaces to receive the molten steel.

Iron is turned into steel using the basic or open-hearth method in the furnaces shown here. The 100-ton ladles are in place at the tapping side of the furnaces to collect the molten steel.

Casting steel

Reproduced by permission of the Philadelphia Museums.

Reproduced with permission from the Philadelphia Museums.

Pouring Steel into Molds

Pouring Steel into Molds

The great ladle in the upper portion of this picture is filled with steel at the furnace. A traveling crane then takes it to the train of flat cars on which the molds stand and the steel is poured. After cooling, the molds are removed and the steel in the form of a “billet” is taken to the next process in manufacture.

The big ladle at the top of this picture is filled with steel from the furnace. A traveling crane then moves it to the flat cars where the molds are, and the steel is poured. After cooling, the molds are removed, and the steel is shaped into a “billet” and taken to the next stage of production.

Drawing out a steel beam

Girdling the Earth with Steel

Wrapping the Earth in Steel

A steel beam, red-hot, drawn out 90 feet long in a huge steel mill in Pittsburgh. Steel rolled here may find its place as part of a skyscraper in the Babel of New York, be builded into the framework of a vessel in the shipyards of San Francisco, or help to construct a railroad into the heart of China.

A red-hot steel beam, stretched out 90 feet long in a massive steel mill in Pittsburgh. Steel processed here might end up as part of a skyscraper in the bustling city of New York, be incorporated into the framework of a ship in the shipyards of San Francisco, or help build a railroad into the heart of China.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Press for forging armour plate

Armor Plate Forging Press

Armor Plate Forging Press

The Bethlehem Steel Company installed this great hydraulic press to replace a 135-ton steam hammer, which was abandoned because the shock of its blow disturbed the alignment of the big machines in nearby shops. This press is the largest of its kind in the world, having a capacity of 15,000 tons, induced by pressure as much as 7,000 pounds per square inch in its two hydraulic cylinders of over 5012 inches diameter.

The Bethlehem Steel Company set up this huge hydraulic press to take the place of a 135-ton steam hammer, which was discarded because its impacts threw off the alignment of the large machines in the nearby shops. This press is the biggest of its type in the world, with a capacity of 15,000 tons, created by pressure of up to 7,000 pounds per square inch in its two hydraulic cylinders that are more than 5012 inches in diameter.

Armour plate workshop

Making Armor Plate

Creating Armor Plate

View of the armor plate machine shop at the Bethlehem Steel Company. The varied and complex machining required on armor plate demands tools of enormous size and strength as well as varied purpose. In this shop the different groups of armor are assembled in the position they will occupy on the vessel for which they are intended, and inspected before shipment.

View of the armor plate machine shop at the Bethlehem Steel Company. The diverse and intricate machining needed for armor plate requires tools that are both massive and robust, as well as versatile. In this shop, the different groups of armor are put together in the arrangement they will have on the ship they are meant for, and they are inspected before being shipped out.

Large forged crankshaft

Courtesy of Bethlehem Steel Co.

Thanks to Bethlehem Steel Co.

FORGING

FORGING

One-piece, 90-degree, double-throw crank shaft for 5,400 H. P. gas engine. Diameter of shaft, 37 inches, with 10-inch hole. Length over all, 25 feet 5 inches. Crank webs, 1638 inches thick, 6 feet 112 inches long, 4 feet 1 inch wide. Forged weight of shaft, 133,400 pounds. Finished weight, 83,855 pounds.

One-piece, 90-degree, double-throw crankshaft for a 5,400 HP gas engine. Shaft diameter is 37 inches, with a 10-inch hole. Overall length is 25 feet 5 inches. Crank webs are 1638 inches thick, 6 feet 112 inches long, and 4 feet 1 inch wide. The forged weight of the shaft is 133,400 pounds. The finished weight is 83,855 pounds.


We have always said “a white elephant” when we have meant something we didn’t know what to do with, since the King of Siam first sent a white elephant to a courtier whose fortune he wished to destroy.

We’ve always referred to “a white elephant” when we mean something we didn’t know what to do with, ever since the King of Siam first gave a white elephant to a courtier whose fortune he wanted to ruin.

What do We Mean by “Deviation of the Compass”?

When people speak of “deviation of the compass” they mean the difference of a ship’s compass from the magnetic meridian, caused by the near presence of iron. In iron ships the amount of deviation depends upon the direction, with regard to the magnetic meridian, in which the ship lay when being built. It is least when the ship has been built with her head south. Armor-plated ships should be plated with their head in a different direction from that in which they lay when built.

When people talk about "compass deviation," they are referring to the difference between a ship's compass and the magnetic meridian, which is caused by the nearby presence of iron. For iron ships, the degree of deviation depends on the direction—relative to the magnetic meridian—in which the ship was positioned during construction. The deviation is minimal when the ship is built facing south. Armor-plated ships should be constructed with their head pointed in a different direction from where they were positioned during building.

The mode now generally employed to correct deviation is by introducing on board ship masses of iron and magnets to neutralize the action of the ship’s magnetism so far as possible.

The current method used to fix deviation is by bringing on board ships large amounts of iron and magnets to counteract the ship’s magnetism as much as possible.

Compasses are sometimes carried on masts in iron vessels as a means of removing them from the disturbing influence of the iron of the hull. In this position they serve as standards of comparison for the binnacle compass.

Compasses are sometimes placed on masts in iron ships to keep them away from the magnetic interference of the hull. In this position, they act as benchmarks for the binnacle compass.

Wooden ships are also affected, though in a far less degree, by the direction in which they lie when building.

Wooden ships are also influenced, though to a much lesser extent, by the direction they are positioned during construction.


The Story in the Making of a Pair of Shoes[46]

The covering and protection of the feet has been a necessity in all but the warm climates for very many centuries, various articles being used for this purpose. Leather is now very generally employed, though wood is often used in Holland and France and paper in China and Japan. The moccasin of the American Indian was made of untanned deer skin. The first historical mention of a shoe is in the Old Testament, where Abraham refused to take as much as a “shoe-latchet” from the King of Sodom. This probably meant a sandal, leather strapped to the foot, though the Jews wore shoes as well, and both shoes and sandals were worn in Greece and Rome. Both in ancient and modern times the styles of shoes worn have varied greatly, fashion taking hold of them. In the reigns of the English kings Henry I and Stephen, the people of the court wore shoes with long points stuffed with tow and made to coil like a ram’s horn, and by the time of Richard II the points had grown so long as to reach the knee, to which they were fastened by silver or gold chains. In the eighteenth century ladies wore shoes with absurdly high heels, a ridiculous fashion which has come back within our own times. An improvement which was adopted in the early nineteenth century was that of making shoes right and left. Boots, which have at times been much worn, are a variety of shoe lengthened to protect part of the legs.

The covering and protection of feet have been necessary in all but warm climates for many centuries, using various materials for this purpose. Leather is now commonly used, though wood is often utilized in Holland and France and paper in China and Japan. The moccasin of the American Indian was made from untanned deer skin. The first historical mention of a shoe is in the Old Testament, where Abraham refused to take even a “shoe-latchet” from the King of Sodom. This likely referred to a sandal, leather strapped to the foot, although the Jews also wore shoes, and both shoes and sandals were worn in Greece and Rome. Throughout history, the styles of shoes have varied greatly, as fashion has influenced them. During the reigns of English kings Henry I and Stephen, the court people wore shoes with long points stuffed with tow, curling like a ram's horn. By the time of Richard II, the points had grown so long they reached the knee, fastened with silver or gold chains. In the eighteenth century, women wore shoes with absurdly high heels, a ridiculous trend that has returned in recent times. An improvement adopted in the early nineteenth century was the creation of shoes designed for the right and left feet. Boots, which have sometimes been widely worn, are a type of shoe that extends to protect part of the legs.

Until within a recent period the trade of shoemaker was an active one, all boots and shoes being made by hand. At the present time, however, the old-time shoemaker, with his bench, lapstone, last and awls has almost gone out of business, except as a cobbler, mending instead of making having become his usual occupation. In his place has come the factory hand, nearly all footwear being now a product of machinery, and this of greatly varied and effective character. In this form shoemaking has become a thriving industry in New England and in some other parts of the United States. This method has greatly decreased the cost of shoes, invention having so hastened and cheapened all its processes that the number of shoes that it would take an old-time shoemaker a year to make can be turned out in a few hours by modern machinery.

Until recently, the trade of shoemaking was quite active, with all boots and shoes being handmade. However, these days, the traditional shoemaker, with his bench, lapstone, lasts, and awls, has mostly disappeared, now working mainly as a cobbler who repairs rather than makes shoes. In his place, factory workers have taken over, as almost all footwear is now produced by machines, which are varied and highly effective. This shift has transformed shoemaking into a booming industry in New England and some other areas of the United States. This method has significantly lowered shoe prices, as inventions have streamlined and reduced the cost of all processes, allowing what an old-time shoemaker would take a year to produce to be made in just a few hours by modern machinery.

Shoemaking by Machine.

The variety of inventions used in shoe factories is rather bewildering, every one of the many processes having a machine of its own, and each of these doing its work with admirable precision. We can name here only the more important of these implements.

The range of inventions used in shoe factories is quite overwhelming, with each of the numerous processes having its own machine, and every machine doing its job with impressive accuracy. We'll only mention some of the more significant tools here.

First comes the clicking machine. This has a cutting board resembling that used by the hand workmen. Over this is a beam containing a cutting die under which the leather is passed. At every descent of the die a piece of leather is cut out of the skin of the size and shape needed for the upper leather of a shoe. Thus in an instant is done what was slowly done by a sharp knife moved around a pattern in the old method.

First comes the clicking machine. This has a cutting board that looks like the one used by hand workers. Above it is a beam with a cutting die that the leather is passed under. Each time the die comes down, a piece of leather is cut from the skin in the size and shape needed for the upper part of a shoe. This instantly accomplishes what used to be done slowly with a sharp knife moving around a pattern in the old method.

Old-time shoemaker Amazeen skiving machine
In the Days of the Awl, Lapstone, and Hammer Amazeen Skiving Machine
Section of shoe Insole tacker
Cross-Section of a Goodyear Welt Shoe, Displaying the Different Parts and How They Relate to Each Other Shoe Insole Tacking Machine
Clicking machine
Perfect Clicker Machine
Eyeletting machine Lacing machine
Duplex Eyelet Machine Ensign Lacing Machine
Pulling-over machine Upper trimming machine
Rex Upper Trimming Machine
Tip punching machine
Rex Stopper Machine Crown Tip Punch Machine
Lasting machine
Bed Making Machine
Universal inseam trimming machine Tack pulling and resetting machine Hand method welt lasting machine
Goodyear Universal Inseam Trimming Machine Tack-Pulling and Resetting Machine Consolidated Hand Method Welt Lasting Machine
Sole laying machine Channel cementing machine
Sole Laying Machine Upgrade Star Channel Cementing Machine
Sole leveling machine Nailing machine
Goodyear Automatic Sole Leveler American Lightning Nailer Machine

The piece of leather thus cut out is next passed under the skiving machine, which shaves down its edges to a bevel, the thinned edge being then folded, after which the toe caps are passed through a punching machine which cuts a series of ornamental perforations along the edge of the cap. The linings of the shoe are then prepared and put in place and the whole goes to the stitchers, by which all the parts of the upper are united. This is done by a range of machines, which perform the varied operations with wonderful rapidity and accuracy. The eyelets are next added by a machine which places them in both sides of the shoe at the same time and directly opposite each other, this operation finishing the upper part of the shoe.

The piece of leather that was cut out is then placed under the skiving machine, which trims the edges to a bevel. The thinner edge is then folded, after which the toe caps go through a punching machine that creates a series of decorative holes along the edge of the cap. The linings of the shoe are then prepared and positioned, and everything is sent to the stitchers, where all parts of the upper are joined together. This is done using various machines that carry out the different tasks with amazing speed and precision. The eyelets are then added by a machine that installs them on both sides of the shoe simultaneously and directly across from each other, completing the upper part of the shoe.

The sole leather portions of the shoe pass through another series of machines, being cut from sides of sole leather by the dieing-out machine, cut to exact shape by the rounding machine and to exact thickness by the splitting machine, and then toughened by passing under a heavy rolling machine. These and other machines complete the soles and heels, which are finally sent to the making or bottoming room, where the completed shoe uppers await them.

The leather parts of the shoe go through another set of machines, being cut from pieces of leather by the die-cutting machine, shaped exactly by the rounding machine, and made to the right thickness by the splitting machine. They are then toughened by going under a heavy rolling machine. These and other machines finish the soles and heels, which are eventually sent to the making or bottoming room, where the finished shoe tops are ready for them.

The first process here is that of the ensign lacing machine, which puts a strong twine through the eyelets and ties it in an accurate manner. This is done very swiftly and exactly, its purpose being to hold the parts of the shoe in their normal position while the shoe is being completed. The last, made of wood, is now put in place and tacked fast by the insole tacking machine, when the upper is placed over it and fastened by two tacks to hold it in place. Then comes the pulling-over machine, the pincers of which draw the leather securely against the wood of the last, to which it is fastened by other tacks. These tacks in the upper are driven only part way in, so that they may be easily drawn out when no longer needed.

The first process here is the ensign lacing machine, which threads a strong twine through the eyelets and ties it neatly. This is done quickly and accurately, with the purpose of keeping the shoe parts in their normal position while the shoe is being finished. The last, made of wood, is then positioned and secured by the insole tacking machine, after which the upper is placed over it and fastened with two tacks to hold it in place. Next is the pulling-over machine, whose pincers pull the leather tightly against the wood of the last, securing it with additional tacks. These tacks in the upper are inserted only partway so that they can be easily removed when they are no longer needed.

The welt lasting machine next takes the job in hand, it being almost human-like in the evenness and tightness with which it draws the leather around the last, other tacks being driven partly in to hold it in place. A second lasting machine of different kind, draws it around the toe and heel. Then comes the upper trimming machines, which cuts away the surplus parts of the leather, the Rex pounding machine, which hammers it around the heel, the tack pulling machine which removes the lasting tacks and puts in others to hold the new placed leather, and the upper stapling machine, which forms a little staple fastening from wire which securely holds the shoe upper to the channel lip of the insole.

The welt lasting machine then takes over, functioning almost like a human in how evenly and tightly it pulls the leather around the last, with other tacks being partially driven in to keep it in place. A second, different type of lasting machine pulls the leather around the toe and heel. Next comes the upper trimming machines, which cut away excess leather, followed by the Rex pounding machine, which hammers it around the heel, the tack pulling machine that removes the lasting tacks and puts in new ones to hold the freshly placed leather, and finally the upper stapling machine, which creates small staples from wire that securely attach the shoe upper to the channel lip of the insole.

The shoe is now ready to receive the welt, a narrow strip of prepared leather which is sewed along the edge of the shoe and holds all its parts firmly together. This used to be one of the most difficult tasks in hand-work, but is done rapidly and exactly by this machine. After this all protruding parts of the welt and upper are trimmed off by another machine, the insole tack pulling machine removes all the remaining temporary tacks, and the welt-beating and slashing machines beat the welt with little hammers till it stands out evenly from the side of the shoe.

The shoe is now set to get the welt, a narrow strip of prepared leather that’s sewn along the edge of the shoe to keep all its parts securely together. This used to be one of the toughest tasks in handwork, but this machine does it quickly and accurately. After that, another machine trims off all the excess bits of the welt and upper, the insole tack pulling machine removes any leftover temporary tacks, and the welt-beating and slashing machines hammer the welt until it stands out evenly from the side of the shoe.

It may seem as if the number of machines engaged in this work are almost beyond number, but there are nearly as many more to come. In fact, a factory shoe in many cases is not completed until 170 machines and 210 pairs of hands have taken part in putting it together and getting it into shape for the wearer, and each of these machines works with an accuracy which no hand-work can equal. We have so far witnessed the assembling of the several parts of the shoe into one connected whole. The remaining processes must be run over more rapidly.

It might seem like there are almost too many machines involved in this work to count, but even more are on the way. In reality, a factory-made shoe often isn’t finished until 170 machines and 210 pairs of hands have contributed to putting it together and shaping it for the wearer, and each of these machines operates with an accuracy that no handwork can match. So far, we’ve seen how the various parts of the shoe come together as a single unit. The next steps need to be done more quickly.

There is a sole-laying machine, a rounding and channeling machine, a loose nailing machine (the latter driving nails into the heel at the rate of 350 per minute), a heel seat rounding machine, and various others, one sewing the welt to the shoe, a leveling machine, a second nailing machine, which does the final work of attaching the heel to the shoe, and so on somewhat indefinitely.

There is a sole-laying machine, a rounding and channeling machine, a loose nailing machine (which drives nails into the heel at a speed of 350 per minute), a heel seat rounding machine, and various others, one that sews the welt to the shoe, a leveling machine, a second nailing machine that does the final work of attaching the heel to the shoe, and so on, continuing indefinitely.

Edge trimming machine Finishing shaft
Edge Trimming Tool Climax Finishing Shaft
Heel seat rounding machine Nailing machine Stitch separating machine
Goodyear Heel Seat Rounding Machine Nail Gun The Hadaway Stitch Machine
Buffing machine Stamping machine
Naumkeag Polishing Machine Regent Stamp Machine
Rounding and channeling machine
Goodyear Universal Rounding and Channeling Machine
Welt and turn shoe machine
Goodyear Welt and Turn Shoe Machine
Stitch and upper cleaning machine Twin edge setting machine
Stitching and Upper Cleaning Machine Twin Edge Setting Machine
Outsole rapid lockstitch machine
Goodyear Outsole Quick Lockstitch Machine
Creasing machine Shoe treeing machine
Better Vamp Creasing Machine Miller Shoe-Tree Machine
Stages in shoe production

The Evolution of a Goodyear Welt Shoe

The Development of a Goodyear Welt Shoe

1. A last. 2. An upper. 3. An Insole. 4. Shoe lasted and ready to have welt sewed on. 5. Welt partly sewed on. 6. Welt entirely sewed on the shoe. 7. An outsole. 8. Shoe with outsole laid and rounded; channel lip turned up ready to be stitched. 9. Shoe with sole stitched on. 10. Shoe with heel in place. 11. Heel trimmed and shoe ready for finishing.

1. A last. 2. An upper. 3. An insole. 4. Shoe lasted and ready for the welt to be sewn on. 5. Welt partly sewn on. 6. Welt completely sewn on the shoe. 7. An outsole. 8. Shoe with outsole laid and rounded; channel lip turned up ready to be stitched. 9. Shoe with sole stitched on. 10. Shoe with heel attached. 11. Heel trimmed and shoe ready for finishing.

The remaining machines have to do with the final finishing. They include trimmers, stitch separators, edge setters, buffers, finishers, cleaners, stampers, shoe treers, creasers, etc., each playing a part of some importance in giving a final finish to the shoe and making it presentable to the wearer. The whole operation, as will be seen, is a highly complicated one, and is remarkably effective in preparing an article that shall appeal to the salesman and purchaser and prove satisfactory when put into use.

The remaining machines are involved in the final finishing process. They include trimmers, stitch separators, edge setters, buffers, finishers, cleaners, stampers, shoe trees, creasers, and others, each playing an important role in giving the shoe a final finish and making it ready for the wearer. The entire operation, as will be see, is quite complex and incredibly effective in creating a product that appeals to both the salesperson and the buyer, ensuring satisfaction once it’s used.

Such is the complicated process of making a shoe by machinery. It would be hard to find any machine process that surpasses it in complexity and the number of separate machines involved. Poor old St. Crispin would certainly expire with envy if he could see his favorite thus taken out of the hands of his artisans and the shoe whirled rapidly through a host of odd but effective contrivances on the way to become made fit for wear.

Such is the complicated process of making a shoe with machines. It would be hard to find any machine process that is more complex and involves as many different machines. Poor old St. Crispin would definitely be green with envy if he could see his beloved craft taken out of the hands of artisans and the shoe being quickly processed through a bunch of strange but effective devices on its way to being ready for wear.


What is “Standard Gold”?

Gold is one of the heaviest of the metals, and not being liable to be injured by exposure to the air, it is well fitted to be used as coin. Its ductility and malleability are very remarkable. It may be beaten into leaves so exceedingly thin that one grain in weight will cover fifty-six square inches, such leaves having the thickness of only 1282000th part of an inch. It is also extremely ductile; a single grain may be drawn into a wire 500 feet long, and an ounce of gold covering a silver wire is capable of being extended upwards of 1,300 miles. It may also be melted and remelted with scarcely any diminution of its quantity. It is soluble in nitromuriatic acid and in a solution of chlorine. Its specific gravity is 19.3, so that it is about nineteen times heavier than water. The fineness of gold is estimated by carats, pure gold being twenty-four carats fine.

Gold is one of the heaviest metals, and since it doesn’t get damaged by exposure to air, it’s ideal for use as coinage. Its ductility and malleability are impressive. It can be pounded into sheets so incredibly thin that just one grain in weight can cover fifty-six square inches, with those sheets only being 1282000th of an inch thick. It’s also very ductile; a single grain can be stretched into a wire 500 feet long, and an ounce of gold coated over a silver wire can be extended over 1,300 miles. It can be melted and remelted with hardly any loss in quantity. It dissolves in nitromuriatic acid and in a chlorine solution. Its specific gravity is 19.3, making it about nineteen times heavier than water. The purity of gold is measured in carats, with pure gold being twenty-four carats fine.

Jeweler’s gold is usually a mixture of gold and copper in the proportions of three-fourths of pure gold with one-fourth of copper. Gold is seldom used for any purpose in a state of perfect purity on account of its softness, but is combined with some other metal to render it harder. Standard gold, or the alloy used for the gold coinage of Britain, consists of twenty-two parts of gold and two of copper (being thus twenty-two carats fine).

Jeweler's gold is typically a blend of gold and copper, with three parts pure gold to one part copper. Gold isn't often used in its purest form because it's too soft, so it’s mixed with other metals to make it more durable. Standard gold, or the alloy used for British gold coins, is made up of twenty-two parts gold and two parts copper, making it twenty-two carats fine.

Articles of jewelry in gold are made of every degree of fineness up to eighteen carats, i. e., eighteen parts of gold to six of alloy. The alloy of gold and silver is found already formed in nature, and is that most generally known. It is distinguishable from that of copper by possessing a paler yellow than pure gold, while the copper alloy has a color bordering upon reddish yellow. Palladium, rhodium and tellurium are also met with as alloys of gold.

Gold jewelry comes in various levels of purity, up to eighteen carats, i.e., eighteen parts gold to six parts alloy. The natural alloy of gold and silver is the most commonly recognized. It can be identified by its lighter yellow shade compared to pure gold, whereas the copper alloy has a color that leans toward reddish yellow. Palladium, rhodium, and tellurium can also be found as gold alloys.

Gold has been found in smaller or larger quantities in nearly all parts of the world. It is commonly found in reefs or veins among quartz, and in alluvial deposits; it is separated, in the former case, by quarrying, crushing, washing and treatment with mercury. The rock is crushed by machinery and then treated with mercury, which dissolves the gold, forming a liquid amalgam; after which the mercury is volatilized, and the gold left behind; or the crushed ore is fused with metallic lead, which dissolves out the gold, the lead being afterwards separated by the process of cupellation.

Gold can be found in both small and large amounts nearly everywhere in the world. It's typically located in reefs or veins within quartz, and in alluvial deposits. In the first case, it's extracted through quarrying, crushing, washing, and treatment with mercury. The rock is crushed with machines, then treated with mercury, which dissolves the gold to create a liquid amalgam; afterward, the mercury is vaporized, leaving the gold behind. Alternatively, the crushed ore can be melted with metallic lead, which dissolves the gold, and the lead is then separated through cupellation.

By the “cyanide process,” in which cyanide of potassium is used as a solvent for the gold, low-grade ores can be profitably worked. In alluvial deposits it is extracted by washing, in dust grains, laminæ or nuggets.

By the “cyanide process,” which uses potassium cyanide as a solvent for gold, low-grade ores can be profitably processed. In alluvial deposits, it is extracted by washing, in dust particles, thin layers, or nuggets.

In modern times large supplies of gold were obtained after the discovery of America from Peru, Bolivia, and other parts of the New World. Till the discovery of gold in California, a chief source of the supply was the Ural Mountains in Russia. An immense increase in the total production of gold throughout the world was caused by the discovery of gold in California in 1848, and that of the equally rich gold fields of Australia in 1851. The yield from both sources has considerably decreased. Other sections of the United States have of late years proved prolific sources of gold, especially Colorado, which now surpasses California in yield, and Alaska, which equals it. Canada has gold fields in several localities, the richest being those of the Klondike.

In modern times, large amounts of gold were acquired after the discovery of America from Peru, Bolivia, and other parts of the New World. Until gold was discovered in California, the main source of supply was the Ural Mountains in Russia. The discovery of gold in California in 1848 led to a massive increase in global gold production, followed by the equally rich gold fields of Australia in 1851. The output from both sources has significantly decreased. In recent years, other regions of the United States have become major sources of gold, especially Colorado, which now outproduces California, and Alaska, which matches its output. Canada also has gold fields in several areas, with the richest being those in Klondike.

Casting gold ingots

Casting Ingots

Casting Metal Blocks

Rolling room

Rolling Room

Rolling Room

The upper view shows the melting room in the United States Mint, Philadelphia. The man at the right is about to pour hot metal into the iron molds. The lower view is in the coining department, where the ingots such as are seen on the truck in foreground, are rolled into long strips of the thickness of the several coins, and then cut into blanks or planchets.

The upper view shows the melting room at the U.S. Mint in Philadelphia. The man on the right is about to pour hot metal into the iron molds. The lower view is in the coining department, where the ingots, like those on the truck in the foreground, are rolled into long strips the thickness of various coins, and then cut into blanks or planchets.

[450]At present the richest gold field in the world is that of South Africa, which yielded in 1910 a value of $175,000,000, somewhat exceeding the combined yield of the United States and Australia. Russia and Mexico followed these in yield. The total production throughout the world amounted to over $450,000,000, of which the United States produced $96,000,000.

[450]Currently, the richest gold field in the world is in South Africa, which produced gold worth $175 million in 1910, slightly more than the combined output of the United States and Australia. Russia and Mexico followed in terms of production. The total gold production worldwide reached over $450 million, with the United States contributing $96 million.

What are Cyclones?

A cyclone is a circular or rotatory storm, or system of winds, varying from 50 to 500 miles in diameter, revolving around a center, which advances at a rate that may be as high as forty miles an hour, and towards which the winds tend.

A cyclone is a circular or rotating storm, or a system of winds, ranging from 50 to 500 miles in diameter, spinning around a center that can move at speeds of up to forty miles per hour, and toward which the winds are directed.

Cyclones of greatest violence occur within the tropics, and they revolve in opposite directions in the two hemispheres—in the southern with, and in the northern against, the hands of a watch—in consequence of which, and the progression of the center, the strength of the storm in the northern hemisphere is greater on the south of the line of progression and smaller on the north than it would if the center were stationary, the case being reversed in the southern hemisphere.

Cyclones with the most intense violence happen in the tropics, and they spin in opposite directions in the two hemispheres—clockwise in the southern hemisphere and counterclockwise in the northern hemisphere. Because of this and the movement of the center, the storm's strength in the northern hemisphere is stronger to the south of the center’s path and weaker to the north than it would be if the center were stationary, with the reverse being true in the southern hemisphere.

An anti-cyclone is a storm of opposite character, the general tendency of the winds in it being away from the center, while it also shifts within comparatively small limits. Cyclones are preceded by a singular calm and a great fall of the barometer.

An anti-cyclone is a storm with the opposite characteristics, with the winds generally moving away from the center and shifting within relatively small limits. Cyclones are marked by a unique calm and a significant drop in the barometer.

What Metals can be Drawn into Wire Best?

The wire-drawing of metals depends on the property of solid bodies, which renders them capable of being extended without any separation of their parts, while their thickness is diminished. This property is called “ductility.”

The process of drawing metals into wires relies on the characteristic of solid materials that allows them to be stretched without breaking apart, while their thickness is reduced. This characteristic is known as "ductility."

The following is nearly the order of ductility of the metals which possess the property in the highest degree, that of the first mentioned being the greatest: gold, silver, platinum, iron, copper, zinc, tin, lead, nickel, palladium, cadmium.

The following is almost the order of ductility for the metals that have this property to the highest degree, with the first mentioned being the most ductile: gold, silver, platinum, iron, copper, zinc, tin, lead, nickel, palladium, cadmium.

Dr. Wollaston succeeded in obtaining a wire of platinum only 130000th of an inch in diameter. The ductility of glass at high temperatures seems to be unlimited, while its flexibility increases in proportion to the fineness to which its threads are drawn.

Dr. Wollaston managed to produce a wire of platinum that was only 130000th of an inch wide. The ductility of glass at high temperatures appears to be limitless, and its flexibility grows as the threads are drawn finer.

How are Cocoanuts Used to Help Our Warships?

The fibrous husks of cocoanuts are prepared in such a way as to form “cellulose,” which is used for the protection of warships, preventing the inflow of water through shot holes.

The fibrous husks of coconuts are processed to create "cellulose," which is used to protect warships by preventing water from coming in through bullet holes.

The United States adopted the preparation for this purpose in 1892.

The United States started preparing for this purpose in 1892.

It is very light and compressible and when tightly packed between the steel plating and the side of the vessel will expand when wet and fill up the space through which a shot may have passed.

It is very lightweight and compressible, and when tightly packed between the steel plating and the side of the vessel, it expands when wet and fills the space where a bullet might have passed through.

Another and cheaper product experimented with is the pith of the cornstalk, which is much lighter than the cocoanut fiber and serves the same purpose.

Another, more affordable product that's been tested is the pith of the cornstalk, which is significantly lighter than coconut fiber and serves the same function.

How did the Dollar Sign Originate?

The sign, Dollar sign with two vertical strokes, used in this country to signify a dollar, is supposed to date from the time of the pillar dollar in Spain. This was known as the “Piece of Eight” (meaning eight reals), the curve being a partial representation of the figure 8. The two vertical strokes are thought to represent the Pillars of Hercules, which were stamped upon the coin itself.

The symbol, Dollar sign with two vertical strokes, used in this country to represent a dollar, is believed to have originated from the pillar dollar in Spain. This was referred to as the “Piece of Eight” (meaning eight reals), with the curve being a partial representation of the number 8. The two vertical lines are thought to symbolize the Pillars of Hercules, which were stamped on the coin itself.


Pictorial Story of Fire Apparatus

Motor truck with ladder

Motor Driven Aerial Truck[47]

Motorized Aerial Truck[47]

The 66-foot ladder of this truck is raised by the motor which drives the machine. A full equipment of scaling ladders and fire-fighting apparatus is carried.

The 66-foot ladder on this truck is raised by the motor that powers the machine. It carries a complete set of scaling ladders and fire-fighting equipment.

Manned motor truck with pump and hose

Motor Fire Engine and Hose Truck[47]

Motor Fire Engine and Hose Truck[47]

One of the latest fire-fighting units. A powerful gasoline engine supplies the motive power and drives the pump which has a capacity of 700 gallons per minute. The machine also acts as a hose cart and carries a full complement of firemen.

One of the newest fire-fighting units. A strong gasoline engine provides the power and drives the pump, which has a capacity of 700 gallons per minute. The machine also serves as a hose cart and carries a full team of firefighters.

Hand-operated fire engine

A Crane Neck Hand Fire Engine[48]

A Crane Neck Hand Fire Truck[48]

This engine was manned by sixty trained men and under expert operation would throw a stream of 1.53 gallons per stroke more than 200 feet.

This engine was operated by sixty trained personnel and, under expert handling, could project a stream of 1.53 gallons per stroke over 200 feet.

First steam-powered fire engine

The First Steam Fire Engine Built in 1841[48]

The First Steam Fire Engine Created in 1841[48]

Three-horse fire engine at full speed

The Splendid Horses by which the Hand-Drawn Fire Apparatus were Supplanted Are in Turn Giving Way to Powerful Motor Engines and Trucks.[49]

The incredible horses that took over from the hand-drawn fire engines are now being replaced by powerful motor engines and trucks.[49]

Steam-powered fire engine

An Old-Time LaFrance Piston Steam Fire Engine[49]

A Vintage LaFrance Piston Steam Fire Engine[49]

Built in 1894, at which time it had a capacity of 900 gallons per minute. This steam engine was equipped with a LaFrance boiler. This particular engine was in service in Superior, Wis., and was in continuous service pumping water on a coal fire night and day from November 18, 1913, to February 18, 1914 (just exactly three months), during which time it was only shut down twice to replace burned-out grates and three times to replace broken springs. During all of this time this steamer was incased in snow and ice.

Built in 1894, it had a capacity of 900 gallons per minute at that time. This steam engine was equipped with a LaFrance boiler. This particular engine operated in Superior, Wisconsin, continuously pumping water on a coal fire 24/7 from November 18, 1913, to February 18, 1914 (exactly three months), during which it was only shut down twice to replace burned-out grates and three times to replace broken springs. Throughout this period, this steamer was surrounded by snow and ice.

Gasoline powered truck with steam powered fire engine

Gasoline Two-Wheel Front-Drive, First Size Steam Fire Engine[50]

Gasoline Two-Wheel Front-Drive, First Size Steam Fire Engine[50]

Seventy horse-power, four-cylinder motor; speed, 35 miles per hour; locomotive bell and hand-operated siren horn; boiler, 36 x 66 inches; suction hose, 2 lengths, 412-inch diameter; lanterns, three, fire department standard; hydrant connections; carrying capacity, four men.[50]

Seventy horsepower, four-cylinder engine; speed, 35 miles per hour; train bell and manually operated siren horn; boiler, 36 x 66 inches; suction hose, 2 lengths, 4½-inch diameter; lanterns, three, fire department standard; hydrant connections; carrying capacity, four men.[50]

Chemical engine hose car

Combination Chemical Engine and Hose Car

Combined Chemical Engine and Hose Car

Seventy horse-power, four-cylinder motor; speed, 60 miles per hour; hose capacity, 1,200 feet 212-inch hose; chemical cylinder, one 40-gallon capacity; chemical hose, 200 feet 34-inch chemical hose; acid receptacles, two; one 10-inch electric searchlight; locomotive bell and hand-operated siren horn; extinguishers, two 3-gallon Babcock, fire department standard; ladders, one 20-foot extension ladder, one 12-foot roof ladder with folding hooks; lanterns, four, fire department standard; axe, one, fire department standard; pike pole, one; crowbar, one of steel held by snaps; carrying capacity, seven men.

Seventy horsepower, four-cylinder engine; speed, 60 miles per hour; hose capacity, 1,200 feet of 2½-inch hose; chemical tank, one with a 40-gallon capacity; chemical hose, 200 feet of ¾-inch chemical hose; acid containers, two; one 10-inch electric searchlight; locomotive bell and hand-operated siren horn; fire extinguishers, two 3-gallon Babcock, fire department standard; ladders, one 20-foot extension ladder, one 12-foot roof ladder with folding hooks; lanterns, four, fire department standard; axe, one, fire department standard; pike pole, one; crowbar, one made of steel held by snaps; carrying capacity, seven people.

Chemical engine hose car

Combination Chemical and Hose Car

Chemical and Hose Combo Car

Equipped with Junior Pump. This pump is intended to boost the pressure of the chemical tank and can also be used as an auxiliary pump. On this type of steamer the pump will deliver 250 gallons of water at 120 pounds pump pressure.

Equipped with Junior Pump. This pump is designed to increase the pressure of the chemical tank and can also serve as an auxiliary pump. On this type of steamer, the pump will deliver 250 gallons of water at 120 pounds of pump pressure.

Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

Chemical engine hose car

Combination Chemical Engine and Hose Car

Combined Chemical Engine and Hose Vehicle

Equipped with hose reel instead of hose basket as in other types illustrated.

Equipped with a hose reel instead of a hose basket like in the other types shown.

Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

Completely equipped fire engine

The Body of This Car has a Capacity of 800 Feet of 212-inch Fire Hose and is also Equipped with a 40-gallon Tank, with Chemical Hose, Fire Extinguisher and Extension Ladder.[51]

The body of this car can hold 800 feet of 2½-inch fire hose and is also equipped with a 40-gallon tank, a chemical hose, a fire extinguisher, and an extension ladder.[51]

Ladder truck

Gasoline Two-Wheel Front-Drive Aerial Truck[51]

Gas Two-Wheel Front-Drive Aerial Truck __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

One hundred horse-power; six-cylinder motor; speed, 25 miles per hour; locomotive bell and hand-operated siren horn; extinguishers, two 3-gallon Babcock, fire department standard; lanterns, four, fire department standard; axes, four, fire department standard; wall picks, two; crowbars, two; shovels, two; wire cutter, one; door opener, one; tin roof cutter, one; pitchforks, two; battering ram, one; Manila rope, tackle and snatch block; pull-down hook with pole, chain and rope; rubber buckets, four; crotch poles, two; pike poles, six, assorted lengths; wire basket, one under frame; one 10-inch electric searchlight.

One hundred horsepower; six-cylinder engine; speed, 25 miles per hour; locomotive bell and hand-operated siren horn; extinguishers, two 3-gallon Babcock, fire department standard; lanterns, four, fire department standard; axes, four, fire department standard; wall picks, two; crowbars, two; shovels, two; wire cutter, one; door opener, one; tin roof cutter, one; pitchforks, two; battering ram, one; Manila rope, tackle and snatch block; pull-down hook with pole, chain and rope; rubber buckets, four; crotch poles, two; pike poles, six, assorted lengths; wire basket, one under frame; one 10-inch electric searchlight.

Mobile water tower fire engine

Gasoline Two-Wheel Bevel-Gear Front-Drive Water Tower[51]

Gasoline Two-Wheel Bevel Gear Front-Drive Water Tower[51]

One hundred horse-power; six-cylinder motor; speed, 25 miles per hour; one 10-inch electric searchlight; locomotive bell and hand-operated siren horn; deck turret, one, mounted; nozzle tips, three for deck turret, 112-inch, 134-inch, 2-inch; three for tower nozzle, 112-inch, 134-inch, 2-inch; hose, one 35-foot length, 4-inch cotton, rubber lined; lanterns, two, fire department standard; axes, two heavy pick back, fire department standard; crowbar, one of steel, held by snaps.

One hundred horsepower; six-cylinder engine; speed, 25 miles per hour; one 10-inch electric searchlight; locomotive bell and hand-operated siren horn; one deck turret, mounted; nozzle tips: three for deck turret at 1½-inch, 1¾-inch, and 2-inch; three for tower nozzle at 1½-inch, 1¾-inch, and 2-inch; one 35-foot length of 4-inch cotton hose, rubber-lined; two lanterns, fire department standard; two heavy pick-back axes, fire department standard; one steel crowbar with snaps.


The Story of the Taking of Food From the Air[52]

What is the greatest discovery of the last twenty-five years? Probably you will say the wireless telegraph, the flying machine, moving pictures or the phonograph, but it would be none of these, according to the Scientific American. This publication discussed at great length the subject of what invention of the last twenty-five years was of greatest value to mankind. First place was given not to the wonderful inventions that are so large in the public eye, but to the fixation of nitrogen from the air for fertilizer purposes. Why? Simply because this discovery stands between man and starvation. Other inventions are vastly important, but this one is vital. Looking at it from the broadest view there can be no other decision. The time is here when to feed the world is becoming a more and more difficult problem.

What is the biggest discovery of the past twenty-five years? You might think it’s the wireless telegraph, airplanes, movies, or the phonograph, but according to Scientific American, it's none of these. This publication extensively talked about which invention from the last twenty-five years has had the most significant value for humanity. The top spot wasn't given to the amazing inventions that catch the public's attention, but to the process of fixing nitrogen from the air for fertilizer. Why is that? Simply because this discovery prevents starvation. Other inventions are incredibly important, but this one is essential. From a broad perspective, there really is no other conclusion. We have reached a point where feeding the world is becoming an increasingly challenging issue.

Crop of fertilised tobacco

Wrapper Leaf Tobacco Crop Fertilized with Cyanamid Mixtures. Grown in Hatfield, Mass.

Wrapper leaf tobacco crop fertilized with cyanamide mixtures. Grown in Hatfield, MA.

During the past ten years our population has increased at the rate of two per cent per annum, while our crop production has increased only one-half as fast. In six years the number of beef cattle produced in this country has fallen off about five per cent per annum. The cost of foodstuffs recently has been increasing at the rate of five per cent per annum. The hardships experienced by wage-earners, particularly in the United States, have been very great in view of the fact that the cost of food increased more rapidly than wages—at a rate approximately double. The same tendencies apply with some modifications to the clothing of mankind. These facts point to the necessity of increasing the yields both of the food crops and the crops that are used in the making of clothing.

Over the last ten years, our population has grown at a rate of two percent per year, while our crop production has only increased by half that. In the past six years, the number of beef cattle produced in this country has dropped by about five percent each year. Recently, food costs have been rising at a rate of five percent per year. Wage-earners, especially in the United States, have faced significant hardships because food prices have climbed much faster than wages—about double the rate. The same trends, with some variations, are true for clothing as well. These facts highlight the urgent need to boost the yields of both food crops and the crops used for making clothing.

The problem of decreasing the cost of living has been given far more attention abroad than it has in this country, owing to the much greater density of population in the principal nations of Europe. For a long time it has been known that plants require food the same as animals and human beings. Without food plants cannot live and grow, and just to the extent that plant food is present in the soil, to that extent will a crop be produced. The most important of plant foods is nitrogen. While the earth is literally bathed in nitrogen, this element is found to only a very slight degree in the soil. That is to say, the air which we breathe and in which we move is four-fifths nitrogen, yet in the richest soil there is seldom more than one-tenth or two-tenths of one per cent of nitrogen. Put on a wheat crop one pound[459] of nitrogen and you can take off twenty pounds more wheat and forty pounds more straw than you could if you failed to make this application. One pound of nitrogen properly applied to a cornfield will add thirty-five pounds to the crop; one pound of nitrogen will produce one hundred pounds of increase in the potato crop; one pound of nitrogen will produce five pounds of cotton, without any extra labor being devoted to the production of the crop. Nitrogen is the heart and soul of the problem of growing more crops and cheaper crops. Take any nation that produces large crop yields per acre and you will find that the nation that uses the most nitrogen per acre grows the largest crops.

The issue of lowering the cost of living has received much more attention in other countries than here, mainly due to the higher population density in key European nations. It has long been recognized that plants need nutrients just like animals and humans. Without nutrients, plants cannot survive or thrive, and the amount of crops produced directly depends on the nutrients available in the soil. The most crucial nutrient for plants is nitrogen. Although the atmosphere is rich in nitrogen, this element is only minimally present in the soil. Specifically, while the air we breathe is made up of about 80% nitrogen, even the most fertile soil rarely contains more than 0.1% to 0.2% nitrogen. If you apply one pound[459] of nitrogen to a wheat crop, you can harvest twenty pounds more wheat and forty pounds more straw than if you didn’t apply it. One pound of nitrogen applied to a cornfield can increase the yield by thirty-five pounds; one pound can add one hundred pounds to the potato harvest; and one pound can produce five pounds of cotton, all without any extra labor dedicated to growing the crop. Nitrogen is the key to producing more and cheaper crops. Look at any nation that achieves high crop yields per acre, and you will find that the country that uses the most nitrogen per acre also produces the largest harvests.

For years the nations of Europe have been depending to a great extent upon supplies of nitrate of soda obtained from Chile, in South America. Germany alone imported nearly a million tons of this salt annually before the war. Then, too, the by-products of many industries furnish a quantity of nitrogen, but all this, it was realized, furnished but a small part of what was required to combat the constantly rising cost of producing food.

For years, the countries of Europe have heavily relied on nitrate of soda supplies from Chile in South America. Before the war, Germany alone imported nearly a million tons of this salt every year. Additionally, the by-products of various industries provide a certain amount of nitrogen, but it was understood that this only covered a small fraction of what was needed to tackle the continuously increasing cost of food production.

For years it was the dream and life-ambition of the world’s greatest scientists to discover how to make the supplies of nitrogen in the air available to plants as food. The only way that this could be done in nature was through the agency of bacteria working on the roots of certain plants, such as clovers, but this process was entirely too slow for practical purposes and could be applied on only a small acreage at one time. The free nitrogen of the air cannot be utilized directly by plants. It must first be converted into some combination with other chemicals, as a solid or liquid, which can be absorbed by the plant. Among others who worked on the problem of fixing atmospheric nitrogen were two German chemists, Doctors Caro and Frank, who found that a compound of calcium and carbon heated to a high temperature would absorb nitrogen and retain it in a form that could be applied to the soil and serve as a food for plants.

For years, the world’s top scientists dreamed of figuring out how to make the nitrogen in the air accessible as food for plants. The only natural way this could happen was through bacteria working on the roots of certain plants, like clovers, but that process was way too slow for practical use and could only be applied to a small area at a time. Plants can’t use the free nitrogen in the air directly. It must first be transformed into some combination with other chemicals, either as a solid or liquid, which the plant can absorb. Among those who tackled the issue of fixing atmospheric nitrogen were two German chemists, Doctors Caro and Frank, who discovered that a compound of calcium and carbon heated to a high temperature would absorb nitrogen and keep it in a form that could be added to the soil and used as food for plants.

Fertilised crop of sugar cane

Sugar Cane Crop Fertilized with Cyanamid Mixtures. Grown in Calumet, La.

Sugar cane crop fertilized with cyanamid mixtures. Grown in Calumet, LA.

This discovery is the basis of the Cyanamid “Atmospheric Nitrogen” industry or the making of fertilizer from the nitrogen in the air. After the discovery was made and tested on the laboratory scale it took several years to put it on a practical basis, as can well be imagined when it is understood what the problems involved were. Besides air this process required as raw materials limestone and coke. The limestone must be burned to quicklime and the quicklime and coke must be fused together to form calcium carbide. Only the most powerful electric furnaces are capable of performing this work. Any other means of heating is far from adequate. For instance, the hottest flame that can be produced by the burning of gas, namely, the oxy-hydrogen blow-pipe flame, can be directed against a stick of burnt lime without doing anything beyond making the lime glow brilliantly, thus producing the calcium or lime-light formerly much used in theaters as a spot-light. In the electric furnaces, however, the lime is heated so powerfully that it actually melts to a liquid, and in[460] this condition it dissolves the coke with which it is mixed and the compound resulting is calcium carbide which can be run off from the interior of the furnace in liquid form.

This discovery is the foundation of the Cyanamid “Atmospheric Nitrogen” industry, which involves creating fertilizer from the nitrogen in the air. After the discovery was made and tested in the lab, it took several years to develop it into a practical application, which is understandable considering the complexities involved. Along with air, this process required limestone and coke as raw materials. The limestone needs to be burned to create quicklime, and the quicklime and coke must be fused together to produce calcium carbide. Only the most powerful electric furnaces can accomplish this task. Any other heating method is inadequate. For example, the hottest flame produced by burning gas, specifically the oxy-hydrogen blowpipe flame, can be directed at a piece of burnt lime without doing anything other than making the lime glow brightly, creating the calcium or lime-light that was once widely used in theaters as a spotlight. In electric furnaces, however, the lime is heated to such an extent that it actually melts into a liquid state, and in this condition, it dissolves the coke it’s mixed with, resulting in calcium carbide, which can be drained from the furnace in liquid form.

Factory floor with carbide furnaces

Two of the Carbide Furnaces and Electrode Regulators

Two Carbide Furnaces and Electrode Regulators

At the cyanamid plant at Niagara Falls, in Canada, there are seven of these great carbide furnaces, each about fifteen feet long and half as wide and one-third as deep. We all have some idea of how much heat is generated in the ordinary electric arc light such as is used for street lighting. In the carbide furnace the carbon pencil, instead of being six or eight inches long and as large around as your finger, is six feet long and two feet in diameter. There are three of these in each furnace, and when the furnace is in full action it can be imagined that there is a terrific heat generated; in fact, when the fused lime and coke come out of the furnace in the form of molten carbide the brightness of the molten material is so dazzling that one cannot look at it with the naked eyes without injury.

At the cyanamid plant in Niagara Falls, Canada, there are seven large carbide furnaces, each about fifteen feet long, seven and a half feet wide, and five feet deep. We all have some idea of how much heat is produced by an ordinary electric arc light, like those used for street lighting. In the carbide furnace, the carbon pencil, instead of being six or eight inches long and about the width of your finger, is six feet long and two feet in diameter. There are three of these pencils in each furnace, and when the furnace is fully operational, it generates an incredible amount of heat. In fact, when the fused lime and coke emerge from the furnace as molten carbide, their brightness is so intense that you can’t look at it directly without risking injury to your eyes.

Carbide mill

One of the Carbide Mills

One of the Carbide Plants

Then there is the problem of producing pure nitrogen gas, that is, separating the eighty per cent of nitrogen in the air from the twenty per cent of oxygen. The latter is the element that we breathe and which passes into the body, there to combine with the impurities resulting from the various life activities. If the nitrogen and the oxygen were both allowed to act upon calcium carbide the oxygen would burn up the carbide before the nitrogen could be fixed in it, hence these two elements must be separated and all other impurities removed so that only chemically pure nitrogen is brought to the calcium carbide for fixation. The separation is accomplished by means of liquid air machines. This industry, therefore, not only utilizes the greatest heat obtainable on a practical scale, but it also utilizes the greatest cold. While the electric furnaces produce a temperature of over 4000° F., or about twice as hot as molten cast-iron, the liquid air machines work at a temperature of 372° F. below zero. The air must first be purified and dried. It is then compressed, cooled while under pressure, and then expanded. The expansion lowers its temperature considerably. If this extra cool air is used for[461] cooling another batch of air under pressure, the latter upon expansion becomes still colder than the first batch expanded. By repeating this operation the final temperature of 372° below zero is reached, at which the air liquifies.

Then there's the issue of producing pure nitrogen gas, which means separating the eighty percent of nitrogen in the air from the twenty percent of oxygen. Oxygen is the element we breathe, and it enters our bodies to mix with the impurities generated from various life processes. If both nitrogen and oxygen were allowed to interact with calcium carbide, the oxygen would burn up the carbide before the nitrogen could be fixed in it, so these two elements need to be separated, and all other impurities removed so that only chemically pure nitrogen can be introduced to the calcium carbide for fixation. The separation is achieved using liquid air machines. This industry, therefore, not only utilizes the highest heat achievable on a practical scale but also the lowest cold. While electric furnaces can produce temperatures exceeding 4000° F.—about twice as hot as molten cast iron—liquid air machines operate at a temperature of 372° F. below zero. The air must first be purified and dried. It is then compressed, cooled while under pressure, and then expanded. The expansion significantly lowers its temperature. If this extra cool air is used for[461] cooling another batch of pressurized air, that batch becomes even colder upon expansion. By repeating this process, the final temperature of 372° below zero is achieved, at which point the air liquefies.

How cold this is can be seen from some simple experiments. For instance, if a dipper full of the liquid air is drawn, in an instant the outside of the dipper is covered with a coating of frost deposited upon it from the surrounding atmosphere. The surrounding air is so much hotter than the liquid air that the liquid boils violently. If a piece of rubber hose is held in the liquid air for eight or ten seconds and then struck with a hammer the rubber flies into pieces just like glass. To dip one’s finger into this liquid air would freeze it solid in a second and would be as disastrous as dipping it in red-hot iron.

How cold this is can be seen from some simple experiments. For example, if you draw a dipper full of liquid air, the outside of the dipper is instantly covered with frost from the surrounding atmosphere. The air around it is so much hotter than the liquid air that the liquid boils violently. If you hold a piece of rubber hose in the liquid air for eight to ten seconds and then hit it with a hammer, the rubber shatters into pieces just like glass. Dipping your finger into this liquid air would freeze it solid in a second and would be just as disastrous as dipping it in red-hot iron.

Liquid air compressors

Liquid Air Plant

Liquid Air Facility

When the liquid air is allowed to warm up a little, the nitrogen gas evaporates, while the oxygen remains behind in the liquid. The pure nitrogen then can be pumped into the fixation ovens.

When the liquid air is allowed to warm up a bit, the nitrogen gas evaporates, while the oxygen stays behind in the liquid. The pure nitrogen can then be pumped into the fixation ovens.

To fix the nitrogen in the carbide it is necessary to cool the latter after it comes from the electric furnaces and grind it to a very fine powder. This powder is then placed in furnaces that look like steel barrels but are three or four times larger than an ordinary barrel. The oven filled with calcium carbide is then electrically heated with a carbon rod running through the center. When the temperature is about as hot as that of molten iron the pure nitrogen gas from the liquid air plant is pumped in and allowed to act on the calcium carbide for about a day and a half. When the carbide has absorbed all it will absorb the crude cyanamid formed is removed from the oven as a single large cake which is run through pulverizing drums and then put through an elaborate process of refinement and finally bagged for shipment in carload lots to fertilizer factories throughout the country.

To fix the nitrogen in the carbide, it’s necessary to cool it down after it comes from the electric furnaces and grind it into a very fine powder. This powder is then placed in furnaces that resemble steel barrels but are three or four times larger than a standard barrel. The furnace filled with calcium carbide is then electrically heated with a carbon rod running through the center. When the temperature reaches about the same level as molten iron, pure nitrogen gas from the liquid air plant is pumped in and allowed to react with the calcium carbide for approximately a day and a half. Once the carbide has absorbed all it can, the crude cyanamid formed is removed from the furnace as a single large cake, which is then processed through pulverizing drums and undergoes an extensive refinement process before being bagged for shipment in carload quantities to fertilizer factories across the country.

The fertilizer manufacturers mix the cyanamid with other ingredients to make a balanced plant food and so ship it to farmers for feeding their crops. In 1914 7,500,000 tons of fertilizer worth $175,000,000 were consumed in this country. This seems like a large quantity, but it allows only a scanty application per acre cultivated. Germany, on one-fourth of our cultivated acreage, uses almost twice as much fertilizer as the entire United States. As a consequence she raises 30 bushels of wheat where we average 14 bushels per acre; 52 bushels of oats where we average 30; and 196 bushels of potatoes per acre where we raise 97 bushels per acre. The explanation is simple, German farmers pay only about one-half as much for their plant food as American farmers pay. Where the German farmer gains $2.00 to $3.00 increase in crop from fertilizer that costs him $1.00 the American farmer pays $2.00 for the same fertilizer, which leaves him less profit and less incentive to use fertilizer.

The fertilizer companies blend cyanamid with other ingredients to create a balanced plant food, which they then ship to farmers for their crops. In 1914, 7,500,000 tons of fertilizer worth $175,000,000 were used in this country. That sounds like a lot, but it only allows for minimal application per acre cultivated. Germany, on just one-fourth of our cultivated land, uses almost double the amount of fertilizer compared to the entire United States. As a result, they produce 30 bushels of wheat where we average 14 bushels per acre; 52 bushels of oats where we average 30; and 196 bushels of potatoes per acre compared to our 97 bushels per acre. The reason is straightforward: German farmers pay about half as much for their fertilizers as American farmers do. While a German farmer might gain $2.00 to $3.00 in crop value from fertilizer that costs him $1.00, the American farmer pays $2.00 for the same fertilizer, which leaves him with less profit and less motivation to use it.

Carbide cooling in shed

A Carbide Cooling Shed

A Carbide Cooling Shed

Oven room

Cyanamid Oven Room

Cyanamid Oven Room

Niagara Falls

Photo by William H. Rau

Image by William H. Rau

Forever Rushing and Forever Wonderful

Always Busy and Always Great

Niagara Falls from Prospect Point on the American side, looking southwest, across and up the stream. The American Falls may be seen in the foreground rushing past to make their plunge of 165 feet to the rocks below.

Niagara Falls from Prospect Point on the American side, looking southwest, across and up the stream. The American Falls can be seen in the foreground, rushing past as they drop 165 feet to the rocks below.

The air-nitrogen industry in the United States is said to be considerably handicapped because the large quantities of electricity required are not available at a low enough price. There are excellent water-power sites in the United States sufficient to furnish many times the required power, but the existing water-power laws are so burdensome that investors will not put their money into power development except on such high terms that the power is much dearer than it can be bought for in other countries. Practically every civilized country in the world, except the United States, had one or more cyanamid factories in 1916. These include Germany, Austria-Hungary, Great Britain, France, Italy, Switzerland, Norway, Sweden, Japan and Canada. Their combined output is about 1,000,000 tons per annum. The cyanamid plant at Niagara Falls, Ontario, which was established in 1909, with a capacity of 10,000 tons, had a capacity of 64,000 tons per annum in 1916. It utilizes about 30,000 electrical horse-power twenty-four hours a day, and three hundred and sixty-five days a year. Germany, at the beginning of the war, produced about 30,000 tons of cyanamid; in 1916 she was making 600,000 tons a year. She is using it both to grow crops and to make explosives for her guns.

The air-nitrogen industry in the United States is said to be significantly limited because the large amounts of electricity needed are not available at a low enough price. There are excellent water-power locations in the U.S. that could provide much more power than needed, but the current water-power laws are so restrictive that investors won’t invest in power development unless the terms are so high that the electricity costs far more than in other countries. Almost every developed country in the world, except the United States, had one or more cyanamid factories by 1916. These include Germany, Austria-Hungary, Great Britain, France, Italy, Switzerland, Norway, Sweden, Japan, and Canada. Their total output is around 1,000,000 tons per year. The cyanamid plant at Niagara Falls, Ontario, which opened in 1909 with a capacity of 10,000 tons, reached a capacity of 64,000 tons per year in 1916. It uses about 30,000 electrical horsepower twenty-four hours a day, all year round. At the start of the war, Germany produced about 30,000 tons of cyanamid; by 1916, she was making 600,000 tons a year. She uses it for both agriculture and to create explosives for her weapons.

Fertilised crop of sugar beet

Sugar Beet Crop Fertilized with Cyanamid Mixtures. Grown in Caro, Michigan

Sugar beet crop fertilized with cyanamid mixtures, grown in Caro, Michigan.

Fertilised cotton crop

Cotton Crop Fertilized with Cyanamid Mixtures. Grown in Sumter, S. C.

Cotton Crop Fertilized with Cyanamid Mixtures. Grown in Sumter, SC.

At the time the war broke out, in August, 1914, Germany was importing nearly one million tons of nitrate of soda per annum from Chile, South America. This supply was immediately cut off by enemy fleets. Not only was her agriculture thereby threatened with a great decrease in crop production but her supply of military explosives was also threatened. Professor Dr. Lemmermann, a famous German scientist, advised his government that unless the nitrogen shortage were made good the resulting crop shortage would amount to 3,300,000 tons of grain. But if people require food, guns require powder, and no powder can be made without nitric acid. It has been reported on good authority that Germany has consumed one and one-third million pounds of powder a day during the war. To make one pound of powder requires one and one-half pounds of nitric acid, so that Germany required for military purposes 2,000,000 pounds of nitric acid per day. From her coke ovens [465]she indeed could derive some nitrogen, but this actually furnished only about one-fifth of her total requirements. For the other four-fifths she turned to atmospheric nitrogen. For it is also true that this remarkable compound, cyanamid, which is a food for plants, can be decomposed by high-steam pressure into the purest ammonia gas. The ammonia can in turn be oxidized to nitric acid, which is the basis of all explosives. Without the fixation of atmospheric nitrogen on a tremendous scale there is no doubt that Germany would have become helpless before her enemies within a year after the war began, for no nation can fight unless it has sufficient food for its people and powder for its guns.

At the time the war started in August 1914, Germany was importing nearly one million tons of nitrate of soda each year from Chile, South America. This supply was immediately cut off by enemy fleets. Not only was agriculture threatened with a significant decrease in crop production, but the supply of military explosives was also at risk. Professor Dr. Lemmermann, a well-known German scientist, warned his government that if the nitrogen shortage wasn't addressed, the resulting crop shortage would total about 3,300,000 tons of grain. But while people need food, guns need powder, and no powder can be produced without nitric acid. It's been reported from reliable sources that Germany consumed one and a third million pounds of powder daily during the war. To make one pound of powder, one and a half pounds of nitric acid are needed, meaning Germany needed 2,000,000 pounds of nitric acid each day for military use. While she could extract some nitrogen from her coke ovens, it only supplied about one-fifth of her total needs. For the remaining four-fifths, she relied on atmospheric nitrogen. Additionally, this remarkable compound, cyanamid, which is a plant nutrient, can be broken down by high-pressure steam into pure ammonia gas. The ammonia can then be oxidized into nitric acid, which is essential for all explosives. Without large-scale fixation of atmospheric nitrogen, it's clear that Germany would have been rendered helpless against her enemies within a year after the war began, as no nation can sustain a fight without enough food for its people and powder for its guns.

Niaga Falls power station, showing turbine generators

Turbine Generators, Niagara Falls Power House

Turbine Generators, Niagara Falls Powerhouse

Eleven turbine generators in the Niagara Falls Power House, each set developing 5,000 horse-power.

Eleven turbine generators in the Niagara Falls Power House, each producing 5,000 horsepower.

The preservation of food is also dependent on ammonia, which produces the refrigerating effect in the numerous cold storage houses and artificial ice plants in this country. In the cold storage plants alone the cold produced by means of ammonia is equal to 750,000 tons of ice consumed per day, while 25,000,000 tons of artificial ice are produced and sold as such per annum. Cyanamid ammonia gas is especially valuable for this purpose on account of its high degree of purity.

The preservation of food also relies on ammonia, which creates the cooling effect in many cold storage facilities and artificial ice plants in this country. In the cold storage plants alone, the cooling produced by ammonia is equivalent to 750,000 tons of ice used each day, while 25,000,000 tons of artificial ice are manufactured and sold each year. Cyanamid ammonia gas is particularly valuable for this because of its high level of purity.

Then, too, the ammonia gas can be fixed in any acid desired, for instance, in phosphoric acid, making ammonium phosphate, a fertilizer of unusual merit, or ammonium sulphate, another fertilizer, or ammonium nitrate, an explosive. So, for peace or war, the fixation of atmospheric nitrogen has become a tremendous factor in the life of nations.

Then, the ammonia gas can be combined with any acid you want, like phosphoric acid, to create ammonium phosphate, a highly effective fertilizer, or ammonium sulfate, another type of fertilizer, or ammonium nitrate, which is an explosive. So, whether for peaceful purposes or for conflict, the capture of atmospheric nitrogen has become a huge factor in the lives of nations.

If the United States should be forced into war with a foreign power it would be a simple matter for an enemy fleet to cut off our large importations of nitrate of soda from Chile. These amount to about 700,000 tons per annum in normal times and at present about 900,000 tons per annum. In other words, we would be short just this quantity of nitrogen in addition to the quantity that would be required by the government for the manufacture of military explosives. It has been suggested that our coke-oven industry could be expanded to furnish a large part of this requirement, but even with the largest expansion considered practical by the coke-oven people within the next several years, the coke ovens would not be able to supply even one-third of our requirements, thus leaving a large balance which could be furnished only by the establishment of a large nitrogen industry in this country.

If the United States were to be forced into war with another country, it would be easy for an enemy fleet to cut off our substantial imports of nitrate of soda from Chile. These imports typically amount to about 700,000 tons per year in normal times and currently around 900,000 tons per year. In other words, we would be short this amount of nitrogen, in addition to what the government would need for making military explosives. It's been suggested that we could expand our coke-oven industry to cover a large portion of this need, but even with the biggest expansion that experts say is feasible over the next few years, the coke ovens wouldn’t be able to supply even a third of our requirements, leaving a significant gap that could only be filled by developing a large nitrogen industry in this country.


The expression “The King can do no wrong” has been widely used since it first caught people’s fancy at the time of the explanation, made in England, that the Ministers, and not the King, were responsible for mistakes of government.

The phrase “The King can do no wrong” has been widely used since it first captured people's interest during the explanation in England that the Ministers, not the King, were accountable for government mistakes.

What is a Drawbridge Like Today?

We have all read of the castles in olden days into which the owner could retire and raise a drawbridge across a ditch, thus putting a barrier in the way of his enemies.

We’ve all heard about the castles from back in the day where the owner could retreat inside and raise a drawbridge over a moat, effectively creating a barrier against enemies.

That old style drawbridge, with, of course, many improvements, has been adopted in these modern times to use in permitting navigable rivers and channels to be crossed by railroads and other kinds of transportation, without preventing the passage of vessels up and down the rivers.

That classic drawbridge, with many modern upgrades, is now used to allow railroads and other forms of transportation to cross navigable rivers and channels while still letting boats move freely along the waterways.

Modern drawbridges across rivers, canals, the entrances of docks, etc., are generally made to open vertically, and the movable portion is called a bascule, balance or lifting bridge; a turning, swivel or swing bridge; or a rolling bridge, in accordance with the mode in which it is made to open.

Modern drawbridges over rivers, canals, and dock entrances typically open vertically, and the part that moves is referred to as a bascule, balance or lifting bridge; a turning, swivel, or swing bridge; or a rolling bridge, depending on how it opens.

Swing bridges are usually divided into two parts meeting in the middle, and each moved on pivots on the opposite sides of the channel, or they may move as a whole on a pivot in the middle of the channel.

Swing bridges are typically split into two sections that meet in the center, with each section rotating on pivots at opposite sides of the channel, or they can move as a single unit on a pivot located in the middle of the channel.

Rolling bridges are suspended from a structure high above the water, and are propelled backwards and forwards by means of rollers.

Rolling bridges are hung from a structure high above the water and are moved back and forth using rollers.

Open bascule bridge

Bascule Bridge Open[53]

Bascule Bridge Open

Same bascule bridge, closed

Bascule Bridge Closed[53]

Bascule Bridge Closed __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

The advantages of this type of bridge are that the entire width of the channel is available for navigation, and the draw may be opened and closed more readily than the swing type.

The benefits of this kind of bridge are that the entire width of the channel is free for navigation, and the draw can be opened and closed more easily than the swing type.


The Story of a Deep Sea Monster[54]

The early day was blue and silver; one of those colorful mornings peculiar to southern Florida. Sandwiched between the earth and the turquoise sky, the Atlantic lay gleaming like a huge silver wafer in the sunlight. Not the faintest suggestion of a ripple marred its shining surface.

The early morning was blue and silver; one of those vibrant mornings unique to southern Florida. Sandwiched between the land and the turquoise sky, the Atlantic shimmered like a giant silver disk in the sunlight. Not a single ripple disturbed its bright surface.

Suddenly out of the stillness of the silver water a huge black fin was lifted, and a little group of men lounging on the deck of an idle fishing craft drew near the rail and used their glasses.

Suddenly, from the calm silver water, a massive black fin appeared, and a small group of men relaxing on the deck of a stationary fishing boat moved closer to the rail and used their binoculars.

“Shark,” remarked the captain pleasantly after a moment’s scrutiny. “Who wants to go out with me for a little fun?”

“Shark,” the captain said cheerfully after a moment of looking closely. “Who wants to join me for some fun?”

The hastily lowered lifeboat pointed a slim nose toward the large black shape thrashing about in the shallow water. Three men were in the boat—Captain Charles H. Thompson of the yacht “Samoa,” one of the yacht’s crew, and a winter visitor to southern Florida. As they drew near, the sailor took one look at the gigantic creature and yelled to the captain:

The quickly lowered lifeboat aimed its slim nose at the large black form thrashing in the shallow water. Three men were in the boat—Captain Charles H. Thompson of the yacht “Samoa,” a crew member from the yacht, and a winter visitor to southern Florida. As they approached, the sailor glanced at the enormous creature and shouted to the captain:

“For heaven’s sake, man, don’t harpoon that thing; we will be crushed like an egg shell!”

“For heaven’s sake, man, don’t go after that thing; we’ll be crushed like an eggshell!”

Poised in the bow of the boat, harpoon in hand, stood the captain, and as they drew alongside there was a flash; the steel glittered for a moment in the sunlight, then sank into the huge black bulk. Simultaneously the little boat spun around and shot out toward the Gulf Stream like an agitated and very erratic rocket, flinging great sheets of spray high into the air as it sped.

Poised at the front of the boat, harpoon in hand, stood the captain, and as they pulled up alongside, there was a flash; the steel sparkled for a moment in the sunlight, then disappeared into the massive black shape. At the same time, the small boat spun around and darted toward the Gulf Stream like an excited and unpredictable rocket, sending up huge sprays of water into the air as it sped away.

Thus began a thirty-nine hours’ ride filled with wildest thrills, during which time Captain Thompson battled with the fish, the sailor bailed the boat unceasingly, lest they be swamped, and the tourist raised an anxious and eloquent voice to high heaven. The men were without food the entire time, sharing only a small bottle of water among them.

Thus began a thirty-nine-hour ride packed with extreme excitement, during which Captain Thompson fought with the fish, the sailor constantly bailed out the boat to keep it from sinking, and the tourist raised a worried and expressive voice to the skies. The men went without food the whole time, sharing just a small bottle of water among them.

The news of the struggle spread rapidly, and soon hundreds of interested spectators gathered on the trestle of the East Coast sea-extension railway. Scores of times the men in the boat escaped death only by a miracle, as the wildly thrashing black tail missed them but by a hair’s breadth. Finally, after two days and one night, the monster was worn out, and the triumphant captor managed to fasten it to the trestle work on Knight’s Key, where, after a few hours’ rest, it wigwagged a festive tail, smashing the large pilings as though they were toothpicks. After another battle the fish was firmly tied up once more, this time to the yacht “Samoa;” and again it waved a wicked tail, disabling the thirty-ton yacht by smashing her propeller and breaking the cables. A tug was then summoned, and the big fellow was towed one hundred and ten miles to Miami, Florida, where it was viewed by thousands of people.

The news about the struggle spread quickly, and soon hundreds of curious spectators gathered on the trestle of the East Coast sea-extension railway. The men in the boat escaped death multiple times by sheer luck, as the wildly thrashing black tail just missed them barely. Finally, after two days and one night, the monster was exhausted, and the victorious captor managed to tie it to the trestle on Knight’s Key, where, after resting for a few hours, it waved its tail joyfully, smashing the large pilings like they were toothpicks. After another fight, the fish was secured again, this time to the yacht “Samoa;” and once more it swung its fierce tail, crippling the thirty-ton yacht by destroying her propeller and snapping the cables. A tug was then called in, and the giant was towed one hundred and ten miles to Miami, Florida, where it was seen by thousands of people.

Five harpoons and one hundred and fifty-one bullets were used in subduing the monster, and it took five days to finally kill it.

Five harpoons and one hundred fifty-one bullets were used to take down the monster, and it took five days to finally kill it.

It was thought at first the creature was a whale, but later it was classified as a fish, for it breathed through gills of which there were five in number. Upon careful examination it seemed probable that it was a baby of its species, as the backbone was of a cartilaginous nature, a condition found only in a young creature; in a full-grown one this develops into true bone. That it was a deep-sea fish was indicated by the small eye, which was about the size of a silver dollar. The pressure of the water is so great at the bottom of the ocean that were the eyes large they would be ruptured. That the pupil did not dilate and contract seems additional proof that the fish must have lived at a depth of probably fifteen hundred or two thousand feet, where there is little light.

At first, people thought the creature was a whale, but it was later identified as a fish because it breathed through gills, of which there were five. A closer look suggested it was a juvenile of its kind, as its backbone was made of cartilage, a feature seen only in younger creatures; in fully grown ones, this turns into actual bone. Its status as a deep-sea fish was indicated by its small eye, which was about the size of a silver dollar. The water pressure at the ocean's bottom is so intense that if the eyes were larger, they would be destroyed. The fact that the pupil didn’t dilate or contract further supports the idea that this fish lived at a depth of around fifteen hundred to two thousand feet, where there’s very little light.

Monster fish

Photograph by Capt. Chas. H. Thompson

Photo by Capt. Chas. H. Thompson

Deep Sea Monster Captured off Florida

Deep Sea Monster Found off the Coast of Florida

So far as the scientific world is concerned, this is the only fish of its kind ever captured. Length, 45 feet; weight, 30,000 pounds; circumference, 23 feet 9 inches; diameter 8 feet 3 inches; mouth (open), 31 inches; mouth, 38 inches wide; mouth, 43 inches deep; tongue, 40 inches long; several thousand teeth; hide, three inches thick, no scales; had swallowed an animal weighing 1,500 pounds; tail measures 10 feet from tip to tip; pectoral fin, 5 feet long, 3 feet wide; dorsal fin, 3 feet long, 2 feet 9 inches wide; gills, 4 feet; the liver weighed 1,700 pounds.

As far as the scientific community is concerned, this is the only fish of its kind ever captured. Length: 45 feet; weight: 30,000 pounds; circumference: 23 feet 9 inches; diameter: 8 feet 3 inches; mouth (open): 31 inches; mouth: 38 inches wide; mouth: 43 inches deep; tongue: 40 inches long; several thousand teeth; hide: three inches thick, no scales; had swallowed an animal weighing 1,500 pounds; tail measures 10 feet from tip to tip; pectoral fin: 5 feet long, 3 feet wide; dorsal fin: 3 feet long, 2 feet 9 inches wide; gills: 4 feet; the liver weighed 1,700 pounds.

It is generally believed that some volcanic eruption drove the fish to the surface where, owing to the difference in water pressure, the swim-bladders burst, making it impossible for him to return to his level.

It’s commonly thought that a volcanic eruption brought the fish to the surface, where the change in water pressure caused their swim bladders to burst, preventing them from going back down to their original depth.


What is an Armored Railway Car Like?

The armored car shown in this picture is the first of a new type of armored car to be constructed by the United States. It was designed under the direction of the Board of Engineers of the U. S. Army, and was constructed by the Standard Steel Car Company, Pittsburgh, Pa., at their Hammond, Ind., plant. The car was designed and built within twenty-seven days.

The armored car shown in this picture is the first of a new kind of armored vehicle to be made by the United States. It was designed under the guidance of the U.S. Army's Board of Engineers and built by the Standard Steel Car Company in Pittsburgh, PA, at their facility in Hammond, IN. The car was designed and constructed in just twenty-seven days.

Armourde railway car with gun

The Rapid Fire-Gun Here Shown is a Model of a Three-inch Field Gun Mounted upon a Special Carriage. The Well in which the Gun is Located may also be Used as a Fighting Top for Troops Armed with Rifles or Machine Guns.

The Rapid Fire-Gun shown here is a model of a three-inch field gun mounted on a special carriage. The area where the gun is positioned can also serve as a fighting platform for troops armed with rifles or machine guns.

Courtesy of the Railway Age Gazette and Standard Steel Car Co.

Thanks to the Railway Age Gazette and Standard Steel Car Co.

The car consists of heavy steel plate structure, erected upon a flat car of standard type. The interior is divided into three compartments. The end compartments are for use of troops operating machine guns and rifles through the port-holes shown on side of car. The center compartment, which is not the full height of the car, is used for ammunition storage, and is capable of holding a large quantity of ammunition, either for small arms or for the rapid-fire gun which is mounted on top of the car. The rapid-fire gun here shown is a model of a three-inch field gun mounted upon a special carriage. The well in which the gun is located may also be used as a fighting top for troops armed with rifles or machine guns.

The car is made of heavy steel plates and is built on a standard flat car. The inside is split into three sections. The end sections are for troops to operate machine guns and rifles through the openings on the side of the car. The middle section, which doesn’t reach the full height of the car, is for storing ammunition and can hold a large amount, either for small arms or for the rapid-fire gun mounted on top of the car. The rapid-fire gun shown here is a model of a three-inch field gun on a specially designed carriage. The area where the gun is located can also be used as a fighting position for troops with rifles or machine guns.

Armourde railway car

The First of a New Type of Armored Cars[55]

The First of a New Kind of Armored Cars[55]

Drawing of armoured railway car

The Heavy Steel Plate Structure is Erected upon a Flat Car of Standard Type[55]

The Heavy Steel Plate Structure is built on a standard flatcar.[55]

This car is known as a light-armored car. It is armed with a three-inch rapid-fire gun, two machine guns and any number of rifles which the troops occupying it may carry. The service for which this car is intended is primarily to guard railroads and depots adjacent to railroads. It is not ordinarily to be employed in aggressive movements. In effect, it is a movable block-house which may be used at any point along the line, or it may be used as a retreat for troops when necessary. It may also be used for transporting troops past danger points, and for transporting explosives or other perishable material which might be damaged by fire from the ends. The car as constructed weighs 86,200 pounds. It is 47 feet long, 9 feet 3 inches wide, and 7 feet high at the ends. When used for transportation of troops, it will accommodate a company of infantry seated on camp stools or benches. When used for patrol purposes, there would not be more than twelve men in the car, to operate the rapid-fire gun and machine guns.

This vehicle is known as a light-armored car. It is equipped with a three-inch rapid-fire gun, two machine guns, and any number of rifles that the troops on board may carry. The main purpose of this vehicle is to protect railroads and their depots. It's not typically meant for aggressive actions. Essentially, it serves as a mobile blockhouse that can be deployed at any location along the route, or it can provide a fallback option for troops when needed. It can also be used to transport troops past danger zones, as well as to move explosives or other sensitive materials that could be damaged by fire from the ends. The car weighs 86,200 pounds, measuring 47 feet long, 9 feet 3 inches wide, and 7 feet high at the ends. When used for troop transport, it can fit a company of infantry seated on camp stools or benches. For patrols, there would be a maximum of twelve men in the vehicle to operate the rapid-fire gun and machine guns.

Interior of armoured railway car

The Interior is Divided into Three Compartments

The interior is split into three sections.

Courtesy of the Railway Age Gazette and Standard Steel Car Co.

Thanks to the Railway Age Gazette and Standard Steel Car Co.

The car was shipped to the Sandy Hook proving grounds to be equipped with rapid-fire guns and ammunition and thoroughly tested and inspected by the Engineer and Ordnance Officer of the U. S. Army.

The car was sent to the Sandy Hook testing grounds to be fitted with rapid-fire guns and ammunition and to be thoroughly tested and inspected by the Engineer and Ordnance Officer of the U.S. Army.

What is an “Electric Eel”?

This is an eel abundant in the fresh waters of Brazil and the Guianas, which possesses organs capable of developing a strong electric current and thus of giving a violent shock to any one touching the eels. These organs replace the lower muscles along the sides of the tail. The eels can be taken by driving horses into the water to be shocked and seizing them when thus weakened.

This is an eel commonly found in the freshwater of Brazil and the Guianas, which has organs that can generate a strong electric current and deliver a painful shock to anyone who touches them. These organs take the place of the lower muscles along the sides of the tail. The eels can be captured by driving horses into the water to get shocked and then grabbing them when they are weakened.


The Story of Salt[56]

Salt is a chemical compound composed of two elements, sodium and chlorine. Chemically it is known as sodium chloride.

Salt is a chemical compound made up of two elements, sodium and chlorine. Chemically, it’s referred to as sodium chloride.

Salt well

A Salt Well

A Salt Well

It is one of the things which comes into our lives daily, perhaps more than any other, with the exception of water. Probably no other thing than water is used more by all civilized people than salt.

It’s one of the things that enters our lives every day, likely more than anything else, except for water. Probably nothing is used more by all civilized people than salt, apart from water.

Nature provides salt for us in three different forms. First, in sea water in solution; second, in salt springs; and third, in the form of salt rock.

Nature provides salt for us in three different ways. First, in seawater as a solution; second, in salt springs; and third, in the form of rock salt.

From time immemorial man has obtained salt from sea water. This is still being done on our sea coasts, but the salt obtained by evaporating the water is very crude and usually contains many impurities.

From ancient times, people have extracted salt from seawater. This practice continues along our coastlines, but the salt produced by evaporating the water is quite basic and usually contains many impurities.

It has been possible to obtain a large supply of salt from what are known as salt springs. These springs are usually the result of water flowing over a deposit of[474] salt rock. The amount of salt obtained from evaporating this spring water is, however, so small that salt springs are an impractical source of supply when it comes to making salt for commercial purposes.

It is possible to get a large amount of salt from what we call salt springs. These springs usually form when water flows over a bed of[474] salt rock. However, the amount of salt collected from evaporating this spring water is so small that salt springs aren't a practical source for producing salt for commercial use.

Rock salt forms the most common and practical source of supply. It is found in all parts of the world and reasonably near the surface. The deposit is said to be what is left of ancient salt seas. In the United States the largest deposits of salt are found in the states of Michigan, New York, Ohio, Utah, Louisiana, Kansas, Texas and California. The above-mentioned states are the largest producers of salt in this country.

Rock salt is the most common and practical source of supply. It's found all over the world and fairly close to the surface. The deposit is considered to be what remains of ancient salt seas. In the United States, the biggest salt deposits are in Michigan, New York, Ohio, Utah, Louisiana, Kansas, Texas, and California. These states are the largest producers of salt in the country.

Interior of salt factory showing equipment

Salt Heaters and Filters

Salt Heaters & Filters

One of the largest sources of salt supply in Europe is at Wielizka in Poland. This deposit of salt is said to be the largest in the world, the bed of salt rock being 500 miles long, 20 miles wide and 1,200 feet thick. Some of the salt mines in Poland are so extensive that it is said some of the miners spend all of their lives in them, never coming to the surface of the earth.

One of the biggest sources of salt in Europe is in Wieliczka, Poland. This salt deposit is said to be the largest in the world, with the salt rock layer being 500 miles long, 20 miles wide, and 1,200 feet thick. Some of the salt mines in Poland are so vast that it’s said some miners spend their entire lives underground, never coming to the surface.

Most of the deposits of salt rock contain impurities which need to be removed before the salt is fit for use commercially; however, some deposits show a very pure salt rock and when ground up this rock salt is suitable for table use. In general, however, the salt made from crude salt rock is only fit for the crudest commercial uses. The most common impurity is gypsum and it is necessary to remove this gypsum before the salt can be considered pure.

Most salt rock deposits have impurities that must be removed before the salt can be used commercially; however, some deposits contain very pure salt rock, and when ground, this rock salt is suitable for table use. Generally, though, salt made from raw salt rock is only good for basic commercial applications. The most common impurity is gypsum, and it needs to be removed before the salt can be deemed pure.

Salt winning in salt lakes in Utah

Photo by Brown Bros.

Photo by Brown Bros.

Salt Beds Near Salt Lake City

Salt Flats Near Salt Lake City

These extensive salt beds about eighteen miles from Salt Lake City are part of the deposit left when Lake Bonneville dwindled to Great Salt Lake.

These large salt flats, located about eighteen miles from Salt Lake City, are part of the deposits left behind when Lake Bonneville shrank to become the Great Salt Lake.

The general way of obtaining salt from the earth is by means of salt wells. These wells are drilled in the same way that wells are bored for oil and gas. A pipe about six inches in diameter is lowered to the surface of the salt rock and then an inside pipe is put down, water is forced down between the two pipes and the pressure exerted brings up the dissolved rock or salt brine through the inside pipe.

The typical method of getting salt from the ground is through salt wells. These wells are drilled similarly to how wells are bored for oil and gas. A pipe around six inches wide is lowered to the surface of the salt rock, and then a smaller pipe is inserted. Water is pushed down between the two pipes, and the pressure created brings the dissolved rock or salt brine up through the inner pipe.

As the salt brine reaches the surface the salt is extracted from it in various ways. At present the crude open-pan system, where the brine was poured into open pans and fires were built below the pans, is almost obsolete. The most practical methods of refining salt today are known as the Grainer, Vacuum Pan and Alberger systems.

As the salt brine hits the surface, the salt is extracted from it in different ways. Right now, the crude open-pan system, where the brine was poured into open pans with fires built underneath, is nearly outdated. The most effective methods for refining salt today are the Grainer, Vacuum Pan, and Alberger systems.

Machines to sift salt

Bolters for Sifting Salt

Bolters for sifting salt

The Grainer system is similar in its operation to the old open-pan system. The brine is run through long, shallow tanks and the heat is applied through steam pipes inside of the pan. The salt settles to the bottom of the pan and large rakes operated either by hand or machinery collect the salt.

The Grainer system works similarly to the old open-pan system. The brine flows through long, shallow tanks, and heat is applied using steam pipes inside the pan. The salt settles at the bottom, and large rakes, operated by hand or machinery, collect the salt.

In the Vacuum Pan process tiny cubes of salt are formed and settle to the bottom of the pan in which a vacuum has been created. The salt is then drained out and is ready for drying.

In the Vacuum Pan process, small cubes of salt are created and settle at the bottom of the pan where a vacuum has been established. The salt is then drained out and is ready for drying.

Variations of the two above processes make possible the production of certain grades of table salt. Oftentimes the brine is relieved of impurities through the action of certain chemicals. In some instances a chemical known as “barium chloride” is used, but the wisdom of this process has been much questioned, owing to the fact that barium chloride is a deadly poison.

Variations of the two processes mentioned above allow for the production of specific grades of table salt. Often, the brine is purified from impurities using certain chemicals. In some cases, a chemical called “barium chloride” is used, but the safety of this method has been widely debated, since barium chloride is a highly toxic substance.

People filling small packs with salt

Filling Salt Packages

Filling Salt Packs

People filling sacks with salt

Filling Salt Bags

Filling Salt Bags

The Alberger system of salt manufacture is a mechanical process which subjects the salt brine to a much higher temperature and removes the impurities by means of mechanical filters. This process is known to make a very pure salt and has been used for some time as a practical method for manufacturing high-grade dairy and table salt. Unlike the other two common methods of making salt, it forms tiny salt flakes instead of the usual cubes or lumps.

The Alberger system of salt manufacturing is a mechanical process that exposes salt brine to much higher temperatures and removes impurities using mechanical filters. This method is known for producing very pure salt and has been used for a while as an effective way to make high-quality dairy and table salt. Unlike the other two common methods of producing salt, it creates tiny salt flakes instead of the usual cubes or lumps.

After manufacturers obtain the salt from the brine they usually put it through drying processes. After drying, the salt is sifted and the fine table salt is separated from the coarser products. When salt is sifted it is ready for packing in bags or packages suitable for shipment to the consumer.

After manufacturers get the salt from the brine, they typically dry it. Once dried, the salt is sifted, separating the fine table salt from the coarser grains. When the salt is sifted, it’s ready to be packed into bags or packages for shipment to consumers.

According to recent government reports, it is estimated that the average consumption of salt per capita for all purposes is about 100 pounds per year. The salt industry is now said to have reached a very stable basis and the demand for salt in the United States is practically all supplied by American manufacturers. Salt can be put to a great many uses in addition to the usual requirements for table and cooking. It is used by food manufacturers and performs highly important functions in certain commercial fields.

According to recent government reports, the average salt consumption per person for all uses is about 100 pounds per year. The salt industry is now considered very stable, and the demand for salt in the United States is almost entirely met by American manufacturers. Beyond its usual roles in cooking and at the table, salt has many other uses. It is utilized by food manufacturers and plays crucial roles in certain commercial sectors.


Why do We Call it “Denatured Alcohol”?

Under a law passed by the United States Congress in 1907, on alcohol intended for use as fuel or for illuminating purposes, or other mechanical employment, the internal tax need not be paid. But to avoid taxation it must be rendered unfit for drinking by the addition of such unpalatable substances as wood alcohol, pyridin, benzola, sulphuric ether or animal oil. Thus treated, it is spoken of as denatured.

Under a law passed by the United States Congress in 1907, alcohol meant for use as fuel, lighting, or other mechanical purposes doesn’t have to be taxed. However, to avoid taxation, it must be made unfit for consumption by adding unpleasant substances like wood alcohol, pyridine, benzene, sulfuric ether, or animal oil. Once treated this way, it’s referred to as denatured.

What is the Difference Between a Cruiser and a Battleship?

A cruiser is a vessel built to secure speed and fuel capacity at the expense of armor and battery strength.

A cruiser is a ship designed for speed and fuel efficiency, sacrificing armor and weapon power.

The modern cruiser may be regarded as the offspring of the frigate of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. The later construction has been designed for a minimum speed of twenty-five knots an hour, with a possible attainment of thirty knots or over, under favorable conditions.

The modern cruiser can be seen as the descendant of the frigates from the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. These newer ships are built to reach a minimum speed of twenty-five knots per hour, with the potential to exceed thirty knots under ideal conditions.

The battleship and one form of cruiser were evolved from the conflicting opinions of two opposite schools of design. The battleship is the expression of the thoughts of those who stood for extremely developed battery power, great thickness of armor plate, and moderate speed. The cruiser is the result of the triumph of those who contended for high speed at the sacrifice of heavy armor protection and excessive battery strength.

The battleship and one type of cruiser were developed from the differing views of two opposing design schools. The battleship represents the ideas of those who prioritized heavy firepower, thick armor plating, and moderate speed. The cruiser emerged from the victory of those who advocated for high speed, even if it meant giving up on strong armor protection and heavy weaponry.

The armored cruiser was the particular development of the antagonistic views prevailing among naval architects. The type of this class in the United States navy was the “Brooklyn,” which figured prominently in the war with Spain in 1898.

The armored cruiser was a specific outcome of the conflicting opinions among naval architects. The type from this class in the United States Navy was the “Brooklyn,” which played a significant role in the war with Spain in 1898.

Recently the armored cruiser has been superseded by the battle cruiser. The armor protection in this type of ship is much lower than that of the battleship, while the ordnance, on the other hand, is practically the same. High speed, wide radius of action and great battery strength are the characteristics of this type; and to meet these requirements the battle cruiser is planned of a size considerably larger than the battleship.

Recently, the armored cruiser has been replaced by the battle cruiser. The armor on this type of ship is much less than that of a battleship, but the weaponry is basically the same. High speed, a long range, and powerful armament are the hallmarks of this type; to achieve these features, the battle cruiser is designed to be significantly larger than a battleship.

The protected cruiser is a later development of naval construction. Its distinguishing features are certain modifications in the distribution of the mass of protective armor of the ship.

The protected cruiser is a more recent advancement in naval design. Its key characteristics are specific changes in how the protective armor is arranged on the ship.

Light cruisers are vessels of from 1,500 to 7,500 tons, used in scouting, as commerce destroyers, etc. They are outside the armored class.

Light cruisers are ships weighing between 1,500 and 7,500 tons, used for scouting, as commerce raiders, and similar roles. They are not part of the armored class.

Survivors clinging to the hull of the Bluecher

Sinking of the German Cruiser “Bluecher”

Sinking of the German Cruiser "Blucher"

This most dramatic photograph of the Great North Sea Battle, in which the British fleet was victor, January 24, 1915, shows the death agony of the German cruiser “Bluecher” just as she turned turtle and sank. The ship is shown lying on her side with her machinery and armament shot into masses of twisted iron and steel, great fires raging forward, amidship and aft.

This dramatic photograph of the Great North Sea Battle, in which the British fleet was victorious, taken on January 24, 1915, shows the death throes of the German cruiser “Blücher” just as she capsized and sank. The ship is shown lying on her side with her machinery and weapons reduced to piles of twisted iron and steel, with fierce fires raging at the front, in the middle, and at the back.

Copyright by the International News Service.

Copyright by the International News Service.

Battleship Oklahoma

Photo by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Photo by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

United States Battleship “Oklahoma”

USS Oklahoma

One of the latest types of super-dreadnaught is here shown, racing along at 2012 knots an hour on a speed test. This great warship is a sister-ship of the “Nevada.” Her displacement is 27,500 tons, her engines develop 28,000 horsepower and she is armed with ten 14-inch guns in her four turrets, twenty-one 5-inch and four 3-pounders, together with four 21-inch Torpedo Tubes. She cost over $6,000,000.

One of the newest types of super-dreadnought is shown here, speeding along at 20½ knots during a speed test. This massive warship is a sister ship to the “Nevada.” It has a displacement of 27,500 tons, its engines produce 28,000 horsepower, and it's equipped with ten 14-inch guns in its four turrets, twenty-one 5-inch guns, and four 3-pounders, along with four 21-inch torpedo tubes. It cost over $6,000,000.


The Story of the Growth of the Motor Truck[57]

While exact dates are not easily obtainable, it is thought to be quite within the bounds of reasonable accuracy to say that the motor truck only began to be recognized as a practical vehicle for commercial purposes in 1905.

While exact dates are hard to find, it's generally considered fairly accurate to say that the motor truck started to be seen as a practical vehicle for commercial use in 1905.

Today motor vehicles, both pleasure and commercial, are such a common sight in every city and town, and even throughout the rural districts, that one can scarcely believe that they were a novelty such a little time ago.

Today, cars and trucks, both for fun and for business, are so common in every city and town, and even in rural areas, that it's hard to believe they were once a new thing not too long ago.

Early truck in the snow

One of the Earliest Gasoline Trucks

One of the First Gasoline Trucks

The statistics show, however, that in 1906 the total registrations of both pleasure and commercial vehicles, as reported by the various states, was 48,000—about one month’s production today of one well-known pleasure-car maker.

The statistics reveal, however, that in 1906 the total registrations of both pleasure and commercial vehicles, as reported by the various states, was 48,000—about one month’s production today of a well-known car manufacturer.

In 1915 the registrations totaled nearly 2,500,000, and every day has added to the number.

In 1915, the total registrations reached almost 2,500,000, and every day has increased that number.

It can be truthfully said that the pleasure car is the father of the truck or commercial car.

It can be honestly said that the pleasure car is the predecessor of the truck or commercial vehicle.

The application of the internal combustion engine to the use of propelling vehicles was the beginning of a new era in that world. The idea, born, one might say, with the new century, has already done more to revolutionize transportation than all of the inventions of all the centuries that have gone before.

The use of the internal combustion engine to drive vehicles marked the start of a new era in the world. The concept, which emerged with the new century, has already changed transportation more than all the inventions from previous centuries combined.

The automobile, first looked upon as a freak, then “a rich man’s plaything,[482]” has in a few years come to be recognized as a necessity, and literally millions of people are employed in its production and dependent on the industry for support.

The car, initially seen as a curiosity and then “a rich person’s toy,[482]” has in just a few years become essential, with millions of people working in its production and relying on the industry for their livelihoods.

To trace the ramifications of the industry back through the mills, mines and factories that produce the iron, steel, copper, brass, zinc, aluminum, lead, leather, lumber, glass, celluloid, etc., would make a long and interesting story, but this chapter deals with the motor vehicle as a commercial car or truck and the part it is playing in transportation of the world’s goods.

To follow the impacts of the industry back through the mills, mines, and factories that create iron, steel, copper, brass, zinc, aluminum, lead, leather, lumber, glass, celluloid, etc., would create a long and fascinating story. However, this chapter focuses on the motor vehicle as a commercial car or truck and the role it plays in the transportation of the world’s goods.

While the first commercial vehicles to come into use were electrically propelled, and while the electric truck has become a factor in the large cities, the gasoline power vehicles are, as yet, the dominant factor.

While the first commercial vehicles to be used were powered by electricity, and while electric trucks have become significant in big cities, gasoline-powered vehicles are still the most common.

Old sight-seeing coach

A 1907 Model Sight-seeing Car

A 1907 Model Sightseeing Car

At the first, business men were slow to take up the use of trucks for delivery and hauling purposes and one of the specialties of early factories was the making of “sight-seeing” cars which were sold to enterprising individuals in cities and summer resorts for the purpose of showing visitors the sights. These wagons became popular throughout the country and are still being used in many places.

At first, business people were slow to adopt trucks for delivery and hauling, and one of the early factory specialties was the production of “sightseeing” cars, which were sold to enterprising individuals in cities and summer resorts to show visitors around. These vehicles became popular across the country and are still used in many places today.

Little by little, however, progressive business men saw the advantages to be gained by motor delivery and the motor truck began to gain favor. Several of the pleasure-car manufacturers took advantage of the awakening interest and added a commercial vehicle section to their plants.

Little by little, though, forward-thinking business people recognized the benefits of motor delivery, and the motor truck started to become popular. Several passenger car manufacturers capitalized on this growing interest and expanded their factories to include a section for commercial vehicles.

Others began to see visions of the day when horses would no longer be used for other than strictly farm work, and motor-truck factories sprang up here and there, even faster than pleasure-car plants.

Others began to envision a day when horses would only be used for farm work, and motor truck factories started popping up here and there, even faster than car factories for leisure.

Like the seed mentioned in the parable of the sower, some fell on good ground and grew to produce a bountiful harvest, but many withered by the wayside.

Like the seed in the parable of the sower, some fell on good soil and grew to yield a plentiful harvest, but many withered away on the path.

1908 truck Another 1908 truck
Reliance Truck—1908 1908 Truck Model
1909 truck Another 1909 truck
Reliance Truck - 1909 1909 Truck Model

In the early days of the motor-truck industry men bought the finished vehicle, but later on the practice of selling chassis only became popular, and while today some manufacturers cater to the body trade, a large percentage of trucks are sold to the purchaser without the body, this being built by a local builder, the truck manufacturer furnishing a body builder’s blue-print.

In the early days of the motor-truck industry, people bought complete vehicles, but eventually, selling just the chassis became more common. Today, while some manufacturers still focus on providing bodies, a significant number of trucks are sold to buyers without a body, which is built by a local builder, with the truck manufacturer supplying a body builder’s blueprint.

As in everything else, it has taken time to overcome the faults of the early trucks. Most all trucks above 1,500 pounds capacity are equipped with solid rubber tires, and while the solid rubber tires and the springs on the trucks give a great deal of resiliency, it was discovered that the steady pounding over all kinds of pavements soon racked a truck to pieces and that pleasure-car practice could not be followed successively in building motor trucks.

As with everything else, it has taken time to fix the issues with the early trucks. Almost all trucks with a capacity over 1,500 pounds now come with solid rubber tires, and while the solid rubber tires and the truck springs provide a lot of bounce, it was found that the constant pounding over various types of surfaces quickly damaged a truck. It became clear that the practices used for making passenger cars couldn't be applied the same way when building motor trucks.

5-ton truck

5-Ton Truck—1913-14

5-Ton Truck—1913-14

In the earlier days truck buyers made many mistakes in selecting the size or capacity of trucks. Some made the mistake of buying trucks too light for their work. Others selected trucks large enough to provide for exceptional or emergency loads, and would, for example, buy a truck of 312-tons capacity when 90 per cent of their hauling was loads not exceeding 112 or 2 tons. Thus they not only had a greater investment than necessary in the truck itself, but were paying an exclusive charge in the way of operating costs and depreciation.

In the past, truck buyers often made mistakes when choosing the size or capacity of their trucks. Some bought trucks that were too light for their jobs. Others chose trucks that were big enough for exceptional or emergency loads, like purchasing a 312-ton truck when 90 percent of their loads were only 112 or 2 tons. As a result, they not only invested more money than needed in the truck, but they also faced higher operating costs and depreciation.

Latest light truck

Latest 34-Ton Model

Latest 34-Ton Model

Several light truck models

Some 34-Ton Trucks of the Latest Model

Some 34-Ton Trucks of the Newest Model

Tipping dump truck

A 112-Ton Truck of the Latest Model Dumping

A 112-Ton Truck of the Latest Model Dumping

Loading dumb truck

A 112-Ton Truck of the Latest Model Loading

A 112-Ton Truck of the Latest Model Loading

Rear construction of truck

Rear End Construction of a Modern 5-Ton Truck

Rear End Design of a Modern 5-Ton Truck

Modern truck

A 312-Ton Truck of the Latest Model in Active Service

A 3.5-Ton Truck of the Latest Model in Use

Truck loaded with bags of flour

The Latest 312-Ton Truck Doing Duty

The Latest 3.5-Ton Truck in Use

But the experimental days have passed, both in the manufacture of motor trucks and in their adaption to various lines of work. If the buyer has not determined by experience and investigation the kind and capacity of truck he should use, the older manufacturers are able to step in and analyze the work to be done and to intelligently recommend to the buyer what he should have.

But the trial phase is over, both in producing motor trucks and adapting them for different jobs. If the buyer hasn't figured out through experience and research the type and size of truck they need, the established manufacturers can step in, evaluate the work to be done, and make informed recommendations on what the buyer should get.

That motor trucks not only furnish cheaper transportation than horse-drawn vehicles, but greatly extend the radius of operation, is quite generally conceded. This is shown by the enormous increase in the demand for motor trucks in all lines of business where goods of any kind are to be moved over any considerable distance.

That motor trucks not only provide cheaper transportation than horse-drawn vehicles but also significantly expand the area of operation is widely accepted. This is evident from the huge increase in demand for motor trucks across all types of businesses where goods need to be transported over any substantial distance.

Chassis with cabine of modern truck

Chassis of the Latest Model 312-Ton Truck

Chassis of the Newest Model 312-Ton Truck

With motor trucks, merchants have extended their deliveries to reach territory they could not touch under the horse-delivery system.

With motor trucks, businesses have expanded their deliveries to access areas they couldn't reach with horse-drawn delivery.

Market gardeners, who must have their product in the city markets early and have it fresh, can now sell their high-priced land adjoining the cities and go miles back in the country where as good ground can be bought for from one-tenth to one-fourth the price their suburban property will bring—and still be closer to market with their motor trucks than they were before with their horses.

Market gardeners, who need to get their products to city markets early and fresh, can now sell their expensive land near the cities and move far into the countryside where they can buy equally good land for one-tenth to one-fourth of what their suburban property is worth—and still be closer to the market with their trucks than they were before with their horses.

Contractors can transport material long distances and save both time and money. Dairymen collect milk over a radius of thirty or forty miles and get it to market fresh. Freight and passenger lines are possible with motor trucks where a steam railroad or trolley system would not be practicable.

Contractors can move materials over long distances, saving both time and money. Dairy farmers pick up milk from areas up to thirty or forty miles away and deliver it to market fresh. Freight and passenger services are now doable with motor trucks in places where a steam railroad or trolley system wouldn’t be feasible.

In short, the motor truck is revolutionizing transportation. As made today by the leading manufacturers, it is simple, durable and easy to operate and care for.

In short, the motor truck is transforming transportation. Made today by top manufacturers, it's straightforward, durable, and easy to use and maintain.


What is a Diving Bell?

Diving, aside from the pleasure afforded to good swimmers, is important in many different industries, particularly in fishing for pearls, corals, sponges, etc.

Diving, besides the enjoyment it brings to skilled swimmers, is crucial in many industries, especially in retrieving pearls, corals, sponges, and more.

Without the aid of artificial appliances a skilful diver may remain under water for two, or even three minutes; accounts of longer periods are doubtful or absurd.

Without the help of artificial gear, a skilled diver can stay underwater for two or even three minutes; reports of longer times are questionable or ridiculous.

Section of hopper dredger

LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF HOPPER DREDGER, Employed on the River Clyde

LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF HOPPER DREDGER, Used on the River Clyde

The Vessel steams to place of working and is moored by the Steam Winches A A at bow and stern to buoys, the Bucket Ladder B is then lowered by steam power, and thereafter Buckets set in motion by gearing C C. The depth of water at which the Bucket Ladder dredges is regulated by the Hoisting Shears and Chain Barrel D D, driven by shafting E E from the Engines. The Buckets discharge the material by the shoot F into the Hopper G. The dredged material is discharged by the doors of the Hopper being opened by the Lifting Chains H H. These doors are hinged on to the side of Vessel, and suspended at centre by the Lifting Chains, which are connected to geared Crab Winches I I.

The vessel moves to the work site and is secured by the steam winches A A at the front and back to buoys. The bucket ladder B is then lowered using steam power, and the buckets are set in motion by gearing C C. The depth of the water where the bucket ladder dredges is controlled by the hoisting shears and chain barrel D D, powered by the shafting E E from the engines. The buckets release the material through the shoot F into the hopper G. The dredged material is unloaded when the hopper doors are opened by the lifting chains H H. These doors are hinged to the side of the vessel and supported in the center by the lifting chains, which are attached to geared crab winches I I.

Section of diving bell and barge

SECTIONAL VIEW OF DIVING BELL AND BARGE, Employed on the River Clyde

SECTIONAL VIEW OF DIVING BELL AND BARGE, Used on the River Clyde

All the appliances are worked by steam, rendering manual labour unnecessary. A is the Bell, which is raised and lowered by means of the Chain and Steam Winch B. c c are Seats within the Bell; d d, Footboards. E, Air-pipe entering the Bell at f, the air being supplied by Air-pump G driven by the Engine H. J is a Steam Crane for raising or lowering material. K K, Steam Winches for working moorings and shifting position of the barge.

All the appliances are powered by steam, making manual labor unnecessary. A is the Bell, which is raised and lowered using the Chain and Steam Winch B. c c are Seats inside the Bell; d d are Footboards. E is the Air-pipe entering the Bell at f, with air supplied by the Air-pump G driven by the Engine H. J is a Steam Crane for moving materials up or down. K K are Steam Winches for managing moorings and shifting the position of the barge.

Various methods have been proposed and engines contrived to render diving more safe and easy. The great object in all these is to furnish the diver with fresh air, without which he must either make but a short stay under water or perish.

Various methods have been suggested and engines created to make diving safer and easier. The main goal of all these is to provide the diver with fresh air, without which they can only stay underwater for a short time or risk drowning.

Diving bells have been used very effectively. A diving bell is a contrivance for the purpose of enabling persons to descend, and to remain, below the surface of water for a length of time, to perform various operations, such as examining the foundations of bridges, blasting rocks, recovering treasure from sunken vessels, etc.

Diving bells have been used very effectively. A diving bell is a device that allows people to go down and stay below the water's surface for a while to carry out different tasks, like inspecting bridge foundations, blasting rocks, retrieving treasure from sunken ships, and more.

Diving bells have been made of various forms, more especially in that of a bell or hollow truncated cone, with the smaller end closed, and the larger one, which is placed lowermost, open.

Diving bells have been created in different shapes, especially in the form of a bell or a hollow truncated cone, with the smaller end closed and the larger end, which is positioned at the bottom, open.

The air contained within these vessels prevents them from being filled with water on submersion, so that the diver may descend in them and breathe freely for a long time provided he can be furnished with a new supply of fresh air when the contained air becomes vitiated by respiration. This is done by means of a flexible tube, through which air is forced into the bell.

The air inside these containers keeps them from filling with water when submerged, allowing the diver to go down in them and breathe easily for a long time, as long as he has a fresh supply of air when the air inside gets polluted from breathing. This is achieved through a flexible tube that pumps air into the bell.

A form, called the “nautilus,” has been invented which enables the occupants, and not the attendants above, to raise or sink the bell, move it about at pleasure, or raise great weights with it and deposit them in any desired spot.

A device, known as the “nautilus,” has been created that allows the occupants, rather than the attendants above, to lift or lower the bell, move it around as they wish, or lift heavy objects with it and place them anywhere they want.

How are Harbors Dredged Out?

There are several forms of mechanical, power-operated dredges. One of the most common is the “clam-shell” dredge, consisting of a pair of large, heavy iron jaws, hinged at the back, in general form resembling a pair of huge clam shells. This with its attachments is called the grapple. In operation it is lowered with open jaws, and by its own weight digs into the ground that is to be excavated. Traction is then made on the chains controlling the jaws, which close; the grapple is hoisted to the surface and its contents discharged into scows alongside the dredge.

There are various types of mechanical, power-operated dredges. One of the most common is the “clam-shell” dredge, made up of a pair of large, heavy iron jaws that are hinged at the back, resembling a giant pair of clam shells. This along with its attachments is known as the grapple. When in use, it is lowered with the jaws open, and its own weight digs into the ground that needs to be excavated. Then, traction is applied on the chains that control the jaws, which close; the grapple is lifted to the surface and its contents are dumped into scows next to the dredge.

The dipper dredge, an exclusively American type, has a bucket rigidly attached to a projecting timber arm. In operation the bucket is lowered and made to take a curving upward cut, thus dipping up the bottom material, which is discharged through the hinged bottom of the bucket. The pump or suction dredge operates by means of a flexible pipe connected with a powerful centrifugal pump. The pipe is lowered into contact with the bottom to be excavated and the material is pumped into hopper barges or into a hopper-well in the dredge itself.

The dipper dredge, a uniquely American type, has a bucket firmly attached to a projecting timber arm. When it’s in use, the bucket is lowered and makes a curved upward cut, scooping up the bottom material, which is released through the hinged bottom of the bucket. The pump or suction dredge works with a flexible pipe connected to a powerful centrifugal pump. The pipe is lowered to the bottom that needs to be excavated, and the material is pumped into hopper barges or into a hopper-well on the dredge itself.

The center ladder bucket dredge operates by means of an endless chain of buckets moving over an inclined plane, which in structure is a strong iron ladder, one end of which is lowered to the sea bottom. The steel buckets scoop up the material at the bottom of the ladder, which they then ascend, and are discharged by becoming inverted at the upper end of the ladder. This dredge is the only one found satisfactory in excavating rock.

The center ladder bucket dredge works using an endless chain of buckets that move over a sloped surface, which is basically a sturdy iron ladder, with one end positioned at the seabed. The steel buckets pick up material from the bottom of the ladder, then climb up and dump their load by flipping over at the top of the ladder. This dredge is the only one that effectively excavates rock.

How is a Razor Blade Made?

The best scissors, penknives, razors and lancets are made of cast steel. Table knives, plane irons and chisels of a very superior kind are made of shear steel, while common steel is wrought up into ordinary cutlery.

The best scissors, pocket knives, razors, and lancets are made of cast steel. High-quality table knives, plane irons, and chisels are made of shear steel, while regular steel is used for everyday cutlery.

In making razors, the workman, being furnished with a bar of cast steel, forges his blade from it. After being brought into true shape by filing, the blade is exposed to a cherry-red heat and instantly quenched in cold water. The blade is then tempered by first brightening one side and then heating it over a fire free from flame and smoke, until the bright surface acquires a straw color (or it may be tempered differently). It is again quenched, and is then ready for being ground and polished.

In making razors, the craftsman starts with a bar of cast steel and shapes the blade from it. After filing it into the right shape, the blade is heated to a cherry-red glow and quickly cooled in cold water. Next, the blade is tempered by brightening one side and then heating it over a flame-free fire until the shiny surface turns a straw color (or it can be tempered in another way). It is quenched again and then it’s ready to be ground and polished.


The Story of the Tunnels Under the Hudson River[58]

The building of the Hudson River tunnels was probably one of the most daring engineering feats ever accomplished. As is well known, the Hudson River, for the length of Manhattan Island, is approximately a mile wide, reducing in width at the Palisades north of Hoboken. In consequence of the unusual geographical situation, all trunk lines and other transit facilities in New Jersey terminate on the westerly shore of the Hudson, and passengers were of necessity compelled to use ferries to reach New York. A conservative estimate, which was confirmed by various counts, indicates that, prior to the construction of the tubes, the annual passenger traffic between New Jersey and New York was 125,000,000, and to handle this great volume of traffic the transportation companies assembled in the Hudson River a fleet of rapid ferry boats and maintained them up to the highest and most modern standards. But this very expeditious ferry service was not enough, and for many years there was a demand for facilities for more rapid transportation of the tremendous population residing in the suburban district of New Jersey tributary to New York City. As far back as 1873, a company had been organized to construct a tunnel under the river, but had met with numerous and most discouraging difficulties and obstacles, so that it was finally compelled to abandon the work, although it succeeded in building a considerable length of structure. Efforts were made at various times after that date to revive the work, with little or no results. In 1902 it was resumed, however, and a few years later was pushed to a successful end.

The construction of the Hudson River tunnels was probably one of the most ambitious engineering achievements ever. As is widely known, the Hudson River is about a mile wide along the length of Manhattan Island, narrowing at the Palisades north of Hoboken. Because of this unique geographical situation, all main train lines and other transit options in New Jersey end on the western shore of the Hudson, forcing passengers to rely on ferries to get to New York. A conservative estimate, supported by various counts, indicates that before the tunnels were built, the annual passenger traffic between New Jersey and New York was 125 million. To manage this huge volume of traffic, transportation companies gathered a fleet of fast ferry boats in the Hudson River and maintained them to the highest modern standards. However, this efficient ferry service was not enough, and for many years there was a growing demand for quicker transportation options for the large population living in New Jersey suburbs connected to New York City. As far back as 1873, a company was formed to build a tunnel under the river, but it faced numerous and significant challenges and ultimately had to abandon the project, although it did manage to construct a considerable length of tunnel. Various attempts were made afterward to revive the project, with little success. However, in 1902, work resumed and was successfully completed a few years later.

During the undertaking, more than 40,000 men were engaged in air-pressure work and there were many thousand more who did not work under air pressure. This vast army of men consisted of all nationalities and all grades and conditions of labor. The skilled tunnel workmen are men of character and ability, usually young, of good intelligence and sound of body, without a streak of fear or cowardice in their makeup. All of those characteristics are essential to under-water air-pressure work.

During the project, over 40,000 men were involved in air-pressure work, with many thousands more who didn’t work under air pressure. This huge group of workers came from all nationalities and all levels of skill and labor conditions. The skilled tunnel workers are strong and capable individuals, usually young, intelligent, and physically fit, with no trace of fear or cowardice in them. All of these traits are crucial for underwater air-pressure work.

As is quite generally known, air pressure and tunnel shields were used in all of the under-water work. It might be well to here correct the misconception which exists in the minds of many, that the use of air pressure for such purposes is something comparatively new. This is not the case. The use of air pressure was a very early invention, and it is a matter of record that in 1830, Admiral Cochrane, afterwards Lord Dundonald, was granted letters patent for the use of air pressure in tunnel construction. The modern engineer has merely developed the art to a high degree.

As is well known, air pressure and tunnel shields were used in all underwater work. It's important to correct the misconception that using air pressure for these purposes is a recent development. This isn't true. Air pressure was actually an early invention, and records show that in 1830, Admiral Cochrane, who later became Lord Dundonald, was granted a patent for using air pressure in tunnel construction. Today’s engineers have simply advanced the technique significantly.

The method of construction used in the Hudson River tunnels has been designated the “shield method.” In this type of construction, the primary part of the tunnel structure consists of an iron shell, formed of segmental rings, bolted together through inside flanges, and forming a large articulated pipe or tube, circular in section. This iron shell is put in place segmentally by means of a shield, an ingenious mechanism which both protects the work under construction and assists in the building of the iron shell.

The construction method used for the Hudson River tunnels is called the “shield method.” In this approach, the main part of the tunnel structure is made up of an iron shell, created from segmental rings that are bolted together through internal flanges, forming a large articulated pipe or tube that is circular in shape. This iron shell is installed in sections with the help of a shield, a clever device that both safeguards the construction work and aids in assembling the iron shell.

Cross section through Hudson River

The New Short Cut to New York

The New Shortcut to New York

Hudson River Tubes of the Hudson & Manhattan R. R. Co.

Hudson River Tubes of the Hudson & Manhattan Railroad Company.

A tunneling shield consists essentially of a tube or cylinder slightly larger in diameter than the tunnel it is intended to build, which slides over the exterior of the finished lining like the tubes of a telescope. The front end of this cylindrical shield is provided with a diaphragm or bulkhead in which are apertures which may be opened or closed at will. Behind this diaphragm are placed a number of hydraulic jacks, so arranged that by thrusting against the last erected iron ring the entire shield is pushed forward. The hind end of the shield is simply a continuation of the cylinder which forms the front end, and this hind end, or tail, always overlaps the last few feet of the built-up iron-shell tunnel.

A tunneling shield is basically a tube or cylinder that is slightly wider in diameter than the tunnel it's meant to create, sliding over the surface of the finished lining like the sections of a telescope. The front end of this cylindrical shield has a diaphragm or bulkhead with openings that can be opened or closed as needed. Behind this diaphragm, there are several hydraulic jacks set up to push against the last metal ring that was installed, moving the entire shield forward. The back end of the shield is just an extension of the cylinder that makes up the front end, and this back end, or tail, always overlaps the last few feet of the constructed iron-shell tunnel.

When the openings in the bulkhead are closed, the tunnel is protected from the inrush of water or soft ground, and the openings may be so regulated that control is maintained over the material passed through. After a ring of iron lining has been erected within the tail of the shield, excavation is carried out ahead. When sufficient excavation has been taken out, the jacks are again extended, thus pushing the shield ahead, and another ring of iron is erected as before.

When the openings in the bulkhead are closed, the tunnel is shielded from the flood of water or loose soil, and the openings can be adjusted to control the materials that pass through. After a ring of iron lining has been set up at the back of the shield, excavation is done in front. Once enough excavation has been completed, the jacks are extended again, pushing the shield forward, and another ring of iron is set up just like before.

Tunnel shield in workshop

One of the Sixty-seven-Ton Tunnel Shields

One of the Sixty-seven-Ton Tunnel Shields

For the erection of these heavy plates, a hydraulic swinging arm, called the “Erector,” is mounted, either on the shield itself or on an independent erector platform, according to conditions. This erector approaches closely the faculties of the human arm. It is hydraulically operated and can be moved in any desired direction. This method of construction can be followed in almost every kind of ground that can be met with, and it is especially valuable in dealing with soft, wet grounds. In passing through materials saturated with water, the shield is assisted by using compressed air in the working chamber.

For the installation of these heavy plates, a hydraulic swinging arm, known as the “Erector,” is attached either to the shield itself or to a separate erector platform, depending on the situation. This erector mimics the capabilities of the human arm. It operates hydraulically and can be maneuvered in any direction needed. This construction method can be applied in nearly any type of ground encountered, and it is particularly useful for working in soft, wet soils. When passing through materials that are soaked with water, the shield is aided by using compressed air in the working chamber.

Front end of cutting shield

Cutting Shield Head

Cutting Shield Head

The employment of compressed air under such conditions is really a rather simple thing in itself, and means merely that the pressure of air in the chamber where men are working is maintained at a point sufficient to offset the pressure of the hydrostatic head of water and thereby prevent its inflow. A crude comparison may be made by saying that if the ceiling of a room was weak and threatening to fall—if we filled the room with sufficient pressure of air, it would support the ceiling and prevent it falling in. In tunnel work, air is supplied under compression from the mechanical construction plant located on the surface, and the pressure of air maintained in the working chamber is determined by the depth of the work below tide level, as the hydrostatic head increases with the depth.

The use of compressed air in these situations is actually quite straightforward. It simply means that the air pressure in the chamber where workers are operating is kept high enough to counteract the pressure of the water above and stop it from coming in. A rough analogy would be to say that if the ceiling of a room were weak and at risk of collapsing, filling the room with enough air pressure would support the ceiling and keep it from falling down. In tunneling, compressed air is supplied from mechanical equipment located above ground, and the air pressure in the working chamber is adjusted based on how deep the work is below sea level, since the water pressure increases with depth.

Control of air pressure is never entrusted to any but the most reliable, competent and experienced man, as it is of the utmost importance that air pressure be maintained properly. The first impulse of an inexperienced man, should he notice an inrush of water, would be to increase the air pressure, which might be a very dangerous thing to do. An experienced man, however, would very likely first lower his pressure in such an emergency, and then put up with the nuisance and difficulty of having a good deal of water in his working chamber. By doing this, he would permit the greater external pressure to squeeze the soil into the leaking pockets and thereby choke the leak.

Control of air pressure is only given to the most reliable, skilled, and experienced person, as it’s crucial to maintain the right air pressure. An inexperienced person’s first reaction when noticing an inflow of water would be to raise the air pressure, which could be very dangerous. On the other hand, an experienced person would likely reduce the pressure in such a situation, dealing with the inconvenience and challenges of having a lot of water in the working chamber. By doing this, he would allow the higher external pressure to push the soil into the leaking areas and effectively seal the leak.

Apron of tunneling shield

Apron in Front of Shield, Five Minutes Before Shoving

Apron in front of the shield, five minutes before pushing.

To improperly or inopportunely raise the air pressure would be quite likely to result in the air blowing a hole through the roof of the tunnel heading, allowing all air pressure to escape, and permitting an uncontrollable volume of water to rush in and flood the work.

To raise the air pressure incorrectly or at the wrong time would probably cause the air to blow a hole through the tunnel roof, letting all the air pressure escape and allowing a huge amount of water to rush in and flood the work.

The outer shell of the tunnel shield is composed of two- or three-ply boiler plates, and the interior is braced with a system of steel girders. The shields used weighed approximately sixty-seven tons each. Sixteen or eighteen were used. To move[497] the shield forward, each shield was equipped with sixteen hydraulic jacks, arranged around the shield circumferentially. These jacks were controlled by a series of valves, which were so designed that any one jack or any set of jacks desired could be operated. This was necessary as the direction of the shield was, as it were, guided by the pressure of the jacks. When it was desired to alter the direction of the shield, either upwards or downwards, or to the right or left, the jacks on the opposite side to which the shield was to point, were operated. The hydraulic pressure operating these jacks was 5,000 pounds per square inch, and the total energy, when all jacks were employed at the same time, was equivalent to 2,500 tons, which was equal to eleven tons per square foot of heading.

The outer shell of the tunnel shield is made of two or three layers of boiler plates, and the inside is reinforced with a system of steel beams. Each shield weighed about sixty-seven tons, and sixteen to eighteen were used. To push the shield forward, each one was fitted with sixteen hydraulic jacks arranged around it. These jacks were controlled by a series of valves, allowing any individual jack or any group of jacks to be operated. This setup was necessary because the direction of the shield was essentially guided by the pressure from the jacks. When the direction of the shield needed to be changed, either upward, downward, or to the right or left, the jacks on the opposite side of where the shield was supposed to go were activated. The hydraulic pressure powering these jacks was 5,000 pounds per square inch, and the total force, when all the jacks were used at once, amounted to 2,500 tons, which is equivalent to eleven tons per square foot of the heading.

Cutting edge of tunnelling shield

Cutting Edge of Shield in North Tunnel

Cutting Edge of Shield in the North Tunnel

Air pressure used to prevent the inflow of water and soft dirt varied from nothing up to forty-two pounds, although a fair average throughout was thirty-two pounds. It varied, of course, according to the condition encountered.

Air pressure used to stop water and soft dirt from coming in varied from zero to forty-two pounds, with a typical average being thirty-two pounds. It changed, of course, based on the conditions faced.

The working chamber is the space between the tunnel heading where work is in progress and the air-lock. The air-lock is a device used for the purpose of enabling workmen and materials to pass from the portion of the tunnel where the atmospheric pressure is normal into the portion where the air pressure is greater than normal; that is, the working chamber. The air-lock is a cylinder, usually about six feet in diameter and twenty feet in length, with a heavily constructed iron door at each end. This lock is placed horizontally in the tunnel at such a level as the conditions of the work necessitate, but usually near the bottom, and around this cylinder, and completely filling the cross-section of the tunnel, a concrete bulkhead is built and is known as the lock bulkhead. The two doors open in the same direction; the one at the normal pressure end opening into the cylinder, and the one at the heading end[498] opening away from the cylinder. One door is always closed, and both doors are closed during the operation of entering or leaving the air-pressure section.

The working chamber is the space between the tunnel face where work is happening and the air-lock. The air-lock is a device that lets workers and materials move from the part of the tunnel where the atmospheric pressure is normal to the part where the air pressure is higher than normal; that is, the working chamber. The air-lock is a cylinder, usually about six feet in diameter and twenty feet long, with heavy iron doors at each end. This lock is positioned horizontally in the tunnel at a level determined by the work requirements, but it’s usually near the bottom. Surrounding this cylinder and filling the entire tunnel’s cross-section, there’s a concrete bulkhead known as the lock bulkhead. The two doors open in the same direction: the one at the normal pressure end opens into the cylinder, and the one at the tunnel face opens away from the cylinder. One door is always closed, and both doors are closed when entering or leaving the air-pressure section.[498]

Going into the air pressure, the door at the heading end is held closed by the pressure of air against it while one is entering the lock, after which the outer door is also closed. A valve is then opened which permits the air to flow from the working chamber into the lock, until the lock becomes filled with air of the same pressure as exists in the heading. As soon as the pressure is thus equalized, the door at the heading end can be opened and the workmen pass into the heading. Going out, the operations are simply reversed. After the heading door is closed, with the workmen in the air-lock, a valve is opened which permits the air in the lock to exhaust into the normal air, until the pressure within the lock reduces to the same as that outside, when the outer door can be opened and persons inside the lock pass out. Both operations must be gradual, as a sudden change from normal to high pressure, or vice versa, would be very dangerous to anyone.

As you enter the air pressure lock, the door at the front is kept closed by the air pressure against it while you get in. Then, the outer door is also closed. A valve is opened to allow air to flow from the working chamber into the lock until the lock is filled with air at the same pressure as in the heading. Once the pressure is equalized, the front door can be opened, allowing the workers to go into the heading. When exiting, the process is simply reversed. After the front door is closed, with the workers inside the air-lock, a valve is opened to let the air in the lock escape to the normal atmosphere until the pressure in the lock drops to match the outside pressure, at which point the outer door can be opened, and the people inside the lock can exit. Both operations need to be gradual since a sudden shift from normal to high pressure, or vice versa, could be very dangerous for anyone.

Tunnelling machine breaking through wall

Shield Cutting Edge Breaking Through Wall at Sixth Avenue and Twelfth Street, Looking South, October 23, 1907

Shield Cutting Edge Breaking Through Wall at Sixth Avenue and Twelfth Street, Facing South, October 23, 1907

In tunneling under the river, nearly every conceivable combination of rocks and soils were met, but for the most part the material was silt. In such material, with a pressure of 5,000 pounds per square inch on the shield jacks, the shield was pushed through the ground as though one pushed a stick into a heap of snow, pushing aside the silt, and thus obviating the necessity of removing any excavated material. Sand or gravel, or any material which would not flow or become displaced by the shield, of course, had to be excavated ahead of the shield, and removed from the heading prior to pushing it forward. In the silt the most satisfactory and economic progress was attained, and a record was made of seventy-two feet of finished tunnel, completely lined with iron, in one day of twenty-four hours.

In tunneling under the river, almost every possible combination of rocks and soils was encountered, but mostly it was silt. With a pressure of 5,000 pounds per square inch on the shield jacks, the shield was pushed through the ground as easily as pushing a stick into a pile of snow, moving the silt aside and eliminating the need to remove any excavated material. Sand, gravel, or any material that wouldn’t flow or be displaced by the shield had to be excavated in front of the shield and removed from the heading before pushing it forward. In the silt, the most effective and cost-efficient progress was made, achieving a record of seventy-two feet of finished tunnel, fully lined with iron, in just one day of twenty-four hours.

The most difficult combination that had to be dealt with under the river was when the bottom consisted of rock and the top of silt and wet sand. In such cases, and there were many of them, the upper section of soft ground was first excavated[499] and the exposed face securely supported with timbers ahead of the shield, and the rock underlying then drilled and blasted. This was very tedious and expensive work. Exceedingly small charges of dynamite had to be used and the procedure conducted with the utmost caution.

The toughest situation to handle under the river was when the bottom was made of rock while the top was silt and wet sand. In many cases like this, the upper layer of soft ground was first dug out[499], and the exposed surface was securely propped up with wooden beams in front of the shield, then the rock underneath was drilled and blasted. This was a very tedious and costly process. Very small amounts of dynamite had to be used, and everything had to be done with the greatest care.

In the course of their progress, the shields were subjected to the most intense strains and hard usage, as may well be imagined. One of the shields is illustrated. It was used to construct the south tunnel of the up-town pair of tubes, and passed from under the Hudson River, through Morton, Greenwich and Christopher Streets, into Sixth Avenue, and north to Twelfth Street, a total distance of 4,525 feet, of which 2,075 feet was through rock overlaid with wet sand. During the progress of this shield, 26,000 sticks of dynamite were exploded in front of the cutting edge, causing great damage to the structure of the shield, so that when it arrived at its destination at Sixth Avenue and Twelfth Street, it was in such a condition of distortion that it was with difficulty that the tunnel lining could be erected behind it.

During their progress, the shields faced extreme strains and tough conditions, as one might expect. One of the shields is illustrated. It was used to build the south tunnel of the uptown pair of tubes, going from under the Hudson River, through Morton, Greenwich, and Christopher Streets, into Sixth Avenue, and north to Twelfth Street—a total distance of 4,525 feet, with 2,075 feet through rock covered in wet sand. Throughout the progress of this shield, 26,000 sticks of dynamite were detonated in front of the cutting edge, causing significant damage to the shield's structure. By the time it reached its destination at Sixth Avenue and Twelfth Street, it was so distorted that constructing the tunnel lining behind it was quite challenging.

Light at the end of the tunnel

North Tunnel, Showing Commencement of New Work

North Tunnel, Signaling the Beginning of New Work

In pushing a shield forward with the battery of powerful hydraulic jacks, each advance is of two feet, and must be followed immediately by installation of the permanent lining in the rear. In the early days, brick work was used for lining, and in recent years it has also been used to some extent, but even with the use of quick-setting Portland cement, neither brick work nor concrete has proved successful for subaqueous work, as the cement cannot reach the required strength within the time it is feasible to leave the shield standing before advancing it again.

In pushing a shield forward using a set of powerful hydraulic jacks, each move is two feet, and it has to be immediately followed by installing the permanent lining at the back. In the past, bricks were used for the lining, and while they have been used to some extent in recent years, even with the quick-setting Portland cement, neither bricks nor concrete have been effective for underwater work. This is because the cement doesn’t achieve the necessary strength in the time it's practical to leave the shield in place before moving it again.

Hole broken in wall

Hole Broken Through the South Tube of the New York and Jersey Tunnel Looking West

Hole Broken Through the South Tube of the New York and New Jersey Tunnel Facing West

During the early work on the north tube of the uptown tunnels, a point was reached where the rock was sixteen feet above the bottom of the tunnel, and the overlying silt was in a semi-fluid state. Five barges of clay had been dumped in the river over this point to make a roof for the tunnel, but the fluid clay could not be controlled, and crept through the doors of the shield. After trying all known methods to get through, it was decided to bake this wet clay by means of intense heat. Two large barges of kerosene were sent into the tunnel, and an air pipe connected to them. Fine blow-pipes were also attached, and the fire from the blow-pipes was impinged on the exposed clay until it became caked sufficiently dry and hard to overcome slipping. It required eight hours of this baking to dry the clay hard, and, during this period, water had to be played continuously on the shield to avoid damage due to the high temperature. It is believed that this was the first time that soft material met with in tunneling under a river has been solidified by means of fire. Seven days after passing this troublesome point, the rock suddenly disappeared and the work proceeded without further trouble.

During the early work on the north tube of the uptown tunnels, they reached a point where the rock was sixteen feet above the tunnel floor, and the silt above it was semi-liquid. Five barges of clay had been dumped into the river over this spot to create a roof for the tunnel, but the fluid clay couldn't be contained and seeped through the shield's doors. After trying all known methods to get through, they decided to harden the wet clay using intense heat. Two large barges of kerosene were sent into the tunnel, along with an air pipe connected to them. Fine blowpipes were also attached, and the flames from the blowpipes were directed at the exposed clay until it dried and hardened enough to stop slipping. It took eight hours of this drying process to harden the clay, and during that time, water had to be sprayed continuously on the shield to prevent damage from the high temperature. It's believed that this was the first time that soft materials encountered while tunneling under a river were solidified using fire. Seven days after getting past this tricky point, the rock suddenly vanished, and the work continued without any further issues.

Subway car and signals in tunnel

New York and New Jersey Tunnel Showing Signal and Car

New York and New Jersey Tunnel Showing Signal and Train

Another unusual situation occurred in the south tunnel of the uptown tubes. When the shield had advanced 115 feet from the Jersey side, the night superintendent in charge of the tunnel work, in his anxiety to push the work, disobeyed instructions, and the tunnel got away from him and was flooded, and his men had a narrow escape with their lives. In order to regain the tunnel, several schemes were considered, including that of sending a dredge through to dredge out the bed of the river just in advance of the shield, a sufficient depth to enable a diver to go down and timber up the exterior opening of the doorway, where the silt and mud had come through and filled the tunnel. This plan had to be abandoned, as the river above was almost entirely occupied by shipping that could not be interrupted.

Another unusual situation happened in the south tunnel of the uptown tubes. When the shield had advanced 115 feet from the Jersey side, the night superintendent overseeing the tunnel work, eager to push things along, disregarded instructions. As a result, the tunnel got away from him and was flooded, putting his workers in serious danger. To recover the tunnel, several plans were considered, including sending a dredge through to clear the riverbed just ahead of the shield, creating enough depth for a diver to go down and secure the outside opening of the doorway, where silt and mud had accumulated and blocked the tunnel. However, this plan had to be scrapped because the river above was almost completely filled with ships that couldn't be disturbed.

Diagram of ground under Jersey

An X-Ray View of a Busy Half-Mile Under the Ground on the Jersey Side of the Hudson River

An X-Ray View of a Busy Half-Mile Underground on the Jersey Side of the Hudson River

Cross section of underground infrastructure in New York

Cross-Section on Sixth Avenue at Thirty-third Street, New York

Cross-Section on Sixth Avenue at 33rd Street, New York

1. Pedestrian Path 4. New Rapid Transit Train
2. Manhattan Elevated Train 5. Hudson and Manhattan Train Station
3. Road Surface and Urban Rail 6. Pennsylvania Railroad Tunnel

Finally the difficult situation was met by obtaining two large and heavy mainsails, which made a double canvas cover measuring about sixty by forty feet. This canvas cover was then spread on a flat barge, small sections of pig iron being attached around the edges of it. Ropes were carried to fixed points to hold it in exact position. The barge was then withdrawn, and the canvas cover dropped to the bed of the river, and, most fortunately, it settled over the point where the leak had occurred, and a large number of bags of dirt were then deposited on it. An opening was then made in the bulkhead of the tunnel below, and for eight days material, under hydrostatic pressure, forced its way into the tunnel, where it was loaded on cars, and finally the canvas was drawn into the hole, stopping it up. Additional material was then deposited into the river to fill the cavity, and finally the tunnel was recovered, pumped out and work resumed. This event is of somewhat historical interest, in that the two mainsails which were used were procured from the owner of the famous American cup defender, the well-remembered “Reliance.”

Finally, the tough situation was addressed by getting two large and heavy mainsails, which created a double canvas cover about sixty by forty feet. This canvas cover was then spread on a flat barge, with small sections of pig iron attached around the edges. Ropes were secured to fixed points to hold it in place. The barge was then pulled back, and the canvas cover dropped to the bottom of the river, landing right over the spot where the leak had happened. A large number of bags of dirt were then placed on top of it. An opening was made in the bulkhead of the tunnel below, and for eight days, material, under hydrostatic pressure, forced its way into the tunnel, where it was loaded onto cars, and finally, the canvas was pulled into the hole, sealing it. Additional material was then added to the river to fill the cavity, and eventually, the tunnel was restored, pumped out, and work continued. This event is of some historical interest because the two mainsails that were used were obtained from the owner of the famous American cup defender, the well-remembered “Reliance.”

Probably the most unique and interesting pieces of construction are the three junctions on the Jersey side of the river, where the uptown tunnels from New York diverge, north to Hoboken and south to Jersey City and New York downtown. For safe and expeditious operation of trains, where the schedule is only one and one-half minutes, it was imperative that grade crossings should be avoided. By grade crossings is meant the tracks of one service crossing the tracks of another service at the same grade. At the point in question, this was a knotty problem to solve, owing to the unusual operating conditions which had to be met, there being six separate and distinct operating classes of trains to be handled around this triangle.

Probably the most unique and interesting construction features are the three junctions on the Jersey side of the river, where the uptown tunnels from New York split, heading north to Hoboken and south to Jersey City and downtown New York. For the safe and efficient operation of trains, with a schedule of just one and a half minutes, it was crucial to avoid grade crossings. Grade crossings refer to the tracks of one train service intersecting with the tracks of another service at the same level. In this case, it was a tricky problem to solve due to the unusual operational conditions that needed to be addressed, as there were six separate and distinct classes of trains that had to be managed around this triangle.

To meet this situation, three massive reinforced concrete caissons were built on the surface. They are practically large two-story houses, each being over one hundred feet in length, about fifty feet in height, and about forty-five feet in width at their widest point. The bottom edges were sharp, and, with the use of air pressure and great weights, the three structures were sunk in the ground to the same grade as the intercepting tunnels, and the tunnels were then driven into them.

To address this situation, three huge reinforced concrete caissons were constructed above ground. They are essentially large two-story buildings, each over one hundred feet long, around fifty feet tall, and about forty-five feet wide at their widest point. The bottom edges were sharp, and using air pressure and heavy weights, the three structures were sunk into the ground to match the level of the intercepting tunnels, into which the tunnels were then extended.

Particular attention should be given to the Jersey City to Hoboken tube, in the lower part of the caisson in the foreground, in the accompanying illustration, which curls around the Hoboken to Jersey City tube, and rises to the elevation of, and connects into, the New York to Hoboken tube, at the caisson in the background, at the left of the illustration. Very few of the people who travel through the tube are probably aware of such manipulation. At the same time, the arrangement absolutely avoids any grade crossing whatever, and without such an arrangement of tracks the road could not be operated with trains run so closely together as under the prevailing system.

Particular attention should be given to the Jersey City to Hoboken tube, in the lower part of the caisson in the foreground, in the accompanying illustration, which curls around the Hoboken to Jersey City tube and rises to the level of, and connects to, the New York to Hoboken tube at the caisson in the background, on the left side of the illustration. Very few of the people who travel through the tube are likely aware of such manipulation. At the same time, this arrangement completely avoids any grade crossings, and without this track arrangement, the trains couldn't run as closely together as they do under the current system.

In constructing the river tunnels the work was carried on simultaneously from opposite sides of the river, the tunnels meeting under the river, and it is interesting, if not remarkable, when one considers the difficulties under which the engineering work had to be carried on, to note that the tunnels met with practically absolute accuracy.

In building the river tunnels, the work was done at the same time from both sides of the river, with the tunnels connecting underneath. It’s intriguing, if not impressive, to recognize that despite the challenges faced during the engineering process, the tunnels aligned with almost perfect accuracy.


What Causes Floating Islands?

A floating island consists generally of a mass of earth held together by interlacing roots.

A floating island is usually a mass of earth held together by intertwining roots.

They occur on the Mississippi and other rivers, being portions of the banks detached by the force of the current and carried down the stream, often bearing trees. Sometimes such islands are large enough to serve as pasture grounds.

They happen on the Mississippi and other rivers, being parts of the banks that have broken off due to the current's force and are moved downstream, often carrying trees. Sometimes, these islands are big enough to be used as pasture land.

Artificial floating islands have been formed by placing lake mud on rafts of wicker-work covered with reeds. They were formerly used in the waters around Mexico, and may be seen in Persia, India, and on the borders of Tibet. On these the natives raise melons, cucumbers and other vegetables which need much water.

Artificial floating islands have been created by putting lake mud on rafts made of woven branches covered with reeds. They were once used in the waters around Mexico and can be seen in Persia, India, and on the borders of Tibet. On these islands, locals grow melons, cucumbers, and other vegetables that require a lot of water.


Pictorial Story of the Airship

Prominent air-men posing

A “Pusher” of Several Years Ago, With Many of the More Prominent Air-men

A "Pusher" from a Few Years Ago, Showcasing Many of the More Famous Pilots

Courtesy of The Curtis Aeroplane Co.

Courtesy of The Curtis Aeroplane Co.

Modern military aircraft

Courtesy of The Curtis Aeroplane Co.

Courtesy of The Curtis Aeroplane Co.

Up-to-date Twin Motored Military Type Tractor—200 H. P.

Modern Twin Engine Military-Type Tractor—200 H.P.

Read and his seaplane

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, New York.

The First Plane to Cross the Atlantic

The First Plane to Cross the Atlantic

The honor of being first to make the journey from America to Europe by airship fell to Lieut.-Commander A. C. Read, who piloted the U. S. seaplane, NC-4, from Newfoundland to Lisbon, Portugal, with a stop at the Azores. The photo shows Lieut.-Commander Read and the seaplane, NC-4, in readiness for their long trip, which began May 16, 1919, and ended May 27th.

The honor of being the first to fly from America to Europe in an airship went to Lieut.-Commander A. C. Read, who flew the U.S. seaplane, NC-4, from Newfoundland to Lisbon, Portugal, with a stop in the Azores. The photo shows Lieut.-Commander Read and the seaplane, NC-4, ready for their long journey, which started on May 16, 1919, and ended on May 27th.

Vickers-Vimy aeroplane

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

The First Flier to Cross the Ocean Without Stop

The First Airplane to Fly Across the Ocean Nonstop

In this Vickers-Vimy aeroplane, Captain Alcock and Lieutenant Brown made the first non-stop flight across the Atlantic on June 15, 1919, traversing 1,650 nautical miles in 16 hours 12 minutes.

In this Vickers-Vimy airplane, Captain Alcock and Lieutenant Brown completed the first non-stop flight across the Atlantic on June 15, 1919, covering 1,650 nautical miles in 16 hours and 12 minutes.

Map of Atlantic Ocean with flight routes

Chart of the Transatlantic Fliers

Transatlantic Fliers Chart

This shows graphically the course of the transatlantic aviators. The U. S. navy seaplane was first to make the flight, leaving Newfoundland May 16, 1919, flying to the Azores in 15 hours, to Lisbon in 1312 hours, and to Plymouth in 13 hours. Hawker, in a Sopwith aeroplane, left Newfoundland May 18th, and covered half the distance to Europe, but was compelled to descend. He was picked up by a steamer. Captain Alcock and Lieutenant Brown made the first non-stop flight June 15th; and the British dirigible, R-34, made the first round-trip, leaving Scotland on July 2d.

This shows visually the path taken by the transatlantic aviators. The U.S. Navy seaplane was the first to complete the flight, departing from Newfoundland on May 16, 1919, and reaching the Azores in 15 hours, Lisbon in 13½ hours, and Plymouth in 13 hours. Hawker, flying a Sopwith airplane, left Newfoundland on May 18th and traveled halfway to Europe but had to land. He was rescued by a steamer. Captain Alcock and Lieutenant Brown completed the first non-stop flight on June 15th; and the British dirigible, R-34, made the first round-trip, leaving Scotland on July 2nd.

Wright brothers and their aeroplane

The Wright Brothers and their Famous Aeroplane

The Wright Brothers and Their Famous Airplane

The machine is shown in action and resting on the ground. The pictures were taken during the army test flights at Fort Myer, Virginia.

The machine is displayed in operation and resting on the ground. The photos were taken during the army test flights at Fort Myer, Virginia.

Dirigible R-34 with hydrogen bottles

Copyright by Western Newspaper Union.

Copyright by Western Newspaper Union.

From Britain to America and Back by Balloon

From Britain to America and Back by Hot Air Balloon

The great British dirigible, R-34, was the first lighter-than-air vessel to cross the Atlantic. She left East Fortune, Scotland, July 2, 1919, under command of Major Scott, and covered 3,200 miles to Mineola, Long Island, in 4 days 12 hours 12 minutes. The return journey was made in 3 days 3 hours 3 minutes. Note the piles of hydrogen gas bottles needed to replenish the gas supply.

The impressive British airship, R-34, was the first lighter-than-air vehicle to cross the Atlantic. It departed from East Fortune, Scotland, on July 2, 1919, under the command of Major Scott, traveling 3,200 miles to Mineola, Long Island, in 4 days, 12 hours, and 12 minutes. The return trip took 3 days, 3 hours, and 3 minutes. Take note of the stacks of hydrogen gas bottles required to refill the gas supply.

Dirigible hidden in the clouds over a submarine

Hide and Seek in the Baltic

Hide and Seek in the Baltic

A Zeppelin flying over a British submarine in the stormy sea.

A blimp flying over a British submarine in the rough seas.

Airplane over British monitor

A Battle of Four Elements

A Battle of Four Elements

British monitors shelling the German land batteries near Nieuport. German submarines were actively engaged in trying to torpedo these monitors and the British monoplane was useful for giving the range to the ship and reporting the accuracy of the shots.

British monitors were bombarding the German land batteries near Nieuport. German submarines were actively trying to torpedo these monitors, and the British monoplane was helpful for determining the range to the ship and reporting the accuracy of the shots.

Dropping bombs from a contraption under a Zeppelin

Zeppelin Device for Dropping Bombs

Zeppelin Bomb Dropping Device

An armored car is suspended by three cables from the Zeppelin airship to a distance of several thousand feet below the monster aircraft, which is concealed in the clouds above. (Sphere copr.)

An armored car is hanging from three cables attached to the Zeppelin airship, several thousand feet below the massive aircraft, which is hidden in the clouds above. (Sphere copr.)

Belgian balloon over ruins

A Belgian Military Observation Balloon

A Belgian military observation balloon

The car of this balloon is equipped with wireless, which is used to send word of the gun positions of the enemy, movements of troops, ranges for the gunners and much other valuable information. A cable holds the balloon captive.

The car of this balloon is equipped with wireless technology, which is used to communicate the enemy's gun positions, troop movements, ranges for the gunners, and a lot of other valuable information. A cable keeps the balloon tethered.

French dirigible

The French Dirigible Airship, “La Patrie”

The French airship, “La Patrie”

Russian dirigible showing details of car

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

Copyright by Underwood & Underwood, N. Y.

The Dirigible “Russia”

The airship “Russia”

The great dirigible balloon “Russia,” one of the fleet of Russian aircraft engaged in the European War. The photograph shows the hanging car of the “Russia.” The captain’s bridge is in front above the engine room, which is forward on the lower deck. Two propellors are in front. The cabin is just behind the pilot’s seat.

The huge airship “Russia,” part of the fleet of Russian aircraft involved in the European War. The picture shows the gondola of the “Russia.” The captain’s bridge is located above the engine room in the front on the lower deck. There are two propellers at the front. The cabin is right behind the pilot’s seat.


The Story of an Automobile Factory[59]

In visiting the factory where a half million automobiles are made each year, the visitor first comes to the power house.

In visiting the factory where half a million cars are produced each year, the visitor first arrives at the power house.

In the construction of this building 5,200 tons of structural steel were used, the equivalent necessary to build a modern twenty-story skyscraper.

In building this structure, 5,200 tons of steel were used, which is enough to construct a modern twenty-story skyscraper.

Six engines of a combination gas-steam type, housed in this building, develop 36,000 combined horse-power. They are said to be the first gas-steam engines to be put to practical use. Another engine, using steam only, develops 2,000 horse-power, while several pumping engines increase the total horse-power of the plant to 45,000, probably the largest individual unit of any power-plant in the world, and said to be the only one of its kind in actual operation.

Six gas-steam combination engines in this building produce 36,000 combined horsepower. They are believed to be the first gas-steam engines used practically. Another engine, which runs on steam only, generates 2,000 horsepower, while several pumping engines boost the total horsepower of the plant to 45,000, likely making it the largest single unit of any power plant in the world, and said to be the only one of its kind currently in operation.

Crankshaft grinding department

Crank Shaft Grinding Department

Crankshaft Grinding Department

Some idea of the size of the engines is gained from the fact that the stroke is 72 inches, while the gas cylinders are 42 inches in diameter and the steam cylinders are 36 and 68 inches in diameter.

Some idea of the size of the engines can be understood from the fact that the stroke is 72 inches, while the gas cylinders have a diameter of 42 inches and the steam cylinders are 36 and 68 inches in diameter.

Electricity control panel

The Power House Equipment Includes the Largest Direct Current Control Board in the World

The Power House Equipment has the largest direct current control board in the world.

In producing the gas and steam for these engines only twenty-two tons of coal per hour are consumed, which speaks well for the efficiency of the engines. In addition to the steam, the daily consumption of producer gas for power purpose only is 28,512,000 cubic feet. Added to this figure for power gas, is another item of gas used in the factory for various purposes, which averages nearly 1,000,000 cubic feet per day, bringing the per diem consumption of gas by the company up to 29,512,000 cubic feet.

In generating the gas and steam for these engines, only twenty-two tons of coal are used each hour, which shows how efficient the engines are. Along with the steam, the daily use of producer gas solely for power is 28,512,000 cubic feet. Additionally, there's another amount of gas consumed in the factory for various purposes, which averages nearly 1,000,000 cubic feet per day, bringing the company's total daily gas consumption to 29,512,000 cubic feet.

The main factory buildings are 900 feet long and 800 feet wide, four stories in height and of fire-proof construction. They are so designed that every part of the interior receives a full share of daylight.

The main factory buildings are 900 feet long and 800 feet wide, four stories tall and built to be fireproof. They are designed so that every part of the interior gets plenty of natural light.

The heating and ventilating of the factory building is accomplished in a modern, scientific manner. In the winter, warm washed air is forced through long ducts in the floor up into the room. In the summer, cool washed air is handled in the same way, thus providing a clean, healthful atmosphere the year around. By this system the air in the factory is completely changed five times per hour.

The heating and ventilation of the factory building is done in a modern, scientific way. In winter, warm washed air is pumped through long ducts in the floor into the room. In summer, cool washed air is managed the same way, creating a clean, healthy environment all year round. With this system, the air in the factory is completely exchanged five times per hour.

Outside view of overhead monorail

Overhead Monorail System

Overhead Monorail System

At the right as the visitor enters the factory, is seen the tool construction department. Here are employed approximately 1,000 expert tool makers, machinists and die sinkers. These men are engaged in making new machinery (designed in the company shops), tools, jigs, fixtures and other machine shop accessories, and repairing those in use.

At the right as the visitor enters the factory, is seen the tool construction department. Here are employed approximately 1,000 skilled toolmakers, machinists, and die sinkers. These workers are focused on creating new machinery (designed in the company workshops), tools, jigs, fixtures, and other machine shop accessories, as well as repairing those currently in use.

Overhead are traveling cranes which have a capacity of forty tons each. These cranes facilitate the work of the tool construction department by carrying cumbersome parts of machinery to and from it for alterations and repairs.

Overhead are traveling cranes that can each lift up to forty tons. These cranes make it easier for the tool construction department by moving heavy machine parts to and from the department for modifications and repairs.

Here the visitor is standing upon the roof of a great tunnel, in which are all the heating, water and steam pipes, and the power cables running from the power house to[521] various parts of the shop. This tunnel is large enough to permit the easy passage of a touring car.

Here, the visitor is standing on the roof of a large tunnel that contains all the heating, water, and steam pipes, as well as the power cables running from the power house to[521] various areas of the shop. This tunnel is big enough to allow a touring car to pass through easily.

Standing in front of the factory office, the visitor is doubly impressed with the magnitude of the view before him. In one continuous room, containing approximately 700,000 square feet of floor space, there are, in round numbers, 8,000 machines in actual operation, representing an outlay of about $5,000,000. These machines use some 2,500 gallons of lubricating oils and 11,000 gallons of cutting fluids each day. For driving the many machines, about fifty miles of leather belting are used, giving the room the appearance of a dense forest.

Standing in front of the factory office, the visitor is even more impressed by the vast view before him. In one large area, covering about 700,000 square feet, there are roughly 8,000 machines actively running, which cost around $5,000,000 to set up. These machines consume about 2,500 gallons of lubricating oil and 11,000 gallons of cutting fluid every day. To power the various machines, around fifty miles of leather belting are used, making the room look like a thick forest.

The visitor who is familiar with machine shop practice will notice at once the peculiar location and setting of machinery in this shop. The machines of a class, or type, are not all located in a single group or unit. Each department contains all of the necessary machinery to complete every operation on each part or piece it produces. To illustrate, a rough forging or casting is started in a department at one point, and after passing through the machines doing the required operations, it leaves this department in a finished condition, ready to be assembled into the car.

The visitor who knows about machine shop practices will immediately notice the unusual arrangement and placement of machinery in this shop. The machines of a specific class or type aren't all grouped together. Each department has all the necessary machinery to complete every operation on each part it produces. For example, a rough forging or casting begins in one department at a certain point, and after going through the machines for the needed operations, it leaves that department fully finished and ready to be assembled into the car.

Patient treated in factory hospital

A Corner of the Main Hospital

A Section of the Main Hospital

Such a system necessitates the grouping together of many different kinds of machines, as well as including brazing furnaces, cyanide furnaces and other special units (most generally found in separate buildings). Chutes run from one machine to another, so that a workman can transport a part from his operation to the next one by gravity. The results of this transportation system are remarkable, making a big saving in trucking expense, loss of material and the absence of usual delays.

Such a system requires the grouping of many different types of machines, including brazing furnaces, cyanide furnaces, and other specialized units (usually located in separate buildings). Chutes connect one machine to another, allowing a worker to move a part from one operation to the next by gravity. The results of this transportation system are impressive, leading to significant savings in transportation costs, material loss, and typical delays.

Piston machining shop

Piston Machining Department

Piston Manufacturing Department

As the visitor passes down through the machine shop, he particularly notices the sanitary conditions of the plant. There is a department, enrolling about 500 men, whose duties are to keep the floors swept clean, the windows washed, in fact to keep the sanitary conditions surrounding the workmen as nearly perfect as possible. The floors of the entire plant are scrubbed at least once a week, with hot water and a strong solution of alkali, which removes the grease. Another department of about twenty-five men does nothing but paint the walls and ceilings of the factory, keeping everything fresh and clean.

As the visitor walks through the machine shop, he especially notices how clean the facility is. There's a department with around 500 men whose job is to keep the floors clean, the windows washed, and overall maintain sanitary conditions for the workers as close to perfect as possible. The floors throughout the entire plant are scrubbed at least once a week using hot water and a strong alkali solution that removes grease. Another department of about twenty-five men focuses solely on painting the walls and ceilings of the factory, ensuring everything stays fresh and clean.

To facilitate the inter-departmental transportation of materials in the factory, there is an overhead monorail system, comprising over 112 miles of I-beam track. On this system are nine monorail cars, each car having two 2-ton hoists, by means of which great boxes and trays of material can be picked up and carried overhead from point to point in the shop.

To enable the movement of materials between departments in the factory, there’s an overhead monorail system that spans more than 112 miles of I-beam track. This system includes nine monorail cars, with each car equipped with two 2-ton hoists that can lift and transport large boxes and trays of materials overhead from one location to another in the shop.

Near the pay office is the main first-aid department. Here the chief surgeon has on his staff eight regular doctors and several first-aid nurses. The surgical equipment, which includes an X-ray machine, pulmotor, operating table and electrical appliances, as well as improved surgical instruments, enables the surgeon to cope with any accident.

Near the payroll office is the main first-aid department. Here, the head surgeon has eight regular doctors and several first-aid nurses on staff. The surgical equipment, which includes an X-ray machine, pulmotor, operating table, and electrical appliances, along with upgraded surgical instruments, allows the surgeon to handle any accident.

Rear axle assembly

Rear Axle Assembly

Rear Axle Assembly

The factory service office houses a department which is responsible for the well-being of factory employees. Of the 200 men in the division the majority are employed in the capacities of watchmen, to take care of the many entrances and exits of the plant and also to inspect the fire-fighting equipment which is distributed over the entire plant.

The factory service office has a department that's responsible for the well-being of factory employees. Out of the 200 men in the division, most are employed as watchmen to manage the various entrances and exits of the plant and to check the fire-fighting equipment distributed throughout the entire plant.

This fire-fighting equipment is being continually added to as the plant expands and now embraces more than a mile and a half of large hose, 10,000 feet of smaller hose, and 2,900 feet of hose attached to chemical tanks. There are 1,421 three-gallon chemical extinguishers and fifty-eight 40-gallon chemical tanks, mounted on wheels. Surrounding the plant are twenty-seven water hydrants equipped to handle two and three lines of hose, while inside the plant are eight hose-houses fully equipped. Pyrenes to the number of 175 are distributed about the departments for combatting electrical fires.

This fire-fighting equipment is constantly being upgraded as the plant grows and now includes over a mile and a half of large hose, 10,000 feet of smaller hose, and 2,900 feet of hose connected to chemical tanks. There are 1,421 three-gallon chemical extinguishers and fifty-eight 40-gallon chemical tanks on wheels. Surrounding the plant are twenty-seven water hydrants capable of handling two and three lines of hose, while inside the plant are eight fully equipped hose houses. A total of 175 Pyrenes are located around the departments for tackling electrical fires.

A new alarm system, said to be the most modern in the country, is being installed throughout the factory. Back of all other preparation is the sprinkler system, composed of water pipes hung next to the ceiling in all buildings and so designed that there is a sprinkler head every ten feet. Should the temperature in a room, for any reason, reach 160 degrees, the sprinkler heads in the immediate vicinity will open automatically, spraying out water which is piped from two tanks having a combined capacity of 600,000 gallons.

A new alarm system, claimed to be the most advanced in the country, is being installed throughout the factory. Behind all the other preparations is the sprinkler system, made up of water pipes installed next to the ceiling in every building, designed so that there's a sprinkler head every ten feet. If the temperature in a room reaches 160 degrees for any reason, the sprinkler heads nearby will automatically open, spraying water from two tanks with a total capacity of 600,000 gallons.

In addition to its other duties the factory service department has charge of the lost and found articles. Since this work was included, almost every sort of personal property, from key-rings to motor-cycles has been found and restored to the rightful owners.

In addition to its other responsibilities, the factory service department is in charge of lost and found items. Since taking on this task, nearly every type of personal property, from key rings to motorcycles, has been found and returned to its rightful owners.

Proceeding from the factory service office, the visitor finds himself in the main[524] crane-way, devoted exclusively to the storage of parts in the rough, or semi-finished condition. This crane-way contains over 67,000 square feet of floor space. Overhead are two 5-ton electric cranes, so arranged that they can unload material from railway cars at one end of the crane-way and deposit it in a position to be picked up by the monorail cars, or placed in bins or barrels for storage. An interesting item in regard to these cranes is that the load can be moved in three directions at one time, this being accomplished by means of the small car hoist. While the crane proper is moving through the crane-way, this car travels across the crane, and at the same time raises or lowers whatever may be suspended from it.

Leaving the factory service office, the visitor enters the main[524] crane-way, which is dedicated solely to the storage of parts that are rough or semi-finished. This crane-way has over 67,000 square feet of floor space. Above, there are two 5-ton electric cranes arranged so they can unload materials from railway cars at one end of the crane-way and then position them for pick up by monorail cars or place them in bins or barrels for storage. An interesting feature of these cranes is that they can move loads in three directions at once, achieved through the small car hoist. While the main crane moves along the crane-way, this car travels across the crane and simultaneously raises or lowers whatever is hanging from it.

Cylinder machining deprartment

Cylinder Machining Department

Cylinder Machining Division

Passing by the crane-way one comes to the rear axle unit assembly. The manufacturing policy of the company is to make unit assemblies in different departments and deliver them to the final assembly.

Passing by the crane area, you arrive at the rear axle unit assembly. The company's manufacturing policy is to produce unit assemblies in various departments and then send them to the final assembly.

In the unit assembly departments are received the finished parts from the machine shop. These parts are assembled on progressive traveling tracks. By this system each assembler, or operator, performs one operation only, and repeats this operation on every unit passing through the department. As a result, every operator soon becomes a specialist, and specialization is the fundamental principle of the entire organization.

In the unit assembly departments, finished parts from the machine shop are received. These parts are assembled on moving conveyor tracks. With this system, each assembler or operator does just one task and repeats it for every unit that comes through the department. As a result, each operator quickly becomes a specialist, and specialization is the core principle of the whole organization.

The economic results from this system have been wonderful, as will be shown in some of the departments yet to be described. It saves floor space, and eliminates congestion[525] due to trucking, as large quantities of material are piled along each side of the conveyor, and the unit in process of assembling is moved to the stock, rather than each individual piece of the assembly being distributed at different places.

The economic results from this system have been amazing, as will be shown in some of the departments yet to be described. It saves floor space and eliminates congestion[525] from trucking, as large amounts of material are stacked along each side of the conveyor, and the unit being assembled is moved to storage, instead of each individual piece of the assembly being distributed in different locations.

After the rear axle has been completely assembled, it is immersed in a tank containing enamel, and is hung on a special trolley which runs by gravity along an I-beam track. This trolley carries the axle to an elevator, which lifts it to a conveyor baking oven, located in a section of the roof. The axles are continually moving through this oven, and at the expiration of about forty-five minutes emerge from the far end completely baked. They are automatically dropped onto another elevator which lowers them to the point near where they are used in the final assembly. All material and unit assemblies move in one direction—that is, toward the final assembly.

After the rear axle is fully assembled, it gets dipped in a tank of enamel and is placed on a special trolley that moves by gravity along an I-beam track. This trolley transports the axle to an elevator, which lifts it to a conveyor baking oven located in the roof section. The axles continuously pass through this oven, and after about forty-five minutes, they come out from the other end completely baked. They are automatically dropped onto another elevator that lowers them to a spot close to where they'll be used in the final assembly. All materials and unit assemblies move in one direction—toward the final assembly.

Engine assembly department

Motor Assembly

Motor Assembly

Beyond the rear axle section is the department that makes the magnets for the magneto, and also that in which the transmission is assembled on a conveyor track, ending in an automatic elevator which transports the completed transmission to the motor assembly line.

Beyond the rear axle section is the department that produces the magnets for the magneto, as well as the area where the transmission is assembled on a conveyor belt, finishing with an automatic elevator that transports the completed transmission to the motor assembly line.

In the rear of the transmission department is the motor assembly. This assembly begins at the point where the cylinder machine shop ends, so that the movement of the cylinder from the time it arrives in the machine shop until it goes into the finished motor, is continuous. In the machining of the cylinder castings, and the operation of assembling the motor, close inspection of the work is noticeable. By the use of the assembling line, better inspection is possible, than where one or two men[526] assemble the entire motor. In addition to the inspection in the assembly, there are three points of trial, or working or testing, which show up any defects in the motor.

In the back of the transmission department is the motor assembly. This assembly starts where the cylinder machine shop ends, so the movement of the cylinder from when it arrives in the machine shop until it goes into the finished motor is seamless. During the machining of the cylinder castings and the process of assembling the motor, close inspection of the work is evident. By using the assembly line, better inspection is possible compared to when one or two people assemble the entire motor. In addition to the inspection during assembly, there are three testing points that reveal any defects in the motor.[526]

The final operation in the motor assembly line is the block test, where the motor is inspected and tested before being assembled into the chassis. On the block test, the motor is driven by an electric motor for the final O. K. and tryout before being installed in this chassis.

The last step in the motor assembly line is the block test, where the motor is checked and tested before being installed in the chassis. During the block test, the motor is powered by an electric motor for the final approval and trial before being placed in the chassis.

At the end of this testing period, if no defect has developed, the motor is approved, placed upon a special truck and wheeled to the final assembling line.

At the end of this testing period, if no defects have appeared, the motor is approved, loaded onto a special truck, and moved to the final assembly line.

The motor department just described furnishes an interesting illustration of the economy of the moving assembling system. Before the present system was installed about 1,100 employees were required in this department, working a nine-hour day to build 1,000 motors. Today, as a direct result of the new methods of assembling, and the efficiency gained through the profit-sharing with employees, about 1,000 men are assembling more than 2,000 motors in an eight-hour day.

The motor department just described offers an interesting example of how efficient the moving assembly system is. Before this system was implemented, around 1,100 employees were needed in this department, working nine-hour days to produce 1,000 motors. Now, thanks to the new assembly methods and the increased efficiency from profit-sharing with employees, about 1,000 workers are assembling over 2,000 motors in just an eight-hour day.

The assembling of the front axle, dash and radiator are fully as interesting as the unit just described, but space will not permit a detailed explanation of them.

The assembly of the front axle, dashboard, and radiator is just as interesting as the unit mentioned earlier, but there isn't enough space to provide a detailed explanation of them.

Transmission covers

Transmission Cover Department

Transmission Cover Dept.

Perhaps the most interesting department in the whole factory, to the visitor, is the final assembly. In this division, all the assembled units meet the assembly conveyor at the point where they are needed. At the start of the track a front axle unit, a rear axle unit and a frame unit are assembled. This assembly is then started in motion by means of a chain conveyor, and as it moves down the room at a constant speed of eight feet per minute, each man adds one part to the growing chassis or does one operation, which is assigned to him, so that when the chassis reaches the end of the line, it is ready to run on its own power.

Perhaps the most interesting department in the whole factory, to the visitor, is final assembly. In this section, all the assembled units come together on the assembly conveyor at the point where they're needed. At the start of the track, a front axle unit, a rear axle unit, and a frame unit are put together. This assembly is then set in motion by a chain conveyor, and as it moves down the room at a steady pace of eight feet per minute, each worker adds one part to the growing chassis or performs one task assigned to them, so that when the chassis reaches the end of the line, it’s ready to operate on its own power.

In following the final assembly line from the point where the chain conveyor engages the frame and axles, the visitor is impressed with the dispatch with which every movement is executed. The gasoline tank, for example, comes down from the fourth floor on a conveyor outside of the building, and drops through a chute onto a bridge over the assembly line. On this bridge is located a gasoline pump, from which each tank receives one gallon of gasoline before it is installed in the car.

In following the final assembly line from the point where the conveyor chain connects to the frame and axles, visitors are struck by how quickly every action is done. The gas tank, for instance, comes down from the fourth floor on an outside conveyor and drops through a chute onto a platform above the assembly line. On this platform, there's a gas pump that fills each tank with one gallon of gas before it's installed in the car.

After the gasoline tank is assembled, a number of small units are added, such as the hand brake control lever, gasoline feed pipe, and fender irons, until the point is reached at which the motor is placed in the frame.

After the gas tank is put together, several small parts are added, like the hand brake lever, gas feed pipe, and fender brackets, until we get to the point where the engine is installed in the frame.

Ordinarily the setting of a motor in the frame is a long operation, but in this assembly the motor is elevated by a hoist, and lowered into place while the chassis is moving along the conveyor track. From this point, other small parts are added, and bolts tightened, until the growing chassis reaches the bridge on which the dash unit is deposited by a chute from the second floor, where it is assembled. The dash unit includes the dash, complete steering gear, coil, horn, and all wiring ready to be attached to the motor, so that its installation is rapid.

Normally, installing a motor in the frame takes a long time, but in this assembly, the motor is lifted by a hoist and lowered into place while the chassis moves along the conveyor track. After that, other small parts are added and bolts are tightened until the expanding chassis reaches the bridge where the dash unit is dropped by a chute from the second floor, where it’s put together. The dash unit includes the dash, complete steering gear, coil, horn, and all wiring ready to connect to the motor, making its installation quick.

Further along, such parts as the exhaust pipe, muffler, and side pans for the motor are quickly fastened in place, and the wheels are brought into the assembly.

Further along, components like the exhaust pipe, muffler, and side panels for the engine are quickly secured, and the wheels are added to the assembly.

There will be noticed the vertical chutes, extending through the ceiling. Down through these, from the third floor, come the wheels, with the tires mounted and inflated to the proper pressure. From this point the chassis moves under the bridge upon which are stored the radiators, which have been delivered by a belt conveyor.

There are vertical chutes extending through the ceiling. From the third floor, the wheels, with the tires mounted and inflated to the right pressure, come down through these chutes. At this point, the chassis moves beneath the bridge where the radiators, delivered by a belt conveyor, are stored.

At the end of the assembly line, the rear wheels on the finished chassis drop into a set of revolving grooved wheels, sunk into the concrete floor, and driven by an overhead motor. Two ends are accomplished by this operation. First, when the wheels of the car revolve with the grooved wheels, this motion is transmitted to the differential, through the drive shaft to the motor, limbering up all these parts. The second is that while the parts are being limbered up, the switch is turned on and the motor started.

At the end of the assembly line, the rear wheels on the completed chassis drop into a set of rotating grooved wheels embedded in the concrete floor, powered by an overhead motor. This process accomplishes two things. First, as the car's wheels turn with the grooved wheels, this motion is passed on to the differential through the drive shaft to the motor, loosening all these components. The second thing is that while the parts are being loosened, the switch is turned on and the motor is started.

Front axle inspection

Inspection of Front Axle after Machining

Inspecting the Front Axle after Machining

At the end of the line the complete chassis is driven out into the yard under its own power. Guided by practiced hands it moves swiftly out into the yard, turns sharply and enters the final inspection line. A corps of inspectors at this point takes charge of the chassis, and the responsibility for each part is assigned to some one man.

At the end of the line, the complete chassis rolls out into the yard under its own power. Steered by skilled hands, it quickly moves into the yard, makes a sharp turn, and enters the final inspection line. A team of inspectors takes over the chassis at this point, and each part's responsibility is assigned to an individual inspector.

From the final testing line the chassis is driven to the body chutes, which extend into the factory yard from the third floor of the new six-story building, and are so constructed that the chassis may be driven under them. The bodies are let down the[528] chutes on belt conveyors, picked up by small derricks and swung over onto the chassis. The bodies are at this time placed on the chassis merely as a means of a rapid transportation to the freight cars, for in ordinary transportation the bodies are packed in the cars separate from the chassis.

From the final testing line, the chassis is driven to the body chutes that extend into the factory yard from the third floor of the new six-story building, designed so that the chassis can be driven underneath them. The bodies are lowered through the [528] chutes on belt conveyors, picked up by small derricks, and swung onto the chassis. At this stage, the bodies are placed on the chassis only for quick transportation to the freight cars, since in regular transportation, the bodies are shipped separately from the chassis in the cars.

In the rear of the main plant are two six-story buildings each 60 feet wide by 845 feet long, built parallel to each other and connected by a crane-way 40 feet wide the full length and height of the buildings.

In the back of the main plant, there are two six-story buildings, each 60 feet wide and 845 feet long, built parallel to each other and linked by a 40-foot wide crane way that runs the entire length and height of the buildings.

The boiler house, which furnishes the steam for heating the entire plant, is located in the rear of these buildings. The method of heating is worthy of particular interest, as the air is forced over coils of steam pipes located in pent houses on the roofs, and from this point is driven down into the various rooms through the hollow columns which support the floors. In the summer, cool washed air is forced down through these same columns, maintaining a normal, even temperature, compatible with the state of the weather.

The boiler room, which provides steam for heating the whole facility, is situated at the back of these buildings. The heating system is particularly interesting, as air is pushed over coils of steam pipes found in penthouses on the roofs, and from there, it’s directed down into the different rooms through the hollow columns that support the floors. In the summer, cool, filtered air is pushed down through these same columns, keeping a consistent temperature that stays in line with the weather conditions.

Engine installation

Installing Motor on Final Assembly Line

Installing Motor on the Final Assembly Line

Various unit assemblies, small machine departments, and store rooms are located here in addition to all the body work.

Various unit assemblies, small machine departments, and storage rooms are located here, along with all the body work.

Practically the entire first floors are used as a receiving department, where all the material consigned to the company is checked and inspected. Railway tracks run the full length of both crane-ways, facilitating the unloading and loading of supplies and parts.

Practically the entire first floor is used as a receiving department, where all the materials sent to the company are checked and inspected. Railway tracks run the full length of both crane-ways, making it easier to unload and load supplies and parts.

The body department occupies the greatest amount of space, requiring, with the[529] upholstering department, most of the three upper floors. In addition to this work the construction of tops, curtains and radiators is carried on, and a large space is used for the storage of equipment and parts, such as lamps, horns, tires, etc. A part of the second floor is devoted to the storage and the shipping of parts to branches and agents.

The body department takes up the most space, sharing most of the three upper floors with the[529] upholstery department. Along with this work

Having seen the body placed upon the chassis, the visitor passes along toward the north. In succession are the chutes on which the crates of fenders are sent down from the fourth floor of the main factory building to the shipping platform. Here is also a chain elevator, which raises the wheels out of the freight cars to a runaway on which they travel by gravity to the third floor of the main factory. With this device it is possible for three or four men to unload about 6,000 wheels each day.

Having seen the body put on the chassis, the visitor moves north. Next are the chutes that send down crates of fenders from the fourth floor of the main factory building to the shipping platform. There’s also a chain elevator that lifts the wheels out of the freight cars to a slope where they roll down by gravity to the third floor of the main factory. With this setup, three or four men can unload around 6,000 wheels each day.

Starter installation

Mechanical Starter—End of Final Assembly

Mechanical Starter—Final Assembly Complete

One passes the loading docks, where crews of six to eight men each, working as a unit, remove the bodies and wheels from the chassis, and load them into freight cars. So proficient are these loaders that a freight car is loaded in twenty minutes. Approximately 150 loaded freight cars are sent out every day. Besides these factory shipments there are more than 300 loaded freight cars in transit each day from branch factories.

One passes the loading docks, where teams of six to eight workers each, functioning as a unit, take the bodies and wheels off the chassis and load them into freight cars. These loaders are so skilled that a freight car can be loaded in twenty minutes. About 150 loaded freight cars leave every day. In addition to these factory shipments, there are over 300 loaded freight cars in transit daily from branch factories.

The bodies are shipped separate from the chassis, being stood on end in one-half of the car and protected from dust by coverings.

The bodies are shipped separately from the chassis, standing upright in one-half of the car and covered to keep them dust-free.

The chassis are put in the other end of the car, the first one being carried in, minus the wheels, and placed in a diagonal position. Brackets of cast iron, for holding the axle to the floor, are made in the foundry. The front axle rests on the floor, and the rear axle rests against the opposite wall near the top of the car. A block, with a hole which just fits the axle, holds it against the wall.

The chassis are placed at the other end of the car, with the first one being brought in without the wheels and set diagonally. Cast iron brackets are manufactured in the foundry to secure the axle to the floor. The front axle sits on the floor, while the rear axle leans against the opposite wall near the top of the car. A block with a hole that perfectly fits the axle keeps it steady against the wall.

Bodies are united with chassis

The Body Chute, where Bodies are Placed on Each Chassis

The Body Chute, where bodies are placed on each chassis.

The next chassis is brought in and placed with its front axle opposite the first one. In this way the chassis alternate until the car is full. The space in the center of the car contains the fenders, and other removable parts of the equipment.

The next chassis is brought in and positioned with its front axle facing the first one. This way, the chassis alternate until the car is full. The space in the center of the car holds the fenders and other removable parts of the equipment.

Just beyond the loading docks is the foundry.

Just past the loading docks is the foundry.

The foundry is one of the most interesting divisions of the entire plant, and ranks, perhaps, as one of the most unique in the country, as far as practice and equipment are concerned. As a general rule, foundry practice has not shown the changes in an increase of production that machine departments have, but in this foundry, due to standardization of parts and specialization on the one car, it has been possible to devise and install the unique equipment now used, which brings this department down to the plane of expense and up in the labor-saving efficiency prevailing throughout the entire plant.

The foundry is one of the most interesting parts of the entire plant and is likely one of the most unique in the country in terms of its practices and equipment. Generally, foundry operations haven't seen the same increases in production as machine departments, but in this foundry, because of standardizing parts and focusing on one type of car, it's been possible to create and install the unique equipment used now, which lowers costs and boosts labor-saving efficiency throughout the entire plant.

Craneway with loading platforms

Craneway, Showing Loading Platforms

Craneway, Displaying Loading Docks

This department works twenty-four hours a day, in three shifts of eight hours each; iron is being melted and poured continuously during the day and first night shifts. An average of over 400 tons of iron is poured daily, and 426 tons of gray iron have been poured in a single day. This tonnage is especially interesting, as it is produced on a floor space of only 36,324 square feet.

This department operates 24/7, with three shifts of eight hours each; iron is constantly melted and poured throughout the day and during the first night shifts. On average, over 400 tons of iron are poured each day, with a record of 426 tons of gray iron poured in a single day. This volume is particularly impressive, considering it is produced in just 36,324 square feet of space.

Continuous core-oven

Continuous Core-Oven

Continuous Core Oven

All this iron is poured on overhead power-driven mold carriers, which travel about twelve feet per minute. These mold carriers have suspended from them pendulum-like arms, on the lower end of which is a shelf. The molders who make the molds for the castings are stationed alongside of these conveyors; the molding sand with which[532] they fill the flasks is stored overhead in a hopper, the gate of which discharges directly onto the molding machine. There are two molders for each part, one making the “drag,” or lower part of the mold, the other making the “cope,” or the upper half. When these two halves of the mold are finished they are put together, or “closed” on the shelf of the conveyor, which carries the finished mold to the man who pours the molten metal. The molten metal is brought to this man’s station by means of large ladles, suspended on a trolley on an I-beam track, running from the cupola through the entire length of the foundry. This does away with the necessity of carrying the ladle of iron a long distance, thus saving much time and lessening the liability to accidents.

All this molten iron is poured onto overhead power-driven mold carriers that move at about twelve feet per minute. These mold carriers have pendulum-like arms hanging from them, with a shelf at the lower end. The molders who create the molds for the castings are positioned alongside these conveyors; the molding sand used to fill the flasks is stored overhead in a hopper, and the gate discharges directly onto the molding machine. There are two molders for each part: one makes the "drag," or the lower part of the mold, while the other makes the "cope," or the upper half. Once these two halves of the mold are finished, they are put together, or "closed," on the shelf of the conveyor, which then carries the completed mold to the person pouring the molten metal. The molten metal is brought to this person's station using large ladles suspended on a trolley along an I-beam track that runs from the cupola through the entire foundry. This setup eliminates the need to carry the ladle of iron over a long distance, saving time and reducing the risk of accidents.

Heat treatment of steel

Quenching Steel Forgings in Heat-Treatment Operation

Quenching Steel Forgings in Heat Treatment Process

While the mold is being poured it is in constant motion, and continues so from the pouring station to the end of the conveyor, where the casting is shaken out of the sand. The casting is thrown to one side to cool, the flasks are hung upon hooks on the[533] arm of the conveyor, to be returned to the molder, and the sand drops through a grating in the floor onto a belt conveyor; on this conveyor it is dropped on an elevator, raised overhead and “cut,” or mixed with new sand, and passed on to another conveyor, which deposits it in the hoppers above referred to, ready for the molder’s use. In all this journey the sand is never shoveled.

While the mold is being poured, it’s constantly moving, and it continues to do so from the pouring station to the end of the conveyor, where the casting is shaken out of the sand. The casting is set aside to cool, the flasks are hung on hooks on the[533] arm of the conveyor to be returned to the molder, and the sand falls through a grate in the floor onto a belt conveyor; on this conveyor, it's dropped onto an elevator, lifted overhead, “cut,” or mixed with new sand, and then passed on to another conveyor, which directs it into the hoppers mentioned earlier, ready for the molder’s use. Throughout this entire process, the sand is never shoveled.

In casting cylinders, on account of their size and the care needed in setting the cores, a different style conveyor is used. The molder, instead of putting the mold on a pendulum conveyor, places it upon a track, where it is moved by means of a chain. During this travel the various cores are set, and the molds closed, moving to the point where the men with large ladles pour the mold. From this point it is transferred to another track. As it travels down this track, the casting is given an opportunity to “set,” or cool. At the end of this line it is shaken out over a grating, and the sand handled in the same manner as on the smaller conveyors.

In casting cylinders, due to their size and the careful setup required for the cores, a different type of conveyor is used. Instead of placing the mold on a pendulum conveyor, the molder puts it on a track, where it is moved by a chain. During this movement, the various cores are set, and the molds are closed, then they are taken to the point where workers with large ladles pour the mold. From there, it's transferred to another track. As it moves down this track, the casting has a chance to "set" or cool off. At the end of this line, it's shaken out over a grating, and the sand is handled in the same way as on the smaller conveyors.

Crank shaft straightening

Straightening Crank Shafts on Steam Hammers

Straightening Crank Shafts on Steam Hammers

As soon as the castings have cooled sufficiently they are put into great horizontal cylinders, called tumblers. Small metal stars are placed in these tumblers with the castings, and when the tumbler is full it is started revolving. This shakes all the sand from the castings and they come out clean and bright. This process continues for some time, depending on the size of the castings. Near the tumblers are the grinding wheels, upon which are ground off the rough edges and the castings put into shape for the machine shop. They are sorted, inspected and counted before removing from the foundry.

As soon as the castings have cooled down enough, they are placed into large horizontal cylinders called tumblers. Small metal stars are added to these tumblers along with the castings, and when the tumbler is full, it starts to spin. This shakes off all the sand from the castings, leaving them clean and shiny. This process continues for a while, depending on the size of the castings. Near the tumblers are the grinding wheels, where the rough edges are smoothed out, and the castings are shaped for the machine shop. They are sorted, inspected, and counted before being removed from the foundry.

Another interesting feature is the handling of sand in the core room. The sand is handled entirely in a gallery built above the room, equipped with storage bins and sand mixers. Over each core-maker’s bench is a hopper, connected with the floor of the gallery. When the sand is mixed it is dropped through holes in the floor into the hoppers, which deposit the sand on the bench convenient for the core-maker.

Another interesting feature is how sand is managed in the core room. The sand is all handled in a gallery above the room, which has storage bins and sand mixers. Above each core-maker's bench is a hopper that connects to the floor of the gallery. When the sand is mixed, it drops through holes in the floor into the hoppers, which then deposit the sand right onto the bench for the core-maker's convenience.

This core room contains perhaps the only endless chain core oven in this country in which are two endless chain conveyors. These have hanging upon them large sets of shelves, upon which the cores are placed for baking. It is impossible to over-bake or under-bake a core, as the rate of travel of the conveyor is fixed at a speed which leaves the core in the oven the correct length of time.

This main room has what might be the only endless chain core oven in the country, featuring two endless chain conveyors. These conveyors have large sets of shelves hanging on them, where the cores are placed for baking. It’s impossible to over-bake or under-bake a core since the speed of the conveyor is set to ensure that the core stays in the oven for just the right amount of time.

All the aluminum parts as well as a large proportion of the brass, are also cast in this foundry.

All the aluminum parts and a significant amount of the brass are also cast in this foundry.

The process of heat-treating steel forgings before they are machined is one of the most scientific and accurate features in the manufacture of this car. Vanadium steel is used throughout the construction of the car. It has been found from long and deep experimental work by engineers, that the structural condition of steel may be changed by the application of heat, and with certain conditions ascertained, by bringing a piece of steel to a certain temperature, and then setting the molecular condition in the steel by sudden cooling, or quenching, that the steel of a crank shaft can be made to stand[534] impact, that the steel of a front axle can be made a most efficient agent to withstand vibration. Practically every forging in the car is made of a special steel, for which a special formula of heat-treating has been worked out, in accordance with the work, or strain, the part must stand in the finished car.

The process of heat-treating steel forgings before they are machined is one of the most scientific and precise aspects of manufacturing this car. Vanadium steel is used throughout its construction. Engineers have determined through extensive experimentation that the structural properties of steel can be altered through heat application. By heating a piece of steel to a specific temperature and then quickly cooling it, or quenching it, the steel in a crankshaft can be made to resist impact, and the steel in a front axle can be made highly effective at withstanding vibration. Almost every forging in the car is made from a special steel, with a specific heat-treating formula developed according to the work or strain that part will endure in the finished vehicle.

It is by the use of this high-grade, scientifically heat-treated vanadium steel that it is possible for the company to manufacture a light-weight car, which has the ability to stand up under severe usage, and to sell at the low price at which it is sold today.

It’s thanks to this high-quality, scientifically heat-treated vanadium steel that the company can produce a lightweight car that can handle heavy use and is sold at the affordable price it has today.

The heat-treating department contains about seventy-five large furnaces, which consume from 5,000 to 6,000 gallons of fuel oil per day. It is into these furnaces that the various forgings are placed for heat-treating. In each one is introduced a pyrometer, connected electrically with a switchboard located in a separate building. This switchboard is very similar to those used in telephone exchanges. The operator takes the temperature reading of every furnace on his board about every minute. The furnace foreman is notified by the operator as to the temperature by means of small colored electric lights, located above the furnace. The lighting of all the colors at the same time is the signal to pull the heat or, in other words, extinguish the fires and empty the furnace. After the required heat has been reached, the forgings are allowed to either cool in the air, be covered with pulverized mica, or quenched in a special solution, as the case may require.

The heat-treating department has around seventy-five large furnaces that use between 5,000 and 6,000 gallons of fuel oil each day. This is where various forgings are placed for heat treatment. Each furnace is equipped with a pyrometer that connects electrically to a switchboard in a separate building. This switchboard looks a lot like those used in telephone exchanges. The operator checks the temperature of every furnace on their board about once a minute. The furnace foreman is informed of the temperature through small colored electric lights positioned above the furnace. If all the lights turn on at the same time, that signals to shut off the heat or, in other words, put out the fires and empty the furnace. Once the desired temperature is reached, the forgings can either cool in the air, be covered with powdered mica, or be quenched in a special solution, depending on what’s needed.

Operators working on the pyrometers

Pyrometers by which the Temperature of the Furnaces is Regulated

Pyrometers used to manage the temperature of the furnaces

In this department are also located many grinding wheels and tumbling barrels, similar to those used in the foundry, so that the various forgings may be put in first-class condition before they are laid down in the machine shop.

In this department, there are also many grinding wheels and tumbling barrels, similar to those used in the foundry, so the various forgings can be polished and prepared before they are placed in the machine shop.

Punch presses

This Belt Carries the Finished Parts and Scraps from the Punch Presses

This conveyor transports the finished parts and scraps from the punch presses.

The operations in the manufacture of the crank case, or engine pan, of the motor is of interest for several reasons, and the visitor has the opportunity of viewing these processes.

The processes involved in making the crank case, or engine pan, of the motor are interesting for several reasons, and visitors can see these operations in action.

The crank case in itself is interesting because it is made from drawn sheet steel, instead of cast aluminum, as was once thought necessary.

The crankcase is noteworthy because it’s made from drawn sheet steel, rather than cast aluminum, which was previously believed to be essential.

Camera operator on suspended platform

Taking Industrial Motion Pictures

Creating Industrial Videos

Operator suspended from traveling crane.

Operator banned from using crane.

The presses on which these crank cases are drawn are especially worthy of note, for they weigh about fifty tons each, and exert a downward pressure of about 900 tons. It is necessary that this drawing be made in four operations; the first and second are particularly interesting, on account of their depths, which are 512 and 9316 inches, respectively. After each drawing operation it has been found necessary that the case be annealed, to restore the strained or calloused surface produced at certain points by contact with the dies, to a soft, ductile condition, to conform to the[537] balance of the case, or, in other words, to produce a homogeneous condition of the surface.

The machines used to shape these crank cases are particularly noteworthy because they each weigh about fifty tons and exert a downward force of around 900 tons. This shaping process must be done in four stages; the first two are especially interesting due to their depths, which are 512 and 9316 inches, respectively. After each shaping stage, it’s essential to anneal the case to restore the strained or hardened surface created at certain points from contact with the dies, bringing it back to a soft, flexible state to ensure a well-balanced case, or in other words, to achieve a consistent surface condition.

This annealing is accomplished by a furnace through which the cases are moved by a chain conveyor onto an elevator which raises them up through the roof, and down again, depositing them near the press which is to perform the next drawing operation. While moving on this elevator the cases are cooled so that they can be handled as soon as they are lowered.

This annealing is done using a furnace where the cases are moved by a chain conveyor onto an elevator that lifts them up through the roof and back down again, placing them near the press that will carry out the next drawing operation. While on the elevator, the cases cool down so they can be handled right after they are lowered.

After the drawing operations have been completed, the case is trimmed; the side arms, front end supports, radius rod support, are riveted and brazed to it, making a case as strong and solid, and yet as light, as it is possible to make.

After the drawing operations are finished, the case is trimmed; the side arms, front end supports, and radius rod support are riveted and brazed to it, creating a case that is as strong and solid as possible while still being lightweight.

Film cutting room

Assembling Industrial Motion Picture Films

Creating Industrial Films

Near these crank case presses are located several hundred punch and drawing presses of various sizes. These presses blank out and draw from sheet steel of special analysis, a large number of parts (which in ordinary practice are made from castings or forgings), carrying the same strength, but also very much lighter in weight.

Near these crankcase presses are several hundred punch and drawing presses of various sizes. These presses cut out and shape parts from specially formulated sheet steel, a large number of which are typically made from castings or forgings. They have the same strength but are much lighter in weight.

The interesting feature of this department is the arrangement of the presses, which enables all finished parts, as well as the scrap steel, to be deposited upon a traveling belt conveyor, at the end of which are stationed men who sort the various parts, and place them in proper receptacles. By this arrangement it is possible to place the presses closer together than could be done if it were necessary to leave aisles large enough for trucking the material to and from the presses, effecting a great saving in floor space.

The interesting feature of this department is the setup of the presses, which allows all finished parts and scrap steel to be placed on a moving belt conveyor. At the end of the conveyor, there are workers who sort the different parts and put them in the right containers. This setup makes it possible to position the presses closer together than if we had to leave wide aisles for moving materials to and from the presses, creating a significant saving in floor space.

Assembled chassis in neat rows outside the factory

A Thousand Assembled Chassis

A Thousand Assembled Chassis

At last accounts the production was 2,768 cars in a single day.

At the last count, the production was 2,768 cars in just one day.

The pictures with which this story is illustrated were all made by the photographic department of the company, and are but a few of the thousands on file, portraying details of every operation in the manufacture of a car. The department is completely equipped to take and produce motion picture films of the highest quality.

The images that accompany this story were all created by the company's photography department, and they represent just a small selection of the thousands available, highlighting various aspects of car manufacturing. The department is fully equipped to capture and produce high-quality motion picture films.

The growth of this department, in its own peculiar field, has kept pace with the growth of the company as an industrial factor. But a few years ago, this department was an incident only. The quarters were small, the staff was composed of two men, and the entire work was confined to making photographs of the cars and parts for advertising literature.

The growth of this department, in its unique area, has kept up with the overall growth of the company as an industrial player. A few years ago, though, this department was just an afterthought. The space was small, the team had just two people, and their whole job was limited to taking photos of the cars and parts for advertising materials.

A modern studio is now maintained on the fourth floor of the factory—the staff of skilled operators numbering twenty.

A modern studio is now set up on the fourth floor of the factory, with a team of twenty skilled operators.

The moving picture portion of the company’s work is, in volume, the largest conducted by any industrial concern. As a matter of interest, it is estimated that the operations of this department in the “movie” field are equal in magnitude to the efforts of many of the better known film-producing studios which specialize in such work. And, large as the scope of operations already is, it is still growing, in response to an increasing demand for pictures of the factory as well as of events of general interest.

The film part of the company's work is, by far, the biggest undertaking of any industrial business. Interestingly, it's estimated that this department's activities in the movie industry are comparable in size to those of many well-known film studios that focus on this type of work. And, as extensive as the operations already are, they're still expanding due to a growing demand for films about the factory and for events that are of general interest.


The expression “The tune that the old cow died of” has been used to express the giving of advice instead of material help, because of an old song which told of a man who had nothing to feed his cow upon and so played her this tune: “Consider, good cow, consider. This isn’t the time for grass to grow.”

The phrase “The tune that the old cow died of” is used to describe giving advice instead of actual help, stemming from an old song about a man who had nothing to feed his cow and played her this tune: “Think about it, good cow, think about it. This isn’t the right time for grass to grow.”

How do Big Buildings Get their Granite?

Stones suitable for important building purposes are usually found at a good distance below the surface. In the case of unstratified rocks, such as granite, the stone is most frequently detached from the mass by blasting, a process by which much valuable stone is wasted, and a different method is employed whenever it is found possible. In the case of stratified rocks, blocks are separated by hand tools alone. Small holes a few inches apart are cut along a certain length of rock, into which steel wedges are inserted. These are driven in by heavy hammers until the stratum is cut through. The large blocks necessary for monumental purposes are generally obtained in this way, and before they leave the quarry they are usually reduced as nearly as possible to a rectangular form.

Stones that are suitable for important construction projects are typically found deep below the surface. For unstratified rocks like granite, the stone is often extracted using blasting, which wastes a lot of valuable material. A different method is used whenever possible. For stratified rocks, blocks are separated using only hand tools. Small holes a few inches apart are drilled along a specific length of rock, into which steel wedges are inserted. These wedges are driven in with heavy hammers until the layer is completely cut through. The large blocks needed for monumental work are usually obtained this way, and before leaving the quarry, they are typically shaped as closely as possible to a rectangular form.

Granite is a fire-formed rock which has been exposed to great heat and pressure deep down in the earth. It is one of the most abundant of that species of rocks seen at or near the surface of the earth, and was formerly considered as the foundation rock of the globe, or that upon which all sedimentary rocks repose. Granite supplies the most durable materials for building, as many of the ancient Egyptian monuments testify. It varies a great deal in hardness as well as in color and for that reason must be selected with care when desired for building purposes.

Granite is a rock formed by fire that has been subjected to intense heat and pressure deep within the earth. It is one of the most common types of rock found at or near the earth's surface, and it was once thought to be the foundational rock of the planet, the base on which all sedimentary rocks rest. Granite provides some of the most durable building materials, as many ancient Egyptian monuments show. It varies significantly in hardness and color, so it needs to be chosen carefully when used for construction.

Granite abounds in crystallized earthy materials, and these occur for the most part in veins traversing the mass of the rock. Of these minerals, beryl, garnet and tourmaline are the most abundant. The decomposed felspar of some varieties of granite yields the kaolin used in porcelain manufacture. Granite is not rich in mineral ores.

Granite is full of crystallized earthy materials, mostly found in veins running through the rock. Among these minerals, beryl, garnet, and tourmaline are the most common. The broken-down felspar from some types of granite produces the kaolin used in making porcelain. Granite doesn’t contain a lot of mineral ores.

It is abundant in America and is largely quarried in the United States for building purposes, especially in New England. The best known quarries are those of New England. There is a great deal of granite found in South Carolina and Georgia, but much of this, as well as that of some parts of California, is in a singular state of decomposition, in many places being easily penetrated by a pick. Granite quarried anywhere in which felspar predominates is not well adapted for buildings, as it cracks and crumbles down in a few years.

It’s plentiful in America and is mainly quarried in the United States for construction, especially in New England. The most famous quarries are in New England. A lot of granite is found in South Carolina and Georgia, but much of it, along with some from parts of California, is in a unique state of decay, making it easy to break apart with a pick in many areas. Granite quarried anywhere where feldspar is dominant isn’t suitable for buildings, as it cracks and crumbles within just a few years.

Granite quarry

Granite Quarry

Granite Quarry

A large quarry near Barre, Vermont. The rock occurs in what is known as “sheet formation.”

A large quarry near Barre, Vermont. The rock is found in what's called "sheet formation."


Railroad Scenes from Shop and Road

Steam locomotive

The Pennsylvania Railroad Company’s “Broadway Limited,” a Twenty-Hour Train Between New York and Chicago[60]

The Pennsylvania Railroad Company's "Broadway Limited," a twenty-hour train service between New York and Chicago.[60]

Electric locomotive

All-Steel Passenger Train, Drawn by Electric Locomotive, as Used in the New York Tunnels of the Pennsylvania Railroad[60]

All-Steel Passenger Train, Pulled by Electric Locomotive, Used in the New York Tunnels of the Pennsylvania Railroad[60]

Electric train

Electric Train on the Main Line of the Pennsylvania Railroad[61]

Electric Train on the Main Line of the Pennsylvania Railroad[61]

Fire fighting locomotive

Locomotive Equipped with Fire-Fighting Apparatus[61]

Firefighter Locomotive[61]

Very long train

Train of 120 Loaded Coal Cars Drawn by a Single Locomotive[62]

Train of 120 loaded coal cars pulled by a single locomotive[62]

Express train aboyut to leave station

Express Train Ready to Leave the Broad Street Station of the Pennsylvania Railroad at Philadelphia[62]

Express Train Set to Depart from the Broad Street Station of the Pennsylvania Railroad in Philadelphia[62]

Observation car of the Broadway Limited train

Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

Aboard the “Broadway Limited”

On the “Broadway Limited”

The observation car is provided with book-cases, a writing desk and stenographer.

The observation car is equipped with bookcases, a writing desk, and a stenographer.

Union Line freight cars

A String of All-Steel Freight Cars Just Turned Out of the Shops[63]

A new series of all-steel freight cars has just been released from the shops.[63]

Platform baggage transport

Electric Baggage Truck Hauling Trailers[63]

Electric Baggage Truck Pulling Trailers[63]

Pennsylvania Station from the air

Bird’s-Eye View of the Pennsylvania Station, New York City[64]

A Bird's-Eye View of Pennsylvania Station, New York City[64]

Washington D.C.'s Union Station

The “Union Station” at Washington, D. C.[64]

Union Station in D.C.[64]

Freight train in hilly area

Freight Train, Eastbound, on the Horseshoe Curve[65]

Freight Train, heading east, on the Horseshoe Curve[65]

Paint drying oven with passenger car inside

Oven for Drying Paint on Passenger Cars at the Altoona, Pa., Shops of the Pennsylvania Railroad Company[65]

Oven for Drying Paint on Passenger Cars at the Altoona, PA, Shops of the Pennsylvania Railroad Company[65]

Repair building for locomotives

Locomotive Building

Train Construction

View in the erecting shop where the locomotives are assembled. The traveling crane in the foreground is capable of transporting a locomotive to any part of the shop.

View in the assembly shop where the locomotives are put together. The traveling crane in the foreground can move a locomotive to any part of the shop.

Courtesy of the Baldwin Locomotive Works.

Thanks to the Baldwin Locomotive Works.

Heavy express locomotive Articulated freight locomotive

Modern Locomotives

Modern Trains

The upper view shows a passenger locomotive used on the fastest heavy express trains. It weighs 272,000 pounds, with tender 70 feet long, and has a draw-bar pull of 30,700 pounds. The lower view shows a Mallet Articulated Type freight locomotive, one of the largest ever built. It consists of two units, linked together to give flexibility to the wheel base. The locomotive is 108 feet 10 inches long, weighs 700,000 pounds, and has a draw-bar pull of 96,000 pounds. Oil is used for fuel.

The upper view shows a passenger locomotive used on the fastest heavy express trains. It weighs 272,000 pounds, has a tender that is 70 feet long, and can pull 30,700 pounds. The lower view shows a Mallet Articulated Type freight locomotive, one of the biggest ever built. It consists of two units connected to provide flexibility in the wheelbase. The locomotive is 108 feet 10 inches long, weighs 700,000 pounds, and has a pulling capacity of 96,000 pounds. It uses oil as fuel.

Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad and the Baldwin Locomotive Works.

Thanks to the Pennsylvania Railroad and the Baldwin Locomotive Works.

Freight locomotive

Type Freight Locomotive—The Delaware & Hudson Co.

Type Freight Locomotive—The Delaware & Hudson Co.

Built by American Locomotive Company.

Built by American Locomotive Co.

Foundry

Foundry

Foundry

Schenectady, N. Y., Works, American Locomotive Company

Schenectady, NY, American Locomotive Company Works

Passenger locomotive

Pacific Type Passenger Locomotive—New York Central R. R.

Pacific Type Passenger Locomotive—New York Central Railroad

Built by American Locomotive Company.

Built by American Locomotive Co.

4-8-2 Passenger locomotive

4-8-2 Type Passenger Locomotive—Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific R. R.

4-8-2 Type Passenger Locomotive—Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad

Built by American Locomotive Company.

Built by American Locomotive Co.

Workshop

Machine Shop

Machine Shop

Schenectady, N. Y., Works, American Locomotive Company.

Schenectady, NY, American Locomotive Company Works.

Freight locomotive

Mikado Type Freight Locomotive—Delaware, Lackawanna & Western R. R.

Mikado Type Freight Locomotive – Delaware, Lackawanna & Western R. R.

Built by American Locomotive Company.

Built by ALCO.

Rod workshop

Rod Shop

Rod Shop

Schenectady, N. Y., Works, American Locomotive Company.

Schenectady, NY, Works, American Locomotive Company.

Freight locomotive

Mallet Type Freight Locomotive—Baltimore & Ohio R. R.

Mallet Type Freight Locomotive — Baltimore & Ohio Railroad

Built by American Locomotive Company.

Built by American Locomotive Co.

Cylinder workshop

Cylinder Shop

Cylinder Shop

Schenectady, N. Y., Works, American Locomotive Company.

Schenectady, NY, Works, American Locomotive Company.

Freight locomotive

2-10-2 Type Freight Locomotive—New York, Ontario & Western R. R.

2-10-2 Type Freight Locomotive—New York, Ontario & Western Railway

Built by American Locomotive Company.

Built by American Locomotive Co.

Erecting workshop

Erecting Shop

Building Store

Schenectady, N. Y., Works, American Locomotive Company.

Schenectady, NY, Works, American Locomotive Company.

Electric locomotive

New York Central Electric Locomotive[66]

New York Central Electric Train[66]

Electric locomotive

Pennsylvania Railroad Electric Locomotive[67]

Pennsylvania Railroad Electric Train[67]

Two of the best known types of electric locomotive. The New York Central type is 43 feet long, 14 feet 912 inches high, and weighs 230,000 pounds. It is equipped with four 550-horse-power motors and has a maximum speed of 60 miles per hour. The Pennsylvania type is the latest development. It is built in two halves for flexibility and either half may be replaced during repairs. The complete unit weighs 157 tons, is 64 feet 11 inches long, and the motors have combined horse-power of 4,000, giving a draw-bar pull of 79,200 pounds, and a speed of 60 miles per hour.

Two of the most well-known types of electric locomotives are the New York Central type and the Pennsylvania type. The New York Central model is 43 feet long, 14 feet 9½ inches high, and weighs 230,000 pounds. It's equipped with four 550-horsepower motors and can reach a maximum speed of 60 miles per hour. The Pennsylvania type is the latest version, designed in two halves for flexibility, allowing either half to be replaced during repairs. The complete unit weighs 157 tons, measures 64 feet 11 inches long, and the motors have a total horsepower of 4,000, providing a draw-bar pull of 79,200 pounds and a speed of 60 miles per hour.


The Story of an Up-to-Date Farm[68]

A man who had been tied in a great city all his life made his first visit the other day to an up-to-date farm. He was so surprised at what he saw that he wrote a letter describing his emotions. Some of it is worth quoting because it shows a picture of the modern farm as it was cast upon the eye of a man who had never seen it before.

A man who had been stuck in a big city all his life recently took his first trip to a modern farm. He was so astonished by what he saw that he wrote a letter expressing his feelings. Some parts are worth quoting because they paint a picture of the modern farm through the eyes of someone who had never seen it before.

“I was whisked from the railway station in a big touring car, through beautiful country. Then we turned up a flower and shrub lined concrete driveway, and stopped by a home, capacious and modern. Inside I found electric lights, electric iron and bathroom with running water.

“I was driven from the train station in a big tour car, through beautiful countryside. Then we turned up a concrete driveway lined with flowers and shrubs, and stopped in front of a spacious, modern home. Inside, I found electric lights, an electric iron, and a bathroom with running water.

Woman using petrol engine powered washing machine

The Woman on the Farm at Last Enjoying the Benefit of Labor-Saving Machines

The Woman on the Farm Finally Enjoying the Benefits of Labor-Saving Machines

This small mounted kerosene engine runs the washing machine, pump, cream separator and churn. It is easily drawn about from place to place by hand where its energy is needed to lighten the housework.

This small kerosene engine on wheels powers the washing machine, pump, cream separator, and churn. It can be easily moved by hand to wherever its energy is needed to make housework easier.

“I found that the good man of the house had his own electric light and water plant, run by kerosene engines, that his cows were milked automatically, that he pulled his plows, harrows, drills, manure spreader and binder with a kerosene tractor, that his hired men went about the farm doing everything as they rode on some machine, that he went to church and town in an automobile, and that he delivered the products of his farm to market with a motor truck. Everything was managed like a factory. Things went forward with order and with assurance. Everyone was busy and happy.”

“I found that the owner of the house had his own electric light and water system, powered by kerosene engines, that his cows were automatically milked, that he used a kerosene tractor to pull his plows, harrows, drills, manure spreader, and binder, that his hired workers went around the farm doing everything while riding on some machine, that he drove to church and town in a car, and that he delivered his farm products to market using a motor truck. Everything was organized like a factory. Things progressed with order and confidence. Everyone was busy and happy.”

This is an optimistic picture of one of our best farms, but compare it with the[557] best that could be found only a few hundred years ago. The best farmer of those days held all the land for miles around and lived in a castle in the middle of it. The castle was dark and cold and was made of rough stones fitted together. The poor farmers were serfs and came two or three days out of a week to their master’s house to work. Those were the great days of their lives, for then they ate of the master’s food.

This is a hopeful view of one of our top farms, but compare it with the[557] best from just a few hundred years ago. The best farmer back then owned all the land for miles and lived in a castle right in the middle of it. The castle was dark and cold, built from rough stones that were put together. The poor farmers were serfs, coming to their master's house to work two or three days a week. Those were the highlight of their lives, as they got to eat the master's food.

Food—that was the problem of those long tired years which dragged through the ages, when nearly everyone was a farmer, and a farmer with crude tools held in his hands. Time was when practically the whole world went to bed hungry and rose again in the morning craving food, just as half the millions of India do today because they do with their hands what a machine should do.

Food—that was the issue during those long, exhausting years that stretched on for ages, when nearly everyone was a farmer using basic tools. There was a time when almost the entire world went to bed hungry and woke up in the morning wanting food, just like half the millions in India do today because they do with their hands what a machine should do.

Lorry on Pike's Peak

The Motor Truck May be Used by the Farmer Even in Hilly and Mountainous Places

Farmers Can Use Trucks Even in Hilly and Mountainous Areas

This photograph was taken near the summit of Pike’s Peak.

This photo was taken close to the top of Pike’s Peak.

People in the hungry, unfed ages grew so used to privation that even the philosophers accepted sorrow and woe as a matter of course and dilated upon their virtues for chastening the human soul. “It is better to go to the house of mourning than the house of mirth,” said one of the prophets, and such words brought comfort to the hungry, miserable millions who had to mourn and go hungry whether it was to their advantage or not.

People in the starving, deprived times became so accustomed to lack that even the philosophers accepted suffering and pain as normal and elaborated on their virtues for refining the human spirit. “It is better to go to the house of mourning than the house of joy,” said one of the prophets, and those words provided solace to the starving, suffering millions who had to grieve and go without food, regardless of whether it helped them or not.

Modern-day use of reaping hook in India

The Reaping Hook was the First Implement Used for Harvesting Grain of which we have Record

The Reaping Hook was the first tool documented for harvesting grain.

This pictures the reaping hook as still used in India.

This shows the reaping hook as it's still used in India.

Today the years glide by like pleasant pictures. We are fed, busy and happy. We almost let the dead bury their dead today while the living drive forward their tasks, achieving as much in a year as the old ages did in twenty. We have learned to feed ourselves and the food fills our bodies and brains with energy which must find expression in useful accomplishment. “Blessed is he who has found his work[558] to do,” we say nowadays, “but thrice blessed is he who has found a machine to do it for him.”

Today, the years fly by like pleasant images. We're fed, busy, and happy. We almost allow the dead to bury their dead while the living push forward with their tasks, accomplishing as much in a year as people did in twenty in the past. We’ve learned to feed ourselves, and the food energizes our bodies and minds, which needs to be channeled into meaningful achievements. “Blessed is he who has found his work[558] to do,” we say now, “but three times blessed is he who has found a machine to do it for him.”

Thread your way back through history to the time when the slender lives of men expanded into full and useful employment, and you will find that, so far as raising the world’s food is concerned, it all began with the invention of the reaper in only the last century. It is interesting to know something of the precarious entry of this machine and something of the dark background from which it emerged.

Thread your way back through history to the time when the simple lives of people grew into meaningful work, and you'll see that when it comes to producing the world's food, it all started with the invention of the reaper just in the last century. It's fascinating to learn about the uncertain arrival of this machine and the challenging circumstances from which it came.

Mowing with a scythe

The Scythe is a Development of the Reaping Hook

The Scythe is an advanced version of the Reaping Hook.

The blade was made larger and the handle longer so two hands could be used.

The blade was enlarged and the handle was extended so it could be used with two hands.

The Reaping Hook or Sickle.

From the first pages of history we find that the reaping hook or sickle is the earliest tool for harvesting grain of which we have record. Pliny, in describing[559] the practice of reaping wheat says, “One method is by means of reaping hooks, by which the straws are cut off in the middle with sickles and the heads detached by a pair of shears.” Primitive sickles or reaping hooks made of flint or bronze are found among the remains left by the older nations. Pictures made in 1400 or 1500 B. C. upon the tombs at Thebes in Egypt, which are still legible, show slaves reaping with sickles. This crude tool, brought into use by ancient Egypt, remained almost stationary as to form and method of use until the middle of the last century.

From the earliest pages of history, we find that the sickle is the first tool recorded for harvesting grain. Pliny, while describing the process of harvesting wheat, states, “One method is to use reaping hooks, which cut the stalks in the middle with sickles, and a pair of shears is used to detach the heads.” Primitive sickles or reaping hooks made of flint or bronze have been discovered among the remnants left by ancient civilizations. Pictures from around 1400 or 1500 B.C. on the tombs at Thebes in Egypt, which are still clear, depict slaves harvesting with sickles. This basic tool, introduced by ancient Egypt, remained largely unchanged in design and use until the middle of the last century.

The scythe, which is a development from the sickle, enables the operator to use both hands instead of one. The scythe is still a familiar tool on our farms, but it serves other purposes than that of being the sole means of harvesting grain.

The scythe, which evolved from the sickle, allows the user to operate it with both hands instead of just one. The scythe is still a common tool on our farms, but it fulfills other roles besides just being the main method for harvesting grain.

Harvesting with the cradle

The Cradle was Developed in America between 1776 and 1800 and is an Outgrowth of the Scythe. It is Still Used in Some Places

The Cradle was developed in America between 1776 and 1800 and is an evolution of the Scythe. It is still being used in certain areas.

The Cradle.

Gradually the blade of the scythe was made lighter, the handle was lengthened, and fingers added to collect the grain and carry it to the end of the stroke. With the cradle the cut swath could be laid down neatly for drying preparatory to being bound into bundles. This tool is distinctly an American development. The colonists, when they settled in this country, probably brought with them all the European types of sickles and scythes, and out of them evolved the cradle.

Slowly, the blade of the scythe became lighter, the handle was extended, and fingers were added to gather the grain and move it to the end of the stroke. With the cradle, the cut swath could be neatly laid down to dry before being tied into bundles. This tool is clearly an American innovation. The colonists, when they arrived in this country, likely brought all the different types of sickles and scythes from Europe, and from these, the cradle was developed.

With the cradle in heavy grain an experienced man could cut about two acres a day, and another man could rake and bind it into sheaves, so that two men with the cradle could do the work of six or seven men with sickles.

With the cradle in heavy grain, an experienced worker could cut about two acres a day, and another person could rake and bind it into sheaves, so that two people with the cradle could do the work of six or seven people with sickles.

The American cradle stands at the head of all hand tools devised for the harvesting of grain. When it was once perfected, it soon spread to all countries with very little change in form. Although it has been displaced almost entirely by the modern reaper, yet there are places in this country and abroad where conditions are such that reaping machines are impractical and where the cradle still has work to do.

The American cradle is the most important hand tool created for harvesting grain. Once it was perfected, it quickly spread to other countries with minimal changes in design. Even though it has mostly been replaced by modern reapers, there are still places in this country and around the world where conditions make reaping machines impractical, and the cradle is still needed.

Harvesting in hilly area

Harvesting in the West

Harvesting in the West

Reproduced by permission of the Philadelphia Museums.

Reprinted with permission from the Philadelphia Museums.

Steam powered harvester and thresher

Steam Harvester and Thresher

Steam Harvester and Thresher

The upper view shows side-hill harvesters drawn by teams of twenty-eight horses each. The machines cut the grain, and tie it up in bundles, which are dropped alongside. The machine in the lower view is self-propelling, cuts and threshes the grain, throwing out the straw, and places the grain in sacks ready for loading on the wagon.

The upper image shows hillside harvesters pulled by teams of twenty-eight horses each. The machines cut the grain and bundle it up, dropping the bundles to the side. The machine in the lower image is self-propelled, cuts and threshes the grain, discarding the straw, and places the grain in sacks ready to be loaded onto the wagon.

Reproduced by permission of the Philadelphia Museums.

Reproduced with permission from the Philadelphia Museums.

Early Attempts to Harvest with Machines.

The beginning of practical efforts in the direction of harvesting by wholly mechanical means may be said to date from the beginning of the last century, about the year 1800, although very little progress was made from that time up to the year 1831.

The beginning of practical efforts to harvest completely by mechanical means can be traced back to the start of the last century, around the year 1800, although very little progress was made from then until the year 1831.

It is true that the Gauls made use of an instrument nearly two thousand years before, but this contrivance fell into disuse with the decline of the Gallic fields. Pliny describes this machine which was used early in the first century and which might be termed a stripping header. Palladius, four centuries later, describes the same sort of machine. This device of the Gauls had lance-shaped knives, or teeth with sharpened sides, projecting from a bar, like guard teeth, but set close together to form a sort of comb. As it was pushed forward, the stalks next the heads came between these sharp teeth and were cut or stripped off into a box attached to and behind the cutter bar and carried by two wheels. When the box was filled with heads, the machine was driven in and emptied. This is the way in which it is supposed that it was worked, and the illustration is the generally accepted representation of it as roughly reconstructed from the old Latin description of Pliny.

It’s true that the Gauls used a tool almost two thousand years ago, but this device fell out of use as the Gallic fields declined. Pliny describes this machine that was used in the early first century, which could be called a stripping header. Four centuries later, Palladius describes the same type of machine. This Gaulish device had lance-shaped knives or teeth with sharp sides, sticking out from a bar like guard teeth, but closely spaced to form a sort of comb. As it was pushed forward, the stalks near the heads went between these sharp teeth and were cut or stripped off into a box attached behind the cutter bar and carried by two wheels. When the box was full of heads, the machine was driven in and emptied. This is how it’s believed to have worked, and the illustration is the commonly accepted depiction of it, roughly reconstructed from Pliny's old Latin description.

Tractor pulling two mowing machines

The Mowing Machine has Replaced the Scythe for Cutting Hay, and the Kerosene Tractor has Replaced Expensive Horse Power for Pulling the Mowers

The mowing machine has replaced the scythe for cutting hay, and the kerosene tractor has taken the place of expensive horses for pulling the mowers.

The tractor has 10 H. P. on the drawbar and is pulling three mowers, laying down a swath of hay 21 feet wide.

The tractor has 10 horsepower on the drawbar and is pulling three mowers, creating a swath of hay that is 21 feet wide.

Near the close of the past century, the subject of grain-reaping machines again began to claim the attention of inventors. In July, 1799, the first English patent was granted to Joseph Boyce. In 1806, Gladstone of England built and patented a machine which not only attempted to cut the grain, but also to deliver it in gavels to be bound. In 1807, Plucknett and Salmon both patented machines. In 1811, Smith and Kerr took out patents. In 1822, Henry Ogle, a schoolmaster of Rennington, assisted by Thomas and Joseph Brown, invented the so-called Ogle reaper. The next, and last, reaper of this period was invented by Patrick Bell of Carmyllie, Scotland, in 1826.

Near the end of the last century, the topic of grain-harvesting machines again started to capture the interest of inventors. In July 1799, the first English patent was granted to Joseph Boyce. In 1806, Gladstone from England built and patented a machine that not only tried to cut the grain but also aimed to deliver it in bunches to be tied. In 1807, both Plucknett and Salmon patented machines. In 1811, Smith and Kerr secured patents. In 1822, Henry Ogle, a schoolmaster from Rennington, helped by Thomas and Joseph Brown, invented the so-called Ogle reaper. The next and final reaper of this period was created by Patrick Bell from Carmyllie, Scotland, in 1826.

Nearly all of these early reapers relied upon scythes or cutters with a rotary motion or vibrating shears. This method of cutting was essentially wrong, and none of the machines ever appeared to have gained or long retained the favor of the farmers. That these early attempts were all unsuccessful is evidenced by the fact that at the great World’s Fair in London in 1851, the United Kingdom could not present a single reaping machine. English journals and writers of that period, without a single exception, spoke of the American reapers which were exhibited as “completely successful.” For the real progress towards solving the problem of harvesting grain with machines we must turn to America.

Nearly all of these early reapers relied on scythes or cutters with a rotary motion or vibrating shears. This cutting method was fundamentally flawed, and none of the machines seemed to gain or keep the farmers' approval for long. The fact that these early attempts were all unsuccessful is shown by the absence of a single reaping machine presented by the United Kingdom at the great World’s Fair in London in 1851. English journals and writers from that time, without exception, referred to the American reapers on display as “completely successful.” For real progress in solving the problem of harvesting grain with machines, we need to look to America.

McCormic 1845 harvester

The McCormick Reaper of 1845

The 1845 McCormick Reaper

American invention in this line, so far as there is any record, began with the patent issued to Richard French and T. J. Hawkins of New Jersey, May 17, 1803. No reliable description of this machine seems to be extant. Five patents of no importance were issued between that time and 1822, when Bailey took out a patent. Cope and Cooper of Pennsylvania obtained a patent in 1826, and Manning obtained one in 1831.

American invention in this area, based on existing records, started with the patent granted to Richard French and T. J. Hawkins of New Jersey on May 17, 1803. There doesn’t appear to be any reliable description of this machine. Five unimportant patents were issued between that time and 1822, when Bailey secured his patent. Cope and Cooper from Pennsylvania received a patent in 1826, and Manning obtained one in 1831.

Corn binder harvesting tall crop

A Corn Binder Cuts the Heaviest Corn with Ease

A corn binder easily cuts through the thickest corn.

Up to 1831, no successful and practical reaper had been developed. With all[563] the patents taken out in England, and with those taken out in America from 1803 down to 1831, we might say that nothing had been accomplished toward perfecting a reaping machine which actually worked successfully.

Up to 1831, no successful and practical reaper had been developed. With all[563] the patents filed in England, and those filed in America from 1803 to 1831, we can say that nothing had been achieved in creating a reaping machine that actually functioned well.

Field use of McCormic reaper

A View of the First McCormick Reaper of 1831 as Used in the Field

A Glimpse of the First McCormick Reaper from 1831 in Use in the Field

The First Successful Reaper.

Field use of later model reaper

The McCormick Reaper of 1845 in the Field, with a Seat Added for the Raker

The McCormick Reaper of 1845 in the Field, now with a Seat Added for the Raker

Formerly the raker walked by the side of the machine.

Formerly, the raker walked alongside the machine.

In 1831 came McCormick’s reaper, the first practical machine of its kind ever taken into the field. It was crude at first, but improved from year to year. Although McCormick’s reaper was not patented until 1834, one year after the patent granted to Obed Hussey for his reaper, young McCormick gave a public exhibition in Virginia three years before, in 1831. It was in the fall of that year when Cyrus McCormick[564] hitched four horses to his machine, which had been built in the old blacksmith shop at Steel’s Tavern, and drove into a field of late oats on the farm of John Steele, adjoining his father’s. The reproduction of an old lithograph depicting this scene indicates the interest of the neighbors in this event. Although the United States had been established more than fifty years past, this was the first grain that had ever been cut by machinery. McCormick’s machine continued to operate to the surprise of everyone and in less than half a day had reaped six acres of oats—as much as six men would have done by the old-fashioned method.

In 1831, McCormick introduced his reaper, the first practical machine of its kind used in the field. It was basic at first, but it got better each year. Although McCormick's reaper wasn't patented until 1834, a year after Obed Hussey received a patent for his own reaper, young McCormick showcased his invention in Virginia three years earlier, in 1831. That fall, Cyrus McCormick[564] hitched four horses to his machine, which had been built in an old blacksmith shop at Steel’s Tavern, and drove into a field of late oats on John Steele's farm, next to his father's. A reproduction of an old lithograph showing this moment reveals the neighbors' interest in the event. Even though the United States had been around for more than fifty years, this was the first time grain had ever been harvested by a machine. McCormick's machine continued to function, surprising everyone, and in less than half a day, it harvested six acres of oats—equivalent to what six men would have done using the old-fashioned way.

This was not the first attempt of a McCormick to solve the problem of harvesting wheat by machinery, for Robert McCormick, the father of Cyrus, had, himself, worked on a machine of this kind as far back as 1816. His father tried it again in 1831 and abandoned it, and in that same year the son Cyrus took up the work and started the world toward cheaper bread.

This wasn't the first time a McCormick tried to solve the problem of harvesting wheat with machines. Robert McCormick, Cyrus's father, had worked on a machine like this as far back as 1816. His father attempted it again in 1831 but gave up, and that same year, Cyrus took over the project and started the world on the path to cheaper bread.

McCormic reaper

McCormick Reaper of 1858

1858 McCormick Reaper

The first practical reaper taken into the field in 1831 embodied the essential parts of the reaper with which we are familiar. It had a platform for receiving the grain, a knife for cutting it, supported by stationary fingers over the edge, and a reel to gather it. The driver of the machine rode one of the horses, while the man who raked off the grain walked by the side of the machine.

The first practical reaper used in the field in 1831 included the basic components of the reaper we're familiar with today. It had a platform to catch the grain, a knife to cut it, supported by fixed fingers along the edge, and a reel to collect it. The driver of the machine sat on one of the horses, while the person who raked off the grain walked alongside the machine.

Development of the Reaper.

The ten years following this first instance of a successful reaper were strenuous times indeed for Cyrus McCormick, for it was not until 1840 or 1841 that he was able to make his first sale. Twenty more were sold in 1843 and fifty in 1844.

The ten years after this first successful reaper were very challenging for Cyrus McCormick, as it wasn't until 1840 or 1841 that he managed to make his first sale. He sold twenty more in 1843 and fifty in 1844.

Storing corn stals

The Progressive Farmer of Today does not let His Cornstalks go to Waste in the Field, but Cuts Them with a Corn Binder and Either puts Them into a Silo or Shreds Them into Stover for His Hay-loft

The modern farmer today makes sure not to let his cornstalks go to waste in the field; he cuts them with a corn binder and either stores them in a silo or chops them up into stover for his hayloft.

This picture shows the husker and shredder in operation with kerosene for power.

This picture shows the husker and shredder in action, powered by kerosene.

During all these years from 1831 to 1844 Mr. McCormick was diligently at work changing, testing and experimenting. In 1845 he secured a second patent, which embodied many improvements—the principal ones referring to the cutting mechanism.

During all these years from 1831 to 1844, Mr. McCormick was hard at work changing, testing, and experimenting. In 1845, he obtained a second patent that included many improvements, mainly related to the cutting mechanism.

Reaper at work

The McCormick Reaper of 1858 in the Field

The McCormick Reaper from 1858 in the Field

Note that an automatic raker has been substituted for the man who rode on the machine and raked off the cut grain.

Note that an automatic raker has replaced the person who used to ride on the machine and rake off the cut grain.

In this year, Mr. McCormick started for the western prairie, and in 1847 built his own factory in Chicago, thus starting the world’s greatest reaper works. This factory, known as “McCormick Works,” is still in progress. It covers today more than 120 acres in the heart of Chicago, and has an annual capacity of 375,000 machines of all types.

In this year, Mr. McCormick headed to the western prairie, and in 1847 built his own factory in Chicago, launching the world’s largest reaper factory. This factory, called “McCormick Works,” is still operational today. It now spans over 120 acres in the heart of Chicago and has an annual capacity of 375,000 machines of all kinds.

Marsh harvester

A Marsh Harvester as Built by the McCormick Company in 1874

A Marsh Harvester produced by the McCormick Company in 1874

Note the two men riding on the platform and binding up the grain as delivered to them by the elevator of the machine.

Note the two men on the platform, tying up the grain as it’s delivered to them by the machine's elevator.

The third step in the development of the reaper was the addition to the machine of a seat for carrying the raker. The machine built in 1831 required that the raker walk by the side of the machine. In 1845 Mr. McCormick added the seat, patent for which was added in 1847. This seat which carried the raker enabled him while[566] riding to rake the grain from the platform and deposit it in gavels on the ground. This type of reaper, patented in 1847, is the one taken by Cyrus H. McCormick to the first world’s fair held in London, England, in 1851, and about which the records of that exposition state “The McCormick reaper is the most valuable article contributed to this exposition, and for its originality and value and perfect work in the field it is awarded the council medal.”

The third step in developing the reaper was adding a seat for the raker. The machine made in 1831 required the raker to walk alongside it. In 1845, Mr. McCormick added the seat, for which he received a patent in 1847. This seat allowed the raker to ride the machine while raking the grain from the platform and depositing it in stacks on the ground. This type of reaper, patented in 1847, was taken by Cyrus H. McCormick to the first world’s fair held in London, England, in 1851. The records from that exposition state, “The McCormick reaper is the most valuable article contributed to this exposition, and for its originality and value and perfect work in the field it is awarded the council medal.”

This same reaper received the grand prize in Paris in 1855 and is the reaper which created so much surprise in the world’s fair in London that the comments made by the press demonstrated beyond a doubt that England had not as yet built a successful reaper. In 1858 the machine was further improved by substituting an automatic rake for the raker on the machine.

This same reaper won the grand prize in Paris in 1855 and is the one that created such a stir at the world’s fair in London that the press comments clearly showed England had not yet built a successful reaper. In 1858, the machine was further enhanced by replacing the raker with an automatic rake.

Header binder loading directly into wagon

A McCormick Header Binder which Elevates the Grain into Wagons which Drive Alongside

A McCormick Header Binder that picks up grain and loads it into wagons that move alongside.

Many other patents were granted from time to time until 1870, when the foundation features of all reapers had been invented and substantially perfected. The reaper is still used extensively, especially in foreign countries.

Many other patents were granted over time until 1870, when the core features of all reapers had been invented and significantly refined. The reaper is still widely used, especially in other countries.

The interest in this machine centers not in its development as used today, but in the fact that it led to the invention and perfection of the self-binder.

The interest in this machine isn't in how it's used today, but in the fact that it led to the invention and improvement of the self-binder.

The prototype of all machines designed to bind the grain before being delivered to the ground is the Marsh harvester. It is the half-way mark, the child of the reaper and the parent of the self-binder. The original patent for this machine was granted August 17, 1858, to two farmer boys of De Kalb, Illinois, the Marsh brothers.

The Marsh harvester is the prototype of all machines made to bind grain before it's delivered to the ground. It represents a halfway point, the offspring of the reaper and the predecessor of the self-binder. The original patent for this machine was granted on August 17, 1858, to two farmer boys from De Kalb, Illinois, the Marsh brothers.

Previous to this time, attempts had been made to build harvesting machines which would bind the grain before delivered to the ground, but not one could be considered a success. At the time the Marsh harvester began seeking a place in the market, about 1860, reapers—hand-rakers, self-rakers, and droppers—held the trade substantially to the exclusion of any other kind of harvesting machine.

Before this time, there were efforts to create harvesting machines that would bind the grain before it reached the ground, but none were truly successful. By the time the Marsh harvester started trying to enter the market around 1860, reapers—hand-rakers, self-rakers, and droppers—dominantly controlled the market, leaving little room for other types of harvesting machines.

Sweep rake cum stacker

A Combined Sweep Rake and Stacker

A combined sweep rake and stacker

This ingenious machine is a great labor saver in the hay field. The hay can be gathered by any number of sweep rakes and dumped near the stacker, which will stack on any side and in any shape.

This clever machine saves a lot of work in the hay field. The hay can be collected by multiple sweep rakes and dumped close to the stacker, which can stack from any side and in any shape.

The first successful Marsh harvester, built in 1858, was operated through the harvest of that year. It has never been changed materially in principle or form since. The theory of the inventors was that two men might bind the grain cut by the five-foot sickle in ordinary motion provided it could be delivered to them in the best possible position and condition for binding and if they could have perfect freedom of action. They knew that the binders must have a free swing and open chance at the grain to enable them to handle it, so they arranged the elevated delivery, the receptacle, the tables and the platform for the man with these things in view.

The first successful Marsh harvester, built in 1858, was used during that year's harvest. Its basic principle and design haven't changed much since. The inventors believed that two men could bind the grain cut by the five-foot sickle in regular motion, as long as it was delivered to them in the best possible position and condition for binding and they had complete freedom to move. They understood that the binders needed to have enough space and opportunities to manage the grain effectively, so they designed the elevated delivery system, the receptacle, the tables, and the platform with these factors in mind.

The second Marsh harvester was built in Chicago in 1859. Improvements were made during the years 1861, 1862 and 1863. The manufacture of the Marsh harvester began in earnest at Plano in the fall of 1863 by Stewart and Marsh, twenty-five machines being put out in 1864.

The second Marsh harvester was built in Chicago in 1859. Upgrades were made during the years 1861, 1862, and 1863. The production of the Marsh harvester officially started in Plano in the fall of 1863 by Stewart and Marsh, with twenty-five machines being produced in 1864.

Hay loader

No More Tiresome Hay Pitching on this Farm, where Hay Loaders Elevate the Hay to the Men on the Wagons

No more tiring hay pitching on this farm, where hay loaders lift the hay for the workers on the wagons.

The small kerosene tractor has taken the place of horses and is drawing two wagons at a time.

The small kerosene tractor has replaced horses and is pulling two wagons at once.

In 1875 McCormick began putting out harvesters of the Marsh type. Of straight Marsh harvesters—carrying a man to bind—there had been made up to and including 1879 over 100,000, of which about two-thirds had been produced by the Marsh combination and the rest by outsiders.

In 1875, McCormick started releasing Marsh-type harvesters. By 1879, more than 100,000 straight Marsh harvesters—designed to carry a person for binding—had been made, with roughly two-thirds produced by the Marsh combination and the rest by other manufacturers.

The Self-Binder.

The development of the automatic binder followed quickly after the introduction of the Marsh harvester, although attempts were made to perfect this machine as early as 1850.

The automatic binder was developed soon after the Marsh harvester was introduced, even though efforts to improve this machine began as early as 1850.

Grain binder

A Modern Grain Binder in Heavy Oats

A Modern Grain Binder for Heavy Oats

Another grain binder

The Withington Binder Built by the McCormicks in 1876

The Withington Binder created by the McCormicks in 1876

This machine binds the grain with wire.

This machine ties up the grain with wire.

The self-binding harvester was borne on the shoulders of the Marsh harvester. Carpenter, Locke, Gordon, Appleby and every inventor who succeeded in any measure in binding grain, first did so by placing his binding attachment upon a Marsh harvester, taking the grain from a receptacle where it fell to another receptacle where it was bound. The first record of these attempts is a patent granted to J. E. Heath, of Warren, Ohio, in 1850. Watson, Renwick and Watson secured patents in 1851 and 1853, but their machines were very complicated and never more than experiments. From that time until 1865 many patents were granted, none of which may be considered successful.

The self-binding harvester was built upon the foundation of the Marsh harvester. Inventors like Carpenter, Locke, Gordon, and Appleby, who made any progress in binding grain, initially did so by attaching their binding mechanisms to a Marsh harvester. They transferred the grain from one container where it landed to another container where it got bound. The first record of these efforts is a patent awarded to J. E. Heath from Warren, Ohio, in 1850. Watson, Renwick, and Watson obtained patents in 1851 and 1853, but their machines were overly complicated and were never more than experimental. From then until 1865, many patents were issued, none of which can be considered truly successful.

In 1865 S. D. Locke of Janesville secured a patent which ultimately developed into the Withington wire binder first put out by McCormick in 1875.

In 1865, S. D. Locke from Janesville obtained a patent that eventually evolved into the Withington wire binder, which was first released by McCormick in 1875.

The Withington machine was an improvement on the binding device patented by Locke in 1865. McCormick built 50,000 of these machines between 1877 and 1885. It was a simple mechanism which consisted mainly of two steel fingers that moved back and forth and twisted a wire band around each sheaf of grain.

The Withington machine was an upgrade from the binding device patented by Locke in 1865. McCormick produced 50,000 of these machines between 1877 and 1885. It featured a straightforward mechanism that primarily included two steel fingers that moved back and forth, twisting a wire band around each bundle of grain.

Farmers did not take kindly to the wire binder. They said that wire would mix with the straw and kill their horses and cattle.

Farmers weren't happy about the wire binder. They claimed that the wire would get mixed up with the straw and harm their horses and cattle.

Twine binder

The Deering Twine Binder of 1879

The Deering Twine Binder from 1879

The Twine Binder.

This is the perfected Marsh harvester with a perfected Appleby twine binding attachment and was first put out by the Deering Company in 1879.

This is the improved Marsh harvester with an upgraded Appleby twine binding attachment, first introduced by the Deering Company in 1879.

Twine binder

The McCormick Twine Binder of 1881 with the Appleby Binding Attachment, which Used Twine Instead of Wire

The McCormick Twine Binder from 1881, featuring the Appleby Binding Attachment, which used twine instead of wire.

One tractor with five reaper-binders

A Tractor Pulling Five Harvester Binders

A Tractor Pulling Five Harvest Binders

These machines cut a swath 40 feet wide in the grain field, gathering the grain into bundles and dropping them alongside to be picked up by the sweep rake.

These machines create a path 40 feet wide in the grain field, collecting the grain into bundles and dropping them next to be picked up by the sweep rake.

This was the situation in the harvesting industry about the time that William Deering took an active interest. He looked about for a better machine. He found John F. Appleby, who, in 1878, had perfected a twine binder attachment. When Deering saw the strong steel arms flash a cord around a bundle of grain, tie a knot, cut the cord and fling off the sheaf, he knew he had what the world needed. Appleby began working on his invention in 1858, but accomplished nothing until 1869 when he took out his first patent on a “wire binder.” In 1874 he began what is known as the Appleby twine binder, operating one in 1875 and 1876 and several in 1877. In 1879 Deering bought out Gammon, joined forces with Appleby, moved the factory from Plano to Chicago in 1880, and began putting out twine binders. In 1881 McCormick, also, and Champion began building the Appleby binder.

This was the situation in the harvesting industry around the time William Deering got involved. He was on the lookout for a better machine. He discovered John F. Appleby, who, in 1878, had perfected a twine binder attachment. When Deering saw the strong steel arms wrap a cord around a bundle of grain, tie a knot, cut the cord, and toss off the sheaf, he knew he had found what the world needed. Appleby started working on his invention in 1858 but didn’t achieve anything until 1869 when he secured his first patent for a "wire binder." In 1874, he began what became known as the Appleby twine binder, operating one in 1875 and 1876 and several more in 1877. In 1879, Deering bought out Gammon, teamed up with Appleby, moved the factory from Plano to Chicago in 1880, and started producing twine binders. In 1881, McCormick and Champion also began manufacturing the Appleby binder.

Manure spreading

The Progressive Farmer now Uses a Mechanical Manure Spreader to Increase the Productiveness of His Land

The Progressive Farmer now uses a mechanical manure spreader to increase the productivity of his land.

The modern spreader is built low and equipped with a special wide spread attachment which throws the manure well beyond the wheels.

The modern spreader is designed to be low to the ground and comes with a wide spread attachment that distributes the manure far beyond the wheels.

Grain drill

A Grain Drill with Disk and Chain Attachments

A grain drill with disk and chain attachments

This drill is large enough to require the strength of four horses to pull it.

This drill is big enough that it takes the strength of four horses to pull it.

Small tractor with three grain drills

A Small Kerosene Tractor can Pull Two or Three Grain Drills Fastened Together by Special Tractor Hitches

A small kerosene tractor can tow two or three grain drills attached by special tractor hitches.

With the development of an attachment to bind with twine, a new problem arose—where to get a cheap serviceable twine. William Deering again arose to the occasion. He met Edwin H. Fitler in Philadelphia, one of the three twine makers in the United States, and after a good deal of persuasion induced him to take an order for a single-strand binder twine. From that time on, all manufacturers have been building practically the same machine—the Appleby binding attachment on the Marsh type of harvester which, in turn, was founded on the McCormick cutting mechanism. The self-binder of today is of that type.

With the development of an attachment to connect with twine, a new issue came up—where to find affordable and reliable twine. William Deering once again rose to the challenge. He met Edwin H. Fitler in Philadelphia, one of the three twine manufacturers in the United States, and after a lot of convincing, got him to take an order for a single-strand binder twine. From that point on, all manufacturers have been making essentially the same machine—the Appleby binding attachment on the Marsh type of harvester, which, in turn, was based on the McCormick cutting mechanism. The self-binder today is of that type.

Other Machines Follow.

The completion of the reaper set the wheels of farm invention spinning. It was the first great battle successfully won and gave a spirit of confidence and an irresistible spirit of victory to the men who were lifting the burdens off the bodies of men. After the reaper, the mowing machine came naturally. Following the binder in easy sequences came the corn binder, push binder, header and harvester thresher.

The invention of the reaper kicked off a wave of agricultural innovations. It was the first significant victory achieved, instilling a sense of confidence and an unstoppable feeling of success in the men who were lightening the load for others. After the reaper, the mowing machine followed naturally. Next in line were the binder, the corn binder, the push binder, the header, and the harvester-thresher.

Every variety of haying machine, from side-delivery rake and tedder to sweep rake and loader, came eventually to make hay-making easy. The thresher, ensilage cutter, riding plow, disk harrow, cream separator, manure spreader and seeding machines succeeded in making the raising of the world’s food a profitable occupation; at the same time, they made it an easy one. Lately, the internal combustion engine, together with its application in the kerosene tractor, promises to make the farmer’s emancipation practically complete. If Herbert Casson could say “The United States owes more to the reaper than it does to the factory or the railroad or the Wall Street stock exchange,” what can be said of these myriad machines that now do the food-grower’s work for him?

Every type of hay-making machine, from side-delivery rakes and tedders to sweep rakes and loaders, ultimately made it easier to produce hay. The thresher, silage cutter, riding plow, disk harrow, cream separator, manure spreader, and seeding machines transformed farming into a profitable business; they also simplified the process. Recently, the internal combustion engine and its use in kerosene tractors are set to fully free farmers from labor. If Herbert Casson could claim, "The United States owes more to the reaper than it does to the factory or the railroad or the Wall Street stock exchange," what can be said about these countless machines that now handle the work of those who grow our food?

Where formerly nearly all the people had to engage in food raising and even then went to bed hungry, now nearly half the people live away from the farm and there is a great abundance of bread and of food.

Where once nearly everyone had to farm for their food and still went to bed hungry, now almost half the population lives away from farms, and there's a huge abundance of bread and food.


What Causes an Echo?

An echo is caused by the reflection of sound waves at some moderately even surface, such as the wall of a building. The waves of sound on meeting the surface are turned back in their course, according to the same laws that hold for reflection of light. In order that the echo may return to the place from which the sound proceeds, the reflection must be direct, and not at an angle to the line of transmission, otherwise the echo may be heard by others, but not by the transmitter of the sound. This may be effected either by a reflecting surface at right angles to the line of transmission or by several reflecting surfaces, which end in bringing the sound back to the point of issue.

An echo happens when sound waves bounce off a fairly flat surface, like a building wall. When sound waves hit the surface, they turn back in the same way that light reflects. For the echo to come back to where the sound started, the reflection needs to be direct and not at an angle to the path of the sound. If it’s not, other people might hear the echo, but the person who made the sound won’t. This can happen if there’s a reflecting surface positioned at a right angle to the path of the sound or through multiple reflecting surfaces that ultimately direct the sound back to the original point.

Sound travels about 1,125 feet in a second; consequently, an observer standing at half that distance from the reflecting object would hear the echo a second later than the sound. Such an echo would repeat as many words and syllables as could be heard in a second. As the distance decreases the echo repeats fewer syllables till it becomes monosyllabic.

Sound travels about 1,125 feet per second; therefore, someone standing half that distance from the reflecting object would hear the echo one second later than the original sound. This echo would repeat as many words and syllables as could be heard in a second. As the distance decreases, the echo repeats fewer syllables until it becomes just one syllable.

The most practiced ear cannot distinguish in a second more than from nine to twelve successive sounds, so that a distance of not less than sixty feet is needed to enable a common ear to distinguish between the echo and the original sounds. At a near distance the echo only clouds the original sounds. This often interferes with the hearing in churches and other large buildings. Woods, rocks and mountains produce natural echoes in every variety, for which particular localities have become famous.

The most skilled ear can't tell apart more than nine to twelve sounds in a moment, so you need at least sixty feet for an average ear to distinguish between the echo and the original sounds. Up close, the echo just muddles the original sounds. This often affects how well people hear in churches and other large spaces. Woods, rocks, and mountains create natural echoes in many different ways, leading to certain locations becoming famous for them.

In Greek mythology, Echo was a nymph (one of the Oreads) who fell in love with Narcissus, and because he did not reciprocate her affection she pined away until nothing was left but her voice.

In Greek mythology, Echo was a nymph (one of the Oreads) who fell in love with Narcissus, and because he didn't return her feelings, she faded away until only her voice remained.


The Story of the Motion-Picture Projecting Machine[69]

Few businesses have had a more spectacular rise than the motion-picture industry. It may be true that there are other industries of recent growth that are more highly capitalized than the motion-picture business. I shall not make any comparisons nor look up statistics, but will present some facts about an enterprise that, scientifically, industrially and commercially, is one of the great wonders of the world.

Few businesses have had a more remarkable rise than the movie industry. While it's true that there are other recently grown industries that have more capital than the motion-picture business, I won't make comparisons or look up statistics. Instead, I'll share some facts about an enterprise that is, in terms of science, industry, and commerce, one of the great wonders of the world.

It is fair to estimate that more than $375,000,000 is invested in this business in the United States. It looks like an exaggeration or as if the typesetter had slipped in several extra ciphers by mistake, does it not? Nevertheless, the estimate is said to be extremely conservative. In the first place, it concerns every branch of the business, of which there are five. Taken in their natural order there are: 1. The manufacture of motion-picture cameras. 2. The manufacture of films. 3. The taking of the pictures. 4. The manufacture of the projecting machines. 5. The exhibition of the pictures.

It’s reasonable to estimate that over $375,000,000 is invested in this industry in the United States. It might seem like an exaggeration, or that the typesetter accidentally included a few extra zeros, right? Still, this estimate is considered very conservative. First of all, it covers every aspect of the industry, which has five branches. In their natural order, they are: 1. The manufacture of motion-picture cameras. 2. The manufacture of films. 3. The filming of the pictures. 4. The production of the projection machines. 5. The exhibition of the films.

The projecting machine is the subject of this story. One sees very little about it in the newspapers and popular magazines, in spite of the fact that it is the keystone, so to speak, of the motion-picture industry. Of the entire business, in all its ramifications, this machine is the most important not only from a technical standpoint, but as regards both the pleasure and safety of the public. Here, again, a great deal of money is invested. Its manufacture involves costly and highly specialized machinery, the most intelligent of mechanics and the constant thought and endeavor of the men at the head of the business.

The projection machine is the focus of this story. It doesn’t get much attention in newspapers or popular magazines, even though it's essentially the backbone of the film industry. Of the entire business and all its branches, this machine is the most crucial, not only from a technical perspective but also in terms of public enjoyment and safety. Again, a significant amount of money is invested here. Its production requires expensive and highly specialized machines, the most skilled mechanics, and the ongoing dedication and effort of the leaders in the industry.

The advancement in the manufacture of motion-picture projecting machines from the start has been along two avenues—to secure better projection, a sharper, clearer and steadier picture, and to eliminate the danger of fire resultant from the ignition of combustible film. Experts have watched and studied the picture machine through all its stages of development. For seventeen years they have slowly improved the machine and brought it to its present high state of mechanical perfection. The development of the fireproof magazine, the automatic fire-shutter, the loop-setter, flame shields and the famous intermittent movement have all been vital factors in the elimination of fire and also in securing perfect projection. The oldest invention was patented by W. E. Lincoln on April 23, 1867. The contrivance was a mere toy, employing no light and being merely a little machine which, when revolved, gave figures, printed in different positions, the semblance of motion. The second oldest was of an “optical instrument” patented by O. B. Brown on August 10, 1869. This was really the first American motion-picture projection machine. There was a sort of disk or moving-shutter movement which, on revolving, gave projected objects the appearance of animation. Of course, there were no films in those days and the inventor had used translucent glass to obtain the results. Yet here was the germ of our native modern machine.

The development of movie projectors has always focused on two main goals: achieving better projection with sharper, clearer, and steadier images, and reducing the fire hazards associated with flammable film. Experts have monitored and studied the projector through all its stages of evolution. Over the past seventeen years, they have gradually enhanced the machine, leading it to its current high level of mechanical excellence. Key innovations, such as the fireproof magazine, automatic fire-shutter, loop-setter, flame shields, and the well-known intermittent movement, have been crucial in reducing fire risks and ensuring optimal projection. The earliest invention was patented by W. E. Lincoln on April 23, 1867. It was a simple toy that didn’t use light; it was just a small device that, when spun, made figures printed in different positions appear to move. The second oldest invention was an “optical instrument” patented by O. B. Brown on August 10, 1869. This marked the first American movie projector. It featured a disk or moving-shutter mechanism that, when rotated, made projected images look animated. Back then, films didn’t exist, and the inventor used translucent glass to achieve these effects. Yet, this was the beginning of our modern projector.

Modern motion-picture projector

The Latest Motion-Picture Projecting Machine

The Latest Movie Projector

A well-known moving-picture projecting machine manufacturer tells the following story: “A bet was made in 1871 by the late Senator Leland Stanford, of California, that a running horse at no time had all four feet off the ground. Edward Muybridge, an Englishman, by way of experiment, placed numerous cameras at regular intervals about the track, which, by electrical contact, were snapped by the horse in passing. It proved that the horse always had, when running, one foot on the ground. Although this was not the first record of motion pictures, it served to demonstrate their practicability.

A well-known projector manufacturer shares this story: “In 1871, the late Senator Leland Stanford of California made a bet that a running horse never had all four feet off the ground at the same time. Edward Muybridge, an Englishman, conducted an experiment by setting up multiple cameras at regular intervals around the track, which were triggered by electrical contact as the horse passed by. The experiment showed that the horse always had at least one foot on the ground while running. While this wasn’t the first instance of motion pictures, it helped prove that they could actually work.”

“Development had dragged until the Muybridge experiment. In 1880 Muybridge produced, in San Francisco, the ‘Zoopraxiscope,’ which projected pictures (on glass positives) on a screen. Later Muybridge conferred with Edison regarding a combination of his machine with the phonograph, then in its infancy; about 1883 he went abroad and held frequent conferences with M. Marey of the Institute of France.

“Development had stalled until the Muybridge experiment. In 1880, Muybridge created the 'Zoopraxiscope' in San Francisco, which projected images (on glass positives) onto a screen. Later, Muybridge discussed combining his machine with the phonograph, which was still new at the time, with Edison; around 1883, he went abroad and had regular meetings with M. Marey of the Institute of France.”

“Marey first utilized the continuous film, though it was George Eastman who brought it to its present state of high perfection. A great deal of the tremendous present popularity of motion pictures is due to the invention of the translucent film. The early kodak film became the great factor in the cinematograph manufacture.

“Marey was the first to use continuous film, but it was George Eastman who perfected it. A lot of the massive popularity of movies today can be attributed to the invention of translucent film. The early Kodak film was a key element in the development of the cinematograph.”

Construction of lamphouse

The Construction of the Lamphouse Affords Easy Access

The Lamphouse Design Offers Easy Access

“In 1893 Lumiere produced the ‘Cinematograph,’ the first machine to project from a film. Edison in 1896 produced his ‘Vitascope.’ These machines became the models of the greatly improved article of today.

“In 1893, Lumière created the ‘Cinematograph,’ the first device to project images from film. In 1896, Edison introduced his ‘Vitascope.’ These machines laid the groundwork for the significantly advanced versions we have today.”

“The first real machine was brought to America in 1894. At least, that is as near as I can recollect the date. It was a Lumiere cinematograph and was exhibited at the Union Square Theater, New York City. The French manufacturing firm instructed J. B. Cole & Co. to furnish an operator. The Cole Company was interested in the sale of lanterns and slides and the foreign firm naturally turned to them for assistance.

“The first real machine arrived in America in 1894. At least, that's as close as I can remember the date. It was a Lumiere cinematograph and was shown at the Union Square Theater in New York City. The French manufacturing company asked J. B. Cole & Co. to provide an operator. The Cole Company was focused on selling lanterns and slides, so the foreign company naturally turned to them for help.

“They furnished an operator, Edward Hadley. Although he had never seen a motion-picture machine, Hadley was a man who had been in their employ and was naturally familiar with lanterns and electricity. To the best of my belief, Hadley was the first motion-picture operator in America. He afterwards became the operator for Lyman H. Howe, the well-known pioneer traveling motion-picture exhibitor, and later became an exhibitor himself.

“They provided an operator, Edward Hadley. Even though he had never seen a movie projector, Hadley was a man who had worked for them and was naturally familiar with lanterns and electricity. As far as I know, Hadley was the first movie operator in America. He later became the operator for Lyman H. Howe, the famous early traveling movie exhibitor, and eventually became an exhibitor himself."

Modern arc lamp

The New Arc Lamp

The New Arc Lamp

“The films then had one perforation on either side of each picture. That was the French method. The American method of four perforations on either side of each picture, formulated by Thomas A. Edison, was taken up later. The Edison perforation method became[578] the standard in America and finally throughout the world. We find no more single-holed films.”

“The films had one perforation on each side of every frame. That was the French method. The American method, which had four perforations on either side of each frame and was created by Thomas A. Edison, was adopted later. The Edison perforation method became[578] the standard in America and eventually around the world. We no longer see single-holed films.”

Here, for the benefit of the uninitiated, a little description of the film and the projecting head of a machine is necessary. A motion-picture film is a thin ribbon of transparent pyroxylin plastic or nitrocellulose, which is highly inflammable. The photographs on the film, one by three-fourths of an inch in size, leave a margin of five thirty-seconds of an inch on each side. In the margins are the perforations necessary to feed the film through the machine head. There are sixteen pictures to the foot.

Here, for those who are not familiar, a brief description of the film and the projector's head is needed. A motion picture film is a thin strip of clear pyroxylin plastic or nitrocellulose, which is very flammable. The images on the film are one by three-fourths of an inch in size, leaving a margin of five thirty-seconds of an inch on each side. In those margins are the perforations needed to move the film through the projector's head. There are sixteen images per foot.

The mechanism of the machine head moves the film over an aperture, so that the rays of light from the lamp will project an enlargement of the film picture upon the screen. The reels upon which the film is wound are mounted above and below—the upper is the feed reel and the lower is the take-up reel. Sprocket wheels control the action of the film. The top feed sprocket pulls the film from the upper feed reel, the middle intermittent sprocket (below the aperture) turns in a way to give each picture a certain time of stop over the projection aperture, and the bottom take-up sprocket assists in winding the film on the take-up reel.

The machine head moves the film across an opening, allowing the light from the lamp to project a larger image of the film onto the screen. The reels that hold the film are positioned above and below; the upper one is the feed reel, and the lower one is the take-up reel. Sprocket wheels manage the film's movement. The top feed sprocket pulls the film from the upper feed reel, the middle intermittent sprocket (located below the opening) rotates in such a way that each frame pauses for a set amount of time over the projection aperture, and the bottom take-up sprocket helps wind the film onto the take-up reel.

Shutters

Narrow Shutter Wings Afford Brighter Illumination on the Screen

Narrow shutter wings create a brighter image on the screen.

“The early films were in very short lengths,” continued the manufacturer. “The average was from twenty to seventy-five feet. A hundred-foot film was considered extra long. They were mostly comic and not educational. The vast possibilities of the film had not yet dawned upon the pioneers. They aimed only to get a laugh with a crude comic picture.

“The early films were very short,” the manufacturer continued. “The average length was between twenty and seventy-five feet. A hundred-foot film was seen as really long. They were mostly comedies and not educational. The pioneers hadn’t yet realized the vast potential of film. Their goal was just to get a laugh with a simple comic picture.

“But those with more foresight realized that the film had come to stay. So the advancement began. Today the public is always looking toward something better. It has been educated up to an exceedingly high standard. The average spectator today can see a defect in an exhibited film as quickly as an expert.

“But those with more foresight realized that the film was here to stay. So the progress began. Today, the audience is always looking for something better. It has been educated to an extremely high standard. The average viewer today can spot a flaw in a showing film just as quickly as an expert.”

“Machines in the early days were very crude, permitting only short films, which were an endless belt. They were threaded over spools contained in a box at the rear end of the lamphouse, passing over the lamphouse to the head of the machine; thence down through the head, past the projection aperture and back to the spools. This exposed the film at all times, which was extremely dangerous. About 1900, longer films came into use, which necessitated a change in handling. At the machine[579] head, the film was piled on the floor. This being dangerous and destructive, a receptacle was devised and fastened to the frame below the reel, into which the film passed. This soon gave way to a reel known as the take-up reel, which received the film after it had passed from the upper reel through the head and before the aperture, where it was projected on the screen.

“Early machines were very basic, allowing only short films that ran on an endless belt. The film was threaded over spools located in a box at the back of the lamphouse, going over the lamphouse to the machine's head; then it went down through the head, past the projection aperture, and back to the spools. This setup kept the film exposed at all times, which was really dangerous. Around 1900, longer films began to be used, which required changes in handling. At the machine[579] head, the film was piled on the floor. This was unsafe and led to damage, so a container was created and attached to the frame below the reel, where the film could pass through. This was eventually replaced by a reel called the take-up reel, which collected the film after it went from the upper reel through the head and before it reached the aperture, where it was projected onto the screen.”

“These are a few steps in the march towards improvement. My first machine was called the ‘Peerlesscope.’ I kept continually improving it, and in 1902 changed the name to ‘Cameragraph;’ my latest machine, No. 6B, possesses every known device for safety—fire-shutters, which automatically cut off the film from the rays of the lamp while motionless; film-shields, which enclose and protect the film; fire-valves, which prevent entrance of flame into magazines; the loop-setter, which prevents breakage of the film while in motion, etc.”

“These are a few steps in the journey toward improvement. My first machine was called the ‘Peerlesscope.’ I kept improving it continuously, and in 1902, I changed the name to ‘Cameragraph.’ My latest machine, No. 6B, has every safety feature imaginable—fire shutters that automatically disconnect the film from the lamp when it’s not in motion, film shields that surround and protect the film, fire valves that stop flames from entering the magazines, the loop setter that prevents the film from breaking while in motion, and so on.”

Concerning projection, this manufacturer said: “Pictures cannot succeed without perfect projection, resulting in absolutely clear, flickerless pictures. The longer the period of rest of each picture on the screen, the better the detail and the clearer the picture. This I accomplished by means of an intermittent movement.

Concerning projection, this manufacturer said: “Images cannot succeed without perfect projection, leading to completely clear, flicker-free visuals. The longer each image remains on the screen, the better the detail and the clearer the picture. I achieved this through an intermittent movement.

“You know that in projecting pictures the motion in the film is not continuous in front of the aperture of the machine head, each picture pausing long enough for proper projection on the screen. Through this intermittent movement I obtain a longer period of rest for each picture, which accomplishes perfect projection of pictures without flicker.

“You know that when projecting films, the motion isn’t continuous in front of the lens of the projector; each frame pauses just long enough for it to be displayed properly on the screen. With this stop-and-start movement, I achieve a longer pause for each frame, which allows for perfect projection without flicker."

“A very annoying feature until recently has been the losing of the lower film loop, due to poor patching of the film, tearing of the perforations in the films, etc., causing the film to jump the lower sprocket, with the probable tearing and re-adjustment of the film. This I overcame with my loop-setter invention. To explain briefly—

“A very annoying issue until recently has been the loss of the lower film loop, caused by inadequate film patching, tearing of the perforations, and so on, leading to the film skipping the lower sprocket, which likely results in tearing and the need to readjust the film. I solved this problem with my loop-setter invention. To explain briefly—

“As the full movement at the upper and lower reel is continuous, while at the aperture it is intermittent, a loop is necessary as a feeder for the take-up or the lower sprocket. If this loop is lost, the film becomes taut, the machine stops and the film may break. The loop-setter instantly readjusts this loop automatically, keeping it always in force.”

“As the movement at the top and bottom reel is continuous, while at the aperture it is intermittent, a loop is needed as a feeder for the take-up or the lower sprocket. If this loop is lost, the film becomes tight, the machine stops, and the film may break. The loop-setter automatically readjusts this loop instantly, keeping it always in place.”

The taking of pictures is, of course, one of the interesting phases of the business from a popular standpoint. Here we find not only large sums invested but the action, setting, plots—in fact, the entire order of pulsating life and convincing reality that give to motion pictures their remarkable hold upon the public. In vying with each other to make the most attractive films possible, the concerns in this end of the industry engage the most talented players, who are transported on long journeys so that the settings may be realistically satisfactory; while often the company includes not only two-footed actors, but horses, one or two clever dogs and sometimes a trained bear and other animals, besides all of which there is usually an array of “properties” that far exceeds in quantity and variety the list of such appurtenances carried by the average stock theatrical company or theater of the ordinary kind.

Taking pictures is definitely one of the most interesting aspects of the business from a public perspective. Here, we see not just a lot of money being invested, but also the action, settings, storylines—in fact, the whole dynamic of vibrant life and convincing reality that give movies their incredible appeal to audiences. In the competition to create the most attractive films, the companies in this part of the industry hire the most talented actors, who are transported on long trips to ensure that the settings look authentic; often, the crew includes not only human actors but also horses, a couple of clever dogs, and sometimes a trained bear and other animals. Additionally, there's usually a collection of props that far surpasses in both amount and variety what you would find with an average theater company or standard theater.

Then, too, there is the presentation of the pictures, where we find another vast outlay of money in land, buildings and equipment. And, remember, the matter of taking and presenting the pictures must not be considered only from the amusement standpoint. Motion pictures are being employed more and more every day for educational and industrial purposes.

Then, there’s also the way the pictures are presented, which involves a huge investment in land, buildings, and equipment. And keep in mind, the process of taking and showing these pictures shouldn’t be viewed just as entertainment. Movies are increasingly being used every day for educational and business purposes.


The Story of Leather[70]

We all know that leather is the skins of animals, dressed and prepared for our use by tanning, or some other process, which preserves them from rotting and renders them pliable and tough.

We all know that leather comes from the skins of animals, treated and prepared for our use through tanning or some other method, which keeps them from decaying and makes them flexible and durable.

The larger and heavier skins, such as those of buffaloes, bulls, oxen, horses and cows, are called “hides;” while those of the smaller animals, such as calves, sheep, pigs and goats, are called “skins.”

The bigger and heavier hides, like those from buffaloes, bulls, oxen, horses, and cows, are referred to as “hides,” while the hides from smaller animals, such as calves, sheep, pigs, and goats, are known as “skins.”

Scouring room

Scouring

Searching

The tanning of raw hides taken from animals is an ancient trade. The bark of trees made into a liquor has been used for centuries in treating practically all kinds of hides.

The tanning of raw animal hides is an old craft. For centuries, tree bark turned into a liquid has been used to process nearly all types of hides.

The oak, fir, hemlock and sumach are the most familiar of the many trees from which “tannin” is obtained for this purpose.

The oak, fir, hemlock, and sumac are the most well-known of the many trees used to obtain "tannin" for this purpose.

The cow hide is used practically altogether for sole leather and is bark tanned in the majority of cases. After the hide is taken from the animal it is either dry cured, or else salted green, and packed for shipment or storage.

The cowhide is mostly used for sole leather and is usually bark-tanned. After the hide is removed from the animal, it is either dry cured or salted while still green, then packed for shipping or storage.

The first process of preparing sole leather is to cut these hides in half or sides. The sides are then run through lime vats for the purpose of loosening the hair. They are then run through the unhairing machine, in which large rollers remove the hair.

The first step in preparing sole leather is to cut these hides in half or into sides. The sides are then put through lime vats to loosen the hair. After that, they go through the unhairing machine, where large rollers remove the hair.

From the unhairing machine the hides pass to a fleshing machine, which cuts away all the flesh or fat on the hide. They are then trimmed and scraped by hand, after which the real tanning process begins.

From the unhairing machine, the hides go to a fleshing machine, which removes all the flesh or fat from the hide. They are then trimmed and scraped by hand, and after that, the actual tanning process starts.

The old method of tanning leather was in large vats, which were filled alternately with tan bark and hides, then filled with water and allowed to soak for a period of eight to nine months before the tanning process was complete. The extract of bark in liquor form is used today by all large tanneries.

The traditional way of tanning leather involved using large vats, which were alternately filled with tan bark and hides, then filled with water and left to soak for about eight to nine months until the tanning process was finished. Nowadays, all major tanneries use bark extract in liquid form.

After the hides have been all prepared for tanning they are hung on rockers in the tanning vats, where they are kept in motion both day and night so that all parts of every hide are equally tanned. They are changed from time to time from weaker into stronger liquor until the tanning process is complete.

After the hides are fully prepared for tanning, they are hung on frames in the tanning vats, where they are kept moving both day and night to ensure that every part of each hide is tanned evenly. They are periodically transferred from weaker to stronger solutions until the tanning process is finished.

Tanning baths

Tanning Vats

Tanning Tanks

All sole leather is filled more or less to make it wear the better.

All sole leather is filled to some extent to enhance its durability.

The drying process comes next. The hides are all hung in a dry loft, where artificial heat of different temperatures is used until they are thoroughly dry. The drying of the hide is as important as the tanning. Hides that are dried too quickly become brittle, so that great care must be taken in this drying process. Even the weather conditions play an important part.

The drying process comes next. The hides are all hung in a dry loft, where artificial heat of different temperatures is used until they are completely dry. The drying of the hide is as important as the tanning. Hides that dry too quickly become brittle, so great care must be taken during this drying process. Even the weather conditions play a significant role.

Workers posing with rollers

Rollers

Roller skates

After the hides are thoroughly dried they are then oiled and ironed by large rollers having several hundred pounds pressure. This gives the grain side of the leather a finished appearance and also serves to press the leather together compactly.

After the hides are completely dried, they are oiled and ironed using large rollers that apply several hundred pounds of pressure. This process gives the grain side of the leather a polished look and also helps compress the leather tightly.

Rubbing room

Rubbing

Rubbing

Before this leather can be cut into sole leather it has to be again dried and properly edged to secure the best results.

Before this leather can be cut into sole leather, it needs to be dried again and properly edged to achieve the best results.

Boarding room

Boarding Room

Meeting Room

Bark-tanned leather that is used for upper stock in shoes is tanned practically the same way as the bark sole leather, except lighter hides are used and the finishing processes are of a nature to make it softer and smoother.

Bark-tanned leather used for shoe uppers is tanned almost the same way as bark sole leather, but lighter hides are used, and the finishing processes are designed to make it softer and smoother.

The above tannage is what is called vegetable tannage. There is also a tannage made from minerals that is called chrome. This is used mostly in tanning soft, glovey[583] upper leather, which when finished makes a very tough yet soft and pliable leather for footwear.

The tannage mentioned above is known as vegetable tannage. There is also a mineral-based tannage called chrome. This is mainly used for tanning soft, glove-like[583] upper leather, which, when finished, results in very tough yet soft and flexible leather for shoes.

Ninety to one hundred days are required to tan bark leathers, while the chrome tannage is very quick and on the average requires only about three weeks.

Ninety to one hundred days are needed to tan bark leathers, while chrome tanning is much faster, usually taking only about three weeks.

The brilliant smooth surface of patent, enameled, lacquered, varnished or japanned leather is due to the mode of finishing by stretching the tanned hides on wooden frames and applying successive coats of varnish, each coat being dried and rubbed smooth with pumice stone. There is also a process called “tawing,” which is employed chiefly in the preparation of the skins of sheep, lambs, goats and kids. In this process the skins are steeped in a bath of alum, salt and other substances, and they are also sometimes soaked in fish-oil. The more delicate leathers are treated in this manner, those especially which are used for wash-leathers, kid gloves, etc.

The shiny, smooth surface of patent, enameled, lacquered, varnished, or japanned leather comes from the finishing technique of stretching tanned hides on wooden frames and applying several coats of varnish, with each coat dried and smoothed out using pumice stone. There’s also a method called “tawing,” mainly used for preparing the skins of sheep, lambs, goats, and kids. In this method, the skins are soaked in a mixture of alum, salt, and other substances, and they may also be rinsed in fish oil. The more delicate leathers, particularly those used for wash leathers, kid gloves, and similar products, undergo this treatment.

Measuring room

Measuring

Measuring

In currying leather for shoes the leather is first soaked in water until it is thoroughly wet; then the flesh side is shaved to a proper surface with a knife of peculiar construction, rectangular in form with two handles and a double edge. The leather is then thrown into the water again, scoured upon a stone till the white substance called “bloom” is forced out, then rubbed with a greasy substance and hung up to dry. When thoroughly dry it is grained with a toothed instrument on the flesh side and bruised on the grain or hair side for the purpose of softening the leather. A further process of paring and graining makes it ready for waxing or coloring, in which oil and lampblack are used on the flesh side. It is then sized, dried and tallowed. In the process the leather is made smooth, lustrous, supple and waterproof.

In the process of preparing leather for shoes, the leather is first soaked in water until it’s completely wet. Then, the flesh side is shaved to create a smooth surface using a specially designed knife, which is rectangular in shape and has two handles with a double edge. The leather is put back in the water and scrubbed against a stone until the white residue known as "bloom" is removed. After that, it’s rubbed with a greasy substance and hung up to dry. Once it’s thoroughly dry, the flesh side is grained with a toothed tool, and the grain or hair side is bruised to soften the leather. An additional process of trimming and graining prepares it for waxing or coloring, using oil and lampblack on the flesh side. Finally, it is sized, dried, and coated in tallow. Throughout this process, the leather becomes smooth, shiny, flexible, and waterproof.


What is a “Glass Snake”?

“Glass snake” is the name which has been given to a lizard resembling a serpent in form and reaching a length of three feet.

“Glass snake” is the name given to a lizard that looks like a snake and can grow up to three feet long.

The joints of the tail are not connected by caudal muscles, hence it is extremely brittle, and one or more of the joints break off when the animal is even slightly irritated.

The joints of the tail aren't linked by caudal muscles, making it really fragile, and one or more of the joints can snap off if the animal is even a little irritated.


The Story in Diamond-Cutting[71]

Diamonds were known and worn as jewels (in the rough) in India 5,000 years ago and used as cutters and gravers 3,000 years ago. India was the source of supply until diamonds were discovered in Brazil about the year 1700, when Brazil became the largest producer and remained so until diamonds were found in South Africa about 1869. The African mines now produce four-fifths of the diamond supply. Previous to the discoveries in Africa, diamonds were known to originally come only from high places in the mountains, because the diamond deposits were found in India and Brazil, on high plateaus, on the sides of mountains, in the beds of mountain streams, and in the plains below; where mountain torrents had rolled them.

Diamonds were recognized and worn as raw jewels in India 5,000 years ago and were used as cutting tools and engravers 3,000 years ago. India was the main source of diamonds until Brazil was discovered around 1700, when it became the largest producer and held that title until diamonds were found in South Africa around 1869. Now, African mines produce four-fifths of the world's diamond supply. Before the discoveries in Africa, diamonds were believed to originate solely from high-altitude locations, as diamond deposits were found in India and Brazil on high plateaus, along the sides of mountains, in mountain stream beds, and in the plains below, where they had been carried by mountain torrents.

In Africa, for the first time, the true original home of the diamond was found at high levels in the mountains, in enormous fissures, open chasms, chimneys or pipes, extending to great and unknown depths. Into these immense chimneys, nature forced from subterranean sources, slow rivers of a peculiar blue clay, a diamondiferous earth termed “serpentine breccia” or “volcanic tuf” and now known by the latter-day name of “Kimberlite.” As this soft mixture oozed into the “chimneys” or “pipes” from the bottom, it was gradually forced upwards, filling the whole chasm from wall to wall and to the top, where its progress ended by hardening in a small mound ten to twelve feet higher than the surrounding surface.

In Africa, for the first time, the true original home of the diamond was discovered at high altitudes in the mountains, in huge cracks, open chasms, chimneys, or pipes that go deep and far below. Into these massive chimneys, nature pushed from underground sources slow rivers of a unique blue clay, a diamond-rich earth called “serpentine breccia” or “volcanic tuff,” now commonly known as “Kimberlite.” As this soft mixture seeped into the “chimneys” or “pipes” from below, it was slowly pushed upward, filling the entire chasm from wall to wall and up to the top, where it ultimately hardened into a small mound ten to twelve feet higher than the surrounding ground.

In this blue clay or Kimberlite in these chimneys, is found nature’s most wonderful creation, the diamond crystallized from pure carbon, in intense heat, and under titanic pressure.

In this blue clay or Kimberlite in these chimneys, is found nature’s most amazing creation, the diamond, formed from pure carbon under extreme heat and immense pressure.

The greatest mines of Africa are the Jagersfontein, Wesselton, Premier and Robert Victor. The Kimberlite of the Jagersfontein mine is free from pyrites, and to that is attributed the remarkable brilliancy and purity of color for which the diamonds of this mine are celebrated. Their color includes the blue, and they command the highest prices of any diamonds.

The biggest mines in Africa are Jagersfontein, Wesselton, Premier, and Robert Victor. The kimberlite from the Jagersfontein mine doesn't contain pyrites, which is why the diamonds from this mine are known for their amazing brightness and pure color. Their colors include blue, and they fetch the highest prices of any diamonds.

The Wesselton mine crystals are noted for their octahedra and purity. The color and brilliancy are so superior that nearly all fine white “Rivers” are rated as Wesseltons. The Robert Victor yields a big average of fine white stones, and many of the crystals are very perfect and beautiful. The Dutoitspan diamonds mostly show color, but many are “fancy” and demand a high price. The Bulfontein crystals are usually small white octahedras of very good color, but many are flawed. The De Beers stones are good white, some color, some broken crystals and smoky stones. The Kimberly diamonds are much the same as those from the De Beers mine. The Premier is the largest diamond mine in the world. Of its diamonds some have an oily lustre and are quite blue—many are of the finest quality and color. This mine also produces a large number of “false color” stones which change color in different lights. The Voorspoed and the Koffyfontein produce fair white and some colored diamonds.

The Wesselton mine crystals are famous for their octahedra and purity. The color and brilliance are so exceptional that almost all high-quality white “Rivers” are classified as Wesseltons. The Robert Victor produces a large average of fine white stones, and many of the crystals are very perfect and beautiful. The Dutoitspan diamonds mostly show color, but many are “fancy” and can fetch a high price. The Bulfontein crystals are usually small white octahedra with very good color, but many have flaws. The De Beers stones are good white, some colored, some broken, and some smoky. The Kimberly diamonds are quite similar to those from the De Beers mine. The Premier is the largest diamond mine in the world. Its diamonds have an oily luster and can be quite blue—many are of the highest quality and color. This mine also produces a significant number of “false color” stones that change color in different lighting. The Voorspoed and Koffyfontein mines yield decent white and some colored diamonds.

Diamonds in small quantities are also found in Borneo, British and Dutch Guiana, Australia, Sumatra, China and the United States.

Diamonds in small amounts can also be found in Borneo, British and Dutch Guiana, Australia, Sumatra, China, and the United States.

One of the largest diamonds known (weight 367 carats) was found in Borneo about a century ago, and belongs to the Rajah of Mattan. One of the most celebrated is the Koh-i-noor (Mountain of Light), belonging to the British crown. It weighed originally nearly 800 carats, but by subsequent recuttings has been reduced[585] to 10334 carats. The Orloff diamond, belonging to the Emperor of Russia, weighs 195 carats; the Pitt diamond, among the French crown jewels, 13612. The former, which came from India, has been thought to have originally formed part of the Koh-i-noor stone. The largest Brazilian diamond weighed 25412 carats and was cut to a brilliant of 125. Some of the South African diamonds are also very large, one being found in 1893 weighing 971 carats, or nearly half a pound. More recently a much larger one has been found, weighing 3,034 carats. This has been cut into eleven pieces, the largest, a drop brilliant, weighing 51612 carats. This, called the Star of South Africa, has been placed in King George’s scepter, and another, of 309316 carats, in his crown.

One of the largest diamonds known (weighing 367 carats) was found in Borneo about a century ago and belongs to the Rajah of Mattan. One of the most famous is the Koh-i-noor (Mountain of Light), which is part of the British crown. It originally weighed nearly 800 carats, but it has been reduced by subsequent recuttings to 10334 carats. The Orloff diamond, owned by the Emperor of Russia, weighs 195 carats; the Pitt diamond, among the French crown jewels, weighs 13612 carats. The Orloff, which came from India, is thought to have originally been part of the Koh-i-noor stone. The largest Brazilian diamond weighed 25412 carats and was cut to a brilliant of 125. Some South African diamonds are also quite large; one found in 1893 weighed 971 carats, or nearly half a pound. More recently, an even larger one was discovered, weighing 3,034 carats. This diamond has been cut into eleven pieces, the largest being a drop brilliant that weighs 51612 carats. This one, called the Star of South Africa, has been set in King George’s scepter, while another one weighing 309316 carats is in his crown.

A rough diamond is a hard-looking, luminous object, somewhat like a piece of alum, with a dull skin, called the “nyf,” over a brilliant body. The ancients wore their diamonds uncut because they could not find a substance that would grind or cut them. About 1,500 years ago, however, it was found that by rubbing or grinding one diamond against another the outer skin could be removed. At Bruges, in 1450, diamonds were first polished with diamond dust. In Holland, in 1700, diamonds were first cut with an idea of bringing out real beauty and brilliance by cutting them square with a large flat table and some small facets, ten in all, sloping to the edge of the square. From this beginning cutters gradually added additional facets to increase the brilliancy until there were thirty-four in all. Then came the English round-cut brilliants with fifty-eight facets, but the diamond was left thick and lumpy, until about seventy-five years ago, when an American cutter, Henry D. Morse, of Boston, developed the cutting of diamonds to its present perfection by fearlessly sacrificing weight to get proportion. This greatly increased the price of diamonds, but enhanced their brilliancy.

A rough diamond is a hard, shiny object, somewhat resembling a piece of alum, with a dull outer layer called the “nyf” covering a brilliant core. In ancient times, people wore their diamonds uncut because they couldn’t find anything to grind or cut them. About 1,500 years ago, though, it was discovered that rubbing or grinding one diamond against another could remove the outer layer. In Bruges, in 1450, diamonds were first polished with diamond dust. In Holland, in 1700, diamonds were cut with the intention of highlighting their true beauty and brilliance by shaping them square with a large flat table and some small facets, totaling ten, sloping to the edge of the square. From this starting point, cutters gradually added more facets to enhance the brilliance until there were thirty-four in total. Then came the English round-cut brilliants with fifty-eight facets, but those diamonds still had a thick, lumpy appearance, until about seventy-five years ago, when an American cutter, Henry D. Morse, from Boston, perfected the art of diamond cutting by boldly sacrificing weight for proportion. This significantly increased the price of diamonds, but also enhanced their brilliance.

Old square cut diamonds

Old Square Cut Diamonds

Vintage Square Cut Diamonds

English square cut diamonds

English Square Cut Diamonds

English Square Cut Diamonds

All cutters have been compelled to follow this method, and the perfectly cut brilliant of today has a depth from table to culet of six-tenths of the diameter, of which one-third is above the girdle and two-thirds below. In this form the diamond resembles two cones united at their bases, the upper one cut off a short distance from its base, the lower one having its extreme point cut off. It has fifty-eight facets, of which thirty-three, including the table, are above the girdle and twenty-five, including the culet, below the girdle. Stones which are not scientifically cut in this true proportion, if too deep, are called “lumpy,” if too shallow they are called “fish eyes.” A slightly spread stone is desirable, provided it has not lost brilliancy, and so become a “fish eye.” Looking larger than its weight indicates, it offers a larger appearing diamond for the price of a smaller perfectly cut stone. Most cutters remove as little of the rough stone as possible in cutting so as to retain weight (they sell by weight). This often results in the finished diamond being too thick at the girdle, making a lumpy stone. Many people think deep, lumpy stones are most desirable. This is not true, as they are imperfectly cut.

All cutters have had to adopt this method, and today's perfectly cut diamond has a depth from the table to the culet that is six-tenths of the diameter, with one-third above the girdle and two-thirds below. In this shape, the diamond looks like two cones joined at their bases, with the upper cone cut off a short distance from its base and the lower cone having its tip cut off. It has fifty-eight facets, with thirty-three, including the table, above the girdle and twenty-five, including the culet, below the girdle. Stones that aren't cut scientifically in this perfect proportion, if too deep, are called “lumpy,” and if too shallow, they’re referred to as “fish eyes.” A slightly spread stone is desirable, as long as it hasn’t lost its brilliance and turned into a “fish eye.” It appears larger than its actual weight suggests, giving the look of a bigger diamond for the price of a smaller, perfectly cut one. Most cutters try to remove as little of the rough stone as possible to keep the weight (they sell by weight). This often leads to the finished diamond being too thick at the girdle, resulting in a lumpy stone. Many people believe deep, lumpy stones are the most desirable, but that’s not true, as they are poorly cut.

In preparing to cut a diamond the rough crystal is studied until the grain is found. Along the grain another sharp-pointed diamond is ground until there is a V-shape incision or nick. The blunt end of a flat piece of steel is placed in this nick and a smart blow of a hammer divides the crystal evenly and perfectly. After this[586] “cleavage” has removed the unnecessary portions, or they have been sawed off by the use of rapidly-revolving thin wheels charged with diamond dust, the diamond is set in a turning wheel and ground with another diamond until it takes the shape in which we know it.

In preparing to cut a diamond, the rough crystal is examined until the grain is located. Along that grain, another sharp diamond is shaped until a V-shaped cut or nick appears. The blunt end of a flat piece of steel is placed in this nick, and a precise blow from a hammer splits the crystal cleanly. After this[586] "cleavage" has eliminated the unnecessary parts, or they’ve been sawed off using fast-spinning thin wheels coated with diamond dust, the diamond is set in a turning wheel and polished with another diamond until it takes on the familiar shape we recognize.

The fifty-eight facets are cut and polished one at a time on a rapidly-revolving wheel charged with diamond dust and oil. It takes from two and one-half to four days to properly cut a stone. Knife-edge girdle diamonds are impractical owing to the liability of chipping the thin edge in setting or by blows while being worn. Polishing the rough edge of the girdle is rarely done and then usually to conceal a girdle which is too thick or lumpy. The principal diamond cutting centers are Amsterdam, Antwerp and New York.

The fifty-eight facets are cut and polished individually on a fast-spinning wheel coated with diamond dust and oil. It takes about two and a half to four days to properly cut a stone. Knife-edge girdle diamonds aren't practical because they can chip easily during setting or while being worn. Polishing the rough edge of the girdle is uncommon and usually only done to hide a girdle that's too thick or uneven. The main diamond cutting hubs are Amsterdam, Antwerp, and New York.

Terms related to diamonds

Inherent flaws can be perfectly understood by imagining a pond of water frozen solidly to its center. At the shore, where the ice has been partly forced out along the banks, it will be full of grass, leaves, pebbles and sticks, and presents a broken and frosted appearance. Further out there are only traces of such débris, some bubbles, spots, etc. Out at the center is clear, transparent, unbroken, unflawed, purest blue-white ice, such as you delight to see in your glass on a hot day. So is it with diamonds; some (like the ice along the shore) are full of cracks, carbon specks, bubbles, clouds, splits and cavities; some have all of these; some only a few; others only one, and some are without flaws.

Inherent flaws can be clearly understood by imagining a pond that’s frozen solid in the center. At the edge, where the ice has been pushed out along the banks, it’s filled with grass, leaves, pebbles, and sticks, giving it a broken and frosted look. Further out, there are just a few traces of debris, some bubbles, spots, etc. At the center is clear, transparent, unbroken, flawless, pure blue-white ice, like what you enjoy seeing in your glass on a hot day. The same goes for diamonds; some (like the ice at the edge) are full of cracks, carbon specks, bubbles, clouds, splits, and cavities; some have all of these; some have just a few; others have only one, and some are completely flawless.

Terms related to imperfect diamonds

Of all the imperfections (not considering glaring cracks or nicks), carbon spots are the most discernible. They range from mere specks scarcely visible with a powerful magnifying glass, to large black spots or clusters of large or small black specks sometimes quite plain to the naked eye. These are carbon which failed to crystallize with the rest of the diamond, or intrusions of titanic iron. The blackest and often most numerous carbon specks occur in the finest white and blue-white stones. “Capes” and other yellow diamonds are usually perfect, something in the color of these stones seemingly being of a nature which helps clear and perfect crystallization. Blue-white stones of exceptionally fine color are often massed full of shaggy or jet-black carbon spots.

Of all the imperfections (not counting obvious cracks or chips), carbon spots are the easiest to notice. They can be tiny specks that are barely visible even with a strong magnifying glass, or they can be large black spots or clusters of big or small black specks that are sometimes clearly seen by the naked eye. These spots are bits of carbon that didn’t crystallize with the rest of the diamond, or intrusions of massive iron. The darkest and often most numerous carbon specks are found in the best white and blue-white stones. “Capes” and other yellow diamonds are usually flawless; something about the color of these stones seems to promote better and clearer crystallization. Exceptionally fine blue-white stones are often filled with rough or deep black carbon spots.

White specks and bubbles are common flaws, which vary in size and which may be best illustrated by looking at a pane of glass in your window. There you will[587] find small knots, white bubbles and whitish specks. These seldom injure the brilliancy, as they are often a glittering silver color, more brilliant than the diamond.

White specks and bubbles are common imperfections that come in different sizes, like those you might see in a windowpane. There you will[587] notice small knots, white bubbles, and light specks. These rarely affect the brilliance, as they often have a sparkling silver color that’s even more dazzling than a diamond.

Clouds are dark flat patches in the grain, of a brownish color, and appear as a sprinkling of dust in a small patch in the interior. This seldom injures brilliancy.

Clouds are dark, flat patches in the grain, with a brownish color, and look like a sprinkling of dust in a small area inside. This rarely affects brightness.

Glessen or glasses are flat sectional streaks having an icy appearance. When large or abundant they disturb or cut off the proper reflection of the interior light rays, causing an appearance known as “shivery.” When clouds or glessen occur at the surface of a diamond they appear as cracks, and if at or near the girdle are dangerous, as the stone is liable to split or crack there when being mounted or by any hard blow, which would result in the loss of a sliver or wedged-shaped piece out of the edge.

Glessen, or glasses, are flat, shiny streaks that look icy. When they are large or numerous, they disrupt or block the proper reflection of light inside the diamond, creating a look called “shivery.” When clouds or glessen are present on the surface of a diamond, they resemble cracks, and if they are at or near the girdle, they can be risky since the stone is likely to split or crack there during mounting or from any hard impact, leading to the loss of a sliver or wedge-shaped piece from the edge.

Flaws in diamonds

Surface flaws consist of nicks or cavities in the face of the stone either above or below the girdle. The brilliancy of the diamond hides these flaws when the diamond is clean, but when clouded with soap and dust these cavities fill up and show plainly.

Surface flaws are nicks or pits on the surface of the stone, either above or below the girdle. The brilliance of the diamond conceals these flaws when it’s clean, but when it’s clouded with soap and dust, these cavities fill up and become clearly visible.

Flaws in diamonds

Diamonds are so brilliant, the radiance from the facets so bewildering to the eye, that the flaws cannot be seen by the human eye unless the imperfection is pronounced and at the top surface of the diamond. Each facet of a diamond (by reason of the method of cutting) is a window looking down a clearly defined walled chamber, like a hall-way to the culet. With a one-inch loup or magnifying glass such as watchmakers and diamond dealers use, it is possible to clearly look down through each facet and its hall-way to the culet, and observe throughout each chamber the very slightest imperfection if one exists, thus thoroughly examining and exploring the entire diamond.

Diamonds are incredibly bright, and the light reflecting off their facets can be so mesmerizing that flaws are often invisible to the naked eye unless they are prominent and on the surface. Each facet of a diamond acts like a window into a well-defined chamber, similar to a hallway leading to the culet. With a one-inch loupe or magnifying glass that watchmakers and diamond dealers use, you can easily look through each facet and see into its chamber all the way to the culet. This allows you to spot even the tiniest imperfections if they exist, enabling a thorough examination of the entire diamond.

Diamond brilliancy is of two kinds: “surface brilliancy” and “internal brilliancy.” Light falling vertically on a diamond is reflected back in straight, unbroken rays. This constitutes “surface brilliancy,” Light falling in a slanting direction[588] is partly reflected and partly enters the stone; that part which enters is refracted or bent and causes the “internal brilliancy.”

Diamond brilliance comes in two types: "surface brilliance" and "internal brilliance." Light hitting a diamond straight on is reflected back in direct, unbroken rays. This is known as "surface brilliance." When light strikes at an angle[588], some of it is reflected while part of it enters the stone; the light that enters is refracted or bent, creating the "internal brilliance."

In a perfectly cut diamond, the facets are so carefully arranged that entering rays of light jump from wall to wall of this transparent enclosure and emerge again at the very point of entry. Cleverly arranged mirrors sending a ray of light from one to all the others and back again to the first will produce the same effect. Lights entering a diamond are reflected, refracted and dispersed. The dispersion of a ray of white light separates it into its component color rays. These are the spectrum colors often seen radiating from a diamond. Placing a diamond in the sun’s rays and holding a sheet of white paper at the proper angle to catch the reflections from the stone clearly shows these colors.

In a perfectly cut diamond, the facets are arranged so precisely that incoming rays of light bounce from wall to wall of this clear structure and come back out at the same spot they entered. Similarly, well-placed mirrors can send a beam of light from one to another and back to the first, creating the same effect. Light entering a diamond gets reflected, refracted, and spread out. This dispersion of a beam of white light breaks it down into its individual color rays. These are the colors of the spectrum that you often see shining from a diamond. When you place a diamond in the sunlight and hold a piece of white paper at the right angle to catch the reflections from the stone, the colors become very clear.

Modern American cut diamonds

Modern American Cut Diamonds

Modern American Cut Diamonds

Brilliancy is often said to be the most important quality of a diamond, but that is not true. Yellow diamonds are more flashingly brilliant than white stones that cost much more. In each color grade, greater brilliance determines higher value over stones of the same color grade with less brilliancy. The diamond is the hardest known substance in the world, cutting and grinding all other known hard things, but itself only cut and ground by its mates.

Brilliance is often considered the most important quality of a diamond, but that’s not accurate. Yellow diamonds shine more intensely than white stones that are much pricier. In each color grade, greater brilliance increases the value compared to stones of the same color grade that are less brilliant. The diamond is the hardest known material in the world, capable of cutting and grinding all other hard substances, but it can only be cut and ground by other diamonds.

Because of their hardness, diamonds worn by many previous generations remain as brilliant as they were in the beginning and they will continue so to the end of time.

Because of their hardness, diamonds worn by many previous generations stay as brilliant as they were in the beginning, and they will continue to be so forever.

No other thing can scratch or mar the polished facets and sharp corners of the diamond. It is the hardest of all known things. While all diamonds are of practically the same hardness, this is not, however, absolutely true, as stones from wet diggings or rivers are slightly harder than those from dry diggings. All diamonds are infusible and unaffected by acids or alkali. The heat of a burning building will not affect them, they can be raked from the ashes uninjured and can only be burned in oxygen under a scientifically produced intense heat of 4000° F. While the hardest known thing, the diamond is brittle and can be crushed to a powder. It is the only absolutely pure gem, being composed of crystallized carbon—all others are composed of two or more elements.

No other material can scratch or damage the polished surfaces and sharp edges of a diamond. It’s the hardest substance we know. While all diamonds are generally the same hardness, there is a slight exception—stones from wet areas or rivers are a bit harder than those from dry sites. All diamonds can’t be melted and are not affected by acids or alkalis. Even the heat from a burning building won’t hurt them; they can be pulled from the ashes unharmed and can only be burned in pure oxygen at an extremely high temperature of 4000°F. Despite being the hardest known substance, diamonds are brittle and can be ground to a powder. They are the only completely pure gem, made entirely of crystallized carbon—unlike other gems, which consist of two or more elements.


The term “Shibboleth” has come to mean a countersign or password of a secret society since the Biblical days, when the Ephraimites, who had been routed by Jephthah, tried to pass the Jordan. They were made to pronounce the word “Shibboleth” and were easily detected as enemies when they pronounced it “Sibboleth.”

The term “Shibboleth” has evolved to mean a password or sign of a secret society since biblical times, when the Ephraimites, who had been defeated by Jephthah, attempted to cross the Jordan. They were asked to pronounce the word “Shibboleth” and were easily identified as foes when they said it as “Sibboleth.”

Why do We Get Hungry?

Hunger is a sensation partly arising in the stomach, since it may be relieved temporarily by the introduction into the stomach of material which is incapable of yielding any nutriment to the body. It may be due to a condition of fulness of the vessels of the stomach, relieved by any stimulus which, acting on the lining membrane, induces a flow of fluid from the glands. But it also arises from a condition of the system, since the introduction of nutriment into the blood, apart altogether from the stomach, will relieve it. This is also evident from the fact that hunger may be experienced even when the stomach is full of food, and when food is supplied in abundance, if some disease prevents the absorption of the nourishment, or quickly drains it from the blood. Hunger may be partially allayed by sleep or by the use of narcotics, tobacco and alcohol, all of which tend to diminish the disintegration of tissues.

Hunger is a feeling that mainly starts in the stomach, as it can be temporarily eased by putting something in the stomach that doesn’t provide any nutrition to the body. It can be caused by the fullness of the blood vessels in the stomach, which can be relieved by any stimulus that, when it acts on the stomach lining, encourages fluid to flow from the glands. However, it also comes from the body’s overall condition, since providing nutrients directly into the bloodstream, without involving the stomach, can relieve it. This is further shown by the fact that hunger can be felt even when the stomach is full of food, especially if a disease prevents the body from absorbing the nutrients or quickly removes them from the blood. Hunger can be partially reduced by sleep or by using narcotics, tobacco, and alcohol, which all help decrease the breakdown of body tissues.


The Story in the Modern Lifting Magnet[72]

Nearly every boy has had among his treasured possessions a small horseshoe magnet, painted red, with bright ends, and has spent many happy hours picking up needles, steel pins or other small objects, and finally tired of it because of its small lifting capacity and dreamed of one which would lift a hammer, or possibly even the family flatiron. Little did he know at that time of the long and interesting history of magnetism, the many stories and superstitions based on its strange power; or of its intimate relation to the wonderful growth of electricity within the last hundred years. His wildest dreams of lifting power would be realized if he could see a modern electric lifting magnet which has only come into use within the last ten years and is meeting with instant approval in nearly every industry where iron and steel is handled in any quantity.

Almost every boy has had a cherished small horseshoe magnet, painted red with bright ends, and has spent countless happy hours picking up needles, steel pins, or other tiny objects, eventually growing tired of it because it couldn't lift much and dreaming of one powerful enough to lift a hammer, or maybe even the family flatiron. Little did he know back then about the long and fascinating history of magnetism, the many stories and superstitions surrounding its strange power, or its close connection to the incredible advancements in electricity over the past hundred years. His wildest dreams of lifting strength would come true if he could see a modern electric lifting magnet, which has only been in use for the last ten years and is getting rave reviews in nearly every industry where iron and steel are handled in large amounts.

Lines of magnetic force

Fig. 1

Fig. 1

There are three primary kinds of magnets: the lodestone or natural magnets, the artificial or permanent steel magnet, and the electric magnet. At present the lodestone is little used. The permanent steel magnet is used for compass needles, as the familiar horseshoe magnet, and in certain types of electric machinery. The electric magnet forms a part of nearly every kind of electrical machinery and is by far the most useful form of the magnet. The modern high-duty lifting magnet is a form of the electric magnet.

There are three main types of magnets: the lodestone or natural magnets, the artificial or permanent steel magnet, and the electric magnet. Right now, lodestones aren’t used much. The permanent steel magnet is used for compass needles, like the well-known horseshoe magnet, and in certain types of electric machinery. The electric magnet is found in almost all kinds of electrical equipment and is by far the most useful type of magnet. The modern high-duty lifting magnet is a type of electric magnet.

The properties of the lodestone and the permanent magnet have been known for thousands of years, while the electric magnet is a comparatively recent discovery.

The properties of lodestones and permanent magnets have been known for thousands of years, while the electromagnet is a relatively recent invention.

All magnets, whether natural, permanent or electric, possess the same magnetic properties. Every magnet has two poles commonly called a north pole and a south pole. It has also been found that when a magnet is broken in two each piece becomes a magnet in itself with its own north and south poles.

All magnets, whether natural, permanent, or electric, have the same magnetic properties. Every magnet has two poles, typically referred to as a north pole and a south pole. It's also been discovered that when a magnet breaks into two pieces, each piece becomes a magnet on its own, complete with its own north and south poles.

For practical purposes it has been found convenient to assume that magnetism consists of a series of “lines of force” running through the magnet from one end to the other and back again through the air. Each one of these lines is assumed to[590] have a certain strength, and the power of any magnet is determined by the number of lines of force flowing through it. These lines are clearly shown in Fig. 1, which was made by sprinkling iron filings on a sheet of paper over a bar magnet, and tapping the paper slightly so that the filings could arrange themselves along the magnetic lines of force.

For practical reasons, it's useful to think of magnetism as a series of "lines of force" that run through the magnet from one end to the other and back through the air. Each of these lines is thought to have a certain strength, and the power of any magnet is measured by the number of lines of force passing through it. These lines are clearly illustrated in Fig. 1, which was created by sprinkling iron filings on a sheet of paper over a bar magnet and gently tapping the paper so the filings could align along the magnetic lines of force.

Since Oersted’s first electric magnet in 1820, electric magnets have been made in a variety of forms and for many different purposes. The simplest form of electric magnet is shown in Fig. 2. It consists of an iron bar with an insulated electric wire wound around it carrying an electric current.

Since Oersted's first electromagnet in 1820, electromagnets have been created in many shapes and for various uses. The simplest type of electromagnet is shown in Fig. 2. It consists of an iron bar wrapped with insulated electric wire that carries an electric current.

Electric magnet

Fig. 2

Fig. 2

Another form of the electric magnet is shown in cross-section in Fig. 3. This consists of a short steel cylinder with a groove in its face for the electric coil. The modern lifting magnet is a highly specialized form of this type of electric magnet.

Another form of the electric magnet is shown in cross-section in Fig. 3. This consists of a short steel cylinder with a groove in its face for the electric coil. The modern lifting magnet is a highly specialized version of this type of electric magnet.

Although the use of a magnet for lifting purposes seems to be a very simple idea and easily adopted, many difficulties had to be overcome and years of experimenting done before the lifting magnet was a commercial success. Nearly all electrical machinery may easily be protected from rough usage and moisture, but the lifting magnet must be so strongly designed that it will withstand the countless blows due to heavy pieces of iron flying against it, and the banging it must get against the sides of cars, ships, etc. All light parts must be placed inside of the magnet or in such a position that they can never be knocked off or broken. To moisture in some form or other nearly all lifting-magnet troubles can be traced. Hence the importance of an absolutely moisture-proof construction. The result of moisture in the interior of a magnet is to weaken the effectiveness of the installation, leading eventually to short circuits and burn-outs. It is necessary not only to guard against moisture in the form of rain, snow or dew, but precaution must also be taken against the entrance into the magnet of moisture-laden air, since moisture so introduced will presently be condensed in the form of drops of water.

Although using a magnet for lifting seems like a straightforward and easily embraced concept, many challenges had to be tackled and years of experimentation took place before the lifting magnet became a commercial hit. Most electrical machinery can easily be protected from rough handling and moisture, but the lifting magnet needs to be designed robustly enough to endure the endless impacts from heavy pieces of iron hitting it, as well as the jostling it experiences against the sides of trucks, ships, etc. All lightweight components must be housed inside the magnet or positioned so they can’t be knocked off or damaged. Nearly all lifting magnet issues can be linked back to some form of moisture, making a completely moisture-proof design crucial. Moisture inside a magnet can lessen its effectiveness, ultimately resulting in short circuits and failures. It’s important to protect against moisture from rain, snow, or dew, but precautions also need to be taken against moisture-laden air entering the magnet, as this moisture will eventually condense into water droplets.

Modern elctric lifting magnet

Fig. 3

Fig. 3

Magnet lifting pig-iron

A 43-Inch Magnet Handling Pig Iron

A 43-Inch Magnet for Handling Pig Iron

A very natural question is, how much such a magnet will lift. For a given size of magnet, the lifting capacity varies greatly with the nature of the load handled. With a magnet sixty-two inches in diameter, this may vary from in the neighborhood of 1,000 pounds for light scrap, to from 4,000 to 5,000 pounds for pig iron, and as high as 60,000 pounds for a solid mass of steel or iron such as, for instance, a skull-cracker ball or a casting affording surface for good magnetic contact.

A common question is how much weight a magnet can lift. For a specific size of magnet, the lifting capacity can vary significantly depending on the type of load. For a magnet that’s sixty-two inches in diameter, this can range from around 1,000 pounds for light scrap, to between 4,000 and 5,000 pounds for pig iron, and can go up to 60,000 pounds for a solid piece of steel or iron, like a skull-cracker ball or a casting that provides a good surface for magnetic contact.

The lifting magnet has been adopted for the handling of materials in all branches of the steel and iron industry. It is used for handling pig iron, scrap, castings, billets, tubes, rails, plates, for loading and unloading cars and vessels, and for handling skull-cracker balls and miscellaneous magnetic material.

The lifting magnet is widely used for handling materials in every sector of the steel and iron industry. It's used to manage pig iron, scrap, castings, billets, tubes, rails, plates, for loading and unloading trucks and ships, and for handling skull-cracker balls and various magnetic materials.

Probably one of the best illustrations of the saving accomplished by means of a lifting magnet is its use in unloading pig iron from steamers. By the old hand method it required twenty-eight men, two days and two nights, to unload a cargo of 4,000,000 pounds. When the lifting magnet was introduced, the total time for unloading was reduced to eleven hours, and was done by two men whose labor consisted in manipulating the controllers in the cages of the cranes. Thus two men and two magnets did the work of twenty-eight men in less than one-fourth of the time. Furthermore, the vessels were enabled to double their number of productive trips.

Probably one of the best examples of savings achieved with a lifting magnet is its use for unloading pig iron from ships. Using the old hand method, it took twenty-eight men two days and two nights to unload a cargo of 4,000,000 pounds. When the lifting magnet was introduced, the total unloading time was cut down to eleven hours, and it was done by just two men whose job was to operate the controllers in the crane cabins. So, two men and two magnets accomplished what twenty-eight men did in less than a quarter of the time. Plus, the ships were able to double the number of productive trips.

Electric magnet lifting heavy drum

36-Inch Lifting Magnet Picking up 3,500-Pound Winding Drum

36-Inch Lifting Magnet Lifting a 3,500-Pound Winding Drum

In railroad work, lifting magnets are at the present time used principally in scrap yards and around store-room platforms, where it is necessary to handle iron and steel rapidly and economically. For this class of work magnets are generally used in connection with a locomotive crane, making a self-contained, self-propelled unit which may be operated over the shop-yard tracks as required. The use of this combination has reduced very greatly the cost of handling both new and scrap material, both by reducing the actual expense of handling and by enabling the material to be handled much more rapidly than was before possible.

In railroad work, lifting magnets are currently used mainly in scrap yards and around storage platforms, where it's essential to handle iron and steel quickly and cost-effectively. For this type of work, magnets are typically used with a locomotive crane, creating a self-contained, self-propelled unit that can operate on the shop yard tracks as needed. This combination has significantly lowered the cost of handling both new and scrap materials, by cutting down on the actual handling expenses and allowing the materials to be moved much more quickly than before.

Probably the best possible endorsement of the waterproof construction of the[593] modern lifting magnet is the fact that one of them was successfully operated seventy feet below the surface of the Mississippi River. At New Orleans a large load of kegged nails was raised from a depth of seventy feet. A load of steel cotton ties was raised near Natchez and a barge of iron wire near Pittsburgh. And these are only a few instances of such work.

Probably the best endorsement of the waterproof design of the[593] modern lifting magnet is that one was successfully used seventy feet below the surface of the Mississippi River. In New Orleans, a large load of kegged nails was lifted from a depth of seventy feet. A load of steel cotton ties was raised near Natchez, and a barge of iron wire near Pittsburgh. And these are just a few examples of such operations.

The magnets used in this river work were three and one-half feet in diameter. They were dropped into the stream, the current turned on, and five or six kegs of nails or bundles of wire were raised each trip. The nails weighed 200 pounds to the keg, so there were lifted each time, from 1,000 to 1,200 pounds from the bed of the river.

The magnets used in this river project were three and a half feet in diameter. They were dropped into the stream, the current was turned on, and five or six kegs of nails or bundles of wire were pulled up each time. The nails weighed 200 pounds per keg, so each trip, they lifted between 1,000 and 1,200 pounds from the riverbed.

The variety of uses to which these magnets may be put are shown by the accompanying illustrations and there are many industries handling iron and steel where the introduction of the modern, high-duty lifting magnet will effect a great saving in time and labor.

The different ways these magnets can be used are demonstrated in the accompanying illustrations, and there are many industries dealing with iron and steel where the use of the modern, heavy-duty lifting magnet will save a significant amount of time and labor.

Magnet lifting heavy casting

36-Inch Magnet Handling Heavy Castings

36-Inch Magnet for Heavy Castings

Note that there is no hoisting tackle to be adjusted.

Note that there is no hoisting equipment to be adjusted.

An amusing incident occurred recently in a factory where a large lifting magnet is used in connection with a crane to carry pig iron through the shop. Just as the operator was bringing it across the shop unloaded, he saw two laborers ahead of him in altercation. One held a short pinch bar and the other a heavy shovel. As he approached, they both raised their tools like weapons. In a flash the operator switched on the current and the two men stood as if transfixed, hanging desperately to their weapons that were held aloft as by some giant’s hand. The laughter of everyone who saw the tableau ended the quarrel.

An amusing incident happened recently in a factory where a large lifting magnet is used with a crane to move pig iron around the shop. Just as the operator was moving it across the shop unloaded, he spotted two workers ahead of him arguing. One was holding a short pinch bar and the other a heavy shovel. As he got closer, they both raised their tools like weapons. In an instant, the operator turned on the current, and the two men were frozen in place, desperately clinging to their weapons raised as if by some giant’s hand. The laughter of everyone who witnessed the scene put an end to the argument.


Why is the Thistle the Emblem of Scotland?

According to tradition, the Danes were attempting to surprise an encampment of the Scotch one night, and had come very near to it without being observed, when a Dane stepped on a thistle and its sharp points made him cry out with pain. The Scotch were then awakened and succeeded in defeating their assailants. Ever since that time the thistle has been made the insignia of Scotland.

According to tradition, the Danes were trying to catch the Scots off guard one night and got very close to their camp without being noticed when a Dane stepped on a thistle, causing him to shout out in pain. This woke the Scots, who then managed to defeat their attackers. Since then, the thistle has been the symbol of Scotland.

How are Animals Identified on Cattle Ranges?

The question of how to mark animals started with the first stock raisers. In those days the main object was to provide some way animals could be identified as to ownerships, and many crude and more or less cruel methods were used, such as notching or lopping off part of the ear or branding with a hot iron, burning a letter or figure often ten or twelve inches high on the side of an animal. Branding in this way was used mostly by cattle raisers when large herds were grazed on the western plains. The large brand made it possible for cowboys on horseback to separate the cattle of different owners, as the brand could be seen at some distance.

The question of how to mark animals started with the first livestock owners. Back then, the main goal was to find a way to identify animals by their owners, and many rough and somewhat cruel methods were used, such as notching or cutting part of the ear or branding with a hot iron, burning a letter or number often ten or twelve inches high on the side of an animal. This type of branding was mostly used by cattle ranchers when large herds were grazed on the western plains. The large brand made it easier for cowboys on horseback to distinguish between cattle owned by different people, as the brand could be seen from a distance.

Cattle eartags

Courtesy of Wilcox & Harvey Mfg. Co.

Courtesy of Wilcox & Harvey Mfg. Co.

Brands for Identification

Branding for Identification

As the industry advanced the methods of marking improved. At the present time a mark in the ear made of metal is most commonly used. These are in many different styles such as narrow bands looped into the edge or in the form of a button fastened through the ear.

As the industry progressed, the methods of marking got better. Nowadays, a metal mark in the ear is used most often. These come in many different styles, like narrow bands looped into the edge or in the shape of a button fastened through the ear.

Tags are lettered with owner’s name and address and numbered, which serves not only as a mark for identification of ownership but as a means of keeping a record of each animal by number; also in making health tests before shipping from one point to another.

Tags are labeled with the owner’s name and address and numbered, which not only identifies ownership but also helps keep a record of each animal by number; it's also useful for conducting health tests before shipping them from one location to another.


How is Glue Made?

The best quality of glue is obtained from fresh bones, freed from fat by previous boiling, the clippings and parings of ox hides, the older skins being preferred; but large quantities are also got from the skins of sheep, calves, cows, hares, dogs, cats, etc., from the refuse of tanneries and tanning works, from old gloves, from sinews, tendons and other offal of animal origin.

The highest quality glue comes from fresh bones that have been boiled to remove the fat, along with clippings and scraps from ox hides, with older skins being preferable. However, significant amounts can also be sourced from the skins of sheep, calves, cows, hares, dogs, cats, and other animals, as well as from the waste produced by tanneries, old gloves, sinews, tendons, and other animal by-products.

By a process of cleaning and boiling the albuminoid elements of the animal matter are changed into gelatine. This, in a soft, jelly-like state, constitutes “size;” dried into hard, brittle, glassy cakes, which, before use, must be melted in hot water, it forms the well-known glue of the joiner, etc.

By cleaning and boiling, the protein components of the animal material are transformed into gelatin. This gelatin, when in a soft, jelly-like form, is known as “size.” When dried into hard, brittle, glassy cakes, it must be melted in hot water before use, resulting in the common glue used by carpenters and others.

When a solution is mixed with acetic or nitric acid it remains liquid, but still retains its power of cementing; in this state it is called liquid glue.

When a solution is mixed with acetic or nitric acid, it stays liquid but still has its adhesive properties; in this state, it’s called liquid glue.

Marine glue is a cement made by dissolving India rubber in oil of turpentine or coal-naphtha, to which an equal quantity of shellac is added.

Marine glue is a type of adhesive made by dissolving India rubber in turpentine or coal naphtha, with an equal amount of shellac added.

Why does a Hot Dish Crack if We Put Ice Cream in It?

If we take a hot dish and put ice cream in it, it cracks because the dish when hot has expanded. All the tiny particles that make up the dish have absorbed some heat and have expanded. When the ice cream is put in the particles composing the inside of the dish are cooled off and begin to contract, while the outside particles have not cooled and they pull away from each other, causing the dish to crack.

If we take a hot dish and put ice cream in it, it cracks because the hot dish has expanded. All the tiny particles that make up the dish have absorbed some heat and expanded. When the ice cream is added, the particles inside the dish cool down and start to contract, while the outside particles stay hot and pull away from each other, causing the dish to crack.


Footnotes

[1] Illustrations by courtesy of the Lake Torpedo Boat Co., unless otherwise indicated.

[1] Illustrations provided by the Lake Torpedo Boat Co., unless stated otherwise.

[2] The following information and statistics by courtesy of The Panama Canal, Washington office.

[2] The following information and stats are provided courtesy of The Panama Canal, Washington office.

[3] Illustrations by courtesy of the Columbia Graphophone Co.

[3] Illustrations provided by the Columbia Graphophone Co.

[4] Illustrations by courtesy of the Hendee Manufacturing Co.

[4] Illustrations courtesy of Hendee Manufacturing Co.

[5] Courtesy of the Waltham Watch Company, and “The American Boy.”

[5] Thanks to the Waltham Watch Company and “The American Boy.”

[6] Illustrations by courtesy of the Remington Arms-Union Metallic Cartridge Company, unless otherwise indicated.

[6] Illustrations used with permission from the Remington Arms-Union Metallic Cartridge Company, unless stated otherwise.

[7] Illustrations by courtesy of Plymouth Cordage Co.

[7] Illustrations provided by Plymouth Cordage Co.

[8] Illustrations by courtesy of Colt’s Patent Fire Arms Manufacturing Co.

[8] Illustrations courtesy of Colt’s Patent Fire Arms Manufacturing Co.

[9] Illustrations by courtesy of Consolidated Fireworks Company of America.

[9] Illustrations provided by Consolidated Fireworks Company of America.

[10] Illustrations by courtesy of Eastman Kodak Company.

[10] Illustrations provided by Eastman Kodak Company.

[11] Illustrations by courtesy of R. Hoe & Co.

[11] Illustrations used with permission from R. Hoe & Co.

[12] Illustrations by courtesy of the A. I. Root Co.

[12] Illustrations courtesy of the A. I. Root Co.

[13] Illustrations by courtesy of the Hotpoint Electric Heating Co.

[13] Illustrations provided by Hotpoint Electric Heating Co.

[14] Illustrations by the courtesy of the American Telephone and Telegraph Co.

[14] Illustrations used with permission from the American Telephone and Telegraph Co.

[15] Illustrations by courtesy of the Otis Elevator Co.

[15] Illustrations by courtesy of Otis Elevator Company.

[16] Illustrations by courtesy of the International Silver Co.

[16] Illustrations provided by the International Silver Co.

[17] Illustrations by courtesy of the McClure Co.

Illustrations courtesy of McClure Co.

[18] Illustrations by courtesy of New York Edison Co., unless otherwise indicated.

[18] Illustrations courtesy of New York Edison Co., unless stated otherwise.

[19] Illustrations by courtesy of The Curtis Publishing Co.

[19] Illustrations courtesy of The Curtis Publishing Co.

[20] Courtesy of George A. Hormel & Co.

[20] Courtesy of George A. Hormel & Co.

[21] Courtesy of The Field, New York City.

[21] Thanks to The Field, New York City.

[22] Courtesy of The Field, New York City.

[22] Thanks to The Field, New York City.

[23] Courtesy of the California Redwood Association.

[23] Thanks to the California Redwood Association.

[24] Illustrations by courtesy of The Brunswick-Balke-Collender Co.

[24] Illustrations courtesy of The Brunswick-Balke-Collender Co.

[25] Illustrations by courtesy of the American Pin Company.

[25] Illustrations provided by the American Pin Company.

[26] Illustrations by courtesy of the Common Sense Gum Co. Story by courtesy of the American Chicle Co. and the Common Sense Gum Co.

[26] Illustrations provided by the Common Sense Gum Co. Story provided by the American Chicle Co. and the Common Sense Gum Co.

[27] Illustrations by courtesy of The Brunswick-Balke-Collender Co.

[27] Illustrations courtesy of The Brunswick-Balke-Collender Co.

[28] Illustrations by courtesy of the Addressograph Co.

[28] Illustrations provided by the Addressograph Co.

[29] Illustrations by courtesy of the Pyrene Manufacturing Co.

[29] Illustrations courtesy of Pyrene Manufacturing Co.

[30] Illustrations by courtesy of Gatchel & Manning.

[30] Illustrations provided by Gatchel & Manning.

[31] Courtesy of Mr. Charles L. Trout.

[31] Thanks to Mr. Charles L. Trout.

[32] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[32] Illustrations provided by Bethlehem Steel Co.

[33] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[33] Illustrations provided by Bethlehem Steel Co.

[34] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[34] Illustrations provided by Bethlehem Steel Co.

[35] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[35] Illustrations courtesy of Bethlehem Steel Co.

[36] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[36] Illustrations courtesy of Bethlehem Steel Co.

[37] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[37] Illustrations courtesy of Bethlehem Steel Co.

[38] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[38] Illustrations provided by the Bethlehem Steel Company.

[39] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[39] Illustrations provided by the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[40] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[40] Illustrations courtesy of Bethlehem Steel Co.

[41] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[41] Illustrations provided by Bethlehem Steel Co.

[42] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[42] Illustrations provided by Bethlehem Steel Co.

[43] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[43] Illustrations courtesy of Bethlehem Steel Co.

[44] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[44] Illustrations courtesy of Bethlehem Steel Co.

[45] Illustrations by courtesy of the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[45] Illustrations provided by the Bethlehem Steel Co.

[46] Illustrations by courtesy of United Shoe Machinery Co.

[46] Illustrations courtesy of United Shoe Machinery Co.

[47] Courtesy of James Boyd & Bro., Inc.

[47] Courtesy of James Boyd & Bro., Inc.

[48] Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[48] Provided by American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[49] Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[49] Thanks to American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[50] Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[50] Provided by American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[51] Courtesy of American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[51] Thanks to American LaFrance Fire Engine Co.

[52] Illustrations by courtesy of American Cyanamid Company.

[52] Illustrations courtesy of American Cyanamid Company.

[53] Courtesy of The Strauss Bascule Bridge Co.

[53] Thanks to The Strauss Bascule Bridge Co.

[54] Courtesy of The American Magazine.

Thanks to The American Magazine.

[55] Illustrations by courtesy of the Railway Age Gazette and Standard Steel Car Co.

[55] Illustrations provided by the Railway Age Gazette and Standard Steel Car Co.

[56] Illustrations by courtesy of Diamond Crystal Salt Co.

[56] Illustrations provided by Diamond Crystal Salt Co.

[57] Illustrations by courtesy of the General Motors Truck Co.

[57] Illustrations courtesy of General Motors Truck Co.

[58] Illustrations by courtesy of Jacobs & Davies, Engineers.

[58] Illustrations courtesy of Jacobs & Davies, Engineers.

[59] Illustrations by courtesy of Ford Motor Co.

[59] Illustrations courtesy of Ford Motor Co.

[60] Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[60] Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[61] Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[61] Thanks to the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[62] Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[62] Thanks to the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[63] Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[63] Thanks to the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[64] Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[64] Thanks to the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[65] Courtesy of the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[65] Thanks to the Pennsylvania Railroad Co.

[66] Courtesy of the General Electric Co.

Thanks to GE.

[67] Courtesy of the Westinghouse Co.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Thanks to Westinghouse.

[68] Illustrations by courtesy of International Harvester Company of America, unless otherwise indicated.

[68] Illustrations courtesy of the International Harvester Company of America, unless stated otherwise.

[69] Illustrations by courtesy of the Nicholas Power Co.

[69] Illustrations provided by the Nicholas Power Co.

[70] Illustrations by courtesy of Endicott, Johnson & Co.

[70] Illustrations courtesy of Endicott, Johnson & Co.

[71] Courtesy of Mr. Charles L. Trout.

[71] Thanks to Mr. Charles L. Trout.

[72] Illustrations by courtesy of Cutler-Hammer Mfg. Co.

[72] Illustrations courtesy of Cutler-Hammer Mfg. Co.


Index

  • Abacus, 347
  • Acid, Nitric, 464
  • “Adam’s Apple,” 321
  • Adding Machines, 345
  • Addressograph, 364
  • Aerial Railway, 120
  • Aerials, 264
  • Aerial Trucks, 451
  • Aeroplane Bombs, 158
  • Aeroplanes, 505
  • Aestivation, 241
  • “After-damp,” 247
  • Agate, 49, 149
  • Agriculture, 461, 556
  • Air, Liquid, 461
  • Air Currents, 158, 231, 244, 263
  • Air-locks, 497
  • Air-mines, 390
  • Air-pressure, 411, 492
  • Airships, 505
  • Alcohol, 336, 478
  • Alloys, Gold, 448
  • “Almighty Dollar,” 355
  • Alternating Current, 363
  • Amazon, 98
  • “American Turtle,” 9
  • Amethysts, 149
  • Ammonia, 466
  • Ammunition, 75, 94, 158, 398
  • Animals, 51, 138, 146, 229, 241, 293, 297
  • Anthracite, 244
  • Anti-cyclones, 450
  • “A-1”, 136
  • Apaches, 147
  • Apartment-houses, First, 334
  • Apiaries, 183
  • Apples, 136
  • Aquarium, 378
  • Arack, 214
  • Arc Lamps, 577
  • Area of Oceans, 169
  • Armored Railway Car, 470
  • Armor-piercing Shells, 402
  • Armor Plate, 422, 435, 470, 478
  • Army Ambulances, 485
  • Arrows, 79
  • Artesian Wells, 96
  • Artificial Precious Stones, 361
  • Artillery, 386
  • Astronomical Observatory, 66
  • Atmospheric Conditions, Recording, 58
  • Atmospheric Nitrogen, 459
  • Atmospheric Pressure, 180
  • “Atmospherics,” 264
  • Atoms, 324
  • Austrian Guns, 388
  • Autographic Photography, 168
  • Automatic Bowling Pin Setters, 360
  • Automatic Machine Guns, 144, 391
  • Automatic Pistols, 143
  • Automatic Rakers, 565
  • Automatic Rifles, 89
  • Automobile Factory, 518
  • Automobile Guns, 145
  • Automobiles, 145, 223, 278, 290, 451, 481, 518, 557
  • Auxiliary Pumps, Fire, 455
  • Bacon, 300
  • Bacon, Roger, 83
  • Baggage Trucks, 545
  • Baking Clay under Water, 501
  • Balanced Rations, 298
  • Balance-wheels, 65
  • Balloons, Captive, 58, 515
  • Balloons, Fire, 157
  • Balloons, Military, 515
  • Balls, 309, 357
  • Bascule Bridges, 466
  • Battery Park, 378
  • Battle of Four Elements, 513
  • Battleship Aeroplanes, 506
  • Battleships, 22, 266, 480
  • Battleship Turrets, 425
  • Beaches, 149, 180
  • Bed Lasting Machines, 440
  • Beef, 297, 299, 458
  • Bees, 184
  • Beets, 464
  • “Before you can say Jack Robinson,” 119
  • Bell, Alexander Graham, 217
  • Belting, 118, 535
  • Benday Engravings, 382
  • Bending, Illusion, Stick in Water, 308
  • “Benedicts,” 149
  • Bicycles, 52
  • “Big Trees,” 304
  • Billiard Tables, 309
  • Binders, 562
  • Biplanes, 505
  • Birds, 303
  • Blackberries, White, 316
  • Blackfeet Indians, 148
  • Blast Furnaces, 417
  • Bleriot’s Monoplane, 509
  • Boats, Submarine, 9
  • Body Chute, Auto, 530
  • Bolters, Salt, 476
  • Bomb-dropping Device, 514
  • Bombs, 152
  • Boots, 436
  • Boots, Rubber, 111, 116
  • Boring Tool, 87
  • Bow and Arrow, 79
  • Bow-drill, 77
  • Bowling Alleys, 357
  • Box Kites, 59
  • “Breathing Bags,” 248[596]
  • Breech-loaders, 85
  • Bridges, 467
  • Briquetting Machines, 249
  • Broadway, 274, 280, 308
  • Bud-grafting, 136
  • Buffing Machines, 444
  • Buildings, Large, 221, 234, 274, 280, 540
  • Bulbs, Rubber, 116
  • Bullets, 93
  • Bull-fights, 362
  • Burbank, Luther, 317
  • Bureau of Mines Rescue Crew, 247
  • Burnishing, Silverware, 260
  • Cabinet-making, 310
  • Cable, Hemp, 123
  • Cable, Wire, 132
  • Cactus, Spineless, 316
  • Caissons, 504
  • Calcium Carbide, 459
  • Calculating Machines, 345
  • Calendering, 109, 116
  • Calibers, Guns, 389
  • California, 49, 304, 332
  • “Calling-crabs,” 229
  • Cameras, 162
  • Canal Navigation, 39
  • “Canary-bird Test,” Mining, 250
  • Candles, 63
  • Cannel Coal, 251
  • Cannon, 386
  • Carats, 317
  • Carbide Furnaces, 460
  • Carbines, 87
  • Carbon Filament Lamps, 275
  • Carboniferous Strata, 247
  • Carburetors, 56
  • Carnelians, 149
  • Carrier Pigeons, 216
  • Cars, Armored Railway, 470
  • Cars, Freight, 545
  • Cars, Motor, 145, 223, 290, 451, 481, 518, 557
  • Cars, Pullman, 544
  • Cars, Sight-seeing, 482
  • Cars, Special Heavy Duty Freight, 424
  • Cars, Street, 215
  • Cartridges, 85, 94
  • Casting Gold Ingots, 449
  • Casting Machines, 414
  • Castings, 424, 531
  • Catenary Construction, 284
  • Cat’s-eye, 149
  • Cattle, 297, 458
  • Cattle Food, 298, 317
  • Cave Men, 75
  • Cellulose, 450
  • Cellulose Acetate, 168
  • Central Exchanges, Telephone, 218
  • Central Station, First Commercial, 273
  • Centrifugal Extractors, Honey, 190
  • Chafing Dishes, Electric, 210
  • Chain Rammers, 407
  • Channel Cementing Machines, 441
  • Chattering, Teeth, 182
  • Chemical Engines, 454
  • Chemical Fire Extinguishers, 375, 523
  • Chemicals, Photographic, 162
  • Chewing Gum, 337
  • Chicle, 337
  • Chimes, 260
  • Chimneys, 158
  • Chinese Firecrackers, 150
  • Chrome Leather, 582
  • Circuits, Telephone, 225
  • Citrus Fruits, 331
  • “Clam-shell Dredges,” 491
  • Clay, 247, 496
  • Clicking Machines, 438
  • Cliff Dwellings, 334
  • Clinking Glasses, 231
  • Clocks, 61, 344
  • Clothes, 252
  • Coal, 244, 543
  • Coast Defense Guns, 396
  • Cobbler Shop, 437
  • Cocoanuts, 132, 138, 214, 450
  • Cod, 216, 325
  • Coffee-machines, Electric, 207
  • Coining, 302, 449
  • Coir, 132
  • Coke, 251, 460
  • Cold Storage, 299, 466
  • Color-printing, 289, 382
  • Comb, Honey, 183, 197
  • Combination Engravings, 381
  • Combined Sweep Rake and Stacker, 567
  • Combustion, Spontaneous, 42
  • Combustion Engines, 12, 53
  • Compass, Gyro, 74
  • Compasses, 435
  • Composition Billiard Balls, 315
  • Compressed Air Construction, 492
  • Compressed Air Engines, 133
  • Conduits, 223
  • Conning Towers, 425
  • Continuous Core Ovens, 532
  • Conveyor Belts, 535
  • Conveyors, Spiral, 240
  • Cooking, 121
  • Cooking Appliances, 205
  • Co-operative Agriculturists, 333
  • Copper, 448, 450
  • Cordage, 121
  • Cork, 385
  • Corn Binders, 562
  • Cotton, 464
  • Counting, 345
  • Coursing, 377
  • “Court of Love,” 363
  • “Cowboys,” 374
  • “Cow-trees,” 383
  • Crabs, 138, 229
  • Cradles, 559
  • Cradle Springs, 55
  • Crane Neck Hand Fire Engine, 452
  • Cranes, Traveling, 536, 543
  • Crane way, 531
  • Crank-shafts, 435, 518, 535
  • Cravats, 270
  • Crops, 458, 556
  • Cross-bow, 82
  • Cross-section on Sixth Avenue at Thirty-third Street, New York, 503[597]
  • Crowns, 384
  • Crude Rubber, 99
  • Cruisers, 478
  • Cucaracha Slide, 27
  • Cues, Billiard, 313
  • “Culebra Cut,” 25, 29
  • Culverins, 83
  • Curfew, 289
  • Curing, Fish, 329
  • Meat, 292, 300
  • Currying, 583
  • Cutlery, 333, 491
  • Cutting Shield Head, 495
  • Cyanamid, 458
  • Cyanide Gold Process, 448
  • Cyanometer, 199
  • Cyclones, 450
  • Cylinder Machining, 524
  • Cylinder Presses, 173
  • Cylindrical Valve Machines, 26
  • Daguerreotypes, 164
  • Dates, 97
  • “Davids,” 10
  • “Death Valley,” 315
  • Deep Sea Monster, 469
  • Deer-stalking, 82
  • Delivery Trucks, 481
  • Denatured Alcohol, 478
  • Desk ’Phones, 223
  • Detonators, 85
  • “Deutschland,” 14
  • “Deviation of the Compass,” 435
  • Diamond Boring Machines, 97
  • Diamond Cutting, 584
  • Diamonds, Artificial, 361
  • Dictograph, 262
  • Diesel Engines, 12, 252
  • Die-sinking, 285
  • “Difference Engine,” 348
  • Dipper Dredges, 491
  • Direct Current, 363
  • Dirigibles, 516
  • Diving Bells, 489
  • Diving Equipment, 411, 490
  • “Divining Rods,” 199
  • “Dog-days,” 310
  • “Dog-towns,” 42
  • “Dog-watch,” 317
  • Dollar Sign, 450
  • Double Octuple Press, 179
  • Drawbridges, 467
  • Dreams, 182
  • Dredges, 23, 27, 490
  • Dredging, Submarine, 15
  • Drills, Steam, 19
  • Drinking, 231
  • Driving Shields, 494
  • Drop Forging, 419
  • Dry Docks, 159
  • “Dry Farming,” 372
  • Drying Machines, 372
  • Ducking Stools, 379
  • Ducks, 180
  • Ductility of Metals, 448, 450
  • Dumbwaiters, 237
  • Dumping Trucks, 486
  • Dynamo Room of First Edison Station, 276
  • Dynamos, 262, 274
  • Earth, 181, 379
  • “Earth-shine,” 356
  • Echoes, 574
  • Eclipses, 181
  • Edge Trimming Machines, 443
  • Efficiency Systems, 518
  • Electric Baggage Trucks, 545
  • Control Boards, 519
  • Delivery Wagons, 278
  • Eels, 472
  • Locomotives, 22, 24, 541
  • Magnets, 589
  • Sewing Machines, 279
  • Train Chart and Switch Control, 283
  • Transmission, 261
  • Electricity, Domestic Utensils, 200
  • Progress, 273
  • Electrification of Railroads, 284, 541
  • Electrode Regulators, 460
  • Electro-magnetic Waves, 263
  • Electro-plating, 257
  • Elevating Gears, Gun, 402
  • Elevators, 232
  • Emblem of Scotland, 593
  • Engines, Combustion, 12, 53
  • Compressed Air, 133
  • Diesel, 12, 252
  • Electric Railroad, 541
  • Fire, 451
  • Gasoline-electric, 214
  • Gas-steam, 518
  • Kerosene, 556
  • Steam Railroad, 541
  • English Guns, 398
  • Engraving, 380
  • Ensilage, 271
  • Ermine, 356
  • Escapements, 68
  • Exchanges, Telephone, 218
  • Explosions, 37, 231, 244, 333
  • Eyes, Impressions of Vision, 162
  • Eyeleting Machines, 438
  • Factory Hospitals, 521
  • Farming, 458, 556
  • Fast Express Trains, 541
  • Federal Government, Coal Lands, 251
  • Felspar, 539
  • “Fenian Ram,” 10
  • Ferris Wheel, 342
  • Fertilizers, 298, 458, 572
  • Fiber, Manila, 132
  • “Fiddler-crabs,” 229
  • Field Guns, 386
  • Field Ring Forgings, 425
  • “Fighting Fish,” 199
  • Figs, 198
  • Files, 138
  • Films, 162, 537, 578
  • Filters, Salt, 474
  • Finger-prints, 74[598]
  • Finishing Shafts, 443
  • Fire Apparatus, 451, 523, 542
  • Fire-arms, 75, 139, 386
  • Fire-damp, 244
  • Fire Extinguishers, 375, 523
  • Fireflies, 161
  • Fire-making, Early, 121
  • Firing Gears, 405
  • Fireworks, 150
  • Fish, 99, 216, 325, 333, 377, 384, 468
  • Fixation of Nitrogen from the Air, 458
  • Flash Pans, 83
  • Flax, 132
  • Flight of Projectiles, 398
  • Flint, 149
  • Flint-lock, 84
  • Floating Docks, 159
  • Floating Islands, 504
  • Flowers, 317
  • Fluid Compression, 401
  • Flying, Birds, 303
  • “Flying Dutchman,” 180
  • Flying Machines, 505
  • Focus, Eye and Camera, 162
  • Fog Horns, 60
  • Folding Machines, 175, 288
  • Food, Cooking, 121
  • Food Crops, 458, 556
  • Foreign Exchange, 356
  • Forestry, 268
  • Forging Press, 418
  • Forgings, Quenching, 532
  • Forks, 254
  • “Forlorn Hope,” 306
  • “Fossil Forests,” 50
  • Foundry Methods, 531
  • Freckles, 412
  • Free Electric Current, 278
  • Freezing Points, 336
  • French Guns, 390
  • Fresco Painting, 336
  • Front Axles, Auto, 527
  • Front-drive Motor Trucks, 457
  • Fruits, 317, 331
  • Fuel Economy, 244
  • “Fundamental Development Plans,” 222
  • “Funditor,” 77
  • Fur, 356
  • Furnaces, Carbide, 460
  • Furnaces, Steel, 416, 534
  • Fuses, 405
  • Gaillard Cut, 25, 29
  • Galileo’s Swinging Chandelier, 63
  • Gamboa Dike, 37
  • Game Preserves, 270
  • Gas, Coal, 244
  • Gas Meters, 270
  • Gas, Nitrogen, 460
  • Gasoline-electric Cars, 215
  • Gas-steam Engines, 518
  • Gatling-guns, 145, 391, 470
  • Gatun Locks, 24, 31-2
  • Gear Wheels, 408
  • Gelatine Films, 152
  • Generators, 262, 465
  • German Guns, 398
  • “Get the Sack,” 169
  • Geysers, 41
  • Glacier National Park, 324
  • Glaciers, 322
  • Glass, 231, 450
  • “Glass Snakes,” 583
  • Glowworms, 161
  • Gold, 303, 317, 377, 448
  • Goldfish, 377
  • Gold Leaf, 377
  • “Goodyear Welt,” 437, 447
  • Grab-buckets, 245
  • Grade Crossing Elimination, 504
  • Grafting, Bud, 136
  • Grain Binders, 569
  • Grain Drills, 572
  • Granite, 540
  • Graphophones, 43
  • Graphotypes, 368
  • Gravity Conveyors, 240
  • “Great White Way,” 274
  • Greek-fire, 83, 377
  • Greyhound, 377
  • Grills, Electric, 209
  • Grinding Crank Shafts, 518
  • Groundnuts, 241
  • Guard Gates, 31-2
  • Gun-carriages, 141, 386
  • Gunpowder, 83
  • Guns, 75, 139, 386
  • Gyroscopes, 72
  • Halftone Engravings, 380
  • Ham, 292
  • Hammers, Steam, 533
  • Hand Bombards, 83
  • Hand Presses, Printing, 172
  • Hand-shaking, 308
  • Harvesting, 557
  • Hay Loaders, 568
  • Header Binders, 566
  • Hearth Furnaces, 416
  • Heat, 315
  • Heating Element, Electric, 208
  • Heating Pads, Electric, 211
  • Heat-treatment, 532
  • Heel-seat Rounding Machines, 443
  • Helmets, Diving, 41
  • Oxygen, 248
  • Hemp, 130
  • Henequen, 130
  • Hibernation, 241
  • Hides, 580
  • High Tension Currents, 262
  • Highlight Engravings, 382
  • Hives, Bee, 186
  • “Hob-nobbing,” 231
  • “Hobson’s Choice,” 169
  • Hogs, 293
  • “Holland” Under-sea Boats, 10
  • Honey, 183
  • Hopper Dredgers, 490
  • Hoppers, Coal, 246
  • Horizon, 121
  • Horse-drawn Fire Engines, 453[599]
  • Horseshoe Curve, 547
  • Hose, 117
  • Reels, 456
  • Trucks, 451
  • Hour Glasses, 63
  • Household Appliances, 200, 556
  • How a Newspaper is Printed, 172
  • How are Artificial Precious Stones made? 361
  • Cannon made? 386
  • Chewing Gum tablets coated? 342
  • Cocoanuts Used to Help our Warships? 450
  • Composition bowling balls made? 360
  • Diamonds cut? 584
  • “Electric Eels” Caught? 472
  • Explosions guarded against in mines? 244
  • Files made? 138
  • Fireflies used as dress ornaments? 161
  • Fireworks made? 150
  • Glaciers Formed? 324
  • Harbors Dredged Out? 491
  • Magazines made? 286
  • Oranges Packed? 331
  • Rifles made? 75
  • Sand-dunes formed? 180
  • Sausages made? 301
  • Vessels handled while going through the Panama Canal? 39
  • Watches made? 61
  • we able to hear through Speaking Tubes? 308
  • we taking care of our forests now? 267
  • How big do Redwood Trees grow? 304
  • How big is the Largest Adding Machine in the world? 354
  • How can a factory make two Automobiles a minute? 518
  • How can we hear through the Walls of a Room? 251
  • How can we send Messages through the Air? 263
  • How can we travel in trains under water? 492
  • How cold is 372° below zero? 461
  • How could a large hole in a tunnel under water be repaired? 501
  • How deep is the deepest part of the Ocean? 169
  • How did Chemical Fire Extinguishers develop? 375
  • Men learn to count? 345
  • Men learn to eat pork? 292
  • Nodding the head up and down come to mean “yes”? 149
  • the cooking of food originate? 121
  • the Dollar Sign originate? 450
  • the expression “A-1” originate? 136
  • the expression “Before you can say Jack Robinson” originate? 119
  • the expression “Forlorn Hope” originate? 306
  • the fashion of wearing Cravats commence? 270
  • the Greyhound get his name? 377
  • the ringing of the Curfew originate? 289
  • the term “Cowboys” originate? 374
  • the term “Yankee” originate? 171
  • the wearing of crowns originate? 384
  • we learn to tell time? 61
  • your State get its Name? 243
  • How do bees make honey? 183
  • big buildings get their Granite? 539
  • Calculating Machines calculate? 345
  • “Carrier Pigeons” Carry Messages? 216
  • Chimes strike the Hour? 260
  • Elevators operate? 232
  • Fishes Swim? 384
  • Moving Pictures get on the Screen? 575
  • Peanuts get in the Ground? 241
  • Shoe Machines operate? 436
  • the Indians Live now? 146
  • they make Chewing Gum? 337
  • we know that the Earth is Round? 379
  • How does a Bird Fly? 303
  • a Camera take a Picture? 162
  • a Gasoline Motor run an Electric Street Car? 214
  • a Lifting Magnet lift? 589
  • a “Master Clock” control others by electricity? 344
  • a Monorail Gyroscope Railway operate? 72
  • a Siren Fog Horn Blow? 60
  • a Talking Machine talk? 43
  • an Artesian Well keep up its supply of Water? 96
  • Electricity help the Housewife? 200
  • Telephone Development in this country compare with that abroad? 222
  • the Addressograph operate? 364
  • the Beach get its Sand? 149
  • the Gas Meter measure your Gas? 270
  • the New York Stock Exchange operate? 374
  • the Poisonous Tarantula live? 146
  • How far away is the Sky-line? 121
  • How far can a powerful Searchlight send its Rays? 229
  • How has Electricity advanced? 273
  • How has man helped nature give us Apples? 136
  • How has the Motor Truck developed? 481
  • How is a Five Dollar Gold Piece made? 303, 449
  • a Newspaper printed? 172
  • a Paper of Pins filled? 321
  • a Pool Table made? 309
  • a Razor Blade made? 491
  • a Teaspoon Silver-plated? 253
  • Die-sinking done? 285
  • Electricity brought into a House? 262
  • Food taken from the air by Electricity? 458
  • Fresco Painting done? 336
  • Gold Leaf made? 377
  • Leather tanned? 580
  • Lime Juice used in Curing Rubber? 110
  • Photo-engraving done? 380
  • Pine Tar made? 129, 134
  • Rope made? 121
  • the exact color of the Sky determined? 199
  • the Weather Man able to predict tomorrow’s Weather? 58
  • Howitzers, 388
  • How large are Molecules? 324
  • How long does it take “Hello” to reach ’Frisco from New York on the Transcontinental Line? 226
  • How many Post Offices are there in the U. S.? 218
  • How much Gold in a 14-carat Ring? 317
  • How much is a Duodecillion? 354
  • How much Salt do we each use a year? 478[600]
  • How much silver is there in “Sterling” ware? 260
  • How the Self-loading Pistol developed, 139
  • How was Vulcanizing discovered? 105, 115
  • How were Motorcycles first made? 52
  • Hudson River Tubes, 493
  • Hunger, 588
  • Hunting, 75
  • Hybridization, 317
  • Hydraulic Compressors, 401
  • Forging Presses, 418
  • Jacks, 497
  • Swinging Arms, 494
  • Hydroaeroplanes, 507
  • Hydroelectric Station, 20
  • “Hypo,” 163
  • Ice, 322
  • Illumination, Electric, 273
  • Immersion Heaters, Electric, 211
  • Imperfections in Diamonds, 586
  • Incandescent Lamps, 275
  • Indians, 146, 336
  • Inner-tubes, 117
  • Inseam Trimming Machines, 440
  • Insole Tacking Machines, 437
  • Installing Motors, Auto, 528
  • Instruments, Range-finding, 403
  • Insulated Wire, 118
  • Interior Transverse Fissures, 344
  • Iron, 413
  • Irons, Electric, 200
  • Isinglass, 216
  • Istle, 132
  • Italian Guns, 389
  • Ivory, 314
  • Jaggery, 214
  • Jasper, 49, 149
  • “Jeweler’s Gold,” 448
  • Jewels, Synthetic, 361
  • Kerosene Engines, 556
  • Tractors, 561
  • “Kick the Bucket,” 171
  • “King can do no wrong,” 466
  • Knives, Table, 260, 333
  • Krupp Guns, 398
  • Lacing Machines, 438
  • Ladder Dredges, 23, 27, 490
  • Ladders, Fire, 451
  • “Lake” Submarines, 9
  • Land-crabs, 138
  • Lard, 301
  • Latten Spoons, 254
  • League Island Navy Yard, 160
  • Leather, 580
  • Lemons, 331
  • Lifting Magnets, 589
  • Lightning Bugs, 161
  • Lights, Electric, 273
  • Lignite, 251
  • Lilies, Violet-odored, 317
  • Limit Switches, 26
  • Line Engravings, 381
  • Liquid Air Plant, 461
  • “Liquid Fire,” 377
  • Listing Machines, 350
  • Lizards, 583
  • Llama, 99
  • Loading Platforms, 531
  • Lobsters, 384
  • Lock Gate Operating Machinery, 34
  • Locomotive Building, 543
  • Locomotives, 22, 24, 541
  • Long-bow, 80
  • Loose Nailing Machines, 443
  • Low Tension Currents, 262
  • Lumbering, 306
  • “Lump in the Throat,” 308
  • “Lynching,” 355
  • Machine Guns, 142, 391, 470
  • Magazines, 286
  • Magnets, 589
  • Mailing System, Magazines, 289
  • Manila Fiber, 132
  • Manure Spreaders, 572
  • Map, Tree-planting Regions of U. S., 269
  • Marsh-gas, 244
  • Masonic Signs, 262
  • “Master Clocks,” 344
  • Matchlock, 83
  • Matrix-drying Machines, 179
  • “Measurer of Blue,” 199
  • Meat, 292, 299
  • Mechanical Starter, Auto, 529
  • Megaphones, 308
  • Merchant Submarine Liners, 14
  • Mercury, 336
  • Mer de Glace, 322
  • Meters, Gas, 270
  • Mica, 203
  • Micrometric Regulators, 67
  • Military Air Tractors, 506
  • Milk, 383
  • Mine-planting Submarines, 11
  • “Mineralite” Balls, 360
  • Mining, Coal, 244
  • Mining, Gold, 448
  • Mining, Iron, 413
  • Mint, 302
  • Mobilization, 228
  • Molds, Steel, 431, 531
  • Molecules, 324
  • Monoplanes, 509
  • Monorail Railways, 73, 520
  • Moon, 181, 356
  • Mortars, 397
  • “Mother of Pearl,” 385
  • Motion Pictures, Assembling Films, 537
  • Projecting, 575
  • Taking, 536
  • Motor Assembling, Auto, 525
  • Motorcycles, 52
  • Motor Delivery Vans, 58
  • Fire Apparatus, 451
  • “Motor-paced Tandems,” 55
  • Motors, Electric, 262
  • Gasoline-Electric, 215
  • Motor Trucks, 223, 451, 481, 557
  • Mountain Guns, 390[601]
  • Mt. Rainier, 323
  • Mt. Weather, 60
  • Moving-stairways, 238
  • Mowing Machines, 561
  • Multiple Switchboards, Telephone, 220
  • Muskets, 88
  • Muzzle-energy, Giant Guns, 398
  • Nailing Machines, 441
  • Names of States, 243
  • “Napier’s Rod,” 348
  • “Nautilus,” 10, 491
  • Naval Guns, 387
  • Navy Yards, 161
  • Neckties, 270
  • Negatives, 163
  • Nets, Fish, 328
  • Newspapers, 121, 172, 282
  • New York Sky-line, 493
  • New Zealand Flax, 132
  • Niagara Falls, 463
  • “Nine-pins,” 357
  • Nitrate of Soda, 459
  • Nitric Acid, 464
  • Nitrogen, 458
  • Nitrogen Fixation Ovens, 462
  • “No,” 149
  • Nuts, Cocoanuts, 214
  • Oats, 569
  • Observation Balloons, 515
  • Oceans, 169
  • Oil, Cod-liver, 216
  • Oil Cushion Buffers, 235
  • “Old Moon in the New Moon’s Arms,” 356
  • On-tempering, 420
  • Onyx, 149
  • Opals, 49, 149
  • Open-hearth Furnaces, 416
  • Oranges, 332
  • Ordnance, 386
  • Outsole Rapid Lockstitch Machines, 446
  • Ovens, Continuous Core, 532
  • Drying Painted Cars, 547
  • Electric, 210
  • Overhead Monorail Systems, 520
  • Oxygen Reviving Apparatus, 248
  • Oyster Dredging Apparatus, 16
  • Painting, Fresco, 336
  • Palms, 97, 214
  • Panama Canal, 17
  • Panama City, 35
  • Panama-Pacific Exposition, 230
  • Patent Leather, 583
  • Peanuts, 242
  • Pearl Fishing Equipment, 16
  • Pearls, 385
  • Imitation, 361
  • “Pebble Board,” 345
  • Pedro Miguel Locks, 22
  • Penetrating Powers of Projectiles, 398
  • Pennsylvania Station, 546
  • Percolators, Electric, 206
  • Percussion Fuses, 405
  • Periscopes, 13
  • Petrified Forests, 50
  • Phantom Circuits, 225
  • Philippine Carts, 131
  • Photo-engraving, 380
  • Photography, 162, 536
  • Pigeons, 216
  • Pig Iron, 429
  • Pigs, 293
  • Pike’s Peak, 557
  • Pine Tar, 129, 134
  • Pins, 318
  • Pirates, 150
  • Pistols, 139
  • Piston Machining, 522
  • Plants, 317
  • Plating, Electro, 257
  • “Plumcot,” 317
  • Pole Lathes, 87
  • Poles, Telephone, 222
  • Pool, 309
  • Pork, 292
  • Potato-diggers, 242
  • Power House, Niagara Falls, 465
  • Power Stations, 278, 519
  • Prairie Dogs, 42
  • Predictors, Range, 403
  • Printing, Color, 289
  • Printing-presses, 172, 282, 286
  • Projectile Forging, 419
  • Projectiles, 158, 398
  • Projecting Machines, 576
  • Proving Grounds, 399
  • Prunes, Stoneless, 317
  • Pulling-over Machines, 439
  • Pullman Cars, 544
  • Pyro, 163
  • Pyrometers, 534
  • Pyrotechnics, 150
  • Quarry, 540
  • Quenching Steel Forgings, 532
  • Radio Telephone and Telegraph, 263
  • Railroads, 344, 424, 470, 492, 541
  • Rails, Steel, 343
  • Railways, Aerial, 120
  • Monorail, 73, 520
  • Rakes, 567
  • Rammers, Gun, 407
  • Range Finders, 403
  • Ranges, Electric, 213
  • Rapid-fire Guns, 144, 391, 470
  • Rasps, 138
  • Razor Blades, 491
  • Reapers, 562
  • Reaping Hooks, 557
  • Rear Axle Assembling, Auto, 523
  • Record Making, Graphophone, 44, 47
  • Redwood, 272, 305
  • Refraction, 308
  • Refrigerating Machinery, 296
  • Return Chutes, Bowling Ball, 357
  • Revolvers, 139
  • Rifles, 75
  • Rock-boring, 97
  • Rock-crystal, 49, 149, 539
  • Rockets, 151[602]
  • Rock Salt, 474
  • Roentgen Rays, 169
  • Rolling Bridges, 466
  • Roman Candles, 156
  • Rope, 121
  • Rounding and Channeling Machines, 444
  • Rubber, 98
  • Safe Deposit Vaults, 428
  • Safety Crew, Mines, 248
  • Salt, 473
  • Salt Fish, 330
  • Sand, 149, 180, 247
  • Sand-dunes, 180
  • Sandwiches, 119
  • Sausages, 292
  • Scythes, 558
  • Searchlight Projectiles, 158
  • Searchlights, 229
  • Self-binding Harvesters, 568
  • Semi-submersible Wrecking Apparatus, 16
  • Set Pieces, Pyrotechnic, 154
  • Sewing Machines, 279
  • Shaking Hands, 308
  • Sheep-growing, 252
  • Sheffield Plate, 256
  • Shells, 409
  • “Shibboleth,” 588
  • Shoes, 436
  • Shoes, Rubber, 115
  • Shoe Treeing Machines, 446
  • Shot-guns, 92
  • “Showing the White Feather,” 231
  • Shutters, Motion Picture Machine, 578
  • “Side-cars,” 56
  • Siege-howitzers, 388
  • Sight-seeing Cars, 482
  • Silhouettes, 163
  • Silica, 149
  • Silos, 271
  • Silver Plating, 253
  • Sinking of the “Bluecher,” 479
  • Siren Horns, 60
  • Sisal, 130
  • Skins, 580
  • Skiving Machines, 437
  • Sky, 180, 199
  • Sky-line, 121
  • Sky-rockets, 150
  • Slaughter-houses, 295
  • Sling-shot, 78
  • Smiling, 412
  • Smoking, Meat, 292
  • Snakes, “Glass,” 583
  • Soap, 298
  • Sole Laying Machines, 441
  • Sole Leather, 580
  • Sole Leveling Machines, 441
  • Soroban, 345
  • Sound, 47, 251, 333, 574
  • Speaking Tubes, 308
  • Spiders, 51, 146
  • Spineless Cactus, 317
  • Spinning, Hemp, 124
  • Spiral Chutes, 240
  • Spontaneous Combustion, 42
  • Spoons, 253
  • Sprinkler Systems, 523
  • Stabilizers, 74
  • Stamping Machines, 444
  • “Standard Gold,” 448
  • “Standard Yard,” 61
  • States, 243
  • Stations, Railroad, 546
  • Statue of Liberty, 378
  • Steam Drills, 19
  • Dynamos, 275
  • Fire Engines, 452
  • Hammers, 533
  • Harvesters, 560
  • Shovels, 28, 30, 38
  • Velocipedes, 52
  • Steel, 333, 343, 413, 470, 491, 532
  • “Sterling,” 260
  • Sting, Bee, 187
  • Stitch and Upper Cleaning Machines, 445
  • Stitch Separating Machines, 443
  • Stoat, 356
  • Stock Exchanges, 373
  • Stockyards, 297
  • Stoneless Prunes, 317
  • Story in a Billiard Table, 309
  • Bowling Alley, 357
  • Box of California Oranges, 331
  • Chemical Fire Extinguisher, 375
  • Giant Cannon, 386
  • Honey-comb, 183
  • Pin, 318
  • Rifle, 75
  • Sausage, 292
  • Silver Teaspoon, 253
  • Watch, 61
  • Story in Diamond-cutting, 584
  • Elevators and Escalators, 232
  • Firecrackers and Sky-rockets, 150
  • Photo-engraving, 380
  • Story in the making of a Pair of Shoes, 436
  • making of a Magazine, 286
  • making of a Picture, 162
  • Modern Lifting Magnet, 589
  • Printing of a Newspaper, 172
  • Talking Machine, 43
  • Telephone, 217
  • Story of a Deep Sea Monster, 468
  • a Piece of Chewing Gum, 337
  • America’s First Horseless Carriage, 290
  • an Automobile Factory, 518
  • an Up-to-date Farm, 556
  • Coal Mining, 244
  • Electricity in the Home, 200
  • Leather, 580
  • Rope, 121
  • Rubber, 98
  • Salt, 473
  • Self-loading Pistols, 139
  • the Addressograph, 364
  • the Advance of Electricity, 273
  • the Big Redwood Trees, 304
  • the Building of a Silo, 271
  • the Calculating Machine, 345
  • the Growth of the Motor Truck, 481
  • the Motion Picture-Projecting Machine, 575[603]
  • the Motorcycle, 52
  • the Panama Canal, 17
  • the Submarine, 9
  • the Taking of Food from the Air, 458
  • the Tunnels Under the Hudson River, 492
  • the Wireless Telegraph, 263
  • Stoves, Electric, 208
  • Straightening Crank Shafts, 533
  • Street Cars, Gasoline, Electric, 215
  • Submarines, 9
  • Subway Construction, 283
  • Suction Dredges, 23, 27
  • Sugar Beets, 464
  • Sugar Cane, 459
  • Sugar-coating Machines, 338
  • Sulphuric Ether, 336
  • Sun, 181
  • Sun Dials, 61
  • Swine, 293
  • Swing Bridges, 466
  • Switchboards, 519
  • Synthetic Precious Stones, 361
  • Table Appliances, 205
  • Table-ware, 253, 333
  • Tack-pulling and Resetting Machines, 440
  • Taking Food from the Air, 458
  • Talking Machines, 43
  • Tanning, 580
  • Tar, Pine, 129, 134
  • Tarantulas, 146
  • Tawing, 583
  • Teeth, Chattering, 182
  • Telegraph, Wireless, 263
  • Telephone, 217
  • Telephone, Wireless, 226
  • Temperature, 315
  • Temperature Regulation, Foundry Furnaces, 534
  • Tension Spokes, 342
  • Third Rails, 283
  • Thistle, 593
  • Threshers, 560
  • Throat, 308
  • Time, 61
  • “Times Square,” 274
  • Tip-punching Machines, 439
  • Tires, Automobile, 117
  • “Tirth’s Stainless Steel,” 333
  • Toasters, Electric, 205
  • Tobacco, 458
  • Torpedo Guns, 404
  • Torpedoes, Gyroscope Equipment, 74
  • Torpedoes, Toys, 153
  • Tortoises, 171
  • Totem Poles, 149
  • “Touching Glasses,” 231
  • Towline, 126
  • Traction Elevators, 233
  • Tractors, Kerosene, 561
  • Train Chart, 283
  • Trains, 541
  • Trans-Atlantic Submarine Navigation, 14
  • Transcontinental Line, 225
  • Transmission, Electric, 261, 363
  • Transmission Covers, Auto, 526
  • Traveling Belt Conveyors, 535
  • Traveling Cranes, 536
  • Trawls, 327
  • Trees, Apple, 136
  • Buried, 247
  • Cocoanut, 214
  • Cow, 383
  • Date, 97
  • Fig, 198
  • Forestry, 267
  • Petrified, 49
  • Redwood, 304
  • Rubber, 108
  • Trench Artillery, 390
  • Tri-cars, 55
  • Trinity Church, 308
  • Trucks, Electric, 278
  • Electric Baggage, 545
  • Fire, 451
  • Motor, 223, 451, 481, 557
  • “Tune the old cow died of,” 539
  • Tunneling Shields, 494
  • Tunnels, 492, 520
  • Turbine Generators, 465
  • Turrets, 426
  • Twine Binders, 570
  • Twin Edge Setting Machines, 445
  • Type, 172
  • Under-water Boats, 9
  • Under-water Construction, 492
  • U. S. Battleship “Arizona,” also “Nevada” and “Oklahoma” Type, 266
  • U. S. Battleship “Mississippi,” 160
  • U. S. Battleship “Ohio,” 22
  • U. S. Guns, 386
  • U. S. Mint, Philadelphia, 449
  • Upper-trimming Machines, 439
  • Vacuum Cleaners, Electric, 212
  • Vacuum Dryers, 107, 112
  • Vamp Creasing Machines, 446
  • Vanadium Steel, 533
  • Vats, Tanning, 581
  • Vaults, 427
  • Ventilating Systems, 221, 247, 298, 520
  • Vessels, Fishing, 325
  • Veterinarians, Government, 298
  • Vulcanizing, 105, 115
  • Wall Street, 307
  • Washington Union Station, 546
  • Watches, 61
  • Watches, Nautical, 317
  • Water, 308, 333, 336, 411
  • Water Bottles, 118
  • Water Clocks, 63
  • “Water-finders,” 199
  • Water Fireworks, 158
  • Water-power, 461
  • Waterproofing, 106
  • Water-towers, 457
  • Weather Bureau, 58
  • Weight of Projectiles, 398
  • Wells, 96, 199[604]
  • Wells, Salt, 473
  • Welt and Turn Machines, 445
  • Welt Lasting Machines, 440
  • Wetterhorn Mountain, 120
  • What Animals are the best Architects? 51
  • What are Cyclones? 450
  • Dreams? 182
  • Dry Docks like? 159
  • “Fighting Fish”? 199
  • Petrified Forests? 49
  • White Blackberries like? 317
  • What causes a Lump in a Person’s Throat? 308
  • an Echo? 574
  • Floating Islands? 504
  • What do we mean by an “Eclipse”? 181
  • “Deviation of the Compass”? 435
  • “Hobson’s Choice”? 169
  • the “Flying Dutchman”? 180
  • “The Old Moon in the New Moon’s Arms”? 356
  • What does the biggest Fish ever caught look like? 468
  • expression “Showing the White Feather” come from? 231
  • Sheep-Grower get for the wool in a Suit of Clothes? 252
  • What Family has over 9,000,000 members? 216
  • What happens when Animals Hibernate? 241
  • What is a Deep Sea Diver’s Dress like? 411
  • Dictagraph? 262
  • Diesel Engine like? 252
  • Diving Bell? 489
  • “Divining Rod”? 199
  • Drawbridge like Today? 466
  • “Drying Machine” like? 372
  • Game Preserve? 270
  • Geyser? 40
  • “Glass Snake”? 583
  • Mexican Bull-fight like? 363
  • Silo? 271
  • What is an Aerial Railway like? 120
  • Armored Railway Car like? 370
  • “Electric Eel”? 472
  • Electro-magnet? 317
  • up-to-date Farm like? 556
  • What is Cork? 385
  • “Dry Farming”? 372
  • Forestry Work, 267
  • Rubber? 98
  • Spontaneous Combustion? 42
  • “Standard Gold”? 448
  • What is the difference between a Cruiser and a Battleship? 478
  • difference between “Alternating” and “Direct” Current? 363
  • Greatest Discovery of the last twenty-five years? 458
  • Hottest place in the U. S.? 315
  • Natural Color of Goldfish? 377
  • principle of “Foreign Exchange”? 356
  • What kind of a Crab Climbs Trees? 138
  • Dogs are Prairie Dogs? 42
  • Steel Knives do not Stain or Rust? 333
  • What makes a Chimney Smoke? 158
  • a Stick seem to Bend in Water? 308
  • our Teeth Chatter? 182
  • What Metals can be Drawn into Wire best? 450
  • What Progress has been made toward Universal Service since the opening of the Transcontinental Telephone Line? 226
  • What started the habit of Touching Glasses before drinking? 231
  • What was the “Court of Love”? 363
  • the origin of Masonic Signs? 262
  • What were “Ducking Stools”? 379
  • Hour Glasses originally used for? 63
  • the First Apartment Houses in this country? 336
  • When does a Tortoise move quickly? 171
  • When is Exchange at Par? 356
  • When was “Liquid Fire” first used in Warfare? 377
  • New York the Capital of this Country? 379
  • Where are Fireflies used for Domestic Lighting? 161
  • Milk-pails filled from Trees? 383
  • Where did the Ferris Wheel get its name? 342
  • Where do Dates come from? 97
  • Figs come from? 199
  • Pearls come from? 385
  • Where does Ermine come from? 356
  • Rubber come from? 98
  • White Blackberries, 316
  • “White Elephant,” 435
  • Who discovered Rubber? 98
  • the Slide Rule Principle? 348
  • Who invented Arms and Ammunition? 76
  • Who made the first American Automobile? 290
  • the first practical Talking Machine? 43
  • Why are Finger-prints used for Identification? 74
  • Why are they called “Newspapers”? 121
  • Why are Windows broken by Explosions? 231
  • Why do Lobsters Change Colors? 384
  • some of us have Freckles? 412
  • Why do they call it “Shibboleth”? 588
  • call them “Fiddler-crabs”? 229
  • have a Dog-watch on Shipboard? 317
  • say “The King can do no Wrong”? 466
  • Why do we always shake Hands with our Right Hand? 308
  • Why do we call a Man “A Benedict” when he Marries? 149
  • Why do we call it “Denatured Alcohol”? 478
  • “Hob-Nobbing”? 231
  • the “Adam’s Apple”? 321
  • the “Almighty Dollar”? 355
  • Why do we call them “Artesian Wells”? 96
  • “Cravats”? 270
  • “Dog-days”? 301
  • “Sandwiches”? 119
  • “X-Rays”? 169
  • Why do we call 32° above Zero “Freezing”? 336
  • Why do we Count in Tens? 345
  • Why do we Dream? 182
  • get Hungry? 588
  • say “a White Elephant”? 435
  • say “Get the Sack”? 169
  • say “Kick the Bucket”? 171
  • say “the Tune that the Old Cow Died of”? 539
  • Smile when we are Pleased? 412
  • Why does a Duck’s Back shed Water? 180
  • Why does a Lightning Bug light her Light? 161[605]
  • rope cling together? 136
  • shaking the head mean “No”? 149
  • Why doesn’t the sky ever Fall Down? 180
  • Why is it called “Battery Park”? 379
  • “Death Valley”? 315
  • “Lynching”? 355
  • Why is it necessary to keep unusually quiet when fishing? 333
  • Why is the Thistle the Emblem of Scotland? 593
  • Why is there always a soft spot in a cocoanut shell? 214
  • Why is “Wall Street” known round the World? 308
  • Why were rubber trees called “Siphonia”? 108
  • Windows, 231
  • Wire, 118, 132
  • Wire-drawing, 450
  • Wireless Telephone and Telegraph, 263
  • Wire Stitching Machines, Magazines, 287
  • Wood, Apple, 136
  • Cocoanut, 214
  • Redwood, 272, 304
  • Wool, 252
  • Woolworth Building, 234
  • Wrapper, Leaf Tobacco, 458
  • Wrecking Apparatus, 16
  • “X”-Rays, 169
  • X-Ray View of a New York Street Crossing, 503
  • X-Ray View of Underground Tunnel Construction, 502
  • “Yankee,” 171
  • Yard Measure, 61
  • “Yes,” 149
  • “Zeppelins,” 511

Acknowledgment

The Editor wishes to express his gratitude and appreciation to the following, to whom he is indebted for much valuable assistance in the form of illustrations and special information:

The Editor wants to thank the following people for their invaluable help with illustrations and special information:

  • Addressograph Company.
  • The American Kid.
  • American Chicle Company.
  • American Cyanamid Company
  • American LaFrance Fire Truck Co.
  • American Locomotive Company
  • American Magazine.
  • American Pin Company
  • ATT
  • Armour & Co.
  • Baldwin Locomotive Co.
  • Baltimore Sun.
  • Bethlehem Steel Corporation
  • James Boyd & Brother, Inc.
  • Brunswick-Balke-Collender Co.
  • Burroughs Adding Machine Company
  • California Fruit Growers Association.
  • California Redwoods Association.
  • Chesapeake and Potomac Telecom
  • Colt’s Patent Firearms Manufacturing Company
  • Columbia Graphophone Company
  • Colombian Rope Co.
  • Common Sense Gum Company
  • Consolidated Fire Works Company of America.
  • Curtis Aircraft Company
  • Curtis Publishing Company
  • Cutler-Hammer Manufacturing Company
  • Diamond Crystal Salt Company
  • G. M. Dodge Company
  • Kodak
  • Endicott, Johnson & Co.
  • The Field.
  • Fire and Water Engineering.
  • Ford Motor Company
  • Gatchel & Manning.
  • GE
  • GM Truck Company
  • Gloucester, MA Board of Trade.
  • B.F. Goodrich Company
  • Haynes Auto Company
  • Hendee Manufacturing Company
  • [608]R. Hoe & Co.
  • George A. Hormel & Co.
  • Hotpoint Electric Heating Company
  • Hudson and Manhattan Railway Co.
  • Indiana Steel Company
  • Ingersoll Rand
  • International Harvester Co.
  • International Silver Company
  • Jacobs & Davies, Engineers.
  • Lake Torpedo Boat Company
  • McClure Company
  • Merganthaler Linotype Company
  • Monroe Calc Machine Co.
  • NY Central Railroad Co.
  • Con Edison
  • Niagara Falls Power Company
  • Otis Elevators
  • Panama Canal, Washington Office.
  • Pennsylvania Railroad Company
  • The Philadelphia museums.
  • Plymouth Cordage Company
  • Nicholas Power Company
  • Pyrene Manufacturing Company
  • Railway Age Magazine.
  • Mr. George A. Reading.
  • Remington Arms and Union Metallic Cartridge Co.
  • A.I. Root Co.
  • SciAm.
  • Scribner's Magazine.
  • Standard Steel Car Co.
  • Capt. Charles H. Thompson
  • Mr. Charles L. Trout.
  • Mr. Harold Tuers.
  • United Shoe Machinery Company
  • US Rubber Co.
  • Waltham Watch Company
  • Westinghouse Electric Company
  • Winchester Repeating Arms Company
  • Wilcox & Harvey Mfg. Co.
  • Winston's Comprehensive Encyclopedia.

Transcriber’s Notes

Where photographs or drawings contain small text, moving the pointing device over the illustration will display the text within the illustration. This may not work on all devices.

Where photographs or drawings have small text, hovering your cursor over the image will show the text within the illustration. This might not work on all devices.

Some full-page illustrations have boxes around them, others do not. This has been copied from the original work.

Some full-page illustrations have boxes around them, while others do not. This has been taken from the original work.

Scale indications (“... times natural size”) are not necessarily valid for this e-text.

Scale indications (“... times natural size”) may not be accurate for this e-text.

Background colouring has been removed from some illustrations to improve visibility of the illustration.

Background coloring has been removed from some illustrations to enhance their visibility.

Where the limited size of the illustrations in this e-text makes it difficult or impossible to see all detail, a link to a larger scale image has been provided.

Where the small size of the illustrations in this e-text makes it hard or impossible to see all the details, a link to a larger image has been provided.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!